FOUR PLAYS OF 
Ὰ MENANDER 


CAPPS 

















: 





UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 





AT LOS ANGELES 









































- 


ν 





: ΕΞ I 





ee 
— 


; 
oo ae 
Sa 


4 eee 
AKG 


“ρὲ 


ΤῸ 
























































GIFT OF 


Linscott 


Le 


R. 




















Cuts dd) OLoOae SSSLNOd ALT ALE TO UNICO ἢ 





δ. 4. ray: co d 
Gres 
Fi ; 














¥ 





“e Beis ΠῚ 2 adi ᾿ 
: es So) es 








COLLEGE SERIES OF GREEK AUTHORS 
EDITED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 


JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE anp CHARLES BURTON GULICK 


FOUR PLAYS OF MENANDER 


THE HERO, EPITREPONTES, PERICEIROMENE 
AND SAMIA 


EDITED, WITH INTRODUCTIONS, EXPLANATORY NOTES 
CRITICAL APPENDIX, AND BIBLIOGRAPHY 


BY 
EDWARD CAPPS 


PROFESSOR OF CLASSICS IN PRINCETON UNIVERSITY 


GINN AND COMPANY 


BOSTON - NEW YORK .-. CHICAGO - LONDON 


ENTERED AT STATIONERS’ HALL 


COPYRIGHT, 1910, BY 
JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE anp CHARLES BURTON GULICK 


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 
910.7 


Γ τι - eee . ΄ wee . - 
δ᾽ Ὁ scene κ᾽ ahs 
ea ee . a ὦ OOS “ἃ φως τι 
. «ἰφ δον τ γα 8 Ὁ maT ὡς a re 
Picetay ceneue ἐν oe SO ἄν θὲ ἃ 
- 
4 ν᾽ ὁ Ἰοτ. ὁι ὑπ." et reee erie 
ee cee eect at . « 
. ae e ee e eer pak . 
. ee . ee pie teieinn ἢ 
. ee ¢ 
ἮΝ . . Γ e -, eae ee 
eo 4Φ6εὲε eee eer . 2 ιν = 
° eee 5 
r ° 
oe Ὡς ΟΣ 
- . . 
ὡς νῷ 


The Athenrum Press 


GINN CAND CU) MEANY ΝΑΣ 
PRIETOR Se BOS RUNGE ES AS 





Caf laH 2. 


TO 
JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE 
δῶρον ἀντὶ μεγάλου σμικρόν 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/fourplaysofmenan0Omenaiala 


PREFACE 


This edition has been prepared in the belief that American college 
students may now profitably read Menander, the unrivaled master 
of Plautus and Terence, if the text of the manuscript found at 
Aphroditopolis in 1905 is made available to them in an edition 
adapted to their needs. Menander should prove no more difficult to 
the average college freshman than Terence, and considerably less 
difficult than Plautus. To those who read Plautus and Terence in 
our colleges Menander should make a direct and forceful appeal, 
such is the lucidity and charm of his style, his fidelity to life in 
the portrayal of character, and the logical simplicity of his plots. 
Even the young student will be sensible of the difference in atmo- 
sphere between the more or less exotic Graeco-Roman comedies and 
those of the Greek poet, who depicts the men and women of his 
own day with the skill of one who knew them well and was himself 
a product of the social conditions in which they lived. 

The chief difficulties that confront the editor who sets himself 
the task of adapting the new plays to the needs of college students 
arise from the illegibility and mutilation of certain portions of the 
manuscript and the fragmentary state in which the several plays 
are preserved. In dealing with mutilated and illegible lines I have 
generally attempted to supply a text which should duly take into 
account the preserved traces of writing and the reported extent of 
the lacunae and at the same time should yield a meaning consistent 
with the immediate context, with the plot as a whole, and with 
Menander’s known stylistic and metrical usage. I am fully aware 
of the hazardous nature, in many instances, of such a procedure, 
and in particular of my own inability to achieve the ideal which 
Professor John Williams White so justly formulates in his authori- 
tative discussion of the iambic trimeter in Menander: “to restore 
the mutilated verses of the poet, whenever this can be done, in 

V 


vl PREFACE 


order that as much as possible of the original language and action 
of these charming plays may be preserved for the reader; but... 
in such a fashion as nowhere to distract attention from the poet’s 
own manner. The restorer should be content to be commonplace and 
should impose upon himself the severest limitations of form.” To 
the limitations of form which Professor White prescribes and him- 
self detines, in the article to which reference has just been made, 
the great majority of restorations admitted imto the text of this 
edition have been made to conform. In exceptional cases, however, 
a metrical structure which is supported by relatively few examples 
in the preserved lines has been adinitted on what seemed to be the 
evidence of the manuscript; but attention is usually drawn in the 
notes to such deviations from the poet’s normal usage. How far 
the restored text conforms in other respects to the above-mentioned 
criteria the judgment of others must decide. But that the labors of 
the two score of scholars who have enthusiastically given theim- 
selves to the study of these comedies have resulted in the discovery 
of the poet’s own words in many passages, and of the poet’s thought, 
if not his exact words, in many other passages, 15 shown by the 
large number of lines in which a consensus of editiorial opinion has 
already been reached. It seemed to me a better plan to present to 
the student such a restored text, with its inevitable uncertainties, 
than to permit his attention to be constantly distracted by groups 
of unorganized letters and by dots and dashes indicating lacunae. 
While freely adopting the suggestions of others wherever they 
seemed to satisfy the conditions, T have adinitted many suggestions 
of my own, in the hope that To omight here and there contribute 
something to the constitution of the text or to the understanding 
of the plays. In order that neither the young student nor the pro- 
fessional scholar may be in doubt as to whether he is reading 
Menander or the verses of a restorer, all supplements except the 
slightest and most obvious are inclosed in angles inconspicuously 
placed above the line. 

The complete loss of portions of these four plays can of course be 
fully repaired only by the fortunate discovery of these portions in 
other manuscripts. But, with the exception of the first play, of which 


PREFACE vii 


practically only the prologue is preserved, enough remains, especially 
of the Epitrepontes and Periceiromene, to enable the reader to follow 
the plots in their main outlines. By means of explanatory statements 
inserted in the text at points where considerable portions are miss- 
ing, and by full notes at these places, I have endeavored to bridge 
over the lacunae and thus in a measure to restore the continuity of 
the action. In these notes and explanations, and in the introductions 
to the several plays, where questions pertaining to the plots and 
to the rdles sustained by the characters are discussed, I have tried 
to present the available evidence on matters of plot-construction. 
The mature student will find his interest in matters of dramatic 
technique stimulated, and his insight into the processes of the dra- 
matic poet’s art quickened, by the independent study of the problems 
presented by the disiecta membra of these comedies, especially since 
the position of the manuscript fragments in relation to the whole 
play has in almost every instance been determined. 

Notwithstanding the objections raised by Professor Korte in the 
preface to his edition, I have acted on ny belief that the St. Peters- 
burg parchment fragment 2 belongs to the Epitrepontes and has its 
place at the end of the third act. As regards papyrus fragment M, 
which I formerly associated with the quotation 600 K. and assigned 
to the prologue, I have accepted as conclusive the testimony of 
M. Seymour di Ricci that it makes a juncture with fragment NT, 
and at the last moment have made the necessary change in the 
plates. The quoted fragments of the four plays have been assigned, 
where possible, to appropriate positions. The papyrus fragments LPS, 
which scholars now generally agree in attributing to a fifth comedy, 
and the small papyrus fragments? U and V, which have not yet been 
placed, are not included in this edition. 

The published facsimile of the four Leipzig pages of the Pericei- 
romene and of vy. 855 to 887 of the Oxyrhynchus fragment of the 
game play, and the photograph of the St. Petersburg fragment of 
the Epitrepontes? kindly furnished me by Director Kobeko of the 

1 First published by Korte, p. 150 of his edition. 

2-The photograph of the recto side of this fragment, on which see pp. 34 f. 
below, is reproduced in this edition. 


vill PREFACE 


Imperial Public Library of St. Petersburg, have been of assistance 
in constituting the text. I have ventured to depend upon these 
reproductions in a few instances, especially in the mutilated end of 
the second Leipzig fragment, and to depart from the readings favored 
by the scholars who have examined the manuscripts directly. The 
lack of a photographic reproduction of the Cairo manuscript is a 
serious handicap to every editor and has greatly retarded the work 
of reconstructing the text. Not only are passages. still uncertain 
which would in all probability have been finally restored, but the 
wavering and often conflicting testimony of the scholars who have 
examined the papyrus has led to an unnecessary and unfortunate 
multiplication of conjectural restorations. And yet, with our pres- 
ent Imperfect knowledge of this manuscript, many proposed restora- 
tions which will ultimately be discarded have at present a provisional 
standing in the listory of the text and will assist both in the final 
decipherment of doubtful verses and in the interpretation of hope- 
lessly defective passages. T have therefore thought it desirable to 
give in the Critical Appendix a full report of the divergent or 
mutually complementary readings of Lefebvre, Korte, and di Rice, 
and also to record rather fully the more notable restorations that 
have been suggested. It is hoped that the Critical Appendix, in 
spite of its bulk, will be found useful as a record of the scholarly 
labor which has been bestowed upom this manuscript since its dis- 
covery. Tt should be added, however, that no such record can do 
full justice to the contributions of the first editor, ΔΙ. Lefebvre. 

The commentary is designed to give the college student the help 
he needs for the understanding of the poet’s language and style and 
of the plays as a whole. At the same time many of the notes are 
consciously addressed to the maturer student and to the professional 
scholar. Tn the present stage of Menandrean studies no apology is 
needed for the resulting lack of sharp definition, — for the inter- 
mincing of notes on elementary qnatters of style and grananar with 
statements on teclmical points of meter or on Hellenistic diction, 
In the interest of the latter class of students especially T regret 
that the leisure hours of the vear which has been at my disposal 


for this task have proved too few for the preparation of the 


PREFACE ix 


- 


comprehensive general introduction which I originally planned. 
I shall hope to supply this deficiency if a second edition is ever 
ealled for. 

The manuscript of this edition was sent to the printer in the sum- 
mer of 1909. During the progress of the book through the press a 
number of important articles and books have appeared, of which I 
have been able to avail myself only to a limited extent. Legrand’s 
comprehensive and scholarly treatise on the New Comedy came into 
my hands too late to be of service. My use of Sudhaus’ edition has 
of necessity been restricted almost wholly to the Critical Appendix. 
The valuable articles on the Periceiromene by von Arnin, Robert, 
and Schmidt contributed valuable suggestions, but necessitated no 
essential modification of my own views, for after the publication 
of the Leipzig fragments I had independently reached conclusions 
regarding the plot of this play that in important details coincided 
with those advanced by one or another of these scholars. Gerhard’s 
article on the same play reaches me as I write this preface. Harmon’s 
ingenious discussion of the title and plot of the play which is cur- 
rently entitled “Samia” was courteously communicated to me by its 
author before its publication; but I have been able to make only a 
passing reference to it in the commentary on this play. The same 
statement applies also to Rees’ analysis of these plays with reference 
to the number of actors employed. After Korte’s edition had reached 
me I was able to insert in the plates his reading of I. 146, to transfer 
M to its proper place, and from E. 648 on to adopt the most. impor- 
tant contributions to the text communicated in his edition. To all 
the scholars mentioned in the Bibhography, with the exception of 
those whose contributions are marked as having been inaccessible to 
me, I desire to make a general acknowledgment of indebtedness, and 
more especially to van Leeuwen, Robert, Bodin and Mazon, Croiset, 
Korte, and Sudhaus for the help derived from their editions, and to 
these scholars and to von Arnim, Headlam, Hense, Legrand, Leo, 
Schmidt, White, and Wilamowitz for important suggestions of which 
T have made use in my commentary. 

To Messrs. Ginn and Company and their editorial staff T would 
express my thanks for the courtesy and liberality with which they 


x PREFACE 


have coéperated with me in seeing through the press an unusually 
difficult piece of work, which has made heavy demands upon their 
patience by reason of the shifting nature of the subject-matter, and 
particularly to their accomplished proofreader, Mr. Steven T. Byington, 
whose scholarly advice and criticism have been of exceptional value. 

I count it a high privilege to be permitted to dedicate this volume 
to my friend Professor John Williams White as a slight token of 
personal esteem and in recognition of the influence upon my own 
studies of his ligh ideals and distinguished achievement in scholar- 
ship. For friendly offices most generously given IT can never hope 
to make adequate acknowledgment. EDWARD CAPPS 


Princeton University, March 24, 1910 


THE HeErRo 


INTRODUCTION 


Text AND NOTES. 


THE ΕΡΙΤΕΕΡΟΝΤΕΒ 


INTRODUCTION 


ΤΈΧΤ AND NOTES. 


THE PERICEIROMENE 


INTRODUCTION . 


ΤΈΧΤ AND NOTEs. 


THE SAMIA 


INTRODUCTION 


Text AND NoTEs. 


CritTicAL APPENDIX 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


CONTENTS 


xi 


PAGE 


47 


131 
151 


223 
237 


283 


323 





EERO 





THE HERO 


The fragments of Menander’s comedies which have been found in 
Egypt in recent years have been disconnected scenes or portions of 
scenes from the inner part of plays. The Georgus alone has brought 
information regarding Menander’s methods of exposition, for which 
we have hitherto been obliged to depend upon the Latin translations 
of his plays; and of the Georgus the beginning is missing in the 
Geneva fragment. We are therefore very fortunate in having, among 
the leaves of the volume of Menander which M. Lefebvre discovered, 
two pages from the very beginning of the second of the plays which 
that volume originally contained. Pages 29 and 30 of the Cairo 
codex, contained on folio A, give a metrical hypothesis, the cast of 
characters, and the first 52 verses of a play which cannot be brought 
into relation with any of the other plays found in this papyrus. The 
title, however, is lost from the heading over the hypothesis. To 
judge by the position of the remains of this heading, —ENANAPOY, 
the title may have been a word of eight letters; or, on the supposi- 
tion that the initial letters of the title and author’s name were twice 
as large as the rest and that a space of two letters separated the 
two words, the title may have contained only four letters.! 

The coincidence that Menander wrote a play entitled “Hpws, from 
which nine quotations accompanied by the title survive, and that in 
the list of characters, after the names of the two slaves who speak 
the prologue, occurs the name Ἥρως θεός. led the first editor, M. Le- 
febvre, to make the happy suggestion that this play was the Hero. 
After the critical nature of the situation had been expounded in the 


1 A, Korte, Ber. d. stichs. Akad., 1908, p. 188. In the heading over the hypothe- 
sis to the Dionysalexandrus of Cratinus, Ox. Pap. 1V, p. 69, the initials of title 
and author are distinguished by lines drawn above and below them. There, 
however, the author’s name is below the title, not in the same line with it, and 
between the two stands the numeral 7. 

3 


4 MENANDER 


prologue, the god appeared, like "“Ayvou in the Periceiromene, and set 
in motion the train of circumstances that led to the dénouement. 

Inasmuch as no one of the nine quotations to which the title 
"Hpwre is attached! recurs in the 52 lines of the new text, the iden- 
tification cannot be regarded as certain, And yet it gains in plausi- 
bility when we observe that all the certified quotations which are 
of sutticient extent, to suggest to our minds a setting and a context 
fit admirably into the plot as we know it and can be appropriately 
assigned to one of the characters. This is especially true of fr. 211, 
“How sad it is that [alone must bear misfortunes such as pass the 
mind’s belief.” The words of the hypothesis, οὐκ εἰδυῖα δ᾽ ἡ μήτηρ 
ἄγαν ἐδυσχέραινε. read almost as a commentary on this passage, 

The small fragment O, which contains four and tive broken verses 
on recto and verso respectively, has been thought by Lefebvre and 
subsequent editors to be a portion of the Hero. Tt contais not only 
the name of Myrrhina (who might be the matron of the Periceiro- 
mene) and a reference to the events of “eighteen years ago” which 
play so important a part in the complication of the plot, but also 
an allusion to “the shepherd.” The triple coincidence makes the 
identification practically certain, 

The "Hpws beos who gave the play its title was in all probability, 
as Legrand and others have suggested, the tutelary gemlus of the 
household. The best arguinent in favor of this view is furnished by 
Menander himself. In the Aulilaria of Plantus, now generally re- 
garded as Menandrian,? the tigure of © Lar familiaris’ comes from 
the house of Kucho and speaks the prologue. Hane domuim, he 
says, lam multos anos est quom possideo et colo. The occa- 
sion of dais appearance at this time is to bring succor to the girl 
Phaedra. She is im great trouble. Violated by a young man of the 
neiehborhood who loves ler, she ais bitterly poor, Her lover, whom 
she does not know, cannot marry her without a dowry. The time of 
her confinement approaches. At this juneture the household god 


Intervenes ; he eanses Eueho to find the treasure, and thus sets m 


τ (γε quotation dnaccompanied by title or author (adesp, 444 62), one word 
known to have been used by Menander (ΤΌΤ K.), and one eloss that is probably 
derived trom Menander (see ve 17} recur in the text, 

7 Sce especially Gettken, Studien zu Menauler, prog. Hamburg, 1808, pp. 1 ff. 


HERO 5 


motion the train of events which will bring happiness to his charge. 
We are again reminded of the role of “Ayvou, and of that of Auxilium 
in the Cistellaria of Plautus. But Lar is no such abstraction ; he is 
a real personality, one whose presence and intervention required no 
justification. We may safely conclude, then, that the intervening 
god in this play is the household god, the soul of a departed ances- 
tor, whose abode is at the hearth, who watches with loving care 
over the family,! and who has a deep and abiding interest in the wel- 
fare of Myrrhina and her daughter. 

The scene of the Hero is given in ν. 22—the Attic deme of Ptelea, 
“Elmwood,” of the tribe Oeneis. This was one of the most insignifi- 
cant of the demes of Attica. In literature it is mentioned only by 
geographers and grammarians. No Pteleasian is known to fame, 
and from the inscriptions Kirchner has gleaned the names of only 
twenty residents, all ordinary persons. The site of Ptelea is unde- 
termined, but it probably? was situated on the eastern slope of 
Mt. Aegaleus, the range west of the city, or on the southern end of 
the Parnes range. This play shows clearly that it was, in fact, one 
of the upland counties. Its citizens were a pastoral folk; Gorgias 
tends the flocks of Laches, and his foster-father was a shepherd be- 
fore him. Elm trees and wild pears grew there, and thither came 
hunters from the city (fr. Sabb.). In the unconventional society of 
such a community social distinctions would not be very closely 
drawn. We can understand how Laches might give his consent to 
the marriage of Davus the slave to the free-born girl Plangon. 

The list of characters, in which the names are arranged in the 
usual way, according to the order in which the personae first enter 


1 In the Synephebi Menander referred to the heroes as malignant spirits, more 
ready to harm than to help ; and that was the usual conception of the heroes in 
Attica. Zenobius 5, 60, who tells us this (v. also under Men, 459 K.), quotes a pro- 
verbial expression οὐκ εἰμὶ τούτων τῶν ἡρώων, adding αὕτη (i.e. ἡ παροιμία) τέτακται ἐπὶ 
τῶν βουλομένων εὖ ποιεῖν. It is noticeable that the proverb makes part of a trime- 
ter and that the first person is used. The speaker is himself a hero and of the 
benevolent kind. ‘The verse comes from such a speech as that of Larin the Aulula- 
ria, Who says ego Lar sum familiaris ex hae familia, and either from the 
original of the Aulularia or from the Hero. See p. 20 infra. In rendering” Upws 
by Lar it was not necessary for the Roman poet to transfer the explanation, for 
Lar was always a kindly spirit. 2See Léper, Ath. Mitt. XVII, p. 408. 


6 MENANDER 


the scene, reinforced by the hypothesis and the extant portions of 
the text, greatly assists our understanding of the plot. These are 
all typical stage names, familiar in the New Comedy. Laches and 
Myrrhina are the husband and wife of the play, Gorgias and Plan- 
gon the brother and sister. Pheidias is a young man’s name; he 
must be the rich neighbor’s son. His father has no part in the play. 
Sophrona is the name of the old nurse here as in the Epitrepontes, 
Eunuchus, and Phormio; she is the maid and confidante of Myr- 
rhina. Geta, Davus, and Sangarius are all slave names. Davus is 
the slave of Laches. Geta, who shows himself quite unfamiliar with 
the affairs of the household of Laches and of the relations of Plan- 
gon with Pheidias, cannot be regarded as the slave of the latter. 
It is probable that he is not attached to either of the two families 
with which the plot is concerned, but is brought in as a πρόσωπον 
προτατικόν, as is Davus in the Phormio, In this case Sangarius is the 
slave of Pheidias. This identification of the characters satisfies the 
conditions of the play, so far as we can make them out, and will be 
assumed to be correct. The absence of Plangon from the list of char- 
acters shows that she does not appear at all as a speaking person. 

It is noteworthy that no Chorus is mentioned in the lst. Possi- 
bly the entertainment provided between the acts was of too infor- 
inal a character to be dignified by the name “chorus.” The mention, 
in one of the fragments, of the visit of a group of hunters from the 
city suggests that these visitors may have performed this function, 

The story that underlies the plot is the familiar ἔρως καὶ διαφθορὰ 
παρθένου. Since we know the names of the actors in the story and 
their relations to each other, and are supphed with the leading 
motive — Davus’ love for Plangon -— we are able, from our general 
knowledge of the social conditions which Menander depicted and 
his manner of creating the complication and of solving it by the 
device of an ἀν γνώρισις, to reconstruct the story in outline. 

Some eighteen years before the action begins (fr. O), Myrrhina, a 
young girl of good family, was wronged by a young man unknown 
to her. The occasion was doubtless some festival! that) Myrrhina 

ΤῸ was on such occasions that a youns man could most naturally have a 
private meeting with a well-bred Athenian girl Tt was ata festival of Artemis 
that Pamphile met Charisins in the Epitrepontes and that Simactha first saw 


HERO T 


attended, at which she became separated from Sophrona her attend- 
ant. In due time she became the mother of twins, a boy and a girl. 
Her nurse, who alone shared the secret, exposed! the children, plac- 
ing with them some tokens, among which was probably a ring or some 
other object ? which had belonged to Myrrhina’s lover. The chil- 
dren fall into the hands of a freedman of Laches, an old shepherd 
Tibeius. He has no knowledge of their parentage, but carefully 
preserves the tokens and rears Gorgias and Plangon as his own 
children. Meanwhile Myrrhina marries Laches, to whom she bears 
no children. Years pass, a famine afflicts the land, and Tibeius, 
in dire straits, has to borrow money from Laches in order to keep 
the children alive. When he dies, his foster-son, Gorgias, assumes 
responsibility for the debt and goes with his sister to the home of 
Laches to work it off. He serves as a shepherd, Plangon as a 
housemaid. At this time Gorgias and Plangon were about sixteen 
years old. 

So it happens that the two children are servants in the household 
of their own mother, though nobody suspects the fact. They have 
been there about a year when the action of the play begins. In this 
interval a young neighbor of good family, Pheidias by name, sees 
Plangon and falls in love with her. Her lowly origin and her pov- 
erty forbade all thought of marriage between them; a dowerless girl, 
even if her station in life made her an equal, was not regarded 
by well-to-do parents as an eligible match for their son.* The 


Delphis in Theocr. 2. 65, at a vigil of Ceres that Phaedra met Lyconides 
in Plaut. Aul. 36, in pervigilio that the girl in Men. Plocium (Aul. Gel. 
2.23.15) was wronged, at the Dionysia that Alcesimarchus first saw Silenium 
in Plaut. Cist. 89 and the girl her lover in the unknown play Men. fr. 558 K. 
A festival is probable in Ter, Adelphi also, but is not expressly mentioned. 

1 This is probable, in spite of ἔδωκε in the hypothesis ; for Tibeius has no 
knowledge of the children’s origin, nor Myrrhina and Sophrona of their fate. 

2 So in the Epitrepontes and in Ter. Adelphi 346. It is the nurse Sophrona 
who probably exposed the child in the Epitrepontes, as it was a confidential 
slave in Plaut. Cist. 167,.an old Corinthian woman in Ter. Heaut. 629. 

8 Plangon in the Samia and Phaedra in Plaut. Aulularia, though well-born, 
are dowerless, and Phaedra’s father finds it hard to credit the good faith of 
an offer of marriage with waiver of a marriage portion; ef. Aul. IT. ii. So in 
Plaut. Trin. 690 Lesbonicus resents the proposal of Lysiteles to marry his sister 
without a dowry, as equivalent to a proposal of concubinage. 


ὃ MENANDER 


consequence is that Pheidias and Plangon are secretly united.’ The 
time of her confinement is at hand. 

At this point the action begins. Davus, the slave of Laches, con- 
tides to Geta the faet that he is in love with Plangon and that he 
has gained his master’s consent to marry her, on condition of the 
approval of Gorgias. But for the past three months Laches has been 
absent abroad and the arrangement has not been carried out. The 
acute distress which Davus displays? in the opening scene is not 
due simply to disappointment of hope deferred; it reveals to us 
rather the fact that a crisis has arisen as regards Plangon. Davus 
has in some way surprised the secret of her impending trouble, 
and vehemently hopes for Laches’ speedy return, that the marriage 
may be consummated at once and Plangon saved from disgrace. 
For he has resolved to take upon himself the responsibility for her 
condition. 

How much of this is brought out in the prologue we can only 
surmise. But the speech of Ἥρως θεός. which followed the conversa- 
tion between Davus and Geta, must have apprised the spectators of 
all the preliminary facts. The household god no doubt desires that 
the grave confusion which exists in the family of Laches, where due 
honors are paid to him,* shall at length be brought to an end. 
Plangon’s child is to be born this day,? and to-day Laches is to 


1 Tt was not, apparently, at the hands of an unknown person that Plangon 
had suffered violence, Pheidias had seen Plangon and loved her. The serving 
maid was not protected as a daughter would have been, 

2 Cf. the distress of the slave in’ Men. Plocium when he discovers that his 
master’s daughter has borne a child, as related by Aul. Gel. 2. 23.15: timet, 
irascitur, suspiciatur, miseretur, dolet. The emotions of Davus are 
different because he is in love. 

3 Possibly by seeing a midwife enter the house, as in Ter. And. TET. vil (the 
same motive in both the Perinthia and the Andria of Menander), or possibly 
through the gossip of a fellow slave. 

1 The intervention of Lar in Plaut. Aulularia is due to the piety of Phaedra : 
ea mihi cottidie aut ture aut vino aut aliqui semper supplicat: 
CU δ ἢ} COI Oaks τ πο, ΠΤ sy oracle tes 2 ite = Nib iseqorobnululvg hunts 
Myrrhina’s sake that he intervenes in the Hero, 

ὉΤῈ is possible. of course, that the child was born before the action beeins 
or that it was not born at all within the period covered by the action. But the 
view here presented seems preferable. 


HERO 9 


return from his journey. These two events will restore happiness 
to Myrrhina and their proper station in life to her children. 

From this point we cannot follow the plot in detail. But the 
main outline of events is clear. A child is born to Plangon; Davus 
takes the blame upon himself and proposes to marry her. But this 
solution is rendered impossible, probably by Myrrhina’s finding in 
Plangon’s possession the tokens with which her own child had been 
exposed. With the help of Sophrona and a little inquiry she learns 
that Gorgias and Plangon are her own long-lost children. Her joy 
at this discovery, however, is mingled with bitterness and sorrow, 
for Plangon’s disgrace becomes her own; and, besides, while it is 
more important than ever that the secret of her girlhood shall be 
kept from her husband, it will now be almost impossible to accom- 
plish this. She must bear her grief alone (fr. 210). At this juncture 
Laches returns and learns what has happened in his absence. The 
fact 15 soon disclosed that the tokens by which Myrrhina had discoy- 
ered her children also prove him to be their father. And finally 
Pheidias, Plangon’s secret lover, when he finds that the obstacle to 
their marriage is removed, gladly takes her to wife. As for Davus, 
he probably receives his liberty as the reward of his unselfish love 
and high-minded devotion. 

The plot seems to require the presence of only two houses in the 
scene, as in the other three plays of the Cairo manuscript. One of 
these is the house of Laches, the second is that of his young neighbor 
Pheidias. 


ἭΡΩΣ MENANAPOT 


ΚΘ 


[41] 


“Appev τε θῆλύ θ᾽ ἅμα τεκοῦσα παρθένος" 


” > ΄ , 42) 7 
ἔδωκεν ἐπιτρόπῳ τρέφειν εἶθ᾽ ὕστερον 


ἔγημε τὸν φθείραντα. ταῦτα δ᾽ ὑπέθετο 


«ς , Ν > Ἂν » aA , , 
oO τρέφων προς GUTOV αγνοων. θεράπων δέ τις 


esac 


[5] 


pee] - , 
Ὁ EVETEDEV ELS ἐρωτὰ TIS νεάνιδος, 


The page number κθ΄ shows that one 
play of 28 pages (ca. 980 lines) pre- 
ceded the Hero in the codex. 

The language of this metrical hy- 
pothesis betrays its late origin. The 
metrical hypotheses of Sulpicius Apol- 
linaris to the plays of Terence also con- 
sist of twelve verses. Note that the 
past tenses are here used in the narra- 
tive, as in the metrical hypotheses to 
Soph. Oedipus Coloneus and Philocte- 
tes ; those prefixed to the plays of Aris- 
tophanes, Plautus, and Terence employ 
the present. See Leo, Plaut. Forsch. 
pp. 20 ff. 

1. παρθένος : Myrrhina; her chil- 
dren are Gorgias and Plangon. — The 
fifth foot is unmetrical in the MS. (the 
line ends θῆλύ θ᾽ dua), and may have 
been so originally. 

2. ἔδωκεν : in such circumstances 
the mothers of comedy usually expose 
their children, and Myrrhina probably 
did this, through Sophrona. —- ἐπιτρό- 
mw: overseer or steward, 'Tibeius, who 
passed as father of the twins, cf. v.21. 

3. ἔγημε: for ἐγήματο τῷ φθείραντι. 
The act. issometimes used of the woman 


11 


in jest or in irony, to indicate the wife’s 
superiority in wealth or rank to her 
husband, as Eur. Med. 606 μῶν γαμοῦσα 
καὶ προδοῦσά oe; fr. trag. adesp. 194N. 
ἐγάμησεν Ἑλένη τὸν θεοῖς στυγούμενον. So 
the mid. is used of the husband, Anacr. 
fr. 82 Cr. κεῖνος οὐκ ἔγημεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγήματο. 
Cf. Martial, 8. 12. 2, speaking of ἃ rich 
woman, uxori nubere nolo meae, 
Twill not be my wife’s wife.— τὸν φθεί- 
ραντα: Laches.—ratra: 
ὑπέθετο: for ὑπέθηκε, gave as a pledge 
for money borrowed, cf. vv. 28 ff. So in 
Ter. Heaut. 603 we are told of An- 
tiphila: relieta huic arrabonist 
pro illo argento. The act. only is 
used in Attic Greek, the mid. mean- 


; 
τὰ τέκνα. --- 


ing to take as security, Phrynichus 
ed. Lob., p. 467. The statement of the 
hypothesis is not aecurate ; bondage 
for debt was abolished at Athens by 
Solon. 

4. ὁ τρέφων : inaccurate ; it was the 
son who undertook with his sister to 
work off the debt, ef. vv. 28 ff. — ἀγνο- 
ὧν: i.e. that Laches was the father of 
the twins. — θεράπων : Davus. 

5. νεάνιδος : Plangon. 


12 MENANAPOY 


ὁμόδουλον εἶναι διαλαβών. γείτων δέ τις 


προηδικήκει μετὰ Bias τὴν μείρακα. 


Ν ΜΠ ποτῷ OE: x ε ΄ , 
τὴν αἰτίαν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ὁ θεράπων στρέφειν 


ἐβούλετ᾽ - οὐκ εἰδυῖα δ᾽ ἡ μήτηρ ἄγαν 


[10] 


10 ἐδυσχέραινε. καταφανῶν δὲ γενομένων, 


Ls x , ἐς - , 
εὗρεν μὲν ὁ γέρων τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ γνωρίσας, 


ὁ δ᾽ ἠδικηκὼς ἔλαβε τὴν κόρην θέλων. 


TA TOY APAMATOS TPOSOQOIIA 


Téras 

15 Aaos 
“Hpws Geos 
Muppivn 
Φειδίας 


6. διαλαβών: late for ὑπολαβών in 
the sense required here, supposing. 
But the statement is inexact. — yelrev : 
Pheidias. 

9. οὐκ elSvia: 1.6. that Davus was 
innocent of wrong toward Plangon. 

10. ἐδυσχέραινε: cf. fr. 211. 

11. γνωρίσας : hints at the usual 
device Of γνωρίσματα, tokens attached 


Σωφρόνη 
Σαγγάριος 
Γοργίας 
Λάχης 


to the person of an exposed child. See 
above, p. 7. 

12. Similarly Moschion marries the 
daughter of Niceratus, also named 
Plangon, in the Samia, 

13. τὰ πρόσωπα: arranged in this 
list, as is usual in the MSS. of Greek 
plays, in the order in which they first 
appear upon the scene. 


HPO} MENANAPOT 


Scene: the Attic deme of Ptelea, before the houses of Laches and Pheidias 


ACT 


Sc. 1. Geta, Davus 


I— PROLOGUE 


TETAZ 


an A , 
Κακόν τι. Aaé, μοι δοκεῖς πεποηκέναι 


[20] 


, 5 a > A 
παμμέγεθες. εἶτα προσδοκῶν ἀγωνιᾶν 


a rn "» > 
μυλῶνα σαυτῷ καὶ πέδας. εὔδηλος εἶ. 


’, Ν Ν ’ Ν ἐν 4 / 
τί yap σὺ κόπτεις THY κεφαλὴν OVTW πυκνά; 


y A rd , > , iv Ἃ 
5 τὶ TAS τριχας τίλλεις ἐπιστας: TL στένεις; 


1. Geta and Davus are the names 
given to the two slaves in the first 
scene of Ter. Phormio. Davus is there 
the πρόσωπον προτατικόν. --- Geta seizes 
upon the most obvious explanation of 
Davus’s trouble — the expectation of 
punishment for wrong-doing. The ac- 
cusation serves to elicit a denial of the 
charge and thus to bring out an avowal 
of the true situation. — πεποηκέναι : 
in Menander’s time o was regularly 
written for o in this verb before e- 
sounds, but in the imperial period the 
diphthongal spelling was revived. A 
scribe, therefore, is responsible for πε- 
ποίηκεν in S. 460, where a short syllable 
is required. In H.34 ποιήσας and 8. 355 
ποιεῖ, οἱ is required. Sometimes o is 
found before o-sounds, contrary to the 
usage of the inscriptions of Menander’s 
time, e.g. E. 302, P. 54, 187, where a 
long syllable would be admissible ; but 


13 


in P. 870 ποῶν the meter demands a 
short. See Kretschmar, De Men. reli- 
quiis, p. 26. 

2. παμμέγεθες: -μεγας and -μεγέθης ex- 
isted side by side in composition with 
mav-, ev-, ἰσο-. The longer form, which 
is also the stronger, suits the tone 
of comic exaggeration. — προσδοκῶν : 
often of dread, as Soph. Phil. 784 καί 
τι προσδοκῶ νέον. I look for worse to 
come (Jebb), Alexis 288 K. προσδοκᾶν 
ἀεί τι δεῖ, cf. Ter, Phor. 195 magnum 

.. exspecto malum. 
3. Verbera, compedes, molae 
haec pretia sunt ignaviae, 
as the slave Messenio says in Plaut. 
Men. 974. Cf. P. 157. — αὔδηλος εἶ: sce. 
πεποηκὼς καὶ προσδοκῶν. etc, Ct. P. 286. 

4f. Similar signs of grief in E. 271, 
O74, O78. 

5. 


in his walk.— Menander does not avoid 


émotas: Davus frequently halts 


14 MENANAPOY 


AAOZ 


¥ 
οιμοι. 


ΓΕΤΑΣ 


low 9, > ἡ \ , 
TOLOUTOV ἐστιν, ὦ TOVYPE συ. [25] 


εἶτ᾽ οὐκ ἐχρῆν. κερμάτιον εἰ συνηγμένον 


νι αι Ἂν “ , 
σοι τυγχάνει TL, TOUT ἐμοὶ δοῦναι TEWS, 


“μὴ πλείον᾽ EX ἐπὶ σεαυτὸν πράγματα; 
μὴ πλείον᾽ EAKNS αυ ράγμ : 


Leys) Ν ΄ » > ΄ὔ κι ΄ f2 ΄ὕ 
10 OU φὴς συ iy. 3; €LKOTWS συνάχθομαί AS σοι. 


᾿ἀεὶ γὰρ εἶ φθονερός. 


AAOX 


σὺ pa Av’ οὐκ οἶδ᾽ 6 τι [30] 


ληρεῖς: κακῷ yap ἐμπέπλεγμαι πραγματι. 


r , la , ὝΧ > Te 
λύπῃ τε Savy πάνυ διέφθαρμαι. Léra. 


PETA 


Ἐ , 3 ΕῚ δ τῇ 
KQAKLOT ἀπόλοιο --- 


ISAO 


μὴ καταρῶ. πρὸς ‘tov θεῶν. 


15: Βέλτιστ, ἐρων»τῖς 


PENAS 


ai ἣν , ΕῚ ἴω 
TL OU λέγεις: ἐρᾳς: 


the middle caesura, with or without a 
pause in the sense; @.¢., In this play, 
δὴν add elle OOAN ΝΟ τ malin ae 
Do ἡ tore othaccilye Bee eee 
bisected trimeter is not 
Goodell, ibid. TP, p. 145 ff. 

6. Geta interprets the groan as con- 


UNCOMMON, 


firming his suspieion, 


7. κερμάτιον : the slave's meager 
savings, Which Geta slyly hints would 
best be left with him for sate keeping ; 
Chelier Bhool des al ie ese l= 
evom pauxillulum muimimorum 
SEO TN Le (UCT MTL TTD VAN 
Sule defru- 


de demenso stvow 


dans cenium compersit inmiser, 


—Adactyl that overlaps the following 


“So wapmeyedes tv. 2. 


foot (κερμάτιον) is almost always in 
Menander ‘contained: ina quadrisyl- 
labic word of whieh the accent corre- 
sponds with the ietus,” White, p. 148. 
But see on ve 19, 
9. Cf. the proverb κακὰ ἕλκων ἐφ᾽ ab- 
τὸν wate καικίας (N.W. wind) νέφη, fr. 
trag, adesp. TON. 
involved in, cf. 


πράγμα- 


12. ἐμπέπλεγμαι : 
Plat. Mor, 787 ¥ woXtrelav. . . 
σιν ἐμπεπλεγμένην. 

13. Cf. Bur Orest. 308 Χύπη padre 
στά γ᾽ ἢ διαφθείρουσά με. 

τ a iistalie lene: 
Kitt ἀπόλοιο, παιδάριον. 
Nett 
often omitted, Is required with θεῶν. 


1288 κά- 
καταρῶ: ap 
henee the 


AVIS Paes ati article, 


ΗΡΩΣ 15 


AAOZ 


9. A 
ερω. 


TETAZ 


LZ , A ta ’, ε Lf 
πλέον δυοῖν gor χοινίκων ὁ δεσπότης 
παρέχει. πονηρόν, Aa’. ὑπερδειπνεῖς ἴσως. 


Ad. 444Κ. [36] 


[42] 


ΔΑΟΣ 


id Ὗ Zz , ε an 
πέπονθα TYHV ψυχὴν τι παιδίσκην Op@v 


, »” 3 , ΗΝ , 
συντρεφομένην, ακακον, κατ ἐμαυτόν, ὦ I'era. 


TETAZ 


20 δούλη ᾿στίν; 


ΔΑΟΣ 


Y an 
οὕτως ἡσυχῇ: τρόπον τινά. 


ποιμὴν γὰρ nv Τίβειος οἰκῶν ἐνθαδὶ 


161. A choenix of wheat (about a 
quart) was a day’s portion for a man, 
Diog. Laert. 8.18 ἡ yap χοῖνιξ ἡμερησία 
τροφή. Herod. 7. 187 makes this ration 
the basis of his estimate of the supplies 
needed for the army of Xerxes. Geta 
again in v. 58 refers to this brutal 
theory, that the tender passion is the 
result of high living; cf. also fr. trag. 
adesp. 180 Ν, πλήρει yap ὄγκῳ γαστρὸς 
αὔξεται Κύπρις, fr. com. adesp. 238 K. 
ἔρωτα λύει λιμός, ἂν δὲ μή, βρόχος, Eur. 
fr. 895 N., and Ter. Eun. 732 sine 
Cerere et Libero friget Venus. 

17. ὑπερδειπνεῖς : = ὑπερτροφᾷς, He- 
sychius, probably with reference to 
this passage. 

18, πέπονθά. . . τι: my heart is 
dead within me. So often without a 
qualifying adj., ef. Plut. Mor. 11014 
διὸ πάσχειν τι βέλτιον εἶναι καὶ λυπεῖσθαι. 
--- παιδίσκη: may be used of a girl of 
free birth, as Men. 102K. Hence Ge- 
ta’s question in v. 20. 

19. κατ᾽ ἐμαντόν : in my station, i.e. 
ὡσεὶ δούλην. Const. as pred, with σὺν- 


[40] 


τρεφομένην .---- The dacty] in the first foot 
forms an exception to the rule, see 
note on v. 7; cf. also E, 284, 255 (both 
proper names), 235, S. 440. 

20. οὕτως: of qualified assent, like 
οὕτως πως, Sic fere, in this sense only, 
followed by the qualifying adverbs 
ἡσυχῇ slightly, τρόπον τινά in a fashion, 
both in apposition to οὕτως. Ye-es, in 
this way, —aa little bit, after a fashion. 
Cf. Ter. Phor. 145, quid rei gerit? 
—sic tenuiter. For ἡσυχῇ in this 
meaning cf. the reference to Alexander 
in Plut. Vit. Alex. 4 τοῦ αὐχένος els εὐώ- 
γυμον ἡσυχῇ κεκλιμένου. Davus goes on 
to explain that, though she is not ex- 
actly aslave, she is in a slave’s position. 

21. Τίβειος : an ethnic slave name, 
Steph. Byz. 5. Τίβειον: τόπος Φρυγίας 
... ἐκ τούτου καὶ Τιβείους τοὺς δούλους κα- 
dodo. (Kock, C.A.F., I, p. 705), schol. 
Lue. Dial. meretr. 9. 1. Menander uses 
the name elsewhere, e.g. in the Perin- 
thia, Ox. Pap. VI, no. 855, and in frr. 
231, 1075, and possibly 380 (ἀλλ οὐ 
Τιβείου Headlam). — οἰκῶν : the legal 


10: 


ΜΕΝΑΝΔΡΟΥ 


»” 
Πτελέασι, γεγονὼς οἰκέτης νέος wy ποτε. 


3 , , 4 “A , 
ἐγένετο τούτῳ δίδυμα ταῦτα παιδία, 


ε » το Ὧν , δ Σ᾽ ΡΝ 
ὡς ἔλεγεν αὐτὸς. ἡ τε ΠΙλαγγών. ἧς ἐρῶ, -- 


ΓΕΤΑΣ 


»“ ’ὔὕ 
25 νυν μανθάνω. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


Ἂν ’ὔ , > ε (4 
τὸ μειράκιόν θ᾽, ὁ Γοργίας. 


TETAS 
ὁ τῶν προβατίων ἐνθάδ᾽ ἐπιμελούμενος [40] 
νυνὶ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν; 

ΔΛΟΣ 


ie Δ ἊΝ ΄, 
OUTOS. WV non γέρων 


ὁ Τίβειος ὁ πατὴρ εἰς τροφήν γε λαμβάνει 


ἐν τ “ id ey Ν ’, 
τούτοις παρὰ τοῦ "Lov δεσπότου μνᾶν, καὶ πάλιν — 


χ τὴ > a 21503 , 
30 λιμὸς yap nv — μνᾶν, eit ἀπέσκλη. 


TETAS 


τὴν τρίτην 


« > ’ ΄ \ « , ε , τὶ 
ὡς οὐκ ἀπεδίδου τυχὸν O δεσπότης O OOS: [50] 


status of the emancipated slave was 
similar to thatof the metic. The phrase 
TiBecos ἐν Πτελέασι οἰκῶν would be the 
recular formula for designating a met- 
ies residence. The citizen would be 
simply Πτελεάσιος. The κύριος of a liber- 
tus was his former master, in whose 
service he often remained, as did the 
old nurse in the Samia, ef. v.22, and Ti- 
beius here, 

22. Pteleala deme of the tribe Oe- 
This 


passage fixes the scene of the play, ef. 


neis. On its site see above, Ve ake 
also fr. Sabb... below, Pp. Dad 

24. Pilangon is a good Attie name 
for a free-born woman, v. 
Prosop. Natit’: 


Kirchner, 
It reeves in S. 458, 


27. παρ᾽ ἡμῖν: i.e. at Ptelea, equiva- 
lent to ἐνθαδί in v. 21. 

28. λαμβάνει: i.e. δανείζεται. 

30. ἀπέσκλη : rare, for ἀπεξηράνθη, 
schol, Aristoph. Vesp. 160; cf. Lue. 
Dial. mort. 27.7 λιμῷ ὁ ἄθλιος ἐλέγετο 
- τὴν τρίτην. etc.: Geta 
continues to play the role of wag. 


ἀπεσκληκέναι. 


31. οὐκ ἀπεδίδου : would not give, 
the negative impf. of ‘resistance to 
pressiire,” Gildersleeve, Syn. 217, — 
τυχόν: ace. abs., often used in post- 
Classical Greek as ady., in place of the 
earlier tows, τάχα, or τάχ ἄν. First 
found in Xen, Anab. 6. 1. 20. 

32. προσλαβών: λαβὼν (from La- 


ches) πρὸς ταῖς δύο μναῖς. 


HPQS 11 


ΔΑΟΣ 


» "4 > > , Ἁ 
ἴσως. τελευτήσαντα δ᾽ αὐτόν, προσλαβὼν 


ε ’ Ψ' Ἂν Ἂ 
o Γοργίας τι κερμάτιον. ἔθαψε καὶ 


τὰ νόμιμα ποιήσας πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἐνθάδε 


35 ἐλθὼν ἀγαγών τε τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἐπιμένει 


ss S: > Ve 
TO χρέος ἀπεργαζόμενος. 


TETAS 


/ 


ἡ Πλαγγὼν δὲ τί; [55] 


AAOZ 


μετὰ τῆς ἐμῆς κεκτημένης ἐργάζεται 


» A 
ερια διακονεῖ Te. 


TETAS 


, 
παιδίσκη ; 


AAO 
πάνυ --- 
Γέτα, καταγελᾷς; 
TETAS 


μὰ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω. 


34. τὰ νόμιμα : including the fu- 
ΠΟΙᾺ] feast, sacrifice, tombstone, ete. 
See I. von Miiller, Gr. Privatalt., p. 
219 ff. 

35. The dactyl in the fifth foot is 
frequently so formed in Menander that 
the verse ends in a tetrasyllabie word 
NEN NF sas 

36. ἀπεργαζόμενος : ἀποδιδοὺς ἐξ ὧν 
εἰργάσατο, Suid. and Hesych., citing 
Isacus. L. and 8. fail to record this 
meaning. The noun is used in the law 
of Andania in prescribing the punish- 
ment of slaves fined for theft, Ditt. 
Syl.2653. 77 ἂν δὲ μὴ ἐκτίνει παραχρῆμα, 
παραδότω ὁ κύριος τὸν οἰκέταν τῷ ἀδικη- 
θέντι εἰς ἀπεργασίαν, i.e. to work off the 
fine. 


37. κεκτημένης : cf. schol. Luc. 
Dial. meretr. 9.1 ὡς ἐπίπαν᾽ Ἀττικοὶ ἐπὶ 
τῶν δεσποινῶν οὕτω κέχρηνται τῷ 'κεκτη- 
μένη. σπανιώτερον δὲ τῷ ἱ'δέσποινα.᾽ The 
participial foree is no longer felt. The 
usage goes back to the fifth century, 
but is especially common in the New 
Comedy. δέσποινα is used in HH. fr. 209 
and in E., fr. M, p. 94. 

38. παιδίσκη : 50. τις. Spoken ina 
tone of mock sympathy, ἃ girl does such 
things ? 

39. Geta’s amusement is caused by 
the tragic seriousness with which Davus 
recites the trivial hardships of Plangon, 
Davus has not yet disclosed the true 
reason for his present distress; see 


p. 8, above. 


18 MENANAPOY 


AAOZ 


> , ἈΝ ’ὕ 
40 ἐλευθέριος Kal κοσμία. 


ἂν 
πάνυ, Τέτα, 


ΓΕΤΑΣ 


,. 4 4 , 
TL OVY OV; TL 


πράττεις ὑπὲρ σαυτοῦ; 


ΔΑΟΣ 


λάθρᾳ μέν, Ἡράκλεις, [00] 


οὐδ᾽ ἐγκεχείρηκ᾽, ἀλλὰ τῷ "LO δεσπότῃ 


¥ > i , , 2. 9 \ ΤΣ Ay a 
eLpnKX 5 UTED KX 1TAL T ἐμοι OVVOLKLELV 


αὐτήν, διαλεχθεὶς mpds τὸν ἀδελφόν. 


ΓΕΤΑΣ 


45 mevOnpos ; 


ω y¥> = 
πως αρ ει 


ΔΑΟΣ 


ΕῚ A τῷ » ,ὔ a 
ἀποδημεῖ τριμηνος ἐπι τινα 


πρᾶξιν ἰδίαν εἰς Λῆμνον. ἥκοι γ᾽ ἀσφαλῶς." 


41. Ἡράκλεις : the most common 
oath in comedy. It does not occur in 
tragedy. 

43. Not a legal marriage, since one 
party to it was a slave, but contuber- 
nium, συνοικίζειν, and, of the parties 
themselves, συνοικεῖν, may be used of 
either relationship. 

44. πῶς ἄρα: how comes it, then, 
that, like πῶς δῆτα, cf. Hom, Od. 38. 22 
πῶς T ἄρ tw; Soph. Phil. 690 πῶς dpa 
... Burav κατέσχεν, 

45. πενθηρός : used by Anaxilas 
34K. of a garment worn in mourning. 
— The supplements from here on are 
very uncertain, but may sugeest the 
tenor of the conversation, — ἀποδημεῖ: 
ie. Laches, whose return will bring 
matters to a crisis. Gorgias is at 
home, v.27, —rplpnvos: the length of 
Laches’ absence helps to explain the 


present despair of Davus. If he does 
not speedily return, Davus’ plan on 
behalf of Plangon will be frustrated ; 
see p. 8 above. On the adj. ef. Diphi- 
lus 43.18 Καὶ. εἰσπέπλευκεν. . . τριταῖος. 
--ἐπί τινα πρᾶξιν: cf. Men. Georg., fr. 
Gen., Vv. ὁ ἀπόδημον εἰς Κόρινθον ἐπὶ 
mpativy twa, and Colax, Ox. Pap. IIT, 
no. 409, v. 4 ἐπὶ πράξεις τινάς, Plat. 
Gorg. 4841) εἴς τινα ἰδίαν ἢ πολιτικὴν 
πρᾶξιν. Such business trips furnished a 
common motive in comedy, see Knapp, 
CLP pp al orate 

46. An Attie colony was established 
at Lemnos and many Athenian citizens 
So Chre- 
Diniarchus in 


had business interests there. 
mes in Ter, Phor, 66. 
Plaut. True, 91 is there on publie busi- 
Kk. 245, Eur. 


Bacch, 968 φερόμενος ἥξεις. Generally 


hess. — ἥκοι : return, ct. 


With πάλιν. 


ΗΡΩΣ 19 


ΓΕΤΑΣ 


5 tf ia > ~ F's F , at 
ἐχόμεθα τῆς αὐτῆς ᾿ ἐπιθυμίας - πάλιν 


σῴζοιτο. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


Ν f A wn nw , SR vit 
χρήῆστον τοις θεοῖς θῦσαι: TAN ἂν 


»” » 
ονησις εἰη. 


TETAZ 


r , δὴ al 
πολὺ πρεπόντως καὶ καλῶς 


A 2 \ Ν ων , x» 4 > x ΕΜ Seika 
50 φρονεῖς. έἔγω yap και πενὴς ὧν σφόδρ av €pwv 


A lal A a), 
θύσαιμ᾽ aris, νὴ τὸν Ποσειδῶ, Tots θεοῖς. 


[70] 


ὦ ξυλοφόρ᾽, εἰς θυσίαν σὺ δεῦρο φέρε ταχὺ᾿ 


'πλῆθος ξύλων." 


ΔΑΟΣ 


> {2 723) {4 5 vA 
οὐπώποτ᾽ ἠράσθης. Vera; 


Fr. 345 


TETAS 


οὐ yap ἐνεπλήσθην. 


47, ἐχόμεθα : cling to, cf. Thue. 1. 
140 τῆς μὲν γνώμης, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἀεὶ τῆς 
αὐτῆς ἔχομαι, Plat. Legg. 899 5 ἐχόμενοι 
δὲ ὡς τινος ἀσφαλοῦς πείσματος.- πά- 
Aw: =olkade, cf. Plat. Theaet. 149: 
ἀπιὼν πάλιν. 

48. σῳΐζοιτο : often implies motion, 
when the goal is expressed in the predi- 
cate (here πάλιν), as in Soph. Trach. 
610 εἴ ποτ᾽ αὐτὸν és δόμους ἴδοιμι σωθέντα, 
Xen. Anab. 6.6.18 σώζοισθέ τε ἀσφαλῶς 
ὅποι θέλει ἕκαστος, cf. Thue. 7. 70. 7 περὶ 
τῆς ἐς THY πατρίδα σωτηρίας.---χρηστόν: 
sc. “ἐσ δ = Bédrriotov. Cf. Aristoph. 
Eccl. 219 ef πού τι χρηστῶς εἶχεν. The 
word is rather formal here, it were an 
excellent plan. 

49. Cf. Eur. Bacch. 4738 ἔχει δ᾽ ὄνη- 
σιν τοῖσι θύουσιν τίνα : and P. 705. 

50. ἐρῶν : if T were in love. 

51. ἅλις : implying abundance, like 
δαψιλῶς. So Od. 10, 221 χρυσόν re ἅλις, 


and Eur. Med. 1107 ἅλις βίοτόν θ᾽ ηὗρον, 
and ἐξαρκούντως in Aristoph. Ran. 377. 

52. Geta pretends to call a wood- 
carrier from among the spectators, in 
order that the idea of Dayus may be 
put into effect at once. When ἃ sacri- 
fice is actually to be performed in sight 
of the spectators some one is usually 
asked to feteh firewood from within the 
house, as in Aristoph. Thesm. 726 ff. 
ἐκφέρειν τῶν ξύλων, and Men. Perinthia, 
Ox. Pap. VI, no. 855, v. 8 —in both 
cases a human sacrifice. For the sacri- 
fice in Aristoph. Pac. 1023 ff. the fagots 
are already at hand, Addresses to the 
spectators are not uncommon in the 
New Comedy, see on P. 51. 

53 f. If the quotation belongs in this 
immediate context, the question of 
Davus must have been sueeested by 
the light-hearted way in which Geta 


treats his passion (cf, ἐρῶν). ** Cane it be, 


20 MENANAPOY 


OTHER 


FRAGMENTS 


ZeENontius 5. 60 


ΗΡΩΣ 


ΘΕΟΣ 


5 Ν ve a ε ’ὔ γ “ 7 
οὐκ εἰμὶ τούτων τῶν Y ἡρώων κακῶν 


Fr. 209 
AAOS 


, > »¥ 5 Ν > / ig 
déorow’, “Epwros οὐδὲν ἰσχύει πλέον. 


δ᾽ 5 Ἂς. δ wn r lol oy ον 5 “ ~ 
OVO QUTOS O κρατων TWV EV OUPaVv@ θεῶν 


4, 3' 2 / ’ὔ 243 Ν ~ 
Ζεύς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκείνῳ πάντ᾽ ἀναγκασθεὶς ποεῖ. 


πὶ. 910 
AAOZ 


ἐχρὴν yap εἶναι TO καλὸν εὐγενέστατον,. 


τοὐλεύθερον δὲ πανταχοῦ φρονεῖν μέγα. 


Fr. 211 
MTPPINH 


«ς 5 ray “ los 
ὡς οἰκτρόν. 7) τοιαῦτα δυστυχῶ μόνη. 


ἃ μηδὲ πιθανὰς τὰς ὑπερβολὰς ἔχει. 


ΓΟ. 


The οὐ 


(eta, that you never were in love?” 
for 1 never had a full belly.” 
in the answer carries with it the πώ- 
more of the question, On the sentiment 
UH fea AW are bth ol LUKE 


Theoer, 10.7 similarly asks his mock- 


love-siek reaper in 
INE COMpanion οὐδαμά τοι συνέβα ποθέ- 
σαι τινὰ τῶν ἀπεόντων ; 

Ζεη. 5.60. 


by Zenobins, withareference to Menan- 


For the proverb quoted 


der (A590 1K.). see above, ᾿ΕΝ ΤΟΙΣ 
the prologue of Mlenchus (Men, 545 1.), 
Which probably bean” EXey yds εἰμ᾽ ἐγ ώς 
ὁ φίλος ᾿Αληθείᾳ τε καὶ Ἰαρρησίᾳ. 

εν. 209. Davis seems to be plead- 


Ine the cause of Planeon before ὟΝ r- 


rhina.—amavta: anything and every- 
thing, cf. Soph. O.C. 761 ὦ πάντα τολμῶν. 
The notorious weakness of Zeus fur- 
nishes a standing excuse for erring lov- 
ers both in tragedy and in comedy, ef, 
S. 418 ff. 

Fr. 210. εὐγενέστατον : the supreme 
quality of noble birth is τὸ καλόν. No- 
Dlesse oblige. The words are those of a 
slave, see Geffken, Stud. z. Men., p. 17. 

Fr. 211. οἰκτρόν : sc. ἐστι. ἥ: that 
T. cf. Men. 100K, yéXowv, os... 
πᾷς. Probably the words of Myrrhina 


σιω- 


after her discovery that Gorgias and 
Plangonare hercehildren and that Plan- 


von is in trouble, ef. ἐδυσχέραινε of the 


HPQS 21 


Ἐπ. 19 


πεφαρμάκευσαι, γλυκύτατ᾽, ἀναλυθεὶς μόλις. 


Fr. SABBAITICUM 
ΓΟΡΓΙΑΣ 
‘\ \ a > ¥ 
νυνὶ δὲ τοῖς ἐξ ἄστεως 
κυνηγέταις ἤκουσι περιηγήσομαι 
τὰς ἀχράδας. 


Papyrus Fr. O 


SoPHRONA, MyrruHINA, LACHES (?) 
ZQSPONH 
» rs at 5 XN XN YS] 
€TN στιν OKTW και δέκ᾽. 
ΜΥΡΡΙΝΗ 
FF A > ~ 3) 
ov μὲν οὖν σαφῶς 0 
Γ: 
ry Ν Ars » Ν Col xy) > “ 2 τ 
οἶσθας σὺ τοῦτ᾽, ἔστω δὲ τῷδ᾽ αὐτῷ λέγειν 
γῳ ΝΟ A Ye 
OTWS TO πραγμα γιγνεται. 
υ 3 , νι 
Se COS OU OSes ee a Ὁ 
{Lacuna of ca. 31 vv. ] 


PHEIDIAS, MYRRHINA 
ΦΕΊΔΙΑΣ 
fry, aq 
EXEL 
iz yA Ty Ἂς ΄» ἀν vA r b as a 9 
ταύτης ἐρως ye, νὴ Al, ὦ γύναι, p ETL. 0? 
γν > my 
ATLOTOS OVT ἐστηκας; 
hypothesis and see p. 4 above. All 


this had to be kept secret from Laches 
(μόνη). 


spell of love again, though scarce purged 
of the malady. The gloss recurs in the 
Serlin Photius. 


Fr, 213. These words may be ad- 
dressed by Sangarius to his master 
Pheidias. — ἀναλυθείς : a medical term, 
purged. The figure in πεφαρμάκευσαι is 
of a love potion, You are under the 


Fr. Sabb. Quoted in the Lexicon 
Sabbaiticum (St. L892), 


p. 4. Gorgias seems to be speaking. 


Petersburg, 


Pap. fr. O. This seems to be a por- 
tion of a conversation from the last act 


22 


MENANAPOY 


MTPPINH 


“αὐτὴν γαμεῖς; 


οἷα γὰρ λέγεις" 


ΦΕΙΔΙΑ͂Σ 


γῆμαι δέδοκταί μοι πάλαι. 


γ A Ἢ ἣν 
ἡμῖν δὲ πίπτει. νὴ Δί᾽, εὖ γ᾽, ὦ Muppivy: 


ῳ 


Fr. 


~ 


Ν eek A 2 
— v — τὸν Tomer, Os βληχώμενον 


1 


9 
- 


χοῦς κεκραμένον 


οἴνου: λαβὼν ἔκπιθι τοῦτον. 


Fr. 214 


εὖ ἴσθι. κἀγὼ τοῦτο συγχωρήσομαι. 


Fr 


2 


15 


“ fs v7 aA 
των δὲ παιδισκῶν τινι 


δούς. 


FR. 


9 


~ 


ὦ δυστυχής. εἰ μὴ βαδιεῖ. 


of the play, in which it is disclosed 
that the man at whose hands Myrrhina 
had suffered violence eighteen years 
ago is none other than Laches himself. 
In this case the third person present 
would be Laches, 


16 


The speakers on the verso seem to 
be Pheidias and Myrrhina. Pheidias 
avows his constaney to Plangon and his 
purpose to marry her, now that the ob- 
stacles of her supposed humble birth 
and poverty are removed. 


BEEP Dhoni eS 


THE EPITREPONTES 


Fourteen of the thirty-two pages of the Cairo papyrus belong to a 
comedy which was readily recognized by M. Lefebvre as the Epi- 
trepontes of Menander, through the recurrence of quotations in the 
text. The list of characters, the hypothesis, and the initial scenes of 
exposition are lost, as well as considerable portions from the middle 
of the play; but so much remains that we are able in the main to 
identify the characters, to determine their relations to each other 
and the situation in which each one finds himself, and to follow the 
outlines of the plot from the beginning to the end. We miss, of 
course, many passages of Menander’s inimitable dialogue and mono- 
logue, and can only guess at several important details of the tech- 
nique of complication and dénouement; but, thanks to the poet’s 
skill in weaving the strands of the plot into the texture of the whole 
play, the extant portions contain a sufficient number of allusions to 
the lost scenes to enable us to gain a fair understanding of the whole. 

The title is not in any sense descriptive of the play as a whole, 
but is derived from a particular scene which the poet elaborated ap- 
parently with especial satisfaction. The “arbitrants” are two slaves, 
Davus and Syriscus, who chance to meet each other and become 
engaged in a violent dispute. It appears that Davus, a shepherd 
(v.39), had found an exposed infant a month before, and trinkets, 
ἀναγνωρίσματα, that its unknown mother had caused to be placed 
with it. The day following his discovery he had met Syriscus, a 
charcoal burner (v.40), to whom he had related the finding of the 
ehild, but had not mentioned the trinkets. The child was given over 
to Syriscus, at his own request, to rear as lis own. After a time 
Syriscus learned about the trinkets and felt that Davus had de- 
frauded him by retaining them. So when they meet on the present 
occasion Syriscus demands them as rightfully his property. Davus 
repudiates the claim. A proposal is made to submit the matter to 


25 


26 MENANDER 


arbitration. Like the two herdsmen in Theocritus (5.64) they call 
upon the first man they see to adjudge their dispute. First one and 
then the other pleads his cause, as if disputants before an Athenian 
judge. The judge decides that the trinkets go with the child, and 
that, since Davus had attempted to defraud it of its property, he 
had forfeited his claim to both the child and the trinkets. 

By this device the trinkets, by means of which the child’s parents 
are to be discovered, are brought into the possession of Syriscus. [lis 
presence on the scene at this time also naturally brings him into rela- 
tion with Onesimus, the slave of the child’s father.’ While Syriscus 
and his wife are examining the contents of the wallet, Onesimus, 
who happens to be near, recognizes a ring that his master Charisius 
had lost ten months before under suspicious circumstances. Now 
Onesimus has a passion for knowing everything (see fr. 850, p. 118) 
that pertains to his master. His interest in ferreting out the history 
of this ring leads at first to the discovery that complicates still more 
his master’s situation, and later to the disclosure that brings happi- 
ness to his master and mistress. The arbitration scene is thus of 
rapital significance in preparing the way for all that is to follow. 
Though the two disputants are of little importance in the sequel 
(Davus disappears from view entirely), Menander showed the true 
poet’s Instinct in naming Ins comedy from the distinetive prelude, 
The scene was justly celebrated in antiquity.” 

The leading persons in the drama and their traits are readily dis- 
cerned. A’ preliminary survey of these chief characters will assist 
us in our study of the plot. 

Davus is a rustic whose first imstinet is to look well to his own 
rights, but withal so stupid as not at first to see the danger of com- 
mnitting his case, with its moral lmpleations, into the hands of an 
impartial arbitrator, THis character as a sullen, unenlightened bumyp- 
kin is fully revealed in the moment of his defeat. Tis réle in the 
play is similar to that of a πρόσωπον προτατικόν, 111 that he has no 


connection with any of the chief actors and that he disappears after 


ΓΤ fact that the arbitrator is the child’s own crandfather is of mo im- 
portanee for the plot: but it is a neat instance of come irony to cause the 
disagreeable Smicrines to assist in this way at his own discomiiture, 

2 πο τι Πα κα ΟΝ ΝΥΝ ὑπ κοῦ woes eae Ts 7). Ὁ; 


EPITREPONTES oT 


the arbitration scene. But as the original possessor of the infant and 
the present possessor of the γνωρίσματα he assumes for the moment 
an important position. And if, as seems probable, he participated 
in the exposition scene at the beginning of the play, the poet, by 
making the foil to Onesimus in that scene one of the leading char- 
acters in the arbitration scene that followed, not only avoided the 
rather mechanical device of a πρόσωπον προτατικόν, Which he seems 
to have employed but rarely (Geta in the Hero is the only known 
instance in Menander), but also through him knit the prologue 
closely to the second act. 

Syriscus is in the service of Chaerestratus, who owns one of the 
houses represented on the scene. This connection is serviceable only 
in furnishing a plausible motive for his meeting with Davus in this 
place, and in bringing the trinkets and the baby to the scene of 
action. Although Syriscus is of little consequence in the plot after 
the baby and the ring have for the moment passed into the sphere 
of influence of the other actors, the poet contrives that he shall 
remain as long as necessary by delaying the arrival of Chaerestratus, 
to whom Syriscus is to make his monthly settlement (v. 163). This 
errand is probably not accomplished within the time of action of 
the play; in that case Syriscus disappears from view after v. 246. 
The personal qualities of Syriscus are adequately sketched by the 
poet. He is a straightforward and honest sort of man. He took the 
child without counting the cost of its maintenance as Davus had 
done. He has the child’s interests in view when he lays claim to the 
trinkets, but we also feel that he has not lost sight of their possible 
intrinsic value. A plausible talker, he is clearly proud of his gift of 
speech. The patronizing air with which he appeals to precedents in 
tragedy (vv. 108 ff.) is amusing. He is also a cheerful litigant. An 
arbitration is an opportunity to display his skill in argument, and 
he is ready to arbitrate every question against all comers, naively 
confident of the outcome (v. 201). 

Onesimus is the slave of Charisius, his young master (v. 176). 
His importance in the plot is thereby determined, but the direc- 
tion which his activity takes depends upon his personal character- 
istics. They are, in the main, an insatiable curiosity (v. 170, fr. 850, 
p- 118) and an irresistible tendency to meddle in other people’s 


28 MENANDER 


affairs (vv. 211, 356). His loyalty to his master (fr. 581, p. 99; 
v. 772) relieves his meddlesomeness of the motive of malice.’ He 
does not intend to make mischief, and when mischief results he is 
sorry. But, after all, his regret is caused chiefly by his fear of the 
consequences to himself (vv. 205, 356). It was through his curiosity 
that he discovered the secret of his mistress. By thoughtlessly re- 
vealing this to Charisius he destroys the happiness of the household. 
Ife is not so much concerned to right this wrong as to save his skin 
(vy. 212, 686). Though he is not without sympathy for his mistress 
(vy. 350), he is afraid of a reconciliation between her and Charisius, 
lest he, the cause of the trouble, shall suffer for lis tattling (v. 208). 
He loves intrigue (v. 250 ff.), but lacks the courage and the brains 
to frame upa plot and carry it through. Hence his dependence upon 
Habrotonon, on whose adroitness is staked all his hope of success. 
And yet he cannot rid himself of suspicion of her (ν. 338). When 
success finally crowns her efforts, his boldness and self-contidence 
are restored. Toward Smicrines, whom he has feared so long as the 
outcome was in doubt (v. 863), he now becomes insolent (vy. 866 t£.). 
In short, in the character of Onesimus we have a notable creation 
of the poet. Unlike the depraved, cunning, complaisant, and wholly 
selfish slave with which Plautus and Terence have made us familiar, 
we have in him a natural person of ordinarily decent instinets and 
of ordinary weaknesses, whose good and bad qualities, both of the 
every-day sort, are brought out logically and naturally in situations 
that are never strained or overwrought. Onesimus 1s a person to be 


scolded and then forgiven —a thoroughly life-lhke character. 





The character of Smicrines, the father of Pamphila and father-in- 
law of Charisius, is disclosed by his name, which in the New Comedy 
and in the literature based upon it (see Kock, CLA.F. IIT, pp. 25, 
oy, OO) stands for an old nan δύστροπος καὶ δύσκολος by disposition 
(Alciphr, Ep.3. 7 Sch... Menander gave the name to the leading 
person in his Dyscolus, probably the original of Plautus’ Aulularia.? 
In the Epitrepontes, as in the Dyseolus, Smicrines is not only a 


''The περίεργος of Theophrastus Char. 18 speaks and acts μετ᾽ εὐνοίας. 

2 Geffken, Stud. zu Men. pp. 1 ΠῚ The miserly Smicrines to whom Choricius 
refers in Apol, mim, ed. Graux, Rev. de Phil. 1877, p. 288, is the character in 
the Dyseolus, 


EPITREPONTES 29 


mean, grouchy, and disagreeable person; he is also a miser, φιλάρ- 
yvpos. The two traits, meanness and miserliness, naturally go to- 
gether. Menedemus, the self-tormenter in Terence’s Heauton, is 
described (v. 526) as pater avidus misere atque aridus (ef. 
Plaut. Aul. 297, of Euclio, pumex non aequest aridus atque 
hic est senex). The σμικρόλογος ἀνήρ is selfish as well as petty. 
We are told (schol. ad Hom. Od. 7. 225) that Smicrines in the 
Epitrepontes is like Odysseus when he expresses his longing for 
“possessions and household,” προτάσσει τῶν φιλτάτων τὴν κτῆσιν. The 
reference is to Smicrines’ willingness to sacrifice his daughter’s 
happiness to a merely pecuniary consideration, the recovery of her 
dowry. This end can be attained only by her leaving her husband, 
and when she refuses, Smicrines plans to take her home by force. 
The gibes of Onesimus at the old man’s mean (χαλεπός, v. 867) and 
calculating (λογιστικός, v. 869) disposition and at his eagerness to 
get back the dowry (v. 867, cf. v. 853) leave no room for doubt that 
from his first appearance in the first act Smicrines had harped 
upon the extravagance of his son-in-law, and upon his own fear, not 
of the moral downfall of the young man, but of the dissipation of 
the marriage portion. His surly nature is seen even in the arbitra- 
tion scene. Nobody likes him, and his utter discomfiture in the last 
act stirs no feeling of sympathy for him. 

It may no longer be regarded as doubtful that Chaerestratus, 
whom Syriscus in y.190 speaks of as his master, has a speaking 
role in the play. The name is restored with certainty in v. 770, 
where he is addressed as present. His was apparently a minor role, 
but he appeared in at least two scenes, as will be seen below. Is he 
the father of Charisius, as Robert and van Leeuwen assume, or sinply 


4) 


a friend, as Legrand and Croiset beheve ? It has seemed to those 
who support the latter view that if Chaerestratus is the father, his 
slave Syriscus should have recognized in Onesimus a fellow slave 
(v.174). But Syriscus is employed as a charcoal burner in the forest, 
whence he comes once a month to the village to pay his dues, while 
Onesimus, who is attached to the person of his young master, Cha- 
rislus, is a member of another household. It is not strange that they 
do not know one another. It is true that Svriseus and Onesimus 
stay at the same house, which belongs to Chaerestratus (v. 194), but 


30 MENANDER 


this house, as we shall see, is not the domicile of Chaerestratus, who 
lives in the city. The conditions are better satisfied if Chaerestratus 
is the father of Charisius. Onesimus constantly refers to Charisius 
as τρόφιμος, erilis filius. In vv. 770 ff. he pleads with Chaeres- 
tratus to reward Habrotonon; it would naturally be the father of 
Charisius who would be expected to give the money with which she 
should buy her freedom. The glimpses which we have of his rdéle 
in the play suggest the indulgent father, a proper foil to Smicrines. 

The musie girl Habrotonon! is one of Menander’s most attractive 
characters. In her we see, not one of the depraved and heartless 
courtesans of the New Comedy, but a still unperverted slave girl, 
who less than a year before was innocent of all thought of wrong 
(νυν. 261). Her owner has now driven her to a life of shame, and 
though her native delicacy has suffered by the associations into 
which she has been thrown, a kind fortune has kept her from 
degradation.? Her heart is now set on winning her freedom (v. 324), 
and with this end in view she employs all her powers of cunning 
and persuasion, so that in the end it can be said that she is chiefly 
responsible for the happy outcome (v. 774). Though she is willing 
to deceive Charisius in order to learn the truth, she declines, on the 
basis of a mere suspicion, to involve the honor of the girl whose 
guilty secret she may betray by a premature step (vv. 285 ff). For 
Charisius she is heartily sorry (v. 220). Toward the helpless baby 
her heart goes out in genuine tenderness (vv. 249, 638). Her first 
instinct is to save the child from a slavery to which it was not 
born; the reward which may possibly be hers if she finds its par- 
ents comes to her mind as a secondary consideration, All in all, 
Habrotonon stands out as one of the few genuine women of the 
better sort portrayed in Greek comedy. 

Charisius is portrayed as a young man of high principles and of 
exemplary life (vv. 693 ff.), except for his lapse from virtue the 
year before —an episode which he seems strangely to have for- 
gotten until he is confronted by the evidence of lis error in the 


1Ttisaclass-name. Nodecent Athenian would name his daughter Habrotonon. 

2 Her relations with Charisius, of only two days’ duration, have been pure 
(v. 223). Menander may have made it clear somewhere that this is the first 
time her owner has made such a disposition of her (cf. v. 848), 


EPITREPONTES 31 


person of his child. He has rather prided himself hitherto upon 
his blameless character. His superior bearing has made him offen- 
sive to his mean father-in-law, who calls him “that lofty fellow” 
(v. 528). When he discovers the secret of his young wife, whose 
innocence of intentional wrong he knows, he finds it impossible to 
live with her longer. At this point Menander differentiates Cha- 
risius from the ordinary run of young men in comedy. Charisius 
adopts the usual course, it is true, of resorting to wine and women. 
He summons a number of boon companions, with whom he spends 
his days and nights in riotous living. He engages the company of 
an expensive music-girl. His goings-on are soon the talk of the 
community. But this proves to be the very object which he has 
in view — wide-spread gossip. His is no moral breakdown. His 
distress is genuine, as his love of Pamphila is sincere. He is not 
trying to drown his sorrow in wine, nor γυναικὶ γυναῖκα ἐξελαύνειν, but 
rather to gain such notoriety for the extravagance of his life that 
his avaricious father-in-law will be eager to have his daughter take 
the step that will dissolve the union and rescue the imperiled 
dowry. But why does Charisius, with his severe standards of con- 
duct, find it necessary to embark upon such a course? In the first 
place because of his love and respect for his wife; he would spare 
her, if possible, the shame of a publie repudiation. He prefers to 
give her cause for divorcing him rather than to expose her before 
the world. In the second place, he has no doubt given her his word 
not to reveal her secret, as Pamphilus in the Hecyra of Terence 
in a similar situation promised Philumena’s mother:! pollicitus 
sum et servare in eco certumst quod dixi fidem (v. 402). 
But, since it seems to him impossible in the future to live with 
her as his wife, he lays his plans to bring about a separation in 
another way. Pamphila, he knows, will cling to him, will accept 
any humiliation rather than leave him. He therefore depends upon 
the avarice of Smicrines to force her to this course. In the end, 
though his pride is crushed by the humihating disclosure of his 


1 Pamphilus reports her entreaty (vv. 387 ff.): ‘te obsecramus ambae, 
Si ius, Si fas est, uti advotsa cius per te teeta tacitaqwe apud 
omnis sient.” So Charisius probably reported somewhere his promise to 


Pamphila. 


oo MENANDER 


own greater sin, his gererous consideration of his wife in this 
respect is unexpectedly rewarded by their reconciliation. 

Like Philumena in the Heeyra and Plangon in the Hero, Pam- 
phila, the wife of Charisius, seems to have had no speaking part in 
the play. And yet her character stands out clearly. The innocent 
victim of a cruel outrage, her happiness seemed assured by marriage 
to aman whom she fondly loved and who loved her in turn, and 
fortune at first favored her in that her husband was absent from 
home when the child of her shame was born. Then the meddling 
slave discovered and betrayed her secret. She tries to win her hus- 
band back by patiently enduring his apparent unfaithfulness. She 
stubbornly resists her father’s demand that she leave him and save 
the dowry. So sordid a motive made no appeal to her, The key- 
note to her character is found in her noble answer to her father, 
which filled Charisius with shame and remorse when he overheard 
it: “I came to him the partner of his life; in truth T cannot now 
consent myself to flee the sorrow that las come.” 

Sophrona is a useful but not an important character. As the econfi- 
dentialmaid of Pamphila, who had accompanied her at the Tauropoha 
and had assisted at the birth and exposure of the child, she is the link 
between the past and the present. She is therefore essential to the 
discovery by Habrotonon that) Pamplila was the vietim of the vio- 
lence of Charisius the vear before, and now is the mother of his child. 

The part of the Cook is almost entirely Jost) from our present 
text. There is evidence of dus) participation im only one scene 
(vv. 593 ff), though it is extremely probable that he appeared ima 
later scene also. The cook's role in the Middle and New Comedy, 
so far as we may judge from the fragments and from Plautus, was 
always a subordinate one. This presence merely afforded a diver 
sion, We have the testimony of Athenaeus (6598) that in the 
Epitrepontes, as im most plays, the cook was introduced as a fine 
Inaker, σκώπτικος. The reference can hardly be to the short scene, 
of probably less than thirty lines, in the third aet, where some one 
seems to berate the cook for dis tardiness ta Keeping dias encage- 
ment.! The object of the scene seems rather to be so to enrage 

Some have supposed that the Cook was one of the dnterlocutors in the 


prologue, but this can hardly have been the case. To judge by the general 


EPITREPONTES 33 


Smicrines, who witnesses the interview, by the ocular demonstration 
of the extravagance of his son-in-law’s course of life, that he will be 
more disposed than ever to bring about a separation. According to 
this view the scene of the jesting cook to which Athenaeus alludes 
was reserved for the early part of the fourth act. The three extant 
quotations are to be assigned to this scene. In it the cook comes 
out of the house and gives an amusing account of the confusion that 
reigns within. 

Between the second and the third acts (after v. 201) the papyrus 
indicates by the word Xopot a performance by a chorus. The per- 
sonnel of this chorus is indicated a few lines before (v. 195), where 
we are told that the guests are arriving at the house in whieh Cha- 
risius is about to give a banquet. It is probably these guests who 
annoy Habrotonon when she is about to leave the house (ν. 218). 
Later in the play, if the St. Petersburg parchment fragment. is 
rightly assigned to the Epitrepontes, the chorus is further desig- 
nated as a crowd of drunken youth, and Xopod is written after the 
third act. It is probable that the chorus gave performances of sing- 
ing and dancing after the second, third, and fourth acts, with- 
drawing into the house at the conclusion of each performance. Its 
members take no part in the dialogue or in the action. 

The view that is here advanced as to the characters and the 
motives which actuate them is derived chiefly from the Cairo papy- 
rus. But one element in the plot, and that the most striking one, 
the chivalrous nature of the conduct of Charisius toward his wife 
and the real reason of his present apparently dissipated life, — is 
directly suggested, not by the papyrus fragments, but by an inter- 
esting parchment fragment of Menander which the present editor 


characteristics of the type, he would have been a very unsuitable person to elicit 
from Onesimus a recital of the situation in the household of Charisius. The 
cook, wherever he appears, dominates the scene with his own professional eou- 
cerns, except in subordinate scenes in which his person is of minor interest. He 
has curiosity, indeed, but only about the details of the entertainment for which 
he is to cater, never about a purely domestic situation. In Plautis the cook 
never appears in the exposition scenes. It is better therefore to infer from 
v. 165 that the dramatic motive for the appearance of Onesimus inthe prologue 
was the need of summoning a cook from the city, and that the cook was very 
tardy in arriving. 


94 MENANDER 


believes to belong to the Epitrepontes and has incorporated in the 
text (pp. 94 ff.). An account of this fragment must be given to 
justify the interpretation here adopted.' 

In the year 1855 a Russian palaeographer and collector, Bishop 
Porfiri Uspenski, found somewhere in the Orient three strips of 
parchment covered with Greek writing that had once been used in 
the binding of a book. They were shown in 1862 to Tischendorf, 
who copied the recto of two of them and sent copies to Cobet, who 
recognized in the writing verses of Menander. On the death of the 
Bishop the strips were deposited in the Imperial Pubhe Library 
of St. Petersburg, where they lay unnoticed until 1891, when Jern- 
stedt published the writing on their verso side and republished that 
on the recto. It has since been shown that both sides of one of the 
strips contain lines from Menander’s Phasma and that the third 
strip is from his Canephorus. As to the interpretation and assign- 
ment of the recto of the strip in which we are at present interested 
(2a, p. 94 below) there has been much dispute, although Cobet’s 
judgment that the verses are Menander’s has found general accept- 
ance. The verso, however, which Jernstedt published, seemed to 
van Leeuwen in his second edition of the Cairo Menander to contain 
verses from the Epitrepontes, and he printed it as a portion of the 
first act. It is highly probable that if the verso contains verses 
from this play the recto does also. 

Six different persons are indicated in this fragment. First of 
all there is the speaker of vv. 1-15, 19f., and 24) ff., and then the 
person whom he is denouncing. The latter is wasting money in 
drink and on a musie-girl; he is living apart from lis wife, who 
brought him a large dowry. The deseription fits Charisius, who 
is mentioned by name in v.82. The wadrpa would be Habrotonon. 
The speaker would be Simicrines, whose mean and caleulating dis- 
position Is accurately portrayed throughout, and especially in the 
allusions to the dowry and in the caleulation of the other's extrava- 
gance. In v.17 he is referred to as the father of a certain woman, 
and in v.26 he himself alludes to Jus daughter, whom he is about 

1 For a full discussion of the plot, with reference to the parchment, see aan, 


Jour. Phil. xxix (1908), pp. 410 ff.; and, with reference to the text, ibid, xxx 
(1909), pp. 25 ff. 


EPITREPONTES 35 


‘to see in order to take measures against the offending person. This 
daughter would be the neglected wife Pamphila. In y. 16 another 
person is addressed as Chaerestratus.’ It is he who participates in 
the following dialogue. We see in v.31 that he is the owner of 
one of the houses in the scene, precisely as is Chaerestratus in the 
Epitrepontes. He is also concerned in protecting Charisius against 
his denouncer. The fifth person accompanies Chaerestratus when 
he enters and when he departs to see Charisius. The familiarity 
with which he addresses Chaerestratus suggests the slave, and in 
vv. 36 ff., after the choral interlude, a slave avows his loyalty to his 
master. The character fits Onesimus. Lastly, the chorus of drunken 
youth (vv. 99 ff.) is consistent with the crowd of banqueters which 
is gathering as guests of Charisius in vy. 195. All these seven charac- 
ters coincide perfectly with the corresponding characters in the Epi- 
trepontes, both as to the traits which distinguish them, so far as 
they are revealed in the parchment, and as to the situations in which 
they are placed with reference to each other; and the two proper 
names that are mentioned also coincide. The correspondences are 
striking and seem to be too numerous to be put aside as mere coin- 
cidences. 

If then the St. Petersburg parchment contains portions of the 


) 


Epitrepontes, from what part of the play does it come? It cannot 
be from the first act, for in the middle of the second act (v. 161) 
Chaerestratus has not arrived, and the chorus of drunken youth, if 
they were the guests of Charisius, are spoken of in y. 196 as arriving 
or about to arrive. The state of rage in which we find Smicrines 
points rather to the end of the third act, after he has heard in the 
city further details about the conduct of Charisius. Onesimus ex- 
pressly says of him in y. 361 that he is in a very agitated state 
of mind. 

Among the papyrus fragments which M. Lefebvre found are two 
shreds, R and M, which contain meager portions from the begin- 
nings and ends of verses. RK is certainly from the Epitrepontes, for 
it contains part of a certified quotation. In this edition it has been 

1 Tischendorf's copy gave χαίρω, Which has caused mueh trouble. But the 
photograph shows clearly the inner curve of an €or an o after pon the very edge 
of a hole in the parchment. 


36 MENANDER 


placed near the beginning of the fourth act.’ Smicrines must have 
appeared early in the fourth act, and in a state of mind similar to 
that in which we find him at the end of the third act. He comes 
from his interview with Pamplila, in which she absolutely refused 
to obey his command to leave her husband and demand the return 
of the dowry. When he takes his leave, it is with the determina- 
tion to return and carry Pamphila home by force (ef. τὸ dpracpa, 
v. 870). The case of M is less certain. A number of isolated words 
strongly suggest situations in the Epitrepontes, but the remains are 
too meager alone to constitute proof of identity. But among the quota- 
tions from Menander is one which contains the names of Onesimus 
and Habrotonon ; it certainly came from the prologue of this play, as 
Croiset saw. Now the ends of two verses in M? seem to coincide with 
the line-ends of this quotation. In the quotation, it is true, we have 
the accusative ψάλτριων, in the papyrus the genitive -rpws. But the 
verse 15 not quite correctly quoted (it is metrically faulty), and the 
most obvious restoration of the verse restores the genitive.? If a reéx- 
amination of the papyrus reveals nothing that forbids the identiti- 
vation, M is to be assigned to the prologue of the Epitrepontes. 

We are now prepared to consider the plot of the play. Ten 
months before the action of the play begins, Pamplila, the daughter 
of a rich Athenian, Smicrines, took part in the celebration of the 
Tauropolia, an all-night festival for women in honor of Artemis. 
Her maid Sophrona accompanied her. During the evening she 
strayed from the crowd, was seized and violated by a young man 
unknown to her. In the struggle she drew a seal-ring from his fin- 


ver? A lute-girl, Habrotonon, who was playing as the girls danced, 


1 formerly brought R into connection with the St. Petersburg fragment, 
because in R Smicrines seems to be fully aware of the conduct of Charisius 
and rages against him as in that passage. But the space between the recto and 
verso of the St. Petersburg fragment is barely suticient to admit Ry and a long 
tirade by Smicrines before he has had confirmation of the report which he had 
received about Charisius, and especially betore he has interviewed Pamphila, 
would seem less appropriate than after Pamphila has rejected his advice. 

2 See note on fr. 600, p. 47. For a full discussion of the question see Am. 
Jour. Phil. xxix (1908), p. 426. 

3Cf. Ter, Hee. 829, (Pamphilus) dicitque sese illi anulum, dum luc- 
tate Ὁ Ὁ να 5 510. 


EPITREPONTES 37 


noticed Pamphila when she returned to the company disheveled 
and in distress; but she did not know who the girl was, and at the 
time did not interpret the incident. Four months later Pamphila 
was given in marriage, with a generous portion, to Charisius, the son 
of a rich Athenian, Chaerestratus. They went to the country to live. 
The two were devotedly attached to each other. Five months after 
their marriage (v. 904), presumably during an absence of Charisius, 
a child was born to Pamphila. It was given to ‘somebody, doubtless 
Sophrona, to expose, and with it was laid a wallet of trinkets, includ- 
ing the seal-ring of its father. The child was found by Davus and by 
him given, as we have seen, to Syriscus, but without the trinkets. 

In some way? Onesimus discovered the secret of his mistress, 
and on the return of Charisius about a month afterward (v. 26) 
promptly betrayed it to him. We can imagine the grief and anger 
of Charisius. Pamphila no doubt explained the circumstances of 
her betrayal at sufficient length to prove her innocence. However 
this may be, nothing was said that suggested to him the possibility 
of his own responsibility for his wife’s trouble.* Though he felt 
that he could not overlook the matter nor live with her longer, he 
decided not to repudiate her. It is probable that he requested her 
to leave him and that she refused to do so; and also that he agreed 
not to divulge her misfortune to others. 

The action begins on the third day (v. 223) after this disclosure. 
We find Charisius living apart from his wife (p. 90. v.10). ina house 
next door to his own (p. 98, v. 81). He has secured from a leno an 
expensive music girl, Habrotonon, with whom he is ostentatious 
living. There too he is carrying on a series of lavish entertainments. 
Yesterday he gave a banquet (v. 166), and another is being arranged 
for to-day. Onesimus, who has just been to the city® to engage a 


1 By noticing the visit of the midwife, as in the Andria οὐ Terence, or dy 
hearing the cries of travail, as in the Heceyra? 

2 In the Hecyra Pamphilus is told only this much (vo 885): mam να τ πη πὶ 
oblatum virgini olim ab nescio quo improbo, Any further ΑΓ Ὁ}: 
would have aroused his suspicions. 

8 Or was he on his way to the city? If so, he returns thence ats 
it seems more probable that at the close of the first act he enters thie tetis 
Chaerestratus, from which he reappears at v2 165 complaining about 
ness of the cook. 


88 MENANDER 


cook, meets Davus. The conversation which ensues between the two 
slaves serves as the exposition. The action is set in motion by the 
arrival of Smicrines from the city soon after the departure thither 
of Davus. Though Smicrines has knowledge of the excesses of Cha- 
risius, he has not yet wrought himself into a rage about them, but 
speaks as if there were a prospect of a reconciliation between his 
daughter and her husband (M', v.11). This is the motive of his pres- 
ence now. After a Conversation with Onesimus he enters his daugh- 
ter’s house, Onesimus that in which his master was staying. Then 
comes the arbitration scene at the beginning of the second act. 

By the decision of the arbitrator the trinkets are given over to 
Syriscus. As he looks them over Onesimus appears, recognizes the 
ring as that of Charisius, and takes possession of it. The wife of 
Syriscus meanwhile withdraws with the baby into the house. Onesi- 
mus is at a loss to know what to do with the ring. His master is 
already angry with him for his meddling. To show him the ring, he 
later explains to Syriscus, before knowing the mother of the child, 
would be to cast upon him, without adequate proof, suspicion of 
being the child’s father. Habrotonon chances to overhear this con- 
versation, She calls to mind the girl whom she had seen in distress 
at the last Tauropoha. Perhaps this girl was the mother, Charisius 
the father. But before attempting to find the mother Habrotonon 
inust be certain that the ring came into the possession of the child's 
mother directly from Charisius. She proposes, therefore, first to learn 
from the wife of Syriscus where she got the child, and then to wear 
the ring in the presence of Charisius. When he questions her, she 
will tell the story of the episode at the Tauropolia as if she herself 
were the wronged girl, Having thus drawn from Charisius an adimis- 
sion of the truth, she will show him the child. Of course he will 
beheve her to be its mother, but she promises to undertake a search 
for the true mother as soon as she is sure that the time and place 
and circmmstances all point to the girl whom she had noticed at the 
festival, The reward for which she hopes is her freedom. When 
Habrotonon goes in to talk to the wife of Syriscus, Simierines arrives 
Ina towering passion, Te has heard in the city the whole truth 
about the extravagant life of Charisius, and le now sees with his 


own eves the elaborate preparations which are making for the day's 


EPITREPONTES . 39 


entertainment. He is resolved to put an end to such a waste of 
money by taking his daughter home and demanding the return of 
the dowry. Chaerestratus protests in vain. 

We have reached the crisis in the action. Charisius seems almost 
to have succeeded in his object, namely, by a lavish waste of money 
to cause Smicrines to second his own efforts to induce Pamphila to 
leave him, since she will not go of her own accord. Habrotonon, 
on the other hand, is following out a plan which, if successful, will 
convict Charisius of a fault far more serious than that which he 
lays at the door of Pamphila, but which, nevertheless, will restore 
Pamphila to him. If Smicrines, on the other hand, succeeds in his 
plan, Habrotonon’s discovery of the mother of the child will come 
too late to bring happiness to the household. 

Two questions arise at this point which our fragmentary text does 
not explicitly answer. Does Smicrines know that his daughter has 
borne a bastard ? It seems hardly possible, else he would not be so 
arrogant in his attitude toward Charisius. Philumena’s father in the 
Hecyra is for a long time kept in ignorance of the fact that his 
daughter has borne a child, and then is led to believe that her child 
is the acknowledged son of Pamphilus. The second question is: Do 
Sinicrines and Pamphila, at the time of their interview, know Cha- 
risius to be the father of a child? It has been generally assumed that 
they do, and Pamphila’s conduct has been interpreted accordingly. 
But the sequence of events, as made clear by the extant text, renders 
this assumption impossible. At the end of the third act no one knows 
the fact, though Habrotonon and Onesimus suspect it. Smicrines 
goes into one house to see his daughter, Habrotonon into the other 
to see first the wife of Syriscus and then Charisius himself. The for- 
mer interview is protracted beyond the time required by Habrotonon 
for her two errands, for Charisius is able, after seeing her, to cateh 
the last part of Pamphila’s reply to her father. There is no possilility 
of there having been any communication between Habrotonon and 
Charisius (who alone are enlightened) on the one hand, and Snucrines 
and Pamphila on the other, before the conversation between the last 
two is over. Onesimus is in the house with Charisins until v. 665; 
Sophrona is with her mistress as long as Smicrines is with her. 
The first person, other than Charisius and Habrotonon, to learn that 


40 MENANDER 


Charisius is the father of a child is Onesimus, and he overhears 
the confession from his master’s lips while still within the house 
(v. 681); and Sophrona is told by Habrotonon in the extant scene 
(y. 606). 

The doubt has been caused, in the lack of the text of the early 
scenes of the fourth act, by the poet’s very ingenious method of nar- 
rating simultaneous events. When the fourth act opens, both inter- 
views which are to determine the course of the plot and counterplot 
are taking place. This was doubtless explained to the audience in the 
opening monologue of Onesimus. Then there is a period of suspense 
during the scene that introduces the Cook. Ina few moments Smicri- 
nes, knowing ouly that his daughter will not accept his guidance, 
comes from his visit with her and departs for his home. Sophrona 
soon comes from her mistress weeping. Through her the spectators 
are informed of the stormy interview, from Pamphila’s point of 
view; for no doubt Smicrines had avowed his intention of returning 
to take her home by foree. Habrotonon has already had her talk 
with Charisius, and in a brief scene with Sophrona completes the 
circle of evidence. We next learn, first from Onesimus and then from 
Charisius, further details of the conversation, which had ended some 
time before, between Pamphila and her father, this time from the 
point of view of Charisius. At the time he overheard the last por- 
tion of it he was aware of lis own guilt, but Smerimnes and Pamplila 
were debating the divorce without that knowledge. The ἀτύχημα of 
Which Pamphila speaks in v. 706 (the Latin equivalent in Hee. 388 
Is advorsa eius) is her own shame, not that of Charisius. The 
situation is qade clear by the use of the future tense in the self- 
deniiertion of Charisiins vv.e01 te Te conceives of Fate: asi say 
ine to him: + Your wife’s unwitting fault you do not brook ; but I 
shell prove thee euilty of like sin, And then all gently wi/7 she thee 
entreat, while thou.” ete, 

The plot now proceeds rapidly to its denouement. By the discovery 
that the child is his own Charisius is placed ina most humiliating 
and embarrassing position, from which he is soon resened by Hae 
brotonon, who bluntly tells him. as he is angrily rebuking Onesimus 
for his interference, that Pamplila is the child's mother. Charisius 


therenpon returns to his own house and is reconciled with lis wife. 


EPITREPONTES 41 


The distribution of rewards begins (vv. 769 ff.).. Habrotonon of course 
gets the money to buy her freedom from her owner. Onesimus is for- 
given for his meddling, perhaps even rewarded by his freedom and by 
the hand of Habrotonon in marriage.! As for Smicrines, who comes 
from the city in what is probably the final scene, prepared to take 
his daughter away by force, he is mercilessly flouted by Onesimus. 
He is the last to learn the truth, and his enlightenment comes at 
the moment of his greatest arrogance. 

The motives which govern the conduct of Charisius and Smicrines 
are more intelligible when we consider them in the light of the pro- 
visions of the Attic law concerning divorce. If a husband desired 
to put away his wife he had simply to send her away (ἀποπέμπειν) in 
the presence of witnesses. The witnesses would naturally be informed 
of the alleged grounds for the action. In all cases of ἀπόπεμψις the 
legal representative of the woman recovered the dowry, except, pos- 
sibly, when the charge was infidelity or, as in the present instance, 
unchastity before marriage. On this point there is lack of evidence 
for the classical period, and a difference of opinion among modern 
authorities ?; but it was the practice of other peoples and of the 
Greeks of Homeric and post-classical times that in such cases the 
dowry might be retained by the wronged husband. The wife who de- 
sired a separation from her husband, on the other hand, was obliged 
to appear in person before the archon and to file with him a notifica- 
tion of ἀπόλειψις, giving her reasons. Whatever the grounds she cited, 
if the divorce was granted the dowry went back to her legal repre- 
sentative. In the Epitrepontes, Smicrines is concerned only with 
recovering the dowry. That he may legally demand it his daughter 


1 The insistence upon the purity of Habrotonon (vy. 22: 
pare the way for such an outcome. QOnesimus stoutly de 
(v. 772) and admires her cleverness (vv. 308 ff., 840). She has promised to reward 
him if successful (v. 326). 

2.On the subject in general see Meier-Schémann-Lipsius, Att. Proc. Ty pp 
519 ff.; and Caillemer in Daremberg-Saglio 5. Divortium., Menander is cited by 
the grammarians for his use of the terms ἀποπέμπειν and ἀπολείπειν in their tech 
nical legal sense. It seems likely that the source of the citation was this play, 
for ἀποπέμπειν occurs in M2, v. 10, and ἀπολείπειν in ν. Sod. The motive of ἀπό 
λειψις was used in the plays entitled ᾿Α πολείπουσα by Apollodorus of Carystus and 
Crobylus, and in the Hecyra of Terence (cf, v. 502). 


, 261) seems to pre- 


) 
᾿ 
fends her character 


42 MENANDER : 


must first leave her husband’s house (ἀπολείπειν). Smicrines’ anxiety 
that the initiative shall proceed from her may be due either to the 
imminent danger that, if she refuses or delays, the dowry will be 
dissipated by Charisius, or to the fear that Charisius may take the 
first step by sending Pamphila away for unchastity and thus retain 
his legal right to the dowry. It seems probable that both motives 
are at play; but in our ignorance of the legal status of the dowry in 
such a case, and in default of any exphcit allusions in the extant - 
text, the former motive may be accepted as sufficient. Charisius, 
as we have seen, does not send his wife away, but himself leaves 
the home. His motive must be sought in the sincerity of lis 
love for her and his desire to spare her the shame and reproach 
which attached to the wife who had been repudiated for the gravest 
cause.' 

In the preceding discussion of the plot of the Epitrepontes fre- 
quent reference has been made to the Heeyra of Terence, the original 
of which was written by Apollodorus of Carystus, one of the famous 
poets of the New Comedy, whose active career began a few years 
after Menander’s death. The similarity in the plots of the two 
plays was remarked by a Latin poet of the fifth century, Apollinaris 
Sidonius, in one of his letters (4.12); and indeed the resemblance 15 
so great that one cannot escape the conviction that the younger poet 
had the Epitrepontes in mind when he framed his plot. Philumena 
had suffered outrage at the hands of her future husband. On the 
birth of her child, which she tries in vain to keep from her hus- 
band’s knowledge, the latter resolves not to live with her again, in 
spite of lis deep affection for her. A ring in the hands of the mere- 
trix Bacchis, with whom Pamphilus had lived, leads to the discovery 
that Pamphilus is the father of the ehild. There are many minor 
resemblances. The words of Bacchis after her discovery (vv. 816 ff.) 
could with little change be transferred to the mouth of Habrotonon.? 


1A repudiated wife in a play by Anaxandrides (56 K.) says: χαλεπή, λέγω 
go, Kal προσάντης, ὦ τέκνον, ὁδός ἐστιν, ὡς τὸν πατέρ᾽ ἀπελθεῖν οἰκάδε παρὰ τἀνδρός, 
ἥτις ἐστὶ κοσμία γυνή. 

2 Compare v. R18, gnatum ei restituo, paene qui harum ipsiusque 
opera periit, with the list of Habrotonon’s services enumerated in KE. 770 ff., 


2 
esp. V. 774, σπουδῇ δὲ καὶ παιδάριον ἐξεύρηκέ σοι." 


EPITREPONTES 43 


In the management of the plot, so far as this portion of the story 
is concerned, other points of similarity are probable, although they 
are not directly evidenced in the present text of the Epitrepontes. 
For example, Charisius, like Pamphilus, probably agreed to keep the 
birth of the child a secret, to spare his wife the shame ; and Smicrines, 
like Phidippus, probably was kept in ignorance of the real cause of 
the difference between his daughter and her husband. But here the 
resemblance ends. Philumena leaves her husband’s house before his 
return from his journey. Sostrata makes every effort to bring her 
daughter-in-law back to Pamphilus, Smicrines to separate Pamphila 
from his son-in-law. Pamphilus is a reformed rake, Charisius a model 
youth apparently gone wrong. The ring was taken by Pamphilus from 
Philumena and by him given to Bacchis, and Bacchis quite by acci- 
dent discovers the secret which brings happiness to her former lover. 
We see that the close literary relationship between the two plays is 
illustrated by the points of intentional difference no less than by 
the points of conscious similarity. Menander composed a comedy to 
which he might have given the name of “ Father-in-law ”; Apollo- 
dorus took almost the same set of characters situated in similar cir- 
cumstances, substituted Sostrata for Sophrona and Phidippus for 
Smicrines, and made of it a “ Mother-in-law.” But except for the 
character of Sostrata in the Hecyra, which is quite as successful 
in its way as that of Smicrines in the Epitrepontes and probably a 
more original conception, the characters in the play of Menander 
are much finer and much more skillfully drawn than those im the 
play of his imitator. 

The scene of the Epitrepontes is laid in a country deme, not far 
from Athens (vv. 25, 245, 501). Two houses are represented in the 
scene. The first is that of Charisius. Pamphila is living there, with 
Sophrona, but not with her husband (p. 95, v. 10, ef. on vi 3o4). Π 
is there that Smicrines visits her (p. 97, v. 20). Charisius does not 
enter this house until the end of the fourth act, when he has learned 
the truth (after v. 742). Onesimus is once more installed there in 
the fifth act, when Smicrines makes his last visit to his daughter 
(vv. 866 ff.). The second house belongs to Chaerestratus, ft is’ ΤΟΣ 
ferred to (p. 98, v.31) as “next door” to the other and is his. Chae- 


restratus, however, seems not to reside there, At any rate Syriseus 


+4 MENANDER 


comes to this house to wait for his arrival, as if by previous appoint- 
ment (v. 161), and with wife and child expects to spend the night 
there (vv. 195, 197). From ν. 194 we learn that Onesimus also 18 
staying at this house; this implies Charisius and Habrotonon as 
well, and the guests whom Charisius is entertaining (v. 195). From 
another set of passages it would seem that Charisius has betaken 
himself to the house of the leno who owns Habrotonon. It 15. in 
such a house, we are told (v. 529), that he is wasting his substance. 
It was not the practice of wild Athenian youth to introduce their 
mnistresses into their homes, but to visit them at the house of the 
leno. When Habrotonon makes her first appearance a number of 
young men, evidently the guests of Charisius, torment her and try 
to detain her (vv. 215 ff.). Sueh a scene would hardly be conceiv- 
able in a respectable house. Finally, Onesimus wishes bad luck to 
the house of Chaerestratus (p. 98, v. 30). His motive is clear if it 
is there that lis young master is making his name notorious. From 
this evidence it would seem that the second house in the scene 
belongs to Chaerestratus, but has been rented by the leno who owns 
Habrotonon. 

Between these two houses there was some sort of communication. 
Charisius “crouching at the door within” overhears the conversa- 
tion of Sunerines and Pamphila (v. 679). The door was probably 
in the division wall that was supposed to separate the gardens back 
of the two houses. This arrangement is often referred to in Plautus, 
ef Stich, 614 per hortuin transibo, Mere. 1008, Cas. 612, etc. 

The papyrus fragments of this play were contained in three dif- 
ferent quaternions, Which are here and in the margin of the text desig- 
nated as x,voand z respectively. The accompanying table will show 
how the extant portions of the text were distributed among these 
three quires. The number of pages between the several continuous 
portions of text may be regarded as certain; but the amount of text 
lost at the beginning and end of the play is merely estimated. The 
second act, which began with the meeting of Davus and Svriseus, 
ean hardly have extended ack amore than half a page beyond D1. 
The first aet probably filled, in addition to the first one and one-half 
paves of quaternion vy, some three pages of the preceding quaternion x, 


inaking altogether about Lo7 lines. The title, hypothesis, and lst of 


EPITREPONTES 45 


characters would have filled all but about sixteen lines of the third 
page. At the end of the play probably not more than a single page 
is lost. The length of the Epitrepontes, according to this estimate, 
was something like thirty-one papyrus pages or about 1100 verses. 


QUATERNION X QUATERNION Y QUATERNION Z 


Quat. page Pap. page Quat. page Pap. page Quat. page Pap. page 


ee eee 1 lost 1 R! (last 11 IL.) 
ON eee 2 lost 2 ΚΞ (last 12 11.) 
Oe 3 7): 3 lost 

Apia Me Rite A 4 Db? 4 lost 

a Gag, ae 5 Gu 5 H! 

Ge Rates 6 C2 6 He 

ie Se er 7 BI cf Q? (last 9 IL.) 
Si ae REN re 8 B? 8 Q! (last 9 Il.) 
a eta zere cee 9 Bs 9 lost 

hes ge ene 10 8: 10 lost 
1 Lea Seats. 11 C3 11 15 

1. ----- 19 (Ge 12 “ι 

13 - - --- 13 NT}, M? (26 1.) 43 lost 

14 lost 14 NT?) MM? (26:1E olde ess 

15 lost 15 NES Sy ea Sa 

16 ve 16 Ϊ Peterin: fh Oe ae ee 


"ΕΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ ΜΕΝΆΝΔΡΟΥ 


TA TOY APAMATOS TPOSOITA 


> , 

Ονήσιμος Μ άγειρος 
Ados Χαιρέστρατος 
Σμικρίνης Σωφρόνη 
Σύρισκος Χαρίσιος 
«ε , 

Α βρότονον 


Χορὸς συμποτῶν 


aE Oe : ἣν ; x ; 
Κωφά: [Γύνη Συρίσκου καὶ τὸ παιδίον: ὑπηρέται τοῦ Mayecpov " 


Παμφίλη." 


40 


EKNITPEMNONTES MENANAPOT 


Scene: A deme of Attica, before the house of Chaerestratus, which is occupied 
by Habrotonon and Charisius, and that of Charisius, in which his wife 
Pamphila still lives. The highway leads to Athens, 


ACT I 
Sc. 1. Onrstmus, Davus 


Onesimus, returning from his errand in the city, meets Davus, who is on his 
way thither. The conversation turns upon the domestic affairs of Cha- 
risius. Three verses from the prologue are preserved in a quotation : 


AAOZ 


> « ψ' , ‘ “ » ’ 
οὐχ ὁ τρόφιμός σου, πρὸς θεῶν, ᾿Ονήσιμε, 


600 K. 


ὁ νῦν ἔχων τὴν ᾿Δβρότονον THY ψάλτριαν, 


ἔγημ᾽ ἔναγχος ; 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


, Χ > 
πανυ μεν ουν. 


After Davus has gone on his way, Smicrines enters, coming from the city (cf.y. 
360). He has probably heard of the estrangement of Charisius and Pamphila 
[ΩΣ 


Fr. 600. On the speakers in the 
exposition scene, see above, pp. 27, 32 
note, 37. These verses are quoted by 
rhetorical writers to illustrate the ef- 
fect of an answer following quickly 
upon the question. The second verse is 
quoted in an unmetrical form ; τήν has 
been added to supply the defect. But 
the art. is not needed, and perhaps 
ἐρασθείς Was originally written and in- 
tionally altered in quoting.— τρόφιμος: 
Photius defines as ὁ νεώτερος οἰκοδεσπό- 


της, and the Latin poets translate by 
erilis filius (Ter. Fun. 289 and Do- 
natus’ note ad loc.) or erus minor 
(Blaut; Mere. 112), 
quently used in the New Comedy, prop- 


The word, fre- 


erly implies that the maior 
(Plaut. Truc. 307) is still alive. See 
ony. 160, 


erus 


Onesimus himself refers 


to Charisius as δεσπότης. ἔναγχος: a 
distinctly conversational word, not em- 
ployed by the tragic poets, who use 


ἀρτίως OY νεωστί. 


48 MENANAPOY 


and comes to inquire concerning the cause of the trouble. At the close of 
the scene, probably after a conversation with Onesimus, he goes into the 
house of Charisius, and Onesimus, probably after a monologue, enters the 


house of Chaerestratus. 


ACT II 


Sc. 1. Syriscus, Davus 


Quat. y, p. 2 


Syriscus enters from the country, accompanied by his wife, who carries a 
baby in her arms. Davus, on his way back from the city, meets them. 
Syriscus has just demanded of Davus (vy. 58 ff.) the trinkets which he has 
heard were found with the child (v. 84), and Davus has refused to give them 
up. We find them here in the midst of their altercation. 


ZTPIZKOZ 


, ‘\ , 
φεύγεις TO δίκαιον. 


D!, quat. y, p.3 


AAO 


συκοφαντεῖς. δυστυχής. 


ZTPIZKOZ 


ov δεῖ σ᾽ ἔχειν τὰ μὴ σ᾽. 

Bodin and Mazon, Extraits de Mé- 
nandre, p. 21, and Fischel, Hermes 
XLII (1908), p. 811, have drawn atten- 
tion to the striking similarity between 
the following scene and the situation 
which Euripides dramatized in the Alo- 
pe, as reported by Hyginus 187. Alope, 
daughter of King Cereyon, bore a child 
to Poseidon and exposed it. A shepherd 
vidit infantem atque eum sus- 
tule: 
eum in 


qui veste regia indutum 


casa, ἀπ ον, ἡ ΡΟ 
compastor rogavit ut sibi eum 
ille ei do- 


autem 


infantem donaret. 


Navi Sine weste. culm 


inter eos jurgium esset, quod 
qui prerum aceeperat insignia 
ille 


autem non daret, contendentes 


ingenuitatis reposceret, 
ad regem Cerecyonem venerunt 
et contendere COSTAR AU ille 


autem qui infantem donatum 


acceperat repetere insignia 
coepit. Observe that the arbitrator 
in the Alope, as in the Epitrepontes, 
proves to be the child's grandfather, 
1. τὸ δίκαιον : the claim which Sy- 
riscus has urged as just, viz., that the 
trinkets should go with the child. gev- 
yes Is COnatiVe.— συκοφαντεῖς : Without 
the old literal implication of blackmail 
and false-witness, but with reference 
to the syeophant’s tricky and sophis- 
tical methods: this is pure chicanery, 
Ce a 


post-elassieal usage, 


258.— δυστυχής: miserable, a 
Menander’s: vo- 
ecabulary is rich in abusive epithets of 
this kind, 
original moral or physical connotation, 


words that have lost their 


¢.2. πονηρός, ἄθλιος, κακοδαίμων, ἱερόσυ- 
dos, ete. The vocative δυστυχής is at- 
tested for Menander by the ancient 
crammarians (fr. 216 K.); ¢f. Soph. 


Phil. 827 ὑπν᾽, ὀδύνας ἀδαής. 


EDITPENONTES ~ 49 


AAOZ 


Ν᾽ 
ἐστι περὶ τούτων. 


> 
ἐπιτρεπτέον τινί 


183 K. 


ZTPIZKOZ 


βούλομαι. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


κρινώμεθα. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


, i 
TLS OUV; 


AAOZ 


3 \ \ oy ie , ΄ \ 
EMOL MEV πᾶς ικανος. δίκαια δὲ 


, 2 , ‘4 
5 πασχω; TL yap σοι μετεδίδουν ; 
Inter Smicrines from the house of Charisius. 


Sc. 2. Syriscus, Davus, SMICRINES 
ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 
τοῦτον λαβεῖν 
βούλει κριτήν: 
ΔΑΟΣ 


ἀγαθῃ τύχη. 


2. ἐπιτρεπτέον : i.e. wore κρῖναι 
(schol. Aristoph, Ach. 1115), the tech- 
nical term for committing a case to 
arbitration, διαιτητὰς αἱρεῖσθαι (Harp.). 
The extensive use which the Athenians 
made of arbitration as a legal process 
made this a most natural suggestion. 
In Plaut. Rud. 1002 Trachalio proposes 
to Gripus that the dispute as to the 
ownership of the casket shall be so 
decided: vide, sis, quoius arbi- 
tratu facere nos vis?) The phrase 
often comes to mean a mere challenge, 
as in Aristoph. Ran. 528 ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ μαρ- 
τύρομαι Kal τοῖς θεοῖσιν ἐπιτρέπω, οἷ. Ter. 
Ad. 128. 

4 ᾿ς τίς οὖν: cf. Theoer, 5.61 ἀλλὰ 
τίς ἄμμε, τίς κρινεῖ; πᾶς: anybody. 
δίκαια δὲ πάσχω: if aftirmative, but {τὸ 


nothing to complain of; in that case, 
however, we should expect γάρ Instead 
of δέ. 
the result of an arbitration, 


But Davus pretends not to fear 
The yap 
in the following sentence shows that 
he has just uttered a complaint, But 
is this fuir treatment of one who has 
shared his tind with you? Cf. Lue. 
Dial. meretr. 9. 4 δίκαια mwérovtla, [ve 
got my deserts, and δεινὰ πάσχειν Iii 
Venus, 

6. ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ: the old 
placed at the head of Athenian decrees 


ΓΤ 


implied ἃ contident wish, may good for 
tune attend. Were the pliurase is weak 
ched to an expression of deqilescence, 
Very well, so be it. It seems to betray 
a certain inquietude on the part of 


Davus ; see Bodin on S. 85. 


50 MENANAPOY 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ (to Smicrines) 


Ν. A nw 
πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, 


, ᾿ * , « A , 
βέλτιστε. μικρὸν av σχολάσαις ἡμῖν χρόνον; 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


«ε -“ Ν , 
ὕμιν; περι TLVOS ; 


ZTPIZKOZ 


ἀντιλέγομεν πρᾶγμά TL. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


pe kay > \ , 
τί οὖν ἐμοὶ μέλει; 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


Ν Ἂς 
κριτὴν τούτου τινὰ 


“ ¥ > EAN \ , 
10 ζητοῦμεν ἴσον: εἰ δή σε μηδὲν κωλύει, 


διάλυσον ἡμᾶς. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


S , > >, , 
ὦ KAKLOT ἀπολούμενοι. 


δίκας λέγοντες περιπατεῖτε. διφθέρας 


ἔχοντες; 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως --- τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ ἐστὶν βραχὺ 


καὶ ῥάδιον μαθεῖν. πάτερ. --- δὸς τὴν χάριν. 


8. A tribrach such as that in the 
second foot, with word-division after 
the second short syllable, occurs only 
ten times in Menander in the first two 
feet and isexcluded from the other feet. 
The first two syllables consist of an 
unelided dissylHabie word in common 
White, p. 145. A tribrach like 
that in the fourth foot, Contained ina 


se, 


word that overlaps both ways, is found 
in the fourth foot also in 1. 288, 300. 
9. Note the sullen and overbearing 
NAtuTne. of ΕΠ πο τ ch, νῶν dail 1. 10); 
10. κωλύει: the uv in this word, al- 
Ways long in anapaestic and dactylic 
rhythms, is short in iambic ἀπ tre- 


Ὁ (Gh we 22) 


11. διάλυσον : the act. of the person 
who effects a reconciliation, the mid. of 
disputants who make up.”? Smicrines 
will soon be engaged in a business of 
this kind, see M!, v. 11, p. 91. — ἀπο- 
λούμενοι : you miserable scoundrels, lit. 
doomed to utter destruction, the familiar 
abusive address of the Old Comedy. 
The future implies a wish. 

12. διφθέρας: the garb of rusties, 
ef. Strepsiades’? words in Aristoph, 
Nub, 72 ὅταν μὲν οὖν τὰς alyas ἐκ τοῦ Ped- 
λέως, ᾧσπερ ὁ πατήρ σου, διφθέραν ἐνημμέ- 
vos. In enumerating the costumes of 
comedy Pollux 4. 119 says πήρα, βακτη- 
pla, διφθέρα ἐπὶ τῶν ἀγροικῶν. It hada 


hood, id. 7, 70. 


ENMITPEIMONTES 51 


Ν 5 a) aA A 
15 μὴ καταφρονήσῃς. πρὸς θεῶν. ἐν παντὶ δεῖ 


καιρῷ τὸ δίκαιον ἐπικρατεῖν ἁπανταχοῦ, 


XN Ν ΄ A 
Kal τὸν παρατυγχάνοντα τούτου τοῦ μέρους 
¥ 4 lo» 
ἔχειν πρόνοιαν κοινόν ἐστι τῷ βίῳ 


fi 
πάντων. 


Ε ΔΑΟΣ (aside) 


μετρίῳ γε συμπέπλεγμαι ῥήτορι. 


τί γὰρ peredidovr ; 


ts 
ἘΞ 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


3 A> ΔΑΙ͂Ν Sika a7. 
EMPEVELT ουν. εἰπε μοι, 


Φ x» , 
ois av δικάσω : 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


’ 
πάντως. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


‘4 4 ἊΝ ’ὔὕ 
τό κωλύον; σὺ πρότερος, 


15 ff. These four verses are quoted in 
Orion’s Anthology, but πρός has been 
lost in transmission, giving a totally 
different meaning to the excerpt. — év 
παντὶ καιρῷ : On every OCCUSiON. 

17. τούτου τοῦ μέρους : this part or 
consideration, viz. τοῦ ἐπικρατεῖν ἀπαν- 
ταχοῦ τὸ δίκαιον. The phrase is little 
more than a rhetorically amplified 
huius rei. μέρος, part, portion, lot, 
role, concern; cf. the phrase τὸ ἐμὸν μέ- 
pos, for my part, so far as T am con- 
cerned, The passer-by (i.e. any one who 
chances upon an issue where justice is 
involved) should give good heed that 
justice prevails. The grandiloquence is 
characteristic of Syriscus. 

18. κοινόν: subj. ἔχειν πρόνοιαν, κτέ. 
Of common interest,and so here an obli- 
gation (from detabove), Cf. Eur. Suppl. 
538 πάσης ‘EXNdd0s κοινὸν τόδε. εἰ τοὺς θα 


> 


vovras... ἀτάφους τις ἕξει. τῷ βίῳ πάν- 


ἀκούσομαι" τί γὰρ 


4 Lo , 
O σιωπῶν. λέγε. 


των : rhetorical amplification for πᾶσι. 
19. μετρίῳ ye: a fuir sort of, litotes. 
Cf. P.389.— συμπέπλεγμαι: a figure de- 
rived from wrestling, cf. Eur. Baech, 
800 ἀπόρῳ ye τῷδε συμπεπλέγμεθα ξένῳ. 
20. τί γὰρ pereSiSouv: cf. ν. Ὁ. 
ἐμμενεῖτε : the usual agreement of arbi- 
trants, ¢f. Dem. 33.15 οἷς οἱ δύο yvoin- 
σαν, τούτοις ἐπάναγκες εἶναι ἐμμένειν. 


21. ois: Plat. 


Crit. 500 ὡμολόγητο. . . ἐμμένειν ταῖς 


cognate obj., ef. 
δίκαις αἷς ἂν ἡ πόλις δικάζῃη: 

22. In the Cairo text only one in 
stance (S. 400) of 


in three words occurs in the 


an ahapaest con 
tained 
first foot, and but three elsewhere 11 
the verse. Tlence the we Which the MS 
gives after κωλύον, making the verse 
unmetrical, is rather to be deleted than 
transferred to the tirst foot. — τὸ κωλύ 
ov: ef. Dem. 1.12 τί τὸ κωλύον ἔτ᾽ αὐτὸν 


ἔσται βαδίζειν. ὁ σιωπῶν: anarbitrary 


52 MENANAPOY 


AAOZ 


ὔ 3 » Ν Ἂν , té 
μικρον 26 ἄνωθεν. ου Τα προς TOUTOV μονον 


θέ θ᾽ δὲ ey \ py Ν , 
πραχ ενῦ , ιν 7) σοι Και σα 7) Ta πραγματα--- 


> “- , lo , an , 
2 ἐν τῷ δάσει τῷ πλησίον τῶν χωρίων 


, x ¥ 
τούτων ἐποίμαινον τριακοστὴν LOWS, 


, , «ε 4 > ‘\ la 
βέλτιστε, ταύτην ἡμέραν αὐτὸς μόνος, 


, ie 
KAKKELLEVOV παιδάριον ευρον νήπιον, 


procedure on the part of Smicrines, 
for the plaintiff had the right to speak 
first. But Menander prefers that the 
party who is to win shall speak last. 
The poets of the Old Comedy follow 
this principle in the ‘*debate”’ or 
ἀγών. 

28 ff. An ancient rhetorician (Spen- 
gel T, p.859, 16) remarked with approval 
that the speeches of the litigants in this 
scene were without prooemia and that 
the effect was realistic: τὴν δίκην ἄνευ 
προοιμίων πεποίηκεν" οὐδὲν δὲ διαφέρει ἢ 
ἐνταῦθα οὕτως αὐτὰ κεῖσθαι ἢ ἐν δικαστη- 
plows λέγεσθαι. Cf, the praise of Quin- 
tilian (10. 1. 70): 
magis orator probari in opere 


sed mihi longe 


suo videtur (Menander), nisi for- 
te aut ila mala (sunt) indicia 
quve Epitrepontes, Epicleros, 
meditatio- 


Nomothete, 


Locroe habent, ΑἸ Δ! 


nes in Psophodee, 
omnibus 


Hypobolimaeo non 


οὐ MIUNETS= Sul ats. 


μικρόν ye.. 
broken sentence reproduces the collo- 


lutae, . πράγματα : the 


quial manner, A partic. is to be Sup 
plied with each of the first two clauses, 
and a predicate, e.g. διηγήσομαι, with 


the whole. ἄνωθεν: sc. ἀρχόμενος. ct, 
Plat. Phil. 44 ἀρχομένους ποθὲν ἄνωθεν. 
The partic. is often omitted with ἄνω- 
dev, as in Dem. 59. 74 βούλομαι . . : περὶ 


es τ ; be eon 
αὐτῶν ἄνωθεν διηγήσασθαι. -- οὐ Ta... 


πραχθέντα : sc. διεξελθών, cf. Dem. 44. 6 
ἀναγκαῖον... μικρῷ ἄνωθεν τὰ περὶ τοῦ 
γένους ὑμῖν διεξελθεῖν.--ἕ ἵνα, . . καὶ 
σαφῆ: the καί is intensive, quite clear ; 
often, as here, in purpose clauses, but 
generally modifying the verb, as Plat. 
Gorg. 407 iva καὶ εἰδῶ 6 τι λέγεις. 

26. τούτων : shows that the scene of 
the action isin the country ; ef. vy. 361. 
-- τριακοστὴν: a month has passed 
since the birth of the child. For an- 
ΘΟ 
27. ἡμέραν : ace. of duration, The 


other indication of the time see y. 


ordinal numbers are usual when the 
point of time reached (*tago”’) is ex- 
pressed, The article does not aecom- 
pany the ordinal in these phrases, cf. 
Aeschin. 3.77 ἑβδόμην δ᾽ ἡμέραν... τετε- 
λευτηκυίας, Lys. 24. 6 τρίτον ἔτος τουτί. 
28. The exposure of children was 
not forbidden by law in Athens (Meier- 
Schomann-Lipsius, Att. Proce. p.o281.), 
but the extent of the practice is by no 
means to be inferred from the use 
made of the motive, with its romantic 
possibilities, by the dramatic poets. 
There little 
against the exposure of deformed chil- 
dren (Arist. Pol. 1535 8 20), though the 
The 


reasons for exposure in the poets are: 


Was publie sentiment 


custom Was peculiarly Spartan, 


to conceal the mother’s shame (Hero, 
Epitr.); the father’s refusal to reeog- 
child poverty 


nize the as his own; 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ δ8 


» , \ ΄ 
εχον δέραια και TOLOUTOVL τινα 


30 κόσμον. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


A 
περὶ τούτων ἐστίν. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


> 27 Ne 
OUK εᾳ εγέιν. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝῊΣ 


ἐὰν λαλῇς μεταξύ, τῇ βακτηρίᾳ 


᾿καθίξομαίΐ σου. 


(Peric.); the fact that the child is a 
girl (Ter. Heaut. 627). A girl was re- 
garded as a heavy burden, Men. 18 K. 
χαλεπόν ye θυγάτηρ κτῆμα καὶ δυσδιά- 
θετον, Poseid. 11 K. υἱὸν τρέφει πᾶς κἂν 
πένης τις ὧν τύχῃ. θυγατέρα δ᾽ ἐκτίθησι 
κἂν ἢ πλούσιος. 

29, δέραια : objects hung about the 
neck as a sort of necklace, in Eur. Ion 
two serpents of gold δέραια παιδὶ veo- 
γόνῳ φέρειν (v. 1431), here the ring and 
other things enumerated in vy. 168 ff. 
Other objects (κοσμός, cf. P. 694) were 
attached to the child in a wallet (anpé- 
διον, V. 114) or laid beside it in a chest 
(ζυγάστριον P. 693, κιστίς P. 633, cis- 
tellin crtim, cre puinditisePlant. -Cists 
655, Rud. 880, Ter. Eun. 159). These 
things and the clothes which the child 
wore are often referred to as γνωρί- 
opuara (VV. 86, 114). The Greek mother 
Who exposed her child to a possible 
death was moved by a curious seruple 
to provide a means of identification in 
case the child was found and grew to 
maturity. Cf. the sentiment expressed 
Heaut. 649 ut 


stultae et misere omnes sumus 


by Sostrata in Ter. 


religiosae, quom exponendam 


do illi, de digito anulum de- 


traho et eum dico ut una cum 
puella exponeret: si moreretur, 
ne expers partis esset de nos- 
tris bonis, The tokens were care- 
fully preserved by the foster-parents 
and later by the foundling (in an ἄγγος 
in Eur, Jon 1412) in the hope that by 
means of them the parents might be 
discovered. The dramatic poets made 
extensive use of such tokens in work- 
ing out recognition scenes; they play 
a part in the first three comedies in 
this edition, For examples from trag- 
edy see vv. 108 ff. Among the various 
methods of ἀναγνώρισις Avistotle Poet. 
1454 B20 considers ἡ διὰ σημείων as ἀτε- 
χνοτάτη. though most frequently em- 
ployed, mentioning περιδέραια among 
the ojmeca. — Note that this verse con- 
sists Of six jambs. Pure lambic verses 
are more common in Menander than in 
Aristophanes, but less common than in 
Euripides. The first diphthong in τοῖς 
οὔτος is measured either long or short 
in Menander, as in his predecessors. 

30. ἐστίν: se. ὁ ἀγών. 

31. λαλῇς μεταξύ: 
λαλῶν, aC TE Δα eNO N ees de ΝΠ Ἢ 

32. καθίξομαι : come doimn upon, ef. 
Luc. Symp, 16 τάχα δ᾽ ἄν τινος καθίκετο 


μεταξὺ tro\apsys 


δ4 ΜΕΝΑΝΔΡΟΥ 


ΔΑΟΣ 


Ν ΄ 
και δικαίως. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


λέγε. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


λέγω. 


“ἀνειλόμην. ἀπῆλθον οἴκαδ᾽ avr’ ἔχων. 


τρέφειν ἔμελλον - ταῦτ᾽ ἔδοξέ μοι τότε. 


v5 
Ψ 


διδοὺς ἐμαυτῷ. διελογιζόμην. 


τί παιδοτροφίας καὶ κακῶν: πόθεν δ᾽ ἐγὼ 


39 >) Ν » - Ld ΄ 
ἐν νυκτὶ βουλὴν On, OTEP ATACL γιγνεται. 


9 10 
ee 5 \ 
εμοι 


195, quat. y, p.4 


~ > 5 £ & vA > yA 23 
τοσαῦτ αναλώσως: TL φροντίδων ἐμοί: 


,ὔ Coy > iA 4 
τοιουτοσΐ τις HV. ἐποίμαινον πάλιν 


4 


= 


ἕωθεν. ἦλθεν οὗτος --- ἔστι δ᾽ ἀνθρακεύς Ss 


te Ν , Ἂς Ν 3 , > on 
εἰς TOV TOTOV TOV αὐτὸν εκπρισων εκει 


στελέχη. πρότερον δέ μοι συνήθης ἐγεγόνει. 


ἐλαλοῦμεν ἀλλήλοις. σκυθρωπὸν ὄντα με 


> Ν ce: , , 59 WA ve “A ” ee , , ” > ’ 
ἰδὼν» “tl avvvous.” φήσις, “Aaos:” “Tl yap:” ἐγώ, 


τῇ βακτηρίᾳ. In this meaning always 
W. gene, in the meaning reach we ace. 

33. Asynd@ton is characteristic of 
Menander’s style, espectally in πα στὰ - 
Live: putssaces, 

35, A new tur to the proverbial 
expression ἐν νυκτὶ βουλή (or whe καὶ 
βουνη)ς on Which see Nock on Men, fr. 
733. Herodotus 7. 12 savs of Nerxes 
νυκτὶ δὲ βουλὴν διδούς. γίγνεται: the 
Cairo MS. consistently gives the forms 
in yer-, Dut the Inscriptions show that 
the short forms did dot come dite use 
Untibatter Zo poe, Meisterhins-Schwy- 
AE Crane, Nt lsd lan se τ: 

36. ἐμοί: sc. δεῖς on Which the veni- 
Hvesin vv. 37, 88 depend. ef. Eur, Med, 


olin σοὶ TE {ap παίδων τί δεῖ; 


37. The tribrach contained ina sin- 
ele word which overlaps the preceding 
and the following foot is found in the 
second foot also inv. 858 and inv. 648 
(proper tame), 

39. τοιουτοσί τις: suck ἃ one 
in such a mood, cf. Theocr, 15. 64: as 
a dion is aroused by the votee of the 
fawn, Πρακλέης τοιοῦτος. . . δεδόνητο, 
Kur. Orest. LO80 Kaya τοιοῦτος. 

43. ἐλαλοῦμεν : 
we fell to talking, Gildersleeve, SSVI. 


deseriptive dmpt., 
$207. ‘The deseription passes from: the 
wor, ἦλθεν first to the impr. ane then to 
the historical present. σκυθρωπὸν... 
Plat. Ale. TT Taka) padvec 


. ws Te ξυννοού- 


σύννους: «tf. 
ὦ τοι €oxvOpwrakévac. . 


μενος (Crolset). 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕῈΣ δ 


wt 


ec , ’ » ” Ν ‘ ~ > 5 “A , 

45 περίεργός εἰμι. καὶ TO πρᾶγμ᾽ αὐτῷ λέγω. 
ε - ε > ΄ my \ , Q 
ὡς εὗρον, ὡς ἀνειλόμην. ὃ δὲ τότε μὲν 


ὑθύ Ν 3 “ , > > Af ee ν ΄ 
ευσυς, πριν ειπειν παντ. ἐδεῖθ ῳ OUTW TL σοι 


>. ~~ , ~ > Φ᾿ Ὁ ’ 
ἀγαθὸν γένοιτο. Ade,” παρ᾽ ἕκαστον λέγων, 


ee 5 Ν Ἂς , , 4 > ΄ 
εμοι TO παιδίον dos > OUTWS €UTUKXS, 


9 A 
50 οὕτως ἐλεύθερος. γυναῖκα." φησί, “yap 


¥ ΄ SS, "ἢ \ Pees 
EX. TEKOVOY) ὃ ἀπέθανεν ΤῸ παιδίον oes 


4 , ἃ lal Vice! es SY δὴ ’ 
ταύτην λέγων, ἡἣ vov ἔχει τὸ παιδίον --- 


ZMIKPINHS 


δέ, r Ν As 
€OE€OU OU TAUT ; 


ZTPIZKOZ 


εὖ tol. 


AAO 


45. περίεργός εἰμι : = περιεργάζομαι, 
i.e. In assuming a responsibility that 
does not belong to me. Cf. Plat. Apol. 
19B Σωκράτης... περιεργάζεται ζητῶν 
τά τε ὑπὸ γῆς καὶ οὐράνια. 

46. εὗρον : the augment in qu- began 
to disappear as early as 821 πιο, and is 
not found in inscriptions after 300, — 
A tribrach composed of three words 
oceurs in the fifth foot also in I. 676 
and P. 1. Aristophanes adimits it here 
only four times. The arsis of ἃ tri- 
brach so formed is elsewhere (exclud- 
ing one in the first foot) almost always 
the final syllable of a word of two or 
more sylables; but three times (IE. 46, 
291, 298) the tribrach is composed of 
two monosyllables and = the first) syl- 
lable of the following word, and once 
(If. 11) of three monosyllables. White, 
p. 110. 

47, πρὶν elmeitv: the meter did not 
adimit ve, Which is grammatically neces- 


sary. —otrw,«ré. : a common formula 


ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 


introducing an entreaty, as here, or ἃ 
positive asseveration, promise, or threat. 
With an entreaty a blessing is called 
down upon the person supplicated ; 
σοί characterizes this usage, while μοί 
is used when the phrase backs up a 
promise, assertion, or threat, Ct. vv. 
Ey stovapojend MAM YU eMule iis Wiel w SINGH DNR πὶ il 
ament. Other formsof the same habit 
ofspeechare inmuumerable, ef, Avistophy. 


Thesm., 469 οὕτως ὀναίμην τῶν τέκνων {1} 


ΔἸ Ὁ ΜΙ τὸ pte! naling 7) 05}. εν} 115 
(AV RB ον oe ee ie 
48. wap éxacrov: οἷν, Mlat. Prot. 


O25 map ἕκαστον καὶ ἔργον Kal No>o1 
διδάσκοντες (1, 11.}.Ψ 
ἡ νοιο. 


49, οὕτως: se. 
50. φησί. yap: the position af yay, 


crowded from its natural posite by 
the interjected @nol. is probably clo 
acteristicof tiformateatioguial speech 
COT Nan Δ as 

FS. kee West) ss CMDR ol on 
MS... Which makes Stiterines adeiress 


56 MENANAPOY 


f nw AY A "2 
κατέτριψε. λιπαροῦντι και πείθοντί με 


ε , ¥ > 3 oN , 
55 ὑπεσχόμην. ἔδωκ᾽. ἀπῆλθεν, μυρία 


εὐχόμενος ἀγαθά. λαμβάνων μου κατεφίλει 


τὰς χεῖρας. 


ZMIKPINIHZ 


9 iA Coe 
E€TOELS TQAUT ; 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


ΣΌΝ 
εποουν. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


ἀπηλλάγη. 


“ , la » 
μετὰ ΤῊΝ γυναικὸς περιτυχὼν μοι Vur, αφνω 


AY ’, le , ‘\ δὲ 
ΠΟ ΤΟΤΕ συνεκτεθέντα τούτῳ aad μικρα (s 


ΠῚ 


ἣν ταῦτα καὶ ληρός τις, οὐθέν -- ἀξιοῖ 


> ΄’΄ Ν ἂν 4 , 9. Ὁ 
ἀπολαμβάνειν. καὶ δεινὰ πάσχειν φήσ᾽ ὅτι 


οὐκ ἀποδίδωμ᾽. αὐτὸς δ᾽ ἔχειν ταῦτ᾽ ἀξιῶ. 


> ἣν ,ὔ 2 ΕῚ , “ ») , 
eyo δέ Y QAUTOV φημι δεῖν EX ELV χάριν 


οὗ μετέλαβεν δεόμενος - εἰ μὴ πάντα δὲ 


Syriseus by name, But they do not 
know cach other, The name was prob- 
ably written above the line as a note 
OG ECON CAD, 

54 ff. ‘The 


briskertone with the aorists. These are 


narrative takes on a 
Interrupted by the descriptive imperf., 


κατεφίλει. The Jeisurely pres. is re- 
stumed iny, 60, —Kkarérpupe: sc. δεόμενος. 
57. ἀπηλλάγη: of his tinal depar- 


ture, ἀπῆλθεν above means he set off, 
GOR πο ΘΙ 


speaking of the cistella) mon edepol. 


ΠΡ ον | Unmet erepundia 


(fata AN POSH: TLS a CMI BE ETP Mohs 
Tue. Lex. 9 ληρόν (frumpery) τινα ἐκρό- 
Tour... τῇ θυγατρὶ Ty ἐμῇ. Whenee the 
le STeoeraphers, misled by the context, 
Invented Anpds (Lat. leria, Fest.) asian 


article of νυ 5 dress, see schol. ad 


Poll. 5. 101. — οὐθέν : οὐθείς 


began to supplant οὐδείς as carly ἀπ τ δ 


We lace. 


nc. in the inseriptions, and prevailed 
after ea, 330, Meisterhans-Schwyzer, 
AN Mies ONT er 7): The 


earlier form wasrevived in the imperial 


Gramm, ad. 258. 
period (cf. moiety, see on TE. 1). On the 
spelling found in MSS. of Menander 
see Kretschmar, De Men. Rell. po 87. 

62. οὐκ ἀποδίδωμι : do not. ie. will 
not, restore. This modal foree ot the 
hee. is common with the imp. 

63. ἐγὼ δέ ye = ἔγωγε δέ. δέ YeuN- 
larly separates ye from the word which 
it modifies if that ds first in the clause. 

64. ob: the regular assimilation of 
the relative to the ease of its omitted 
antecedent, —— Note the position of δέ, 
due to the exivenelies of the verse 


Menander allows in the third foot a 


ENITPENMONTES δ 


. 


κι 


“. 
νυ 


65 τούτῳ δίδωμ᾽, οὐκ ἐξετασθῆναί με δεῖ. 


> x 4 2 A og Ν A Ν 
εἰ καὶ βαδίζων εὗρεν ap’ ἐμοὶ ταῦτα καὶ 


ἦν κοινὸς Ἑρμῆς. τὸ μὲν av οὗτος ἔλαβε δή," 


\ TSA, , 3. CL τ» > ἈΛΌΓΟΥ es q 
TO ὃ eyo μονου ὃ ευροντος. ου ταρων συν YE 


Y >» " ὃ a SAS. 53 αν 
αταντ EX ELV OLEL OE OELV, ELLE οὐδὲ εν: 


5 
_ 
ς 


Ἂν ἐφ 
ΤΟ as as ‘ 


, , , A Πρ τὶ an 
δέδωκα σοι TL Των gece εκων ᾿ 


εἰ τοῦτ᾽ πρεστον ἐστί σοι. καὶ νῦν ἔχε: 


εἰ δ᾽ οὐκ ἀρέσκει. μετανοεῖς ὃ ἀπόδος Ἄς 


καὶ μηδὲν ἀδίκει μηδ᾽ Gee πάντα δέ, 


tribrach contained in a word that over- 
laps the following foot. The word is 
always a quadrisylable whose accent 
coincides with the ictus. See vy. 80, 
194, P. 25, 48, 866, 5. 415, 420. Aris- 
tophanes does not admit this tribrach, 
owing to his preference for the pen- 
themimeral caesura. White, p. 144. 
65. ἐξετασθῆναι : Heculledtoaccount, 
= λόγον ὑπέχειν, cf. Arist. Rhet. 1354 4 
The 
word savors of the official language 
of Athens; all public officials had to 
subinit their accounts to the Lovistae 


4 καὶ ἐξετάζειν καὶ ὑπέχειν λόγον. 


(elsewhere called ἐξετασταί) at the end 
of their term of office, 

67. κοινὸς “Eppas: a proverbial ex- 
pression meaning ** Good luck’s to be 
shared.”? Davus, by implying that one 
had no claim to shares in a discovery 
unless present when it was made, gives 
a new turn to the proverb, which Sy ris- 
cus could properly have quoted in sup- 
Had it 


“cCom- 


port of his claim. Davus says: 
been a case of κοινὸς ᾿ΙΣρμῆς, i.e. 
mon finding.’ Ilermes, says Aristotle 
Rhet. 1401 4 20, is κοινωνικὸν μάλιστα τῶν 
θεῶν. The right application is made, in 
the advice given to one who has discoy- 
Nite hs 


κοινὸς 'ΕΞρμᾶς, pact, καὶ ἐς μέσον κατατίθει 


ered asource of wealth, in Lue. 


φέρων τὸν πλοῦτον. It is characteristic 
of the greedy man of Theoph. Char. 
BU. 7 τῶν εὑρισκομένων χαλκῶν ὑπὸ τῶν 
οἰκετῶν ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς ἀπαιτῆσαι τὸ μέρος, 
κοινὸν εἶναι φήσας τὸν ᾿ρμῆν. 

68. εὑρόντος : sc. ἐμοῦ. 

69. οὐδὲ ἕν: the heut, 
forms οὐδὲ εἷς aiid οὐδὲ ἕν. divided after 
the analogy οἵ the 
common in Menander, 


mase. and 


fem., are very 
especially at 
the end of the verse; and οὐδέ is never 
elided, 


Only six instances are found 


in Aristophanes, of which four are in 
the Plutus. But in the inseriptions 
throughout the 
Sachtschal, De 


Tnethy 


they are not unustal 
Classical period. See 
Grace. sermone 


COM, aceon 


modato, p. 4; Meisterhans-Scliwyzer, 
Gramin, d. Att. Tnschr., p. 105. 

70. τὸ mépas: ¢f. vv. O16, 676, 
72. el & ovKx: oF 
facet, 
that the supposition is correct. Cf, 

thner-Gerth § OPE. th. 


Instead of μὴ in 
view of the Which Davis knows, 
131 and see Ki 


In v. 120, where these samme Words ave 


quoted by Syriseus, but with ve. the 
protasis isa pure hypothe SIS: 

73. The imperatives, ind fabs 
ἀπόδος. CXpress the re silt eaf the su 
vested aet. The thoucht In wore μηδὲι 


e et 
ἀδικεῖν μηδ €\arrovelac. 


Os MENANAPOY 


SN ‘\ ae, , Ν \ , 
Ta μὲν παρ EKOVTOS, TA δὲ κατισχύσαντα με. (", quat.y, p.5 


ren 5) a > »¥ ” ΄ ΦΥῊΝ ΄ 
‘9 OU δεῖ σ' EX ELV. ELPN KA TOV Ὕ εμον λόγον. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


εἴρηκεν: 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝῊΣ 


» » 
οὐκ ἤκουσας: εἴρηκεν. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


καλῶς. 


an » uy Ν lal , asa | «ε ἊΝ 
οὐκοῦν έγω μετα Ταυτα: μονος εὑρ ουτοσι 


‘\ ,ὔ x , »“" > a “ , 
TO παιδίον. και TAVTA ταῦθ Q@ vuv λέγει 


5 oi vA \ , Ψ > ΄ 
ὀρθῶς λέγει. και γέγονεν OUTWS, ὦ πατέρ. 


δι 


Ψ tA , , «ς vA ’ XA 
οὐκ ἀντιλέγω. δεόμενος. ἱκετεύων ἐγὼ 


ἔλαβον παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦτ᾽. ἀληθὴ γὰρ λέγει. 


, , , a 
ποιμὴν TLS eEnyyere LOL, πρὸς ὃν οὑτοσὶ 


4 (λ ox) ’ ’, id ον 
ελαλῆσε. τῶν TOUT@ συνέργων. αμα τινα 


, a > ’, > ἧς: oN , 
KOO [LOV συνευρειν QuTOv. ἘπυὺΤούτονς πατέρ. 


το ν᾿ ε ΄ Lent. (Ὁ r Vx) 
55 αὐτὸς παρέστιν OVTOTL. — TO παιδίον 


δός μοι. yuvar.— 


74. κατισχύσαντα : sulj. ce in next 
verse, Equivalent to ἐμοῦ βίᾳ. 

75. εἴρηκα: such formal declara- 
tions at the close of speeches are Com- 
monet. Bur. Orest, 1205 efpntac Noyos, 
Me ei Ὁ: 

76. εἴρηκεν ; the threat of Smicrines 
inv. Ob has made Syvriseus cautious, 

ΤΊΣ éyo pera ταῦτα SC. Epa. 
οὑτοσί: cf. iste cof one’s opponent in 
at lawsuit 

80. {τ verse contains te dambus 


Mi the ash fine teeth ἡ πη Vie 
nander contains only five such verses, 
ΡΣ Ὧν Ἢ | irene 


82. πρὸς Ov οὑτοσί: The ainitpaest 
Words 1s Lad ΕΞ 
Masctirelvtes, Nel Uae allots 


coptadiecl dia three 


Wot ΠῚ 


Takes the ehild from lis wife’s arms. 


Note that a pause in the sense pre- 
codes, 
84. ἐπί: after, to get, ef. Avistoph. 


Ran. 1418 κατῆλθον ἐπὶ ποιητήν. 

85. αὐτὸς πάρεστιν : Syriscusadopts 
the notorious practice of defendants 
before Athenian. juries, παιδία avase- 
Bacduevos iva ὅτι μάλιστα ἐλεηδείη (Vat. 
Apol. 3j4e). cf. Lvs, 20,54 €av res mat- 
δας αὐτοῦ ἀναβιβασάμενος κλαίη καὶ ὁλοφι- 
ρηται. “The practice is parodied im Av 
istoph. Vesp. 976, where the spokesman 
for the defendant dow Labes says : mob 
τὰ παιδία: ἀναμαίνετ᾽. ὦ πόνηρα. Kal κνι"- 
(ούμενα αἰτεῖτε κἀντιολεῖτε καὶ δακρύετε. 
Itmust be acknowledged that Syrisetus 
uses this method of arousing pity with 


exceptional restraint and dienity, 


ENITPEMONTES 59 


Ta δέραια καὶ γνωρίσματα 


ΑΕ ἃ 3. 9 A A> c “ τῇ 
οὗτός σ᾽ ἀπαιτεῖ. Aa. ἑαυτῷ φησι γὰρ 


μευ & Jott) A ’ὔ > ἂν , 
TAUT ἐπιτεθῆναι κοσμον. ου σοι διατροφήν. 


κἀγὼ συναπαιτῶ. κύριος γεγενημένος 


’ Ἂν ον , , 4 
90 τΤουτου OU ὃ ETONTAS HE δούς. 


Restores the child to his wife. 


νῦν γνωστέον, 


th id ott Net} rf « 5 Ν “- 
βέλτιστέ, σοι Ταῦτ ἐστιν. WS εμοι δοκεῖ: 


\ τὰ 5, σὴ. .2 59 , , A 
Ta χρυσι 7) ταῦθ O Tl TOT EOTL, ποτέρα δεῖ 


κατὰ τὴν δόσιν τῆς μητρός, ἥτις ἢν ποτε, 


a a, a θ᾽ Ψ x» 5) a 
Τῳ παι ἰῳ TY PELo >» EWS AV ἐκτραφῃ. 


ὌΠ ΤΆ XN x Ν ὃ Ue) SEN folie Pet 
95 ἢ TOV AEAWTTO UTYKOT QUTOV ταῦτ EX ELV, 


> A Ὄ Ε] , ΄,΄ s ΄ 
εἰ πρωτος εὑυρε. ταλλότρια. του TOTE, 


EA n> > δὰ τ abe Χὴ 
ot ἐλάμβανον τοῦτ᾽. οὐκ ἀπήτουν ταῦτά σε; 


» 399 NGI. 7 51 Ἂν ε ν ΄ὕ yea ee 
OUT W παρ εμοι TOT HY ὑπερ τουτου λέγειν. 


9 δὲ Ν la > ΕῚ ar ΦΕῚ ὑδὲ a 
ὭΚω O€ και νυν OUK ἐμαύυτου σ᾽ OVOE EV 


86. καὶ γνωρίσματα : equivalent to 
καὶ τὰ ἄλλα γνωρίσματα, for Davus has 
admitted (ν. 35) that he found other 
objects besides the dépaca. 

87. ἑαυτῷ: construe with κόσμον, 
which is in predicate apposition to 
ταῦτα, as is διατροφήν also. 

90. ἐπόησάς pe: sc. κύριον τούτου. 

91. ταῦτα: for τάδε. looking for- 
ward to what is to follow, because the 
matter referred to has already been 
thought of or expressed by the speaker ; 
see Kiihner-Gerth § 467.7, Xen. Mem. 
ΠΣ ον το 
The structure of the sentence 


. ὀνομαστὸς ἐπὶ τούτῳ 
γέγονε. 
is colloquially irregular. 

92. τὰ χρυσία: proleptic subj. of τὴς 
ρεῖσθαι. AS Davus vy. 60 depreciates 
his find, so Syriscus hints at its possible 
value. —6 te: the MS. gives @ te. an 
exceptional dialect form of the indet. 
rel. found only in the Law of Gortyn, 
The common Attic form ἅττα, which 


Jirst. 


some editors adopt, gives a highly ob- 
+)in 
the fourth foot; see White, p. 157. 
95. Note the doubly overlapping 
anapaest in the third toot. 
DO ste eae: 


doubt the fact, but states the whole 


jectionableanapaest (+ U, u, - 


εὗρε: Syriseus does not 
pointatissueasan hypothesis: whether 


the man should) keep these things, 
anothers property, ἐγ he found them 
The speaker incidentally trices to 
prejudice the judge by characterizing 


τἀλλό- 


Tpta:: reserved to the end for greates 


the finder as δε petty thief." 
emphasis.- rootv: cur tandem, an 
assumed question by Davis. 
98. Syriscus’ answer to the assumed 
map ἐμοὶ ἦν: fm ney purer, 
He did not then know, he 


question. 
παρὴν μοι. 
inenns, of the existence of the tokens 
τούτου : (he elilid. 
99. καὶ vow: eren mow not for my 


self, σε AO AF tail 


60 MENANAPOY 


’ A ce Ν 9 a » ἡ Dan 
100 ἴδιον ἀπαιτῶν. “κοινὸς Ιρμῆς᾿ μηδὲ ἕν 


eer σι 55)» ὦ , Cans ee) , 
ευρισχ οπου προσέστι σωμ ἀδικούμενον. 


- » ay ἘῈ 7 3» δὰ Da J > ΓΤ; , 
οὐχ εὑρησις τοῦτ ἐστιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀφαίρεσις. 


180Κ. 


γ a} ~ 
βλέψον δὲ κἀκεῖ, πάτερ: ἴσως ἔσθ᾽ οὑτοσὶ 


ig TEN € \ « A XN Ν > 3 , 
γεγὼς ὑπὲρ ἡμᾶς. καὶ τραφεὶς ἐν ἐργάταις 
Lint fa) , lexi) > δὲ Ν ¢ a , 

105 ὑπερόψεται ταῦτ΄. εἰς δὲ THY αὑτοῦ φύσιν 


{a » , , , an 
ἄρας ἐλεύθερόν τι τολμήσει ποεῖν --- 


r mi , [2 ’ὔ , τ 
θηρᾶν λέοντας, ὅπλα βαστάζειν. τρέχειν 722K 


γι δεν ΟΝ , , 540) ὦ 
εν αγώσι. τεθέασαι τραγῳδούς. οἷὸ OTL, 


| ees, A wn fr , , \ 
καὶ ταῦτα κατέχεις πάντα. Νηλέα τινὰ 


100. κοινὸς “Epps: sarcastic allu- 
sion to the argument of Davus inv. 67. 
-- μηδὲ ἕν εὕρισκε : do no ‘finding, i.e. 
talk not of ‘finding.’ 

101, ὅπου πρόσεστι: when it's a 
question of, ete, 

103. βλέψον δὲ κἀκεῖ: just look αἱ 
this point also. Cf. Kur. Orest. 1181 
καὶ σὺ δεῦρο νοῦν ἔχε. 

104. τραφείς : concessive. 

105. ταῦτα : «all this, spoken with ἃ 
gesture that embraced the ἐργαταί pres- 
ent._els... vou: cf. Hippocr. De nat. 
hom. Kitthn XV, p.53, καὶ πάλιν γε ἀνάγκη 
ἀποχωρέειν εἰς THY ἑωυτοῦ φύσιν ἕκαστον. 

106. ἄρας : rising. The intr. use of 
thesimple verbafpwisrare, but is clearly 
discerned ina few passages: Soph. Phil. 
1330 ἕως ἂν αὑτὸς ἥλιος ταύτῃ μὲν αἴρῃ, 
τῇδε δ᾽ αὖ δύνῃ πάλιν, Plat. Phacdr. 247 1 
ἡ δὲ (ψυχὴ) τότε μὲν ἦρε. τότε δ᾽ ἔδυ. ATist, 
Parv. nat. 475. 8 τῷ ἐμφύτῳ πνεύματι 
αἴροντι καὶ συνίζοντι. ibid. ATIALG διὰ 
τὸ μὴ δύνασθαι τὸν πνεύμονα μακρὰν al- 
ρειν ἄνω καὶ συνίζειν. Most of the com- 
pounds of αἴρω show intr. meanings. 
The image of ‘rising” was probably 
stieeested by ὑπὲρ ἡμᾶς (Heidel), — ἐλεύ- 
θερόν : hetitting his free birth 

107. ‘The chase, warfare, and ath- 


leties, to the rustie the distinguishing 
occupations of the ligh-born as con- 
tristed Sawa othe asus “her come 


trymnman witnessed athletic contests 
occasionally, and, as guide to * hunt- 
ers from the city”? (like Gorgias in the 
Hero), heard them relate their exploits 
in hunting and fighting in the East. 
Note the tragic style (βαστάζειν) and 
meter (ὅπλα — Vv). 


108 tf. Classic 


tragedy of the good fortune which tad 


Hlustrations from 
come to foundlings through the sate- 
keeping of their γνωρίσματα. The poet 
ean contidently appeal to the specta- 
tors acquaintance with the myths of 
travedy, and even with the Tnes, at 
least of iiniripides et. ΠΣ ai. 
Plant. Rud. 86, 


perforne rs, for perfornianees ; 


τραγῳδούς : {71:17 
pang etal 
cally interchangeable dn certain uses 
With τραγῳδίας. 


109. Neleus and 


cretly born te Poseidon by Pyro who set 


Pelias were se- 


themadriftina boat, Poundand reared 
to manhood, they were recoonized by 
their mother and beeame kings at Py- 
Jus and Toleus, The myth was ised hy 
Sophocles, Caremus, and Astydamts 


the Πα i laws enon tee siya: 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤῈΣ ΟἹ 


110 Πελίαν τ᾽ ἐκείνους εὗρε πρεσβύτης ἀνὴρ 


αἰπόλος, ἔχων οἵαν ἐγὼ νῦν διφθέραν.- 


C2, quat.y, p.6 


€ δ᾽ » > > \ » «ες “ ,ὔ 
ως ῃσθετ QUTOVUS OVTAS QAUTOU KpelTTOVas, 


΄ Ν A 2 ec (2) ε > , 
λέγει TO πραγμ., ὡς EVPEV, WS ἀνείλετο, 


» > > A ΄ ΄ 
ἔδωκε ὃ αυτοις πηρίδιον γνωρισμάτων, 


> es , ΄ Ν > ε \ a 
15 ἐξ οὗ μαθόντες πάντα τὰ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς σαφῶς 


> ee ia) ε Ses 5. > ’ 
ἐγένοντο βασιλεῖς οἱ TOT ὄντες αἰπόλοι. 


adesp. 488 


εἰ δ᾽ ἐκλαβὼν ἐκεῖνα Aaos ἀπέδοτο, 


αὐτὸς ἵνα κερδάνειε δραχμὰς δώδεκα, 


> “ xv Ἂν , ’ , 
AYVWTES av TOV παντα διετέλουν χρονον 


Γ. εἼ “ \ Lal ἴων ΄ 
19 οἱ τηλικοῦτοι και τοιουτοι TW γένει. 


151Κ. 


9 τ Aig oh Andee \ oles ie tS) ΄ 
οὐ δὴ καλῶς ἔχει τὸ μὲν σῶμ᾽ ἐκτρέφειν 


> \ “ Γ᾿ 5 aL Cee vs \ aA ig 
ἐμε TOUTO, τὴν αὐτου δὲ τῆς σωτὴριας 


ἐλπίδα λαβόντα Aaov ἀφανίσαι. πάτερ. 


γαμῶν ἀδελφήν τις διὰ γνωρίσματα 


Presumably the poet has in mind the 
play by Sophocles, the recognition 
scenein Which was famous. See Nauck, 
ΑΝ Ὁ Cees Bec 

111. αἰπόλος: Apollodorus Bibl. 
1.9.8 calls him a groom, ἱπποφορβός. 

114; πηρίδιον : according to Arist, 
Poet. fot nzo the recognition was ef- 
fected διὰ τῆς σκάφης. The story of the 
two young men about their exposure 
in a boat may have first aroused the 
suspicion of Pyro, and the tokens 
brought confirmation, — Phe anapaest 
contained in the last three sylables of 
a word which begins in the preceeding 
foot is used freely by Menander, as by 
Aristophanes, in the fourth foot, sel- 
dom in the third, and but once (Τὸν 341) 
in the fifth. White, p. 152. 

117. Ados: i.c., Δᾶός Tus, instead of 
the kind goatherd, Possibly we should 
read ἐκεῖν, ἃ Nios, sc, ἐξέλαμει — ἀπές 


Soro: solu. 


118. δραχμάς : the first syllable is 
treated as either long or short by the 
comic poets; Menander usually puts 
the word in the odd feet. — δώδεκα; a 
petty sum, contemptuously mentioned 
as the price of the children’s heritage. 

122. τὴν αὐτοῦ δέ: the attrib, posi- 
tion of the poss. pron, is due to the 
presence of τῆς σωτηρίας, ἃ second at- 
tribute of ἐλπίδα. Otherwise the order 
would have been τὴν ἐλπίδα αὐτοῦ. See 
Kithner-Gerth καὶ 464, 4. 

124 ff. Otherinstances from tragedy. 
The allusions are too vague for iden 
tifleation. The motive γαμῶν ἀδελφὴν 
ἔπεσχε IS Unknown to US Tn any trag 
edy, but is found tn Menanders Per 
eciromene and the Epidicus of Τα τιν, 


A omother is resened by her long-lost 


sous in Buripides’ Antiope, Hypsipyle, 
and Melanippe. oN brother is saved dy 
his sister in Kuripides’ Iplizeneia in 


Tauris. 


62 MENANAPOY 


125 ἐπέσχε, μητέρ᾽ ἐντυχὼν ἐρρύσατο, 
ἔσωσ᾽ ἀδελφόν. ὄντ᾽ ἐπισφαλῆ φύσει 


ἣς , «ε ’ὔ ἰοὺ ᾿ς a , 
τὸν βίον ἁπάντων TH προνοίᾳ δεῖ, πάτερ, 


A ἣν ROE an 10’ 3 A > ac 4 » 
TYPE, TT po TO OU TAVU OPWVT ἐς WV EVL. 


ec 9 


> ures] , 2) Vaso & an gs teal ee λα] , ᾽» lal Ν 
ἀλλ᾽ ἀπόδος, εἰ μή," no’, “ἀρέσκει. τοῦτο γὰρ 


130 ἐσχυρὸν οἴεταί τι πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ ἔχειν. 
οὐκ ἔστι δίκαιον. εἴ τι τῶν τούτου σε δεῖ 


ἀποδιδόναι. καὶ τοῦτο πρὸς ζητεῖς λαβεῖν ; 


Ἄγ Sane } , , ’, 
ἵν ἀσφαλέστερον πονηρεύσῃ πάλιν, 


125. ἐρρύσατο: another word not 
used in comic dialogue nor in prose ; 
Glas 10: 

126 f. ἐπισφαλῆ. κτὲ.: 
v. 36, p. 99. 

128. πρὸ πολλοῦ : explaining mpo- 
vola. It must be construed with ὁρῶντα, 


ef. ΡΟΣ 


not with τηρεῖν, otherwise προορῶντα 
would have been necessary. — Tatra... 
ἐξ ὧν ἔνι : sc. τηρεῖν, with what means 
we may. ταῦτα. ob). of ὁρῶντα, refers to 
contingencies such as have been illus- 
trated above, by which good fortune 
may be secured to foundlings. 

129 ΟῚ ave ia — she ΛΝΙΥΥ ream 
φησίν gives in the fourth foot an ob- 
jectionable Which begins 
with an wnelided word of two or more 
syllables. Three of the five instances 
(cf. also P. 363) which occur in the 
Cairo MS. are clearly to be eliminated 
by emendation (EF. 239, P. 397, 405), a 
fourth admissible (i. 151). 
The correction here is easy; the papy- 


anapaest, 


may be 
rus offers a number of instances of 
failure to elide (e.g. S. 398). 
White, p. 156, 

130. ἰσχυρόν: in predicate apposi- 


But see 


tion to τοῦτο. 
131. οὐκ ἔστι δίκαιον: if isn't fiir, 
referring te the proposal just quoted. 


- εἰς κτέ, : assuming that. The question 


represents the second of the alterna- 
tives which are presented if the princi- 
ple is accepted that the trinkets go 
with the child: (1) that Davus shall 
give the trinkets to Syriscus, who now 
has the child, or (2) that Syriscus shall 
give back the child to Davus, who has 
the trinkets. Syriscus speaks as if the 
principle were conceded. εἰ is there- 
fore almost equivalent to ἐπεί. It is 
possible, however, to construe εἴ τι, κτέ. 
down to ἡ τύχη ν. 184 with οὐκ ἔστι 
δίκαιον. regarding the whole as a loose- 
jointed: assertion, — a sort of breath- 
less πνῖγος at the end of an otherwise 
well-ordered speech. In this case ¢- 
recs is embraced in the protasis, e 
. σε δεῖ, καὶ (εἢ . ζητεῖς. -- (}}} 
the anapaest in the second foot, with 
word-division G, UG — , the first sylla- 
ble being the final syHable of an un- 
clided word, see White, pp. 155 f. Tt 
is admitted by Aristophanes in the 
second and fourth feet and apparently 
not excluded by Menander from = the 
second foot, See on P. 365. 


132. καὶ τοῦτο: fhe child too, Davus 


already having the trinkets. — πρός: 
adyv., strenethening the καί. 


133. A scornful question, respond- 
Ing toanod on the part of Davus to the 


ἀσφαλέστερον: 


preceding question, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤῈΣ 03 


5» nw w~ 
εἰ νῦν TL τῶν τούτου σέσωκεν ἡ τύχη; 


135 


o 


» A 9 
εἴρηκα: κρῖνον ὅ τι δίκαιον νενόμικας. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


» > ¥ tome} / # Ν ’ 
ἀλλ᾽ εὐκριτ᾽ ἐστί: πάντα τὰ συνεκκείμενα 


an ΕἾ nw 
τοῦ παιδίου ᾽στί: τοῦτο γιγνώσκω. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


τὸ παιδίον 8’; 


καλῶς- 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


> ti cy 34 3 Ἂς rs ϑ Ν 
οὐ γνώσομ, εἰναι, pa Al, ἐγὼ 


lal lol LO lal “ lal γ Ν Ἄ 1 
τοῦ νῦν ἀδικοῦντος, τοῦ βοηθοῦντος δὲ καὶ 


4, AT lol 
140 ἐπεξιόντος τῷ ἀδικεῖν μέλλοντί σοι. 


πόλλ᾽ ἀγαθά σοι γένοιτο. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


δεινή γ᾽ ἡ κρίσις." 


\ \ ole Ν Cte) Ψ 5. ee aN ΓΝ ἢ 4 
VY) TOV Ata Tov OWT) p τ ἅπανθ ευρων μονος 


ν , > [1 > > « As »Γ τ 
απαντα περιέεέσπασμ, , O ὃ ουχ ευρων EXEL. 


οὐκοῦν ἀποδιδῶ: 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


φημί. 


since nobody would be ina position to 
call Davus to account for the property. 
--- πονηρεύσῃ πάλιν: pliy the knave once 
more. Syriscus has in mind his selling 
the tokens. 

134. εἰ νῦν τι : si quid nune, The 


187. γιγνώσκω: vox propria for a 
legal decision, cf. Arist. Resp. Ath. 48. 
5 6 τι av γνῶσιν οἱ δικασταί, τοῦτο κύριόν 


ἐστιν. The decision agrees with the 


principle for whieh Syriscus has con- 
tended, but is also consistent with the 
alternative proposed by Davus. The 
spelling γινώσκω is post-Menandrian ; 
see on γίνομαι Vv. 85, 

139. ἀδικοῦντος : sc. αὐτό. 

140. τῷ ἀδικεῖν : Menanderis rather 
conservative in his use of crasis. — σοι: 
reserved to the end for emphasis. 

141. δεινή ye: 

144, οὐκοῦν : really then? 


outrage OURS, 


04 ΜΕΝΑΝΔΡΟΥ 
ΔΑΟΣ 
δεινή γ᾽ ἡ κρίσις," 
“5 ἢ μηθὲν ἀγαθόν μοι γένοιτο. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚῸΣ 
,ὕ r ye! 
φέρε ταχύ. 
AAO 
ὦ Ἥρακλεις, ἃ πέπονθα. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 
Ν ΄ (pv. 2 
τὴν πήραν xara 
ΝΥ A » ’’ Ὅν ’, 
και δεῖξον. eV TQUT?) περιφέρεις γάρ. 
(To Smicrines, who is about to leave) 
βραχὺ" 


, ε , Sens A 
TPOOMELVOV, ικετένω σ «ιν ἀποδῷ. ΒΡ quat. y; .p.7 


AAOX 


/ Ν 3 Ν 
τὶ γὰρ ἔγω 
5 4 , 
ἐπέτρεψα TOUTY ; 
SMIKPINHS 


δὸς ποτ΄. ἐργαστήριον. 


ΔΛΟΣ (handing the wallet to Syriseus) 


γ΄. » oi z 5: « , ἢ 
In) αἰσχρά γ ἃ πέπονθα. 


XMIKPINH® (to Syriseus) 
, > » 
TAVT EXELS; 
SRE NOs 
οἰμαι γε δή. 
146, & = ola, ef. Aesch, 


οἷα πρὸς θεῶν πάσχω θεός. 


ΠΤ ΞῸΣ 149. ἐργαστήριον : new as a term 
“πήρανχάλα: 


open up, cf. Plaut. Rud. 114d solve 


of abuse, probably meaning ἐργασόμενος 


ἐν pudou, or the like. Cf. Cat. 42. 13 


vidulum ergo. 

148: rl yap. Kress eis Vive Ὡς ΟἿ: 
Davus repeats himself ina helpless sort 
Ol way? 


af Waitin oF litparnkun, ait sa pple 
ditius potest quid esse (Mazon), 
ιν Avil Saas ANI ASOT, COM OOO Te y 
Ste τ ἀπ key 


EDITPENONTES 65 


= MIKPINH> 


ἕν ,3) ’ἅ , Ν , > nw 
ει μὴ τι KATATIETTWKE ΤῊΝ δίκην εμον 


, ε ἔν > 
λέγοντος, ws ἡλίσκετ᾽. 


3 Δ ΕΣ 
ουκ αν WOLLN)V. 


> > 
ἀλλ᾽ εὐτύχει, βέλτιστε: τοιούτους ἔδει 


θᾶττον δικάζειν πάντας. 


Exit Smicrines to the city. 


AAOZ 


Les) fA ge 4 "ἢ 
ἀδίκου πράγματος. 


Ὧν δ , > , ΟΖ 3.» se: ΙΕ gt 
155 ὦ Ἡράκλεις. οὐ γέγονε δεινή γ᾽ ἡ κρίσις; 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


πονηρὸς ἦσθας. 


AAOZ 


= Py oP AG She Mis 
ω TOV) Pp όπως OV νυν 


τούτῳ φυλάξεις αὐτὰ σώσεις T ἀσφαλῶς." 


> »¥ , stds" fen IX n 
€U ἴσθι, ΤῊ PNT COC Τα ΤΟ ΤΟΝ χβονον. 


151. When Syriscus answers as if 
in doubt, Smicrines reassures” him. 
Before ef μή se. ἔχεις πάντα. -- τὴν 
δίκην : the verdict, which the ws-clause 
summarizes. 

152. οὐκ ἂν ὠόμην: sc. αὐτὸν κατα- 
πεπωκέναι. Syriscus has taken the jest 
seriously. 

153. ἔδει : contrary to the fact, 
would God that, lit. it ought to be that. 

154. θᾶττον: here in the sense of 
μᾶλλον. --- δικάζειν : sit in judgment. — 
πάντας : without exception, emphatic 
by position. — These last) words are 
spoken as Smicrines is taking his de- 
parture to the city, Whence he returns 
in v. 900. -- ἀδίκον πράγματος: the 
genitive of exclamation, cf. ν. 880, It 
is more frequent with an interjection 


(e.g. ὦ, οἴμοι) or an exclamation, as 
Misyeeelge 

156. The second-person forms ἦσθα 
or ἦσθας, οἶσθα or οἶσθας. are attested 
by the ancient grammarians as δ Hel- 


Jenie δ and are occasionally found in 


classical Attic, Kithner-Blass § 200.3, 
Cronert, Memoria Graeca Hereulanen- 
sis, p. 270. — ὁπώς, xré.: the const. is 
Arist. Pol. 


B09 B16 τηρεῖν ὅπως κρεῖττον ἔσται τὸ 


τηρήσω σε ὅπως, κτέ., Ct. 


ΝΣ Isoe. 7. 30. 

157. odoes: of. vv. 191, 180. 

158. εὖ ἴσθι : hiatus is recularly ad- 
mitted in the trimeters of both the 
tragic and the comic poets atter εὖς τίς 
and epi, and in comedy after w and 
in the combination οὐδὲ es and its 


»” 


forms. Kauhner-Blass § 48. 5, 


Ss 
Φυ 


ΜΕΝΑΝΔΡΟΥ 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


οἴμωζε καὶ βάδιζε. 


Exit Davus to the country. 


N Ν ’΄ , 
συν δὲ TQAUTL, γυναι. 


10 λαβοῦσα πρὸς τὸν τρόφιμον ἐνθάδ᾽ εἴσφερέ. 


Χαιρέστρατον νῦν γὰρ μενοῦμεν ἐνθάδε, 


els avptov δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἔργον ἐξορμήσομεν 


\ » Ν > ὃ ΄ > Ν An , 
ΤῊΝ ἀποφορὰν αποόοντεέες. ἀλλὰ ταυτα μοι 


a9 9 a ag. ¥ ΄ , 
πρωτ ἀπαριθμῆσαι καθ εν. εχέις κοιτίδα τινα: 


15 Badd’ εἰς τὸ προκόλπιον. 


While Syriscus opens the wallet his wife holds out the fold of her dress. 
At this moment Onesimus comes out of the house of Chaerestratus. 


160. τρόφιμον: the allusion may be 
to Charisius, whose relationship to 
Chaerestratus (see p. 29) the specta- 
tors already know, or to Chaerestratus 
himself. The word properly means 
erilis filius (see on fr. 600, p. 47); 
if it has that meaning here, however, 
we must assume that Syriscus has 
learned that Charisius is not living in 
his own house (cf. v. 194). The second 
alternative is therefore more probable. 
τρόφιμος Way mean simply δεσπότης ac- 
cording to the scholiast to Aristid., p. 53 
Dind., though in the passage which 
he cites (fr. 600) it = erilis filius, 

161. The explanation is obviously 
for the benefit of the spectators, Syris- 
cus expects to do an errand in the city 
before Chaerestatus arrives (v. 245). 

163. ἀποφοράν: aimonthly payment 
made to their masters by slaves who 
worked out for hire (οἰκοῦντες χωρίς). 
Instead of having the money brought 
to him in the city Chaerestratus cous 
to his country home to receive it. In 
Andoc, Myst. 38 a slave-owner goes 
out to Laurium on the first of the 
month (πανσέληνον) to colleet from his 
slave resident there. In Aeschin, 1.7 


the payment amounted to two obols a 
day. The author of [Xen.] Resp. Ath. 
1. 11 complains that this system pro- 
duced a class of rich and impudent 
slaves. 

164. ἀπαριθμῆσαι : imy. inf., count 
over, cf. Xen, Oec, 9. 10 ἀπαριθμήσαντες 
καὶ γραψάμενοι ἕκαστα.-- κοιτίδα : prob. 
busket here. κοιτίς = μικρὰ κίστη ace, to 
Suidas and schol. Lue. Epist. Sat. 21. 
— Menander admits a trisylHabic dac- 
tyl in the fifth foot only here and 
in S. 94; and in the third foot not at 
all, contrary to the practice of Aris- 
tophanes (8 Instances). White, p. 148, 

165. Since his wife has no basket, 
as she indicates by a negative cesture, 
the fold of her himation will serve, 
The προκόλπιον was the loose part of 
the robe in front of the breast, formed 
that 
passed from the richt shoulder to the 


by the corner of the himation 


left. By simply extending the right arm 
areceptacle could be made of the fold, 
The nigeardly man in Theoph. Char. 
22. Β carries home in this receptacle 
the vevetables which he has bought at 
the market. Cf. also for this practice 
id. 6.4 and Men, fr, 201 K. 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 


Sc. 3. Syriscus, ONESIMUS 


σὺ 
“I 


ΟΝΉΣΙΜΟΣ (to himself) 


μάγειρον βραδύτερον 


» Ν ere Cnt ety” xb) Ν , 
οὐδεὶς εορακε. TYVLKQAUT ἐχθὲς παλαι 


» 
επινον 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


ε Ni ἣν 4 ve 
οὑτοσὶ μὲν εἶναι φαίνεται 


ἀλεκτρυών τις καὶ μάλα στριφνός: λαβέ. 


τουτὶ δὲ διαλιθόν τι. 


ψ' ε γ 
πέλεκυς οὑτοσί. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ (aside, noticing Syriscus) 


4 Lal > 
170 τί ταῦθ᾽: 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


ε , 4 , «ε Ψ 
UTOX PUT OS δακτύλιός τις OUTOOL, 


— At his entrance in the opening 
scene Onesimus was probably returning 
from the city, whither he had gone to 
hire a cook for the day’s banquet (see p. 
37). At the close of the first act he 
retired into the house in which Chari- 
sius wasstaying. — βραδύτερον : slower, 
i.e. at arriving, tardier. He does not 
arrive until about v. 375. The same 
motive of a tardy cook is found in 
Plautus’ Mercator: in v. 578 it is pro- 
posed to hire a cook and give a dinner ; 
in ν. 697 Lysimachus says egomet 
conduxi sed eum de- 
miror non venire ut iusseram; 
the cook finally arrives in v. 741. 
βραδύς tardy cf. Thuc. 7. 43.5 ὅπως... 


coquom, 
For 
τοῦ περαίνεσθαι ὧν ἕνεκα ἦλθον μὴ Bpa- 


δεῖς γένωνται, and 
loiter. 


the vb. βραδύνειν 


166. τηνικαῦτα: cf. Plat. Phaedo 
76 Bavpiov τηνικάδε. The day before, the 
cook was on time; the meal (v. 894) was 
by this time long since over, and the 
sympositm under way. 
ready afternoon, Cf, Aristoph. fr. 347 


It is now al- 


Κι. ἀλλ᾽ ἐστίν, ὦ πάτερ, κομιδῇ μεσημβρία, 
ἡνίκα γε τοὺς νεωτέρους δειπνεῖν χρεών. 
168. Cf. the enumeration of γνω- 
ρίσματα in the recognition scene P. 
646 ff. and note ad loc. — στριφνός: a 
Hellenistic by-form of στιφρός (Moeris), 


Jirm, of flesh, = στερεός (Hesych.). Sy- 


riscus pinches the toy rooster, which 
Was made of clay or metal, as market- 
ers squeezed birds before buying (Aris- 
toph. Av. 530 οἱ δ᾽ ὠνοῦνται βλιμά Corres), 
The 
otpipvos is used in the Septuagint, Job 


and declares it * tough.” noun 
20. 18, of a tough piece of meat that 
cannot be masticated or swallowed : 
ὥσπερ στρίφνος ἀμάσητος. ἀκατάποτος. 
169. διάλιθόν τι : something set with 
stones. The adj. is used of a pitcher 
in Men. fr. 508 1., and of 
necklace in the Athenian and Delian 


4 0} ἀπ} 


temple inventories, Ditt. Syl? 686.65 
and 588, 184, 198. 
Rud. 1158 


item aurea, 


πέλεκυς : cf. Plaut. 
securicula anecipes, 

170: ὑπόχρυσος : gilded, ἃ Meanie 
attested by the temple inventories of 


68 MENANAPOY 


αὐτὸς σιδηροῦς. γλύμμα ταῦρος ἢ Tpayos— - 


οὐκ ἂν διαγνοίην — Κλεόστρατος δέ τίς 


i ae a ε » 4 , KS ’ 
ἐστιν ὁ ποήσας. ὡς λέγει τὰ γράμματα. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ (to Syriscus) 


"ἄγε, δεῖξον. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ (handing him the ring) 


» \ 9 2G Σ 2 
ὭΣ: σὺ ὃ εὐτὺς: 


ONHZIMOZ 


Fey Sle 7: 5 
αὐτος €OTL. 


ZTPIZKOS 


΄ 
LLNS 


ONES IMOS 


175 "ὁ δακτύλιος. 


ΧΤΥΡΙΣΚΘΣ 


« A > Ἂν , 
O TTOLOS ; OU yep μανθάνω. 


ΟΝΉΣΙΜΟΣ 


fe Aq fd 5 ~ Γ΄ , 
τοῦ δεσπότου τοὐμοῦ ΧΝαρισίου --- 


Delos, Ditt. Syl.? 588.15 δακτύλιοι σιδη- 
pot ὑποκεχρυσωμένοι. Such compounds 
of ὑπο- usually give the material which 
underlies the plating. 

171. σιδηροῦς : He tests its weight ; 
or perhaps the gilding was worn off on 
the edges. — γλύμμα: -- σήμειον. It 
Was a seal-ring with an intaclio cut 
in a stone setting. Phe device was in- 
distinet, as that on the ring of Dems 
in Aristoph. Eq. 954 (θρῖον, λάρος) ; ct. 
P. 647, where the object thought to be 
a goat or an ox proves to be a deer, 
Oris this a jest at the expense of a 
contemporary artist Cleostratus 2 He 
is otherwise unknown, 

173. Artists’ signatures have rarely 
been found on ancient seal-rings, 

174. The detailed description of the 


ring attracts the attention of Onesi 


mus. —qv: like ἰδού, is often used by 
one Who complies with a request. 
αὐτός ἐστι: ifs the very one. ‘The as- 
sertion startles Syriseus, who has no 
idea What Onesimus is talking about, 
and naturally supposes that αὐτός re- 
fers toa person, 

What ring? 


The question betrays the confusion of 


175. ὁ ποῖος : ring? 


Syriseus, Who cannot vet understand 
how Onesimus can speak of the ring 
as ct the very one.” motos preceded by 
the art, generally repeats a word whieh 
the speaker slyly pretends not te 1111- 
Aristoph. ANE ον ὦ 


ποῖος οὗτος Λάμαχος; whe is this Lama- 


derstiund, EN Ate 


chusvanyway ? Nub. 1270 τὰ ποῖα ταῦτα 


χρήματα. the money 2. Aust what money 


do you mean 2? Vhis tisace is te be dis- 


tinetished from: ποῖος Without the art., 


ΕΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 09 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 2 
χολᾷς. 
ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 
ra 9 τὰ 
ὃν ἀπώλεσεν. 
ZTPIZKOS 


τὸν δακτύλιον θές. ἀθλιε. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


‘Tov ἡμέτερόν σοι θῶ; πόθεν δ᾽ αὐτὸν λαβὼν 


ιν; S| 
EXELS ; 


ZTPIZKOS 


Λπολλον καὶ θεοί, δεινοῦ κακοῦ. 


᾿ Lipari 2} 3 Ν Lal , 3.43 QA , nn 
180 οἷον TO σῶσαι χρήματ᾽ ἐστὶν ὀρφανοῦ 


‘Tatoos. ὁ προσελθὼν εὐθὺς ἁρπάζειν βλέπει. 


'τὸν δακτύλιον θές. φημί. προσπαίζεις ἐμοί; 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


~~ ὃ , > iz Ν Ν 3, , Ν , nf 
τοῦ δεσπότου ᾽στί, νὴ TOV ᾿Απόλλω Kal θεούς. B, quat.y, p.s 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


> , , Δ ’ x 
ἀποσφαγείην πρότερον av δήπουθεν ἢ 


am 4 θ ΄ὔ Ed ὃ ΄, 
185 τουτῳ TREACO υφείμην. αραρε. ικασομαι 


the colloquial Attie idiom in which the 
speaker repeats ina tone of scornful 
dissent or ridicule a word just used by 
the preceding speaker, e.g. Aristoph. 
Ach. 761 οὐδὲ σκόροδα: -- ποῖα σκόροδα: 
garlic indeed! 

176. XoAas = palver, cf. S. 


Ii. 665. 


204, 


177. θές: put down, = θὲς κάτω or 


κατάθες. The omission of the adverbial 
element gives to the command a per- 
emptory tone. 

178. ἡμέτερον : slaves regularly use 
the plural of the first) personal pro- 
noun (ἡμεῖς) to indieate their masters ; 
the plural possessive pronoun, of that 
Which belongs to them. Cf. v. 905. 

181. ὁ προσελθών: the art. 
the partic. often generalizes, and is al- 


with 


most equivalent to ὁ mds, ef. ὁ παρατυ- 
χών v.17, ὁ βουλόμενος, etc. — ἁρπάζειν 
βλέπει : looks lureeny, a locution for 
Which there are many parallels in 
tragedy and in comedy, e.g. Aristoph, 


4“ 
¥ ἡ- 


Ach. 576 οὐδὲν βλέπουσιν ἄλλο πλὴν 
gw δακεῖν. Ran. 603 βλέποντ᾽ ὀρίγανον. 
Kithner-Gerth § 410. 3¢,. 

185. καθυφείμην : yire in, by making 
terms: used especially of compromis 
ing a ease out of court, Demosthenes 
Meid. 151 that 
made to him by friends of Metdias 
Δ Ποῖ ἃ 

Werres. reer 


Says ἃ proposal was 


καθιυφεῖναι τὸν ἀγῶνα. Tow tine 
Was assessed aeninst 
was criticized ὡς ἐπ΄ ἀργυρίῳ τὸ τίμημα 
καθυφειμένος. Plut. Cie 8. The judieral 
sense here is uiade clear by δικάσομαι. 


ἄραρε: i Naeftle il, κέκριται, βεβαίως 


TO MENANAPOY 


7 7” Γ ἰδί > , ΕῚ > , 
aTact καθ ενα. παιοιου στιν. ουκ εμα. 
Proceeds with the examination of the wallet. 


στρεπτόν τι τουτί: λαβὲ σύ. πορφυρᾶ πτέρυξ. 


¥ \ Pa er! 
€LOW δὲ παραγε. 


His wife, with the child and the tokens, departs into the house of Chaerestratus. 


ὦ a r A he ἈΝ , 4 
(To Onesimus) σὺ δὲ τί μοι λέγεις; 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


r v2 » XN « ἣν lal A 
Χαρισίου στιν OUVUTOOL* TOUTOV ΤΟΤΕ 


10 μεθύων ἀπώλεσ᾽, ὡς ἔφη. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


ἐγώ : 
Χαιρεστράτου 


» » 9 ld x fen nw > ~ 
ELL OLKET?)S. 7) σῴζε TOUTOV ἀσφαλῶς 


» EN 4. δὲ 
7) μοι δὸς ανυτω. 


ONHZIMOZ 


γ ΄ὔ pA »Ὰ la ΄ 
τίγαρ: ἔχω σῶν. βούλομαι 


αὐτὸς ᾿ φυλάττειν. 


ΣΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


οὐδὲ ἕν μοι διαφέρει" 


οὕτως ἔχει καὶ ἀμετακινήτως (Suidas), cf. 
ur, Or, 13380, Med. 522 μὴ Χόγους Χέγε: 
ὡς ταῦτ᾽ Apape. 

187. στρεπτόν τι: probably ἃ twisted 
metal collar, suchas the Persians wore, 
represented on the Alexander mosaic 
CPP ee NT oie 


SOS | ey of Themistocles, ἰδὼν νεκρὸν στρε 


Issus F 


of the battle of 
πτὰ χρυσᾶ... περικείμενον, αὐτὸς μὲν 
παρῆλθεν. The neuteras noun is found 
wsointhe temple iiventories of Athens 
and Delos, Ditt. ἈΠ] 586. 28 στρεπτὸν 
περίχρυσον ὑπάργυρον. ΜΕ πτέρνξ: 
τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ χιτωνίσκου Poll. τ. 62 one of 
the two sides of the chiton whieh the 
ehild’s mother dad worn (see ν 9.19), 
The trinkets laid with the child were 


Wrapped in it. For this meaning see 
Aristoph. fr. 825 1. τὴν πτέρυγα παραλύ- 
σασα τοῦ χιτωνίου. Sucha piece assisted 
in the recognition in the comedy from 
Lae ol eels (ola eNO Ge mnie 
111), πτέρυξ χιτωνίσκου γυναικείου (lsc 


of purple. Ὁ:2}, ἀπ in Bur ΔΊἸωμο (above, 


Ghoran, fr. 


p. 50) eum adlata essent (insig- 
MEV eh COs Ce nets (σον ΣΟ πὶ 
esse ex veste sceissa filiae suae, 
188. εἴσω πάραγε: intr., puss in. 
cf. Kuphron 10. 15 1, 
ν᾿ tea : me 
192. αὐτῷ. τί yap; ἔχω: see Crit. 
Ap. The crasis involved in the reading 


αὐτῷ iva παρέχω is very harsh. Tt has 
heen removed from v. 118... ἐχὼ σῶν: 


ef. Xen, Anab. 7.6.52 éxetvo σῶν, €xere. 


ENITPEMONTES il 


> 2X Ν ᾿ 4 4 > Ν ~ 
εἰς TAUTO γαρ παράγομεν,. WS ἐμοι δοκεῖ, 


19 δεῦρ᾽ ἀμφότεροι. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


\ \ > ΄ Ν 
νυνι μεν ουν σνυηναγουσι και 


5 » » \ » 
OUK ἐστιν ευκαιρον TO μηνύειν LOWS 


> ia Ἂς , ¥ ΄ 
αυτῳ πέρι TOUTWYV* αυριον δέ. 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


καταμενῶ, 


αὔριον ὅτῳ βούλεσθ᾽ ἐπιτρέπειν ἑνὶ λόγῳ 


A 
ETOLILOS. 


Exit Onesimus into the house of Chaerestratus., 


οὐδὲ νῦν κακῶς ἀπήλλαχα. 


194, παράγομεν : this verb in its in- 
transitive meanings, which are rarely 
found in classical Greek, signifies sim- 
ply pass along ; οἱ παράγοντες, the pass- 
ers-by, ΟἿ. 2129. The direction must 
be indicated by an adverb or preposi- 
tion: pass in (= παριέναι) παράγειν eis, 
ἐπί, εἴσω, etc., cf. Polyb. 4. 44. 3 παρά- 
γουσιν ἐπὶ τὴν Body, pass out παράγειν 
ἐκ, ἔξω, etc., cf. Polyb. 5. 18, 4 θεωροῦν- 
τες ἐκ τῆς πόλεως παράγουσαν τὴν δύναμιν. 





Syriscus is probably led τὸ the con- 
jecture (δοκεῖ) that Onesimusisabout to 
enter the same house by some motion 
in that direction on the latter's part. 
There is no indication that he knows 
that Charisius is the son of his master; 
nor, if he had that knowledge, would 
he be aware that Charisius is not living 
in his own house, 

195. συνάγουσι: intrans., they're 
getting together, i.e. for entertainment, 
ef. the definition in Athen, 365¢ ἔλε- 
γον δὲ συνάγειν καὶ τὸ μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων πίνειν, 
καὶ συναγώγιον τὸ συμπόσιον. quoting 
Menander (158 K.). Athenacus con- 
jectures that the verb in this meanine 


implies a banquet ἀπὸ συμβολῶν. The 
usage seems to be characteristic of Hel- 
lenistic and late Greek, ef. Euphron 
1.10 K., Diph. 43. 28 N., Sophilus 4 IK, 
nov ye μετ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἐστιν Ἑλλήνων ἀεὶ 
συνάγειν, Athen. 112 ες 4208, οἱ δὲ νῦν 
συνάγοντες ἐπὶ τὰ δεῖπνα. ‘The verb is 
sometimes used transitivelyin the mean 
ing get (quests) together, cf. PL δὴ συν- 
ηγμένοι οἱ συνήθεις and fr. 450 1K. ἀστεῖον 
τὸ μὴ συνάγειν γυναῖκας μηδὲ δειπνίζειν 
ὄχλον (at ἃ wedding). The object ἀπ ν 
be a collective noun, «4. συναγαγεῖν 
συμπόσιον. Poll. 6. &. 

196 f. τὸ μηνύειν : the art. particn- 
larizes. The thought of felling was in 
both their minds. —atr@: ipst. For 
the dat. see on vy. ΘΕ 

198. βούλεσθε: vou and Charisius 

- ἐπιτρέπειν : κοι οἷν, ἢν ἑνὶ λόγω: 
constr, With ἕτοιμος. Tom ready. ΠΥ ἡ 
Pesaytls AC fic ANTS te el ee Ni Ce als eee ΠΝ 


199, ἕτοιμος : “ι΄. ὦν. οὐδὲ νῦν: "7 
this tine. either, veferving te has 410 - 
bate with Davus. Tle is contidient ot 


SILC CESS, 


ce MENANAPOY 


"οὐ πάντων δ᾽ ἀμελήσανθ᾽, ws ἔοικεν. δεῖ δίκας 


an Ν , Ν 
μελετᾶν: διὰ τουτὶ πάντα νυνὶ σῴζεται. 


Exit through one of the parodoi. 


A group of revelers enter, probably from the city, and give a performance. At 


the close of the performance they retire into the house of Chaerestratus. 


ΧΟΡΟῪ 


ACT ΜΠ 


Enter Onesimus from the house of Chaerestratus 


Sc. 1. OnerstuMus alone 


ONHZIMOS 


ΓΝ , ν A » 2 
τὸν δακτύλιον ωρμηκα πλεῖν ἡ πεντάκις 


τῷ δεσπότῃ δεῖξαι προσελθών. καὶ σφόδρα 


λ ΕῚ x 8 a Ν ἧς ΕἸ la an 
ὧν ἐγγὺς NON Kal πρὸς αὐτῳ παντελῶς 


A wn , 
205 avadvopat. καὶ τῶν πρότερόν μοι μεταμέλει 


᾿ Ν iA 
μηνυμάτων. λέγει γὰρ ἐπιεικὼς πυκνά: 


ee ε ay ’ “ ’ὔ Ἂν Lite 3 ea) 
WS TOV φράσαντα ταυτὰ μοι κακὸν KAKWS 


201. νυνί: nowadays. Ttwouldseem 
from this that the Athenians in Menan- 
ders day were no less litigious than at 
the time of Aristophanes” Wasps. 

χοροῦ : on the chorus see above, p. 
joa, te fion P, 146 -S. 413. No consid= 
erable interval of time is supposed. to 
The 
of vy. 198 does not fall 


Within the time covered by the action 


Clapse during this intermission, 


S1O=NOLrOWws 


of the play. 

202. πλεῖν: a shortened 
πλέον, like οἶμαι for οἴομαι. 
ead he 
Attic writers, and by them only before 


form οἵ 
Kiihner- 
Blass $50, Tt is used only by 
numerical expressions, Tt does not oe- 
eurat all im inseriptions of the classi- 
cal period, 

204. ἐγγύς: se. 


αὐτώ παντελῶς: fn fuel, 


αὐτοῦ. --- καὶ πρὸς 
right in his 
presence, καί corrects σφόδρα ὧν ἐγ ύς 


by substituting forit the more precise 


παντελῶς πρὸς αὐτῷ. (Cf. Plat. Apol. 254 
ὀλίγου τινὸς ἀξία ἐστὶ καὶ (or rather) obde- 
yds, Phaedo ὅδιν παρῆσάν τινες καὶ πολ- 
Nol ye, and atque in Cie, Lege, 3. 14. 
o2 panei atque admodum pau- 
el. For mpés meaning close fa ef, Soph. 
O.T, 1169 πρὸς αὐτῷ γ᾽ εἰμὶ τῷ δεινῷ 
λέγειν. on the dreaded brink of speech 
(Jebb). 

205. avaSvopar: cf. Aristoph. Ran. 
R60 ἕτοιμός εἰμ᾽ ἔγωγε, κοὐκ ἀναδύομαι. 
δάκνειν δάκνεσθαι. 

206. ἐπιεικῶς : like satis and Ene, 
moderately, tolerably, rather, with di- 
Ininishing effect on the following word, 
The frequeney with which Chavisius 
utters the sentiment of the next verse 
eauses Onesimius apprehension, 

207. us: 


λοιτο καὶ ἄλλος, Mur. Wipp. 407 ὡς ὅλοιτο 


ef, Hom, Od. 1.47 es a7ré- 
TAYKAKWS. NTIS, KTE. ws tor ee or ed 


γάρ is confined to the povts. — ταῦτα: 


ENITPEMONTES 18 


ὁ Ζεὺς ἀπολέσαι." μή με δὴ διαλλαγεὶς" 


πρὸς τὴν γυναῖκα τὸν φράσαντα ταῦτα Kal’ 


210 συνειδότ᾽ ἀφανίσῃ λαβών. καλῶς ᾿δ᾽ ἔχει" 


ν , x 4 ~ i , νον Δ 
ετέρον τι προς τουτοις κυκαν. καιτοι iA εμοι 


> an \ ¥ ; gol ss i 
κἀνταῦθα κακὸν ἔνεστιν ἐπιεικῶς μέγα." 


Habrotonon comes hurriedly out of the house of Chaerestratus, angrily 
addressing some young men who try to hold her at the door. 


Sc. 2. OnEstmus, HABROTONON 


ABPOTONON 


“ , > > Ἂν ’ 
ἐατέ μ᾽, ἰκετεύω σε. καὶ μή μοι κακὰ 


παρέχετ᾽. (‘To herself) 
215 λέληθα χλευάζουσ᾽- 


θεῖον δὲ μισεῖ μῖσος ἄνθρωπός μέτι. 


Onesimus had told his master of the 
birth of the child, and Charisius had 
learned from Pamphila that she had 
been the victim of misfortune. The 
regret of Charisius that he had learned 
the truth marks the first stage in his 
change of attitude toward his wife. 

208 ff. μὴ... . ἀφανίσῃ : ἃ construc- 
tion common in Homer, revived by 
Euripides and Plato. GMT. § 201. — 
ἀφανίσῃ : annihilate, cf. ἀϊστοῦν in 
Aesch, Prom, 151. 

211. κυκᾶν:: cf. ν. 356. —Kalror ye: 
introducing a grave objection to the 
plan ἕτερόν τικυκᾶν. Cf. Aristoph. Ach. 
G1 Xen. Mem 202: 3: 
lie open to Onesimus : he may (1) show 
the ring, to be the 
father of a child, possibly cause him 
to be reconciled with his wife, and - 


Three courses 


prove Charisius 


be annihilated himself (vv. 251 ff. com- 
pared with vv. 686 ff.); (2) he may 
stir up some new complication and 
thus divert his master’s attention from 


ΡῚ , c » « fos εἶ 
ἐμαυτήν. ὡς ἔοικεν. αθλία. 


3 »» Le , ma 
ἐρᾶσθαι προσεδόκων. 


B3, quat.y, p.6 


his former fault; or (8) he may give 
the ring back to Syvriseus {τ 219). 
Habrotonon settles the question in 
While 


pondering upon the situation Onesimus 


favor of the second course. 
does not at first see Habrotonon, 

PRPS OE Aristoph. Plut. 348 ἔνε yap 
τις ἔνι κίνδυνος ἐν τῷ πράγματι. 

213. She addresses the revelers in 
general, but in particular the one (σε) 
Who Was annoying herimost, On these 
revelers and the chorus see p. 35. 

214 1. ἐμαυτὴν χλευάζουσα : iil 
myself adbutt of mockery, explatned ly 
When the you 


6} shies 


PYLE 


the following. 


saw that Charisius did) net 


With affection they thouelit that thes 
could take liberties with her. Tpoce- 
δόκων: cf. Δὰν. 22. 20K. οἱ δ᾽ ἐμάσιναι 
προσδοκῶντες. 

216. “θεῖον. τ πε yarov, With the 
pliarase αν τας ἀρ 4 ς of ey Ne co papceo's 


ἄνθρωπος: indignantly, 


et G4 & 


ἐμίσουν aurous, 


τ te ee δ ἀπ ΝΥ: 


i4 MENANAPOY 


> , Ψ» “ιν ἣν > \ A , 
οὐκέτι μ᾽ ἐᾷ yap οὐδὲ κατακεῖσθαι, τάλαν, 


> ε 7 5 Ν A 
Tap αὑτόν, ἀλλὰ χωρίς. 


ΟΝΉΣΙΜΟΣ (to himself, not seeing Habrotonon) 


ἀλλ᾽ ἀποδῶ πάλιν 


> - , > ΄ ΕΣ 
Tap οὗ παρέλαβον ἀρτίως ; ατοπον. 


ABPOTONON (to herself) 


τάλας 


a yA “ 5 4 3 , 
220 οὗτος. TL τοσονυτον ἀργύριον ἀπολλύει; 


> τ , > ee] ἊΝ , Ν “ “ , 
ἐπευ TO oy, ετι TOUTW ΤΟΙ ΤῊΝ θεοῦ φέρειν 


Diogen. 2. 46 


a »” ta ay 4 “- > > mY , 
KQVOUV ELOLY ΟΥΟ ΤΕ ΕΟ ΠΕ 1) τάλαν: 


ἁγνὴ γάμων γάρ, φασίν, ἡμέραν τρίτην 


non κάθημαι. 


217. κατακεῖσθαι : = κατακλίνεσθαι. 
Two persons reclined on each couch 
at an Athenian banquet, ef. Plat. 
Symp. 175 ρον, Respectable women al- 
Ways sat. 

218. χωρίς: 1.0. 


cf, Herod. 9. 16 καί σῴεων οὐ χωρὶς ἑκα- 


at another table, 


τέρους κλῖναι. ἀλλὰ Πέρσην τε καὶ Θηβαῖον 
ἐν κλίνῃ ἐκάστῃ. The idea of compul- 
sion (ον πὶ κελεύει, ἀναγκάζει) is derived 
from the negative οὐκ ἐᾷ. Cf. Dem. 19. 
S2 μὴ δὴ ταῦτα λέγειν αὐτὸν ἐᾶτε, ἀλλὰ 
. δεικνύναι, Ierod. 9. 2. 
219. ἄτοπον: se. ἂν εἴη. 
220. τί ἀπολλύει : why docs he waste 
The amount Was twelve drach- 
ον πὴ: 
Menander prefers the w-conjugation 


COR WG. 


Hine war εἰν, see 


of this verb. 
ey ἘΞῚ ἶ Ε 
221. τό γ᾽ ἐπὶ τούτῳ: so fur is it 
lies with him, Τούτου ἢ €vexa, ΟἿ: 
Nen. Anab. 6.6, 255 76 ἐπὶ τούτῳ απιοξ 
λώλαμεν, φέρειν κανοῦν: only virls 
οὐ ποι] family and οὐ irreproachable 


reputation were chosen to carry the 


920K. 


baskets of offerings in the great relig- 
ious processions. ‘The action of Hip- 
parchus in sending away the sister 
of Harmodius as st unworthy” 
a deadly insult (Thue. 6.56.1). The 
Panathenaic festival is probably meant 


Was 


here. 

223. ἁγνὴ γάμων: a formal phrase 
that had come to be proverbial (φασίν) ; 
Diogenian, 2. 46, referring to this prov- 
erb, explains: ἐπὶ τῶν σωφρόνων γυναι- 
κῶν, εἰρωνικῶς δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν μὴ σωφρόνων. 
In the ancient oath which the women 
swore Who took part in the ceremony 
of the ἱερὸς γάμος is the phrascedul καθαρὰ 
καὶ ἀγνὴ ἀπό τε τῶν ἄλλων τῶν οὐ Kada- 
ρευόντων καὶ am ἀνδρὸς συνουσίας. {Dem. | 
OY. τ, -- τὴν τρίτην : cf. Eur. Hipp. 155 
τοῦς πο γον Υ Inter tron sthis 
statement that Charisius had learned 
of his wife’s secret only the day before 
vesterday. Tis purpose in taking Tae 
brotonon was, not to foreet his trouble, 
but tocreate a certain impression, See 


above, p. ol. 


ἘΠΙΤΡΈΠΟΝΤΕΣ 75 


ONHEIMOX (to himself) 
aA λ > ‘ ~ lal 
πὼς ἂν οὖν, πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, 
A » 
225 πῶς ἄν, ἱκετεύω — 


Enter Syriscus through one of the parodoi. Habrotonon stands aside until 
his departure. 


Sc. 3. Onestmus, HABROTONON, SYRISCUS 
ZTPIZKOZ 
mn? γ a Aes » ‘\ 
Tov στιν ov ζητῶν ἐγὼ 
ig > _ ~ . . . 
TEPLEP KOM ; Sees Onesimus in the vestibule, about to enter the house. 
“5 »Ὰ ὃ ἴον ΄ al 9 , 
οὗτος ἔνδον. ἀπόδος. ὠγαθέ, 
Ν uA x A ial , 
τὸν δακτύλιον ἢ δεῖξον ᾧ μέλλεις ποτέ. 


κρινώμεθ᾽. ἐλθεῖν det μέ ποι. 


ONHEIMOS 

τοιουτονί 
> Ὁ A > ¥ A Ν ig 
ἐστιν τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽, ἄνθρωπε: τοῦ μὲν δεσπότου 
» > ἌΝ Ὁ a e Ἂ σ΄ ts 

230 ἔστ᾽, οἶδ᾽ ἀκριβῶς, οὑτοσὶ Χαρισίου, 

oF lo} \ A 4 Ν “ , 
ὀκνῶ δὲ δεῖξαι: πατέρα yap Tov παιδίου 
αὐτὸν ποῶ σχεδόν τι τοῦτον προσφέρων. 
μεθ᾽ οὗ συνεξέκειτο. 


224 f. πῶς ἂν οὖν, κτέ. : Onesimus is 
still thinking aloud ; ἱκετεύω, pray, ad- 
dresses no one in particular. His 
thought probably was: “ον, then, 
if Iam not going to give back the ring 
nor show it to Charisius, am I to get 
rid of Syriscus?*? At this moment 
Syriscus returns. 

226. περιέρχομαι: the vb. shows 
that Syriscus comes not from the house 
but from the side entrance. 
Onesimus standing in the πρόθυρον of 


Ile sees 


the house of Chaerestratus, and there- 
fore can speak of him as ἔνδον. Ex- 
tensive use was madeof the vestibule in 


the New Comedy in representing indoor 
scenes. See on δι 195. 

227. ποτέ: with the imy., as well 
as in questions, ποτέ expresses linpa- 
tience, Lat. tandem. Construe with 
δεῖξον. 

232. ποῶ: the pres. is more posi- 
tive than the fut. would have been. 
The assertion is moditied by σχεδόν τις 
practically, almost certainly. Of course 
Syriscus does not understand this un 
til he is told of the circumstances in 
which the ring was lost. 


Dost μεθ᾽ ov: th 


ring. — συνεξέκειτο : sul}. τὸ παιδίον. 


ἀπο, is τούτους the 


-- 


6 MENANAPOY 


ZTPIZKOD 


πῶς, ἀβέλτερε; 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


a > “ 
Ταυροπολίοις ἀπώλεσεν τοῦτόν ποτε. 


235 παννυχίδος οὔσης καὶ γυναικῶν: κατὰ λόγον 


> Ν Ἂν; lal 5 , 
εστιν βιασμὸν τουτον ειναι παρθένου. 


ἡ δ᾽ ἔτεκε τοῦτο καξέθηκε δηλάδη. 


> ΄ > ε \ > , , 
ει μεν τις OUV ευρων ΕΚΕΙΡΝΎΝ προσφέροι 


Ἂν Ν LS oY Jean , 
τοῦτον, σαφὲς ἀν᾽ τι δεικνύοι τεκμήριον. 


Ν ϑι He τὰ Ss N » 
240 νυνι ὃ υπονοιαν και ταραχὴν EXEL. 


aBéAtepe: stupid, an abusive epithet of 
Which the comie poets were fond; see 
Blaydes on Aristoph. Nub, 1201, and 
cf. Men. 393 K. ἐπαβελτερώσας τὸν πά- 
λαι γ᾽ ἀβέλτερον, of a slave who makes 
a still greater ass of his master. 

234. Ταυροπολίοις : a festival in 
honor of Artemis Tatiropolus, cele- 
brated in Ara- 
phenides on the east coast of Attica, 
Soros le ὩΣ 


the deme of Halae 
north of Brauron, cf. 
"ANal ᾿Αραφηνίδεςγ Grov τὸ τῆς Tavpo- 
πόλου. 
γα] except the mere name (Hesychitus), 


Our first knowledveof the festi- 


is derived from this play. We learn 
that it Wasa pervigilium celebrated by 
the women, Men were excluded, but 
the oceasion naturally attracted some 
as loiterers on the outskirts, men who 
got drunk and invaded the privacy of 
the womenif opportunity offered, With 
the case of Charisius cf. Aristoph. Pae. 
ΤῸ f. ἣν (θεωρίαν) ἡμεῖς ποτε ἐπαίομεν 
ραυρωνάδ᾽ ὑποπεπωκότες: “The dances 
of the girls (v. 260) nay have been a 
partof the ritual, for Artemisdelichted 
In φόρμιγγές τε χοροί τε (Tlom. ΠῚ Μ 111]. 
Aphr. 19) and such danees were ΤΣ 


tumary at her festivals (Wernicke in 


Pauly-Wissowa Realeneyel., 11. col. 
1555). Helen was taking part in such a 
dance at the festival of Artemis Orthia 
at Sparta when Theseus carried her 
away (Plut. Vit. Thes. 31.3), —Note in 
the first foot an exception fo the rule 
(see On TE. 7) that the dactyl which over- 
laps the following foot Is generally 
contained ina quadrisy lithic word 
Whose accent corresponds Δ 1 1Ἰὴ ies 
tus. Twoot the five exceptions in this 
text (here and vy, 295) abe proper Tanes 5 
σον ἜΘ ss 
440. White, p. 118. 

2308 mavvux (Sos, qTe.:  hendiadys 
for γυναικῶν παννυχιζουσῶν. —— On the 
dactyl in the first foot see precedine 
hote, 

236. τοῦτον: subj. of εἶναις for τοῦτο 
(= τὸ γεγονός), attracted to the gender 
of its predicate βιασμόν. 

239, τοῦτον: ἼΔΕ 


displacement of στὸ In the MS. gave in 


ure ᾿ 
τὸν δακτύλιον. — 


the fifth foot a forbidden anapaest, be- 
einning with a monosvilabie enelitic, 
SCC Ito Wa: 

240. νυνί: 


beine 


as the case stands, the 


other Unknown, ὑπόνοιαν: 


mere suspicion Without proof, — ἔχει: 


ΕΠΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕῈΣ ves 


ΣΥΡΙΣΚΟΣ 


Ἂ τῆς μὴ 4 > δ᾽ 3 , > A 
αὐτὸς περι τούτων. εἰ ὃ ανασείεις, ἀπολαβεῖν 


σκόπει 


Hesych. 


τὸν δακτύλιόν με βουλόμενος δοῦναί τέ σοι 


’ A a 
μικρόν TL, ληρεῖς: οὐκ ἔνεστιν οὐδὲ εἷς 


παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ μερισμός. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


οὐδὲ δέομαι ταῦτα On. 


STPIZKOZ 


5 “ἥξω διαδραμών --- eis πόλιν yap ἔρχομαι 


τ a2 Ν ΄ > - , ὃ a bl 
VUVL — πέρι TOUTWV ELOOMEVOS Tl O€l ποειν. 
Exit Syriscus to the city. Habrotonon approaches Onesimus. 


ABPOTONON 


\ , nee Ay? ε , 
TO παιδάριον. ονυν τιθηνεῖθ 7) γυνή): 


> f. > » Φ Ka c , 
Ονησιμ, ἔνδον, οὗτος €U PEV ανθρακεύς; 


involves, subj. τὸ προσφέρειν. Cf. the 
demand of Syriscus in v. 227, 

241. ἀνασείεις : lit. brandish with 
the intention of frightening, terrorize 
with, cf. Dem, 25.47 rhv . εἰσαγ- 
γελίαν ἀνασείσας ποῖ ἔτρεψεν; where 
Harpocration renders the partic. by 
ἀπειλησάμενος. The definition of He- 
sychius, ἀνασείεις - ἀναπείθεις, ἀνερεθίζεις 
(cf. Bekk. Ances 79. Lb ands siicle); 
though doubtless a gloss on this pas- 
sage, does not bring out the full mean- 
ing, Which islike that of μορμολύττεσθαι, 
ef. Aristoph. Av. 1245 ταυτὶ λέγουσα μορ- 
μολύττεσθαι δοκεῖς; The pres. is Cona- 
tive, If you are trying to bulldoze (me). 
Syriscus suggests that Onesimus is at- 
tempting petty blackmail. 

243 f. οὐδὲ εἷς... μερισμός : thers 
no going-shares inthisbusiness with me! 
-- οὐδὲ δέομαι : Jian timantit either. οὐ 
(οὐδὲν) δέομαί Tivos OF τι ἴδ Very COMMON 
in this colloquial meaning, implying 
aversion to a thing or scornful rejec- 


tion of a proposal, 1 τὸ no use for, cf. 
Aristoph. Eq. 673 οὐ δεόμεθα σπονδῶν 
and the examples collected by Shorey 
ine Jour 1, pp: Wa ΠῚ 

245. ἥξω : return, cf. Aesch. Cho. 
3 ἥκω yap és γῆν καὶ κατέρχομαι and 
"1. 46, — 8raBpapav: «after I’ve run 
about, ef. S. Ub and note, Aristoph. 
Pac. 536 γυναικῶν διατρεχουσῶῦῶν εἰς ἀγρόν, 
Alciphr. Hp. 4.9. 2. Sch. θεραπανίδων 
διαδρομαί. Syriscus has several errands 
in town. The same force of δια-, here 
and there, is seen in such compounds 
as διαπέμπειν, διαγγέλλειν, and the like. 

We see nothing more of Syriscus 
after this; the action of the play ts 
over before night, and as the plot 
thickens he and his petty concerns are 
lost sight of. But he may have ap- 
peared fora moment near the end of 
the play, see on vy. RAS, 

248. ἔνδον: 


the wife of Syriscus suckling the child 


Habrotononm had seen 


in the house of Chaerestratus. 


78 MENANAPOY 


ONHZIMOZ 


᾿ὡς φησιν. 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


ὡς κομψόν. τάλαν. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


Ν wy 
και TOUTOVL 


Ν 4, 3 ld > A 4 
250 TOV δακτύλιον ETOVTA τουμου δεσπότου. 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


» ὃ , 5 > 9 ’ Ψ, » ΕῚ , 
al, VT POP, εἶτ᾽. EL τρόφιμος ὄντως ἐστί TOV, B4,quat.y, p.10 


τρεφόμενον ὄψει τοῦτον ἐν δούλου μέρει; 


> a ὃ ΄,ὕ > ΄ 
κουκ αν OLKQALWS ἀποθάνοις: 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


Ν pe > \ > 
τὴν μητέρ᾽ οὐδεὶς οἶδεν. 


ν 4 
οπερ λέγω, 


ABPOTONON 


4, 
255 Ταυροπολίοις αὐτόν: 


ἀπέβαλεν δέ, φής. 


ONHZIMOZ 


παροινῶν y. ws ἐμοὶ 


τὸ παιδάριον εἶφ᾽. ἀκόλουθος. 


249. κομψόν: duinty. 


p. 30, 
Zo leat: fie, Lat. vae, ef: Aristoph. 


Plut. 706 αἴ, τάλαν. 


See above, 


A rare interjec- 
tion, -- εἶτα : so then, explained by the 
following e-clause,ef. Baton 5.5K. εἶτ᾽, 
εἰ μεμάθηκε, δέσποτα. ζῆν. ἔγκαλεῖς . adesp, 
116K. 
er, which would better suit) the in- 
τρόφι- 


pos: your young master, i.e. the son of 


But perhaps we should read 
dignant tone of the question. 


your master Charisius; see on v. 1, 
ἐγ GOO die — 


252. τρεφόμενον : the pass. is con- 


ἐστί: subj. τὸ παιδίον. 


trasted with τρόφιμος, a cognate of 


act, meaning. — ὄψει : = περιόψει. Cf. 
Aristoph. Thesm, 698 τέκνου με περιό- 
ψεσθ᾽ ἀποστερουμένην: 

253. ὅπερ λέγω: ἐν Twas saying, 
ie. When vou interrupted me. Kor this 
use of the pres, ef. v. 284. 

254. If the child’s mother was a 
slave, he suggests, the child also would 
he. 

256. Athenians of good family were 
attended in public by one or more 
ΚΠ DN amy lien ILE SMT Oneal Ta CANOE 
bindesy. Plait. Vit. Phoe. 19 (Phoeion’s 
wife), Dem. 21. 158 (Meidias), Aris- 
toph. Av. 73 (epops). 


ENITPENONTES 79 


ABPOTONON 


δηλαδὴ 


3 ‘\ A 
εἰς τὰς γυναῖκας παννυχιζούσας μόνος 


F: nw 
ἐνέπεσε: κἀμοῦ yap παρούσης ἐγένετο 


“ 4 
TOLOUTOV €TEPOV. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


σοῦ παρούσης; 


ABPOTONON 


, ’ὔ 
πέρυσι, ναὶ, 


260 Ταυροποόλίοις - παισὶν γὰρ ἔψαλλον κόραις, 


Ὁ. 95 6 la) aS, τῇ 50.» » Ν τς 
QuTY) θ ομου συνέπαιζεν. οὐὸ eyw OTC ae: 


ΕΣ \ »” δι ἐν Poised) \ ΄ 
οὔπω γὰρ ἀνδρ᾽ ndew τί ἐστι, καὶ μάλα, 


μὰ τὴν ᾿Αφροδίτην --- 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


\ \ AQ? ta 31 αὶ 
ΤΩΝ δὲ Tato NTLS TOT NV 


οἶσθας: 


257. μόνος: i.e. without his com- 
panions; cf. μόνη v. 270. 

258. κἀμοῦ : the preceding train of 
thought -— the oecasion (v. 255), and 
the probable circumstances of the ad- 
venture of Charisius — now recalls to 
her mind a similar incident in her own 
experience. 

259. τοιοῦτον ἕτερον: cf. Alex. 40K. 
γεγένηται δ᾽, ὡς λέγουσι, κἀν Σάμῳ τοι- 
οὔθ᾽ ἕτερον. The neuter forms in τὸν of 
τοιοῦτος antl τοσοῦτος are distinctly pre- 
ferred by Attic writers and are alone 
found in the inscriptions. — πέρυσι: 
another coincidence: the last Tauro- 
polia had been celebrated ten months 
before; the child is one month old. 

260. παισὶν κόραις: cf. Aristoph. Lys. 
δῦ παῖδα κόρην γεγάμηκεν, Theophilus 
12 Κι κιθαριστρίας ἐρῶν. παιδὸς κόρης. Alex. 
162K. παῖς vids, 1121Χ. κόραι θυγατέρες. 


261. συνέπαιζεν: the question of 
Onesimus in y. 263 implies that Ha- 
brotonon has made some reference to 
the girl in the case. If we retain the 
first pers. συνέπαιζον (With αὐτή) we not 
only miss this allusion but also have 
to assume that Habrotonon, a slave- 
girl who had been hired to play the 
lute for the dance, participated in the 
play (dance) of the others. See Crit. 
Ap. — οὐδ᾽ ἐγὼ τότε: she was about 
to say, for example, ὑπενόησα κακόν τι 
εἶναι, referring to τοιοῦτον ἕτερον. 

262. This hint at Habrotonon’s re- 
cent innocence is an important clue 
to her character; see above, p. 50, 
and on vy. 848. — καὶ μάλα : in response 
toa gesture of incredulity on the part 
of Onesimus. 

263. τὴν δὲ παῖδα : he recalls her to 
the matter in hand. 


80 


MENANAPOY 


ABPOTONON 


πυθοίμην av: παρ᾽ ais yap nv ἐγὼ 


265 γυναιξί, τούτων ἣν φίλη. 


» 
NKOVCAS ; 


πατρὸς τίνος 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


οὐδὲν οἶδα, πλὴν ἰδοῦσά γε 


, x > is > ΄ = ’ 
γνοίην av αὐτήν. εὐπρεπής τις, ὦ θεοί, 


Ἂν ’ » ’ὔ > 
Kal πλουσίαν ἔφασαν TL. 


ONHZIMOZ 


ε ΄ 
αὐτή στιν τυχόν. 


ABPOTONON 


οὐκ οἶδ᾽ - ἐπλανήθη yap μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν οὖσ᾽ ἐκεῖ, 


5 9 9 ΄ , 2 ΄ 
ΤΟΣ ET, ἐξαπίνης KAaovoa προστρέχει Pov”), 


4 2 e ~ N r 4 ἂν ’ὔ 
τίλλουσ᾽ ἑαυτῆς τὰς τρίχας. καλὸν πάνυ 


Ν ΄ BY ΄ a 3 
καὶ λεπτόν, ὦ θεοί, ταραντῖνον σφόδρα 


264. πυθοίμην ἄν : potential, J could 
find out. 
of the party by which she had been 


map ais: ie. the members 





engaged, Asstated above, the girl had 
joined this party. 

265. τίνος : 50. εἴη. τίς is often used 
instead of ὅστις In indir. questions. Cf. 
πόθεν ν. 299 for ὁπόθεν and many simi- 
lar instances. 

266. πλήν ye: although, introduces 
a correction of the too sweeping asser- 
tion οὐδὲν οἶδα. Cf. Aristoph. Lys. 5 
οὐδεμία πάρεστιν... πλὴν ἥ Ὑ ἐμὴ κωμῆ- 
τις nd ἐξέρχεται. πλήν is often used for 
πλὴν ὅτι. 

268. αὑτή: ἡ αὐτή. The girl whom 
may be the 
same, he thinks, as the mother of the 


Habrotonon remembers 


child. αὐτή would mean the very one 
whom we wish to find, αὕτη this girl of 
Whom you speak (is she whom we seek). 
All three interpretations have their 
adherents. See on vy. 645. αὐτή in the 
sense of may neistressis not to be thought 
of, for Onesimus has as yet no suspi- 
cion of this possibility. — τυχόν : 500 
on Hl. 3. 

272. ταραντῖνον: woven from the 
silky byssus of the pinna shell and 
named from Tarentiun, the place of 
manufacture; cf. scambric.”? Defined 
by Photius and Suidas as λεπτὸν καὶ 
διαφανὲς ἱμάτιον, οὐ πάντως πορφυροῦν. ὡς 
τινες ὑπέλαβον, by Hesychius as ἱμάτιον 
γυναικεῖον λεπτὸν κρόσσοιυ"ς (fringes) ἔχον 


ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς μέρους. In spite of these 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕῈΣ 81 


5 rows; 7 QA » 4 ere, 
ἀπολωλεκυι- ὅλον γὰρ ἐγεγόνει ῥάκος. 


ΟΝΉΣΙΜΟΣ 
καὶ τοῦτον εἶχεν; 
ABPOTONON 


9 oY 3 2 9 » AY 
εἰχ LOWS, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐμοὶ 


στό ἔδειξεν - οὐ γὰρ ψεύσομαι. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


κ᾿ ~ 
ἐμὲ νῦν; 


τί χρὴ ποεῖν 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


9 Ν Lorene) SN. Ν “ » 
ορα GU GOUT EOL, δὲ VOUV EXnS 


ΕΣ , » “ Ν ἧς , 
εμοι TE πείθῃ. TOUTO προς TOV δεσπότην 


\ ΄ > ‘ > cy, ΕἸ eee ea 
φανερὸν ποήσεις. ει γαρ €OT ἐλευθέρας 


παιδός. τί τοῦτον λανθάνειν δεῖ τὸ γεγονός : 


statements, however, it is probable that 
this diaphanous stuff, which revealed 
the outlines of the body (Aristaen. Ep. 
1. 25), was more often used for the 
chiton or chemise than for the hima- 
tion. The Dorian chiton was fastened 
at each shoulder by a brooch (περόνη) 
and was open on the right side; the 
Tonic was sewn down the right side and 
did not need pins at the shoulders. 
Both, however, were girt at the waist. 
Now the ταραντῖνα mentioned ina The- 
ban inscription (Collitz SGD. 714. 3) 
are both open (σιφνά) and sewn (ῥάμ- 
par’ ἔχοντα), and therefore chitons. A 
ταραντῖνον παραπόρφυρον ῥάμματ᾽ ἔχον is 
mentioned along with ἃ χιτὼν παραπόρ- 
φυρος : the difference is in the material. 
The ταραντινίδιον is called a θέριστρον by 
schol. Lue. De cal. 16 and Dial. meretr. 
7.2, and the θερίστριον worn by Praxinoa 
in Theoer, 15. 69 seems to be identical 
with her περονατρίς in v.21, i.e. her chi- 
ton worn over a chemise, but wider 


the ἀμπέχονον or himation. The rapav- 
τῖνον Worn by the ithyphalli aceord- 
ing to Semus (apud Athen, 622c) was 
girt, hence nota himation. So inschol. 
Aristoph. Lys. 45 it is called an ἔνδυμα, 
not an ἐπίβλημα. The πορφυρᾶ πτέρυξ 
of vy. 187, presumably a piece of this 
garment, Was, as we have seen, torn 
from a chiton, 

273. Cf. [Theocr,] 27. 67 τἀμπέχο- 
νον ποίησας ἐμὸν (ὅλον coni. Aliens) 
ῥάκος. 

274. τοῦτον: τὸν δακτύλιον. 

277. τοῦτο: ro mpayua. πρὸς... 
φανερόν: οἷ. μηνύειν πρός τινα, ν. 951. 
The const. with mpdsis not quite equiva 
lent to that with the dat. 
of the judge or 


πρὸς 1s used 
Indeistrate, Vv. 87. 
The difference is about that between 
hefore (ace.) and to (dat.). 

279. παιδός: referring tothe mother, 
ef. vi. 208. Phesubj. of ἐστί ἰπ τὸ παιδίον. 
— ri. ares: ice. he will be free then to 


marry the girl, and that will end the 


82 MENANAPOY 


ONHZIMOZ 


/ » , 9 2 , ε A , 
280 προτερον ἐκεινὴν NTLS ἐστιν, £ Bporovor, 


ε A ΡΝ , CS ‘\ ‘ A I ioe Aa = 
ευρωμεέν" ἐπι τουτῳ ὃ EMOL OV νυν φράσον. 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


3 λ , Ν > la NIG ere 
OUK αν δυναίμην. TOV ἀδικοῦντα πριν σαφῶς 


4 > > , A AN SS. Ae ot 
τίς ἐστιν εἰδέναι. φοβοῦμαι τοῦτ᾽ ἐγώ, 


τὴ δῆ 
μάτην τι μηνύειν πρὸς ἐκείνας ἃς λέγω. 


΄ > > vA nw 5 tg NUE ΝΣ 
285 τίς OLOEV εἰ καί, τοῦτον ἐνέχυρον λαβὼν 


3 lal “ 
τότε τις TAP αὐτοῦ τῶν παρόντων, ἀπέβαλεν (5, quat.y, ».11 


ν ,» Ν ¥ Ἂ Ν 
ἕτερος κυβεύων ; τυχὸν ίσως εἰς συμβολὰς 


« ’ > ¥ > λ ,’ ΄ὔ 
ὑπόθημ᾽ ἔδωκ᾽, ἢ συντιθέμενος περί τινος 


present situation. Habrotonon is grad- 
ually thinking out her plan. 

280. ἥτις : the indef. rel. is nor- 
mally used to introduce the indir, 
question when the dir. question would 
be introduced by ris, cf. v. 283; but 
see on v. 265. 

281. ἐπὶ τούτῳ: with this end in 
view, cf. v. 912, P. 895 παίδων ἐπ᾽ ἀρότῳ. 
— φράσον: give counsel, cf. Aeschin. 
1.129 Ἡσίοδος: 

282. τὸν ἀδικοῦντα: 


. πάνυ σαφῶς φράζων. 
Habrotonon 
knows that the guilty man is the last 
possessor of the ring, but so long as she 
is not sure that this is Charisius she 
fears to lay doubtful information be- 
fore the women (ἐκείνα 9) for Whom she 
played at the festival. ΑἸ] uncertain- 
ties as to the man must be eliminated 
before she involves the girl. 

284. as λέγω: v. 204. On the pres, 
Chav Vero ane 

285. καί: construe εἰ καὶ ἕτερος (50. 
καὶ μὴ Χαρίσιος) ἀπέβαλεν, a const. made 
easier by the strong penthemimeral 
caesura, The intervening clause ex- 


plains how this other person may have 


got the ring; the partic. κυβεύων, added 
as an afterthought, how he may have 
lost it. 
Gerth ὃ 524, 2 and 3. The affirmative 


Qn this use of καί see Kiihner- 


form of ris οἶδεν εἰ Would be ἴσως. 

287 f. els συμβολὰς ὑπόθημα: «is εἰ 
pledge toward a subscription dinner. — 
συμβολάς : lit. contributions toward a 
common meal, then the meal itself, as 
in Xen, Symp. 1. 16 θαρρεῖν, ὅτι ἔσονται 
guuSoral. —vrdOnpa: pledge, security, 
here only in this meaning, instead of 
ὑποθήκην: For the practice cf. Ter. 
Kun, 539 ff heri aliquot adule- 


SCemtirlly Gown ws ii ee Oe. i 


hune diem ut de symbolis es- 
Chaecream ef rei 
dati 
ἔδωκε: subj. Charisius. 


288. ἤ : a third possibility. —ovv- 


semus, prae 


fecimus; 1}. ete 


τιθέμενος : omithing « rare 


meaning found in Plat. Vit. Adeib. &. 1 


mager, iW 


᾿Ἱππονίκῳ... ἐνέτριψε κόνδυλον, οὐχ ὑπ᾽ ὁρ- 
ΠΣ cer τ ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ γέλωτι συνθέμενος πρὸς 
τοὺς ἑταίρους. Only the idea making an 
agreement resides in the vb.. περί indi- 


cating the stake on which one agrees, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 83 


, hae’, set ae Ψ ΄ 
περιείχετ᾽, εἶτ᾽ ἔδωκεν. ἕτερα μυρία 


> aA / aA (ie lal 
290 EV TOLS TOTOLS TOLAUTA γίγνεσθαι φιλεῖ. 


πρὶν εἰδέναι δὲ τὸν ἀδικοῦντ᾽ οὐ βούλομαι 


ζητεῖν ἐκείνην οὐδὲ μηνύειν ἐγὼ 


nw > ἡ ὦ 
TOLOUTOV οὐδέν. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


4}: εἴ Ate ἢ ,’ , 
οὐ κακῶς μέντοι λέγεις. 


ΜΆ ,΄, 
τι ουν TONOEL TUS 5 


ABPOTONON 


4 ΕΣ.) 4 
θέασ᾽. ᾿᾽Ονήσιμε, 


Δ , eNO TS 1A oF > »¥ 
295 αν συναρεσῃ σοι τουμον ἐνθύμημ apa: 


Jk te Ν ον ᾿ς ἘΠ po ies le ΣῚ “2 
ἐμὸν ποῆσομαι τὸ πραγμα TOUT ἐγω. 


τὸν δακτύλιον λαβοῦσα 7 εἴσω τουτονὶ 


» ~, “Ὁ 
είἰσειμι πρὸς ἐκεῖνον. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


hey’ ὃ λέγεις: ἄρτι γὰρ 


νοω. 


182Κ. 


ABPOTONON 


΄ 5 ἣν > a , 
κατιδών μ εχουσαν ανάκρινει πόθεν 


800 εἴληφα. φήσω" “Tavpotodios παρθένος 


ν 5. τἦν 39 EL 7 , Fig ΕΟ ΤΩΝ 
€f OUC OQ. = hi EKELVY) γένομενα TAVT ἐμὰ 


, ἣν A > 5 “ NSS: , 
ποουμένη: TA πλεῖστα δ᾽ αὐτῶν oto ἐγώ. 


289. περιείχετο: probably a mili- 
tary figure originally, encompassed, be- 
sieged, cf. Xen. Cyrop. 7. 1. 24 τὸ Κύρου 
στράτευμα παντόθεν περιείχετο ὑπὸ τῶν 
πολεμίων. If for the personal agent we 
substitute circumstances, πράγμασι, 
we arrive at the meaning required 
here, embarrassed. The vb. seems not 
in this absolute 
meaning. — ἔδωκεν: i.e. the ring in- 
stead of the money which he had lost 
on the wager. 

291. On the unusual 
the third foot see note on ν. 46. 

293. μέντοι: in positive aftirma- 


to occur elsewhere 


tribrach in 


tions, certainly, cf. Plat. Symp. 1768 
τοῦτο μέντοι εὖ λέγεις. 

294 f. ποήσει : deliberative fut. 
θέασαι. «xré.: ef. Plaut. Trin. 763 sed 
vide consilium si place t.— ἐνθύ- 
μημα: idea, plan, used by Nenophon 
in this sense, eu. Anab. 8.5. 12 τὸ μὲν 
ἐνθύμημα χαρίεν ἐδόκει εἶναι. but rarely 
by others. 

296. ποήσομαι: usswne as ny own, 

TO πράγμα τοῦτο : τὰ ἐκείνῃ γενόμενα 
of vy. 8301and the present cireumstinees, 

298. On the tribrach in the fourth 
fHOLSEE MOTE Ol We AOL ahd he owe 


τὸν δακτύλιον. 


299. ἔχονσαν: xc. 


8: MENANAPOY 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


» , piers} , 
aploTa Ύ ἀνθρώπων. 


ABPOTONON 


dN Sous) A 5 
εαν ὃ OLKELOV Υ) 


» tad Ἂς A > 43 ἵν θ᾽ bs (ἕξ ’, 
αὐτῷ τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ εὖ to ἐπάξει φερόμενος 


» Ν Ν » \ , an ΕῚ A 
305 ἐπι TOV ἔλεγχον. και μεθύων γέ νυν εβρει 


΄ ” \ A Δ» ἃ ΄, 
TPOTEPOS απαντα και προπέτως" α ὃ αν λέγῃ 


προσομολογήσω. τοῦ διαμαρτεῖν μηδὲ ἕν 


4 , 9 
προτέρα λέγουσ ; 


ONA SI MOS 


e la Ν Ν -΄ 
ὑπέρευγε. νὴ τὸν Π᾿λιον. 


ABPOTONON 


Ν \ Ν 32.23 a “ , 
τὰ κοινὰ ταυτὶ δ᾽ ἀκκιοῦμαι τῷ λόγῳ. 


303. ἄριστά ye: sc. ἐνθυμεῖ..- ἀνθρώ- 
πων: like πάντων, enhances the super- 
lative, as often, ef. Plat. Theaet. 1485 
ἄριστά γ᾽ ἀνθρώπων, ὦ παῖδες. (“ἴ. Plaut. 
Mil. 245 immo utoptume and note 
on v. 311. 

804. ἐπάξει: cf. Eur. Ton 327 οὐδ᾽ ἡξας 
εἰς ἔρευναν ἐξευρεῖν γονάς: but see Crit, 
App. --- φερόμενος: cf. Lye. Τρ σας 50 
ἥξει δ᾽ ἴσως ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος 
(Hense), 1:98: 

305 f. μεθύων ye: he has been drink- 
ing with his cuests before luneheon, 
πότους ἑωθινοὺς πίνει. Baton oooh. 
ἐρεῖ... προπετῶς: will blurt out the 
whole story first. 

307. προσομολογήσω: lesiles(rpor-) 
Wiittsshe is alnerdcdyer ire: anh lin Weg 
ID 


own knowledve, ef. v. τοῦ δια- 


μαρτεῖν : the σον ΟἿ the inf. to express 
purpose, instead of the more conten 
CONUS τοῖν ὦ- evena Caras UN ieee 
fives ἀρ 01 Misi. eh ont min) les als 
the positive const. See GAP Ps Fos aid 


Kuhner-Gerth $478. fe. 


308. προτέρα λέγουσα : Nyy Spek ing 


ὙΠ ΤᾺ 


309. τὰ κοινὰ ταυτί: cf. Ter. Hee. 
Del sie ceiat 


quae sunt 


Omnium 
Note the date 


akkiovpar. τό. ἢ 7// 


hace Communia 
patrum, 
position Ὧι δὶ 
dissemble and talk only in eonaon- 


POE Sa OSes ALES a τ ΠΡ nt Le ΠΠγτῸς 


ταῦτα Iscoenateaee. The ancient lexi - 


cographers are in essential agreement 
as to the meaning of axcigvestac The 
same definition is found im Stidas, 
Plots Berle Sride Bek τς 


Pe SH be ee 


θρυπτόμενος ὑπῆν ΡΝ sabe Tr pour 
ποιούμενος. αὐναικιζόμενος " i) few parva, 
. σημαίνει δὲ καὶ τὸν θέλοντα μὲν (Vhot., 
Sirela: 


TO ἐθέλοντά τι λέγοντα HleNorra 


Bekk.) προσποιούμε vor Ge (-εὐται Str 0) 


pig Το τα ΟΥ̓ ΠΕ αν siinnmircee A NeNe 
τε δ τ annie enn wife ΟΣ 
Mac. cives simply τὸ μωραίνειν ἢ προσ 
ποιεῖσ)αι εὐήθειτν. Ti all the passages 


Where dt occurs there is the underlying 
πὶ πα τ αὐ affectation, παν Of ἢ wot 


(Philippides SN. Nel Rp. 9 ἀκκίζονται 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤῈΣ δὸ 


810 τοῦ μὴ διαμαρτεῖν “os ἀναιδὴς ἦσθα καὶ 


> , 5» 
ιταμος τις. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


> 
ευγε. 


ABPOTONON 


“᾿κατέβαλες δέ μ᾽ ὡς σφόδρα, 


πε 27 > 29 
ιματια ὃ οι 


Ψ ,ὔ > ε , > 5 λα κὉ 
ἀπώλεσ᾽ ἡ τάλαιν ἐγώ. 


fF fal 
φήσω. πρὸ τούτου δ᾽ ἔνδον αὐτὸ βούλομαι 


Ls lal lal A 
λαβοῦσα κλαῦσαι καὶ φιλῆσαι καὶ πόθεν 


τ 3 A \ » 
ψ15. ἔλαβεν ἐρωτᾶν τὴν ἔχουσαν. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


Ἡράκλεις. 


ABPOTONON 


Et > Ὁ ,ὕ δὲ , ee δί , 939) 45 A 
TO πέρας € TAVTWY, TWQALOLOY τοινυν. ερω, 


eer » 


δείξω. 


π , 35. XN Ν A ε ΄ 
non yeyovos ool, — Kal TO VuV EUPYMEVOV 


ONHZYIMOZ 


, Ν , € , 
πανούργως Kat κακοήθως. “A Bporovov. 


kal θρύπτονται), cf. Philem. 4 KX. οὐδὲ 
els ἀκκισ μὸς οὐδὲ λήρος (AS Usual With he- 
taerae). In Plat. Gorg, 4974 it is used 
of affected ignorance ; of mere pretense 
and affectation in Lue. De mere. cond. 
τ ἀῆὰ Cie? AUeA tte 2TAOR os 

310. See Crit. App. 

311. εὖγε: Compare the comments 
of Onesimus in vv. 803, 808, 511, with 
those of Periplecomenus on the scheme 
of Palaestrio in Plaut. Mil. 24leuge, 
euge, lepide, laudo commentum 
tuum. 

312. ἱμάτια... ἀπώλεσα : Habroto- 
non is how ὍΝ safe ground, ef. v. 272 f. 
ἱμάτια is general, clothes, οἵ. Herod. 1.9 
τῶν ἱματίων κατὰ ἕν ἕκαστον ἐκδύνουσα. 


313. αὐτό: i.e. 


‘ ; 
TO παιδίον. 


314 f. πόθεν ἔλαβεν : she must know 
the time and circumstances of the 
child’s exposure in order to trace its 
mother, after Charisius las acknowl- 
fondle the 
to ingratiate herself with its 


edved his guilt. She will 
child 
foster-mother, from whom she intends 
to borrow it. 

316. τὸ πέρας: const. asady. with ἐρῶ, 
This will be the climax. Ct. vv. 70, 676, 

318. πανούργως kal κακοήθως : [ihe 
a true rogue α spitefally, a compli 
ment fromone of the same stripe. Cf, 
Plut. Mor, 28 4 μηδὲν οὖν τούτων “nowy ov’ 
(smart) ἡγεῖσθαι καὶ ᾿πανοῦρμη ον (rlever) 


pid. dO mi li 


6 νεὸς €Vi¢erw, Platt. 


ebris adhibenda mihi owmatlitia 


HVAC REESE: 


80 MENANAPOY 


ABPOTONON 


av δ᾽ ἐξετασθῇ ταῦτα καὶ φανῇ πατὴρ 


a 4 lal Ν , 
320 ὧν οὗτος αὐτοῦ, τὴν κόρην ζητήσομεν 


ἃ. , 
κατὰ σχολήν. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


3 A >? > , 7] 
ἐκεῖνο δ᾽ οὐ λέγεις. OTL 


> 4 4 4 nw Ν 4 
ἐλευθέρα γίγνει σύ: τοῦ γὰρ παιδίου 


C4, quat. y, p. 12 


μητέρα σε νομίσας λύσετ᾽ εὐθὺς δηλαδή. 


ABPOTONON 


οὐκ οἶδα- βουλοίμην δ᾽ av. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


> ‘ > , 
OU γαρ οἶσθα συ: 


> > > , ε , ΄ > , 
325 ἀλλ᾽ ov χάρις τις. ᾿Αβρότονον. τούτων ἐμοί; 


ABPOTONON 


Ν \ 0 ’ὔ 3 yd b ie J “ » » 
νὴ Τω VEW" πάντων ye εἐμαυτΊ) σ᾽ αιτιον 


ἡγήσομαι τούτων. 


ONHZIMOZ 


28 \ (a 
ἐὰν δὲ μηκέτι 


ζητῇς ἐκείνην ἐξεπίτηδες. ἀλλ᾽ ἐᾷς. 


παρακρουσαμένη με. πῶς τὸ τοιοῦθ᾽ ἕξει: 


319. φανῇ: shill be shown. 

321. ἐκεῖνο : looks forward, as does 
ἐκεῖ In Vv. 103. 

322. γίγνει : prophetic pres., stand 
to become, cf. Thue. 1. 121. 4 μιᾷ τε νίκῃ 
The 


For ὙΨΞ and Ξε Ὁ 


ναυμαχίας κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς ἁλίσκονται. 
MS. vives γίνη. 
ony. 30, The endings -eo and -7 were 
merely different ways of representing 
the same sound from near the bewin- 
ning of the fourth century on, but the 
practice of Menander’s time stronely 
favored -e. See Kuhner-Blass § 211.3. 

323. λύσεται: from the leno, cf. 
ECS a ip ban Ὁ: jae 


324. οὐ yap, κτέ. : what, you don't 
know ? 

325. χάρις tis: se. ἐστί. He for- 
gets that he Was ina helpless quandary 
when Ifabrotonon took hold, 

326. πάντων. κτέ.: ἃ enerous re- 
ply, but spoken with a touch of play- 
ful sarcasm. Tt is important, besides, 
for Habrotonon to have the full conti- 
dence of Onesimus, for he has not yet 
intrusted her with the ring. 

3271. μηκέτι ζητῇς: don't yo on to 
seek, i.e. give up your idea of seeking. 
érels often so used with verbs express- 


ing an action not yet undertaken, — 


ENITPEMNONTES 


CO 
-: 


ABPOTONON 
τάλαν, 
id ἊΝ Τὰ » A A 
330 τίνος ἕνεκεν ; παίδων ἐπιθυμεῖν σοι δοκῶ; 
> , ΄ ΄ > ΄ 
ἐλευθέρα μόνον γενοίμην. ὦ θεοί, 
A ih Lea | Ν > Vd 
τοῦτον λάβοιμι μισθὸν ἐκ τούτων. 


λάβοις. 
ABPOTONON 


> lal γ We ΕἾ 
ουκουν OVVAPEOKEL σοι; 


ΟΧΉΣΙΜΟΣ 
’ 4 
συναρέσκει διαφόρως. 
x na 
ἄν yap κακοηθεύσῃ. paxovpat σοι τότε: 
335 δυνήσομαι γάρ. ἐν δὲ τῷ παρόντι νῦν 
»” A 
ἴδωμεν εἰ τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν. 
ABPOTONON 
ae ‘ 
οὐκοῦν συνδοκεῖ; 
ΟΧΉΣΙΜΟΣ 
’ 
μάλιστα. 


ἐᾷς : sc. τὸ ζητεῖν or possibly ἐκείνην, like θωςν. 518.-- μαχοῦμαι, κτέ.: Jl have it 
éas χαίρειν, cf. Eur. fr. 491.5 N. od yp out with you then. Ct. v. 738. 


μάχεσθαι πρὸς τὸ θεῖον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐᾶν. 335. δυνήσομαι γάρ: since he will 
330. τίνος ἕνεκεν: Sc. τοῦτο ποή- know that she has duped Charisius. 
gay’ ἄν. -- - παίδων, κτέ.: cf. Luc. Dial. ἐν τῷ παρόντι viv: a common rediun 
meretr. 2.1 madotpopety . . . πρᾶγμα dant locution, cf. Plat. Phaedo 670 ἐν 
ἑταίρᾳ βαρύτατον. τῷ νῦν παρόντι. Thue. 1.95. 7 ἐν τῷ τότε 
334. κακοηθεύσῃ:: pluy me fulse, lit. παρόντι. 
exhibit κακοήθεια, bud disposition. The 336. τοῦτο: i.e. the present pla 
vb. is late and rare, used by schol. 9 which he has suspected her of ΤΠ ΤῸ αν 
Aristoph. Lys. 318 inthe meaning here ing not to carry out, εὑρεῖν τὴν maida 
required, and in the late medical writ- His delay in handing over the pio 
ers (e.g. Galen, Aetius) of malignant after having given his consent te the 


wounds. Cf. κακοήθευμα, a scoundrelly plan. causes Habrotonon to repeat her 
trick, Plut. Vit. Pomp. Sih. 3, and κακοή- question, οὐκοῦν συνδοκεῖ 


88 MENANAPOY 


ABPOTONON 


τὸν δακτύλιον ἀποδίδου ταχύ. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


λάμβανε. 


ABPOTONON (taking the ring) 


φίλη Πειθοῖ. παροῦσα σύμμαχος 


981 K. 
Aristaen. 2. 1 


, “ Ἂν , a “Δ , 
TT OEL κατορθοῦν TOUS λόγους OUS QV λέγω. 
Exit Habrotonon into the house of Chaerestratus. 


Sc. 4. ONESIMUS alone 


ONHZIMOZ 


aor Φὶ 


Dees ae) ΄ \ , ε ¥ rs 
40 TO Ne QOTLKOV. TO γυναιον ως ῃησθη OTL 


Ν Ἂς » > ΕῚ » PI ae} Ἢ A 
κατα TOV EPWT OUK €OT ἐλευθερίας TUXELV, 


ἄλλως δ᾽ adver, THY ἑτέραν πορεύεται 


ὁδόν. ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ τὸν πάντα δουλεύσω χρόνον, Δυϊδίποι. 1.19 


337 1. ἀποδίδου. λάμβανε : note the 
pres. imperatives. The first conveys a 
tone of impatience, as if: Tabrotonon 
had already demanded the ring by 
ἀπόδος and is now interested in the 
performance of the act more than in 
the result of it, proceed to hand ame. 
Cf. the Trish locution be after handing. 
The present is repeated by Onesimus 
with mocking effeet, proceed to take tt. 

338. φίλη Πειθοῖ, κτέ. : diction and 
AYis- 


taenetus begins one of lis letters, (2.17, 


meter betray the tragie style. 
a petition) with a paraphrase of these 
lines τ ἀλλ᾿ ὦ φίλη ΠΠειθοῖ παροῦσα συνερ- 
0s ποίει κατορθοῦν ἀνυσίμως ovs ἂν λέγω 
λόγους (Korte).  Habrotonon is net 
thinking of Aphrodite’s handmaid, but 
of the goddess who bestows the power 
of convineing speech, the Persuasion 
Hite Nay 


οὐκ ἔστι {Πειθοὺς ἱερὸν ἄλλο πλὴν NO 


Of Δι (Eur fr. 
SVS: 


τος, καὶ Ἰωμὸς αὐτηςἔστ ἐν ἀνθρώπου φύσει. 


340. τό γ᾽ ἀστικόν : fhe cleverness of 
her! Se. mpayua or χρῆμα, cf. S. 178. 
For the position of γέ, Whose effect is 
really with the adj., ef. Soph. OC. 977 
πῶς ἂν τό γ᾽ ἀκον πρᾶγμ᾽ ἂν εἰκότως ψέ- 
yots; — ws ῃσθητοι" ci. ve 112: 

341. κατὰ τὸν ἔρωτα: in uccordunce 
mith (ie. by means of) love, of. Nesch, 
τυ ν τὸς: 
~The Cairo Menander has but 


Prom, 212 οὐ Kar’ ἰσχὺν. 
κρατεῖν. - 
three instances of an anapaest in the 
fifth foot contained ina word which 
begins in the fourth foot: here, Poo 
(proper name), 8.30, White p. 152. 
342. ἄλλως ἀλύει : was wasting her 
pains. Photius (Berl) defines the vb. 
as τὸ μηδὲν mpatrrev. a meaning Which 


suits this passage, but see note on the 


fr. cited hy him (below, p. 100). The 
original meaning wander, be off the 
track, is still felt, cf. 666». — τὴν ἑτέραν 


ὁδόν: 1.6. δόλῳ πράττειν. contrasted with 


κατὰ τὸν ἔρωτα above, 


ENMITPEILONTES 89 


λέμφος. ἀπόπληκτος. οὐδαμῶς προνοητικὸς 


Ν wn > ν᾽ > ¥ 7 
δ τὰ τοιαῦτα. Tapa ταύτης δ᾽ ἴσως τι λήψομαι. 


x > s Ν Ν ΄ ε ‘ 
av εἐπιτυχὴ" και γαρ δίκαιον. --- ως κενα 


καὶ διαλογίζομ᾽, ὁ κακοδαίμων, προσδοκῶν 


5O4 K. 


χάριν κομιεῖσθαι Tapa γυναικός. μὴ μόνον 


κακόν τι προσλάβοιμι. νῦν ἐπισφαλὴ 


Ν 4 > ¥ ἣν Ν r 
350 τὰ πραγματ᾽ ἔστι TA περὶ THY κεκτημένην᾽ 


ταχέως: ἐὰν γὰρ εὑρεθῃ πατρὸς κόρη 


> , vA a lol ar aL! 
ἐλευθέρου ΜῊ ΤΉΡρ TE TOV VUV παιδίου 


a? > ’ / ,ὔ le Ν qq 
yeyovur, ἐκείνην λήψεται. ταύτης πατὴρ 


Legs pet Daa re SEIN 5 ΄ rc ΄ τῇ 
Εἰτ EVXKEPWS QAUTYV ἀπολείπειν TTELO ETAL. 


Φ 
φι 
Ot 


ἣν, A ΄ > 2 Lee Yeta) 
και νυν χαριέντως εκνέενευκεναι δοκῶ 


x Ν Φ, 9 lal AS “A wo 2} 
TO μὴ δι EM@OU TAUTL κυκᾶσθαι. χαιρέτω 


» Γ a 
τὸ μ᾽ ἄλλα πράττειν. ἂν δέ τις λάβῃ μ᾽ ἔτι 


344. λέμφος : sniveling, lit. dirty- 
nosed, a word from the yulgar speech, 
Also in 493 K. — ἀπόπληκτος : dodder- 
ing, lit. stricken (in mind), stupid. Cf. 
schol. Lue. Lex. 18 ἀποπλήκτους καὶ 
λεμπώδεις. 

845. τοιαῦτα : οἷα μ᾽ ἐλευθερῶσαι. 

346. ἐπιτύχῃ : used absolutely, suc- 
ceeds, also in P, 252. 

347 ff. καὶ ... προσλάβοιμι : quoted 
by Stobaeus, but with καίτοι for καὶ δια-. 

348. κομιεῖσθαι : the fut. is excep- 
tional with verbs of expecting, hoping, 
etc. Here the future idea is given es- 
pecial prominence. See y. 215, and 
GMT. § 113. 

349. προσλάβοιμι : he is fearful of 
getting into further (προσ-} trouble, as 
before, ν. 212. — ἐπισφαλῆ: cf. ν. 126, 
and, Pet. ΤΥ τον. 30; pad); 

350. κεκτημένην : see on TL. 37. 

351. ταχέως: const. with ἐστί, ail 
that right soon. The ady. is reserved to 
the end of the sentence for emphasis, 


εὑρεθῇ: Complement yeyovuca. The subj. 
is (7) κόρη. 
causa, as often, ef. Aristoph. Lys. 101 


The art. is omitted metri 


πάσαισιν ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀποδημῶν ἀνήρ. A full 
collection Οὐ instances inSachtschal, De 
com, Graec, serm, metro accom... p. 27. 

354. εἶτ᾽ εὐχερῶς : i.e. there will be 
no need of arguments then, ἀπολεί 
mev: on the legal meaning see note on 
verti. fe Hee. 156 


The text here is very uneertain, 


Ὁ Wingy Mires 
355. éxveveuxévar: ducked out of, 
dodged, a tigure from boxing. ἔκνευσις 
is the bending aside of the lead) to 
avoid a blow, 
356. ropn... 
tive is due to the idea of aveiding i 
ΛΑ ΙΝ 


ταυτὶ κυκᾶσθαι οἷ. ἕτερόν τι KUKaY, \. 211. 


κυκᾶσθαι: the 11 
ἐκνενευκέναι. SUC 


Another complication Jas heen con 

eoeted, but Onesimarys thinks die τ το 

be held responsible: te the result 
357. τὸ p ἄλλα πράττειν : Wl! other 


projects, lit. Mey CMa tie st οὐ πε 


90 


, ἘᾺΝ ’ > > Att 
περιεργασάμενον ἢ λαλήσαντ᾽. ἐκτεμεῖν 


MENANAPOY 


NT}, quat. y, p.13 


iy tL he aA νὰ ΟῚ 
δί δωμ €MQUTOV TOUS — ὀδόντας. 
Sees Smicrines approaching from the city. 


ἀλλ᾽ ᾿ὁδὲ᾽ 


’,’ » 3.6 ’ χε Line ΄, 5 , 
800 τίς ἐσθ᾽ ὁ προσιών : Σμικρίνης ἀναστρέφει 


ΕῚ » » fF ΤΟΝ, » 
ἐξ αστεως παλιν. ταρακτικως EX WV 


> ee a! \ ΓλῸ καὶ a ey ea 
αὖθις. πέπυσται TAS ἀχηθεῖς αιτιας 


παρά τινος οὗτος; ἐκποδὼν δὲ βούλομαι 


A Γ iA Ν > LY! ae ΤΥ, ἢ 
ποεῖν ἐμαυτόν. τυχὸν ἴσως. ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν, 


γ ,ὔ PSN Ν , 9 > x ‘ele og) wn 
300 T POO EPX ET ἐπι Τὴν θυγατέρ δ ἀλλὰ νυν [LE δεῖ 


ἌΡΗ τ ae τ δ." 


ΜΙ 


υ 


Inter Smicrines; exit Onesimus in the opposite direction. 


Sc. 5. SMICRINEs alone 


wir e€n- - - - το τ τ ---- 


» | Dee. 
ἀσωτος --------- 


intrigues. πράττειν = intrigue is com- 
mon, 

359. ὀδόντας : to avoid completing 
the vulgar colloquial expression with 
ὄρχεις. the word ὀδόντας is substituted 
παρὰ προσδοκίαν. Cf. thesimilaradjura- 
tion in Plant. Aul.250:; si herele ego 
(Euclio) te (Staphylam) non elin- 
πα 7. ΠΟΥ δὲ τ sabe was 
dicibus, impero auctorque ego 
sin, ut tu me quoi vis castran- 
dum Joces. The latter punishment, 
formen, Plaut. Mil. 1409, 1420, 1426; the 
former, for talkative women, Herond, 
6,40 ἐγὼ δὲ τούτων αἰτίη λαλεῦσ᾽ εἰμί. ἢ 
πολλὰ τήν μευ γλῶσσαν ἐκτεμεῖν δείται. 
Cf. Bur. Cyel. 644 rots ὀδόντας éxBa- 
ἀλλ᾽ ὁδί: 
ἀν Wel 


The conj. is 


λεῖν οὐ βούλομαι τυπτόμενος. 
ἀλλ᾽ οὑτοσί MS. 
122 ὁδὶ δὲ τίς ποτ᾽ ἐστίν. 
needed to mark the transition. 

861. ἐξ ἄστεως : he had departed 


thither at the end of the arbitration 


scene, v. 154. — rapaktikds ἔχων: in a 
mood to cause disturbance. Onesimus 
judges by his manner. 

362. αὖθις : const. with the preced- 
ing words, not with πάλιν. Smicrines 
is bent on making trouble wherever we 
see him except in the arbitration scene. 

πέπυσται : (nesimus is now assum- 
ing a probable reason for Smierines’ 
return. —Tas ἀληθεῖς αἰτίας : the true 
reasons for the quarrel between Paim- 
phila and Charisius, namely, the birth 
of the child. But that 
Qnesimus is wrone in this conjecture. 


we shall see 


363. παρά τινος: possibly Davus, 


With whom = Onesimus has gossiped 
freely (first seene of first act), had 
spread abroad the report of the doings 
of Charisius so that it had come to the 
The rest of the text 
here is highly conjectural, 

367 17. Sinicrines probably explains 


why he has come back from the city, 


ears of Sminderines, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 


ὅληγ ---------- 
3 73:S 
ἀτοπεὐθὺς ἀξ & See Sa ὩΣ 
σαφῶς - - - - -- - -- -- 
πνεῖν. τ ΞΔ eae 


» ΠΟ 
τούνομα - - - - - - - - - 
Gon SENG et 
ζῆν αὐτὸν - - - - - - - - 
. CPM pe Ἂς te) 
375 πλέον ἡμερῶν - - - - - - 
aN cA 4 
αὐτὸν διαλῦσαι - - - - - 
Ἂν (ANZ I 
οἴμοι, τάλας - - - - - - - 
KOLWOVOS — = te tenes =) 
“ mpoonhO- - -- -- - -- - 
380 ὅτε τὴν- - - -- -- -- - 
rs 3 
πυνθανόμενος Me Cees ees 
Ua 
φίλοι. ---------- 
évay----------- 


91 


[Lacuna of ca. 9 verses to NT?.] 


Smicrines sees a Cook approaching from the city, accompanied by his assistants. 
Somebody, probably Charisius, comes out of the house of Chaerestratus 
and accosts the Cook. Smicrines withdraws to one side and overhears the 


conversation, 


Sc. 6. Smicrtnes, Cook, CHARISTUS 


MATEIPOZ 


Fats Ν id > Ν OF 
BUCS esa ae— coean τ OU γαρ μαγειρων E€OTL δὴ 


We can see that he has learned things 
about the conduct of Charisius (ef. 
ἄσωτος. πίνειν, ζῆν αὐτόν) that he appar- 
ently did not know before, and that 
he isin a bad frame of mind. The first 
word of hfs speech may have been ἐξη- 
πατήθην. 

368. ἄσωτος: prodigal, in reference 
In Men. 618 K. a person 
describes himself as εὐτελὴς ὑπερβολῇ 


to Charisius. 


and another as ἄσωτος, πολυτελής. θρα- 

avs σφόδρα. 
372. πίνειν : 

on drinking see Pet, fr., vv. 1 ff, p. 94, 


for Smicrines*’ views 


375. πλέον ἡμερῶν : possibly a ref- 
erence to the fact that Charisius has 
for some days (see on vy. 225) been liv- 
ing-apart from Pamphila. 

376. διαλῦσαι: see on v. 11. Per- 
haps the thought was πειράσω δὲ νῦν 
Whatever 


the present intention of Smnicrines, he 


αὐτὸν διαλῦσαι πρὸς γυναῖκα: 


soon gives up all thought of bringing 
about a reconciliation. 

378. κοινωνός: cf. Pamphila’s words 
to Smierines Inv. 705, 

382. φίλοι: apparently anappeal to 


yt ltes WT 


the spectators, as Ie Ones 


92 MENANAPOY 


οὐδείς. σαφῶς oid, ἐχθρὸς ὑμῖν. 


ΝῪΞ, quat. y, p. 14 


XAPIZIOZ 


ποικίλον 


» > Banas 5 , 
ἄριστον ἀριστώμεν. ὦ τρισάθλιος 


δ) Ν N τ δου a \ > > 503» ὦ 
805. ἐγὼ κατὰ πολλά. νῦν μὲν οὖν οὐκ οἷδ᾽ ὅπως 


ΤΩΝ τὰ ” NG 
διασκεδαᾶν σ᾽ ἄπρακτος: ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν πάλιν 


393 ff. The exact purport of these 
broken lines is not easy to divine. It 
seems probable, however, that the 
Cook is being berated for his delay in 
keeping his engagement. Tle was sum- 
moned by Onesimus just before the 
action of the play began; he had not 
yet arrived in y. 166, where we are 
told that the time for the meal was 
long past. The guests have long been 
in the house with Charisius (ν. 215) 
whiling away the time indrink (Pet. fr., 
Ni ot APO aes RESCH 15 δο} ἀπ Gly 
The Cook 
reappears later on, early in the next 
act. The brief cook-scene in S. 71 ff. 
forms a similar intermezzo, 


brief, some 15 to 90 verses. 


The person who here talks to the 
Cook can hardly have been Onesimus, 
who has just quit the scene in order to 
When he re- 
turns he aecompanies Chaerestratus 


avoid meeting Sinierines, 


(Pet. fr.vv.16,p.96), who enters through 
one of the parodoi, Nor can the inter- 
locutor be Smicrines, who is not eon 
cerned with the failire or suceess of 
theentertaimment. There remains Cha- 
risius, Up to this time he has been 
in the house with his euests (v. 217). 
Accepting this view, the poet's mo- 
tive In devising this seene is clear. 
Smicrines is to see with his own eyes 
he has hitherto Known only through 
aye 


cossin (Vv. $62) —to what Jeneths his 


son-in-law goes in his extravagance. 
The Cook with his retinue of assistants 
bearing provisions for an elaborate 
luncheon gave him striking testimony 
to the daily waste of money in the 
household. 

393. ὑμῖν: dependents regularly use 
the pl. in reference to a gentleman's 
household, ef. vv. 178, 195. — arouk(- 
λον: apparently dainty, elegant, said 
sarcastically. Cf. Plut. Mor, 120 F rpo- 
pais (foods) κεχρημένους... ποικίλαις. 
Lit. diversified, compler. 

394. ἄριστον: lanheon, in Homeric 
times breakfast. Inthe time of the New 
Comedy it had become a sumptuous 
entertainment, given about noon and 
followed by asymposium; sce ony, 166, 

395 f. νῦν μὲν οὖν : contrasted with 
ἀλλὰ πάλιν. οὐκ οἷδ᾽ ὅπως. κτέ.: the 
text is very obscure, but the remains 
point possibly to διασκεδᾶν σ᾽ ἄπρακτος, 
dependent upon οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπως, Tin to 
dismiss you before Ive accomplished 
anything (i.e. in giving my cuests a 
luncheon). Charisits scems to be con- 
strained to overlook the Cook's short- 
comings this time, On the inf. instead 
of the fut. ind. see Kithner-Gerth § 552, 
Anm.7, and cf. Xen. Hell. ὁ. 2. 52 ηὕρετο 
ὅπως unre... εἶναι. It isa mixed const., 
a blending of οὐκ οἶδα διασκεδῖν and 
οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπω: διασκεδῶ. GAN ἐὰν πάλιν: 


the menacing tone is tuimistakable, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 


93 


r A ΄“ La , 2 
ποεις TL TOLOUTOY, ὦ μαγειρ᾽. ov τις TUX) 


ἘΌΝ > 
OWOEL OC. 


Exit Charisius into the house of Chaerestratus. 


MATEIPOS 


> nw baal μή i ~ ἘΦ > , 
ἀπειλεῖς ἐμέ; Badetr εἰς μακαρίας: 


Sc. 7. SMICRINEs alone 


SMIKPINH® (aside) 


ς τινος 


[Lacuna of 1 v. to Μ2.] 


MATEIPOS (Ὁ) 


a@i------+-+-+------- 


40 - -- τ- - 5 - - - - - - -- 


40- -- - - - τ-- --- -- 


398. βαλεῖτ᾽ εἰς μακαρίας : cf. Plat. 
Hipp. mai. 293.4 τί τοῦτο; βάλλ᾽ ἐς μακα- 
ρίαν, Aristoph. Eq. 1151 ἄπαγ᾽ ἐς μακα- 
ρίαν ἐκποδών. Antiph. 245 1K. ἐς μακαρίαν 
τὸ λουτρόν, and the similar expressions 
βάλλ᾽ és κόρακας, ἐς φθόρον. anid the like. 
Explanations of the phrase are given 
by scholl, Aristoph. Eq. 1151 (ἀντὶ τοῦ 
‘els ὄλεθρον, κατ᾽ εὐφημισμόν, ἐπεὶ καὶ oi 
τεθνεῶτες ἱμακαρῖται᾽ λέγονται, κτέ.). Plut. 
782, Plat. HWipp. mai, 203.4, 
Suidas, and the paroemiographi (.Apost. 
4.72, Diogenian. 2. 4, Zenob. 2.61). The 


pl. μακαρίας seems not to oecur clse- 


Photius, 


where and should perhaps be changed, 


401 ff. If the Cook continues to 


ΞΡ 


esl} 
εν 


4 


- ATA 


----€ ὁ δὶς 
- - ψάλτριας 


\ 
τ σὺ Kal 


"μίὰρά γε 


πολλαχοῦ. τί δὴ 


r el ΄ 
- > Τ“Πεμῆπειν  ἰνα 


speak after the departure of Charisius, 
as sccins probable, these fragmentary 
lines give at least a hint as to the tenor 
of his remarks. He refers to Habroto- 
hon (v. 406), to the possible repudiation 
of Pamphila by Charisius (v. 410), and 
to the money which Charisius is spend 
ing (v.41). Since all this is said in the 
hearing of Smierines, the speech con 
tributessomething tothe latters know | 
edee of the sitttation and serves ta ΟΝ τὰν 
perate him still more aciinst Charisius, 
406. ψάλτριας : Habrotonon. ef. fr 
GOOF ΠΝ ἐσ ἐς te spies is 
410. πέμπειν : probably arom umes, 
LeU tol 


the legal word for the formal 


94 MENANAPOY 


- τς Sys = 2s ra, ρήματα 
ἜΣ ee eae a yO 


- -᾿ βούλομαι 


Sy δ. ἐδ ee, 
ns €OTOLY OLKLAS. 


>) - 
BNR Se oe ene a tarot Sa cae te aL EL ἣν τς 
r “UNS Ae, 
--------- - - - "py τὸν Ἥλιον 
Ἂν 
-τ- τ τ τ τ τ τ τ τ τ τ τς + - ταύτην ἐγὼ 


oie 2 eS ὀφρῦς 


At the close of his speech exit the Cook into the house of Chaerestratus, 


A lacuna of ca. 104 verses from M? to RI. 
able distance from M2, falls the St. Petersburg fragment. 


In this interval, and at no consider- 
In the opening 


lines Smicrines continues his monologue. 


ZMIKPINHZ 


nae ἢ \ ΄ al 
ia he oe ae pate a me Ll δὲ τιμιωτατον 


Ψ > n> r - 
1 ἄνθρωπος οἶνον: αὐτὸ τοῦτ᾽ ἐκπλήττομαι adesp.105— Pet.2a 


» > e Ἂς γ ἮΙ nw , ΤΣ ΖΝ > ’ 
ἔγωγ᾽. ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μεθύσκεσθ᾽ οὐ λέγω: 


3 Ya - 5 θ᾽ ν “ ve 
ATLOTLA yep εσ ομοιον τοῦτο γέ: 


repudiation of a wife by her husband, 
as ἀπολείπειν is for the divorcee of a hus- 
band by the wife. See above, p. 41, and 
note on v. 354. 

411. τὰ χρήματα: probably a ref- 
erence to the large dowry of Pamphila, 
Βοος ihe aver ena ὑλῶν ΝΕ NOE: 

415. Σιμμίας : the Cook seems to 
refer to himself by name, as does the 
slave Parmenon in S. 475 ff. Simmias 
is the name of the cook in Menander’s 
Pseudheracles 578. 5 18., according to 
the probable conjecture of Dindorf, 
παράθες, Σιμία (σημιὰαν MSS. Athen.). 
Meineke, Men.et Phil., p. xvi, prefers 
the spelling Σιμίας. 

1. On the St. Petersbure fragment 
and the reasons for assigning it to this 
Smicrines, 


context see above, p. Od. 


still further enraged against Charisius, 
continues to Inveigh against him, — 
πίνει δὲ τιμιώτατον : since Smicrines 
goes on to say that he is not shocked 
αὖ plain drunkenness, it) would ap- 
pear that the thought to be supplied 
must relate, not to excess, but to ex- 
travaganece, in drinking. — ἅνθρωπος : 
see ony. 216. αὐτὸ τοῦτ᾽ ἐκπλήττομαι : 
it’s just this that I’m beside myself 
about, ie. with indignation, τοῦτο is 
coon, obj., frequent after vbs. express- 
ing emotion, Cf. Dem, 18. 292 ταὐτὰ 
λυπεῖσθαι καὶ ταὐτὰ χαίρειν. Herod, 9, 82 
ἐκπλαγέντα τὰ προκείμενα ἀγαθά. 

3. ἀπιστίᾳ... ὅμοιον: is mell-nigh 
incredible, lit, touches on (is like) incered- 
ihility. ἀπιστία is often used for the as- 


tonishiment due to doubt orineredulity, 


ΕἸΠΠΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 95 


εἰ καὶ βιάζεται κοτύλην τις TOVBoXOd' 


> 4 4 ε ’ὔ Or SIAM, oan 
5 ὠνουμένος πινειν EAUVTOV. TOUT έγω 


ih & 5 Ν Fs Aq 
προσέμενον" OUTOS ἐμπέσων διασίκεδᾷ 


ἊΝ ¥ CAPSS EN ARE. , 30 ΕΗ, 4 
TOV ερωτα. τι ὃ €MOL TOUTO | παλιν οἰμώξεται. 


A Ν᾽ A , tA τ τ, Anis ral 
προῖκα δὲ λαβὼν τάλαντα τέτταρ᾽ ἀργύρου, 


3 ~ XN 4 > Coa N > ἌΝ al 
OU TNS γυναικος νενομιχ QUTOV OLKETY)V. 


eng Pers a , 
10 QTOKOLTOS €OTL. πορνοβοσκῴῷ δώδεκα 


τῆς ἡμέρας δραχμὰς δίδωσι. δώδεκα. 


AS. vA mle gale) ix en! “ € Ν Ν id 
ETLO TAT ἀκριβῶς ουτοσιτα πραγματα. 


but for its meaning here as the equiva- 
lent of ἄπιστόν τι no parallel has been 
found. Wilamowitz has plausibly sug- 
gested ἀπληστίᾳ, like gluttony, assum- 
ing textual corruption. The two words 
are thus confounded in the MSS. of Dio 
Chrys. 48. 15 τρυφῆς καὶ ἀπιστίας or 
ἀπληστίας. --- τοῦτό γε: τὸ μεθύσκεσθαι. 
4. εἰ καί, κτέ.: though a fellow does 
force himself to drink cheap wine. — 
κοτύλην τοὐβολοῦ : to the stingy Smic- 
rines it would seem extravagant to 
drink any wine, even the cheapest. In 
828 B.c. wine was furnished to laborers 
at Eleusis for the celebration of the 
Choes at a cost to the state of .66 obol 
per κοτύλη, --- a very low rate, — IG. 
11 8346 ii. 68 (Ditt. Syl.2 587, 205). 
On the low cost of wine at Athens see 
Bockh-Friankl, Staatshaushaltung I, 
p. 128. The art. is regularly used with 
the gen. of price to indicate the rate. 
5f. τοῦτο... προσέμενον: this ixjust 
what I was waiting for. 
to refer to what follows ; 


τοῦτο Secs 
see on v. 91. 
6. ἐμπεσών : recklessly. This abso- 
lute sense is found, e.g., in Herod. 3. 81 
’ ’ ‘ Ν ΓΑ , 
ωὡθέει τε ἐμπεσὼν τὰ πρήγματα ἄνευ voor. 
— διασκεδᾷ, κτέ. : hell scatter affection 
Per 


haps the pres, διασπαθᾷ was written, 


to the winds, i.e. his wife’s love. 


he squanders his love. But the figure 
involved in the phrase διασκεδᾷ (or 
διασπαθᾳᾷ) τὸν ἔρωτα seems not to occur 
elsewhere. Possibly τὸν ἔρωτα is a cor- 
ruption of τὰ πατρῷα. cf. Diph. 43. 27K. 
Ta πατρῷα βρύκει καὶ σπαθᾷ, and ν. 52%. 

7. τί δ᾽ ἐμοὶ τοῦτο : but what's that 
to me, you say? Smicrines introduces 
an objection from an imaginary inter- 
locutor, as again in vv. 850 ff. — πάλιν: 
again 1 say, cf. αὖθις in Aesch. Ag. 
. ὦμοι μάλ᾽ αὖθις, 
appar- 
ently previously used the expression, 


1345 ὦμοι. rémAnyua.. 
δευτέραν πεπληγμένος. [10 has 


which is often on his lips, ef. v. 24 of 
this fragment and vy. 528, 559, 856, 

8. προῖκα: the dowry is Smicrines’ 
chief concern, ef. vv. 855, 867. 

9. οἰκέτην : a husband's subservi- 
ency to a richly-dowered wife is a fa- 
vorite topic of the comic poets, ef. Men. 
583. K. αὑτὸν δίδωσι, οὐκ ἐκείνην λαμβάνει, 
Anax,. 521K. πένης ὧν τὴν γυναῖκα χρή- 
ματα λαβὼν ἔχει δέσποιναν, οὐ γυναῖκ ἔτι" 
ἧς ἐστι δοῦλος. and Antiph. 820 hv. 

10. ἀπόκοιτος : cf. Lie. Dial. meretr. 
10.2 μηδέποτε ἀπόκοιτός pou γενόμενος. 
For other indications that Charisius is 
not living at home see above. p. Hl. 
12. ἀκριβῶς: sarcastic. τὰ πρά- 
γματα: affairs oft business, 


96 MENANAPOY 


roe Ὁ > 7 Ν 5 XN Ν Ν « ,ὔ ean | 
Τί 8 εἰς διατροφὴν ἀνδρὶ και πρὸς ἡμέρων 


“ἀρκεῖν λεχόγισται; δύ᾽ ὀβολοὺς τῆς ἡμέρας. 


(ic roll ry Lal πὰ FF , ra] , 
15 τελεῖν TAEW πεινῶντι τίς λόγος ποτέ; 


Chaerestratus and Onesimus approach, coming from the country. 


Smicrines 


does not at first see them. 


Sc. 8. SMICRINES, CHAERESTRATUS, ONESIMUS 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


re “A pales 4 La , π᾿ ar ΤΊ 
ορω τὰ OS σε προσμένει. Χαιρεέστρατε. 


ΧΑΤΙΡΕΣΤΡΑΤΟΣ 


τίς ὅδ᾽ ἐστὶ δή, γλυκύταθ᾽; 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


ὁ τῆς νύμφης πατήρ. 


᾿καταλοιδορῶν ws ἀθλιός τις τῆς τύχης." 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝῊΗΣ (to himself at first) 


᾿καλήν ap ἔλαβ᾽. 6 τρισκακοδαίμων. ψάλτριαν, 


18. καὶ πρὸς ἡμέρων: sc. ἀνδρῶν, 
even by humane men. Cf. Dem. 21.49 
εἰσὶν “Ἑλληνές τινες ἄνθρωποι οὕτως ἥμεροι 
καὶ φιλάνθρωποι τοὺς τρόπους, Plat. Lege. 
δδδε παρὰ δὲ δὴ νομοθετῶν φασκόντων 
εἶναι μὴ ἀγρίων ἀλλὰ ἡμέρων. Smicrines 
makes a pretense of adopting a high 
standard, 

14. λελόγισται : Smicrines is a eal- 
culating man, λογιστικός:, Vv. ROY. — 
δύ᾽ ὀβολούς: cf. Theop. 55 1K. καίτοι ris 
οὐκ ἂν οἶκος εἰ πράττοι τετρωβολίζων, εἰ 
νῦν γε διώβολον φέρων ἀνὴρ τρέφει γυναῖκα: 
The dole of two obols (διωβολία) that 
was distributed to Athemlan citizens 
during the period of greatest distress 
in the Peloponnesian War was at least 
enough to keep a man and his wife 
Smilerines” cal- 


alive. According to 


culation Charisius was spending, for 


Habrotonon alone, enough to support 
36 men, 

15. τελεῖν : the regular vb. with we 
σθόν ἀν} the like. — πλέω : sc. χρήματα. 
On the Attic see 


Blass ἃ 156.3. — πεινῶντι: 


form in Ktihner- 


who Pere 


foree must accept the pittance, — 


λόγος: Se. ἐστί. The thought is: κατὰ 
τίνα λόγον τελοῖ ἄν Tis πλέω πεινῶντι: 
λόγος On account Of λελόγισται : but 
tis νόμος: (= τί δεῖ) also is possible. 
16. Onesimus, who had fledat Smic- 
rines’ approach v.863, has fallen in with 
Chaerestratus, who comes from the 
other direction, i.e. from the country. 
17. ὁ τῆς νύμφης πατήρ: cf. v. 670. 
ΤΌΣ καλήν: μον: 


SCOMSN, 


ato) = apa: it 
¢ ‘ 

- ὁ τρισκακοδαίμων : so (Chia- 
risius characterizes himself inv. 698, 


-- ψάλτριαν; cf. fr. GOO, p. 47 above, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΈΠΟΝΤΕΣ ' 97 


20 τὴν δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦσαν γυναῖκα᾽ βούλεται 


τὰν τ eam OL 
ΕΣ πα 


Lacuna of ca, 15 verses to the verso of the St. Petersburg fragment. A 
continuation of the same scene. 


XAIPEZTPATOZ 


r 9 > 1 , , 
OUTWS ἀγαϑόν τι σοι γένοιτο. 


Pet.2b 


ZMIKPINH= 


μὴ λέγε 


[= Σ ΜΕ an > 3 ΄ ee 72 ΄ 
PNOEV Ovy ς OUK €ElS KOPQakas ; οἰμώξει μάακρα. 


r > iy ~ A 
25 ἀλλ᾽ εἶμι νῦν εἴσω. σαφῶς τε πυθόμενος 


cry ¥ τ ἣν A , , 
OTWS EXEL TA τὴς θυγατρός. βουλεύσομαι 


γῳ Vv SS nr » “ 
ὄντινα TPOTOY πρὸς τοῦτον ἤδη προσβαλῶ. 


Exit Smicrines into the house of Charisius. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


Us , W be So a 7 29 , 
βούλει μὲν αὐτῷ τοῦτον ἤκοντ᾽ ἐνθάδε 


ts ’ὔ at 
ppacwper ; 


ΧΑΙΡΕΣΤΡΑΤΟΣ 


eae , > ΄, A 
OLOV κίναδος. OLKLQAV ποει 


ΓΦ , δ). 
“0 αναστατον. 

23. οὕτως. κτέ. : See on v.47. When 
μοί is used in this formula the main 
sentence is a positive asseveration, 
promise, or threat. σοί, however, ac- 
companies an entreaty. Chaerestratus 
has just been pleading on behalf of 
Charisius, 

27. ὅντινα: see on vy. 265, 280. 
τοῦτον: Chiarisius. -- προσβαλῶ πρός: 
alnilitary expression, assault, cf. Xen. 
Anab. 6.3.6 προσέβαλλον πρὸς τοὺς 
ὁπλίτας. 

28. βούλει... φράσωμεν: οἷ. Aris- 
toph. Ey.36 βούλει τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῖς θεαταῖ- 


σιν φράσω; and GMT, καὶ 281. ---τοῦτον: 


Smnicrines. — ἥκοντα : partie. in ind, 
disc., as often with ἀγγέλλειν, ef. Eur. 
I. ἽΝ 802 τίς ἂν φράσειε.. . . τὸν Πηλέως 
ζητοῦντά νιν παῖδα; GMT. § WA, 

29 f. κίναδος: for, as ἃ term of re- 
proach, erafty rascal, ef. Soph. Nj. 
102 τοὐπίτριπτον κίναδος (Odysseus), 
Dem. 18. 242 τοῦτο δὲ (λύπολ 5) καὶ 


φύσει κίναδος τἀνθρώπιόν ἐστι, AVistoph, 


AV. 120. πυκνότατον κίναδος. οἰκίαν : 
familia. On the omission of the art. 
see hoteon yv. 921. THemeans, of course, 


the household of his son Charisiug, 
Shee : aS a 

ποεῖ ἀνάστατον: is rvining, cf. Men. 

Colax 56 (OX, Pap. III, no, 409) ὅσας 


98 MENANAPOY 


ONHZIMOZ 


πολλὰς ἐβουλόμην apa. 


ΧΑΙΡΕΣΤΡΑΤΟΣ 
γ ’ὕ , na | 
τί λέγεις ; 
ΟΝΉΣΙΜΟΣ 


μίαν μὲν τὴν ἐφεξῆς. 


ΧΑΙΡΕΣΤΡΑΤῸΣ 


τὴν ἐμήν; 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


αν Ts > Ν “ Ν Γ΄ , 
τὴν σὴν y. ιωμεν δεῦρο πρὸς Χαρίσιον. 


ΧΆΤΡΕΣΤΡΑΤΟΣ 


ΓᾺΡ A c XS Cb » 
ἴωμεν, ὡς καὶ μειρακυλλίων οχλος 


ἑόρακας. Photius 
(Berl.) attests the use of the expres- 
sion by Menander. Lit. cause the in- 
habitants to leave, of a city or country 
captured by the enemy. — ἐβουλόμην : 
ἐβουλόμην 
without ἄν is used with the inf. to ex- 
press a wish forsomething not realized, 


ἀναστάτους πόλεις 


SC. αὐτὸν ποεῖν ἀναστάτους. 


with ἄν a hopeless wish, GMT. §§ 426, 
427; Gildersleeve, Syn. ὃ 367, 

31. τὴν ἐφεξῆς : the one nect door. 
This allusion to the house of Chaeres- 
tratus gives a valuable hint as to the 
scenery of the play ; see above, p. 40. 
— The motive for Onesimus’? wish for 
bad luck upon this house is apparently 
that it is ocenpied by the leno who 
owns Habrotonon, It is therefore in 
a way responsible for the present 
slave 


eonduct of Charisius. So. the 


Palinurus in Plaut. Cure, 89 f., in re- 
sponse to the remark by Phaedromus: 
avaedes, 


beatae 


Pa. quia scelestam servitutem 


lenonis hae sunt Says 


male istis eveniat. qui? 


serviunt. The slave in Plaut. Poen. 
870 has another reason, his bad treat- 
ment by the leno, for exclaiming ut 
ego hane familiam (the leno’s) 
interire cuplo., 

33 f. ὄχλος... ἔρχεται : ΔΙ. Croiset 
well compares this incursion of bois- 
terous revelers with the κῶμος of Alci- 
biades and his friends described by 
Plato in Symp. 212¢. If the crowd 
of drunken youth are the guests of 
Charisius, as is probable, they come 
from the house, A prepositional pretix 
(€&- oul, elo-, προς-. παρ-έρχεται in) USU- 
ally indicates the direction from which 
If the cho- 
rus here is composed of the same per- 


arriving characters come, 
sons as before (after v. 201), we can 
account for their being drunk, ef. vv. 
21D Were 


During the intermission and until 


-μὴ voxAetv: cf SN. 3883. 


the next appearance of Smiecrines and 


Chaerestratus upon the scene, the 


former is supposed to be engaged in 


his interview with Pamphila (ν. 26 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤῈΣ 


99 


πε: » ’ » Shee We we cs ” 
εἰς TOV τόπον τις ἔρχεθ᾽ ὑποβεβρεγμένων, 


Mie Suu? a ¥ Cy ee ur aq 
35 OLS μη νοχλεῖν ευὐυκαιρον ειναι μοι δοκεῖ. 


Exeunt into the house of Chaerestratus. A group of revelers enter and give 
a performance. 


τ: ἡ ἵκει 5) at 
ΧΟΡΟΣ 


ACT 


Enter Onesimus from the house of Chaerestratus. 


Sc. 1. OnrEsIMus alone 


IV 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


> lg »ὉἭ Ὁ ’, > [pe ay 5 Sout 
ἐπισφαλῆ pev πάντα τἀνθρώπων. ἐμοί, 


Pent , 2 \ \ \ \ , q 
οιμαι, πόλις εστι και καταφυγὴ και νομος 


Ν Ar ΄ὔ lal τὰ , ἣν \ 2) 
και TOU δικαίου TOU T ἀδίκου TAVTOS κριτὴς 


ε ΤᾺ Ν A ν A A 3 | 
ὁ δεσπότης: πρὸς τοῦτον ἕνα δεῖ ζῆν ἐμέ. 


«ε ,ὔὕ r pS A «ε ’ , at 
40 ὁ γέρων δ᾽ ἐκεῖνος ὁ κατάρατος Σμικρίνης 


οὐδὲ λόγον ἡμῶν οὐδ᾽ ἐπισ 


* * * * * * 


above) in one house, while, in the 
other, first Chaerestratus sees Cha- 
risius (v. 32 above), then Habrotonon 
plays out her little comedy with him. 
Several scenes in the fourth act are 
required to bring before the specta- 
tors the outcome of these interviews 
from the point of view of the various 
persons concerned in them. 

86. Onesimus introduces a summary 
of the present situation by an aphorism 
on human affairs. Such sentiments 
are frequently used in tragedy at the 
beginning of speeches in which the πε- 
ριπέτεια is announced. The tragic tone 
of these verses is unmistakable. The 
dénouement is at hand. — ἐπισφαλῆ: 
ef. v. 3849. First the generalization, 
then the specific instance (v.40), which 
Onesimus evidently fears will be the 
triumph of Smicrines at the expense of 


aK 


581 K. 

A » ΕἾ erie 

τροφὴν ἔχων --- 836 K. 
ic * * * * * 


Charisius.— τἀνθρώπων : cf. Alex. 210. 
QIK. μανιώδη πάντα τἀνθρώπων ὅλως. 

37-39. Quoted by Stobacus, who, 
however, begins the quotation with 
ἐμοί (from v.36) instead of ofuac, simply 
to give a neater form to the sentiment, 

37. πόλις: cf. Antiph. 265 K. δούλῳ 
γάρ, οἶμαι, πατρίδος ἐστερημένῳ χρηστὸς 
γενόμενός ἐστι δεσπότης πατρίς, Vheoph- 
ilus 1K. τὸν ἀγαπητὸν δεσπότην, .. 
δί ὃν εἶδον νόμους “Ελληνας. 

39. πρὸς τοῦτον: according to his 
pleasure, οἵ. Arist. Rhet. 1367.82 ἐλεὺ- 
θέρου γάρ (ἐστι) τὸ μὴ πρὸς ἄλλον ζῆν. 
Plat. Phacdr, 257 8 ἁπλῶς πρὸς Epwra 


. τὸν βίον (ποιεῖν). and PL 10,1. 


41. λόγον: defined in Et. Ma 
Where the verse is quoted, as φροντίς. 
ἐπιστροφήν : heed cf. bur. ΓΟ 67 


ἴσασι πάντες. ὧν ἐπιστροφή (attention) 


i 
τις ἢν. 


100 


MENANAPOY 


To the lost portion of the first part of the fourth act belong, apparently, sev- 
eral passages which have been preserved in quotations, which may be as- 


signed to the several scenes as follows : 


Enter the Cook from the house of Chaerestratus. 


Sc. 2. Onrstmus, Cook 


ONHZIMOZ 


, δ᾽ > A 
TU OU ποεις Phot. 5. ἄλυς 


» a + eal. , , v4 
αριστον: ὁ δ᾽ ἀλύει πάλαι κατακείμενος. 


* * * * * * 


MATEIPOZ 


> Ν tou ΄ a ΄ , 
apyos ὃ VYLALY@V TOU TUPETTOVTOS πολύ 175 K. 


> Syd , , “ , 
ἐστ᾽ ἀθλιώτερος: διπλάσια your μάτην 


cr τς a , r q 
TTLVEL κατεσθίει TE. 


* * * * * * 


MATEIPO>D 


Cascada oa | 
ETT LTTAO W 


178K. 


3 Ν Ἂν ΄ Ὁ ΓΝ ν , 
€77L TO ταριχος αλας. εαν OUTW ΤυΧΊ)- 


* * * * * * 


At the end of this scene Onesimus and the Cook withdraw into the house of 


Chaerestratus, from which Chacrestratus enters. 


Che: 
troduced, both to relieve the tension 


A brief diversion is here in- 


and for the sake of verisimilitude, — 
since the interview of Smicrines with 
Pamphilaand that of Habrotonon with 
Charisius must be supposed to be pro- 
tracted, — by the scene of Onesimus 
and the Cook. 
self a witty fellow, according to Athe- 


The Cook showed him- 
naeus 6508. ἄριστον: see on viol, 
Considered as an entertainment the 
luncheon Was certainly a failure, for 
the euests are already drunk and the 
food is not yet in sight. — 6 8: fhe 
master, — adver: ix fretful. The detini- 
tion of Photius (Berl. s.v. aus). μηδὲν 
πράττειν, is better suited to the former 


passave v. 342 than to this, for which, 


however, the other definition given by 
Photius and other lexicographers (s.v. 
ἀλύειν) IS APpropriate, ἀδημονεῖν, δυσχε- 
ραίνειν, ἀθυμεῖν, ἀπορεῖν. The Cook, in 
his reply to Onesimus in the next quo- 
tation, sees both meanings in the word, 
ἀργός -- μηδὲν πράττων, ἄθλιος = adnuo- 
νῶν. The idleman in health is far more 
unhappy than he iho is sick of a fever. 
The medical writers used the tern: for 
fretfulness or nervousness, ef. Galen, 
ad Hipp. Aphor. 7.56 (XVITL i, p. 167 
Ktihn) ἀλύειν μὲν οὖν λέγουσιν ἐκείνους 
τῶν ὑγιαινόντων ὅσοιπερ ἂν ἀεὶ τοῖς παροῦ- 
σιν δυσ χεραίνοντες ἄλλοτε εἰς ἄλλα μετα- 
βαίνουσι πράγματά τε καὶ πράξεις.--- γοῦν: 
af αὐ rate, introducing a partial proof 
of the assertion. — μάτην: to ne purpose. 


ENITPEMONTES 


Sc. 3. CHAERESTRATUS 


101 


XAIPEZTPATOZ 


ἐλευθέρῳ τὸ καταγελᾶσθαι "μὲν πολὺ 


176K. 


» νὰ δ ἢ > \ te “ +9 , 
αἴσχιστόν ἐστι: τὸ δ᾽ ὀδυνᾶσθ ἀνθρώπινον. 


* * * * * * 


* * * * * * 


Enter Smicrines from the house of Charisius. 


Sc. 4. CHAERESTRATUS, SMICRINES 


XAIPEZTPATOZ 

2f.\ 4 , xa Ν δι 

οὐθὲν πέπονθας δεινόν. ἂν μὴ προσποῃ. 179K. 

es ee ee ee, Se eR oes her στ σὲ 
XAIPEZTPATOZ 

QS πο τ ΟΣ = ite a τ ἐν R!, quat. z, p.1, 1. 25 

PAE ee ee el ee ee eee 

οὐδ᾽ ap--------7--------- 

δῦ μέροςτ - --------- τ τ ee 


—In the third quotation the Cook tells 
how he intends to prepare the viands. 
— ἐὰν οὕτω τύχῃ : ἃ colloquial idiom, 
equivalent in tone to our if I feel like it. 

Sc. 3. During his brief stay in the 
house Chaerestratus has warned his son 
of the presence of Smicrines(y. 28, p. 97) 
and has learned from him his present 
trouble and how he proposes to mend 
it. During the monologue of Chaeres- 
tratus, Habrotonon within is supposed 
to be proving to Charisius that the 
child is his and that she is its mother, 
while Smicrines is supposed to be urg- 
ing his daughter to go home with him. 
— The next quotation seems to come 
from the monologue. The thought is 
probably suggested by the unhappy 
plight of Charisius: For a frecborn man 
ridicule is most shameful; but sorrow 
is the lot of man. It would be better 
for Charisius to endure his misfortune 


than to continue to make himself ridie- 
ulous. 

Sc. 4. Smicrines comes from his 
daughter thwarted in his plan to in- 
duce her to leave Charisius and yet de- 
He has of 


course not yet learned that Charisius 


termined to have his way. 


is responsible for a νόθος, for as yet 
only Habrotonon and Charisius are 
aware of this faet; nor does he know 
that his daughter has borne a child in 
secret (see above, p. 39). In one quo- 
tation and in the papyrus fragment R 
a portion of the dialogue between the 
two fathers is preserved, οὐδὲν... 
προσποῇ : you've suffered no outrage Uf 
you llonly pretend you've not, For this 
meaning of μὴ προσποεῖσθαι et. Philem. 
231K. ὁ λοιδορῶν yap, av ὁ λοιδορούμενος 
μὴ προσποῆται. λοιδορεῖται λοιδυρῶν, 

The reasons forthe assizmiment of R 


to this context are given above, 1». oo, 


102 


ἡ με Se fama Pacten geist op ae 2) GT 


VY 


e A ANE Ἵ 
μιν κεκήδευκας; fa ΞΘ 


MENANAPOY 


ΚΓ Js | 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


ε Ν » ΤῸ ἫΝ en > > , 
ὑψηλὸς ὧν τις οὗτος.᾿ οὐκ οἰμώξεται, 


r ΄ q 
φαίνεται 


CEES 


καταφθαρείς τ᾽ ἔν ματρυλείῳ τὸν βίον᾽ 


Exit Chaerestratus to the city. 


R2, quat. z, p.2) 1.24 


\ A AF , » > > NOE a! 
530 μετὰ τῆς καλῆς πόρνης ETELT οὐχ NOEWS 
ve > € A aE 3, 4 ’ , q 
βιώσεθ ; μας δ᾽ οὐκέτι λυπήσει τοτε. 
{Lacuna of ca. 24 verses to R?.] 
ZMIKPINH2 
BOO see ara tahoe See eg τ ee TCG, 
- 2-2 ee ee ee τ τ - - - καὶ μᾶλα 
Eas) > ap 
-τ- τ +--+ ------ - - οὐκ οἰμώξεται; 
TS ae’ a 
BOO ee = - - τοῦ βίου 


- - - - - = - - = - - - - ν “4 


γ Ww" γ aS. in 
TOU δυστυχοῦς. 


ΠΡ ΝῊ a 
eit OY. δυστυχῆ. 


ἀλλ᾽ ἴσως ἐγὼ 


νι τὸν r , aero. a 
Po re ane eee le eV) Ge: MOAT Os hay, CLD 


527. κεκήδευκας, κτέ.: allied your- 
self with us, by giving Pamphila in mar- 
riage to Charisius. Cf. [Dem.] 69.81 
καὶ (ὅτι) διὰ τοῦτο κηδεύσειεν αὐτῷ. 

528 1. ὑψηλός : ἃ contemptuous al- 
lusion to the proud and haughty bear- 
ing of Charisius. So Phaedra in Eur, 
Hipp. 720 says that by her death she 
will teach Hippolytus μὴ ᾽πὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς 
κακοῖς ὑψηλὸς εἶναι. See v. TOT. -- οὐκ 
... βίον: quoted by lexicoeraphers, as 
from this play, in 
λεῖον. Dut 


a gloss on ματρυ- 
Without τε. - καταφθαρείς: 
when he’s gone to ruin. ματρυλείῳ: 
Chexaeronour os: Mihi rl Οὐ νυ all (yee 


τόν Blov: construe with βιώσεται. 


556 ff. Chaerestratus seems to have 
taken his leave. Tle is to return later, 
see y. 769. Before departing for his 
home in the city Smicrines probably 
announees his Intention (v. 565) to re- 
turn prepared to take his daughter 
the apracua of ν. 870. 
ROT, 


away by force 
ΘΓ ve 
Seo). In the interval between R2 
and Hi! Tabrotonon, in a monolo re, 
tells the result) of her interview with 
Charisius. Everything has happened 
according to her program (vy. 296- 
321). We has acknowledged 
the father of the child 
her to be its mother, accepting her 


himself 


and believes 


ENITPEMONTES 


103 


Γ 9 Ψ Ἢ Ν , 
565 - - ee ke kee eX ἀπάγειν THV θυγατέρα 


¥ \ ΄ 
-ττ τ τς τ τ τς τς εἴσω καὶ σχέδον 


VOUS ere cates. δον Uda ον 


[Lacuna of ca. 70 verses to H1.] 


Exit Smicrines to the city. Enter Habrotonon frum the house of Chaerestratus. 


Sc. 5. HABROTONON alone 


* * * * * * 


* * * * * * 


Enter Sophrona from the house of Charisius, accompanied to the door by Pam- 
phila. She does not at first see Habrotonon, who, however, sees and recog- 
nizes Pamphila. Habrotonon conceals herself. 


Sc. 6. Haproronon, SopHRONA 


ZQbPONH (to herself) 


, 
κλάουσα. 
* * Ἂς rot * * 


story. It remains for her now to find 
the mother. She will visit the women 
by whom she had been employed at 
the Tauropolia and will make inquiry 
of them, for the unknown girl was a 
friend of theirs (vv. 265, 284). She has 
no suspicion as to who the girl may be. 

Sc. 6. Before Habrotonon has left 
the scene Sophrona comes from the 
house of her mistress. Pamphila comes 
to the door with her. Habrotonon, 
hearing the door creak, quickly looks 
around. She sees the face of Pamphila 
fora moment as, standing in the πρόθυ- 
pov, she exchanges a few words with 
her maid (cf. P. 61 ff.), and recognizes 
her as the girl of the Tauropolia. She 
cannot see the face of Sophrona, how- 
ever, Whose back is turned toward her. 
Instead of going on with her original 
plan, Habrotonon quickly forms a new 
one. She conceals herself from Soph- 
rona’s view and overhears what she 


> , \ ἊΝ 
ἐξετύφην μὲν οὖν Ist Κ᾿ 


says, standing, probably, in the πρόθυρον 


Doubt- 
less Sophrona refers freely, since she 


of the house of Chaerestratus. 


believes herself to be alone, to the mis- 
fortune of her wretched mistress, and 
a reference by her to the child, whose 
birth has been kept a seeret from all 
but Onesimus and Charisius, would 
add one more link to the chain of evi- 
dence which Habrotonon is forging. 
Frr, 184,566. Sophronadepicts the 
plightin which Pamphila now finds her- 
self by relating the conversation which 
Pamphila has just had with Smiecrines, 
—or rather the first part of it, for the 
latter part is overheard by Charisius ; 
Sophrona’s narrative is supplemented 
in vv. 670 ff and 705 tf, Pwo tragments 
of Sophrona’s speech are preserved: in 
quotations, the first: from: the carly 
part of it, the second from her account 
with 


of Smicrines* stormy interview 


his daughter. ἐξετύφην : apparently 


104 


MENANAPOY 


ΣΩΦΡΟΝῊ (to herself) 


᾿λέγει μὲν αὐτῇ ταῦτα -᾿ “χαλεπόν, Παμφίλη, 


566 K. 


ey , Ἂν Ν , , 
ἐλευθέρᾳ γυναικὶ πρὸς πόρνην μάχη. 
πλείονα κακουργεῖ, πλείον᾽ οἶδ᾽, αἰσχύνεται 


οὐδέν, κολακεύει μᾶλλον." 
* * Ho * * * 


* * * * * * 


Habrotonon comes forward with the child in her arms. 


ABPOTONON 


Ter EN By teat 
-- τ τ ee ee ee τς - τς - - ᾿τὸ παιδίον 


» τ 
G38 ἔξειμ ἐχουσα. 


She approaches Sophrona, whose back is turned to her, 


κλαυμυρίζεται. Tadav 


my eyes are burned out with weeping. 
The vb. is rare and somewhat obscure 
in meaning. — χαλεπόν, xré.: one of 
Smicrines’ arguments intended to in- 
duce Pamphila to leave her husband. 
Sophrona quotes the very words of 
Smicrines, as Charisius (vv. 705 ff.) 
later quotes those of Pamphila.— ka- 
Koupyet: Sc. ἡ πόρνη. 

638 ff. When Sophrona has finished 
her story, Habrotonon comes from her 
place of concealment, the baby in her 
arms. She already suspects that the 
old nurse whom she had seen talking 
with Pamphila in the doorway is the 
woman Who had been in charge of the 
young «irl at the festival (ef, v. 905), 
She must first ΠΟΤ ἃ clear view of this 
woman's faee, and then, if her suspi- 
clon proves true, will test her con- 
jecture, now almost a certainty, that 
Pamphila is the mother, by surprising 
Sophrona into a betrayal of ler mis- 
tress’ secret. For this the baby will be 
necessary, Weml4ustassume, therefore, 
that Habrotonon has quickly gone Inte 


the house and got the baby. By act- 


H!, quat. z, p. 5 


ing at first as if the child were her 
own (in y. 652 she acknowledges the 
pretense),— for a time pretending to 
be unconscious of the other woman's 





presence, —and then, when sure of the 
nurse’s identity, displaying the trin- 
kets Which were hung about the child's 
neck so that Sophrona could not fail to 
see them (she calls Sophrona’s atten- 
tion to them inv. 650), she would draw 
from Sophrona full confirmation of her 
own suspicions. We see Habrotonon 
beginning this pretty comedy when the 
papyrus text is resumed with Hl From 
vy. G88 to ν. 648 she devotes herself 
rather ostentatiously to the baby, 
638. ἔξειμ᾽ ἔχουσα: I'll yo out row 
with the buby. “Teome from the house ὁ" 
would be ἐξέρχομαι. Habrotonon ex- 
plains to the audience the motive for 
her reappearance. After this explana- 
tion she sets the baby to howling lus- 
tily, and, for the benefit of Sophrona, 
makes a creat exhibition of tenderness 
toward it. κλαυμυρίζεται : keeps cry- 
ing, The form, in place of κλαυθμυρίζε- 


Tat, is attested by Photius, 


EILITPEIIONTES 


105 


Τὰ Ν >’ DO, SS , ΄ 
πάλαι γαρ ουκ οἷὸ O TL κακον πέπονθέ μοι. 


ΣΩΦΡΟΝῊ (to herself) 


’, a A , 3) , , 
640 Tis av θεῶν τάλαιναν ἐλεήσειέ με; 


[360] 


ABPOTONON (to the child) 


ὦ φίλτατ᾽, οἰκτίρουσά σ᾽ ἔξειμι σφόδρα. 


ἢ Ly x 5 ae let a , 
καιπέερ μεν ἀσθενής, ομὼς πορεύυσομαῖι. 
Accosting Sophrona, who is about to depart without turning her head. 


Γι ᾿ , oF , Let δι A ie) AY 
μικρον. γυναι, προσμεινον εμε. KaAws σ έγω 


or 
ευρηκα. 


639. πάλαι: const. with πέπονθε. --- 
γάρ: and it well may, for. — οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅ 
τι κακόν: nescio quid malum.— 
pot: ethical dat., expressing a mother’s 
solicitude. The whole v. may be ren- 
dered: For something or other has ailed 
it, poor little thing (μοι), ever so long. 

640. ris ἄν, xré.: utinam mi- 
sereatur mei aliquis deorum. 
Sophrona has not yet seen Habroto- 
non. The latter makes clear in v. 659 
that she hears these words (as in fact 
she has heard everything Sophrona has 
said), but for the time being she con- 
tinues to ignore Sophrona’s presence. 

641-648. The text of these eight 
verses is badly broken and the letters 
that can be discerned are very dim. 
Only the drift of the passage can be 
divined. The alternation of speakers, 
however, is fairly certain, thanks to 
the indications in the MS. Habroto- 
non certainly speaks y. 641 and either 
two or three verses following. Sophrona 
certainly speaks v. 649, possibly a por- 
tionof v. 648 ; Habrotonon the first part 
at least of 648 and perhaps the end of 
v. 647; Sophrona the first part at least 
of v. 647; Habrotonon, accordingly, 
vy. 645-646, Since, then, Habrotonon 


is the speaker of v. 641 and at least 
two of the three following verses, and 
speaks again, after an interruption, in 
y. 645, the intervening verse 644 must 
be assigned to Sophrona, though no 
indication is preserved in the MS. of 
a change of speakers after v. 643. As- 
suming this distribution of the lines to 
be essentially correct, as well as the 
view of this scene presented above, the 
general course of this part of the action 
can be followed. 

641. φίλτατε : she seems to address 
the child throughout vv. 641-642. In 
trying to draw Sophrona’s attention so 
as to get a better view of her face, 
Habrotonon pretends to be anxious 
about the baby, whom we must sup- 
pose to be still crying vigorously. - 
σφόδρα: construe with οἰκτίρουσα. 

642. ἀσθενής: i.e. εἰς ὠφέλειαν, help- 
less, se. οὖσα. It is of course impossi 
ble to determine just what the context 
Was, --- πορεύσομαι: cf. P2178. She will 
vo for help. 

643 f. πρόσμεινον ἐμέ: these words 
were addressed to Sophrona, and were 
probably accompanied EAP AO rete 2 
vac, todraw Sophrona’s attention sharp- 


ly to the speaker. But the remaining 


MENANAPOY 


ΣΩΦΡΟΝῊ (turning and addressing Habrotonon) 


alate ΄ ΄ TTA 4 A , 
πῶς φῇς; Twa καλέϊν δοκεῖς, γύναι ; 


ABPOTONON (to herself) 


> tart} TA be Le» τ 3 A , 
645 αὐτὴ OTL, νυν ἐγῷδα. (To Sophrona) χαῖρε, φιλτάτη 


γύναι, βλέφ᾽ ὧδε -᾿ δεῦρό μοι τὸν νοῦν ἔχε." 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


i fee ον" Oe PA , 
λέγ᾽ ἐμοί, τί λέγεις; 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


Ale λεία 


΄ γ ΨΩ \ 
TEPVGL διεγνώσθης εμοι 


A ΄ FG. ΠΕΣ ΤΕΥ ΕΥκ ον eS pa 
τοῖς Ταυροπολίοις. εἰπερ εὖ μέμνημ, ἐγώ. 


traces of the letters do not permit 
a restoration. Habrotonon 
dently not yet succeeded, for all her 


has. evi- 


tactics, in causing Sophrona to turn 
her face towards her, and the latter is 
on the point of withdrawing.— καλῶς, 
κτέ.: ef. Eur. L.A. 1107 ἐν κάλῳ σ᾽ ἔξω 
δόμων ηὕρηκα.- τίνα καλεῖν δοκεῖς : cf. 
Soph. Trach, 402 πρὸς τίν᾽ ἐννέπειν δο- 
xets; VP. 267 πρὸς τίν᾽ οἴεσθ᾽, εἰπέ μοι, παί- 
tev; The text assumes that Sophrona 
is surprised and somewhat resentful 
that the other woman accosts her in 
this way. 

645. Asshe had expected, Habroto- 
non finds that the nurse is the woman 
Whom she had seen at the festival (vy. 
655). Wer task is now easier and she 
will have a double proof that in Pam- 
phila she has found the mother.—avrq : 
or avr7, See on V. 268, 

646. Now more confident of sue- 
cess, Habrotonon drops her caution 
and proceeds directly to her purpose — 
to secure from Sophrona an admission 


that it was really she who accom- 


panied Pamphila at the Tauropolia, 
and to force her to identify the trin- 
kets. — βλέφ᾽ ὧδε : cf. Soph. Trach. 402 
οὗτος, βλέφ᾽ Woe. — τὸν νοῦν ἔχε: cf. 
Eur, Orest. 1181 ἄκουε δή vuy καὶ σὺ 
δεῦρο νοῦν ἔχε. Possibly the verse ends 


With τὴν σὴν δίδου. In this case a word 


“ 


‘face’? stood after γύναι. 

647. A pause is almost invariable 
before an anapaest that begins with the 
monosyllabic forms of the interr. pron, 
or with the rel.; hence το is preferable 
to 6 (a?) 
tors, at the beginning of the second 
foot. White, Pp. 154. 
and if the next letter is a consonant, 


Which is read by most edi- 


: 
If πέρυσιν is read 


the verse begins with three anapacsts. 
3ut only three such trimeters oceur in 
all Greek comedy. On the other hand, 
with πέρυσι we have a trisylabic tri- 
brach in the third foot, which is found 
nowhereelsein Menander (though A ris- 
tophanes admits it eight times), White, 


pp. 145, 159. διεγνώσθης ἐμοί: your 


features were distinguished by me, = “1 


saw your face clearly.” 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕΣ 


107 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


Ἐ 
4 , » > 4 Ν A ΜΠ 
γυναι, πόθεν EXELS, εἰπε LOL, TOV παῖδα συ 


650 λαβοῦσ᾽; 


[370] 


ABPOTONON 


ὁρᾷς τι, φιλτάτη, σοι γνώριμον ; 
Holds up before her the child with the tokens. 
᾿πῶς TOUT ἔχει; μηδέν με δείσῃς, ὦ γύναι. 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


δ ΓΟ 5 ΙΝ a 
OUK €TEKES αυτὴ τουτο: 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


προσεποησάμην, 


> Pie De rs: ve ‘ A > φυ 
οὐχ ἵν᾿ ἀδικήσω τὴν τεκοῦσαν. ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα 


Ἂν Ν ν la > 9 , 
κατὰ σχολὴν εὕροιμι. νῦν δ᾽ εὕρηκά — σε. 


655 ὁρῶ yap nv καὶ τότε. 


ΣΩΦΡΟΝΗ 


4 273 3 Ν , 
τινος ὃ εστιν πατρος: 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


Χαρισίου. 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


τοῦτ᾽ οἶσθ᾽ ἀκριβῶς, φιλτάτη ; 


648. Habrotonon has so held the 
child that Sophrona could not help 
noticing the trinkets about its neck. 
‘Sophrona is so absorbed in what she 
sees that she pays no attention to Ha- 
brotonon’s remark, but at once ques- 
tions her about the child. 

651. πῶς τοῦτ᾽ ἔχει : Habrotonon 
holds up the necklace (τὸ δέραιον, v. 
29) before the eyes of Sophrona, who 
shrinks back, startled and frightened. 

652. οὐκ ἔτεκες αὐτή : Sophrona has 
recognized the necklace, but of course 
does not recognize the child. — mpooe- 
ποησάμην: referring to her manner 


and words in vy. 638 ff. Sophrona 


could not know that Habrotonon had 
made Charisius believe that she was 
the child’s mother, 

653. Note the two final clauses with 
iva, the one aor. subjy., the other aor. 
opt. GMT. 921. Probably no distine- 
tion was felt. 

654. εὕρηκά oe: she states her con- 
clusion with such positiveness that 
Sophrona, who realizes that she has 
betrayed the secret by her actions, at- 
tempts no denial, but asks for infor- 
mation about the child's father, 

656. τοῦτ᾽ οἶσθ᾽ ἀκριβῶς : Sophrona 
realizes αἱ Ὁ What this, { true, means 


to her mistress, 


108 


MENANAPOY 


ABPOTONON (showing the ring) 


'τόνδ᾽ οἶσθα τοῦδ᾽ ὄνθ᾽ οὗ γε THY νύμφην ὁρῶ, 


\ » > 
τὴν ἔνδον οὖσαν; 


ναίχι. 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


ΑΒΡΟΤΟΝΟΝ 


μακαρία γύναι, 


θεῶν τις ὑμᾶς ἠλέησε. τὴν θύραν 


Se td 3 , > , 
660 TOV γειτόνων τις ἐψόφηκεν ἐξιών. 


[380] 


¥ “ , > ε Ν » 
εἰσω λαβοῦσα μ᾽ ὡς σεαυτὴν εἰσαγε, 


ν Ν Ν Ν ’ ΄ὔ ω 
ἵνα καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ πάντα μου πύθῃ σαφῶς. 


Exeunt into the house of Charisius. 


Enter Onesimus from 


the house of Chaerestratus. 


657. The ring had convinced Cha- 
risius ; it would obviously be the most 
convineing proof to Sophrona also, 
next to a confession by Charisius him- 
self. It is probable, therefore, that Ha- 
brotonon now shows the ring. But the 
exact words of the text may not have 
been found. —op@: I have just seen, 
cf. ὅπερ λέγω in ν. 258 and as λέγω in 
y. 284. ἀρτίως or a similar word often 
accompanies the pres. referring to ‘* the 
past of recent experience, 


ss 


e.g. Soph. 
Elec, 347 ἥτις λέγεις μὲν ἀρτίως. See 
Kiihner-Gerth § 382.4. The explicit 
reference to Pamphila, τὴν ἔνδον οὖσαν, 
distinctly implies that she is not now 
A demonstrative would have 
Habrotonon 


visible. 
been used if she were. 
had seen her fora moment at the door 
when Sophrona came out. Cf. the simi- 
lar scene in P. ΟἹ ff., of which there are 
many examples inPlautus and Terence, 

659. Sophrona’s prayer (vy. 640) has 
beenanswered,—tpa@s : 1.6. your house- 
hold, 


660. τῶν γειτόνων tis: one of your 


See on vy. 3593. 


neighbors, This must mean somebody 


in the neighboring house, i.e. that of 
Chaerestratus.— -ἐψόφηκεν: rattled. ψο- 
φεῖν is used of one coming out, κόπτειν 
(pultare) of one about toenter ; schol. 
Aristoph. Nub. 132, who quotes Me- 
nander for both phrases. ψοφεῖν, like 
crepare, is used both transitively, as 
here (and 196, 885, 5, 467), and in- 
transitively, as S$. 395. The door, which 
opened on the πρόθυρον (see on ν. 226), 
was made to grate on thesill or creak on 
its hinges by the person who opened it. 

661. By thus bringing Habrotonon 
into the same house with Pamphila, 
the poet avoids the necessity (inevitable 
in the case of Charisius, ef. vv. 754 ff.) of 
having the latterenlightened before the 
spectators. Pamphila already knows 
the truth when Charisius returns to 
his home to beg her forgiveness (after 
vy. 742). The baby is of course deliv- 
ered over to its mother, — Habrotonon 
quietly enters the house of her rival to 
make such disclosures to her as will 
restore her husband to her. Terence 
employed a similar situation in the 
Hecyra(vy. 727 ff.): Bacchis, the former 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤῈΣ 


Sc. 7. ONEsIMUs alone 


109 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


€ id > es by Ν 3 ,ὔ ΄ 
ὑπομαίνεθ᾽ οὗτος, νὴ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω, μαίνεται, 


S28, 55 θῶ ΄, N τὴ , 
ἐμάνη γ᾽ ἀληθῶς, μαίνεται. νὴ τοὺς θεούς. 


665 τὸν δεσπότην λέγω. Χαρίσιον. χολὴ 


[385] 


, Di a la AiG, τι 
μέλαινα προσπέπτωκεν Y) TOLOUTO τι’ 


r 4 nN » (igs Dat? Gaal » rs 3 | 
τί yap ἂν τις εἰκάσειεν ado γέγονεέναι ; 


Ν A , δ ¥ > “- ΝῊ 
προς ταις θύραις γαρ ἔνδον αρτιως πολὺν 


mistress of Pamphilus, visits Philu- 
mena, his wife, in order to testify to 
the good conduct of Pamphilus since his 
marriage. The ring which she wears, 
given her once by Pamphilus, is recog- 
nized by Philumena as the one she had 
worn at the time of an unfortunate 
adventure. The reconciliation of Pam- 
philus and Philumena follows. The 
Bacchis of Terence, unlike Habroto- 
non, dilates upon her own generous 
conduct: solam fecisse id quod 
aliae meretrices facere fugi- 
tant (v. 776, cf. 756). <A girb like 
Habrotonon must, of course, have felt 
the delicacy of such an interview as 
keenly as Bacchis did: nam nupta 
meretrici hostis est, a viro ubi 
segregatast (v. 789). The character 
of Habrotonon is as superior to that of 
Bacchis as the character of Charisius 
is to that of Pamphilus. 

663 ff. Onesimus comes on the scene 
in a state of great excitement mingled 
with fear, and breathlessly relates how 
his master, now overwhelmed (vy. 678) 
by the knowledge that his own sin has 
found him out, has been affected by the 
evidence he has received of his wife's 
love and forbearance him. 
Onesimus fails to tell us how he chanced 
to bea witness of the scene he describes. 
He has been shamelessly eayesdrop- 


toward 


ping. Cf. Ter. Phor. 866 ff., where Geta 
tells how he overheard the conversation 
between Chremes and Phanium. 

663 f. Note the climax: he’s on the 
verge of (vmo-) madness, he’s mad, in 
very truth a fit of madness seized him, 
then, with final emphasis, he’s mad. 

665 f. χολὴ μέλαινα: an attack of 
black bile was supposed to be the cause 
of mental derangement, μελαγχολία, 
cf. χολᾷ v. 176, S. 204, μελαγχολᾷ S. 
361, Plaut. Capt. 596 atra bilis agi- 
tat hominem. 

667. τί... ἄλλο: insuch locutions 
ἄλλος isoften placed after the vb. instead 
of next to the interr. pron., ef. Soph. 
Antig. 646 τί τόνδ᾽ ἂν εἴποις ἄλλο: --- Me- 
nander uses the anapaest contained in 
three words far less freely than Aris- 
tophanes: in the first foot here and 
P. 80, S. 450, 466, twice in the fourth 
(ὃ. 165, 196), and once in the fifth (FE. 
82). White, p. 154. 

668. πρὸς ταῖς θύραις. 
Charisius stood at the double door in 


. ἔνδον: 


the party wall which separated the in- 
nercourtsof thetwohouses. Thisdoor, 
which In some cases gave ol ἃ narrow 
alley between the houses (angipor 
tus), iscalled by Hermip, 47. 9 1. and 
Poll. 1.10 θύρα κηπαία and by Dem. 
47.55 ἢ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φέρουσα. 


This means of communication between 


110 


MENANAPOY 


χρόνον διακύπτων ἔνθεν ἤκουεν σαφῶς." 


670 ὁ πατὴρ δὲ τῆς νύμφης τι περὶ ᾽πολείψεως᾽ 


[390] 


» , Ν 5 id « » > a Ψ ἤν ΠΕ A 
ἐλάλει πρὸς ἐκείνην, ws ἔοιχ᾽. ὃ δ᾽ ws πυκνὰ 


ἥλλαττε χρώματ᾽. ἄνδρες, οὐδ᾽ εἰπεῖν καλόν. H2, quat.z, p.6 
7 χρώμ ρ 


ες κ Ν , ἜΝ coon ee Y es ΕΣ 
ω yi UKUTQT7), ες Τῶν ογων OLOUS εγέις 


ἀνέκραγε. τὴν κεφαλήν T ἀνεπάταξε σφόδρα 


675 αὑτοῦ. πάλιν δὲ διαλιπών “οἵαν λαβὼν 


[395] 


γυναῖχ᾽ ὁ μέλεος ἠτύχηκα." τὸ δὲ πέρας, 


two houses, and, when the alley was 
present, of entering a house unob- 
served by people in the street, is 
often referred to by Plautus, e.g. Cas. 
612 ego iam per hortum iusse- 
ro meam istuc transire uxorem 
ad uxorem tuam, Stich. 614 per 
hortum transibo, non 
in publicum, cf. Epid. 660, Merc. 
1008. But it was sometimes lacking, 
eng. ler, ale 008. Plat Milk 9339 
(cf. 878) scin tuo nullum 
meatum hime esse a nobis... 


prodibo 


Com- 


neque solarium neque hortum 
nisi per inpluvium? In the Miles 
a secret passage is opened for the 
lovers. 

669. διακύπτων : bending over and 
peeping through (éa-) an aperture in 
the door, ef. Aristoph. Pac. 78 adr 6 
τι ποιεῖ τῃδὶ (at the door) διακύψας ὄψομαι. 
νύμφης: cf. Pet. 
fr., v. 17, p. 96. — ἀπολείψεως : cf. v. 
354. Though the text is purely eonjec- 


670. πατὴρ. .. 


tural, there is πὸ doubt that Smicrines 
was bent on taking his daughter home, 
ef. vv. 852, 867, and fr. 566, p. 104. 

671. ὡς ἔοικε: Onesimus evidently 
judged by the exclamations of Cha- 
risius, as well as by his own knowl- 
edge of the situation. 

672. ἤλλαττε χρώματα: i.e. fushed 
and turned pale, under the influence of 


emotion, cf. Plat. Lys. 222 παντοδαπὰ 
ἠφίει χρώματα, Hor. 100. 1. 16.388 mu- 
temque colores.—a@vSpes: the spec- 
tators are addressed also in P.51, 8.56, 
117, 481, and frequently in Plautus and 
Terence, e.g. Cist. 678 mi homines, 
mi spectatores, Men. 880, The New 
Comedy, like the Old, did not permit 
the spectators to lose sight of the fact 
that they were witnessing a theatrical 
exhibition. — οὐδ᾽ εἰπεῖν καλόν: ct. 
Aristoph. Avy. 65 οὐδὲ καλλίον λέγειν. 
673. Darling, how nobly you speak ! 
“λόγων: ven. of exclamation, see on 
v. 154. 
Os45 Ci: TA. 


πάταξε IS new, the prefix apparently 


The compound ἀνε- 


induced by the preceding ἀνέκραγε. An 
analogy is found in ἀναπαίω, avamac- 
στρίς (hammer), in which ἀνα- seems 
to convey the idea of repetition, 

675. αὑτοῦ: the "ὉΠ. 
pron, almost invariably has (πὸ at- 


POSSeSsiVe 


tributive position; for other excep- 
tions see Kuhner-Gerth § 464. 4. Nn, 
2.--AaBov: in marriage, With such 
a mife as this, 

676. ἠτύχηκα : the force of the ex- 
Clamatory οἰαν is carried over to the 
main verb, Gite what unhappiness hare 
πε τ teen oleic 
ized more fully his wife’s nobility of 


real- 


character he could have avoided the 


ἘΠΙΤΡΈΠΟΝΤΕΣ 


111 


ε , , > A »»}ἊΚ ΄φ 
ὡς πάντα διακούσας ἀπῆλθ᾽ εἴσω ποτέ, 


βρυχηθμὸς ἔνδον, τιλμός, ἔκστασις συχνή. 


ε » ΩΣ Ν cc ¢ , 3») Ν if 
eyw γαρ αλιτήριος TUKVOV πανυ 


» qn ΄ 
080 ἔλεγεν, “τοιοῦτον ἔργον ἐξειργασμένος 


[400] 


ΝΌΟΝ ΄ὕ ,ὔ » \ 
αυτος γέγονως TE παιδίου νόθου ΠΑΤΉΡ 


> y 2Q> ¥ ΠΥ 7 4 
OUK €OX OV ove ἔδωκα συγγνωμῇῆς μέρος 


> \ > A ἀρ 9 Pons} , , 
οὐθὲν ἀτυχούσῃ TavT ἐκείνῃ, βάρβαρος 


ἀνηλεής τε. λοιδορεῖτ᾽ ἐρρωμένως 


r 


685 αὑτῷ, βλέπει θ᾽ ὕφαιμον ἠρεθισμένος. 


[105] 


΄ ΡΟΝ ἐπεὶ , 7 > rn , 
πέφρικ᾽ ἐγὼ μέν, αὖός εἰμι τῷ δέει 


9 » Ἂν SN Xd , 
OUTWS EX WV γὰρ αὐυτον αν ἴδῃ με που 


greatest of his misfortunes, his aliena- 
tion from her.— - τὸ πέρας : cf. v. 70. 

677. εἴσω : from the garden. 

678. τιλμός : sc. τριχῶν, cf. H. 5. — 
ἔκστασις: outbursts of frenzy, illus- 
trated by the following. Cf. ἐξέστηκα 
S. 67, 418. 

679. ἁλιτήριος : guilty wretch that 
I am, in apposition to ἐγώ. Not to be 
taken as predicate. The art. is indis- 
pensable, as with κακοδαίμων, μέλεος 
(above), ἄθλιος, and the like, when they 
refer to the speaker. 

680. ἔργον : the assault at the fes- 
tival. 

682. οὐκ ἔσχον, xré.: 1 did not feel 
for her, much less did I grant her, the 
slightest degree of forgiveness. The in- 
ceptive force of the aor, is almost al- 
ways felt in ἔσχον. ---- οὐδέ: nor yet, 
much less, cf. Dem. 18. 85 οὐ μέμψεως 
οὐδὲ τιμωρίας. ---συγγνώμης μέρος οὐθέν : 
the periphrasis enhances the negation, 
Cf. the adv. use of οὐδὲν μέρος not a whit, 
e.g. Plat. Tim. 90 ὁ μηδὲν μέρος ἀπολείπειν. 

683. ἀτυχούσῃ ταὐτά: Se. ἃ καὶ 
ἐγὼ ἐπόησα. The partic. isequivalent to 
παθούσῃ. Vamphila was the victim of 


the same outrage that he had com- 
mitted — as he supposes, upon another 
girl, This verse (with which cf. vv. 
699, 700) makes it clear that Pamphila 
had explained to Charisius, after his 
discovery of the birth of her child, the 
extenuating circumstances which made 
the fact a misfortune and not a fault. 
But she evidently did not state the 
facts with sufficient particularity to 
suggest to him the possibility that he 
Was a party to the case himself. 

684. λοιδορεῖται: the letters may 
be divided τε Nodopetr (ac), τε λοιδορεῖ τ᾽, 
The 


dat. in v. 685 demands the mid., which 


, , , ° ’ - 
τ᾽ ἐλοιδόρει τ΄, OF τ᾽ ἐλοιδορεῖτ(ο). 


has the same sense as the act., but the 
latter takes the aec. The pres. tis pret- 
erable to the impf. in view of pNérec 
below. Wesce also from vy, 690 ff. that 
the vb. represents his present state, 

685. ὕφαιμον : with bloodshot eves, 
ef. Ael. De animal. 38. 21. 0 7 wev Naira 

. ὕφαιμον ἄνω βλέπουσα. 

686. αὖος: οἵ. P. 255 and Avistoph. 
Lys. δῶ ἀλλ᾽ αὖός εἰμ᾽ ἤδη τρέμων. 

687. αὐτὸν... με: anecmphatic me, 


further explained by τὸν διαβαλόντα. 


112 


MENANAPOY 


XN ᾽ν, ἣν > , ¥ 
Tov διαβαλόντα. τυχὸν ἀποκτείνειεν ἄν. 


διόπερ ὑπεκδέδυκα δεῦρ᾽ ἔξω λάθρᾳ. 


‘ A ΄ , > > ΄ A Ὁ" 
690 καὶ ποῖ τράπωμαί γ᾽; εἰς τί βουλῆς ; οἴχομαι, 


[410] 


ἀπόλωλα: τὴν θύραν πέπληχεν ἐξιών. 


“ A ¥ 3. Ν , ~ , 
Zev σωτερ. ELTEP ἐστι δυνατόν. σῴζέ με. 
Hastily conceals himself ; enter Charisius from the house of Chaerestratus. 


Sc. 8. OnEsImMus, CHARISIUS 


XAPIZIOZ (to himself) 


ἐγώ τις ἀναμάρτητος, εἰς δόξαν βλέπων 


Ν Ἂν εν 9 ’, : Foe Ν XN > \ lal 
και TO καλὸν O TL TOT EOTL KAL ταισχρον σκοτπων. 


> , 3 ie > ‘\ “ , 
95 ἀκέραιος. ἀνεπίπληκτος αὐτὸς τῴ βίῳ — 


[415] 


> Ν, Ῥ. 
εὖ μοι κέχρηται καὶ προσηκόντως πάνυ 


τὸ δαιμόνιον --- ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐδειξ᾽ ἄνθρωπος ὦν. 


688. τὸν διαβαλόντα: sc. τὴν Π|αμ- 
φίλην. Cf. ν. 207 τὸν φράσαντα ταῦτα. 

690. τί βούλης : for τίνα βούλην, ἃ 
frequent use of τί with the gen., both 
sing. and pl., of all genders. 

691. πέπληχεν ἐξιών: like ψοφεῖν, 
this vb. is used only of those who are 
coming out, see on y. 660. This form, 
post-classical for wémAnye, is found in 
this. MS. also in S. 89,155; 353. Cf. 
διεφθαρκώς P. 376. 

692. carep . σῷζε: cf. Plaut. 
Bacch. 880 Salus mea, servavistl 
me, 

693 ff. Onesimus has prepared us 
for the sight of Charisius, thoroughly 
humbled in pride, conscious-stricken, 
and bitterly self-reproachful., His hu- 
miliation is the greater in that he has 
in the past plumed himself upon his 
sensitive feeling of honor and his seru- 
pulous adherence (so far as the world 
knew) to the highest standards of con- 
duet. — The dietion of this monologue 
is distinctly tragic. 


693. εἰς... βλέπων : my eyes fired 
on, as on a goal to be attained, 

694. In the schools of philosophy 
he has studied the nature of the hon- 
orable and the dishonorable, like the 
young man, a pupil of Ariston, in a 
fragment of an unknown comic poet: 
πᾶν ἦρτο, τὸ καλόν, τἀγαθόν, τὸ σύμφερον, 
τὸ κακόν, Kock adesp. 104.5 (Wilamo- 
witz in N.Jhb. XT, 1908, p. 41, corrects 
the text and compares with this pas- 
sage). 

695. This bittercharacterization of 
his virtues, not only as seen by others 
butas formerly seen by himself, serves 
to set in clearer relief his shorteom- 
Ings, as now seen by himself. The 
verse isan imitation of Eur. Orest. 922 
ἀκέραιος. ἀνεπίπληκτον ἡσκηκὼς βίον, but 
the words, applied there to a sturdy 
farmer, are devoid of the ethical sig- 
nificance (probably given them by the 
Stoies) which attaches to them here, 

697. The const., interrupted by the 
parenthesis, is not really anacoluthic ; 


ἘΠΙΤΡΈΠΟΝΤΕΣ 


‘118 


«5 , Ν 4 ~ ἈΝ “ 
ω τρισκακόδαιμον, καὶ μέγα φυσᾷς καὶ λαλεῖς. 


> , τ > 4 > > fa 
ἀκούσιον γυναικὸς ἀτύχημ οὐ φέρεις. 


Gas Ν Ψ 3 » ν Φφον , 
700 αὐτὸν δὲ δείξω σ᾽ εἰς ὅμοι᾽ ἐπταικότα. 


[120] 


Ν a > > , leat ee) vA ‘ \ 
καὶ χρήσετ᾽ αὐτή σοι TOT ἠπίως, σὺ δὲ 


ταύτην ἀτιμάζεις. ἐπιδειχθήσει θ᾽ ἅμα 


ἀτυχὴς γεγονὼς καὶ σκαιὸς ἀγνώμων T ἀνήρ. 


ry v 4" ΚΗ͂Ν e Q , ΄ 
ομοια Ὗ ειπεέν OLS σὺν διενόου TOTE 


γ ἈΠ ers. ro ε ΩΝ ν an ΄ 
τοῦ προς τον πατέρα: κοινωνος YKELV TOU βίου, 


ἐνταῦθα simply resumes the four pre- 
ceding participial clauses, ἐγὼ βλέπων, 
σκόπων, ἀκέραιος ὦν, ἀνεπίπληκτος ὦν, 
ἐνταῦθα (i.e. ἐν τῷ βλέπειν, etc.) ἔδειξα. 
Thespeaker has in mind the good Greek 
doctrine that pride goeth before de- 
struction, which Menander elsewhere 
(156 K.) phrased as follows: ἐν ᾧ φρονεῖς 
μέγιστον ἀπολεῖ τοῦτό ce, τὸ δοκεῖν τιν᾽ εἶ- 
ναι" καὶ γὰρ ἄλλους μυρίους. --- ἔδειξα... 
ὦν: cf.Thue. 4.73, 2 ἔδειξαν ἕτοιμοι ὄντες. 
- ἄνθρωπος : but human. 

698. He conceives that τὸ δαιμόνιον 
speaks thus to him. — péya: modifies 
both vbs., thow art both haughty and 
boastful. μέγα φυσᾷς isa contemptuous 
version Οὗ μέγα φρονεῖς, cf. Men. 302 κα. 
ol φυσῶντες ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς μέγα. 

699. οὐ φέρεις : refuse to bear. ΟἿ. 
v. 62. 

700. δείξω : ie. to the world. No 
one but Habrotonon and himself, so 
far as he knows, is as yet aware of the 
truth concerning him. - ὅμοια: cf. 
ταὐτά, V. 683. 

701. τότε: when she shall 
that he has fallen into ὅμοια ἁμαρτή- 


learn 


ματα. The revelation which Charisius 
has just had of his wife’s nobility of 
character gives him good reason to be 
confident of her forgiveness. 

702. ἐπιδειχθήσει: shall be shown 


to the world. The vb. connotes indis- 


[425] 


putable proof. —apa: introduces the 
less emphatic predicate, not only; καί, 
but also. 

703. σκαιός : ill-bred, unfeeling, of- 
ten contrasted with σοφός, one who has 
been enlightened. Pamphila was in- 
nocent ; Charisius had not only sinned 
with full knowledge but had since 
been brutal toward her, — ἀγνώμων : 
inconsiderate, unkind. The well-bred 
man should be εὐγνώμων, as Pamphila, 
a true woman, will show herself to be. 
Cf. Men. 646 K. ἕν ἐστ᾽ ἀληθὲς φίλτρον, 
εὐγνώμων τρόπος. τούτῳ κατακρατεῖν ἀν- 
δρὸς εἴωθεν γυνή. 

704. ὅμοιά y εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα: 
ironical, like indeed were her words 
to her father. — ois σὺ διενόον: f) the 
thoughts you then harbored against her. 
For διανοεῖσθαι = φρονεῖν οἵ. Plut. Vit. 
Cim. 5,5 ἄξια τοῦ Μαραθῶνος ἤδη διανοεῖ- 
σθαι καὶ πράσσειν.- τότε: before your 
own sin had come to light. Charisius 
has not yet had an understanding with 
his father-in-law nor explained to lum 
the reasons he had for so humiliating 
Pamphila. He and Smicrines do not 
meet in any scene in the play, except 
possibly a dost final scene, Sinicrines 
is suecessfully kept from all Know πὸ 
of hisdauchter’s child until vy. 900 

705. τοῦ βίου: ic. οὐ Charisius, See 
above, p.32.- The trisyllabie tribra: h 


114 


MENANAPOY 


ig , SO > A ’ , > a A A 
πάντως ap ov δεῖν τἀτύχημ᾽ αὐτὴν φυγεῖν 
‘To συμβεβηκός. σὺ δέ τις ὑψηλὸς σφόδρα᾽ -- 


[Lacuna of 26 verses to Q?.] 


Onesimus issues from his place of concealment. 


ONHZIMOZ 


Γ΄ 2 9) PAD , Ls 3 Nat 
ATAVTA ὃ ἐκμαθεῖν ἐπειράθην έγω 


ΟΣ quat. z, p. 7, 1. 28 


Gre > ooh! \ \ > ΄ r ἂν eee 
735 ὡς εὖ TOMY oe, νὴ TOV ᾿Απόλλω καὶ θεούς. 


is found in the second foot only five 
times in Menander, See White, p. 144, 
and on δ΄. 79. 

706. πάντως apa: certainly, there- 
fore, cf. Arist. fr. 51 Rose πάντως ἄρα 
φιλοσοφητέον. A similar sentiment, al- 
so uttered by a wife whose father 
urges her to leave her husband (be- 
cause of his poverty) in Eur. (°) fab. 
inc. 953. 241f. N. ἢ πῶς δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἢ 
καλῶς ἔχον, τῶν μὲν ἀγαθῶν με τὸ μέρος ὧν 
εἶχεν λαβεῖν, τοῦ συναπορηθῆναι δὲ μὴ λα- 
βεῖν wépos; — TO ἀτύχημα: to her father 
this could only mean the shame and 
humiliation put upon her by Charisius, 
by conduct which is the subject of 
scandalous gossip at the very beginning 
of the play (fr.600).) Phe relations of 
Charisius with Habrotonon are urged 
upon Pamphila by Smicrines as a suf- 
ficient motive for her leaving him (fr. 
O66, p. 104. above), 
tune, Pamphila declares, she will not 


From this misfor- 


of her own free will (αὐτήν) make her 
escape by divorcing her husband. The 
spectators Know that) Pamphila is not 
quite ingentous with her father, in 
that she still conceals from him what 
Creer iets 
referring to the 


her real misfortune was. 
388 ad vorsa Gis, 


same plight of Philumena. 


707. ὑψηλός : lofty, like ceuvds, of 
one Who gives offense by an ostentatious 
assumption of virtue. Cf. ν. 528. 

In this context perhaps belongs a 
verse quoted by Plutarch (Mor. 769»), 
who counsels wives to sacrifice to Eros, 
that their husbands may be loyal καὶ 
μὴ πρὸς ἑτέραν ἀπορρυεὶς ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀναγκάζη- 
ται τὰς ἐκ τῆς κωμῳδίας λέγειν φωνάς (fr. 
adesp. 221 1X.) “οἵαν ἀδικῶ γυναῖχ᾽ ὁ δυσ- 
δαίμων ἐγώ. 

734 ff. Not long after v. 707 Cha- 
risius caught sight of Onesimus in his 
place of concealment and severely took 
him to task, as the cause of all his 
troubles. Qnesimus had feared such 
an encounter With him (vv. 210, 686), 
and indeed found it mo easy task to 
justify his interference. THis attempts 
toexcuse himself have made Charisius 
beside himself with anger, —- ἅπαντα, 
το ACL. fiscally p. 118 below, 

735. ws εὖ ποῶν : thinking IT was 
doing you a service, Wis only excuse 
was his good intention, and that was 
not easy to establish from lis iets. - 
vy... θεούς : the same oath vy. 183. Or 
perhaps Ἀπόλλω τουτονί, With a gesture 
toward the statue by the door; see on 
PL 242. Apollo is invoked as a witness 


to the truth of the assertion, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤῈΣ 


ΧΑΡΙΣΙΟΣ 
πο ὃ oe ΣΝ ial ¢€ 4 > 
τι O€ με TEPLOTIAS, LEPOTUN ; 
Enter Habrotonon from the house of Charisius. 
Sc. 9. OnEstmus, CHaArtsius, Hanroronon 
ABPOTONON 
> x 4 
EOL μάχου, 
r τ Ἴ A A , > A 
βέλτιστε. τῆς γαμετῆς γυναικός ἐστί σου" 
γ > ale al , > > ’ὔ 
avTns γάρ, οὐκ ἀλλότριον. 


[440] 


XAPIZIOS 
εἰ yap ὠφελεν. 
ABPOTONON 
‘yn τὴν φίλην Δήμητρα. 
ΧΑΡΙΣΙΟΣ 
τίνα λόγον λέγεις ; 
ABPOTONON 


740 εὖ ἴσθ᾽, ἀληθῆ. 
XAPIZIOZ 


Παμφίλης τὸ παιδίον 


ABPOTONON 


ἊΝ (ὁ 2 he, , 
και σον δ ομοιως. 


786. περισπᾷς: try to distract me, 
pull the wool over my eyes, lit. draw 
me off, ef. Plut. Mor. 9716 rods διωκοῦν- 
Tas ὑπάγουσιν (the mother partridges) 
ἄλλῃ καὶ περισπῶσιν els ἑαυτάς, Luke 
10.40 ἡ δὲ Μάρθα περιεσπᾶτο περὶ πολ- 
λὴν διακονίαν. — tepdovAre: ἃ mere abus- 
ive epithet, its literal meaning no longer 
felt, —a development much like that 
of our ‘‘horse-thief,’’—and tirst found 
in the New Comedy, cf. P. 246, δι 476, 
and Men. 151 and 229K, 


Sc. 9 When last seen (v. 662) Ha- 
brotonon was entering the house of 
Charisius to talk over matters with 
Sophrona. While within she is) sup- 
posed to have acquainted Pamplila 
With the true state of affairs and te 
child, 


hearing the anery volce of Charisius, 


have given her the And now, 
she intervenes in the quarrel, sweetly 
remarking ** have it out with me, dear 
friend, and speedily sets the mind ot 


Charisius at peace, 


MENANAPOY 


XAPIZIOZ 


Παμφίλης; 


Fé v3 at [ὦ ͵ rit Sates , 
ABporovor, ἱκετεύω σε. μή μ᾽ ἀναπτέρου. 


{Lacuna of 26 verses to 1.} 


At the end of the scene Charisius rushes into his own house. 


Habrotonon and 


Onesimus withdraw. 
ΧΟΡΟΣ 


ἌΘΤΟΥ 


Enter Chaerestratus and Onesimus. 


Sc. 1. CHAERESTRATUS, ONESIMUS 
ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


Εν \ Ν ? yu ΠΩΝ N κ , , 5 
ov pa τὸν ᾿Απόλλω. καὶ TO λοιπὸν πρόσεχέμοι.. 


Q!, quat. Ζ, 
p. 8, 1. 28 


770 Χαιρέστραθ᾽. ἥδε τὸ μετὰ ταῦτα “δεῖ a,” Edy, 


pd Ls δι a x Ageia re ee) 
OTWS διαμενεῖς ὧν Χαρισίιῳ τὸ παν. 


[430] 


Big Dies» , 5᾽ > , te ed = 
OLOOTEP οἶσθα, πιστος. ου γαρ EOTL TOL 


742. ἀναπτέρου: cf. Aristoph. Avy. 
433 κλύων yap ὧν σύ μοι λέγεις λόγων 
ἀνεπτέρωμαι, and, for {πὸ thought, Ter. 
Heaut. 202.syre iia, obseero, οἰ 

lactitiam 
Without waiting for a detailed 


me in frustra comi- 
Chas 
proof of Habrotonon’s assertion, Cha- 
risius hastens to Pamphila. This is the 
first time in the course of the play that 
he has entered his own house. 

ACP Y Se: ἢ One thesother sitet 
fragment Q we find present one of the 
three persons who participated in the 
preceding scene, viz. Onesimus, [tis 
therefore not certain that in the ine 
terval the scene was vacated, as at the 
close of an aet. And vet itis probable 


that Onesimus withdrew, as well as 


Charisins and Habrotonon, and that 
the chorus of banqueters made its tinal 
appearance din the intermission. For 


Chaerestratus must be told of the happy 
dénouement, and it would have been 


undramatic and tedious for Onesimus 
to enlighten him in the presence et the 
spectators after the truth has been dis- 
closed to Charisius, We are probably 
justified in assuming, therefore, that 
after the intermission Chaerestratus 
and Onesimus, deeply engaged in eon- 
versation, approach through one of the 
parodoi, Chaerestratus has already 
been put in possession of the facts and 
is now listening to the plea of Onesi- 
mus on behalf of Habrotonon, 

770. ἥδε: δεῖ σε. 
on the const. ef. Soph. Phil. 54 
τὴν Φιλοκτήτου ce δεῖ ψυχὴν ὅπως λόγοι- 


The 


ie. Habrotonon, - 


' 
AGT, as 


ow ἐκκλέψεις. and Jebh’s note. 
tone is that of admonition, 
772. οἷόσπερ οἶσθα: x. εἶναι (from 
ὧν ον). what youknow well how to be, 
A similar brachwlogy iy Dem, 15. 125 
ὅρα un τούτων μὲν ἐχθρὸς ns, ἐμὸς δὲ (ei- 
vat) προσποιῇ. Perhaps ἦσθα should be 


read, 


ENITPEHONTES 117 


ε ΄ὔ a > >: Ν Ν Ν γῳ cove; | 
ἑταιρίδιον TOUT οὐδὲ TO TUX OV O Tl TTOEL’ 
“A \ Ν , ΤΑΝ ὙΦ ΤΟΥ͂Σ ὧν 

σπουδῇ δὲ και παιδάριον ευρ υμιν. 


ΧΑΙΡΕΣΤΡΑΤΟΣ Ἶ 
yevou 
’ MS Ἄς Ὁ, 3, 
775 ἐλεύθερος. πάξ. μὴ βλέπ᾽ εἴς τὴν γὴν ἔχων." 
Ν “A ‘ Τὶ ΄ τ 
καὶ πρῶτον αὐτὸν κατὰ μόνας Χαρίσιον. [435] 
‘\ , Ν Ν 4 Γ᾿ A ’ὔ τι} 
τὸν φίλτατον καὶ τὸν γλυκύτατον παῖδά μου 
[Lacuna of 2 pages = ca. 70 verses. ] 
Sc. 2. CHAERESTRATUS, ONESIMUS, HABROTONON 
XAIPEZSTPATOS 
B49 K. 


A 5s) , eee} \ un , > 
φιλῶ σ΄. ᾿Ονήσιμ᾽. εἰ σὺ καὶ περίεργος εἶ. 
A rie 


* * * * * 


773. ἑταιρίδιον: «a mere strunapet. 
— τὸ τυχόν : no ordinary thing, lit. that 
which happens of itself. Ct. Epin. 4K. 
κἂν τὸ τυχὸν ἢ πραγμάτιον ἢ σφόδρ᾽ εὐ- 
τελές, and ὁ τυχών Tom, Dick, and 
Harry. —6 τι ποεῖ: that she’s doing 
for us, her services. Perhaps 6 γ᾽ ἐπόει. 

774. σπουδῇ: by her zeal, almost 
= ékeritnées ν. 328, cf. Ter. Hee. 877 
neque hic imprudens (ie. con- 
sulto) ΓΟ ΟἿ, -- καὶ παιδάριον, xré.: she 
found a child for you, too, ice. in addi- 
tion to her other services. — γενοῦ, xré.: 
Chaerestratus seems to interrupt Ones- 
imus here; the tone of the following 
suits better the master than the slave. 

775. πάξ: an interjection of impa- 
tience, to indicate that the subject of 
conversation is at an end (τέλος ἔχει 
Hesych.), enough, enough said, found 
also in’ Herond, 7. 114 and in Diph. 


pee 


90 Καὶ. wag. — τί “mas,” the first speaker 
interrupting the other. In Latin com- 
edy it is used occasionally, cither to 
interrupt the speaker ashereand Plaut, 
Mil. 808 pax, ibi; or by the speaker 


* * * * * * 


himself, to indicate the end of his dis- 
courseve cohen {ΠΟ αὐ τ din pax. vil 
amplius. -- μὴ βλέπε, κτέ. : used of 
ἃ person who is buried in thought or 
troubled, as [Plat.] Ale. TT 1884 φαίνει 
γέ τοι ἐσκυθρωπακέναι Te καὶ els γὴν βλέ- 
me, ws τι ξυννοούμενος, Plaut. Bacch. 
668 numgui nummi exciderunt, 
tre, tibi, quod αν 


; terram op- 


tuere? In the present instance the 
attitude indicates shame and confusion 
on the part of Onesimus. 

776. He probably advises Onesimus 
frankly to confess his fault to Charisius 
and beg for forgiveness. ‘The poet las 
od) 


Habrotonon was to receive her 


clearly intimated τ τς 8227 sad 
that 
freedom, We cannot doubt that Chae 
restratus at hist yielded to the entres- 
ties of Onesimus, Tt is probable that 
she now appears (ef. νι Βα 4) and receives 
her reward. Fragments S49 aud Soo 
probably belong to one of these two 
SCONES. 

Εν. 849. περίεργος : a busyhody, ct 


Perr ἡ ΠΟ Σ δῖ WKN 


118 MENANAPOY 
ONHEIMOS 
οὐδὲν γλυκύτερόν᾽ ἐστιν᾽ ἢ πάντ᾽ εἰδέναι. 850 K. 
* * * * * * * * * * * * 


Exeunt Habrotonon and Onesimus, the latter into the house of Charisius. 


XAIPEZTPATOS 


, Ἂς A > > ΄ + gt 
M8 σώφρονα: TOLAVTNOL yap οὐκ ἀπέσχετ ἂν 


Hi, quat.z, p. 11 


5 aA Δ a. “0.7 a δὴ CLP) le 
ἐκεῖνος. εὖ TOUT οἶδ᾽. ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἀφέξομαι. 
exit Chaerestratus, Smicrines approaches from the city, 


So..o. SMICRINES 


YMIKPINH® (to himself) 


x» Ν , \ ΄ 
»0 ἂν μὴ κατάξω τὴν κεφαλήν σου. 


Fr, 850. πάντ᾽ εἰδέναι: οἷ. ν. 754. 

848 f. After Onesimus ἀπ Ha- 
Dbrotonon depart, Chaerestratus seems 
to remain, since these two verses are 
apparently spoken by him. Probably 
ere χα 
May surmise that Syriscus reappears, 
P45), 


to pay his ἀποῴφορά to Chaerestratus, 


another scene intervened 


according to his intention (vy. 


and that the former then receives an 
accounting for the ring from Onesi- 
mus or one of the other characters. 
Chaerestratus leaves the scene ceom- 
Inenting Upon the virtues of Habroto- 
Hon. — σωφρόνα: as the following fem. 
shows, the reference is to Tabroto- 
hon. She noaest be a chaste woman, in- 
decd, else Charisius (ἐκεῖνον) would not 
have kept his hands off her, so charm- 
ing ἃ woman (τοιαυτησί). On the vb. 
and its common implication of. Avis 
toph. Lys. 146 εἰ δ᾽ ὡς μάλιστ᾽ ἀπεχοί- 
wel ov σὺ δὴ Neves, Plat. Lege, 839K 
Phiavedo 
ea AW be 
Adelphit- 


tamen abstines 


᾿ ΜΕ A 4 οἷν, 
αφῳροδισιωὼν ρᾳὺὼν Av απέχοιτο, 
ROB ἀπέχεται τῶν ἡδονῶν, anid 
Poen, 282 (Avorastocles of 


sii) Δ 111.) 


Σωφρόνη. 
Chaerestratus 
resolves that he too owes her respect 
(ἀφέξομαι). 

850 ff. Smicrines returnsagain from 
the city, determined to carry out the 


τ πὰ Ler Hees 139: 


threat which he had made on his de- 
thither (vy. 9565), 
must divorce her husband and return 


parture Pamphila 
to her father’s house, Sinee persuasion 
does not avail with her, force must be 
employed, 

From the time Smierines comes in- 
to view until he reaches the door of his 
son-in-liw’s house he scolds Soplro- 
ha, using the second person, Does she 


accompany him, or is he simply giv- 
ing vent to his rage against her, for 
aiding and abetting Pamphila in her 
Opposition to him, by holding an im- 
The 


latter assumption is probably correct, 


aginary conversation with her? 


When Sophrona last quit the scene (Ὁ. 
662) she condueted Tabrotonon into 
the house of Charisius, and it is hardly 
likely that in the meantime she has 
comeout acainomanerrand that would 


take her to the city, The objections 


E|MITPEHONTES 


119 


, be “ἢ , Ἂ 4 
κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην. νουθετήσεις Kal σύ με: 


ec A > fd Ν αν Ne δι {6 , ΄“ 
προπέτως απάγω ΤῊΝ θυγατέρ 3 ἱιερόσυλε γραυ: 


[150] 


> Ν ‘A ~ Ν A ΄ 
ἀλλὰ περιμείνω καταφαγεῖν τὴν προῖκά μου 


Ν >! > “N ¥ x , ΄ὕ΄ 
τὸν χρηστὸν αὐτῆς avdpa; καὶ λόγους λέγω 


Ν aA 5 lal “ , 
855 περι των εἐμανυτου: TAVTA συμπείθεις με σύ: 


οὐκ ὀξυλαβῆσαι κρεῖττον: οἰμώξει μακρὰ 


“Δ Cy. la , / ‘ + a 
av ett λαλῃς. τί; κρίνομαι πρὸς Σωφρόνην: 


[455 


ee , SF a? Ψ ἮΝ 5» ΄ ΄ 
μεέεταπεέεισον QAUTNV, οταν L nS: OUTW TL μοι 


ἀγαθὸν γένοιτο. Σωφρόνη. γάρ. οἴκαδε 


to his conduet which Smicrines puts 
into her mouth (vv. 852, 858) are, it is 
likely, mere echoes of her protests to 
him at the time of his last interview 
With Pamphila, at which she was pres- 
ent. This interpretation of vv, 850- 
863 explains why Smmicrines is still in 
ignorance of the latest discoveries re- 
garding the parentage of the child, and 
greatly simplifies the distribution of 
speakers in vv. O11 ff. A precisely anal- 
ogous seene is found in P. 278 ff., where 
Polemon berates Doris in absentia. 

850. κατάξω: crack, as of nuts, cf. 
Aristoph., 590 KN. τὰς ἀμυγδαλᾶς λαβὼν 
τασδὶ κάταξον TH κεφαλῇ σεαυτοῦ λίθῳ, 
Phryn. 68 Kk. 

851. καὶ σύ: as well as Chaerestra- 
tus (Act IV se. 3) and Pamphila, pos- 
sibly Onesimus also (in the first act). 

852. προπετῶς, xré.: the supposed 
words of Sophrona, as inv. 858, 

853. The MS, reading περιμενῶ wives 
in the first two feet the forbidden se- 
quence of dactyl and anapaest. περι- 
μείνω isdeliberativesubj.— καταφαγεῖν : 
waste in eating and drinking, as al- 
ready in Hom. Od. 3.515 μή τοι κατὰ 
πάντα φάγωσιν κτήματα.- προῖκα : the 
four talents (ef. Pet. fre v. 
Which he has had his eve from the he 


Bop. 92} on 


ginning. Tnease ofa divorce the dowry 
would revert to him as κύριος of Pam- 
phila (see above, p. 41) unless she had 
av living son of the union. Similarly 
Phidippus in Per, Hee, 502 demands 
back the dowry in case Pamphilus will 
hot live with his daughter, 

854. χρηστόν: ironicalas in S. 190, 
---λόγους λέγω: ef. 1᾿. 650, Bur, Med. 
21 μὴ λόγους λέγε. 

855. ταῦτα: iv. 

856. ὀξυλαβῆσαι: lay hold quickly 


of an occasion, a rare vb... found also 


Ππεριμέ VELA AEs 


in Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 27 ὅσοι ὠξυλάβησαν 
ἐξῆλθον. The λαβή which Charisius his 
eiven to Smierines is of course lis in 
trigue with Παῖς whieh would 
furnishasufficient cround foradivorce, 
857. κρίνομαι πρός : lixciuss fhe cir: 
before; seeon yy, 200 for-this meaning 
of πρός. bin the vboef. ANvistepd N 
OO τέως μὲν οὖν ἐκρινόμερα. 
858. μετάπεισον: "1:11 her 
(μετα-} her midi. οὕτω. ATE 
Verdi 


859. Σωφρόνη: | 


clause, and this elas 


ation of the thoarea 
expresses, tn thee wil πῶ ce 
salvation (1Τ}} 1: ΠΥ AN 1). Ἂ, 

Π HOD τὰ Lanta, agree Tes at 


120 


MENANAPOY 


> ΄ Ν , 5. 9 Ad > a , 
860 ATLWY — TO τέλμ εἶδες παριουσ 5 ἐνταῦθά σε 


bY vA 4 5X ΜΆ nw 
τὴν νύκτα βαπτίζων odnv ἀποκτενῶ, 


3 ἊΝ ΓΙ .- Ae Oe | Ν A > , 
kay O€ ταῦτ ἐμοι φρονεῖν αναγκασω 


XN Ν , 
Kal μὴ στασιαζειν. 


[100] 


Approaches the door of Charisius” house, 


ε , , 
ἡ θύρα παιητέα. 


A , > “ ΄ 
κεκλειμένη γαρ €OTL. παῖδες. παιδίον. 


5 , ~ 5 ε wn ,ὔ 
sii ἀνοιξάτω τις. παῖδες, οὐχ ὑμῖν λέγω: 


Onesimus opens the door and comes out, but does not admit Smicrines. 


Sc. 4. SMIcRINES, ONESIMUS 


ONHZIMOZ 


΄ >] θ᾽ ε ΄ ν ΄, ἘΝ ἧς! ΄ 
Τις ἐσ O KOTTTWV URINE θύραν: ω. «μικρινὴς 


«ε » > Ἂν Ν “Ἂ BY Ν Id 
ὁ χαλεπός, ἐπὶ THY προῖκα Kal THY θυγατέρα 


σ 
κων: 


[465 | 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


» 
έἐγωγε. τρισκατάρατε. 


ONHZIMOZ 


καὶ μάλα 


ὀρθῶς. λογιστικοῦ γὰρ ἀνδρὸς καὶ σφόδρα 


860. ἀπιών: temporal. —rédpa: cf. 
Ter. Ad. 583 priusquam ad por- 
tam venias, apud ipsum laecum 
est pistrilla.—amaprotea: in puss- 
ing. Smicrines noticed it himself and 
thoueht of its availability for the pur- 
pose he has ino mind, εἶδες does not 
necessarily imply that Sophrona was 
aetiually with him at the time. 

861. ἀποκτενῶ: see vy. G88 and ef, 
apavicew Vv. 210, 
smite, instead of 


863. παιητέα: 


knock (xér7ev). The word may 
have been chosen to prepare for the 
call παῖδες. in necordanee with the 
come etymolosy ‘mats’ ἀπὸ τοῦ παίεσθαι, 
ef. Aristoph. Vesp. 1207 watéa yap. κἂν 
ἢ “ρων, καλεῖν δίκαιον ὅστις ἂν πληγὰς 


λάβῃ ( — παισϑθῃ). 


864. κεκλειμένη : Onesimus had 
taken the precaution to lock the door, 
in expectation of this visit. 

866. Σμικρίνης : sc. ἐστί: 

867. Onesimus, who a short. time 
ago fled from the very sight of Smicri- 
hes (v. 863), is now insolent to him, 
the resultof his superior knowledge of 
the situation and oof the promise of 
emancipation, - χαλεπός:  festy. et. 
Aristoph. Vesp, G42 yaXerds ὧν καὶ δύσ- 
κολος. - προῖκα, κτέ.: Smicrines has 
made his intentions clear to the spee- 
tators in vv. O65 ff. and Onesimus does 
hot need to be told what die dias now 
come tor, 

869. λογιστικοῦ : ironical; thistime 
his SS ealeulations have gone wrong, 
Ret: τ 


Om Smicrines’ avarice see 


ELNITPELLONTES 


£21 


870 φρονοῦντος ἡ σπουδή. τό θ᾽ ἅρπασμ᾽, Ἡράκλεις. 


Φ 
θαυμαστὸν οἷον. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


Ν “ Ν vd 
προς θεῶν και δαιμόνων --- 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


¥ , ‘ Ν » δ 
OLEL τοσαυτὴν TOUS θεοὺς ayelv σχολὴν 


74K. [410] 


ν Se Nv Ἂν, > Ν “πὰ / 
WOTE TO KQAKOV Και τἀγαθὸν καθ ἡμεραν 


, ¢ UA τ ’ὔ Ξ 
νέμειν εκάστῳ. «Ππικρινγ) 5 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝῊΣ 


y. 14, p. 96 (λελόγισται). --- σφόδρα : 
const, with φρονοῦντος. The copula ἐστί 
is understood. 

870. τὸ dpracpa: your kidneping. 
Smicrines evidently expected τὸ find 
Pamphila unprotected in the house, 
as she had been during the day ; now 
he finds the door loeked and guarded 
by Onesimus. dpray7y is the regular 
word for the carrying away of a per- 
son by violence. Alexis wrote a com- 
edy 'EXévns ἁρπαγή, The Rape of Helen ; 
ef. Antiph, 74.3. (Ganymede), Men. 
204 1X. dpracua here seems to mean 
kidnaping expedition. 

871. θαυμαστὸν οἷον: admirable, 
indeed ! — πρὸς θεῶν : Smicrines begins 
a protest against such impudence (v. 
889) on the part of the slave, but is not 
permitted to get beyond the mention 
of the gods, which gives Onesimus an 
opening for a sermon, 

872 11. Abitof Epicurean philosophy 
put into the slave’s mouth by Menan- 
der, the friend and ave-fellow (συνέφη- 
Bos) of Epicurus. There is no suegestion 
of atheism in the question (as in Aris- 


λέγεις δὲ τί; 


toph. Eq. 82 ἐτεὸν ἡγεῖ γὰρ θεούς). In 
a letter toa friend (apud Diog, Laert. 
123) Epicurus bluntly asserts his be- 
lief in the existence of the gods: θεοὶ 
μὲν yap εἰσιν. ἐναργὴς δέ ἐστιν αὐτῶν 7 
γνῶσις οἵους δ᾽ αὐτοὺς οἱ πολλοὶ νομίζου- 
σιν οὐκ εἰσίν. But their tranquillity is 
not disturbed by the petty affairs of 
men. If they interfered in them they 
could not be happy. and yet happiness 
is the supreme attribute of the deity. 
Cie, De 19, OD deserthes 


the life of the gods. according to Epi 


nat. deor, 1. 


Curuss Asse Ve whchesalecote ep ΤΠ νι 


beatius. ΣΝ AO Pores Wg Fee be Ua 


(deus), 


est implicatus, nullacopera mo 


nullis occupation i bus 


CEUTA STITH SAW τ τ οἷν AIST UCU MI 
eatudet. Menander elsewhere Tolitls 
jests with this topie as when (70) le 
makes a mai say, JUS after assisth 

« sacrifice, ἔθυον οὐ προσέχουσιν" οὐδὲ 
ΠΣ “The above passage, trom) ofec te 
Σμικρίνη. is quoted by David the Nin 
INTHE (ort solemn ΤΕ ate te Respir ate 
this play. as embodying the doctrine 


of Epicurus, 


MENANAPOY 


ONHZTIMOX 


875 σαφῶς διδάξω σ΄. εἰσὶν αἱ πᾶσαι πόλεις, 


ὅμοιον εἰπεῖν. χίλιαι: τρισμύριοι 


> “ Φ)0, , aS. , « S 
οικουσ EKAOTY)V x καθ ενα TOUTWV OL θεοὶ 


9 3 a, λ ’ὔ lal 
ἕκαστον ἐπιτρίβουσιν 7 σῴζουσι; πῶς; 


λέγεις γὰρ ἐπίπονόν τιν᾽ αὐτοὺς ζην᾽ βίον." 


ec 5 3 Ve ¢ ~ Le i? ay 
sso “οὐκ apa φροντίζουσιν ἡμῶν oi θεοί"; 


᾽᾽ 


109 Κὶ. 


ε , , “ον 4 
φήσεις. ἑκάστῳ TOV τρόπον συνήρμοσαν 


“ » or as 
φρούραρχον: οὗτος ἔνδον ἕτερον μὲν κακῶς 


χρήσηθ᾽ anak, 


af 62 a Φ A an 
ἐπέτριψεν, AV αὑτῳ KAKWS 


875. αἱ πᾶσαι: i.e. all inthe world. 
876. ὅμοιον εἰπεῖν: fo put it ap- 
provimately (lit. indifferently), an idiom 
found elsewhere only in late Greek, 
The classical expression is σχεδὸν εἰπεῖν, 


ete Dats sophia) 


το. This meaning 
of ὅμοιον may have developed from ex- 
pressions like ὅμοιον ἡμῖν ἔσται Herod, 
8.80, will be all one to ws:- 


Theoeritus (17.82 {f.), extolling Ptol- 


χίλιαι: 


emy Philadelphus, reckoned the mum- 


ber of cities ruled by him alone as 
33. The states tributary to Athens 
at the height of the 
acy are given as 1000 in Aristoph. 
Vesp. 706. 


877. καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστον: 


first confeder- 


each indi- 


vidually, — τούτων: const. with eva 
(KaAGTOY. 

878. ἐπιτρίβουσιν ἢ σῳζουσι : Minin 
or δος ἀν the modern theolowieal par- 
ΕἸ ΟΣ veny iui ecenrel 


] 
Pee, 


conservent.-—amag: absurd! 


879. ἐπίπονον : the stock arcument 
fe We Theres wc tee Melee. lie 


Wenn, γι ἢ ELAS, 


vestrum vero labortosissimium, 

881. φήσεις : φημί ἢν place of ἐρωτῶ 
OV ἔρομαι. Is Used freely with quotations 
iw form of ducdignant 


titted Sutil 


[480] 


questions, cf. Plat. Theaet. 1958 “τί 
. ἄλλο τι ἐκ 


τούτου τοῦ λόγου οὐκ ἄν ποτε οἰηθείη δώ- 


οὖν, φήσει, “τὰ ἕνδεκα... 
δεκα εἶναι, Strat. 1. 32K. “ἀλλὰ διὰ τὰς 
τέτταρας δραχμὰς ἀποβαλῶ,᾿ φησί, “τὴν 
προαίρεσιν ἦὐ In the question which is 
put into the mouth of Smicrines is im- 
plicd the allegation “Of course the 
gods care for τι. --- ἑκάστῳ, κτέ.: the 
explanation given by Onesimus implies 
an affirmative answer to the assumed 
question of Smicrines, e.g. The gods 
do care for us, but in this way.?”-— τὸν 
The thought 
development of a saying attributed to 


τρόπον: character, is a 
Epicharmus (258 Kaib.) ὁ τρόπος ἀνθρώ- 
Toit δαίμων ἀγαθός. ois δὲ καὶ κακός, or 
of the famous sentence of Heracleitus 
ἦθος ἀνθρώπῳ δαίμων (Wilamowitz). 
882. φρούραρχον: character, as 
commandant of the garrison of the 
soul, administers rewards and punish- 
ments according to the conduet of the 
individual. Cf. the figure employed by 
Menander ina similar passage (550 1Χ.)ς 
ἅπαντι δαίμων ἀνδρὶ συμπαρίσταται εὐθὺς 
γενομένῳ. μυσταγωγὸς τοῦ βιοῦ ἀγαθός. 
ἔνδον : -ι΄. οἰκῶν ἑκάστῳ. 
883. ἐπέτριψεν : Guomic aor, 


ἅπαξ: if a man onee abuse it 


αὐτῷ 


ENMITPEMONTES 


2 > ¥ νον > ee Fa νας ΄ 
€TEPOV 5 εσωσέεν. OUTOS ἐσθ ἡμιν θεός, 


123 


H‘4, quat. z, p. 12 


9 > ¥ ‘\ a A Ν ΄- “ 
885 Ο Τ αἰτιος και του καλῶς και του κακως 


’ ε ’ ΄“ , Cn 
πράττειν ἑκάστῳ. τοῦτον ἱλάσκου ποῶν 


\ ¥ TF x , iA 4 an 
μηδὲν QATOTTOV pnd apales, ινα τ ραττηῆς καλῶς. 


[485] 


=MIKPINH2 


fp ε , ec re a ,ὔ A 
εἶθ᾽ οὑμός. ἱερόσυλε, νῦν τρόπος ποεῖ 


> , 
ἀμαθές Th; 


ONHZIMOZ 


vA 
συντρίβει σε. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


τῆς παρρησίας. 


ΟΝΉΣΙΜΟΣ 


: > S175 A >> \ G a , 
8%” ἀλλ᾽ ἀπαγαγεῖν Tap ἀνδρὸς αὑτοῦ θυγατέρα 


> ἣν Ν , SS , 
ἀγαθὸν ov κρίνεις, Σμικρίνη: 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


λέγει δὲ τίς 


Ans -3 “ae > Ἂν, ~ > A 
TOUT ἀγαθόν; αλλὰ νῦν αναγκαῖον. 


-- ἅπαξ: cf. Aristoph. Ach. 923 κεἴπερ 
λάβοιτο τῶν νεῶν τὸ πῦρ ἅπαξ (Bodin). 
884. οὗτος θεός: οἴ. Men. 762 K. ὁ νοῦς 
γάρ ἐστιν ἡμῶν ἐν ἑκάστῳ θεός. Elsewhere 
(772 1K.) character is one’s νόμος, guide 
of life 
886. ποῶν : by doing. 


essentially the same idea. 





887. iva πράττῃς καλῶς : nota high 
motive for right conduct, but one not 
distinctively Greek, either in ethics or 
in religion, 

888. The philosophy of the slave 
is too deep for Smicrines. Onesimus 
has intimated that it is not the τρόπος 
of Smicrines, but Smicrines himself, 
that is committing a stupidity. 

889. συντρίβει: if sconfomiuding yoru, 
proving your undving. The difference 


between συν- and émerpisew is about 
ὙΠΟ τους 
— Tis παρρησίας : whl ιν ει Ct. 
ΟΝ ΠΕ πεν 2 Ὲ 


890. ἀπαγαγεῖν : ἀπαγαγεῖν παρὰ τοῦ 


that between ‘crush and ot 


ἀναγκάσαι τὸν ἄνδρα ἀπυλείπειν. 
We micht have 


ἀνδρός 
- αὑτοῦ: ones own. 
had τὴν θυγατέρα or τὴν αὑτοῦ θυγα 
τέρα, οἷ. 1". 256 ἔχειν γυναῖκα πρὸς pias 
τοῦ κυρίου. “The omission of the art 
with both avopos anid θυγατέρα, Cot 


bined with the third persons ropa (sub 


understood of ἀπαγαγεῖν) and αὐτοῖς 
makes the question a formulan 

a principle, But θυγατέρας where we 
should) hive expeete l LiAd, SUING 
to vive the principle aospeeithe apy 


cation to the present case 


124 


MENANAPOY 


ONHZIMOZ 


[490] 


θεᾷ: 
t 


Ν Ν > A Ψ' > «ε Td 
TO κακὸν ἀναγκαῖον λογίζεθ᾽ οὑτοσί. 


-“ ve » > [2 , > , 
τοῦτον τις aAXos, οὐχ ὁ τρόπος, ἀπολλύει. 


ἊΝ A Ν A > Ν ΄“- 
805 καὶ νῦν μὲν ὁρμῶντ᾽ ἐπὶ πονηρὸν πρᾶγμά σε 


» ,ὔ > ΄ Ν »Ἥ 
ταὐτόματον αποσέσωκε, καὶ καταλαμβάνεις 


Ν , > ’ z= nw a 
διαλλαγὰς λύσεις T ἐκείνων τῶν κακῶν. 


[495 ] 


αὖθις δ᾽ ὅπως μὴ λήψομαί σε, Σμικρίνη. 
προπετῆ, λέγω σοι. νῦν δὲ τῶν ἐγκλημάτων 


(Ὁ ἀφίεσο τούτων. τὸν δὲ θυγατριδοῦν λαβὼν 


»” ΄ὕ 
ἔνδον προσέειπε. 


Stands aside from the door. 


ZMIKPINHS 


θυγατριδοῦν. μαστιγία: 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟῸΟΣ 


, > Ν 7. Lal »ν “ 
παχύδερμος ἦσθα και OV, νουν EX ELV δοκῶν. 


892. θεᾷ: you see! Onesimus tri- 
umphantly calls attention to an ab- 
surdity in the logic of Smicrines, 

894. τις ἄλλος: ironical. He doubt- 
less thinks of ὁ νοῦς. The trouble now 
is with his brains. ἀπολλύει : see on 
v..220; 

895. viv μέν : though wow. Phe con- 
cessive μέν prepares the way for αὖθις 
6é in τς 898. 

896. ταὐτόματον: the 
equivalent for ἡ τύχη.- -καταλαμβάνεις: 


ζ 


ΠῚ ΤΟΙ ΤΟΔῚ 


youfind. The supplementary partic. ye- 
γονυίας must be suppled inthe predicate, 
897. ἐκείνων: as now past. 
898. ὅπως ph: GMT. ξ 511. The 
The Insolence of 
But 


tone is threatening, 
Onesimus here reaches its height, 
before Smicrines can resent it Onesi- 
mus renders his rage impotent by the 
announcement of the truth, 

899. προπετῆ: cf. Sophrona’s words 
quoted y. 852. Phe eomie poets, inorder 


[500] 


to create ludicrous situations, deliber- 
ately emphasized the impetuous dispo- 
Pole- 
mon in the Periceiromene (vv. 9, SUS). 

900. ἀφίεσο : sland aequitted a lesal 
term. Note cand see Ktthner- Blass $207, 
Anm. 1... λαβών — καταλαβών. Supply 
in the predicate ὄντας with ἔνδον. 

901. πρόσειπε: salute. ef. \vistoph. 


aye oe Lay - 
Ach. 266 éxt@ σ᾽ ἔτει. προσεῖπον. 


sitions of their characters. Cf, 


902. παχύδερμος : net fond else 
Where with this figurative tmplication 
of stupidity until Lucian, ef. Pim, 23 
ἀπειρόκαλος kal παχύδερμος. ἦσθα: *im- 
perf. of sudden appreciation of a real 
state of things.” Gildersleeve Sv. § 220, 
Aristoph. iy. 


Generally with ἄρα, cf. 


1170 ws μέγαν dp εἶχες. ὦ πότνια, τὸν δά- 
7 f 


κτυλον. Forthe thoucht ef. Plaut. Mil. 
QAO MAES. ACs! CSC TN Te eM tales pont aly 
CHEMI TCILOMUST ent sate, Mme oun 


ΠΡ eps we late le cater Nite 


pis. «al ov: intimates that other 


ENITPEILONTES 


Y , a an 
οὕτως ETHPELS παῖδ᾽ ἐπίγαμον ; τοιγαροῦν 


΄ὔ ν 
τερασιν ομοια πεντάμηνα παιδία 


] , 
M5 ἐκτρέφομεν. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


οὐκ οἷδ᾽ ὅ τι λέγεις. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


ἡ γραῦς δέ γε 


τὸ ε > 5“ ΄ Ν CAEN , 
OlLO , WS EYWH AL. TOTE γαρ ουμος δεσπότης 


TOUS Ταυροπολίοις --- 


[505] 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝῊΣ (calling loudly) 
Σωφρόνη. 


ΟΝΗΣΙΜΟΣ 


ταύτην λαβὼν 


χορῶν ἀποσπασθεῖσαν --- αἰσθάνει γε; 


ZMIKPINHS 


΄ 
ναι. 


ONHZIMOS 


ΓΟ 5 \ 5.5 Ὁ δὶ ΄ \ 
VUVL ὃ αναγνωρισμος αυτοις γέγονε και 


Ψ δῦ» , 
M0 ATAVT ἀγαθά. 


participants in this misunderstanding, 
beside Smicrines, had failed to use their 
Wits; Charisius, for example. 

904. τέρασιν : prodigies, because the 
child was fully formed, ef. ἐκτρέφομεν 
Vv. 905, Only in a jocose sense, there- 
fore, Was it ἃ πεντάμηνον. τέρατα are 
defined by Plat. Crat. 394 pas τὰ παρὰ 
φύσιν γιγνόμενα. Note the tone of comic 
exaggeration in the plurals. 

905. ἐκτρέφομεν : five-months  in- 
fants could not usually be reared. The 
case was clearly παρὰ φύσιν. On the 
ἣ γραῦς 
ye: observe that the demonstrative is 


Ist pers. pl. cf. vv. 178, 393, 


not used. The manner of referciice to 
Sophrona shows that she ts not present, 
906. τότε: on that orcasion, refer- 


Enter Sophrona from the house of Charisius, 


ring to some oceasion about which 
Sophrona Knew, made explicit in the 
next line. 

907. At Onesimus® sugeestion that 
Sophrona could give confirmationot lis 
insinuation, Smicrines shouts loudly 
for her to come out, 

908: Cina 


pleting the sentence Onesimus trusts 


269. Tnstead of com- 
to the general familiarity of the father 
of amarriageable daughter, as well as 
of the theater-going publie, with the 
dangers that notoriously beset vouns 
virlsat the all-night festivals. Ct. Nel. 
De animal 7.19 ra pinpa petpaxia τὰ 
τοῦ Μενάνδρου ἐν ταῖς παννυχίσιν ἀκό- 
λαστα (Denlin-Mirzeon). 


910. ἅπαντα: x. ἐστί. 


MENANAPOY 


SMICRINES, ONESIMUS, SOPHRONA 


ZMIKPINHS 


4 «ε ’ “ 
τί φησιν, ἱερόσυλε γραῦ; 


ΣΩΦΡΟΝΗ 


ξεν 6 , ΕῚ , » i ,ὔ ΓῚ Ν , 
ἡ φύσις ἐβούλεθ᾽, 7) νόμων οὐδὲν μέλει 


ΝῚ > > 9. > aA ~ > Seay 99. 
γυνὴ ὃ᾽ ἐπ αὐτῳ τῷδ ἔφυ. 


[510] 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


aN Φ 
τί μῶρος εἶ; 


ΣΩΦΡΟΝῊ 


τραγικὴν ἐρῶ σοι ῥῆσιν ἐξ Avyns ὅλην, 


λ ΄ > y 0 SS Ve 
av μὴ TOT αισθῃ. ~pLKpLV7). 


ZMIKPINHS 


911. Sophrona hears enough of 
Onesimus*® speech as she comes out of 
the house to enable her to appreciate 
the situation, Instead of making a 
direct answer to the question she quotes 
an apposite passage from the Auge of 
Kuripides, Auge, daughter of Aleus 
king of Tegea, and priestess of Athena, 
When taking part ina festival of the 
evoddess was violated by Heracles, who 
left a ring with her. A son, Telephus, 
AUC, Aleus 
caused the child) to be exposed and 


was born to Whereat 
commanded that his daughter should 
be put to death ignominiously. But 
Heracles arrived opportunely, and, 
convinced by the ring of his respon- 
sibility for the child, reseued Auee, 
Verse 911 (Eur. fr. 920 N.) is from the 
speech of Heracles before Aleus in jus- 


tification of his conduct. It was often 


σύ μοι χολὴν 


quoted in antiquity, but without the 
name of the play. ‘The scholiast. to 
Gregory Naz. cites it as from the New 
Comedy ; he had seen it in this play 
(Wilamowitz). 


assigned by M. Croiset to the same 


Fr. 265. is plausibly 


speech: νῦν δ᾽ οἶνος ἐξέστησέ μ᾽" ὁμολογ ὦ δέ 
σε ἀδικεῖν, τὸ δ᾽ ἀδίκημ᾽ ἐγ ἐνετ᾽ οὐχ ἑκούσιον. 

912. ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ τῷδε: i.e. ἐπὶ τῷ τε- 
κεῖν in the speech of Heracles, but in 
this comic application of the aphorism 
perhaps ἐπὶ τῇ συνουσίᾳ. 

913. ῥῆσιν: the regular term for 
one of the Jong declamatory passages 
so characteristic of tragedy, ef. Aris- 
toph. Vesp. S80 οὐκ ἀποφεύγει πρὶν ἂν 
ἡμῖν ἐκ τῆς Νιόβης εἴπη ῥῆσιν τὴν καλλί- 
στην ἀπολέξας.- ἐξ Αὐγῆς: the reference 
was probably necessary, familiar as 
many of the audience would be with 
the more popular plays of Muripides, 


ἘΠΙΤΡΕΠΟΝΤΕῈΣ 127 


915 κινεῖς παθαινομένη: σὺ yap σφόδρ᾽ ota ὅτι 


i 4 me) vd nw 
τέρας λέγει νῦν. 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


oS’ Syay's εὖ tx 0, ὅτι 


[raed 37456 ald la 
τέρατ᾽ ἀμφότερα συνῆκε. 


[515] 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


πάνδεινον λέγεις. 


ΣΏΦΡΟΝΗ 


γ > , Ἢ > id “ont > Nets. 
ov γέγονεν εὐτύχημα μεῖζον οὐδὲ ἕν. 


ΣΜΙΚΡΙΝΗΣ 


‘el τοῦτ᾽ ἀληθές ἐσθ᾽ ὃ λέγεις. τὸ παιδίον 


[A few verses are lacking. ] 


915. παθαινομένη : with your tragic 
bombast. The vb., found elsewhere only 
in late writers, chiefly in literary criti- 
cism, means the striving after pathetic 
effects in delivery. — The anapaest in 
the third foot, contained ina word that 
begins in the preceding foot, is found 
in the Cairo MS. only here and in S. 
143, and in the fragments four times. 
It is not objectionable in the fourth 
foot, see on vy. 111. White, p. 151. 

916. τέρας λέγει viv: whut he siuys 
now is monstrous, preposterous, Le. τέ- 
pas av εἴη εἰ γίγνοιτο (cf. Plat. Theaet. 
164.8). The phrase, expressing iIncre- 
dulity, is used several times by Plato 
and passed into Latin, ef. Cie. ad Att. 
Alo! 

917. τέρατ᾽ ἀμφότερα: both prorli- 
gies, the nothos of Pamphila and that 


Merz, Mods traeialra baits 


of Charisius, have been correctly inter- 
preted by him, The text is uncertain. 


- συνῆκε : comprehended, often of a 
thing difficult to understand, e.g. Soph. 
Trach, 1121 οὐδὲν ξυνίημ᾽ ὧν σὺ ποικίλ- 
Nets πάλαι. -- πάνδεινον : outrageous. 

919. Smicrines probably challenges 
Onesimus to a proof of his assertions. 
This could most readily be given, with- 
out the necessity of repeating anything 
which the spectators already know, by 
the appearance of Charisius and Pam- 
phila together on the scene after their 
reconciliation, and their acknowlede- 
ment of the child in the presence of 
Smicrines. 

Fr. 185. ἐχῖνος : a word quoted as 
occurring in this play as the name of 
a kind of xyt’rpa. It may have been 
used in the exposition im the account 
of the exposure of the child. Cf. χυτρί- 
few and ἐγχυτρίζειν to pot a child, 1.0. 
put it ina pot to be exposed, 





HE PIE TPOSLENH 





THE PERICEIROMENE 


Within the past decade a kind fortune has on three separate 
occasions brought to light out of Egypt considerable portions of 
Menander’s Periceiromene, or Girl with Shorn Locks, —a bright 
play, of distinctly original charm, which is referred to a number 
of times by ancient writers, though it is only three times quoted 
from by title. The series of discoveries began at Oxyrhynechus: in 
the second volume of the Oxyrhynchus Papyri (1899) Messrs. 
Grenfell and Hunt published from a papyrus roll a fairly well- 





preserved column containing 51 lines from near the end of the play 
and a few line-ends from the preceding column. Among the remains 
of the papyrus codex of Menander which M. Lefebvre found at 
Aphroditopolis and published in 1907 were two sheets of four pages 
each and a torn leaf containing a little more than half of two con- 
secutive pages, a total of 320 lines, which have been assigned with 
certainty to this comedy. Unfortunately, about one-fourth of the 
text of the Aphroditopolis (Cairo) manuscript 1s seriously mutilated 
or difficult to decipher. Finally, in 1908 two leaves of a parchment 
codex of Menander which had been acquired at Antinupolis were 
published by Professor A. Korte for the Leipzig Academy. They 
contain respectively 61 and 60 lines of the Periceiromene, but 48 
lines of the first leaf overlap the text of the Cairo manuscript. In 
spite of the mutilation of the extremities of many of the lines on 
this parchment, the text is ina fairly satisfactory condition except 
at the end of the second leaf. We thus possess at the present time. 
of a play whose original compass was not much more than 1000 
verses, 444 verses and a few insignificant verse-ends.? Furthermore, 


1 The information supplied by the ancients has been of great value in helping 
to identify the several finds. The Bembine scholiast to Terence remarks on 
Eun. 60 (in amore haee omnia sunt vitia: iniuriae, susplerones, 
ete.): videtur Detonsam (Periceiromenen) Menandri tangere, in 

151 


TZ MENANDER 


the relative position of each of these six sections of text has been 
determined, and the extent of the gaps between the first five can be 
estimated within a few lines, In consequence we possess a body 
of text that, for the most part, can be read with pleasure; we know 
all, or at any rate most, of the leading characters, their chief indi- 
vidual traits, and the motives which actuate them; and the plot in 
its general outlines lies before us. This is not to say that there are 
not many problems of both text and plot which our present resources 
do not permit us to solve. A number of ways of creating the com- 
plication and of solving it are always open to a poet after he has 
chosen his theme and has fixed upon his characters, and the gaps 
in our text are so extensive that often we can only guess which of 
the possible solutions our poet adopted. But we are doubtless 
justified in believing that, on the whole, the portions we possess 
are of greater significance for the understanding of the plot than 
those which are lost. 

The play derives its title from the act of a lover, Polemon, who, 
in a moment of insane but apparently justifiable jealousy, cut off 
the hair of his dearly-beloved mistress, Glycera. This barbarous 
deed, which brought the deepest humiliation? upon a beautiful and 
qua fabula miles, suspicione pereussus adulterii, gladio amatae 
amputat crines. Agathias in an epigram Anth, Pal. 5. 218 refers to τὸν co- 
βαρὸν Ἰ]ολέμωνα, τὸν ἐν θυμέλῃσι Μενάνδρου κείραντα Τ' λυκέρας (Scaliver’s conj. for 
yAuKepous) τῆς ἀλόχου πλοκάμους. Lucian Dial. meretr. 8.1 alludes to the cutting 
of ἃ mistress’ hair as the act of a jealous lover. We now know that throughout 
Dial. meretr. 9 he has in mind the situation that confronts Polemon on his re- 
turn from the wars, and that he draws on the play for significant details. Phi- 
lostratus also alludes to the subject of the play in two letters, Ep. 16 and 61 
(both quoted below), Each of the six pieces of MS. is vouched for by conclusive 
evidence, either internal or external: Eo by anallusion (v.53) to the hair-ciuttine 
and by proper names and subject matter; J by the recurrence (vy. 243) of a 
quotation accompanied by the tithe; Lp. by overlapping J; ΙΧ by proper names 
and content; Lp.? by content, by the fact that it obviously continues K, and 
by its belonging to the same book as Lp.t; and the Oxyr. fr, by proper names 
and subject matter, Only one of the three quotations with tithe recurs in these 
MSS., but the text contains cight quotations without title, 

ΤΠ poet seems not to have attached any special significance to the act, as 
some scholars have thought; it was merely a Wanton outrage pot a woman's 
beauty, an ἀτιμία (ν. 48). Philostratus αἰνὸν ἃ reasonable interpretation when he 


writes (Ep. 61), thinking of Glycera: ris ce, ὦ καλή, περιέκειρεν; ὡς ἀνόητος καὶ 


PERICEITROMENE 133 


unoffending girl, was not committed before the eyes of the specta- 
tors; but it was reported in detail just after it was perpetrated, 
and is kept constantly before the spectators’ minds, not only by the 
presence upon the scene of Glycera with her shortened locks, but 
also by allusions in the text (vv. 53, 248). Polemon’s violence 
drives Glycera out of his home. A critical situation is thus created 
which gives rise to the subsequent course of plot and sub-plot. The 
sympathy of the spectators is drawn to Glycera at the outset, and 
their interest in her fortunes aroused. The incident which gives 
the play its title is therefore of central dramatic importance in a 
play whose theme is jealousy. Had Menander desired to use a 
descriptive subtitle he might properly have called his comedy 
ἸΠερικειρομένη ἢ ὃ ζηλότυπος. 

To put the spectators in possession of the facts necessary to the 
understanding of the plot —to acquaint them with the characters, 
the situation in which they at present find themselves, and their 
antecedent history in so far as it is necessary that this history 
should be known at the beginning — Menander has employed for 
the Periceiromene the same method which he adopts in the Hero: a 
prelude followed by a prologue. In a play constructed on this plan 
the characters are first seen in action. A few preliminary scenes 
reveal the principal actors in the drama, their relations to each 


βάρβαρος ὁ μὴ φεισάμενος τῶν ᾿Αφροδίτης δώρων. οὐδὲ γὰρ γῇ κομῶσα ἡδὺ οὕτω θέαμα ὡς 
γυνὴ κατάκομος. So far as we know, the hair was never cut as a punishment for 
adultery in the case of cither man or woman, In Aristoph. Ach. 849 the allu- 
sion in Kpartvos εὖ κεκαρμένος μοιχόν is to the foppish hair-cut of an old man who 
would fain be regarded as a youthful gallant. The tyrant Polycrates is said by 
the historian Alexis (Athen. 540 &) to have clipped the hair of a favorite youth in 
a fit of jealousy caused by his rival, the poet Anacreon., The hair of slaves and 
of captives in war was sometimes shorn, The women in Aristoph. Thesm. 836 ff. 
propose that the mothers of undesirable citizens be required to sit, their hair 
cut ‘ oxdgiov-style,”? behind the mothers of brave men, The scholiast describes 
the σκάφιον cut as the tonsure of slaves. As for captives, Philostratus Te. goes 
on to say: ὄντως πάντα τὰ ἐκ πολεμίων πέπονθας" ἐγὼ δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν οὐδ᾽ αἰχμάλωτον 
(sc. οὖσαν) περιέκειρα. τιμῶν τὸ κάλλος. Th Mp. 16 Philostratus carelessly speaks of 
Glycera as a captive girl, forgetting the details of the comedy and thinking only 
of the girl’s short hair; or perhaps we should read: οὐδ᾽ ὁ τοῦ Μενάνδρου HoNeuwy 
καλὸν μειράκιον περιέκειρεν. GAN Cworep) αἰχμαλώτοι' μὲν ἐρωμένης Kare τόλμησεν 


yar Υ ΓΟ ' 
ὀργισθείς, ἣν οὐδ᾽ ἀποκείρας ἠνέσχετο, KTE. 


154 MENANDER 


other, and the present situation, which is almost invariably of a 
critical nature. The exposition is then completed by a narrative 
monologue. In a comedy in which the dénouement is to be accom- 


plished by means of an ἀναγνώρισις, --- a scheme for which Menander, 





herein a true disciple of Euripides, showed a marked predilection 
(Vit. Aristoph. 10), — the monologue, in which the antecedents of 
the principal characters are given, was traditionally desirable, 
whether it preceded or followed the dialogue. It is thoroughly in 
accordance with the Euripidean tradition, moreover, that the exposi- 
tory monologue should be assigned to a person who is outside the 
main action. In the present instance Menander has assigned this 
function to Agnola, a personification of Ignorance, or, more accu- 
rately, Misapprehension, a figure whom he endows with the divine 
power of directing the affairs of men. TLueian introduces his essay 
On Calumny with a deseription of ἄγνοια which in all probability 
owes some traits to the speech of the goddess in the Periceiromene 
(ef, Kock adesp. 1475), just as he elsewhere (Pseudol. 4) invokes 
from another of Menander’s prologues the analogous figure of 
Klenchus, the spirit which brings the truth to Nght. «A dread 
thing is misapprehension,” he says in effect, “the cause of many 
woes to πο. She pours down as it were a mist upon men’s actions, 
dimming the truth and beclouding the life of each individual. We 
stumble hke men who walk in the dark. We see not that which 
is before our feet, but fear that which is far from us. Through 
nusapprehension ealumnies arise, and through ealumnies homes 
have been ruined, cities utterly destroyed, fathers enraged against 
their children, brothers against brothers, children against parents, 


lovers against their beloved In Menander’s play Misapprehension 
appears as a benevolent spirit, working against herself in the inter- 
est of those who through her are deprived of that which is dearest 
to them. Through her a ealumny arises against an innocent girl, 
She arouses in Polemon, who beheves the calumny, a jealous rave 
Which leads him to commit an aet whieh is inconsistent with his 
true nature (v. ff). to the end that the truth, obscured by herself, 
Me eon neem light. 

The lustory of the eharacters prior to the action of the play is 


as follows: About eieliteen years before, the wife of Pataecus, a 


PERICEIROMENE 135 


wealthy ship-owner, gave birth to twin children, a boy and a girl, 
and died. Pataecus had just heard of the loss of his ship, repre- 
senting all his property. Unwilling to face poverty burdened by 
these children, he gave them to a slave to expose. With them were 
placed the usual γνωρίσματα ---- some objects hung about the neck, 
a piece of embroidered cloth, a small casket containing an embroi- 
dered girdle, and the clothing on their backs (vv. 693 ff.).. The chil- 
dren were found by a poor old woman of Corinth. Unable to rear 
both children, she kept the girl and gave the boy to Myrrhina, a 
rich Corinthian matron, who desired a son (vv. 1ff.). After the 
death of his first wife it seems that Pataeeus had married Myrrhina, 
and, believing that the boy was her child, had formally adopted him 
(v. 703). The boy, Moschion, brought up in luxury and thoroughly 
spoiled by Myrrhina, grew to be a conceited and somewhat. disso- 
lute young man. His sister, Glycera, was reared as a respectable 
girl, but her foster-mother, reduced to abject poverty by the war, 
could not provide a proper marriage for her and was therefore 
obliged to give her in a freer union to a Corinthian soldier, Pole- 
mon, who was enamored of her. Now the secret of Glycera’s 
birth lay heavy upon the conscience of her supposed mother as she 
approached her end. The girl was not safely established in life. 
she reflected, living outside the bonds of legal wedlock. Glyeera 
might at some time need the protection of her brother; there was 
even danger that an attachinent might spring up between brother 
and sister if each were unaware of the relationship. So the old 
woman, before her death, told Glycera the truth and gave her the evi- 
dences of her origin (vv. 11-24). These tokens Glycera guarded care- 
fully in a chest (vv. 621, 633). She revealed her seeret to no one. 

Not long before the action of the play begins, Polemon had estab- 
lished Glycera ina house next door to that of Myrrhinacvy. 26 ff). 
Although she knows that Mosehion is her brother, she vet luis kept 
the fact to herself, fearing that if known it might seriously affect 
his fortunes (vv. 28 ff.). Moschion, however, regarded lis pretty 
neighbor as a suitable object of his attentions. During an absence 
of Polemon (vv. 240, 377, 62), probably on a campaign.’ Mosehion 
had got into the habit of hanging about her door, Finally, the 


1(‘f, Lue. Dial. meretr, 9.1 ὁ Πολέμων ἀπὸ τῆς στρατίας ἀνέστρεψε πλουτῶν, 


156 MEN ANDER 


evening before the play opens, seeing her through the open door, 
he had rushed upon her and embraced her. And Glycera did not 
repulse him. At that moment Polemon, just home from abroad, 
arrived in time to witness the encounter. He drew the obvious 
inference from Glycera’s complaisance, but, instead of having the 
inatter out with her then, he hurried away, intending to question 
her on the morrow (vv. 33 ff., 868). Moschion, we may assume, 
beat a speedy retreat from the scene of danger. 

The action begins the next morning after this incident. We can- 
not tell how the poet managed the initial scenes, but we know that 
in them appeared Polemon (vv. 9, 244 f.), Glycera (v. 7), and Sosias, 
the man-servant of Polemon (he 15 not introduced when he appears 
in v.52); and probably Doris, Glycera’s maid. We can imagine 
that Polemon, accompanied by Sosias, first tells of lis suspicions 
of Glycera, which he cannot bring himself to believe, so convinced 
has he been of her affection for him. Sending Sosias away, prob- 
ably to look for Moschion, he enters the house. Instead of explain- 
ing her conduct Glycera requires that he shall beheve her assurances 
of innocence. Exasperated by her reticence regarding her relations 
with Moschion, Polemon euts off her hair and bursts out of the 
house followed by the weeping and frightened woman. Polemon 
already regrets his violence and would be glad to make his peace 
with her; but she will hear no more of his promises (fr. 569). In 
despair Polemon joins some boon companions in the country and 
tries to drown his grief in wine (vv. 56, 244). Glycera summons 
her maid Doris. She must leave Polemon’s house without delay. 
Reealling probably the kindness which her neighbors, Pataecus 
(v. 885) and Myrrhina, had shown her during Polemon’s absence, 
and ascertaining first that Moschion is not at home (v. 201), she 
seeks and gains from Myrrhina permission to live with her wnatil 
other arrangements can be made. At any rate we find her already 
established in Myrrhina’s house at the conclusion of the speech of 
Misapprehension. 

In this characteristic way Menander has first shown us the prin- 
cipal persons of his play under the sway of violent emotions. 
When they emerge from the struggle a breach has been created bhe- 


tween them, Polemon’s sincere love for Glycera makes it impossible 


PERICEIROMENE 137 


for him to acquiesce in the separation; he must win her back in 
some way. But the passion of jealousy has been aroused in him. 
He cannot overlook what he has seen with his own eyes, and yet 
Glycera will not explain her conduct nor come back to him until 
he is willing to make amends. In ordinary circumstances this 
lovers’ quarrel would have taken the usual course of confession 
and forgiveness, after Polemon’s rage had cooled, for he is already 
sorry for what he has done.’ But the poet contrives so to fan the 
flame of jealousy that Polemon is finally ready to resort to violence 
(v.379) in order to regain Glycera and punish Moschion. At this 
point a third party will intervene. Through his intervention the 
secret of Glycera’s birth will be discovered. She will find her 
father, Moschion his sister and father. Glycera’s innocence will be 
established and an independent position in life secured for her. 
The reconcilation and marriage with Polemon will follow. In this 
way the purpose announced by Misapprehension (vv. 49 ff.) will be 
fulfilled. 

The speech of the Goddess belongs properly to the exposition. 
The brief second act (ca. 94 vv.), which intervenes between her 
departure and the appearance of the chorus, develops the two 
motives that are to be at play until the dénouement, — the attempt 
of Polemon to regain Glycera, and Moschion’s ridiculous wooing. 
The former -constitutes the main plot, the latter the secondary 
plot. Polemon does not know that Glycera has left his house. Ie 
sends Sosias to see what she is doing. Sosias, a blundering servant 
and half drunk besides, goes back with the report that he has seen 
Doris come from the house of Myrrhina (v. 04). Fearing that 
Glycera will try to escape from him, Polemon later (v. 25-4) sends 
Sosias back, with a couple of soldiers, to keep a watch upon her. 
A moment afterward (v. 246), unable to wait for information 
through Sosias, he himself comes rushing upon the scene, almost 
certain that Glycera has already gone. He goes into his house to 
search for her. Meanwhile Davus, the confidential slave of Mosclion, 
has learned from Doris (vv. 142 ff.) that Glyeera is in Myrrhina’s 
house. Assuming that Myrrhina has acted in her son's interest in 
receiving his sweetheart, Davus hurries off to bring Moschion home. 


LV. 54 κλάει κατακλινείς, and Philost. Ep. 16 κλάει καταπεσὼν καὶ μεταγιηγνώσκει. 


138 MENANDER 


The long trochaie scene between Moschion and Davus at the begin- 
ning of the third act (vv. 147 ff.) 1s a ludicrous exposure of Moschion’s 
complacent belief in his personal attractiveness to women, —a fixed 
idea with him. He is easily made to believe that lis mother has 
arranged the matter with the sole purpose of placing Glycera at 
his disposal. But lis complacence receives a severe shock when 
Myrrhina sends Davus about his business on receiving the message 
that Moschion is present; she bluntly states that Glycera would 
not have come at all had she known that Moschion was about the 
premises (vy. 203 f.). Davus soon persuades Moschion, however, 
that he has merely to deal with an exhibition of coyness on the 
part of Glycera, and that if he will wait a few days she will send 
for him. So Moschion goes to his room and waits. Wlnle he is 
waiting in one house and Polemon is searehing the other house for 
Glycera, Davus and Sosias, their representatives, indulge ina battle 
of billingsgate (vv. 253 ff.). 

The main action of the plot, interrupted by the Moselion-Davus 
and Davus-Sosias scenes, is resumed when Polemon comes out of 
his house with the knowledge that Glycera has left him (v. 278), 
He is sure, though no one has told him, that she has gone over to 
Myrrhinws house to be with her Mosehion, Ife determines, appar- 
ently, to storm the house (v.396), recover Glycera by force (v. 379), 
and deal out vengeance upon Moschion, Before he ean carry out 
this plan, however, Pataeeus and Habrotonon join Polemon and 
Sosias upon the scene (vv. dt ff). It is difhcult to make out the 
role of Hlabrotonon from the scanty remains. She is of course an 
hetaera, and seems to have some connection with Sosias or at least 
some influence over him. Pataecus, the adoptive father of Moschion, 
is a friend of both Glyeera and Polemon, and is therefore deeply 
concerned im all that has taken place. He had probably already 
participated in one of the scenes of the second act (after v. TO), and 
knows that his wife and Glycera give as the reason for the latter’s 
removal to his house the fear of Polemon’s violence (v. 369), His 
mission at the present time is to effeet a reconciliation. Ife sue- 
eeeds in persuading Polemon to dismiss Sosias and his + army,” 
and seon couvinees him that his only hope of winning Glycera 


back is by persuasion. Ife assures Polemon that he has not the 


PERICEIROMENE 139 


authority of a husband over her, and that he cannot inflict summary 
punishment upon her lover as an adulterer. In the end Pataecus 
agrees to act as Polemon’s ambassador to Glycera. 

At this point, at the beginning of the fourth act, the dénouement 
by the device of a recognition begins. It is managed in duplicate 
throughout, but without repetition. While Pataecus is discovering 
that Glycera is his daughter, Moschion by eavesdropping is discov- 
ering that she is his sister. During Moschion’s long wait in his 
chamber for a summons to his sweetheart, he apparently overhears 
a conversation between Myrrhina and Glycera (after ν. 427). It is 
probable that Glycera is obliged to take Myrrhina into her confi- 
dence, to the extent, at least, of disclosing to her that Moschion is 
her brother. Moschion overhears enough of the conversation to 
disillusion him regarding Glycera’s supposed predilection for him 
and to arouse his curiosity about her parentage (vy. 660, 670); but 
just how much he learns we do not know. At the same time Patae- 
cus, in examining Glycera’s wardrobe in Polemon’s house (vy. 596 ff.), 
has seen something that arouses his curiosity as to her origin. 
Proceeding to discharge lis mission as ambassador for Polemon, he 
summons Glycera from the house. She defends herself against the 
unjust suspicions of her motive in accepting Myrrhina’s hospitality, 
complains bitterly of the conduct of Polemon, and repeatedly rejects 
Pataecus’ proposals that she should go back to him (vv. 699, 625, 
630). She seems also to assert (on v. 605) that she is of free-born 
parentage, and to challenge Pataecus to examine the contents of the 
chest in which she keeps the evidences of her origin (vy. 620 ff., 
632). The chest is brought out. Then follows a Jong recognition 
scene in the manner of Euripides. Pataecus at first identifies the 
objects in the chest as the property of his former wife. The cir- 
cumstances of the exposure of Glycera and her brother, as related 
by her, correspond with those in which his own twin children were 
exposed. Finally the recognition is completed by Glycera demand- 
ing of Pataecus that he name the objects contained in a casket 
which is in the chest.’ Now during the whole of this dialogue, 

1 Von Arnim’s interpretation of the recognition scene (in Zeitsehr. f. osterr. 
Gymn. LX [1909], p. 8) coincides in the main with that given above yp see also 
the articles of Robert (/fermes LXIV [1909]. pp. 260 Tf). Sehinidt: (ibid., 
pp. 403 ff.), and Sudhaus (th. Mus. LN TV [1000], pp. de ff.). 


140 MENANDER 


and possibly during the two preceding scenes, Moschion is present, 
not as a participant but again as an eavesdropper. Glycera has re- 
fused to answer Pataecus’ questions about her brother, saying that 
she had given her oath to Myrrhina not to reveal that part of the 
secret. At the end of the interview Pataecus has found his daughter, 
but has no suspicion that Moschion is his true son. But Moschion 
from his hiding-place has heard the proofs that the girl to whom 
he has been fatuously making love is his own sister; lhe knows 
that Pataecus is his father and that Myrrhina is not in reality his 
mother. He has also heard Pataecus’ expressions of disapproval 
of his conduct (vv. 708 f.), and takes pains thereafter to keep out of 
his father’s way. 

Before the beginning of the final act, which probably opened with 
a monologue by Polemon followed by the dialogue between him and 
Doris of which the last part is preserved, we must assume a num- 
ber of scenes in which the misapprehension under which the sev- 
eral characters have labored is cleared up. An interview between 
Moschion and Glycera certainly followed the recognition scene. 
After Glycera went into the house Moschion probably had an op- 
portunity to vent his wrath upon Davus. A scene between Moschion 
and Myrrhina would probably follow. And finally Pataecus, who 
of course does not find Mosehion in the house (v. 704), must. first 
be informed that the adoptive son, with whom he is justly indig- 
nant, is in reality his own son and not Myrrhina’s; he must then 
come to an understanding with Myrrhina for having led him to be- 
lieve that Mosehion was her son by a former marriage. Both objects 
would most easily be accomplished by an interview between husband 
and wife. Myrrhina would acknowledge her deception and beg for- 
giveness ; and, since she came to Pataeeus richly dowered (v.35), she 
would have little difficulty in plaecating him. At the end of the 
fourth act there would remain to be arranged only the provision 
for the happiness of Glycera and the settlement of Moschion’s fate. 

The conclusion is swiftly accomplished. Doris tells Polemon of 
Glycera’s good fortune. He now understands her conduct of the 
evening before (v. 866). Better still, Doris assures him that Glycera 
is ready to forgive him. Pataecus and Glyecera soon appear. The 


lovers are reconciled and Glycera formally given to Polemon to be 


PERICEIROMENE 141 


his lawful wife. Pataecus lets Polemon off with a word of good- 
natured admonition. As for Moschion, Pataecus announces his in- 
tention of marrying him to the daughter of Philinus. At this 
announcement Moschion, who has again been eavesdropping, gives 
from his hiding-place an exclamation of consternation. We suspect 
that the choice of bride is no more agreeable to him than is that of 
the daughter of Philocrates for Clinia in the Heauton (vv. 1060 ff.). 
This young man’s protest as transferred from the original of Me- 
nander may give us an idea of Moschion’s feelings regarding the 
proposed bride: rufamne illam virginem, caesiam, sparso 
ore, adunco naso? non possum, pater. It may be that 
Moschion, like Clinia, ventured to express a preference for another 
girl and gained his father’s consent to his marriage with her. How- 
ever this may be, the play ends with a double marriage in prospect 
for the evening. 

In the foregoing account of the plot one relationship is assumed 
that cannot be proved from our fragmentary text, viz. that Pataecus 
is the present husband of Myrrhina and the step-father, as he sup- 
poses, of Moschion. The case would be clear if the obscure letters in 
v. 703 were found to be correctly read by the present editor as υἱὸς 
Geros; the letters voober seem fairly clear. But even without this 
support the hypothesis seems reasonable in itself and is opposed by 
nothing in the extant lines. When Myrrhina took the boy to rear, 
she did not adopt him. Moschion himself and everybody else un- 
derstood that he was her son by birth. Evidently, then, her hus- 
band was deceived by her and Moschion was a supposititious eluld. 
There is nothing in our text to show whether or not Myrrhina 15 
at the present time a widow. The house is constantly referred to 
as hers, but the natural explanation is that she, a rich woman, owns 
her home. Widows are unknown on the Greek comie stage. It 15 
safer, therefore, to assume that Myrrhina’s husband is still living, 
He is either the husband of eighteen years ago or a successor. If 
he is living he almost certainly has a part in the action of the play, 
and if he has such a part, he must be either Plilinus or Pataecus, 
—unless, indeed, another middle-aged man appeared in the lost 
portions of the play, to whom there is no allusion in the pre- 
served portions ; and this is extremely unlikely. Now Philinus 1s 


142 MENANDER 


mentioned but once,and that at the very end of the play. There is 
elsewhere no allusion that can be referred to him with any cogency 
or even with a high degree of probability."| The casual way in 
which he is mentioned by Pataecus (v. 907) as the father of the 
girl whom he has selected to be Moschion’s wife is best explained 
by the analogy of Menander’s Heauton, which offers a perfect paral- 
lel. On the spur of the moment, out of patience with his son and 
determined to put a stop to his folly, Pataecus, hke Chremes in the 
Heauton, calls to mind an eligible girl. Almost any girl would do, 
the ugher the better. Philinus need no more have a part in the 
action of the Periceiromene than Phanocrates has in the Heauton, 
Indeed, a plausible rdle cannot be created for him on the basis 
either of the dramatic necessity for such a character or of allu- 
sions that may naturally be interpreted as referring to him. The 
important role which Pataecus plays, on the other hand, becomes 
much more intelligible if le is the second husband of Myrrhina. 
His interest in the affairs of Glyeera, Polemon, and Mosehion 
would require no explanation or motivation. And he would in a 
double sense be a victim of Misapprehension, in that, ignorant of 
his wife’s deception, he has for years regarded lis own son as a 
stepson. And the fact that Moschion’s fortune is not in the least 
changed by the discovery of lis parents makes the triumph of the 
intervening goddess more complete; for, as Glycera most earnestly 
desired, Μοσχίων ὀνήσεται ὧν δέδωκεν ἡ τύχη. 

So far as we can judge from the remains of this play, most of 
the characters in it are rather types than individuals. Glycera, the 

PVan Leeuwen raised the question (on v. 513 in his edition) whether τῷ πατρί 
v.59} may not be Philinus, and he is now inelined (Mn. NXNVIT, p. 120) to as- 
sign vv. 111} (his 71 ff.) to Philinus on account of ty μείρακα, Which Doris 
could not use of her aiistress. But the assignment of these verses (with Leo) to 
Davus, reading προθύμως or πρὸς ἡμᾶς, relieves this difficulty. Robert (//ermes 
NLIV, pp. 300 ff.) makes Philinus the husband of Myrrhina and the supposed 
father of Moschion, mainly on the strength of τῷ πατρί and of τούτους in 
Vv. 589. οὗτοι Would be. he thinks, Philinus and his ΠΟ πάτο daughter whom 
Pataecus has selected for Moschiom’s future wife. But Glycera, in defending 
herself before the spectators, as before a jury, could quite properly refer to 
Pataecus and Myrrhina as otro and Pataecus, though present. is quite matu- 

; 


rally referred to as ‘this father? in the interpretation of the passage given in 


this edition, 


PERICEIROMENE 143 


heroine of the play, does not differ materially from the ordinary 
young girl of comedy. Pataecus is the prosperous, good-natured citi- 
zen, somewhat unctuous in manner. Davus is the tricky and lying 
slave, Doris the typical maid. The characters of Polemon and 
Moschion, however, stand out strongly as individuals, especially by 
contrast with the persons about them. We feel that the poet elab- 
orated their parts with especial predilection. Polemon is not drawn 
as a braggart soldier, as the character in Lucian’s dialogue (Meretr. 
10) might have led us to expect. It is to the amusing figure of 
Sosias that the réle of braggart soldier is given, and of course it 
becomes an absurd caricature in his hands. Polemon, however, is 
rather the loyal and straightforward lover, if somewhat tempestu- 
ous when aroused. He has hitherto been generous and kind in his 
treatment of Glyecera, childishly proud of her in the finery he has 
lavished upon her, and in all ways as considerate of her as if she 
were his lawful wife. But the trying situation which confronted him 
on his return from an absence aroused in him a storm of unreasoning 
jealousy and rage. Under the stress of passion he committed an 
act of brutality that, as Agnoia tells us, was inconsistent with his 
true nature. We see that he is quick to regret this action, and that 
he can listen to reason in spite of his passion. In the tinal act he, 
the doughty warrior, is as excited and as timid as a boy. Π15 naiveté 
there and in the scene with Pataecus is both amusing and convineing. 
Moschion is an excellent foil to Polemon. A spoiled and pampered 
boy, always clinging to his mother’s apron-strings, he aspires to be 
a gallant, a crusher of women’s hearts. With the malicious encour- 
agement of Davus he easily fancies himself a tremendous success 
in that réle. But he is an arrant coward in love as in war. Instead 
of facing Polemon, and, later on, Pataecus, he keeps out of their 
sight throughout the play. His advances to Glycera, except for the 
one moment of impudent boldness, are made through the agency of 
Davus. He even credits his mother with the desire to aid and abet 
him in his eareer as μοιχός. When he begins to realize what a cheap 
figure he cuts as a lover, and knows that he has ineurred the disap- 
proval of his mother and father as well as the contempt of his be- 
loved, he sneaks about, eavesdropping at every opportunity. The 
New Comedy, so far as we know it from the Greek fragments and 


144 MENANDER 


the Latin translations, offers no counterpart of either Moschion ! 
or Polemon. 

The chorus is a comus of revelers, as in the Epitrepontes. We 
are told in v. 56 that Polemon has gathered together his boon com- 
panions, to whom he is giving a breakfast. We learn from ν. 244 
that after his quarrel with Glycera he had retired into the country, 
and from v.877 that he has engaged a cook for an entertainment 
in his city house. When, therefore, Davus in v. 141 announces the 
approach of a throng of drunken youth, and immediately thereafter, 
at the close of the act, the MS. has χοροῦ, we naturally conclude 
that these youth forin the chorus and that they are the companions 
of Polemon. After their breakfast in the country they come to his 
house in the city to be on hand for the dinner in the evening. At 
the end of their performance after v. 146 they probably retire into 
Polemon’s house, whence they emerge when suitable occasions for 
similar performances are offered. According to the divisions of the 
play adopted in this edition, the chorus makes its first appearance 
after the second act and does not furnish an entertainment between 
the third and fourth acts. It would appropriately appear, however, 
between the fourth and fifth acts. 

The scene of the Periceiromene, like that of the Emporus of 
Diphilus (fr. 82 K. νόμιμον τοῦτ᾽ ἐστί, βέλτιστ᾽, ἐνθάδε Κορινθίοισιν) 15 
laid in Corinth. Though the fact is not stated explicitly in the 
preserved text (it would have been explained in the early part of 
Agnoia’s speech), it is safely deduced from a mumber of passages. 
In the first place, Polemon is a Corinthian (v.9). Ele owns the house 
in which he lives (v. 90). But in no eity but Corinth would he have 
possessed the right of ἔγκτησις. Again, he marries Glycera. Patac- 
cus therefore must also have been a Corinthian citizen; for Cormth 
and Athens, so far as we know, never had an agreement of ἐπιγαμία 
with each other, Thirdly, the law of τιμωρία as expounded by Patae- 
cus (vv. 376 ff.) differs from that which was recognized at Athens. 
There the law gave to the man whose παλλακὴ ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθέροις παισίν 
(and Polemon expressly declares in v. 566 ἐγὼ γαμετὴν νενόμικα ταύτην) 

The character which Aristaenetus (Ep. 1.27) describes, a cood-looking 
but conceited youth, who fancies that all women are in love with him, hats 


many points of similarity with that of Moschion and may have been susevested 
by this play. But the girl who deludes him is no Glycera. 


PERICEIROMENE 145 


was guilty of adultery the right to inflict summary vengeance upon 
the adulterer. This right Pataecus explicitly denies to Polemon ; 
his recourse, he says, is in an action at law against Moschion. It 
is Corinthian, not Attic, law which Pataecus is expounding.’ The 
narrative of Agnoia, finally, implies that the old woman who found 
the children was a Corinthian. No reason is apparent why Menan- 
der chose Corinth rather than Athens as the scene of his play. 
There is of course no attempt at local coloring. The background 
represents two private residences, as in the Epitrepontes. 

The two references in the text to contemporary historical events 
are rather vague, but perhaps they suffice to fix the approximate 
period of the dramatic action and consequently the position of the 
Periceiromene among the plays of Menander. It is a period of great 
distress among the Greeks at large (v. 409). At the time Glycera 
was given in marriage to Polemon, some months at least before the 
action of the play begins, a war was in progress, in the course of 
which “the Corinthian troubles” grew worse and worse (v. 5). 
Obviously a particular war, which involved the fortunes of the Co- 
rinthians, is referred to. Now the troubles of Corinth may be said 
to have begun with the occupation of that city by Ptolemy early in 
the year 308 (Diod. 20.57). Ptolemy stationed a garrison there 
and continued to hold it until at least 306, when Demetrius, before 
his departure for Cyprus, tried in vain to induce Leonidas, Ptolemy’s 
general, to deliver the place to him. But Ptolemy’s occupation seems 
not to have been attended by protracted military operations, and 
Greece was not in especial distress from the time of the liberation 
of Athens by Demetrius in the summer of 507 until luis departure 
for Cyprus in 306, But shortly thereafter the war was actively re- 
newed in central Greece and in the Peloponnesus by Cassander, 
whose aggressions continued until the return of Demetrius in 604. 
This period is referred to in the decree in honor of Demochares 
quoted in Vit. X Orat. 851p as ὁ τετριετὴς πόλεμος. The vears 506 
and 304 brought great alarm and distress to Athens in particular, 
for Cassander threatened Attiea and in 504 the city was in danger 

1So Korte in Ber. d. siichs. Gesell, WOR. p. 1115; see note ony, S80 and ef. 
Meier-Schémann-Lipsius, Att Proce. pp. 104. Ὁ This point cannot he pressed, 
however, for Attie law may have permitted summary venceance only at the 
time of detection, 


146 MENANDER 


(1G. II 249 and 266 = Ditt. Syl? 180 and 184, Plut. Vit. Dem. 23). In 
304 Cassander took Corinth, which had come into the possession of 
Demetrius sometime between 806 and that date (Diod. 20. 102). 
On the arrival of Demetrius from Asia in 304 the war against 
Cassander was prosecuted with vigor. For considerably more than 
a year Demetrius carried on aggressive operations throughout 
Greece, recapturing Corinth and other cities of the Peloponnesus. 
Peace with Cassander was not declared until 502 (Diod. 20. 111). 
In view of these facts we may conclude that the period of greatest 
distress in Greece which coincides with the period of greatest trou- 
ble for the Corinthians was that which lay between the capture of 
Corinth by Cassander in 304 and its recapture by Demetrius in the 
course of the following year. The marriage of Glycera would accord- 
ingly fall towards the end of “the four years’ war’; the campaign on 
which Polemon was obliged to be absent would be one of those in 
which Demetrius was engaged after his return from the east in 804; 
and the date of composition of the play would fall in the neighbor- 
hood of 302 or 601, after peace had been established.’ This conclusion 
would place the Periceiromene at the beginning of the third and last 
decade of Menander’s activity, when he was forty years of age. 

The original extent of the Periceiromene can be estimated as be- 

>: 

tween 1000 and 1050 lines. As stated above, the order of the ex- 
tant fragments is certain and the amount of text missing between 
them can be estimated with approximate accuracy. The sheet J1734, 
which offers a continuous text, must be the middle sheet of a qua- 
ternion;, Io'* therefore precedes and E** follows). Now In cannot 
be the outer sheet of a quaternion, for E! and Et are the verso of 
the sheet, i.e. the writing 1s against the fibers ?; henee [ὦ must be 

’ Professor W.oS. Ferguson of Harvard University sugeests to me that thre 
expulsion of Cassander from Corinth in 303 was probably attended by banish- 
ments and confiseations of property ; and that it must have been disastrous to 
the commerce of Corinth to have been on the side of Ptolemy between 507 and 
305/4 and of Cassander the following year, while all this time Nutigonus and 
Demetrius were in absolute control of the Nevean, The pliaase s+ Coriuthian 
troubles," he believes, would have needed no commentary tooan Athenian of 
the period S01 to 207, 

Σ ΤΠ quires in the Cairo codex were made up on the same plan as those of 
a parchment codex, recto facing reeto and verso facing verso, This fact was 
observed by Korte, Who also demonstrated the correct order of the fragments 


PERICEIROMENE 147 


the second of the four sheets that made up the quaternion of which 
J is the middle sheet, and one sheet intervened between them. In 
other words, E? is separated from J' by two pages, and J* from 15 
by the same interval. The position of Lp.’ is determined by the fact 
that it overlaps E** by 48 lines. The position of the two Leipzig 
fragments in relation to each other is fixed by the original page- 
numbers which are preserved on them, viz. va and v8 (51 and 52), 
and ga and ξβ (61 and 62).' They were therefore separated by an 
interval of 8 pages or ca. 240 verses. In the Cairo codex, which 
averages ca. 35 lines to a page, Lp.? would begin on the 8th line of 
the fifth page of the quaternion following that which contained E. 
The position of K is determined, relatively to that of Lp.%, firstly 
by its contents: K! obviously contains the beginning of the recogni- 
tion scene which occupies the two pages of Lp.*. K*, which contains 
a portion of a different scene, must therefore have preceded Ια]. 
Secondly, since the verso of K preceded its recto in the quater- 
nion, and since Καὶ preceded by only a short interval Lp.?,which be- 
gan on the fifth page of a quaternion, K must be from the second 
sheet of that quaternion, 1.6. its third and fourth pages. 

We have no external criteria by which we can estimate the in- 
terval which separated Lp.? from the Oxyrhynchus fragment, but 
must depend upon certain general considerations as to the extent 
of the Periceiromene and of the play which preeeded it in the 
Leipzig manuscript. A play of 1000 lines would fill 5. pages of a 
manuscript which has 30 lines to the page, 20 lines being allowed 
for the title, hypothesis, and east of characters (which fill 19 lines 
in the Hero). This would leave 17 pages (61 --- 8.1) or 510 lines for 
the Periceiromene down to Lp.'. Now from the beginning of 15] 
to Lp.', if we estimate lost pages at 85 lines, we have ob lines. 
leaving 166 lines for the lost first part of the Periceiromene. ‘This 
would fill 4 pages plus ca. 26 lines of the Cairo manuseript. Since 
the Periceiromene doubtless began at the top of a page. we may 
of this play. The estimates given below are in the main similar to dis, Berd. 
siichs. Gesell, 1908, pp. 174 tt. 

1These numbers were later altered to v8, vy and &3, &). respectively. The 


four Leipzig pages contain 30 verses each except the second. which contains ol, 
2 12 and J1234 contain 217 lines, the four lost: pages 110 Tes: deduct the 


13 lines of Lp.) which extend back of BY. 


148 MENANDER 


disregard the extra 26 lines and consider that ca. 120 lines of text 
and 20 lines of preliminary matter preceded E'. The last line of 
the second Leipzig fragment would in that case be about the 825th 
of the play (120 + 344 + 61 + 240 + 60). The two coluinns of the 
Oxyrhynchus fragment contain 102 lines. If we accept the analogy 
of the Heauton, which closes in 8 lines after Chremes has announced 
his intention of marrying Clinia to the daughter of Phanocrates, 
10 lines beyond the Oxyrhynchus fragment would complete the 
Periceiromene. By assuming, therefore, an interval of ca. 100 lines 
between the end of Lp.? and the first column of the Oxyrhynchus 
fragment, we have a play of ca. 1037 lines (825 + 100 + 102 + 10). 
This result is satisfactory from the point of view of the dramatic 
economy of the play, so far as we can judge. The first part of the 
speech of Agnoia and the two or three initial scenes would hardly 
have required more than 120 lines, and the scenes which we need 
to assume between the end of the recognition scene in Lp.? and the 
Doris-Polemon scene in the second Oxyrhynehus column would not 
have required more than 151 lines. 

The position of the several portions of text in the three quater- 
nions over which the Periceiromene extended is indicated in the 
following table. The place assigned to the Oxyrhynchus fragment 
is only approximate, as stated above. 


QUATERNION X QUATERNION Y ΕΝ COD 
Quat. page Pap. page Quat. page Pap. page Quat. page Pap. page 

] ] lost 1 lost 

zy 2 lost lost 

3 3 Js 5 Κρ TES eee 

1 ! | Br | Ke Gast 19 v4 ἢ 
Fs) on lost ) Leyte Gly teu) 
6 6 lost, 6 ay De (AIRS Bene PAV) 
7 i at 7 lost 

s Ss .} δ lost 

4) η ale Η να ἡ τὰν ἢ 
10 10 Af 10 ON 
1] 1] lost 1] ONS ESE Ne Eta leit 
12 Ie age velit eS ae) ibe CO Nooo elaine 22 TaN acces) 
13 1: 1: ἘΠ} ΠΣ] 1 
14 1} ΕΜ etre 11 


(aes tales) 
le lost les lost I 
16 Jost 16 lost 1 


a 7 » 
ey ee 
es 


πόσων 
tices 2 ὡ- 


.᾿. 





“MEPIKEIPOMENH MENANAPOT 


TA TOY ΔΡΆΜΑΤΟΣ HPOSOMA 


Πολέμων Δᾶος 
Γλυκέρα Hatacxos 
Σωσίας Μοσχίων 
Δωρίς “A Bpotovov 
"Ayvou θεός Μυρρίνη 


~ a | 
Χορὸς συμποτῶν 
pos συμ 


150 


TEPIKETPOMENH MENANAPOT 


Scene: A street in Corinth, before the houses of Polemon and Pataecus. The 
street leads on one side to the market-place in the city, on the other to 
the country. 

AGT it 

POLEMON, GLYCERA 

The initial scenes, now lost (about 120 verses), created the situation in the 
household of Polemon which remained unchanged until near the end of the 
play, — Glycera living as a refugee in a neighbor's house, Polemon endeav- 
oring by every means to regain her. One of the first scenes was an interview 
between these two, ending in a rupture which seemed irreparable. The 
evening before (vv. 33, 180), after Polemon had witnessed the conduct of 
Glycera with Moschion, he had departed in violent anger to a place in the 
country, promising to decide at a later time upon his course of action (v.39). 
The night he had spent in an effort to drown his sorrow (v. 869). The next 
morning he had returned to his house, and, in a fit of jealous rage, lad 
shorn the hair from the head of Glycera with his sword, It is after this 
outrage has been committed that the two appear before the house and en- 
gage in an angry dialogue, in which Glycera protests in vain her innocence of 
wrong-doing. At the close of the scene Polemon returns to the country. 

To this scene probably belongs the following quotation : 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 
Γλυκέρα. τί κλάεις : ὀμνύω σοι τὸν Δία no K. 
τὸν Ὀλύμπιον καὶ τὴν ᾿Αθηνᾶν. φιλτάτη. --- 

ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


ὀμωμοκὼς καὶ πρότερον ἤδη πολλάκις. 


On the scene of the play see notes 
on vv. 244, 892. 

Fr. 569. Polemon is already sorry 
for his brutal exhibition of jealousy 
and begins to swear to his undying 
affection for Glycera; but such pro- 
testations, which have regularly fol- 


lowed his outbursts of passion, will ne 
longer avail with her The lines are 
quoted by Priscian, but Without the 
title of the play. to illustrate the At 
tie ἀκα πὸ ὄμνυμι θεούς, Without μή or wa 
Cf. Men. Colax 44(0%x. Paps TE, 409) 


ὀμνύω τὸν ἥλιον. - πολλάκις : Aleiplron 


GLYCERA, Doris 


MENANAPOY 


With the help of her maid, Doris, Glycera carries out her plan of leaving Pol- 


emon’s house. 


Myrrhina, the wife of her next-door neighbor, Pataecus, 


offers to give her shelter (vv. 148, 282). ‘They hastily move thither, taking 
with them the necessary personal effects. 


MIsAPPREHENSION 


The goddess Misapprehension appears and tells the story of the twin infants 
who had been exposed many years ago by their parent and discovered by 
a poor old woman. The first few lines of the narrative are lost ; the dis- 
position which the woman made of the boy and the girl is now disclosed : 


ATNOIA 


le , 72 Ν N , » ΄ὔ ss | 
τούτων θέλει TO μὲν τρέφειν. ἔχειν τέκνον 


ι ᾿αὐτὴ προθυμηθεῖσα θῆλυ. τὸ δ᾽ ἕτερον 


El, quat.y, p.3 


Fe ΝΟ Lal , XN > , 
γυναικι δοῦναι πλουσίᾳ ΤῊΝ OLKLAV 


r , a iz , , 
TAUTYV KATOLKOVO)), δεομένῃ παιδίου. 


makes use of this thought in his imag- 
inary letter of Menander to Glycera 
(Ep. 2.3. 1 = 4.15. 1 Sch.) éye pa ras 
᾿Ελευσινίας θεάς, μὰ τὰ μυστήρια αὐτῶν, & 
σοι καὶ ἐναντίον ἐκείνων ὥμοσα πολλάκις, 
Τ᾽λυκέρα, μόνος μόνῃ, κτὲ. 

1 ἢν After the problem which the 
play is to treat has been presented in 
the introductory scenes, through the 
action of its characters, the exposition 
proper is committed to an allegorical 
figure, who explains the antecedents 
of the principal characters in the plot 
and the motives which are at play, 
and gives an intimation as to the out- 
come. The exposition is managed in 
the same way inthe Heroand in the Cis- 
tellaria of Plautus, where Auxilium 
deus appears after the initial scenes ; 
there the 
slave Palaestrio takes the place of a 


also in the Miles, though 
πρόσωπον προτατικόν. Misapprehension 


probably introduces herself ἢ the 


opening lines of her speech (ef. v.21) 


and gives the scene of the action, 
since it is not Athens. See note on the 
Hero’s speech, p. 20, and ef. Plaut. Cist. 
154 nam mihist Auxilio nomen, 
Aul. 2 ego Lar sum familiaris, 
Mil. 8&8 hoe oppidum 


The speech of Misapprehension is nota- 


EK phesust. 


ble for the number of participles em- 
ployed and the loose way in which they 
are strung together, sometimes obseur- 
ing the thought; cf. Mark 16. 9-20, 

1. The subj. is ἡ γραῦς (see v. 6), 
the woman who found the infants; 
the time is immediately after their dis- 
covery, θῆλυ; a daughter, 

2. γυναικί: Myrrhina, She seems 
to have Jed her first husband, and 
later her second husband Pataeeus, 
to believe that it) was her own child. 
Afterwards, as it seems, the boy was 
adopted by Pataecus, see v. 708, 

4. ἐτῶν τινων : some ciehteen years 
have passed; the children are now 


CRORE tO ie Shoe plea Q0 es apie azul, 


ILEPIKEIPOMENH 


153 


r τ δὲ γα 9 > 7 , | ot ee) 
TOLEL O€ TOUT. εγγεένομεέενων ὃ ετων τινων 


r Ν ae) v2 Ἂς “ lal “ 
5 καιτου πολέμου και των Κορινθιακῶν κακων 


ἘΠ a δοὴ , 4 a > ΄ ΄ 
αὐξανομένων, ἡ γραῦς ἀπορουμένη σφόδρα, 
τεθραμμένης τῆς παιδός, ἣν νῦν εἴδετε 


ὑμεῖς, ἐραστοῦ γενομένου τε τοῦ σφοδροῦ 


’ Ta. ’ fs 
TOUTOV VEAVLO KOU, γένει Κορινθίου 


10 ὄντος, δίδωσι τὴν κόρην ὡς θυγατέρα 


δ΄ ας » »” φ A Ν 
QUTNS ἐεχειν. ἤδη ὃ ἀπειρηκνια και 


προορωμένη τοῦ ζὴν καταστροφήν τινα 


« ee lal 9 » Ν Ψ 
αὐτῇ παρουσαν. οὐκ ἐκρυψε τὴν τύχην, 


V4 ἣν Ν Ἂς 4 > « > 4 
λέγει δὲ προς Τὴν μειραχ ως ἀνείλετο 


> , 3 @ Υ, χὰ 3. 9 
15 αντήν. EV OLS TE σπαργάνοις δίδωσ αμα: 


τὸν ἀγνοούμενόν T ἀδελφὸν τῇ φύσει 


φράζει. προνοουμένη τι τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων. 


εἴ ποτε δεηθείη βοηθείας τινός. 


5. τοῦ πολέμου : probably the ** four 
years’ war”? between Cassander and 
Antigonus, 3806-303 B.c. See above, 
p. 145. Since the union of Glycera and 
Polemon some months, probably the 
period of a campaign, are supposed to 
have elapsed; see on vy. 240, 377, 385. 

7. ἣν νῦν εἴδετε: i.e. in one of the 
openingscenes. For similar references 
in the exposition cf. Plaut. Cist. 170 ut 
eampse vos audistis 
Mil. 88 illest 
erus qui hine ad forum abiit. 


confite- 
ene. miles meus 
8. ἐραστοῦ: sc. αὐτῆς. - re: the un- 
usual position is due to the desire to 
connect the two participial clauses con- 
taining τεθραμμένης and γενομένου. --- 
σφοδροῦ : impetuous. The poet empha- 
sizes this quality in the hero of the 
play, cf. v. 898. See on FE. 899. 
9. τούτου νεανίσκου: Polemon. Both 
the dem. and the reference in v. 244 
show that he appeared in the first act. 


10. δίδωσι: sc. αὐτῷ. This was done 
with the girl’s approval, ef. v. 367. 

11. ἔχειν : not a legal marriage, for 
the girl was dowerless and her parent- 
age uncertain,— ἀπειρηκνῖα: intr., worn 
out by age, cf. Arist. Pol. 1829.4 33 τοὺς 
διὰ χρόνον ἀπειρηκότας, of citizens no 
longer in physical vigor. 

12. καταστροφήν: cf. Soph. O.C. 
101 ff. ἀλλά μοι, θεαί, βίου... 


Lod . a 
σιν ἤδη καὶ καταστροφήν τινα. 


δότε πέρα- 
13. τὴν τύχην: se. τῶν τέκνων 
15. ἐν οἷς, κτέ. : brachylogy for τὰ 
σπάργανα ἐν οἷς ἀνείλετο ἅμα δίδωσιν. 
The girl carefully preserved the cloth- 
ing ina chest, as we shall see. 

16. τῇ φύσει: he now belonged to 
another family by adoption, θέσει: ef. 
oe 

17. τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων : in view of the 
informal nature of the bond by which 
the irl was attached to the soldier, as 


explained inv. 24. 


154 


MENANAPOY 


ε a a » Sand A , 
Opwoa TOUTOV OVT αναγκαιον μονον 


"0 αὐτῇ. φυλακήν τε λαμβάνουσα μή ποτε 


3-25: , N ” 9 “ , 
du ἐμέ τι τὴν Ayvovav αὐτοῖς συμπέσῃ 


> , A Ν , δ ΤΩΝ 
ακουσιον. πλουτοῦντα και μεθύοντ αει 


Qa se > argu \ , 
ορωσ EKELVOV, εὐτρετη) δὲ και νεαν 


ταύτην, βέβαιον᾽ δ᾽ οὐθὲν ᾧ κατελείπετο. 


is 
wt 


7 \ > > ΄ ἃ Ν ἊΝ hn 
αὐτὴ LEV ουν ἀπέθανεν O δὲ ΤῊΝ οἰκιαν 


ἐπρίατο ταύτην ὁ στρατιώτης οὐ πάλαι. 


ἐν γειτόνων δ᾽ οἰκοῦσα τἀδελφοῦ, τὸ μὲν 


~ > > Lino’ A Ὁ ΓΦ} δ᾽ >} A ix. 
πράγμ οὐ MELNVUK , OVO ἐκεῖνον βούλεται, 


> an ,ὔ > ἈΝ 
εἶναι δοκοῦντα λαμπρόν, εἰς μεταλλαγὴν 


"0 ἀγαγεῖν, ὄνασθαι δ᾽ ὧν δέδωκεν ἡ τύχη. 


> Ν ᾿ , 2, 5S: A me: > HL S1 “ , 
ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου δ᾽ ὀφθεῖσ᾽ ὑπ αὐτοῦ, --- θρασυτέρου. 


ὥσπερ προείρηκ᾽. ὄντος, ἐπιμελῶς T ἀεὶ 


r oY a | la 5 ἣν \ ’ o » 3— δ. rg 
φοιτῶντος ἐπὶ τὴν οἰκίαν.-- ετυχ ἑσπέρας 


rin ial , , € Pea b Ue aN A , 
πέμπουσα ποι θεράπαιναν" ως ὃ ETL TALS θύραις 


19. τοῦτον: her brother. 

22. ἀκούσιον: without intent. A pos- 
sible erotic attachment is thought of ; 
the sister’s knowledge will now pre- 
vent it. μεθύοντ᾽ del: given to drink. 

24. βέβαιον οὐθὲν : wtlerly wistuble, 
referring rather to the absence of a 
legal union than to the soldiers charac- 
ter, Const. (τοῦτον) ᾧ κατελείπετο (ὄντα) 
οὐθὲν βέβαιον. Forthe neuter cf. v. 67 οὐ- 
δὲν πιστόν. and on οὐθέν see on FE, 60, 

26. ἐπρίατο: an indication of the 
scene of the plays as a Corinthian, 
Polemon would have the right to own 
real estate only in Corinth, See above, 
p. 144. 

27. ἐν γειτόνων : sc. οἴκῳ, A COMMON 
ellipsis with the poss. gen. im preposi- 
tional plorases with eds and ἐν, e.e. εἰς 
“Acdov, ἐν κιθαριστοῦ, ete. Dependent 


Upon γειτύνων in this idiom may be 


either the gen., as τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ here, or 
thedat. asin Antiph. 212 K. ἐν γειτόνων 
αὐτῷ κατοικούσης. 

29. μεταλλαγήν: sc. τῆς τύχης. 1ΠῚ5 
adoptive mother had guarded so well 
the secret of his birth that no one, ex- 
cept perhaps his adoptive father, sus- 
peeted that he was not her son by blood, 

30. ὄνασθαι : const. With ἐκεῖνον Bov- 
λεται. The position of ἐκεῖνον before 
βούλεται facilitates the use of the pron, 
both as obj. of ἀγαγεῖν and as subj. of 
ὄνασθαι. 

81, ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου 
et, 1896: 

32. προείρηκα: cf. v.22; but per- 


amo (€x)TUXNS, 


haps the reference is to an carier por- 
tion of this speech, 

Sof ἑσπέρας : list evening. 

84. ἐπὶ ταῖς θύραις: Cilycera had ac- 
companicd her maid Doris to the door, 


ITIEPIKEIPOMENH 


155 


γ ἢ ΦΊΝΝ , WAC Ν 
35 αὐτὴν γενομένην εἶδεν, εὐθὺς προσδραμὼν 


ἐφίλει, περιέβαλλ᾽ - 7 δὲ τῷ προειδέναι" 


E?, φυδί. Υ, p.4 


ἀδελφὸν ὄντ᾽ οὐκ ἔφυγε. προσιὼν δ᾽ arepos’ 


ΣΤ. Ν Ν > 3 rele Ἔν r Ca 
ορᾳ. τα λοιπὰ ὃ αυτος ευροιτ αν TLS Ev’ 


a \ ¥ > > Ν ν Ν Ν Us AT 
O MEV WKXET εἰπὼν OTL κατα σχολὴν κρινει 


40 αὐτὴν τί βούλεθ᾽,᾿ ἣ δ᾽ ἐδάκρν᾽ ἑστῶσα καὶ 


ὠδύρεθ᾽ ὅτι ταῦτ᾽ οὐκ ἐλευθέρως ποεῖν 


¥ lane) , 20-5 , 
ἔξεστιν αὐτῇ. πάντα δ᾽ ἐξεκάετο 


rn + nw , > > fp 79 
ταῦθ᾽ ἕνεκα Tov μέλλοντος εἰς ὀργὴν θ᾽ ἵνα 


- CJT pe tole we ee 5 ΦΙΡ ‘ > > , 
οὗτος adiKotT ,— ἐγὼ yap ἦγον ov φύσει 


“ » lal > Ν ϑὺν. ΨΚ ἃ 
45 τοιοῦτον ὄντα τοῦτον, ἀρχὴν δ᾽ ἵνα λάβοι 


‘\ , 27 lias AN: 
μηνύσεως τὰ λοιπα. ---- τούς θ᾽ αὑτῶν ποτε 


precisely as she does in ν. 61, where 
the spectators catch a glimpse of her. 
— The Cairo MS. has five anapaests 
contained in a word that begins in the 
third foot and overlaps the fourth: FE. 
163,308, P 34, 860, 8.427. Six instances 
in the fragments. White, p. 151. 

36. ἐφίλει, περιέβαλλε: note the de- 
scriptive imperfects following ingres- 
sive aorists; see Gildersleeve §§ 207, 
211. --- τῷ προειδέναι -- διὰ τὸ προειδέναι. 

37. προσιών: he has just returned 
from a protracted absence, doubtless 
a campaign; see on vv. 377, 62, 240. 

38. τὰ λοιπά: what happened next, 
i.e. the confusion of Pamphila and the 
jealous rage of Polemon. --- αὐτὸς, xré.: 
one might discover very well by himself, 
1,6. it was just what one would have 
expected and there is really no need 
of narrating it. For the mid. evpocro cf. 
Eur, Suppl. 1075, Soph. ΕἸ. 625. 

39. ὃ pév: Polemon. — κρινεῖ = dva- 
κρινεῖ (V. 868), question, often in poetry, 
ef. Soph. Trach. 195 αὐτὸν Mn\eds ἅπας 
λεὼς κρίνει and Jebb’s note. — The ana- 
paest contained in three words is not 


common in Menander; in the first foot 
only here and in S. 466. 

40. τί: for ὅ τι. See on E. 280 and 
cf. Men. Georg., fr. Gen., v. 67 τοῦ μει- 
ρακίου Ta πράγματ᾽ ἀνέκρινεν, τίνα ἐστί. 

41. ταῦτα: φιλεῖσθαι καὶ περιβάλλε- 
σθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ. - ἐλευθέρως : with- 
out restraint, cf. Soph. El. 1300 τότε 
χαίρειν παρέσται καὶ γελᾶν ἐλευθέρως. 

43. τοῦ μέλλοντος : the subsequent 
issue of the plot, further explained by 
the two final clauses iva ἀφίκοιτο and 
(iva) εὕροιεν. The goddess reveals the 
poet’s artifice. — re: correlative with 
τε in v. 46. 

44. οὗτος : Polemon. — ἦγον : Le. 
ὦστε ὀργίσασθαι. Often of divine guid- 
ance, e.g. Soph. Ant. 623 ὅτῳ φρένας θεὸς 
ἄγει πρὸς ἄταν. 

45. τοιοῦτον : asthe spectators have 
seen him, — beside himself with jeal- 
ous rage. —d6vTa: CONCESSIVe. 

46. μηνύσεως : Const. With ἀρχήν. 
that 
revealed, events, a rather vague term 


- τὰ λοιπά: all remains to be 


where we might have expected the 


more definite τὰ κρυπτά. 


156 


MENANAPOY 


ν ν > > SS , {2 
ευροιεν. WOT , €lb TOUT ἐδυσχέραινέ τις 


3 ᾽ Jigs! / / th 
ἀτιμίαν τ᾽ ἐνόμισε. μεταθέσθω πάλιν. 


ἈΝ \ a Ss A Ν > > ‘\ CRS, 
διὰ yop θεοῦ Καὶ TO Κακον ELS ἀγαθὸν ῥέπει 


30 γιγνόμενον. ἔρρωσθ'. εὐμενεῖς τε γενόμενοι 


e Am ’ὔ Ἂς Ἂν ‘\ ve 
ἡμῖν. θεαταί, καὶ Ta λοιπὰ σῴζετε. 
c 


Exit Misapprehension. 


Enter Sosias from the country. He begins to stroll 


up and down before the two houses. 


ACT II 


ὄπιθεν ΘΠ 8 
ΣΩΏΣΙΑΣ 
{3 \ € “ > , \ A 
ὁ σοβαρὸς ἡμῖν ἀρτίως Kal πολεμικός, 
A A » 
ὁ τὰς γυναῖκας οὐκ ἐῶν ἔχειν τρίχας. 


47. εὕροιεν : the brother and sister. 
- τοῦτο: Polemon’s brutal treatment 
of Glycera. — ἐδυσχέραινε: had a feel- 
ing of disgust at. The impf. is properly 
ἐνόμισε, 


distinguished from the 


which is ingressive. But the poet may 


aor, 


have written the aor., ἐδυσχέρανε, con- 
ceived disgust, 

48. μεταθέσθω: sc. τὴν δόξαν (i.e. ἃ 
ἐνόμισε); οἷ. Dem, 18. 229 μεταθέσθαι 
ταύτην τὴν δόξαν ἀξιῶν. “The vb. is often 
used absolutely. ἂν Plat. Rep. 354 ἀλλὰ 
μεταθώμεθα" κινδυνεύομεν yap οὐκ ὀρθῶς 
. θέσθαι. The tigure involved is de- 
rived from the game of draughts, πετ- 
τοί. ef. Plat. Mor, ΤΌ δ᾽ πεττῶν δίκην 
δεῦρο κἀκεῖ τὰς κοινὰς ἐννοίας μετατιθείς. 

50. γιγνόμενον: const. Ww. τὸ κακὸν, 
erenas if comes into being. The thought 
of evil turning inte good is a comamon- 
placevef. Eur. Hel. G44 τὸ κακὸν ἀγαθόν 
and Men.(2) 1084 IN. καὶ τὸ κακὸν ἀγαθοῦ 
αίγνεται παραίτιον. The assertion of a 
vod’s responsibility for this is appro- 
priately placed In the mouth of a god, 

γενόμενοι: proving yourselves, 


D1. Seeon E672 


Menanderheread 


dresses the spectators at the end of the 
exposition, as Aristophanes in his early 
plays takes them into his contidence at 
the beginning of it (Hy. 36, Vesp. 54, 
Pac.50, Av.30), See Leo, Plaut. Forseh., 
ues leh 


poet (ἡμῖν) asa competitor for the prize 


The plea for favor toward the 


was generally reserved inthe Old Com- 
edy for the parabasis. τὰ λοιπά : the 
rest of the play. —wotere: prosper. Ct. 
Plant. Roen. 128 Vinny wee: 

52 ff. The spectators recognize the 
speaker as Sosias, the body-servant 
of Polemon, without an introduction, 
probably because he had appeared with 
his master in the first scene. In his 
dress, talk, and bearing Sosias reflects 
the life of the camp. He las not heen 
an idle bystander at his master’s potia- 
V. ods, 


52. σοβαρός: Mustering, detined by 


talons ucts 


Photiusas meaning λαμπρός, ἐπαιρόμενος. 
τολμηρός. αὐθάδης. ἔξω τοῦ δέοντος φερό- 
μενος (the meaning here), Agathias in 
Anth. Pal. 


note) refers to the Polemonof this play 


5.278 (quoted above, p. 14, 


ax σοβαρός. In Aristophon 11. 4 Kh. eros 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 


, , eo. ὕὔ 
κλαει κατακλινείς. κατέλιπον ποούμενον 


» A »ν Ν 
δῦ αριστον αὐτοῖς αρτι. και συνηγμένοι 


> eee > ε ΄) ἮΝ , 
εις TAVTOV εἰσιν OL συνήθεις. TOU φέρειν 


» ‘ AY A ea > »Ἤ 79 
αυτον TO πραγμα βᾷον. ουκ EX @vV ὃ οπως 


> Git, we ΄ ee) ΄ ΄, 
τανταῦθ QaKOUO 7?) γίιγνομεν 5 ἐκπέπομφέ με 


«ε ΄ ry 4 3) ae , SSNS Ch 
ιματιον OLO OVT ἐξεπίτηδες. οὐδὲ εν 


00 δεόμενος ἀλλ᾽ ἢ περιπατεῖν με βούλεται. 


Enter Doris from the house of Pataecus. 


She calls back to her mistress within 


the house. She does not see Sosias, who stands at one side. 


is said tohave been cast out fromamong 
the gods as θρασὺς καὶ coBapds. — ἡμῖν: 
ethical dat., this fellow of ours, an in- 
dication that Polemon has already been 
seen by the spectators. — ἀρτίως : sc. 
wv; const. with both σοβαρός and 
πολεμικός. 

53. ὁ τὰς γυναῖκας, κτέ.: fhe man 
that won't permit women to have hair, 
a comic generalization, cf. 1. 904. So- 
sias later twits Polemon to his face for 
this ungallant act, v. 248 and note. By 
such references the poct justifies the 
title of his play. 

54. κατακλινείς : ic. on the ground. 
The passage is so interpreted by Phi- 
lostratus in the reminiscence Ep. 16 
κλάει γοῦν καταπεσὼν Kal μεταγιγνώσκει 
τῷ φόνῳ τῶν τριχῶν. ΤΟΪΤΟΊ ΟἹ is spend- 
ing his time at ἃ place in the suburbs, 
cf. ἐν ἀγρῷ, v. 244. 

55. αὐτοῖς: i.c. the establishment, ef. 
ν. 422, As αὐτός in the mouth of a sery- 
ant means ‘master’? so the pl. em- 
braces the whole familia of the master, 
- ἄρτι: constr. with κατέλιπον. -- συνη- 
γμένοι : see on KE, 195, 

56. τοῦ φέρειν : hoping hed bear. On 
the const. see on Ti. 807. 

58. τἀνταῦθα: ie. in his 
where he had left Glyeera, 

59. οἴσοντα: fo fefeh. Contrast φέ- 


αὐτὸν ix subj. 


house, 


povra V. 234, — ἐξεπίτηδες : deliberately, 
cf. KE. 828, Dem. 19. 182 ef δὲ mpecBev- 
τὴς ὧν (Aeschines) ἐπὶ χρήμασιν ἐξεπί- 
τηδες ἠπάτηκεν ὑμᾶς, Plaut. Poen. 7&8 
consulto hoe factumst, mihi ut 
insidiae fierent. — Observe the 
anapaest in the fourth foot, contained 
ina word which overlaps both the pre- 
ceding and the following feet; also in 
i828, 808. ΑΚ ΠΤ ν. a2. 

60. ἀλλ᾽ ἤ: since the finite vb. βού- 
Nerae follows, it is better to read here 
add(a) ἢ than ἄλλ(ο) 7, nof really want- 
ing anything, eccept that he wishes me 
We might have had 


. ΟῚ a » ~ 
either δεόμενος οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ με περιπατεῖν, 


to be on the go. 


OV δεόμενος οὐδέν, ἀλλὰ με περιπατεῖν 


βουλόμενος. When the phrase has the 
foree of a conj.. Or ἄλλος (ἕτερος) pre- 
cedes, we should probably read ἀλλ᾽ 7, 
πο NCI OC Cm zs 


ιοἱ παρέσχε τὰ ἑαυτοῦ διοικεῖν ἀλλ᾽ ἡ (ew- 
! pean 


133 οὔτε ἄλλος πώποτέ 


cept that) σὺ νυνὶ ἐθέλεις παρέχειν. Plat. 
@NN gone: 


cept) τὸ ἄριστον. Init when οὐδείς alone 


Phaedo O71 οὐδὲ €@XNO. . . 


precedes and there is no conjunctive 
force, editors cenerally read ἄλλ᾽ 7, ον αι 
Plat. Apol. 200 d¢ οὐδὲν ἄλλ᾽ ἢ διὰ σοφίαν 
τινα. ἀλλ᾽ ἡ (— πλήν OY πλήν OTL) SCOINS 
to be the result οὐ a fusion of two con- 
. ἀλλά anid 


Kithner-Gerth 


structions, V1z. otdév @NXNO. . 


οὐδὲν TANNOY 2 soi wee 


158 MENANAPOY 
Sc. 2. Sostas, Dorts 
AQPIZ 


\ CA 35 Ἂν 
ἐγὼ προσεστῶσ ᾿ ὄψομαι. κεκτημένη. 


ΣΏΣΙΑΣ (aside) 


ἡ Δωρίς. οἵα γέγονεν, ὡς δ᾽ ἐρρωμένη. 


lol , > « 3 Ν 
ζῶσιν τρόπον τιν΄. ὡς ἐμοὶ καταφαίνεται, 


αὗται. πορεύσομαι δέ. 


. 


Exit to the country. 


ΔΩΡῚΣ (approaching Polemon’s house) 


κόψω τὴν θύραν. 


Anm, ἢ. --- περιπατεῖν: the 


§ 534. 6, 
original meaning walk up and down, 
promenade, has by this time become 
weakened in colloquial speech to nearly 
take a walk, be on the go, like βαδίζειν. 
Hee. 435, 


where Parmeno grumbles at his mas- 


Cf. the complaint in ‘Ter. 


ter for devising errands ut me am- 
bulando rumperet. 

61. Glycera accompanies her maid 
to the door and is probably scen fora 
moment by the spectators, just as Mos- 
chion had seen her the evening before 
(v. 34). The device is frequently em- 
ployed in the New Comedy, generally 
as the simplest means of motivating the 
appearance of a servant, and is used 
ina novel manner in the Epitrepontes 
(ActIV, se. 6, p.105) in connection with 
the ἀναγνώρισις. The errand of Doris 
is not fully explained here, but doubt- 
less was accounted for in the latter 
part of the scene, when she came out 
of the house of Polemon, She was prob- 
ably sent there to feteh the chest (vv. 
622,633), which Glycera had forgotten 
in her hasty departure from Polemon’s 
house, — κεκτημένη : see on TL. τὶ 
62. ἡ Awpis: exelamatory nom..ah, 


Doris! Similaris the use of the dom, 


860K. 


with the art. in calls and commands, 
c.g. Aristoph. Ach. 54 οἱ τοξόται police ! 
Av. 665 ἡ Πρόκνη, ἔκβαινε, Men. 311K, 
ἐπίθες τὸ πῦρ, ἡ ζάκορος.- ola γέγονεν: 
what a fine woman she has become! So- 
sias has not seen Doris for some time. 
He has recently been abroad with his 
master, as we learn from vv. 240, 377. 
They had returned the night before. 
63. ζῶσιν. 


are leading a life, so to speak, it’s clear 


avtrat: these women 


' 


tome! Sosias judges by the buxom ap- 


pearance of Doris. For this pregnant 
use of (ἣν ef. Antiph. 217.8 Adyes wa- 
γειρον ζῶντα he suhigh liver, your cook! 
Men. 165K. ζῶσιν δ᾽ (really live) οἷς ἐστιν 
Bios (substance), the epitaph in’ Cass. 
Dio 09.109. Σίμιλες ἐνταῦθα κεῖται. βιοὺς μὲν 
ἘΠ τς φησα τ δὲ “emer Cae Millay Avot 
το τῶν Orlin ae) oil ον ΜΝ Ὁ τ ΜΠ δὶ 
Lesbia, atque amemus. — τρόπον 
τινά : in a fushion, quodamimodo, 
qualifving ζῶσιν, a word used ina spe- 
clalsense. Sce ony, 228 and IT. 20. Cf. 
ws ἔπος εἰπεῖν. Ut ita dicam., 

64. πορεύσομαι: cf. vy. 178, 1ἡ. 642. 
Sosias as seen ecnouch to report to his 
master, the important fact being that 
Gliycera has taken refuge in the house of 
her neighbor. —Képe: secon 1.660, 865, 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 


159 


Ἂς > Ν Ν ΓΝ > ¥ ἃ 
65 οὐδεὶς γαρ αυτων ἐστιν ἔξω. δυστυχὴς 


ν , » ¥ 4 
ἥτις στρατιώτην ἔλαβεν ἄνδρα: παράνομοι 


id 50» , Gy ΄ 
ATAVTES, οὐδὲν πιστόν. ὦ ΚεΚΤΉμενη: 


ε » ’ὔὕ 
ὡς ἄδικα πάσχεις. 


Knocking again at the door. 


παῖδες. --- εὐφρανθήσεται 


κλαοῦσαν αὐτὴν πυθόμενος νῦν τοῦτο γὰρ 


τὸ ἐβούλετ᾽ αὐτός. 


A slave opens to her. 


΄ὔ Ὧ 4 
παιδίον, κέλευέ μοι 
She gives a command to the slave, and later enters the house. 


[A lacuna of ca. 70 verses to J!.] 


Doris enters from the house of Polemon. She is joined by Davus, who comes 
from the city. 


Doris, Davus 


Davus learns that Glycera has sought shelter in the house of his master, and 


assumes that Moschion’s infatuation for her is reciprocated. — ‘Toward the 
end of the scene a crowd of revelers is seen approaching. 


65. αὐτῶν: of Polemon’s household. 
---ἔξω: i.e. in front of the house. 

67. οὐδὲν πιστόν: see on v. 24 and 
ef. the favorite phrase οὐδὲν ὑγιές, e.g. 
Aristoph. Thesm, 394 τὰς οὐδὲν ὑγιές, τὰς 
μέγ᾽ ἀνδράσιν κακόν. The 
calls the characterization of the Kgyp- 
tians in Theocr. 15, 49. 

To a later part of this scene may 


passage re- 


moe 


belong Men. 7321K., which Robertwould 
assign to this play: κομψὸς στρατιώτης, 
οὐδ᾽ ἂν ef πλάττοι θεός, οὐδεὶς γένοιτ᾽ ἄν, 
Where κομψός refined suggests by con- 
trast the adj. θρασύς. 

68. παῖδες: cf. KH. 864, Men. Colax 
83 (Ox. Pap. II. 409). — εὐφρανθήσε- 
ταῖς: subj. Polemon. Doris is evidently 
prepared to find himat home ; from her 
he will learn that Glycera is weeping. 
But she soon discovers that he has 
not returned since his interview with 
Glycera. 

70. κέλευέ pou: she probably asks 
for Polemon, When she learns that he 


is not at home, she enters the house to 
do the errand on which she has been 
sent. While Doris is in the house it is 
probable that Pataecus, who later takes 
an important part in the action, is pres- 
ent during a brief scene. As a friend 
of Polemonandadoptive fatherof Mos- 
chion he is deeply concerned with the 
incident of the night before, Which has 
caused bitterenmity between these two. 
When he enters his house he learns 
that his wife has offered protection to 
Glycera. 

When Doris comes out of Polemon's 
house she falls in with Davus. She miay 
have announced his arrival with the 
line which has been preserved from an 
unknowncomedy, froadesp, 287 In. Saos 
πάρεστι: τί ποτ᾽ ἀπαγγελῶν dja: Davis 
has been in the city with his master, 
Moschion, who has been keeping care- 
fully out of Polemon’s way since he was 
eaucht kissing Glyeera, When Diayvus 


learns that Glyeera has come over to 


160 


MENANAPOY 


AAOS 


παῖδες. μεθύοντα μειράκια προσέρχεται 


Knocking at the door of Pataecus’ house. 


41, quat. y, p.7 


πάμπολλ᾽. ἐπαινῶ διαφόρως κεκτημένην. 


¥ GPa igi eal 5, eh \ , 
€LO WwW προθύμως ειἰσαγέι τὴν μειρακα. 


τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι μήτηρ. O τρόφιμος ζητητέος. 


[315] 


ΔΩΡΙΣ 


re FAT Tee ss » XN es. my , > , 
Ws €AK αὑτὸς αὐτὸν τὴν TAXLOTHY ἐνθάδε. 


their house he at once puts ἃ false con- 
struction upon her action. 

141. waiSes: probably a eall to the 
servants within, following a command 
toopen, e.g. ἀνοιξέτω τις. as inv. 68 and 
Ε. 804. The speaker cannot be made 
out with certainty, but it is probably 
Davus, since he refers to Myrrhina as 
his mistress and to Moschion as his 
master, It is on this supposition that 
προθύμως (Or πρὸς ἡμᾶς) has been adopted 
inv. 143 for πρὸς tuas. — μεθύοντα pet- 
paktar (Chali, see eit Nios, aaa. 
προσέρχεται : Shows that the crowd ap- 
It is the 
κῶμος, as in the Epitrepontes, which 


proaches through the street. 


appears at the intermissions between 
aets and cives the choral entertain- 
ment. The young men are probably the 
hoon companions (v.96) of Polemon, 


142. διαφόρως: of. F.335.— 


μένην: the omission of the art. with a 


κεκτη- 


noun of relationship virtually makes 
the noun a proper noun. Such omis- 
sion is hot uncommon in the poets in 
contexts where the person whose rela- 
tionship is indicated is readily recog. 
nized. The usage is most natural where 
the relation sustained is) toward. the 
speaker himself, as here. ** Master” 


and ct Mistress" in the mouth of one 


slave speaking to another must mean 
the speaker's own master or mistress, 
precisely as in the case of αὐτός and 
αὐτή. 

148. προθύμως : cf. Men. 663K. (ad- 
vice toa father) υἱῷ προθύμως τἀξιούμενον 
ποῶν κηδεμόν᾽ ἀληθῶς, οὐκ ἔφεδρον, ἕξεις 
βίου. - - εἰσάγει : Doris must have ex- 
plained the situation to Davus in the 
early part of thisseene. Mosehion and 
Davus were absent from liome when 
Glycera was taken in by Myrrhina,. 

144. τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι μήτηρ: Davis at- 
tributes a false motive to Myrrhina, viz. 
that she has harbored Glycera in the 
interest of Mosehion, For the expres- 
sion cf. Men. 8607 1K. τοῦθ᾽ ἕταιρός ἐστιν 
Plants ποῖ Ses alice csi 
pater, patrem esse ut aequomst 
ἜΣ Set ΟἿ 


ἡ ον ἘΠ} τ τ, 


ὄντως, 
fila hoe est pa- 
oO ARE toc 
— 6 Tpddipos: Mosehion. Theuseof the 
art. is significant as contrasted with tts 
omission With κεκτημένη above, Doris 
could not have said τρόφιμος In refer- 
ence to Mosehion, 

145. @k’ αὐτός. κτέ.: hale him here 
yourself, For this use of αὐτὸς as an 
emphatic ot (Lat. tu ipse) with the 
imy. ef. Plat. Gorg, 5060 λέγε, ὦ ἀγαθέ, 
that 


αὐτὸς καὶ πέραινε. It is certain 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 


AAOZ 


“εὔκαιρον εἶναι φαίνεθ᾽, ws ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ. 


Exit Davus to the city, Doris into the house of Pataecus. The band of 
revelers gives entertainment between the acts. 


XOPOT 


ΑΟΤ ΠῚ 


Davus returns from the city with Moschion. 


Sc. 1. Moscuton, Davus 


MOZXION 


Aae, πολλάκις μὲν ἤδη πρός μ᾽ ἀπήγγελκας. τάλας, 


Davus did go himself rather than send 
another, for he and Moschion enter 
together at the beginning of the next 
act. ἕλκειν intimates that Moschion 
will be reluctant to come. Cf, Aristoph. 
Eccl. 1087 ποῖ τοῦτον ἕλκεις ; — τὸν ἐμὸν 
αὐτῆς εἰσάγω. Possibly ἔλθ᾽ αὐτός (or 
οὗτος) is to be read; in that case αὐτὸν 
.. . δοκεῖ Would be spoken by Davus. 

146. εὔκαιρον, xré.: it’s clearly high 
time. Cf. E., Pet. fr., p. 99, v.35, Da- 
vus evidently labors under the impres- 
sion that the transfer of Glycera to 
Myrrhina’s house is a scheme to bring 
the two lovers together. Naturally this 
will be Polemon’s view when he hears 
of it (v. 284). 

147 ff. Menander’s employment of 
the trochaic tetrameter was remarked 
by the ancient metricians (see Meineke, 
Hist. crit. com. Graec., p. 442), e.g. by 
Marius Victorinus (Gram. Lat. WI. 57. 
14 Keil): Nam et 
comoediis 


Menander in 
frequenter a con- 


tinuatis iambicis versibus ad 
trochacos et rursum ad diambi- 
cos) redit, and was known through 
the oecurrence of trochaic lines amony 


the quotations. The transition to the 


trochaic rhythm, the ἦθος of which was 
always semi-lyrical, marks an access 
of excitement, which is enhanced by 
the frequent division of a line between 
Arist. Rhet. 14088 
35, contrasting the lambie and the tro- 


the two speakers. 


chaic rhythm, calls the former σεμνός, 
the latter κορδακικώτερος, instancing 
particularly the tetrameter, When the 
emotion of which this rhythm was the 
suitable medium is pitehed on a low 
plane and is caused by circumstances 
that are trivial or unworthy, as often 
in comedy, we may be sure that the 
poet intends to present a ridiculous 
situation, We may expect to find in 
such passages traces of tragic style and 
diction, introduced for paratragedic 
effect. 

147. πολλάκις: Davus has so often 
in the past lied to his master that the 
latter is suspicious of his) last an- 
houneement, too good to be true, that 
his mother has brought his beloved 
Glycera into their house for his sake. 
- τάλας: you wretch, ot. ΤΠ στ]. 6. δὴ 
Iluppins, τάλας. κωφέ, καλεὶ oe, Theoer. 
2. 4 ὅς μοι δωδεκαταῖος ἀφ᾽ ὦ. τάλας, οὐδὲ 


ποθίκει. 


162 


οὐκ ἀληθές. ἀλλ᾽ ἀλάζων καὶ θεοῖσιν ἐχθρὸς εἶ. 


» A rN ἌΚΩΝ. nw 
εἰ δὲ καὶ νυνὶ πλανᾷᾳς με--- 


ΜΕΝΑΝΔΡΟΥ 


875 K. 


AAOZ 


150 τήμερον. 


κρέμασον εὐθύς. εἰ Tava,” [350] 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


λέγεις τί; 


ΔΑΟΣ 


χρῆσαι πολεμίου τοίνυν δίκην 


‘av λαθῃ oe μὴ καταλάβῃς 7 ἔνδον αὐτὴν ἐνθάδε. 


a 


5 


᾿ς V8 3. “ΕΝ 
και πέεπεικ αὐτὴν 


ΤΗΣ ’, Sina ey Be) »ν 7 ‘ lal ΄ὔ , 
a ὃ ἐδίωκες νυν EXELS συ TavTa 7avTa, Moo xtwv, 


μὲν ἐλθεῖν δεῦρ᾽ ἀναλώσας λόγους. 


΄ Ν UE aE QT De. DEE: ine Ν A oe SEs 
μυριους. τὴν σὴν δὲ μῆτερ ὑποδέχεσθαι Kal ποειν [355] 


, Sat ied ὃ lal » » γ 
155 πανθ a σοι OOKEL. τις ἔσομαι: 


ΜΟΣ ΧΊΩΝ 


τίς βίος μάλισθ᾽ cpa, 


Ade, τῶν πάντων ἀρέσκει: axes, ἐπίβλεφ᾽ ov δέει." 


ἄρα τὸ μυλωθρεῖν κράτιστον: 


148. θεοῖσιν ἐχθρός : an old expres- 
sion, practically equivalent to an adj., 
in which the old dat. ending was re- 
tained long after it had gone out of use 
in current speech, 

150. χρήσαι: sc. wor. — τοίνυν : con- 
firms and emphasizes what Davus had 
said before (κρέμασον): yes, treat ine, 1 
say, as an enemy. --- δίκην: cf. Bur, 
Hee. 1162 αἱ δὲ πολεμίων δίκην ξυναρπά- 
σασαι τὰς ἐμὰς εἶχον χέρας. adesp. 450 In. 

151. ἂν λάθῃ σε: if she eludes you, 
Le. df you don't see her, 

153. This shameless lie is exposed 
invy. JOS ff. Phe truth was that Glyeera 
only With reluctance consented to ac- 
cept the hospitality urged upon her by 
Davus had had ne 


Myrrhina, part 


Whatever in the matter, 


154. ὑποδέξεσθαι : 10 offer hospital- 
ἐξ ΠΥ: 

155. τίς ἔσομαι : what wn T to be in 
return for this service? THe expected 
the answer ἐλεύθερος. For ἔσομαι in the 
sense of γενήσομαι see Men, 225. 2K. 
quoted in the next note. 

156. σκέψ᾽. ἐπίβλεφ᾽. κτέ.: look you, 
For the 
repetition of the imy. ef. Aristoph, 


consider what life you wand, 


Vesp. 1170 ἰδού, θεῶ τὸ σχῆμα καὶ σκέψαι 
μ΄. Inthe lacuna Οὗ four letters before 
éripred: either a word of two short syl- 
lables must be restored ora lone mono- 
syllabic word, for PX makes position in 
comedy, asin tragedy, with rare excep- 
tious, e.g. Men. 638 and 683° (2) Kh. = 
ov δέει “(ἢ Men. 223. 21. foe 66 re ay 


Bothy... 6 τὶ βούλει δ᾽ ἔχοῦ, Plut. Mor. 


ILEPIKEIPOMENH 16: 


AAOZ (trying to frighten him) 


> oc HNra , >’ An κἢ 
εἰς μυλώνα Badd’, ἐὰν 


ε \ 4 fe EL Files ὝὙ Ν τ 9 ἢ , Ἵ 
οὑτοσὶ φερόμενος ἡμῶν μὴ δέῃ Tw’ ἐν ξύλῳ." 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


βούλομαι δὲ προστάτην σε πραγμάτων ἐμῶν Χαβεῖν [30] 


Γ An , , A r ee γα eet a] 
160 ‘Kal’ διοικητήν, στρατηγόν, Aae: pn με νῦν Tpodas. 


AAOZ 


ov μάλ᾽ ἀποφράττουσιν εὐθύς, aXX’ ἔχεις εἴσω δραμεῖν. 


Θ02 ο ἑλοῦ βίον ἄριστον, a Pythagorean 
maxim. 

157 f. Davus parries the threat by 
a suggestion that is sure to terrify Mos- 
chion, viz. that the big soldier (οὑτοσί) 
is sure to come and wreak vengeance 
on him for taking Glycera. — μυλῶνα: 
ef. Eur. Cycl, 240 ἢ ᾿ς μυλῶνα καταβαλεῖν. 

158. οὑτοσί: Polemon. — φερόμενος: 
cf. E. 304. — δέῃ tiv’ ἐν ξύλῳ: clup some 
one in the stocks, cf. Aristoph. Eq. 705 
ἐν τῷ ξύλῳ δήσω σε, νὴ τὸν οὐρανόν. For 
the indefinite ris, rhetorically more 
effective in threats than the definite oé, 
ef. Nub. 1491 κἀγώ τιν᾽ αὐτῶν τήμερον 
δοῦναι δίκην ἐμοὶ monow, Lys. 446 παύσω 
τιν᾽ ὑμῶν τῆσδ᾽ ἐγὼ τῆς ἐξόδου, Kur. Cycl. 
210 τάχα τις ὑμῶν τῷ ξύλῳ δάκρυα μεθήσει. 

159 f. Moschion αὐ once drops his 
domineering air and submits himself 
unreservedly to the direction of Davus. 
— Other pure trochaic lines are vv. 
175, 196, 8S. 382, and fr. 23.3 K. 

160. στρατηγόν: cf. Plaut. Mil. 1160 
(Acroteleutium to the slave Palaestrio) 
impetrabis, imperator, Bacch, 
759 (Pistoclerus to his slave Chrysa- 
lus) 0 imperatorem probum., 

161-173. The text of these lines is 
in a desperate condition. From. the 
hints which are preserved here and 


there, however, a context has been ten- 
tatively supplied. The course of the 
dialogue seems to be about as follows: 
Davus has already played upon the van- 
ity of Moschion to the extent of mak- 
ing him believe that Glycera is ready 
to fall into his arms and that she has 
been brought into his mother’s house 
With this purpose, Moschion’s lingering 
suspicions of the veracity of Davyvus 
have been allayed and Davus put in 
command of his master’s interests as a 
consequence of the suggestion that a 
hostile demonstration on the part of 
Polemon may be expected at any mo- 
ment, When Davus now suggests to 
Moschion that he eo indoors, Moschion 
again becomes suspicious, especially at 
Davus’? hint that he will need a large 
sum of money to buy off Polemon. At 
length Moschion apparently agrees to 
stay indoors, besieged, while Dayus 
tries to placate Polemon; if that can- 
not be done he will fight. 

161. οὐ μάλα: omnine non, The 
hee, strengthened by μάλα das here a 
reassuring tone, by no meds, US YO ee 
pect. Cf. Neseh, Peas 384) cov aan” EN- 
λήνων στρατὸς apr@acoy ἔκπλοι»ν οὐδαμῇ 
καθίστατο. Herod. 6.5 τὴν μὲν ἡενομέ- 


νην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε. In 


164 


MENANAPOY 


MOZTXIQN 


ἀλλ᾽ Opa, τί et ᾽κδιδοίης ἔκδοτόν μ᾽; 


AAOZ 
aN | ee Lae | al 
ἐὰν σὺ δῷς 
εχ" Lele tg ah Ge eo | , 
ἐπτὰ χρυσίου ταλαντα--- 
ΜΟΣΧΤΩΝ 


“ + ἣν » tA A 7 
παντοπωλεῖν σ᾽ OLOM αν. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


,ὔ Γι iia eal on 5Γ 3, FE x5. ΄ὔ΄ ἌΓ , a 
Μοσχίων. wpa φρονεῖν ἐστ. ἡγόρακα σῖτον πολύν. [3365] 


» ΄ rN Ἂς > ty 2 ἊΝ Ἄς, q 
165 ομννω V7) TYV Αθηνᾶν. εν πολέμῳ καθέσταμεν. 


> wn > ΜΝ »“ » q nn » | 
εἶτ᾽ ἐμὲ ταῦτ᾽ €a διοικεῖν. δεῖ δὲ μᾶλλον ἄντικρυς 
S| 


ig , Seg) ZS ΤΟΝ Tas , CAMA Br ae 
δώδεκ EKTELO 7) γενέσθαι OKQALOV, OOTLS εν φρονεῖ. 


Homer the order is always μάλ᾽ ot, — 
ἀποφράττουσιν: the στρατηγός Uses a 
military term, blockade. The pres. is 
used with fut. meaning ; hence εὐθύς tor 
ἤδη. Cf. for this * prophetic present” 
v.190, Aristoph. Eq. 127 ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔνεστιν, 
αὐτὸς ws ἀπόλλυται. In Lucian’s skit 
Dial. meretr. 9, which is freely based 
on this play, the jealous Polemon says 
to his slave (ch. 5) ὡπλισμένοι ἡκόντων 
(οἱ Θρᾷκες) ἐμφράξαντες τὸν στενωπὸν TH 
ΦαΧΝα 1.5. ἴσων owls Meelis ale 

162. riet: cf. Kur. Hel. 1043 708 ec 

, κτάνοιμ᾽ ἄνακτα: Aristoph. Nab, 760 
τί δῆτ᾽ ἄν, εἰ. ἐκδιδοίης ἔκδοτον: propose 
to betray, οἷς ΔΔΟΝΟΙ Ἂν 3.73) KepooXé 


mTynv... ἔκδοτον monoa. The counate 
vb. is often used with this adj. as in 
ΤΣ 


δίδωσι. 


85 ἐὰν μὴ τὸν ἱκέτην ἔκδοτον 


168: χρυσίου: «f. Kup. 19 ης- ἔχων 
στατῆρας χρυσίοι' τρισχιλίοις. πᾶντο- 
πωλεῖν. κτέ.: 1 suppose youd traffic in 
anything. mavroma ys is used dispiaray 


Mosechion 
ΤΉ τι 


inely in Anaxippus 1. 10h, 


puts a false construction on 


words, — ἄν: regularly separated from 
its Vb. by οἴομαι and similar words, see 
GME S22 Ὁ 

164. ὥρα φρονεῖν: it's time to be 
sensible. Cf. Kur, Heracleid. 288 wpa 
προνοεῖν. πρὶν ὅροις πελάσαι στρατὸν Ap- 
γείων, Aesch. Suppl. 176 παῖδες, φρονεῖν 
χρή. γόρακα σῖτον; by pointing to 
his wallet (ef. ve 230) crammed with 


provisions (doubtless bought for ἃ 
Wholly different purpose) Davus proves 
to Moselion that he is in earnest in 
anticipating a siege, 

165. Menander seems to admit the 
divctyl (ἐν πολέμῳ) into trochaie verse, 
but not so freely as Aristophanes, ef, 
VV. 166 (εἰτ᾽ ἐμέ), 220 (ropvidiov), S. 480 
(ὕστερον). But the text is uneertain in 
all but one of these cases. The word- 
livision must he we waexcoeptayhene 
thedactylis contained inasingle word, 

166. διοικεῖν: cf, 

167. δώδεκα: sc. τάλαντα. ef. v. 163. 


ἐκτεῖσαι: «tf. 


διοικητήν ν. 160. 


Herod. 6. 92 φημί ΧΩΞ 
λια τάλαντα ἐκτῖσαι. γενέσθαι σκαιόν: 


show ones self “ hoohy. — ὅστις εὖ 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 16 


σι 


ΜΟΣΧΙΏΝ 
EN A“ vA ii a Zz 
γραυσὶ τοῖα στρύζε, pape. 
ΔΑΟΣ 
Ὁ. ΡΟΝ, » » , tats] 
σκέπτέον γ᾽ εἰ σπείσομαί, 
r ACS Urs apst ow ¥ παν Ἢ , 
pnp , ἐφ᾽ οἷς εἴρηκα τούτοις. 
ΜΟΣΧΙΩΝ 
Nate ,ὔ Ν x > q 
μα Alta cv στρατηγὸς οὐκ [370] 
170 ἦσθας, ἀλλὰ τυροπώλει, καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν ἐν TEdaLs’ — 
AAOS 
A ἌΓ μῶν “A 5 
ταῦτα μέντοι φὴς ἵν Ev Spw σ᾽; ἀλλὰ μὴ MEAN’, εἰς δὲ τὴν 
> , » £ al ’ὔ 
οἰκίαν ἄπελθε. τρόφιμε. 
ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


A ity) , "ἢ 
δεῖ μάλιστα μ᾽ ἐπιτρέπειν 


φρονεῖ: cf. Eur. Troad. 400 φεύγειν μὲν 
οὖν χρὴ πόλεμον ὅστις εὖ φρονεῖ. 

168. γραυσί: talk fit only for old 
women was proverbially λῆρος, cf. Plat. 
Theaet. 1768 ὁ λεγόμενος γραῶν ὕθλος (ἡ 
παροιμία ἐπὶ τῶν μάτην ληρούντων Suid. 
5. γραῦς χορεύει), Grorg, 527 A μῦθος... 
ὥσπερ γραός. --- στρύζε: mutter, croak. 
στρύζειν is a rare collateral form οἱ 
τρύζειν, Which differs but slightly in 
meaning from τρίζειν. Cf. Aristoph. Lys. 
506 τοῦτο μέν, ὦ γραῦ, σαυτῇ κρώξαις. - 
μίαρέ: οἵ. vv. 215, 216, S. 200. — oxe- 
πτέον ye: you ve got to consider, at least. 
Cf. Aristoph. Eq. 35 ἀλλ᾽ ἑτέρᾳ πῃ oxe- 
πτέον. Thisverbalisoftenused by Plato 
and Aristotle to introduce a subject of 
discussion, —el σπείσομαι. κτέ. : whether 
I'm to make peace with them. 

169. ἐφ᾽ οἷς εἴρηκα : on the terms 
I’ve mentioned (in ν. 163), νος, ap- 
parently, on the basis of money. Cf. 
Aristoph. Ay. 1602 κἂν διαλλαττώμεθα 


ἐπὶ τοῖσδε, Kur. Phoen. 1240 ἐπὶ τοῖσδε 
δ᾽ ἐσπείσαντο. - τούτοις : the enemy, 
The dat. 


is the usual constr., cf. Aristoph. Lys. 


Polemon and his followers. 


1040 ἀλλὰ νυνὶ σπένδομαί σοι. 

170. ἦσθας : you ure not, as it seems. 
The impf. ‘of sudden realization of 
the real state of affairs,’ see on v. 385 
and E. 902. 


---τυροπώλει: be w cheese-seller instead, 


For the form see on B. 156, 


The petty trade is contrasted with the 
honorable profession, as in Aristoph. 
Ran. 1869 ἀνδρῶν ποιητῶν τυροπωλῆσαι 
τέχνην. --- ἐν πέδαις : see on TH. 8 and 
ef, Aristoph, Vesp, 435 εἰ δὲ μήν πέδαις 
παχείαις οὐδὲν ἀριστήσετε. 

171. ταῦτα. κτὲ.: is this what you 
say to get me to do yoru a service? 

172. οἰκίαν : a general term for the 
residence, εἰςτοὐκίαιν - efowV. 229. When 
Moschion woes into the hotse le repairs 
to the men’s apartinents, εἰς οἶκον τ see 


on vy. 411..- μάλιστα: preferably, if 


MENANAPOY 


Fane: 73 ar Cae - » Ν ’, δος SAN 4 3. 
σοι YE παραμυθεῖσθ εκεινοῦυς. εἰ δὲ #9, TOT ἐπιέναι 


ἐπὶ θεοῖς ἐχθρῷ πτεροφόρῳ χιλιάρχῳ; 


ΔΑΟΣ 


92, quat. y, 


Ν ἐλ 
και μαλα. p. 8 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


> Ν la ib A A ” , 
175 εἰσιὼν δέ μοι ov, Ade, τῶν ὅλων κατάσκοπος 


[376] 


, , ee: A grr lim lin 4 , 5 Ν 
πραγμάτων γένουν" τι ποιει: που στιν ἢ μηΤΉρ: ἐμε 


lal aA Sf Ν ’ὔ 
εἰς τὸ προσδοκᾶν ἔχουσι TAS; τὸ τοιουτὶ μέρος 


οὐκ ἀκριβῶς δεῖ φράσαι σοι: κομψὺὸς εἶ. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


πορεύσομαι. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


περιπατῶν δὲ προσμενῶ σε πρόσθε τῶν θυρῶν ἐγώ. [380 
ρ poop ρ PO ey, 


possible, Lat. potissimum. Cf. 
Soph. Phil. 617 μάλισθ᾽ ἑκούσιον λαβών, 
εἰ μὴ θέλοι δ᾽, ἄκοντα. In prose the al- 
ternatives are generally introduced by 
μάλιστα μέν and εἰ δὲ μή. 

173. παραμυθεῖσθαι: appease, lit. 
talk over, cf. Thuc. 3. 75, 4 Νικόστρατος 
δὲ αὐτοὺς ἀνίστη Te Kal παρεμυθεῖτο. 

174. πτεροφόρῳ χιλιάρχῳ: ἃ certain 
beplumed brigadier, referring to the im- 
posing crest of feathers on Polemon’s 
helmet, cf. Aristoph. Pac. 1172 θεοῖσιν, 
ἐχθρὸν ταξίαρχον προσβλέπων τρεῖς λόφους 
ἔχοντα, Ach. 965 τρισὶ κατάσκιος λόφοις. 
Dial. 
meretr. 9; likewise a chiliarch, wears a 


The jealous Polemon in’ Lue. 


splendid uniform, ἐφεστρίδα περιπόρφυρον 
ἐμπεπορπημένος. The omission of the art. 
With χιλιάρχῳ gives about the same ef- 
fect as the use of tus as “the indefinite 
of insinuation ὁ" 22 
175. At this point a plan of action 
seems to lave been agreed upon. Mos- 
that 


CEO We 15%, 


chion, persuaded Polemon will 


Exit Davus into the house of Pataecus, 


soon begin hostilities, has consented to 
remain in the house while Davus is 
trying to placate the enemy. We now 
see that Moschion, far from intending 
to be cooped up in the house, practi- 
cally a prisoner, hopes to be able to 
cnjoy there the society of Glycera. He 
therefore sends Davus in to learn how 
the land lies. 

176. woud: i.e. Glycera. For the 
spelling see on HT, 1,—épé: obj. of 
προσδοκᾶν. 

Dem. 


. © ‘ " wv 8. Ὁ a ” 
Phil. 8. 46 οὐ yap οὕτως ἔχεθ᾽ ὑμεῖς οὔτε 


177. εἰς τὸ προσδοκᾶν: cf. 


πρὸς τὰ τοιαῦτ᾽ οὔτε πρὸς τἄλλα, ἀλλὰ 
πῶς;-- μέρος: rile; see on KB. 17 
178. κομψός : clever, cf. 


Vesp. G49 κομψὸν ἐν συνουσίᾳ, Cratin. 


Aristoph, 


307K. coupes θεατής. and forthe thouaht 
Aristoph. My. 233 γνωσθήσεται: τὸ yap 
θέατρον δεξιόν. Sometimes couds seems 
to imply readiness of speech as well as 
of wit, ef. Eur. Cyel. 315 xouwos χένῃσ ξὶ 


καὶ λαλίστατος, Suppl. 420. κομψός Ὑ ὁ 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 


130 ἀλλ᾽ ἔδειξεν μέν τι τοιοῦθ᾽ ὡς προσῆχθὸν ἑσπέρας: 
, » 3 ¥ 3. Ν Δ DR gee hE 7 
προσδραμόντ᾽ οὐκ ἔφυγεν, ἀλλὰ περιβαλοῦσ᾽ ἐπέσπασε. 
> > td «ε See ere a aa, 3S. A 3:03 τ Ὁ “σι 
οὐκ ἀηδής. ὡς ἔοικέν, εἰμ᾽ ἰδεῖν οὐδ᾽ ἐντυχεῖν, 
οἴομαι, μὰ τὴν ᾿Αθηνᾶν, ἀλλ᾽ Eraipats προσφιλής. 
ς 4. v4 / “ Ἄς τ το a! γ a 
τὴν δ᾽ ᾿Αδράστειαν μάλιστα νῦν ap’ wpa προσκυνεῖν. [385] 


Davus returns from his errand. 


AAOS 


185 Μοσχίων, ἡ μὲν λέλουται καὶ κάθηται. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


κῆρυξ καὶ παρεργάτης λόγων, and the defi- 
nition οὗ κομψεία given by Hesychius, 
ποικίλη λαλιὰ Kal πανουργία. --- πορεύ- 
σόμαι: cf. v. 65. 

180. ἔδειξεν: 
τοιοῦτον : sone such feeling. --- ἑσπέρας : 
ChoWVinde: 

181. ἐπέσπασε: sc. ἐμέ, drew me to 
her, cf. Plut. Vit. Cat. 27. 2 émiomacas 


subj. Glycera. — te 


τῆς χειρὸς ὁ Κάτων τὸν Μουνάτιον ἀνήγαγε. 
The mid. is more commonly used in 
this sense, as in Arist. Hist. animal. 
613 B19 ἐπισπᾶται ὁ πέρδιξ τὸν θηρεύοντα. 
Glycera’s conduct appears in a very 
different light in Agnoia’s narrative, 
vv. 35 ff. 

182. οὐκ ἀηδής : a common litotes, 
cf. Plat. Apol. 41π οὐκ av ἀηδὲς εἴη, 
Plut. Vit. Luc, 22. 1 ἀνὴρ εἰπεῖν οὐκ ἀηδής. 
—évruxetv: cf. [Plat.] Ep. 360¢ οὔτέ 
ἀχαρίς ἐστιν ἐντυχεῖν (Headlam), Theoph. 
Char. 19.3 δυσέντυκτος εἶναι καὶ ἀηδής. 

183. The complacency with which 
Moschion contemplates his own attrac- 
tiveness to the fair sex is matched hy 
that of Pyrgopolinices in the Miles of 
Plautus, who ait sese ultro om- 
91), 
and who confesses Venus me amit 
(985), nepos sum Veneris (1264). 


nis mulieres sectarier (vy. 


φιλτάτη. 
Ὁ 50, ὑν 08; 68; 1021 122388 1227: 
For the pl. ἑταίραις see on y. δ. Aris- 
taenetus, Ep. 1. 27, describes such a 
breaker of hearts: φυσῶν αὐτὸς ἑαυτὸν 
οἴεται μόνος ἀξιέραστος εἶναι ταῖς γυναιξὶ 
καὶ πρεπόντως τῷ κάλλει ποθεῖσθαι. 

184. The goddess Adrasteia, asso- 
clated with Nemesis and often con- 
founded with her, was supposed to 
punish those who uttered boastful or 
arrogant words. In Aesch. Prom, 936 
the chorus warns Prometheus οἱ προσ- 
κυνοῦντες τὴν Λδράστειαν σοφοί, cf. in 
{Eur.] Rhes, 342 the prayer ᾿Αδράστεια 
μὲν a Διὸς mats εἴργοι στομάτων φθόνον. 
Cf. also Dem, 25. 


Opwros wy ἔγωγε προσκυνῶ, Plat. Rep. 


37 ᾿Αδράστειαν μὲν ar- 
4514 προσκυνῶ δὲ Adpdoreav. .. χάριν 
οὗ μέλλω λέγειν, [151τ.7 Rhes, 468 σὸν 
Deen itt ΠΕ 


35.5 Nemesis is deprecated in the same 


arenes ; ? 
ὃ Adpacteia λέγω. 


spirit, and φθόνος In Soph. Phil. 776 ro: 
φθόνον πρόσκυσον takes the pltce of the 
personification. Cultsof Ndrasteiaand 
of Nemesis were established in Attics 
before the time of the Pe lopommesian 
MA 


cially timely now. as 


μάλιστα viv ap wpa: fx ἐν ρε- 
if seems, On ὥρα, 
the ΠΌΤ] Is revularls 
Cra Ve la 


with which 


omitted, see note 


MENANAPOY 


AAOD 


« Ν Fs ὃ lal na > > 50». 9 
n δὲ μη ΤῊρ σου OLOLKEL περιπατουσ ουκ οἷὸ Ο Τι. 


> Ν ΡΥ Ἂν , » eae b 1 \ “ , 
EUT PETES ὃ αριστον εστιν. EK δὲ των ποουμένων 


nw 2 
περιμένειν δοκοῦσί μοί σε. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


Ve 39, , [eta fe toh gin eat AL Val , 343 ΄ 
ELL ἀηδής; ELTAS αὐταῖς Καὶ παροντα μ ἐνθάδε: 


Ν , ΚΟ » b Bian 
Kal πάλαι μένουσ᾽ ἐμέ. 


[390] 


Davus makes a gesture of negation. 


190 “aye δὲ νῦν τουτὶ λέγ᾽ ἐλθών. 


AAO 
« e A 5 4 
ὡς ὁρᾷς. ἀναστρέφω. 
Davus reénters the house. 
MO>XION 


> \ 5 hel aay ahh e ἌΣ οι ΤΡας, ὑνυ Ties ars \ ‘ 
ει μεν alo KUVOLTO μ ειπειν. βασανιῶ μέν δηλαδὴ 


παρακαλῶ Δᾶον δὲ μάρτυν. τὴν δὲ μητέρα σφόδρα᾽ lost K. 


186. διοικεῖ: is busy about. 

188. καὶ πάλαι. xré.: they’ve been 
waiting for me along time, too. 

189. εἴμ᾽ ἀηδής: a confident ques- 
tion, Am 1 distasteful 2? equivalent to 
the assertion οὐκ ἀηδής εἰμι in ν΄. 182. 
The neg, in the MS. before εἴμ᾽ ἀηδής 
vives the right interpretation but spoils 
the meter; its presence is due to the 
fact that no sien of interrogation is 
used, -- παρόντα: the partic., instead 
of the infin. In indirect discourse after 
a vb. of saying is confined almost en- 
tirely to poetry and is there unusual, 
The object clause represents an actual, 
not merely a reported, faet, Did you 
also tell thencof my presence 2 ΘΟ ΤΣ, 
$10, Kithner-Gerth § 484.78, Anm,. 2. 

190. ἀναστρέφω : 1 «νι 
back again, lit. T return, 


there and 
the answer 
ofa, zealous servants oe k Phat, ering 
110} lela 
The ss prophetic pres, 7 


SHITE at Che Mies ἘΠ ἢ]: 


takes the place 


of a fut., cf. Men. 198 K. παρέσομαι yap 
ἐν dvo, Plaut., Amph. 969 iam hie ero, 
quom illie censebis esse me. 
191. Moschion coaches himself for 
the expected meeting with Glycera, — 
αἰσχύνοιτο : subj. Glycera.— μ᾽ εἰπεῖν : 
to address me. For the ace, with εἰπεῖν 
and similar vbs., a usage confined to 
poetry, see Nithner-Gerth $409, Anim, 
3. μοὶ is unlikely, forthoneh it suffers 
elision In Homer it rarely does in At- 
tie, βασανιῶ: 1 shall question ler 
closely, ic. draw from her in this way 
an acknowledgment of ler affection, 
Mosechion does not fora moment doubt 
herattachment to him, but is prepared 
to find her somewhat shy about betray- 
ine her feeling, 
192. παρακαλῶ: the vox propria 
for the summoning of withesses, ec. 
Lys. ΤΊ. 28 πολλοὺς παρακαλέσας. pap- 
τυν: in predicate apposition, μάρτυν, 
attested for Menander by Photiusyis a 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 


169 


εἰσιόντ᾽ εὐθὺς φιλῆσαι Set μ᾽, ἀνακτήσασθ᾽ ὅλως. 


» Ἂς 4 F: A »\ 4 «ε -“ 
εἰς τὸ κολακεύειν τρέπεσθαι, Cnv τε πρὸς ταύτην απλῶς. 


195 ὡς γὰρ οἰκείῳ κέχρηται τῷ παρόντι πράγματι. 


[390] 


ἀλλὰ τὴν θύραν ψοφεῖ τις ἐξιών. 


Davus returns, apparently crestfallen. 


A Lal A 
Tl TOUTO, Tal; 


ὡς ὀκνηρῶς μοι προσέρχει, Ade. 


AAOZ 


Ἂν a) Ν ’ 
ναὶ μα τὸν Ata: 


'ῳ Ν 3 ’ « Ν > \ i$» Ni Ν , 
πανυ γαρ ATOTWS. WS γαρ ἐλθὼν ειπα προς THV μήητερα 


ν ’ὔ ec \ » 4, 5» rs ¢¢ wn 91 fe 
ὅτι Tape, μηθὲν ἔτι τούτων -᾿᾿ φησί, THs ἀκήκοεν ; [400] 


200 ἢ σὺ λελάληκας πρὸς αὐτὸν ὅτι φοβηθεῖσ᾽ ἐνθάδε 


r ml , 3 in: veal ΓΝ € Lal κι sf 9 4 »» 
καταπέφευγ᾽ αὐτὴ πρὸς ἡμᾶς; φεῦγε: μὴ wpas σύ γε. 


metaplastic form οἵ μάρτυρα, as μάρτυς 
is of μάρτυρος. -- σφόδρα: decidedly, 
modifying the whole predicate, as in 
Aristoph. Ach. 71 σφόδρα yap ἐσῳζόμην 
ἐγώ, Arist. Hist. animal. 5758 18 σφό- 
dpa δοκεῖ σημεῖον εἶναι. and especially in 
exclamations, ὡς σφόδρα, ete. 

193. ἀνακτήσασθαι: cf. Arist. Occ. 
13494 31 ποιήσας δὲ τοῦτο ἀνεκτήσατο 
τοὺς πολίτας. 

194. κολακεύειν : cf. Plaut. Cist. 92, 
where Selenium tells of the arts of her 
lover, inde in amicitiam insinu- 
avit matre at meeum si- 
mul blanditiis, muneribus, do- 
Men. 558 Kk, 


κολακεύων ἐμέ τε Kal THY μητέρα.- Civ 


{ἀν Ὁ δὴ 


NUS =A translawomwor 





πρὸς ταύτην : 500 on Pet. fr. v.39, p. 99, 
196. ψοφεῖ: see on 1). 000. 
198. ἀτόπως: sc. 
Plat. 


bay Ὧν A 
μάλ᾽ ἀτόπως ξυμβαῖνον. 


avb. like ἔπεσεν 
or συνέβη, cf. Polit. 22050) καὶ 

199. μηθέν, κτέ.: 50. λέγε, NO more 
of that.— was ἀκήκοεν: viz. that Glycera 
had come to her house. 


201. φεῦγε: cf.S. 378 φεῦγε, Χρυσί.--- 
μὴ ὥρας, cré.: aformula of imprecation 
equivalent to ‘plague take you,” lit. 
The 


phrase was originally εἰς ὥρας or per- 


may you not come to nect year. 


haps even εἰς τὰς ἑτέρας ὥρας, to judge 
by the formula used in good wishes, 
e.g. Theocr. 15. 74 κὴς ὥρας κἤπειτα, 
φίλ᾽ ἀνδρῶν, ἐν καλῷς εἴης (cf. Aristoph. 
Nub. 562 ἐς ras Wpas τὰς ἑτέρας εὖ φρονεῖν 
doxnoere), but this was early shortened 
to the acc. without the prep., as here 
(ef. Aristoph. Lys. 1037 ἀλλὰ μὴ ὥρας 
ἵκοισθε, Where Bentley would read μὴ ἧς 
wpas), or to the adverbial dative apace 
betimes, as in Aristoph. Lys. 391, or 
Lue. De salt. 5 μὴ ὡραισι 
dpa ἱκοίμην. The scholiast to Lue. le. 
(ef. also ad Dial. deor. 9. 4 and Dial. 
meretr. 10.3) declares the dat. an Attie 


” 
ωραισι,. ὁ.ξ. 


solecism and μὴ ὥρας the correct form, 
adding the explanation σημαίνει δὲ τὸ 
μὴ εἰς τοὐπιὸν φθάσαι. For εἰς wpas Mean 
ine nert yearcef.[Plat.] kp. 7. 40 ὁ μένε 


. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν τοῦτον " εἰς δὲ wpas ἄπιθι. 


170 


MENANAPOY 


‘hyo, tkov, ἀλλ᾽ ἐς φθόρον σὺ νῦν βάδιζε. παιδίον, 


> REIT ee, ὌΝ A qitas abe Telearey >> ΄ 
ἐκποδών. ακουξ OY) νυν TAVT ανὴηρπαστ εκ μέσου. 


re 9ἼΓ 4 fone , 7-9 Ὁ, τῷ 4 
ws ἐφεδρεύειν παρόντα σ ἤδέσαν. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (indignantly) 


205 “apa γελάσαι μοι--- 


7 
μαστιγία, 


[405] 


AAOX 


γέλοιον ; ἡ μὲν οὖν μήτηρ — 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


τίφῃς: 


Ἂ ,ὕ yw) τ Ν Ne aA > . > lol 
εἰσάγειν ἄκουσαν αὐτήν. καὶ TO πρᾶγμ᾽ οὐχ ἕνεκ᾽ ἐμοῦ: 


The phrase is restored in Men, 550.111. 
un ὡρας σύ γε" ἵκοιο (Fritzsche, Headlam). 
202 f. εἰς φθόρον. .. 


Avistoph. Eq. 1151 ἄπαγ᾽ ἐς μακαρίαν 


ἐκποδών: εἴ. 


ἐκποδών. Aesch, Sept. 252 οὐκ ἐς φθόρον: 
Herond, 6. 12 ἐκποδὼν ἡμῖν φθείρεσθες and 
the vb. εἰσφθείρεσθαι Vv. 405, 8. 372. 
203. ἄκουε δὴ viv: this plirase is 
found in Aristoph. Eq. lOTd, Av. Dots, 
Sophy ele Oda ws Meee Ren. SLs: 
1245, To. 1009) 1146, Orest. 237, 1781, 
Phoem ODL, 142%, 
203 f. πάντ᾽ ἀνήρπαστο. ... Werav: 


and elsewhere, 


allivaslost. snatched frome Your grasp. as 
soow as they knew that you were here ly- 
ing inwait. CYS. 346 τὰ πράγματ᾽ ava- 
τέτριπταις andl for a similar use of ἐκ 
μέσου Euphron 8.51. τίς ἐκ μέσου τὰ θερ- 
μὰ δεινός (ἐστιν) ἁρπάσαι: AnaXxipp. 1.6 
ΙΧ. τὴν θυείαν ἠφάνισαν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου. ---- 
os: almost = ὡς rayera, Ut, simul 
un, See Inert SS sabe 1 == 
ἐφεδρεύειν : lie in wit us ai ἔφεδρος, the 
old contestant ina Wrestling or box- 
Hicomatel who was leftover to eneace 
the winner of the preliminary bouts, 
See Lic. Hermot, Ἢ] ἐφεδρεύει περιμένων, 


ἐστ AV CAELVOL ἀη ὠνισώνται, ... καὶ ἔστι 


τοῦτο οὐ μικρὰ εὐτυχία τοῦ ἀθλητοῦ. τὸ μέλ- 
λειν ἀκμῆτα τοῖς κεκμηκόσι συμπεσεῖσθαι. 
At the contest between Aeschylus and 
HMuripides in the Frogs of Aristophanes 
it was the purpose of Sophocles ἔφεδρος 
καθεδεῖσθαι (ν. 792), — Observe that the 
syl. before 6p is long. The tragie poets 
show a tendeney to this measurement 
in ἕδρα and compounds (Tucker Class. 
JEANS) θη £2) Ye 


found In anapaestic and iambic meter 


In Aristophanes it is 


in Av. G86 (ὀλιγσδρανέες) and Plat. 1153 
(ἱ δρύσασθε): ef. Herond, 4.92 (ἔδρη). 
μασπιγίαν cf S295, 112: 

205. γελάσαι pou: the intercepted 
word was τολμᾷς or the like. For the 
dat., resular with ἐπ ιῦξ and éy-yedav, 
ef. Aristoph. Nub, 560° τούτοισι γελᾷ, 
11. G96 ἐγέλασα Y ολοκομπίαις, Soph. A}. 
ΣΤ γελᾷ δὲ τοῖσδε... ἄχεσιν. --- γέλοιον : 
δον ἐστί; Davus pretends that it was no 
launching matter, and Was about to say 
that Myrrhina certainly (μὲν οὖν») did 
hot so treat it. 

206. εἰσάγειν : of. v. 143. The subj. 
τὴν μητέρα is readily understood from 
ἡ μήτηρ above.— -ἄκουσαν: cl. φοβηθεῖσα 


γι 00. 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 171 


em ἢ εἼ , > A , > 
εἶπας ws πέπεικας ἐλθεῖν προς. p. 


ΔΑΟΣ (as if trying to remember) 


> ‘ > ¥ (é 
ἐγὼ δ᾽ εἴρηκά σοι 


tse , Phe ee bee | a) > 4 Ν Ν > , > ‘ \ > 
ws πέπεικ᾽ ἐλθεῖν ἐκείνην ; μὰ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω, ᾽γὼ μὲν οὐ. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


᾿μηδαμοῦ δόκει λάθρᾳ pov πολὺ καταψεύδεσθ᾽ ἐμοί," [410] 


ry NN LES POSEN A r 2 
210 OS YE Kal Τὴν HNTEP AUTOS TAVTA συμπεέτπεικεναι 


ἀρτίως ἔφησθα, ταύτην ἐνθάδ᾽ ὑποδέξασθ᾽ ἐμοῦ 5, quat.y, p.9 


. 
ενεκα. 


ΔΑΟΣ (as if recalling with difficulty) 


Afp ε aes » Ue , 
τοῦθ᾽, ὁρᾷς. ἔφην. ναί: μνημονεύω. 


MOZXION 


A ~ 
και δοκεῖν 


ν DAS, la “ 4, 
EVEK έεμουν σοι TOUTO πράττειν: 


ΔΑΟΣ 


ἀλλ᾽ ἔγωγ᾽ ἔπειθον. 


> ¥ Ν / 
οὐκ ἔχω τουτὶ φράσαι: 


MOZXION (threateningly) 


εἶεν - δεῦρο δὴ βαδιζε. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


ποῖ; [115] 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


(yy Ξῇ ’ὔ » 97. κα] 
215 μων, μιαρ, ὀνήσει; 

207. εἶπας : in v. 13. -- πέπεικας: 
hence that she came willingly. 

209. μηδαμοῦ δόκει. κτέ. : don't think 
you're lying to me wholesale without my 
knowing it! Equivalent to μὴ δόκει λα- 
θεῖν με καταψευδόμενος. For μηδαμοῦ in 
prohibitions cf. Philem, 115 1. μηδαμοῦ 
σκέψη φυγεῖν, and for λάθρᾳ W. gen, see 
Kuhner-Gerth § 421. 4. 

210. ὅς ye: quippe qui, ef. Soph. 


O.T. 35 ὅς γ᾽ ἐξέλυσας . .. σκληρᾶς ἀοι- 
δοῦ δασμόν. -- ταῦτα: explained by ταύ- 
τὴν ὑποδέξασθαι, see on BE. 1, 

212. ὁρᾷς = ὡς ὁρᾷς, cf. v. "88, -- 
δοκεῖν : const. W. ἔφησθα. 


214. ἔπειθον: 


to persuade her. 


conative, I did try 
δεῦρο δὴ βάδιζε: cf. 
Aristoph, Nub, 28 δεῦρ᾽ ἔλθ᾽, iva κλάῃς. 

215. μῶν ὀνήσει: it won't do you 
any good, will it? i.e. to have lied in 


μι 
=] 
bo 


MENANAPOY 


AAOZ (stammering) ; 


Ν aA , > δὶ ,’ 
τὸ δεῖνα. Μοσχίων, eyo πόπει — 


ly has oS Sh Meo 
μιαρος ειμ, ἔγνων. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΙΩΝ 


φλυαρεῖς πρός με. 


978 K. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


AY Ἂς > , 
patov Ασκληπιόν, 


9. yl > SN > ΄ Ἂν » » , 
οὐκ €Ywy , ἐαν AKOVONS. τυχὸν LOWS OU βούλεται 


᾿διατελεῖν σ᾽ ἐξ ἐπιδρομῆς ταῦθ᾽, ὡς ἔτυχεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀξιοῖ 


this way. Moschion acts as if about 
to give Davus a beating. — τὸ δεῖνα: 
equivalent to let me see, bless me, used 
by one who through embarrassment 
cannot think of the right word or for 
some reason does not wish to speak it. 
As the scholiast to Lue. Vit. auct. 19 ex- 
plains the idiom, it serves to reveal the 
underlying thought through the very 
indefiniteness of the word, In the pres- 
ent passage Davus starts with his expla- 
nation before he has thought what it 
is to be; at first he spars for time 
(τὸ δεῖνα), then breaks down and con- 
fesses. Similarly in Aristoph. Thesm. 
G20 ff. the κηδεστής οἵ Euripides, pa- 
rading as a woman, when asked the 
hame of her husband stamimers τὸν 
δεῖνα γιγνώσκεις, τὸν ἐκ KoOwkidav;... 
ἔσθ᾽ ὁ δεῖν᾽. ὃς καί ποτε τὸν δεῖνα τὸν τοῦ 
detva —. “The embarrassment may be 
due to the desire to avoid using an ob- 
jectionable word, as in S. 345 and in 
Aristoph. Ach. 1149 ἀνατριβομένῳ τε τὸ 
δεῖνα. or to a real or assumed forget- 
fulness, as in Aristoph, Ran. 918, where 
Dionysus, unable to call to mind the 
name of Aeschylus, refers to him as ὁ 
decva. In Plautus perii or malum 
in Mere, 721 


Lysimachus merely stammers {118 --- 


serves the same purpose ; 


illa edepol—vae mihi, etc. See 
Starkie on Aristoph. Vesp. 524. 

216. πρός pe: criticized by Charax 
(Bekk. Anec. 1154), who demands πρὸς 
ἐμέ. See Kithner-Blass § 90. 6b, — The 
anapaest in the sixth foot, contained in 
three words, is the only instance of the 
kind in the tetrameters of the Cairo MS. 

217. ἐὰν ἀκούσῃς : Davus has now 
recovered himself and has thought of 
away out of his dilemma. The action 
of Myrrhina has seemed to give the lie 
to all that has been said to Moschion ; 
but posSibly. he now suggests, Glycera 
simply prefers to be wooed in a more 
conventional way, 

218. διατελεῖν ἐξ ἐπιδρομῆς ταῦτα: 
to finish this business by assault, as le 
had begun it. The metaphor suggests 
the suddenness and unexpectedness of a 
military onslaught, and is often used in 
the meaning suddenly. — ὡς ἔτυχεν: off 
hand, used adverbially in all periods to 
qualify a vb. in the pres. as well as in 
Tem πιο ONC Mee ALC Tito an eel sens 
ἔτυχεν ζημιοῦσθαι, Philem. 137K. ὃ γίγνε- 
ται ὡς ἔτυχ᾽ ἑκάστῳ, Piut. Mor. 879 ἃ 
οὐδὲν τῶν καλῶν εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν γί- 
γνεται. 

220. αὐλητρίς : the word is almost 
the equivalent of ἑταίρα. -- πορνίδιον 


TIEPIKEIPOMENH 


SRY a) ἰδέ fee “- Ν Ν A Eo ‘ i 
TT POTEPOV €LOEVAL O , AKOVO ALTA παρα σου γέ: vy) Ata. [420] 


r ε ΕΥ̓ ec ’ 
220 ov γὰρ ὡς αὐλητρὶς οὐδ᾽ ὡς πορνίδιον τρισάθλιον 


“ἦλθε. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (reassured) 


“ ΚΩ͂Ν lal 
νῦν δοκεῖς λέγειν μοι, Aaé, τι πάλιν. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


»" 7 
δοκίμασον Υ 


Ls “ὃ at γ 4 ΔῈ Sy , a OY, 
NOE σοι πάρεστιν, οἶμαι: καταλέλοιπεν οἰκίαν 


> lege i , Pea) ΄ > Ν A Δ ΄ 
οὐ φλυάρῳ τόν T ἐραστήν. εἰ σὺ τρεῖς ἢ τέτταρας 


€ A Ῥ » ἐδ , ᾽ν > “ ’ 
ἡμερας O €O0€L, προσέξει σοι τις" AVEKOLYOUTO μοι 


[425] 


[ag TVA > > La Ν oN TA w~ 
25 ταῦτ΄ ἀκοῦσαι yap ὁλα δεῖ νῦν. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


τρισάθλιον : cf. com. adesp. 120 K, πορ- 
νιδίῳ τρισαθλίῳ ἑαυτὸν οὕτω παραδέδωκεν. 
Note the dactyl in the fifth foot and 
see on ν. 166. 

221. δοκίμασον : put it to the test, 
viz. ὅ τι λέγω. 





222. ἥδεσοι.... οἴμαι: this yirl’s here 
for you, 1 think. Then follow his rea- 
sons for this opinion. σοι is stressed 
and practically = σοῦ ἕνεκα. 

223. οὐ φλυάρῳ = οὐ παιδιᾷ, i.e. 
σπουδῇ, ἐπιτηδές, οἵ. Plat. Crit. 460 παι- 
δία καὶ φλυαρία. 

224. o ἔδει: will stoutly hold out, 
lit. will eat yourself; ef. Ene. *+erit 
your teeth.’?? The expression sugeests 
both (1) patient endurance and (2) im- 
patient fretting at that which must be 
endured, Both ideas have their origin 
in Homeric phrases, e.g. (1) Od. 1. 581 
ὁδὰξ ἐν χείλεσι φύντες, With Which cf. 
Tyrt. 8.32 Cr. χεῖλος ὀδοῦσι δακών itil 
Aristoph. Ran. 13. δάκνω γ᾽ ἐμαυτόν, 
ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως γελῶ, (2) Il. 6. 209) ὃν θυμὸν 
κατέδων. With Whichef. Aristoph. Vesp. 


Coe is 2! , Cay dec 7 
ποῦ σε δήσας καταλίπω. 


287 μηδ᾽ οὕτω σεαυτὸν ἔσθιε (see Starkie's 
note ad loc.), Aleaeus com. 36K. ἔδω 
δ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν ὥσπερ πουλύπους, Plaut. True. 
587 quisnam illic homost, qui 
ipsus se comest, tristis oculis 
malis? The thought of the passage 
above is similar to that of Ter, Eun. 
187: when Thais asks Phaedria to ab- 
sent herself from her for two days 
Phaedria answers, rus ibo: Ibi hoe 
me macerabo bidtuom.,— τις: some 
one we know, the indef. of instuuation, 
cf. vv. 153, 168,174, Aristoph. Ran. 502 
κακὸν ἥκει τινί, Soph. Ant. 751 ἡ δ᾽ οὖν 
θανεῖται καὶ θανοῦσ᾽ ὀλεῖ τινα. ἀνεκοι- 
votre μοι: Davus now pretends that 
Glycera has asked lim to convey this 
hint to Mosehion; the time has arrived, 
he goes on tosay, for Moschion to know 
all about it. 


225. dda = 


ef, Soph. Aj. 1100 οὐχ ὅλων στρατηγός 


πάντα. ἃ late usage, but 


ποῦ. κτέ.: where am [to 


that Tomay tind 


(see Jebb), 
leave oul tettered ? 


you when the period of waiting is over, 


MENANAPOY 


“ ων ΤΣ πα ἊΝ 7 
Aae; περιπατεῖν ποεῖς με περίπατον πολύν τινα. 


ἀρτίως μὲν ovK ἀληθὲς πρός με λελάληκας πάλιν. 


ΔΑΟΣ 


9 Pare ells 9. 9} re, =) A , ὡς 
οὐκ ἐᾷς φρονεῖν μ᾽ ἀθορύβως. μεταβαλοῦ τρόπον τινὰ 


4 Ν] » 4, [εἴν 
κοσμίως T εἴσω πάρελθε. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


γ Ἄγ iv oe ἫΝ , 
σιτ αγορασει; 


ΔΑΟΣ 


καὶ μάλα * [430] 


’ , > ’ € ioe > δ» r & » la ΡΣ (: Net > 
230 ἐφόδι᾽ οὐχ ὁρᾷς μ᾽ ἔχοντα πλῆρες ὃν TE τοῦτ᾽: ἐμοὶ ὃ 


226. περίπατον πολύν : in his vexa- 
tion Moschion magnifies his troubles 
and assumes that he will have to spend 
the three or four days walking the 
streets, 

227. Moschion again grows suspi- 
cious of Davus. He thinks — and 
rightly — that the last story (v. 224) is 
another lie. 

228. Instead of defending himself 
Davus impatiently asks for time to 
think out a plan undisturbed. Under 
this pretext he induces Moschion to eo 
to his room in the house. —é@s ... 
ἀθορύβως: cf. Mur. Orest. 258 ἕως edad 
ΤΟ ΕΣ 


. εἴασε (ὁ Φάβιος) τὸ 


σ᾽ εὖ φρονεῖν ᾿Ερινύες, 
Max. 26. 4 οὐδὲν ἢ 
χαῖρον καὶ τεθαρρηκὸς τῶν πολιτῶν αθό- 
ρυβον καὶ βέβαιον... μεταβαλοῦ τρόπον 
τινά: if the vb. is rightly restored the 
meaning probably is right about face, as 
The amid. 


ASP AG ot Pte sO PIE {πὶ 


is Used absolutely 
Eis AGAPIRD 1: 


7.9.06 6Niya ByHuara προιόντες, petesa- 


if were. 


Novro ἐπ᾿ ἀσπίδα whirled about to the Lettie 
but usually in the meaning = change 


SHAM ISORUCT a otto ἡ} ΜΙΝ ΠΩΣ: 


1. 71. οὔτε γὰρ ὅσια ἂν ποιοῖμεν μεταβαλ- 


λόμενοι, OVS change one’s character,” 
“reform,”? as in Plut. Ages. et Pomp. 
Comp. 3. τῶν πειρατῶν τοῖς μεταβα- 


The 
military meaning seems the more ap- 


λομένοις πόλεις ἔδωκε (ὁ Πομπήιος). 


propriate here in the mouth of Davus 
ὁ στρατηγός (ν. 160) and is carried on 
by κοσμίως below. — τρόπον τινά: yo - 
dammodo, The phrase calls atten- 
tion to the special meaning of the 
preceding word, as in Il. 20 δούλη τρό- 
πον τινά, VP. ὁ") ζῶσιν τρόπον τινά. In 
Arist. De gen. οὐ corr, 320.43 > τρόπον 
τινά in a certain sense is contrasted 
With κυρίως properly speaking. 

229. cir ἀγοράσει : while he ab- 
sents himself from the common meals 
of the household he expects Davus to 
provide for him. THe forgets that Davis 
has already told him (v. 164) that he 
has laid in provisions for a siexe, 

230. τοῦτο: the purse, βαλλάντιον, 
or the wallet, πηρίδιον, which he car- 
vies. The text is highly conjectural, 
ἐμοὶ δ΄: the only instance of elision at 
the end of the verse in the remains of 
Menander, though the ancient gram- 


marians cite a case from the Plocium, 


TLEPIKEIPOMENH 
ΕΣ \ ἰὴ 2 be ὕ 4 rea | r an 
εἰσιὼν κλίθητι " Τούτων συνδιορθώσεις τινα. 
ΜΟΣΧΙΩΝ 
ε o isp . . . . 
ὁμολογῶ νικαν σε. Exit Moschion into his father’s house. 
AAOZX 
Fete , ‘\ ar ,ὔ Ἢ 
μικροῦ. Ἡράκλεις. καὶ νῦν τρέμων 
a7 ΡΣ ce > » \ v0” ε GES 0 > a 
αυος ELL OUK €OTL yop Ταυῦ , WS TOT WELNV, ευκρεμῆ. 
Sosias arrives from the country in time to catch sight of Moschion as he enters 


the house. Sosias is accompanied by a couple of ragamuftins, his army. He 
stations his forces in front of the house of Pataecus. He does not see Davus, 


who stands at one side. 


Sc. 2. Davus, Sosras 


ΣΩΣΙΑΣ 


πάλιν πέπομφε τὴν χλαμύδα φέροντά με 


Si Ἂ id Ψ»}3γ99 a 72 “A XN , 
235 καὶ THY σπάθην, WY ἰδῶ τί ποιεῖ καὶ λέγω 


see ἔν, 412 K. Aristophanes admits it 
oceasionally, viz. δ᾽ Av. 1716, Eeel. 351, 
σ᾽ Nub. 891, μ᾽ Ran. 298. Among the 
tragic poets it was peculiar to Sopho- 
cles, hence called by the grammarians 
εἶδος Σοφοκλεῖον. See Jebb on Soph. O.T. 
29. Anelided monosyllable at the end 
of the verse is sometimes written at 
the beginning of the next verse in the 
MSs., as here. 

231. εἰσιὼν κλίθητι : pray go inand 
lie down, cf. Eur. Cyel. 548 κλίθητί νύν 
μοι πλευρὰ θεὶς ἐπὶ χθονός, Hur, fr. GOLN, 
κλίθητι καὶ πίωμεν (to be restored in com, 
adesp. 1203 KX. for τί κάθῃ; καὶ πίωμεν). 
The simple vb. is often used for κατα- 
κλίνεσθαι. συνδιορθώσεις : Menander’s 


fondness for verbal compounds w. 
συν- Is noticeable, e.g. συμπείθειν ν. 210, 
συναπαιτεῖν 1. 89, συνδιαλλάττειν V. R87, 
συνεκκεῖσθαι Ih. 233, συνεκτιθέναι 1“. 5%), 
συνευρίσκειν I. 84, 

232 f. μικροῦ: a close share! 


, 
τρέ- 


pov αὖός εἰμι: οἵ. Aristoph., Lys. 385 


ἀλλ᾽ adds εἰμ᾽ ἤδη τρέμων (Van Leeuwen). 
Possibly δέει is to be restored, ef. EF. 
686. — τότε: at first, When he formed 
the plan. — εὐκρεμῆ : ἐν to manage, 
lit. conveniently hung, ice. within easy 
reach, ‘The word oceurs nowhere else 
and is probably colloquial. ἀμῴφικρεμής, 
éxkpeuns, and ἐπικρεμής occur, the last 
ina figurative sense in schol. Soph. Aj. 
23 iva ἐπικρεμὴς ἢ ἔτι ἡ ὑπόθεσις that the 
plotmay remain doubtful, lit. still hang- 
ing suspended. The same figure is in- 
volved in Sappho’s comparison (fr. 1 
Cr.) of girls with apples that hang out 
of reach, 

234 tf. Since we last saw him (v. 64) 
Sosias has reported to his master iat his 
headquarters in the country what he 
had seenat his previous visit: Glyeera 
at the door inside of her neighbor's 
house, and Doris coming from. that 
house, From this report Polemon could 
hot infer with certainty that Glyeera 


had taken up her residence in the house 


MENANAPOY 


ἐλθών. ἀκαροῦς δέω δὲ φάσκειν καταλαβεῖν 


Ἂν Ἂν »ν 2039, τὰν ’ὔ ,ὔὕ 
TOV OLX OV ἔνδον. ιν ἀναπηδήσας ΤΡΕΧΊ): 


ἰἱ μή γε τάπασιν αὐτὸν ἡλέ 
εἰ μή γε παντάπα αὐτὸν ἠλέουν. 


κακοδαίμον᾽ οὕτω. δῆλος ἦν, οὐδ᾽ ἐνύπνιον" 


of his rival, but, on the other hand, 
he could not avoid the conclusion that 
the intimacy which had aroused his 
He therefore 
Sosias is in uni- 


jealousy still continued, 
sends Sosias again. 
form and attended by several peltasts 
(vv. 264, 272). ΗΒ mission evidently is 
to stand guard at Polemon’s house, in 
order to see that Glycera does not es- 
cape if she has not already done so, and 
to spy upon her doings. He arrives in 
time to see Moschion, whom he recog- 
nizes, enter the house, 

The siege lasts until v. 358. A sim- 
ilar mock siege is represented in Ter. 
Eun, 771 ff., where Thraso assisted by 
his ieutenant Sanga deploys his forces, 
consisting of three cheap soldiers, be- 
fore the house of Thais in order to 
capture Pamphila. But there is more 
of contrast than of similarity in the 
actual management of the two scenes, 

234 f. πάλιν πέπομφε: sce v.58. — 
τὴν χλαμύδα, τὴν σπάθην: his cloak 
and sword, Sosias is probably carry- 
ing, not wearing, Polemon’s uniform. 
He had previously been sent to fetch 
the himation, the dress of a civilian, 
and now comes back with the discarded 
uniform, Thecloak and sword were the 
typleal parts of a soldiers dress, ef. 8, 
$57, Antiph. 16K.) Plaut. Pseud. 735 
etiam opust chlamyde et ma- 
chaerase§ petaso. Cunesb32 Mere 
121,926. omadén, lit. blade (Mur. fr. 373 
Ν σπάθη pacyavov), is used in eomedy 
for ξίφος, see Poll. 10. 145 (Men. 9401... 


— ποιεῖ : subj. Glycera. For the spell- 


[440] 


ing see on Η. 1.--The trisyllabic tri- 
brach in the fourth foot (χλαμύδα) is 
found in Menander only here, S. 78, 
and three times in the 
White, p. 143. 

236. ἀκαροῦς δέω: I'm within an 
ace of, an expressive variation of ὀλέ- 
you δέω. ‘The nom. ἀκαρής is used in 
agreement with the subj. when the vb. 


fragments. 


expresses an action, as Men. 835 I. 
Here we might 
have had ἀκαρὴς φάσκω, but with δέω 


ἀκαρὴς παραπόλωλας. 


the gen. is required. The doctrine of 
Ammonius De diff. voc. (fr. com, adesp. 
ΒΤ KN.) ἀκαρῆ μὲν yap ἄνευ τοῦ σ σημαί- 
vec TO Bpaxd,... 
παρὰ βραχὺ ὄν) applies to the adjectival 
But it 
came to be used even with δέω. ---- κατα- 


ἀκαρὴς δὲ σημαίνει τὸ 


use, is possible that ἀκαρής 
AaBetv: represents κατέλαβον in direct 
discourse. 

238. εἰ μή ye: implies καὶ ἔφασκον 
ἄν. ἃ common ellipsis after expressions 
Which indicate that the act specified has 
not been performed, followed by the 
explanation of its non-performance. 
This ellipsis is often expressed by εἰ μὴ 
διά, οἵ. Lys. 12.60 ἀπολέσαι παρεσκευά- 
ὥντο τὴν πόλιν, (and Would have done 
50) εἰ μὴ δι ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς. Ilere we 
might have had εἰ μὴ διὰ τὸ ἐλεεῖν αὐτόν. 

239. κακοδαίμον᾽ οὕτω : Sc. ὄντα. 
οὐδ᾽ ἐνύπνιον : cil it wasn't a dream, 
either, of. Plat. Polit. 290 n adr οὐ μὴν. 
οἶμαί γε, ἐνύπνιον ἰδὼν εἶπον, Plut. Mor. 
1067 & αρέτης; δὲ 
Phor, 404 
—somnia!, ibid. 874, Plaut. Ainph 


«5 ᾿ ΝΠ" ἣν 
μηδ ἐνύπνιον, Ter. 


δε ἘΠ} deste Hes ἤν ὦ sits 


ILEPIKEIPOMENH 


17) 


> 4 Ν bee Vee | A ie , π 3 ’ 
240 ἰδών yap οἶδ᾽ ἐκ᾿ τῆς προτέρας ἐπιδημίας. 


ΔΑΟΣ (aside) 


ὁ ξένος ἀφῖκται: χαλεπὰ ταῦτα παντεχώς" 


Ν , 2 23 z \ Ἂν > , ey Aa 
τὰ πράγματ᾽ ἐστί, νὴ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω τουτονί. 
καὶ τὸ κεφάλαιον οὐδέπω λογίζομαι. 

‘\ ,ὔ x > > A A & i, ἃ 
τὸν δεσπότην, av ἐξ ἀγροῦ θᾶττον᾽ πάλιν 


740K. 
sch. Ar. P1.35 
[445] 


»Ἄ θ % row? 4 fc Ψ π 
25 ἔλθῃ, ταραχὴν olay ποήσει παραφανείς. 
Polemon rushes upon the scene, coming from the country. Fearing that Glycera 
has left his house, he indignantly reproaches Sosias and his men for their 


neglect. 


738 somnium narrat tibi, Aris- 
toph. Vesp. 1218 ἐνύπνιον ἑστιώμεθα; 
The adverbial equivalent is ὄναρ, cf. 
ν. 900. 

240. προτέρας ἐπιδημίας : see notes 
ony Vv.62; 307, Cia Plat, ΡΥ ΝᾺ 
ἀνεγνώρισέ τέ με ἐκ τῆς προτέρας ἐπιδη- 
μίας καί με ἠσπάζετο. Moschion recog- 
nizes Sosias when he sees him, v. 408. 
Anapaests in two successive feet 
occur four times in the Cairo Menan- 
der, twice in the fourth and fifth feet ; 
cf. also. ν. 278. 

241. ὁ ξένος : the hireling. Sosias is 





so referred to by Moschion also, in vy. 
408. It is 
temptuous term, like τετρώβολος below 
(v. 260) and Lat. latro, cf. Men. 150 


εὐλοιδόρητον. ὡς ἔοικε, φαίνεται τὸ τοῦστρα- 


here intended as ἃ con- 


τιώτου σχῆμα καὶ τὸ τοῦ ξένον (referring 
to ἃ particular pair, officer and man), 
Plaut. Baech. 20 latronem, suam 
qui auro vitam venditat, Most. 
354 isti qui hostiecas trium num- 
mum causa subeunt sub falas 
(see Headlam, Class. Rev. X11, 1898, 
p. 951). 

242. τοντονί : pointing to the statue 
of Apollo Aguieus which stood by the 
entrance of every house, cf. Aristoph. 


Vesp. 875 ὦ δέσποτ᾽ ἄναξ, γεῖτον ayued, 
τοὐμοῦ προθύρου προπύλαιε, Plaut. Bacch. 
172 saluto te, vicine Apollo, 
qui aedibus propinquos nostris 
accolis, Men, 740 K. ναὶ μὰ τὸν ᾿Απόλ- 
λω τουτονὶ καὶ Tas θύρας, and perhaps Iv. 
735. These statues were really rude 
cone-shaped or square columns, prob- 
ably something like the Hermae, see 
schol. Aristoph. Vesp. 875 πρὸ τῶν θυ- 
ρῶν ἔθος εἶχον κίονας εἰς ὀξὺ λήγοντας ὡς 
ὀβελίσκους ἱδρύειν εἰς τίμην ᾿Απόλλωνος 
᾿Αγυιέως, ad Thesm. 489 ᾿Απόλλων τε- 
τράγωνος. 

244. τὸν δεσπότην: left out of the 
takes 


shape, τὸν δεσπότην οἵαν ταραχὴν ποήσει 


construction as the sentence 
for οἵαν ταραχὴν ὁ δεσπότης ποήσει. The 
scholiast to Aristoph. Plut. 35 (τὸν δ᾽ υἱ- 
bv... . πευσόμενος εἰ χρὴ . . . εἶναι). quot- 
ing this passage (with τὸ δὲ for καὶ τὸ). 
construed δεσπότην as obj. of λογίζομαι, 
= περὶ τοῦ δεσπότου. --- ἐξ ἀγροῦ : Pole- 
mon is there comforting himself in the 
company of his boon companions, see 
v.55, — Oatrrov: i.e. before Davus shall 
have had time to deal with Sosias and 
to settle the affairs of Moschion.—— πά- 
λιν; he was present in one of the tirst 


scenes: see vO. 


Davus, Sostas, PoLEMON 


MENANAPOY 


IOAEMQN 


ὑμεῖς δ᾽ ἀφήκαθ᾽, ἱερόσυλα θηρία. 


᾿ἀφήκατ᾽ ἔξω τῆς θύρας τὴν ἀθλίαν: 


ΣΩΣΙΑΣ 


ry a r A} Tae tapes a2 ΠΡ 
ἢ περικερεῖς ὀργιζόμενος ἀλληὴν κόραν ; 


no ᾿ὠχεθ᾽ ὡς τὸν γείτον᾽ εὐθὺς δηλαδή, [450] 15, quat. y, p. 10 


Ν ,ὔ 5 id , > aG a ‘\ 
250 TOV μοιχόν. οἰμώζειν φράσασ᾽ ἡμῖν μακρὰ 


καὶ μεγάλα. 


246 ff. Polemon has hurried after 
his emissary without waiting for his 
return, Jealousy, and anxious fear lest 
the worst construction is to be put upon 
the conduct of Glycera as reported by 
Sosias, drive liim to ἀναπηδήσας τρέχειν. 
The care with which the poet has pre- 
pared the spectators for his coming 
(ταραχὴν οἵαν ποήσει) SUxeests the dra- 
Inatic importance of his arrival at this 
juncture, Phe abrupt question which 
he angrily puts to Sosias indicates his 
fear that the worst has happened, 

246. ἱερόσνυλα: cf. 12. 736, 852, 888, 
Q10,S. 476. The neat. form is new, — 
Onpla: Sosins and his soldiers. The 
epithet in Aristoph. Vesp. 448 ὦ κάκι- 
στον θηρίον and elsewhere, 

248 ff. Sosias is not averse to exas- 
perating his Master dy twitting dim 
about his conduet and by letting him 
think the worst about Glyeera., Tiny, 
24k as inv. 53, the poct seems to ceive 
prominence to the dneident which cave 
the play its tithe, here using the siv- 
nifieant vb... as he used) émerpémecy in 
the Epitrepontes. The aet of Polemon 
isaturally emphasized in allusions to 
Mevd y- 


: , ; 
ὅρου Πυλέμων καλὸν μειρώκιον περιέκειρενς 


the play, 


Phiilost. lip. 1G ὁ τοὶ 


Lue. Dial. meretr. 8.1 ὅστις. ὃς μήτε ζη- 
λοτύπει. . . ἣ περιέκειρεν, Anth. Pal. ὃ. 
218 τὸν σοβαρὸν Πολέμωνα. τὸν... κείραντα 
Τλυκέρας τῆς ἀλοχοῦ πλοκάμους. With 
ὀργιζόμενος cf. ν. 13. and Philost. Ep. 10 
(οἱ Menander’s Polemon) αἰχμαλώτου 
μὲν ἐρωμένης κατετόλμησεν ὀργισθείς. 

249, The assertion of Sosias is based 
upon surmise; he does not yet know 
positively that Glycera is still in the 
neighbor's house; cf. v. 265, 

250. ἡμῖν: sce on B. 303. 

251. μάντιν : « prophet! Though 
Sosias speaks from conjecture he hits 
the truth, ἐπιτυγχάνει τι. Fortunately 


Sosias does not hear this admission 


aboutmGincenis ρον othe ΠΥ sole 
Plaut. Cas. 356 (of the slave Chalinus) 
hariolum hune habeo domi, Mil. 
911 (to the slave Palaestrio) bonus 
VCC. AO CUS ACSC) Ith 
Gialamas UN 


mockinely 


quae 


sunt futur similar 


thoucht is expressed by 
Kuripides fr. 975 N. μάντις δ᾽ &pitros 
ὅστις εἰκάζει καλῶς. Of Course ὁ oTpa- 
τιώτης is Polemon, 

makes a 
DAG, 


The vb. generally implies good fortune, 


252. ἐπιτυγχάνει te: he 
lucky guess, hits the mark. Ch KF. 


ef, com, adesp., 110.7 KK. εἴτ᾽ ἐπέτυχες 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 


119 


ΔΑΟΣ (aside) 


μάντιν ὁ στρατιώτης λαμβάνει" 


τοῦτον ἐπιτυγχάνει τι. 


Polemon goes to the door of his house. 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


κόψω τὴν θύραν. 


Exit Polemon into his house. Davus approaches Sosias. 


Sc. 4. Davus, Sosras 


AAOZ 


¥ , , ve 7 \ ψ 
ἄνθρωπε κακόδαιμον. τί βούλει: τί yap €xeLs; 


ΣΏΣΙΑΣ 


3 A >} ’ 
ἐντεῦθεν εις τυχον. 


(Turning toward the speaker) 


ἀλλὰ τίς pe λοιδορεῖ ; 


[155] 


255 ἀπονενόησθε; πρὸς θεῶν. ἐλευθέραν᾽ 
» 


lal Ν yy Si Cart τ) Ὁ au 
EX ELV γυναῖκα προς βίαν του κυριου 


τολμᾶτε κατακλείσαντες: 


AAOS 


ws Tnpovpeba. 


τὸ ἊΝ ἊΣ > , r a oy 
ἐπισυκοφαντεῖς, ὅστις εἶ σύ. περιφανῶς. 


γάρ, φησι, γήμας τὸ πρότερον, εὐημερῶν 
κατάπαυσον, εἴτ᾽ οὐκ ἐπέτυχες, kTé., Plat. 
Men. 97 ὁ μὲν τὴν ἐπιστήμην ἔχων ἀεὶ 
ἂν ἐπιτυγχάνοι. 

253. τί γὰρ ἔχεις : sc. κακόν, whut's 
the matter with you 2 -- τί πάσχεις: 

254. ἐντεῦθεν εἰς τυχόν: go ἰυ.-- 
wherever you please. — λοιδορεῖ: see On 
Ε. 684. — Note that the arsis and thesis 
of the anapaest in the third foot are 
separated by punctuation, the only in- 
ASTD 
rule the parts of an anapaest with 


stance in the Cairo Menander. 


word-division GU UW, — are closely con- 
nected. White, p. 153. 
255. Throughout this dialogue the 


second pers. sing. and the second pers. 
pl. seem to be almost interchangeable, 
The pl. refers to Sosias and Polemon 
orto Davus and Moschion, the sine. to 
Sosias or Davus alone, The passage 
from sing. to plo is casy in slaves’ con- 
versation, for the slave can always be 
identified with his master, 
ef. 8. 405. 

256. Cf. EF. so. 

257. ὡς τηρούμεθα: οἷ. 


ἐλευθέραν - 


Aristoph, 
Vesp. 819 τηροῦμαι δ᾽ ὑπὸ τῶνδε. Davis 
sees that Sosias is tevine te traps him 
Into an adinission, see Vv. ὦ, 


ἡ 1 1 


found in 


258. ἐπισυκοφαντεῖς : of. 1". 1. 
complex Vb. is rare. bait 


“180 


MENANAPOY 


ΣΩΣΙΑΣ 


’,ὔ ,ὔ 3 5 » Cia, oe , a] 
πότερα νομίζετ᾽ οὐκ ἔχειν ἡμᾶς χολήν, 


250 οὐδ᾽ avdpas εἶναι: 


[400] 


ΔΑΟΣ 


μὴ μὰ Δία. τέτρωβόλους.᾽ 


. Sr Leek ve ar ah & t} q 
ὅταν δ᾽ 6 τετράδραχμος τοιούτους λαμβάνῃ 


ἢ ῥᾳδίως μαχούμεθ᾽ ὑμῖν. 


ΣΏΣΙΑΣ 


πράγματος. 


ITyper, fr. 243 Bl. and Plut. Vit. An- 
ton. 21. 4. 

259. πότερα : sometimes introduces 
a simple question, See Jebb on Soph, 
ον. (᾿ς, 333. οὐκ ἔχειν χολήν: cf. Aris- 
toph. Lys. 464 πότερον ἐπὶ δούλας τινὰς 
ἥκειν ἐνόμισας. ἢ γυναιξὶν οὐκ οἴει χολὴν 
ἐνεῖναι, Hubul. 61K. οὐκ ᾧου σύ με χολὴν 
ἔχειν. Archil. 131 B. χολὴν γὰρ οὐχ ἔχεις 
ἐφ᾽ nrare(W ilamowitz), Dem.25.27 οὐδεὶς 
ὑμῶν χολὴν οὐδ᾽ ὀργὴν ἔχων εὑρεθήσεται, 
proverb ap. schol, Aristoph, Ay. 82 ἔστι 
κἀν μύρμηκι kav σέρφῳ χολή, Men. dl hk. 

260. ἄνδρας: cf. Ter. Fun. 785 quod 
tibi nune vir videatur esse hic, 
nebulo magnus est.—ph pa Ala: 
an emphatic rejection of the idea, 
Men? God forbid! The ellipsis is espe- 
cially common after the deprecating 
μή moe, Offen accompanied by an oath, 
e.¢. Pher, G7 WN, iéov.. . - μή μοι 
“φάκους. μὰ τὸν Δία. Aristoph. Vesp. 


. pakol. 
1179 μή. μοί γε μύθοις. Tn prose ἀλλά 
would have been used to introduce the 


alternative τετρωβόλους.- τετρωβόλους: 


οἷν νὶ 275.0 Four-oholer could) be used 
as a term oof reproach because four 
Obols was the usual pay of an ordi- 
nary mercenary soldier at this time; 


SEC WME NO Teattsianlis  (arplely Evst, 


Τ 5.21 esta Ὁ ἘΠ 
ανοσιου 


1475, 29) speaks of the soldier's life as 
οὐ ip. Satn2i 


. ὀνειροπωλεῖν, εἴ ποθεν ὀβολοὶ 


τετρωβόλου βίος. 
ἐμὲ δὲς; 
τέτταρες γένοιντο. τριώβολον is the term 
for a petty sum (‘thrappence *) in 
comedy, cf. Nicoph. 12 NK. οὐκ ἄξιος τριω- 
βόλου, Plaut. Poen. 88lnon ego homo 
trioboli sum, nisi ego, ete. 

260. Ὁ τετράδραχμος: Polemon, the 
brigadier, ef. vo 174. Davus does not 
considera “ὁ four-oboler “a worthy foe, 
TeTpadpax mos is not intended, however, 
as a complimentary epithet, Polemon 
as Well as Sosias was a μισθοφόρος. Cf. 
Lue. Dial meretr. 9.5 ws βρεφυλλίοις 
ταῦτα. ὦ μισθοφόρε. ἡμῖν Χέγεις : Kor the 


»- oo» 
ἸΩΣΥ 


adj. used as noun ef. Arr Anab, 
dexagrarypos. In Lue, Dial. meretr. Ὁ ἢ 
the soldier-lover Polemon, who is mod- 
eled upon the character in this play, is 
mocked as being a διμοιρίτης, explained 
ον ΔΕ Ὁ (Nene a ΠῚ: 
409) as ὁ διπλοῦν λαμβάνων τῶν στρατιω- 
τῶν μισθόν.--- τοιούτους : pointing to So- 
sias and his miserable peltasts (v. 272). 

262. 7 ῥᾳδίως: right ql ily. 


stronely asseverative (= ἀληθῶς, ὄντως 


ἦ is 


Hesyveh.). ef. Eup. 3561. 4 πολλὰ ἐν 
μακρῷ χρόνῳ γίγνεται, Plat. Gore, ΤῸ 


7) καλῶς λέγεις. 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 


181 


AAOZ 


Que ay [εἰ 


"ἐς ὄλεθρον ἐλθέ---- τοῦτο δ᾽ εἶπα σοι -- 


ἐς ὄλεθρον᾽ ἔλθ᾽, ἀνδρῶν γελοίων οἰκέτα.-" 


265 οὐ λήψετ᾽ αὐτήν. 


[105] 


δ, τ 35) εἰς ἡ Cog tat 
apo y ὁμολογεῖτ ἔχειν; 


ΔΑΟΣ 


3 »γ See. a9, , 5 ΓΩ͂Ρ , Aa 7 
OUK ta OT ETON TO Ἐπ ΕἸ YE μέμνημαι-π--τινας 


ὑμῶν --- 


ΣΩΣΙΑΣ 


ite? AH. ΘΟ ΣΑΣ δ ey 5) SE Tey 
πόθεν ημας.: προς τιν οἴεσθ᾽, ειπε μοι, 


᾽ὔ te al Tr Ν , ΟΝ \ 
παίζειν; παραληρεῖς. κατὰ κράτος τὸ δυστυχὲς 


268 f. ἀνοσίου πράγματος : for the 
gen. of exclamation see on EK. 154. ἀνό- 
gus again in y. 001. -- ἐς ὄλεθρον : see 
on y. 202 and Εἰ. 898. ---- τοῦτο δ᾽ εἶπά 
σοι: interjected to make the curse 
more pointed, cf. v. 347. On the aor. 
referring to the immediate past and 
practically equivalent to the pres. ef. 
Eur. Suppl. 1213 σοὶ μὲν τάδ᾽ εἶπον, Cycl. 
101 χαίρειν προσεῖπα πρῶτα τὸν yepaira- 
τον, and see Blaydes on Aristoph. Ecel. 
255 τούτῳ μὲν εἶπον.- - εἶπα : the first 
pers. of this first aor, is rare in Attic 
prose but occurs more often in comedy, 
viz. inv. 198 above and in Alex. 2.3 K., 
Philem. 145, Athenio 1. 88, and Kuang. 
1} 

265. It is assumed in the restored 
text that Davus inadvertently admits 
that Glycera is within, — an admission 
that Sosias is prompt to seize upon, 

266. We can only euess at what 
Davus said, but the reply of Sosias 
If the sen- 
tence Was not completed a gesture may 


shows that it was insulting. 


have conveyed the thought of Davus. 
—ovk ἴσθ᾽ ore: dont you recall the time 


when? See van Leeuwen on Aristoph. 
Av. 1054 μέμνησ᾽ ὅτε τῆς στήλης κατετί- 
λας ἑσπέρας; -- - εὖ γε μέμνημαι : cf. Plat. 
Tim. 21 ο ὁ δὴ γέρων --- σφόδρα γὰρ οὖν 
μέμνημαι — εἶπεν. 

267. πόθεν “ἡμᾶς: us? Nonsense! 
ἡμᾶς takes up the ὑμῶν of Davus, the 
quoted word being drawn into the 
constr., as often. For examples from 
Aristophanes and Euripides of this use 
of πόθεν in indignant or scornful retort 
see Starkie on Aristoph. Vesp. 1145, 
and cf, note on S. 109 (7d) 


Aristoph, Lys. 383 μῶν θερμὸν ἦν: 


So ποῖ in 
- ποῖ 
“θερμόν “᾿ 

268. παραληρεῖς : you talk like a 
fool, ef. Avistoph. Ran, 504 εἰ δὲ mapa- 
ληρῶν ἁλώσει κἀκβαλεῖς τι paNBaxdy(schol, 
οὐδὲν πλέον τοῦ “᾿ληρῶν᾽᾽). Ey. 531 αὐτὸν 
(Cratinus) ὁρῶντες παραληροῦντ᾽ οὐκ ἐλε- 
εἴτε (50110]. διαποροῦντα καὶ ἀσχημονοῦν- 
ra). The word is used several times by 
Plato as practically the equivalent of 
ληρεῖν. eo. ΤΠ πούς 160. ἐγὼ ἄρτι παρε- 
λήρησα φάσκων. The effect of mapa- 1s 
the same as in παραφρονεῖν, mapavoery, 


παραμαίνεσθαι. παράκοπος. ele, 


182 MENANAPOY 
Ψ , an 3 5 et 3 5 res 
οἰκίδιον τοῦτ᾽ αὐτίκ᾽ ἐξαιρήσομεν. [410] 
A Ν ’ 
270 ὅπλιζε τὸν μοιχόν. 
ΔΑῸΟΣ 
»” 
πονηρόν. ἀθλιε. 
΄ ἡ, ΟῚ δὰ > oF ey’ , 
ὥσπερ Tap ἡμῖν οὖσαν el θρηνεῖς πάλαι. 
ΣΩΣΙΑΣ 
ε “ Φ Ν 4 > ¥ Γ 5! AN , 
οἱ παῖδες οἱ Ta TEAT ἔχοντες TPL πτύσαι 
re ’ xv ec , »” 
διαρπάσονται πάντα, κἂν “τετρωβόλους 
καλῇς. 
ΔΑΟΣ 
» ἰδ SRL ’ 
ἔπαιζον: εἶ σκατοφαγος. 
SOSTAS 
r πὶ 
ol πόλιν [475] 


Cs » > nw cr ALE. a | v4 
275 οἰκοῦντες οὐ καλῶς περιττοί: 
(With a threatening gesture) 


σάρκ᾽. 

269. οἰκίδιον : the second syllable 
is sometimes lengthened, as ἢ χρυσί- 
dovand similar words (Phot.).— ἐξαιρή- 
wopev: cf. Ter. Eun, 772 
aedis expugnabo. 


primum 

270. πονηρόν. sc. ἐστί, cf. IL. 17. 

271. ὥσπερ, κτέ.: Davus again tries 
to make Sosias believe that Glycera ts 
not in Myrrhina’s house, - et @pnvets 
πάλαι : ifall this time yow ve been whin- 
ing about, cf. Soph. 151. 530 (Clytem- 
hestra to Electra) πατὴρ οὗτος obs, ὃν 
θρηνεῖς ἀεί. 

272. πρὶν πτύσαι: οἵ anact quickly 
performed, cf. Epicr, 220K, ἰδεῖν μὲν av- 
τὴν (ais) θᾶττον ἐστιν 7 (Herw. for καὶ) 
πτύσαι, Theaocr, 29.27 γηραλέοι πέλομεν 
πρὶν ἀποπτύσαι. schol, Aristoph. πὶ. 
73) (Ol πρίν σε κοτύλας ἐκπιεῖν οἴνου δέκα) 
ὡς εἰ ἔλεγε ᾿ἱπρὶν εἰπεῖν σε πέντε λόγους 


ἢ πρὶν πτύσαι᾽ (Meadlam). 


λήψομαι 


274. Davus withdraws the epithet 
τετρώβολος Which he had applied in y, 
260 and substitutes for it the more 
insulting oxatopayos, Which has come 
to mean little more than ἀκάθαρτος 
(Phot., quoting Men.825K.), impurus. 
It was originally an epithet of swine, 
ef. Antiph. 126K. Cf. Aristoph. Plut. 
το ῦ λέγεις ἄγροικον dpa σύ γ᾽ εἶναι τὸν θεόν. 
-- μά Δί᾽ οὐκ ἔγωγ᾽, ἀλλὰ σκατοφάγον, 
Where ἄγροικος Sugvests σκατοφάγος. In 
Plaut. Mil. 90 the epithet stercoreus 
is applied to the soldier, — ot πόλιν ol- 
κοῦντες : succested by the epithet, by 
Which Sosias was implicitly classed 
Gf, Men. OT IN. ent 


‘ ‘ “ ᾿ 
μὲν ἄγροικος, ... καὶ τῶν κατ᾿ ἄστυ πραγμά- 


With the ἄγροικοι. 


των οὐ παντελῶς ἔμπειρος, Alcacus 26K. 
= > , yy a ἜΦΑΝ 

νῦν οὖν γένοιτ᾽ ἀστεῖος οἰκῶν ἐν πόλει. 

ἐστέ. 


275. περιττοί: sc. You city 


people have no business to be fustidious, 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 


183 


AAOZ 


> ΞΡ 3 9 ’, r ἀν] ν 2 Ὁ ’ 
ἀλλ᾽ amay ἐς κόρακας. τέως εἴσειμ᾽ ἐγώ, 


ν » r Ὁ ΩΝ κ᾿ Ln teem Lek YZ τ td 
ἕως ἔοικεν ἀνδροφαγεῖν δ΄ Σωσίας. 


Exit Davus into the house of Pataecus. Sosias continues to stand guard. Pole- 
mon comes from his house, having failed to find Glycera, and soliloquizes. 


τ 


Sc. Sostas, PoLEMON 


»- 
~ 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


᾿ξ, ἐπὶ ΄ ean Pa Peed) SN Anita γ 
σε μένει, TPOEPW σοι. Awpt, BEY ἐκτεισαι KAKOV. 


γ nm Mi rr A , ia 91 Ψ. 
φήσω: συ TOUTWYV γέγονας ALTLWTATY). 


i.e. about your eating. The country- 
man was notoriously gross, ef. Theoph. 
Char. 4. 9 δεινὸς φαγεῖν. περιττός natu- 
rally reaches this meaning through 
its development from ‘todd,’ ‘¢supe- 
rior,” to ‘‘haughty,’’ ‘‘particular,”’ 
Hippolytus is spoken of as 


a) 


“dainty. 
περισσὸς καὶ φρονῶν μέγα, Kur. Hipp. 
445, There is a similar implication in 
Plaut. Men. 169 lepide ut fastidis, 
and in Ter, Heaut. 1063 heia, ut ele- 
gans est. Perhaps the adj. to be re- 
stored is weyaprol envious ; see Crit. Ap. 

276. σάρκα: i.e. he will be a meat- 
eater. With these words Sosias may 
have made arush at Dayus as if to eat 
him alive.— Anapaests in suecessive 
feet are found in twelve instances in 
the Cairo MS., counting that in vy. 278. 

277. ἕως. kré.: so long as Sosias ap- 
pears to be a man-eater.— ἀνδροφαγεῖν: 
cf. Herod. 4.106 ἀνδροφαγέουσι δὲ μοῦνοι 
τούτων, of the Androphagi. dvdpopayos 
is an epithet of the Cyclops in Hom. 
Il. 10. 200. 

278 ff. A similarsituation, in which 
the speaker in a soliloquy carrics on 
an imaginary conversation with an- 
other, ocenrs in FE, 850 ff, 
searched his house and failed to find 


Polemon has 


Glycera, Hecanonly conjecture where 


[180] 


she has gone. He has not found Doris, 
either, who is with her mistress. He 
feels especially incensed against Doris, 
forif she had been loyal to his interests 
Glycera, as he thinks, would not have 
left him. As in the Epitrepontes, we 
are introduced into the midst of a con- 
versation In progress. 

278. σὲ μένει, xré.: it’s in store for 
you, 111 tell you in advance, Doris, to 
Joth 


the vb. and the tone of the speaker sug- 


give me full satisfuction Jor this. 


gest that something bad awaits her, cf. 
Aesch. Ag. 1277, Where Cassandra says 
ἐπίξηνον μένει (ue), Soph. Aj. G41 οἵαν ce 
μένει πυθέσθαι . &rav, Kur. Troad. 
431 οὐκ οἶδ᾽ οἷά νιν μένει πάθης AN Many 
passages in which a destiny or pun- 
ishment is spoken of. προειπεῖν also 
carries an implication of warning or 
penalty, e.g. Aristoph. Pac. 37 Lap’ οἶσθα 
θάνατον ὅτι προεῖφ᾽ ὁ Let's; ἐκτεῖσαι ka- 
κόν = δοῦναί (μοὶ) κακόν. οἵ. Men, τ τ ἄν- 
θρωπον.... κακόν τί σοι δώσοντα. ΔΌΓ}". 
211 ΙΧ. κακόν τί μοι δώσει μέγα. Observe 
that μέγα τί σοι κακὸν δώσως Which has 
heen proposed here, Comba det dean 
“TH inflict heavy purishment upon 
you," For the meter ef. S. 466. 

Pathe AN 
the speech which Polemon proposes to 


From, σὺ τούτων on Wwe have 


1s4 


MENANAPOY 


r σι » | ted Beg} , x) ~ , 
280 οὕτως ὄναιο, eye, TL πρὸς γυναῖκά ποι 

ε A 
᾿δείσασα καταπέφευγε: “πρὸς γυναῖκά ποι 
tr ἌΝ bP] Ν ἡ ἢ » > ε Ν ΤΑ 
δείσασα; καὶ yap οἴχεθ᾽ ὡς τὴν Μυρρίνην 
Γ εὖ 7 ip > 9 A > a ὕ 
THY γείτον᾽. οὕτως μοι γένοιθ᾽ ἃ βούλομαι. 


“ἔμ᾽ ἔλιπεν," οἴχεθ᾽ οὗ τὸ μέλημ᾽ ἔστ᾽, ἐνθάδε. 


[485] 


r a rm ¥» > sr Aaa Q , Γ' an ἢ 
285 τί μὴν EW αἰσχύνειν σὺ βούλει παντελῶς; 
ἀποφθερεῖ, γύναι ; ᾿ δολοῦσ᾽ evdyXos ei — 


[Lacuna of ca. 57 verses to the first Leipzig fragment. ] 


After his soliloquy and a brief conversation with Sosias, in which their further 
military operations are planned, Polemon and Sosias are joined by Pataecus 


and Habrotonon, 


Sc. 6. Sosras, PoLteEMon, PATarcus, HABROTONON 


Pataecus is a friend of both parties and is convinced that the quarrel is due to 
a misunderstanding, not to disloyalty on the part of Glycera. He has under- 
stood from the women that Glycera has fled because of Polemon’s treatment 
of her (v. 909). He advises Polemon to abandon hostile measures and to try 
to win Glycera back by gentler means. 

In introducing his mission Pataeeus probably touches upon the value of having 
a friend in time of trouble. The following quotation may be from Polemon’s 


reply: 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


. ’ὔ 9 «ε Ud i 
OUTW ποθεινόν EOTLV ομοτρβροπος φί λος. 


make to Doris when he sees her, inter- 
rupted by the supposed question of 
Doris in v. 281. 

280. οὕτως ὄναιο: asx you hope to be 
saved. Something like ἀγαθῶν is to be 
supplied in thought, ef. Dem, 28. 20 
(ἱκετεύω) πρὸς τῶν ὄντων ἀγαθῶν ὑμῖν. 
For such formu- 


διὰ τί, why? 


οὕτως ὄναισθε τούτων. 
lae see on KE. 47. — rl 
-- ποι: adds indetiniteness to the idea 
expressed in the pred., “has she taken 
refuge with a Woman somewhere," 
about equivalent to πρὸς γυναῖκα τινα, 
ef, Soph. Trach, 304 ὦ Zed τροπαῖε. μή 
ToT εἰσίδοιμί σε πρὸς τοὐμὸν οὕτω σπέρμα 


͵ 
χωρήσαντα ποι. 


ΟἿ τ νος 


281. δείσασα: Polemon may have 
heard that Glycera has expressed: fear 
of him. Fear is the motive she eave 
Myrrhina for leaving him, ef. v. 200, 
-- πρός, κτέ. : he imagines that Doris 
repeats his words with feigned sur- 
prise. 


282. καὶ yap, κτέ. τ Yes, fod Moman, 


for, ete, 


283. Polemonhasno certain knowl 
edve yet as to where she las gone, as 
his very protestation shows, 

284. ew ἔλιπεν : cf. 
λημα: her darling. In his bitterness 
Polemon chooses an endearing term, — 


νι 383. — τὸ μέ- 


ἐνθάδε: pointing to Myrrhina’s house, 


IEPIKEIPOMENH 


185 


ΣΏΣΙΑΣ 


᾿ἐκεῖθεν ἥκει χρήματ᾽ εἰληφώς. ἐμοὶ 


Lp. va 


, Ψ , Ν Ν ie a} 
345 ITLOT EVE * προδίδωσίν σε και TO στρατόπεδον. 


286. ἀποφθερεῖ: will you perish from 
my sight? Οἷον. 408, 5. 161, Ε΄. 398, 
and Aristoph. Eq. 802 οὐκ és κόρακας 
ἀποφθερεῖ; Nub. 789). 

Fr, 391. ποθεινόν : welcome. —ép6- 
τροπος: and therefore sympathetic. 
From the words of Pataecus to Pole- 
mon in this connection may come the 
two passages from Menander which 
Stobaeus quotes, without mention of 
the play, under the topic περὶ ὀργῆς, 
viz. GB0K. οὐκ ἔστιν ὀργῆς, ws ἔοικε, 
φάρμακον 
που φίλου. and 574 εἰ καὶ σφόδρ᾽ ἀλγεῖς, 


ἀλλ᾽ ἢ λόγος σπουδαῖος ἀνθρώ- 
μηδὲν ἠρεθισμένος πράξῃς προπετῶς" 
ὀργῆς γὰρ ἀλογίστου κρατεῖν | ἐν ταῖς τα- 
ραχαῖς μάλιστα τὸν φρονοῦντα δεῖ. Αἱ 
the end of the play (vy. 898) Pataecus 
again warns Polemon against acting 
rashly (προπετὲς μηδὲ ἕν). Consistent in 
tone and thought with the above is fr. 
51, which may be from the same con- 
text, τῷ μὲν τὸ σῶμα διατεθειμένῳ Kakas | 
χρεία᾽ στ᾿ ἰατροῦ, τῷ δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν φίλου -᾿ 
λύπην γὰρ εὔνους οἶδε θεραπεύειν λόγος. 
344 ff. It is 


persons are present and participate in 


noticeable that four 


this scene, as in the final scene of the 
play (vv. 907 ff.). 
plays an analysis of the action makes 
it seem probable that more than three 


Elsewhere in these 


actors were used to fill the roles, but 
only here and in the final scene are 
more than three engaged at the same 
time. A few four-actor scenes occur in 
the Old Comedy, e.g. Aristoph. Ran. 
1414 ff., Av. 1579 ff., and there is evi- 
dence of the use of fouror more actors 


in many of the classical tragedies and 


comedies, There seems to have been 
no restriction placed upon the poet as 
regards the number of actors he should 
employ, in spite of the persistent tra- 
dition to the contrary ; see Rees, The 
So-called Rule of Three Actors in the 
Classical Greek Drama. 

The distribution of speakers here 
adopted is based upon the following 
considerations, briefly stated: Patae- 
cus has the role of mediator; he desires 
to break up the siege and have a quiet 
talk with Polemon. To him, therefore, 
are assigned vv. 346 ff. and εἴσω... ἄγει 
vy. 959 ὅς Sosias, obviously the speaker 
of vv. 844 f., is eager to continue the 
siege; he resents the interference of 
Pataecus but has to submit to the au- 
To him, there- 
fore, are given, besides ἧττον. . . μέλλον 
vv. 348 ff., also vv. 351b, 3855 f., and 
851 Ὁ. The words εὖ λέγεις In Vv. 850 can 


thority of Polemon. 


hardly indicate approval of the speech 
of Sosias; they must refer rather to 
the proposal of Pataceus inv. 346, We 
must assume, accordingly, that Pole- 
mon intervenes, speaking vy. 850), 
dala, and 352. obrogt. . - é&6\A\voe νι 
356 f. may appropriately be given to 
Polemon if punctuated as a question. 
V. 358 a is assigned to Habrotonon, 
since vy. 359 ff imply that she has 
taken some part in inducing Sosias to 
Wilh WOM Vesoaontentilumes sate, 
see below, 

344. ἐκεῖθεν : i.e. from the enemy's 
house where Glycerivand Mosehionare. 

ἥκει: subj. Pataccus, Who has come as 


an intermediary. χρήματ᾽ εἰληφώς : 


MENANAPOY 


ILATATKOZ (to Sosias) 
΄ δι ΄ o , Ν , 
Kabevo ἀπελθών. ω μάκαριε. τας μαχας 
΄ theta Liye Ma « ΄ N A 
ταυτας €aoas. ουχ υγιαινεις = Οὐ λαλῶ od 
λοις , , , 
vy) TOV, μεθύεις γάρ. 
ΣΏΣΤΙΑΣ (in amazement) 
i a ΄ >» 
ἥττον OS πέπωκ LOWS [5] 
, Cert \ , ΨΩ ε » 
κοτύλης. προειδὼς παντα ταῦθ 5 O δυστυχής. 
300 τηρῶν T ἐμαυτὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον: 
ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ (to Pataecus, aside) 
εὖ λέγεις. 
(To Sosias) 


F. ed , 
πείσθητί μοι. 


ΣΩΣΤᾺΣ (in ἃ tone of submission) 


΄,΄ ἐν: XN a , 3, fe 
τί δ᾽ ἐστὶν ὃ κελεύεις ἐμοί: 


ef. Dem, 19, 209 καὶ χρήματ᾽ εἰληφέναι 
φησὶν ἐμέ, αὐτὸς εἰληφὼς ἢ μετειληφώς. 

345. It is clear from the charge of 
Sosins that Pataecus las made a pro- 
posal to Polemon that he shall with- 
draw lis forees from before the house : 
this bs the aeroof es treason.” NSosias, 
patted up with his own importance 
and half drunk, cuts a ridiculous fig- 
ure, Ghatho in Per. Bun, 814 also re- 
fers to the mmanipulus frum as an 
exerei tum, 

346. μακάριε: the tone is concilia- 
The word im- 


ISG VAR 


iy qoul te ΠΣ 


plies, perhaps, a certain deeree of 
familiarity, but not more than is ap- 
propritte onthe part of asuperior when 
speaking toa drunken inferior, 


348. νὴ Tov: on my word. The 


hiaame of the cod ds omitted, as often 
in the nective formatia, esc. Aristoph, 
tin. ToV4 ga πύνς Men, 300K of ue 
Tyee Welhaveguietent testimony (Std), 


Phot., Hust.) to this ellipsis with both 
adverbs, see esp. Philo De spec. lege. 
πὸ τ ΠΥ ΚΠ ss hesexqiiierticne 
emphatic language of Pataecus shows 
that Sosias is amazed and theredtulous 
at the charge ody ὑγιαίνεις. ὃς" i.e. 
ἐὼν ἀεθύω Os, KTE.: 

349. πάντα ταῦτα: «ll these contin- 
geneies that have arisen and the con- 
sequent responsibilities that would 
devolve Upon him as the lieutenant of 
Polemon, 

350. τηρῶν. κτέ. : ic. keeping him- 
self sober for the emergency, —ev λέ- 
yes: Polemon speaks with approval of 
Pataecus’ advice to Sostits. 

351. ἐμοί : the const. of κελεύειν With 
the dat. is rarely found in Attie, viz. 
hin ΟΞ where ie may ον 
epie influence, aime Plat. Rep. ante, 
Wheredtis thonehtto represent the lune 
ettave of satlors, Tt is found, however, 


in dater prose, and may have been used 


ILEPIKEIPOMENH 


187 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


> “ > “ a > x ΄ 2 aS Lee . 
ὀρθῶς EpwTas* νυν ἔγω δή σοιγ ερω΄ (Turning to Habrotonon) 


“Αβρότονον, ἐπισήμηνον. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ (to Polemon) 


» \ 
€LOW TOUTOVL 


[10] 


΄ > , , “ ἃ » 
πρώωτον ἀπόπεμψον τοὺς τε παῖδας ovs αγει. 


ΣΏΣΤΑΣ (to Pataecus) 


an. A ~ 2 ee 4 
355 KAKWS διοικεῖς TOV πόλεμον. (To Polemon) διαλύεται. 


δέον λαβεῖν κατὰ κράτος. 


here purposely to characterize Sosias ; 
but ἐμέ is an easy correction. 

352. ἐγὼ δή σοί ye: you shull cer- 
tainly have an answer from me. ‘The 
combination of words is striking and 
indicates that something unexpected 
is to follow. He will give the word of 
command through Habrotonon. 

353 ff. The rdle of Habrotonon in 
this scene was undoubtedly explained 
at the time of her entrance and by her 
conduct at that time, but from the 
scanty indications which are preserved 
it is difficult to make out. 
clear, however, from the manner i 


It seems 


which Polemon addresses her in vy. 
359 ff., that she is not his mistress, as 
we might assume on the analogy of 
her namesake in the Epitrepontes; it 
is equally clear, moreover, that Pole- 
mon expected her to exercise some in- 
fluence upon Sosias. It is possible that 
she has strolled upon the scene and has 
been engaged in a flirtation with the 
tipsy Sosias. 

353. ἐπισήμηνον: give the signal 
or command. The vb. is used in this 
meaning of the trumpeter, who com- 


municates the commander's signal, of 
the deity, who gives a sign or omen, or 
of persons or Inanimate objects, which 
give indications or symptoms of some 
sort. Polemon’s reason for appealing 
to Habrotonon is apparently that given 
below, “T thought you would aceom- 
Habrotonon prob- 


ss 


plish something. 
ably complies by making appropriate 
gestures to Sosias, The vb. occurs in 
Men. 501 and 1011 1..—etow: into Pole- 
mon'shouse, Pataecus interrupts, wish- 
ing to make sure that he and Polemon 
are left alone, — τοντονί: Sosias. 
354. παῖδας : the peltasts οὖν. 272. 
355. διαλύεται: He's for dishandiny. 
The vb. is used both of ‘disbanding ~ 
anarmy and of *smaking up a quar 
rel, Since the preceeding command is 
towithdraw the army, the former inter- 
pretation is to be preferred, Cf. Ter. 
Eun. 8lft iam dimitto exercitum? 
Sosias protests against disbanding, 
When the right procedure would be τὸ 
capture by assault the enemy's strong- 
hold, The obj. of Nagety is 1 adily wie 
derstood: ef. the words of Sostias in 


vv. 2608 fh 


1838 


MENANAPOY 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


ὁ Πάταικος. ἐξόλλυσιν ; 


οὑτοσί με yap, 


ΣΏΣΙΑΣ 


> ¥ 5: :ἢ ΄ 
ουκ ἔσθ γέμων. 


F8, quat. y, p. 13 
e 


ABPOTONON (coaxingly) 


πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, ἀνθρωπ᾽. ἀπελθ᾽. 


ΣΩΏΣΙΑΣ 


ἀπέρχομαι. 


Exit Sosias into the house, followed by his army. 


NMOAEMQN 


»” , AY , «ε ’ 
OLY σε ποιήσειν TL’ Kal yap, Λβρότονον, 


i) ἔχεις TL πρὸς πολιορκίαν σὺ χρήσιμον. 


δύνασαί τ᾽ ἀναβαίνειν. περικαθῆσθαι. ---- ποὺ στρέφει. [75] 


’, > > , γ᾽ fa , 
λαικάστρι᾽: ἡσχύνθης : μέλει τούτων TL σοι: 


356 f. οὑτοσί. κτέ.: what, is it this 
notin, Pataeenus, that’s proving the death 
ofme? Vhestuvestion of course is that 
it's Sosias himself. Phe vb. conveys 
the double idea of mining one’s cause 
and boring one to death. For the lat- 
teret. Aristophl. Pace. 319 égoNerreé vo ὧτ- 
δρες. εἰ μὴ τῆς βοῆς ἀνήσετε. 

857. ἐξόλλυσιν : -ὕει in 1“. 


οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ἡγεμών : and should therefore 


pad 


not sive orders, as he has presumed to 
do. ἡγεμών elances at the profession of 
Polemon; itis the technical term for 
captain of mercenaries, 

358. avOpwre: of. 1. 220. We may 
assume that THabrotonon speaks these 
words kindly, and not roughly, to the 
drunkeniman. Thoneh Sosias had been 
sulky te Polemon. he vields at onee te 
ΠῚ τ τ. Tf the command Isspoken 


by Polemen. itis peremptory and tinal, 


Habrotonon, offended, departs. 
359 ff. 


spoken by the speaker οὖν. ὅθ ας and, 


These vv. are manifestly 
since Pataecus speaks vv. 365 ff, they 


must be eiven to either Polemon or 


Sosias. But Sosias is just quitting the 
seenes the charms of Habrotonon have 
proved more effective with him than 
the advice of Pataecus. Ttis not likely 
that he would insult her, Both) yas- 
saves, however, suit Polemon'’s mond, 
The idea of using THabrotonon to cet 
rill of Sosias oeeurs. te hime im ve 343, 
and he now finds his judgement con- 
firmed (μην σε ποιήσειν τι). Tis taunts 
wt the poor eirl are im bad taste, but 
invitability. characterizes lis present 
mood: cf. the following scene, 

S61. The siece terms are used with 
doublemeanines, ἀναβαίνειν: ct. Men. 
HIN, ἐπὶ AN MARE πρὸς τεῖχος Arasainwr. 
Perens sor 


περικαθῆσθαι: it. 12) ὁ 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 


Sc. 7. PoLtemon, PatarEcus 


189 


ITATAIKOS 


> ἂν 
εἰ μέν τι τοιοῦτ᾽ ἦν. Πολέμων. οἷόν φατε 


ε “ Ν , Ν Ν ὡς 
υμεις. TO γέγονος, και γαμεέτην γυναῖκά CouU:=— 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


«is οἷον λέγεις. Πάταικε. διαφέρει δὲ τί; 


᾽ν 
ἐγὼ γαμετὴν νενόμικα ταύτην. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


τίς ἐσθ᾽ ὁ δούς: 


μὴ βόα. [80] 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


» Ἂν ,΄ ΕῚ ’ 
EMOL TLS; “αὐτὴ: 


HATATKOX 


ν > ~ , τ a 
NPETKES αντΊ) ταχα τεως. 


στρατὸς αὐτοῦ, πόλιν περικατήμενος. “The 
rough and insulting lanzuave is caleu- 
lated to drive Habrotonon away. She 
Was probably turning to go With Sosias. 

364. ὑμεῖς : those on your side. We 
can see that Polemon has been eiving 
Pataecus his version of the affair. At 
the present time Pataecus must  be- 
lieve that Glyeera has compromised 
herself with Mosehion, but urges the 
argument that, since she is not legally 


Polemon’s wife, Polemon can neither 


force her to return to him nor take 


summary vengeance Upon Moschion 
aS μοιχός. 

366. Just as Clinia in Ter, Heaut. 
104 regarded Antiphila as amicam 
DEO Pe ἀπ 1 ay AexOmse Toro! 

367. ὁ δούς: the person whe cave 
the bride away, ef. κοι], 26. 201. ὁ dc 
The 


κύριος alone could lesally bestow a 511] 


δοὺς ἐπιφανής, ἐπιφανὴς ὁ \ausavur. 


,’ ~ 
πανυ καλῶς. 


om > > ΄ 
νυν ὃ ουκετι. 


in marriage. Sinee Glycera gave her- 
self away, neither party was bound 
to the Which the old 
woman Clearly recognized (v. 24 βέβαιον 


union, a fact 
οὐθέν). There is no real contradiction 
between Polemon’s statement and that 
of Nenota inv. 10. Cf. the question 
Which Micio puts to Neschinus in Ter, 
Ad.670 quis despondit? quis de- 
(Ut Boe τ ἐπ ον (kupcos) lit sy re ibs 
quis est ?— the questions implying a 
doubt as to the legality of Pamphila’s 
connection with lim, 

The knowledve which Pataeens here 
incidentally acquires about the antece- 
dents of Glycera plays a partin the furs 


therdevelopment of the pole NCCE Nod muisly 


avirl whe had ne legal cuardian (ν΄ 
oof) was of doubtful parentage. 
SSL eens ore erate 


ΠΣ Avistophy. Thesm, 440 reas μὲν οὖν 


. vip δεῖ 


Τέως LEB, 


190 


MENANAPOY 


> , 7 > > Ν , td 
ἀπελήλυθεν᾽ δ᾽ οὐ κατὰ τρόπον σου χρωμένου 


370 αὐτῇ. 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


ta ’ 9 Ἂν Vd , A 
τί φῆς: OV κατὰ τρόπον; τουτί με τῶν 


’, , > » uA 
πάντων λελύπηκας μαλιστ᾽ εἰπών. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἐρεῖς, [85] 


A > 909 9 A ε ἃ \ ‘ A 
TOUT 010 ἀκριβῶς. ὡς ὃ μὲν νυνὶ ποεῖς 


> lA , > A“ ’ὔ th x i? 
ἀπόπληκτόν ἐστι. ποῖ φέρει yap, ἢ τίνα 


» ε a > 2) 9 4 , 
ἄξων; εαυτὴς COT EKELV7) KUPLa. ° 


Lp. »B = E8, 1.18 


AN \ ἮΝ, oN a ὃ Ἄ 
375 λοιπὸν TO πείθειν TW KAKWS ιακειμένῳ 


> “Ὁ a te} , 
EPWVTL Τ ἐστιν. 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


ὁ δὲ διεφθαρκὼς ἐμοῦ 


[90] 


¥ ee > > A > 
αποντος αὐτὴν ουκ ἀδικεῖ μ i 


HMATAIKOS 


Y ye Sy A 
WOT ἐγκαλεῖν 


> A aes A » > ¥\ 2) ΄ 
ἀδικεῖ O ἐκεινος. AV TOT ἔλθῃς εις λόγους - 


369. οὐ κατὰ τρόπον : in unseemly 
fashion. 

370. Polemon is hurt that Pataecus 
should remind him of his disgraceful 
act of violence, — Note that the v. ends 
With theart., asalso, apparently, ve 172. 

373. ἀπόπληκτον: crazy, cf. Dem. 
34.16 μὴ γὰρ οἴεσθέ με οὕτως ἀπόπληκτον 
εἶναι καὶ παντελῶς μαινόμενον, 1d. 21. 145 
οὐχ οὕτως εἴμ᾽ ἄφρων οὐδ᾽ ἀπόπληκτος ἐγώ, 
EK. 344. — φέρει: the vb. suceests a lack 
of purpose or volition on the part of 
the subject, cf. the admonition of Soc- 
rates in Plat. Cleit. 4074 ποῖ φέρεσθε, 
ὥνθρωποι. and φερόμενος in Hh. 508. 

374. ἄξων: supplementary partic. 
With @épectnderstood, tocaptire whom ? 


376. ἐρῶντί te: makes explicit the 


preceding partic., thatis, the (unhappy) 
lover.— διεφθαρκώς: Menander uses also 
the second perf. διεφθορώς (fr. 3 ᾿ς 
which Attic writers prefer for the 
trans. meaning, though the first perf, 
is found occasionally. Euripides in the 
Medea uses the first perf. inv. 226, the 
second in y. 349, both transitively. 

377. amovros: sce on VV. 37, 62, 
249. — wore, κτέ. : accompanied by an 
aftirmative gesture, In prose we should 
have ἐγκαλεῖν μέν to indicate the limi- 
tation; cf. v. 868. 


379. ἐκβιάσει: sc. 


αὐτήν, take her 


from lim by foree, ef. the pass. in 


Soph. Phil. 1128 ὦ τόξον φίλον, ὦ φίλων 
χειρῶν ἐκβεβιασμένον. --- ἔχει : involves, 


adicits of. 


INEPIKEIPOMENH 


191 


εἰ δ᾽ ἐκβιάσει, δίκην ὀφλήσεις - οὐκ ἔχει 


380 τιμωρίαν γὰρ τἀδίκημ᾽, ἔγκλημα δέ. 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


Os Ὁ A 
ove apa νυν —; 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


“0.» Φ an 
ovo apa νυν. 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


ΦΙΨ 
οὐκ οἷδ᾽ ὅ τι 


[95] 


λέγω, μὰ τὴν Δήμητρα, πλὴν ἀπάγξομαι. 


Γλυκέρα με καταλέλοιπε, καταλέλοιπέ με 


> “ 
Γλυκέρα, Ilarauk’. ἀλλ᾽ εἴπερ οὕτω σοι δοκεῖ 


, , Gy Ν XN , 
385 πράττειν. --- συνήθης ἦσθα γὰρ καὶ πολλάκις 


λελάληκας αὐτῇ. --- πρότερον ἐλθὼν διαλέγου 


ἊΝ «ε 
πρέσβευσον, ἱκετεύω σε. 


[100] 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ (starts to go) 


€ ~ nw 
Opas, ποειν. 


380. τιμωρίαν: private vengeance. 
-- ἔγκλημα: a legal complaint, made 
before Witnesses, preliminary to a suit, 
Which in this case would be a γραφὴ 
μοιχείας against Moschion. In Attic 
law τιμωρία was permitted in such a 
case, though probably only when the 
offender was caught in the act. A law 
quoted in Dem, 23. 53 (cited by Korte) 
gives the cases in which one was per- 
mitted to kill without being liable to 
prosecution for murder. One of them 
is ἐάν τις ἀποκτείνῃ. .. ἐπὶ παλλακῇ ἣν 
ἂν én’ ἐλευθέροις παισὶν ἔχῃ. Though the 
Attic law was not operative in Pole- 
mon’s case — for he isa Corinthian and 
the action of the play is laid in Corinth 
— yet the law of Corinth was probably 
essentially the same as that of Athens. 
See on v, 805, 


i“ 4 “ 
TOUTO μοι δοκεῖ, 


381. οὐδ᾽ dpa viv: and may I then 
not now —? He was about to ask ἔξεστί 
μοι τιμωρῆσθαι αὐτόν; When Pataecus 
interrupted him by repeating his words 
ina tone of positive assertion. apa is 
for ἄρα metri causa, as often in the 
Sachtschal De 
serm, metro accom., p. 10. 

382. πλήν : cf. KE. 266.— amdytopat : 
Οὐ νυ Soe 

385. ἦσθα: as next-door neighbor 
of Glycera Pataeeus had become well 


poets ; see com. Gr, 


acquainted with her during Polemon’s 
absence, This he has donbtless ΟΝ τ 
plained to Polemon in the early part 
of the scene. 

388. ὁρᾷς: cf. ὡς ὁρᾷς ν΄ 14). As he 
says this he turns to go, but Polemon 
detains him, ἰδού is more often used to 


indicate compliance with a request, 


MENANAPOY 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ (detains him) 


δύνασαι δὲ δήπουθεν λέγειν, 


Παάταικε: 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


μετρίως. 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


ἀλλὰ μήν, Πάταικε, δεῖ. 


9 > ἊΝ A , 
3%) αὐτὴ στὶν ἡ σωτηρία TOV πραγματος. 


> ΝΥ Ν » Δ te 2 Yd te A 

ἐγὼ yap εἴ τι πώποτ᾽ ἠδίκηχ᾽ ὅλως --- 

> ἣν A , Ψ' 

εἰ μὴ διατελῶ πάντα φιλοτιμούμενος --- 


[105] 


E4, quat. y, p. 12 


TOV κόσμον αὐτῆς εἰ θεωρήσαις --- 


IATAIKOS 


¥ 
EXEL. 


καλῶς 


IOAEMQN 


θεώρησον. Ilatauke, πρὸς θεῶν 


305 μᾶλλον μ᾽ ἐλεήσεις. 


ΠΑΤΆΤΙΚΟΣ (aside) 


“ 
> 


ὦ Πόσειδον. 


HOAE MON 


ἐνδύμαθ᾽ ot’, οἵα δὲ φαίνεθ᾽ ἡνίκ᾽ av 


389. μετρίως : cf. 1“. 
τρις ἡ τορι. 

990. Cie F201 

391 ff. Polemon is so agitated, in 
urging his merits as a husband before 


19 μετρίῳ γε 


his ambassador, that he cannot com- 
plete his sentences, 

392. πάντα φιλοτιμούμενος : in «ll 
things zealous toward herlvef. Nem. Oee, 
4. 24 ἀεὶ ἐν γέ τι φιλοτιμούμενος. 

393. As an illustration of his de- 
votion to Glyeera Polemon thinks of 
the finery he has given her. — καλῶς 
ἔχει - Pataeens does not care to inspect 


Glyveera’s Wardrobe ane tries to decline 


δεῦρ᾽ ἴθι. 
[110] 


politely ; but Polemon will not let him 
off. For the polite phrase of refusal 
ef. Antiph., 165 KW. Boudec. . . mevety, 

καλῶς ἔχει μοι, Theocr, 15. 5 ἔμβαλε καὶ 
ποτίκρανον. -ἔχει κάλλιστα. «Δ ΥἼΚΤΟ}}). 
Ran. 508 κάλλιστ᾽, 
Cay 


hiene, 


ἐπαινῶν Hor. Mp. 1. 
quantum vis tolle. — be- 

396. ἐνδύματα: elsewhere only in 
late writers. - ota δὲ φαίνεται : Pole- 
mons thoughts pass from. Glycera’s 
finery to her person. The poignaney of 
his crief seeks to find expression in the 
representation to dis friend of the 


charms of the woman he has lost. 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 


193 


λάβῃ τι τούτων: οὐ γὰρ ἑοράκεις ἴσως. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἔγωγε . 


TIOAEMQN 


καὶ yap τὸ μέγεθος δήπουθεν ἢν 


ἄξιον ἰδεῖν. ἀλλὰ τί φέρω νῦν εἰς μέσον 


400 τὸ μέγεθος, ἐμβρόντητος, ὑπὲρ ἄλλων λαλῶν; 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ (reassuringly) 
μὰ τὸν Δί᾽, οὐδέν. 
: TOAEMQN 
ov yap; adda δεῖ γέ oe 

ἰδεῖν: βάδιζε δεῦρο. 


[115] 


IATAIKOS 
, > > τ 
παραΎ 5 ELOEPKX OM AL. 
Polemon leads the way into his house, Pataecus following. Mosthion appears at 
the door of the house of Pataecus. He looks about anxiously for the enemy. 
When he sees Polemon entering the other house with Pataecus, and none of 


the army present, he comes out of the house, reassured. 


397. λάβῃ: puts on, a proper aor. 
of ἔχειν, which is common in the sense 
of ‘‘ wear.” dvadaBety is similarly used, 
e.g. in Plutarch and Lucian. — ἑοράκεις : 
éwp-, the reading of © and of L second 
hand, would give an undesirable ana- 
paest beginning with γάρ. Some schol- 
ars regard ἑοράκειν (-Kn) as the correct 
Attic spelling of the plpf., and the 
short vowel in the pf. isin fact required 
by the meter in many passaves. 

398. καὶ γάρ, κτέ. : why, just the 
magnificence of them was, I dare say, 
ete. τὸ μέγεθος and τὸ μεγάλειον Were 
employed by writers on aesthetics in 
the meaning of “grandeur,’? ‘maj- 
esty,’’ ‘“‘sublimity,’? e.g. of style by 
Longinus 12.4. Cf. Acts 2.1174 μεγα- 
λεῖα τοῦ θεοῦ and in Byzantine Greck τὸ 
μέγεθός cov *¢your Majesty.’ 

399. φέρω, xré.: bring up as a sub- 


jectof conversation, alludeto, ef. Herod. 
4. 97 ἐγὼ δὲ γνώμην... és μέσον φέρω. 
400. ἐμβρόντητος : κι΄. ἐγώ, scutter- 
brained, lit. thunderstruck, attonitus, 
cf. δι 190. — ὑπέρ = περί. a usage com- 
mon in the orators and occasional in 
other writers, ef. Pet. fr. 2, p. 94, Men. 
21 NK. ὑπὲρ μὲν οἴνου μηδὲ γρῦ, τίτθη, 
héye.—GAAwv: indifferent things. This 
meaning developed naturally out of the 
Kur, TA. 1135 otk 
ἄλλ᾽ ἐρωτῶ, καὶ σὺ μὴ λέγ᾽ ἄλλα μοι. 

401. οὐδέν : not at all, sc. ef ἐμμρόν- 
τητος. 

402. The fact that Polemon insists 


so persistently that Pataeeus shall see 


usual meaning, cf. 


Glycera’s finery raises the suspicion 
that the poet has a larger motive than 
merely to make Polemon ridiculous. 
See the explanation at the beginning 
of the third act. 


194 


MENANAPOY 


ACT IV 


Sc. 1. ΜΟΒΟΗΙΟΝ 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


(To Polemon and Pataecus as they disappear into the other house) 


οὐκ εἰσφθερεῖσθε θᾶττον ὑμεῖς ἐκποδών ; 


te ¥ 5 ΄ , 
λόγχας ἔχοντες ἐκπεπηδήκασί μοι. 


End of Lp. νβ 


(Again looking about him) 


405 οὐκ av δύναιντο δ᾽ ἐξελεῖν νεοττιὰν 


ελιδόνων. οἷοι πάρεισ᾽. OL βάσκανοι. 
X ’ ρ 


SS Sapte I 


403 ff. Moschion was sent into the 
house by Davus at v, 232 to wait fora 
few days until Glycera should languish 
for him. What seems to him an endless 
time has elapsed, during which he has 
been afraid either to leave the house, 
invested as it was by the ‘“‘army ” 
under the command of Sosias, or to 
go into the women’s apartments to 
visit Glycera, in view of his mother’s 
apparently hostile attitude (vv. 199 ff.) 
toward his attentions to Glycera and 
of the reported objections of Glycera 
herself (vv. 223 ff.). At length, when 
he can stand the suspense no longer, 
he comes forth from the house, taking 
pains to avoid the enemy, 

403. εἰσφθερεῖσθε : aye. in with you, 
and the devil take you! Moschion re- 
peats the εἰσ- of the last word of Patae- 
cus, εἰσέρχομαι. This compound oeeurs 
InN. 372 εἰσφθάρηθι. ut not elsewhere 
in this sense; cf. ἀποφθείρου in S, 161 
and see on νυ. 286. The compound ἀνε- 
πάταξε in In, O74 is also invented for 
the occasion, 

404. Better to express his contempt 
(simulated, however) for the forces of 
the enemy, Moschion adopts the mock- 


tragic style. The verse sugeests Hur, 


[120] 


ἀλλὰ E€vous”, φήσ᾽, “ εἶχον." εἰσὶ δ᾽ οἱ ξένοι 


Phoen, 1382 (Eteocles and Polyneices) 
ἧσσον δὲ λόγχαις. but is quoted from no 
known passage. λόγχη is distinctively 
tragic and is used by the comic poets 
ouly for pompous effect, as Aristoph, 
Ran. 1016 (Aeschylus speaks) ἀλλὰ πνέ- 
ovras δόρυ καὶ λόγχας Kal λευκολόφους TpU- 
φαλείας. 

406: (Ὁ Dial. 


Where the successful rival says to Pole- 


Lue. meretr, 9. 5, 
Mon ws βρεφυλλίοις ταῦτα, ὦ μισθοφόρε, 
ἡμῖν λέγεις καὶ μορμολύττῃ: σὺ γὰρ ἀλεκ- 
τρυόνα πώποτε ἀπέκτεινας ἢ πόλεμον εἶδες: 

406. οἱ βάσκανοι: the scurvy kines. 
The word originally implied) envious 
and malicious action, esp. the casting 
ofathesenHeouce) AGhintee, OLsthiseuyedn= 
Ing may possibly be felt here, since 
Moschion, thinking himself the fortu- 
hate lover, attributes φθόνος to Pole- 
mon, Cf. Aristoph. Eq. 105. where one 
of the slaves of Demos says of the 
Paphlagontan ἐπίπαστα λείξας δημιό- 
Tpall ὁ βάσκανος. 

407. ξένους : mercenary troops. So- 
Φησί Davis. 
We are to suppose that when Dayus 


SlAS MINE Senos. Veet, 


followed Mosehion into the house (ν. 
272 .¢ef. v. 419) he reported the arrival 
of theenemy, magnifying, of course, the 


IHEPIKEIPOMENH 


195 


ou περιβόητοι — (Catching sight of Sosias) 


4 @ € vd 
Σωσίας εἷς οὑτοσί. ---- 


πολλῶν γεγονότων ἀθλίων κατὰ τὸν χρόνον 


Ν A Ν ἣν ΄ , a ᾿ 
410 τὸν νῦν, --- φορὰ γὰρ γέγονε τούτου νῦν καλὴ 


τὸν 
ἐν ἅπασι τοῖς Ἕλλησι δι᾽ ὅ τι δή ποτε --- [125] 


A » 
οὐδένα νομίζω τῶν τοσούτων ἀθλιον 


» ΟΣ ε > N a 3 , 
ἄνθρωπον οὕτως ws ἐμαυτὸν ζῆν ἐγώ. 


ε Ν ’ > > A > ἣν e oN 
ὡς yap τάχιστ᾽ εἰσῆλθον, οὐδὲν ὧν ἀεὶ 


» > 5 ?, 3 ἣν Ν Ἂν , 
415 εἴωθ᾽ ἐποίουν, οὐδὲ πρὸς τὴν μητέρα 


εἰσῆλθον. οὐ τῶν ἔνδον ἐκάλεσ᾽ οὐδένα 


[130] 


πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς οἶκον ἐλθὼν ἐκποδὼν 


lol \ 
ἐνταῦθα κατεκείμην συνεστηκὼς πάνυ. 


formidable character of the “army.” 
-- εἶχον : Polemon and his party. 
408. Sosias and his troops were 
sent into the house of Polemon in y, 
358. 
to as present, We must suppose that he 
has come out again. He is probably 
lying ina drunken stupor in the portico 
(v. 846), or skulking in the distance, — 
eis: according to an old proverb fr. 


But, since Sosias is here pointed 


com. adesp. 679 K. εἷς ἀνήρ, οὐδεὶς ἀνήρ. 
409 ff. An obscure reference to the 
troubled state of affairs in Greece. Sce 


- 


p. 145 and on ν. ὃ. Euripides begins 
his diatribe against athletes in a simi- 
lar way (fr. 282 Ν.), κακῶν yap ὄντων 
μυρίων καθ᾽ ᾿λλάδα, οὐδὲν κάκιόν ἐστιν 
ἀθλητῶν γένους. 

410. φορά: crop, cf. Dem. 18.61 παρὰ 
yap τοῖς “λλησιν, οὐ τισὶν ἀλλὰ ἅπασιν 
ὁμοίως, φορὰν προδοτῶν καὶ δωροδόκων καὶ 
θεοῖς ἐχθρῶν συνέβη γενέσθαι. Aeschin. 
3. 2934.-- τούτου: i.e. τῶν ἀθλίων con- 
sidered as a product. 

411. δι᾿ ὅ τι δή ποτε: whatever the 
reason may be. 

412 ff. The order of words is nicely 


calculated to give the desired emphasis. 
-- οὐδένα τῶν τοσούτων : not one vf them 
all, —éyad: tacked on at the end, has 
about the emphasis of *inmy opinion.” 
414. εἰσῆλθον : y. 252. 
415. ἐποίουν : on the spelling see 
notes on If. 1] and να 176. 


416. εἰσῆλθον: ic. into the part 


of the house reserved for the women, 


the γυναικωνῖτις, οἷ. Men. 519 KK. νῦν 
δ᾽ εἰς γυναικωνῖτιν εἰσιόνθ᾽ ὅταν ἰδῶ παρά- 
σιτον. 

417. οἶκον : the large common liv- 
ing room or perhaps the chamber re- 
served for the men, ἀνδρών or ἀνδρωνῖτις. 
οἶκος. except in idiomatic prepositional 
phrases (e.g. κατὰ τὸν οἶκον), Usually 
means t room" da classical Ate prose 
and in comedy, ef. Phryi, 661, émra- 
κλινος οἶκος ἣν. εἶτ᾽ ἐννεάκλινος ἕτερος οἶκος, 
‘house’? only inlyrieand tragic poetry, 

418. συνεστηκὼς πάνυ : apparently 
quite composed, in good order, ef, Neen. 
Anab, 6, 
τό τε Papvasd tou ἱππικὸν ἔτι συνεστηκός. 
WERE The 


ταστικὸν ἔτι ἐγὼ συνεστηκὸς κατέλαβον, 


Dn, 30 ἔπει δὲ eidov of ENAnves 


6. 26 οὔτε γὰρ ἱππικὸν οὔτε TEN- 


196 


MENANAPOY 


τὸν Aaov εἰσπέμπω δὲ δηλώσονθ᾽ ὅτι 


΄“ Ν Ν , 
420 ἥκω. τοσοῦτον αὐτό, πρὸς τὴν μητέρα. 
1) δ 


ἫΝ ( / ΄ an 
οὗτος μὲν οὖν, μικρόν TL φροντίσας ἐμοῦ, 


[135] 


ἄριστον αὐτοῖς καταλαβὼν παρακείμενον, 


2 ’΄ ε id 3 \ , lo. Τά 
ἐγέμιζεν QauTOV. ἐν δὲ TOUT@ TW χρόνῳ 


’ὔ Ν A » ce , 
κατακείμενος πρὸς ἐμαυτὸν ἔλεγον ᾿ αὐτίκα 


Γ lal tA 
425 πρόσεισιν ἡ μήτηρ ἀπαγγελοῦσά μοι 


Ν A > , 3.,.3 ἣν" x ΄ 
παρα τὴς EPWMEVNS ἐφ OLS αν φησί μοι 


[140] 


» se N 3 A 39 SN b) wey , 
εἰς ταὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν. αὐτὸς ἐμελέτων λόγον — 


[Lacuna of ea. 157 verses to K?] 


Moschion probably goes on to tell of a confidential talk between Glycera and 


Myrrhina which he has overheard, He is convinced that his hopes are illu- 


sory and realizes that he has been duped by Davus. He has heard also things 


which arouse his curiosity regarding Glycera (vy. 665), but not enough to re- 


veal the facts in full. 


chion conceals himself from view, 


When Pataecus comes out of Polemon’s house, Mos- 


He is present, but unobserved by the 


others, throughout the following scenes, 


Sc. 2.) Moscenton (in hiding), PATAECUS 
Sc. 3. ΜΙΝ (in hiding), PATAECcUS, GLYCERA 
W hile 


inspecting the wardrobe of Glycera in Polemon’s house, Pataecus seems 


to have noticed something among her belongings that aroused in him a sus- 


picion as to her identity, Therefore, when he stinmons her from the house, 


he has three objeets in view : 


the first, to secure an explanation of her con- 


duct with Moschion; the second, to discharge his mission of reconciling her 


Dem, δι. 11 ὁ μὲν yap ἔχων δύναμιν συνε- 
στηκυῖαν ἀεὶ περὶ αὑτόν, and the 110 11}} 
σύστασις ((.«. προσώπου). ‘The opposite 
Is ἐξεστηκώς distraught, of. ἐξέστηκα NS. 
G7, 118, ἔκστασις I. O78, 
the Old) Comedy we 


Ina play of 
should suspect 


paronomasia, τεστυκώς. 


419. εἰσπέμπω: seo οἷν εἰσῆλθον 
in V. 410. 
420. αὐτό = μόνον, only that. 


422. apiorov: cf. v. 187, 
425. Davus had led him to believe 


that his mother was intervening on his 
behalf, vv. 154, 158. 

426. ἐφ᾽ ols av... ἐλθεῖν : the vb. 
pnot (subj. Glycera) intervenes and 
Without 
φησί the clause would he ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἄν ἔλθοι. 


changes the opt. to the inf, 


The ἄν Οὗ the opt. clause is of course re- 
tained when the opt. becomes the inf. 


pou: eoverned by els rabrov. 


427. els ταὐτόν: of. Vv. SW, ἐμελέ- 
των: just as he had rehearsed in vv. 
ΤΠ How heyshould wet, (Ch iss 201; 


TIEPIKEIPOMENH 197 
with Polemon; the third, to discover who she really is. He finds her wn- 
willing to return to Polemon (vy. 599, 625, 630, cf. 904). She assures Patae- 
cus, however, that her relations with Moschion have been innocent, though 
she admits that she has put herself in a false position with him. 


TATKEPA 


Se ne Cai See ene Ree SoS Wes EET 


Ἔ ΓΝ, ’ XN Ν nl ee rd > aA FF , ἢ 
585 τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρ αὐτοῦ. φραζε μοι. 


K2, quat. z, 
p. 3, 1.18 


Gus n 4 As 3 , > A 
ἐνταῦθα καταφυγοῦσ ἐδυνάμην --- οὐ. σκοπεῖς, 


Liat dae | 


Na μι A ’ Ν ’ 
ἵνα με λάβῃ γυναῖκα, κατά με γὰρ πάνυ 


fn εν Wks ont ε ΄ δ᾽ Y 4: 
μονουμενὴν Ov TOUU , ETALPQV Wa μ EX; 


Suse. 5 θ A z x »ν , 
εἶτ᾽ ov λαθεῖν τούτους ἂν ἔσπευδον. τάλαν. 


[105] 


> me ge ae kahit) A ΕἸ ΕἸ ΟῚ a >’ ΕἸ , 
590 αὐτός τ ἐκεῖνος ; ἀλλ᾽ ἰταμῶς εἰς ταὐτό με 


585 ff. Pataecus has probably asked 
Glycera to defend herself against Pole- 
mon’s charge of unfaithfulness. Was 
hermotivein accepting Myrrhina’s hos- 
pitality really fear of Polemon, as she 
had alleged, or the desire to be near 
Moschion ? If the former, he might in- 
duce her to return to Polemon. Glycera 
is now showing that her conduct will 
not bear the interpretation that has 
been put upon it. She employs the 
argument from probability throughout. 
— τὸν πατέρα kal τὴν μητέρα : though 
she is defending herself before Patae- 
cus she refers to him and Myrrhina 
in the third person (vy. 589, 591) pre- 
cisely as if she were addressing a court. 
The thought seems to be: Could 1 have 
taken refuge here, in order to be Mos- 
chiows mistress, without his father’s 
and his mother’s knowledge ? 

586. ov, κτέ.: Const. With καταφυ- 
γοῦσα. --- σκοπεῖς : you observe. On ὁρᾷς, 
μανθάνεις, and similar parenthetical ex- 
pressions see Kock on Aristoph. Nub, 
B55, 

587. κατά pe: in accordance with 
my station, See on TH. and ef. S. 180. 
- πάνυ: utterly, modifies the following 


partic., ef. Xenarch. 7K. εἷς τις θεοῖσιν 
ἐχθρὸς ἄνθρωπος πάνυ | ξηραινομένους ws 
εἶδε τοὺς ἰχθῦς. 

588. μονουμένην : left utterly alone 
in the world as I was. Waving no par- 
ents and no dowry she could not hope 
fora legal marriage, much less for one 
above her social position. —od τοῦτο: 
sc. ἦν, that was tmpossible, The ἵνα- 
clauses summarize the charge which 
she is refuting, viz. ἐνταῦθα κατέφυγες, 
οὐκ ἵνα σε λάβῃ γυναῖκα, ἀλλ᾽ iva σ᾽ ἔχη 
ἑταίραν. 

589. εἶτα : in that 
had consented to be his mistress. — Aa- 


CASE! tints Al? Ἢ 


θεῖν: in fact she had made no attempt 
at concealment, — τούτους : Pataecus, 
Myrrhina, and the members of their 
We feel that the appeal is 
addressed to the spectators as Well as 


household. 


to the persons on the scene, 

590. ἐκεῖνος: Moschion, τὲ connects 
the two subjects, as if ἐγώ; liad pre- 
ceeded. The second Clause is broucht 
inasanmafterthoucht: Moschiom’s con- 
duet, she pretends. also bears out he 
areument, Pad there been ἅ1 dntrigie 
between them le would have Deen as 


anxious as she that the family should 


198 


MENANAPOY 


A \ , > ἘΝ. > bd 5 Ν 
τῷ πατρὶ κατέστησ᾽. εἱλόμην δ᾽ οὕτως ἐγὼ 
> ‘a ¥ > ray Pats “ 6 ae 
ἀφρόνως ἔχειν, ἐχθρόν τε πράττειν πρᾶγμά μοι, 
A Con Le PY 
ὑμῖν θ᾽ ὑπόνοιαν καταλιπεῖν᾽ αἰσχρὰν ἐμοῦ. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἣν ἐξαλείψασ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ οὐδ᾽ αἰσχρὰ φανεῖ." 


[170] 


TATKEPA 


, Ἂν \ A Fs , τ 
595 Τ]αταικε. καὶ σὺ ταυτα συμπεπεισμένος 


ἦλθες τοιαύτην θ᾽ ὑπέλαβές pe γεγονέναι; 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


μὴ δὴ γένοιτ᾽. ὦ Lev πολυτίμητ᾽, ἄδικα δὲ᾽ 


δείξαις ἀληθῶς ὄντ᾽. eyo μὲν πείθομαι." 


ἀλλ᾽ ἄπιθι μηδὲν ἧττον. 


hot suspect it. Through her desire to 
shield her brother, Glycera 5 dis- 
ingenuous with Pataecus. — ἰταμῶς : 
boldly: οἵ, Ὡς 
his father’s presence, cf. v. 427.— pe: 
The 
weak, since the phrase κατέστησά με 
about= ἦλθον. Cf. Withner-Gerth $454. 
DE Ii 8. 

591. τῷ πατρί: i.e. Pataecus him- 
ΜΟΊ, --- εἱλόμην δέ : the horns of the di- 
lemma Which presented itself to her 
were (1) her fear of Polemon, which 
made it impossible for her to remain 


311.—els ravré: into 


for ἐμαυτόν. reflexive force is 


in his house, and (2) the certainty that 
if she aceepted Myrrhinia’s offer of hos- 
pitality her motive would be misunder- 
stood, Of the two evils she chose the 
latter, but with full knowledge of the 
possible consequences, 

592. ἐχθρόν: cf. Soph. Phil. 475 
τοῖσι γενναίοισί τοι TOT αἱσ x pov ἐχθρόν. 

594. ἐξαλείψασα : of. Mur. Hee. 200 
τὸ μὲν σὸν. . πάθος οὐκ av δυναίμην 


ἐξαλείψασθαι φρενός. all for the same 


[175] 


figure Aesch. Prom. 789 ἣν ἐγγράφου σὺ 
μνήμοσιν δέλτοις φρενῶν. 

595. καὶ σύ: Glycera reproaches 
Pataecus, who has known her long 
(συνήθης, V. B85). 

596. τοιαύτην : ic. μοιχεύτριαν. 

597. Thesame oath in Men. 84&8K., 
Which is a reminiscence of Aristoph. 
hy. 1390.— ἄδικα: Polemon’s accusation, 

598. δείξαις : for the opt. of en- 
treaty see Kuliner-Gerth ὃ 895.5. Ob- 
jection has been raised to the aor, opt. 
ending -a in Attic (van Leeuwen on 
Aristoph. Plut. 1035), but it seems too 
well authenticated to displace; sec 
verb-list in Kithner-Blass. — πείθομαι: 
ef, Aristoph. Plat. 251 ὃν ἐγὼ φιλῶ μά- 
λιστα μετὰ σέ. --- πείθομαι. 

599. ἄπιθι μηδὲν ἧττον: yo back to 
him just the same. a@meévac is used in 
precisely this meaning inv. $60, where 
Doris reports to Polemon ; ws φησι νῦν, 
ἄπεισιν ὡς σέ.-. εἰς ἄλλας. κτέ.: Glyce- 
ra’s resolution seems unalterable, ef. 
Nea ieee 


TIEPIKEIPOMENH 


199 


TATKEPA 


600 ὑβριζέτω τὸ λοιπόν. 


‘els ἄλλας κόρας" 


ΠΑΤΑΙ͂ΚΟΣ 


oF ε teen) 
οὐχ ὑβριστικῶς 


γέγονε τὸ δεινόν. 


TATKEPA 


Nee rQ> » , 4 
AVOOLOV ὃ ἔπραξέ με. 


rs » > ve aA 7) ΠΝ - be | 
οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὁρᾶν θεράπαιναν ἀθλιωτέραν 


Γ᾿ Aq 
εμου — 


[Lacuna of 16 verses to Καὶ] 


Glycera seems to have declared to Pataecus that she is free born and also to have 
asked him to examine the proofs of her origin for himself, that he may as- 


sist her to establish her legal independence of Polemon. 


A single word 


quoted from this play may belong here : 


TATKEPA 


ἀποδεῖξαι 


SINS 


When the text begins again Glycera is explaining to Pataecus the nature of the 
objects, contained in the chest, which she has asked him to examine, 


TATKEPA 


Fh os ΜΕ ΝΟΣ ΤῈ 


600. οὐχ ὑβριστικῶς : Pataecus sug- 
vests that Polemon’s act was not un- 
pardonable, since it was committed 
Be ὀργήν, not wantonly, 

601. ἀνόσιον ἔπραξε: cf. Kur. 1A. 
1105 ἀνόσια πράσσων. 

602. Glycera is now overcome by the 
recollection of her wrongs and suffer- 
ings. The knowledge, whieh she has 
all along possessed, that she is of free 
birth, increases her indignation against 
Polemon, The thought probably ov- 
curs to her that, by establishing the 
fact of her free birth, she will be able 
the more easily to shake off the author. 


oes let see HEE SQUAt. 2 aphetess its oli 


ity which he feels he has over her per- 
son. -- βεράπαιναν : cf. Ceph. dW. νῦν 
δ᾽ ὡσπερεὶ θεράπαιν᾽ ἔχω περιβαρίδας. 
ἀθλιωτέραν : cf. Mur. Wel. oud τίς ἡμῶν 
ἐγένετ᾽ ἀθλιώτερα: Suppl. 1076 οὐκ 
τιν᾽ εὕροιτ᾽ ἄλλον ἀθλιώτερον. 

Kr. 392. In the rhetorical lexicon 
Sokk. Annee. 427, 25 we tind ἀποδεῖξαι, οὐ 
Tot ΗΕ tate 


΄- ~ + RS ig ad . - ~ 
παραὸειξαι" ὁμως ὁ aATravEetsorv 


υναικί, ἡ καὶ ἹΙερικειρομένη Meérardpos 
The quotation from the Pertcceimmers 


seems to have fallen out. but some 
form of the vl. arodeccac, Whielp ds at 
tested by the lexteon, came fret this 


play. 


200 


MENANAPOY 


> A ὃς Ἂς ,’ cme 7 ¥ *t 
620 TOV[LOU TATPOS και μῆτρος, ἐκέλευσεν ὃ εχέιν 


~ lal Ἂν AN 
ἀεὶ Tap ἐμαυτῇ ταῦτα καὶ τηρεῖν. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


, ͵ ol 3 f- - 9: Sauk ΓᾺ, Ly ies | 
βούλει κομίσασθαι ταῦτ᾽; ἀπέγνωκας σὺ γὰρ 


τ], > 
τι ουν 


[145] 


κομιδῇ τὸν avOpwrov; τί βούλει. φιλτάτη: 


TATKEPA 


διὰ σοῦ γενέσθω τοῦτό μοι. πραχθήσεται; 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


“ ΨΥ; ral , 5 ᾿ς Ν , > ‘Ge 
625 τοῦτό ye γέλοιον: add ὑπὲρ πάντων EX PHY 


ἘΣ yy ohne g > 
εἶξαί σ᾽. 


TATKEPA 


ae Mi ay. > 
ἐγῴδα TAL ἄρισθ Ξ 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ (reluctantly yielding) 


620. Cf. Plaut. Rud, 389 cistu- 
lam... quam habebat (Palaestra) 
ubique habebat qui suos paren- 
tes noscere posset, Glycera refers 
to the σπάργανα and other memorials 
of her infaney which the old) woman 
had given her (v. 15). 

622. κομίσασθαι ταῦτα: f have 
them brought, i.e. from the house, ef. 
Vv. 633. Glycera had doubtless already 
used this vb., so that the meaning of 
For this 


the mid. voice here was clear. 


meaning cf. Thue, 4. 38. 4 πέμψαντες 
τοὺς νεκροὺς διεκουμίσαντο. ταῦτα: the 
tokens, which she seems to have kept 
633. Probably it 


that 


lite ΝΟΥ, cies ve 


Was to feteh this casket Doris 


Was sent to Polemon'’s house after the 
flight (v.61). - ἀπέγνωκας. κτέ.: whut, 
hates qou «ἴον the fellow (Polemony ip 


) : , 
abs ἐμ εἰμ’ απογιγνωσκειν 1:6 1} “to 


οὕτως ἔχεις ; 

give up as hopeless,? ‘+ to despair of. 
used of a thing or of a person, ef. Dem, 
6.16 οὔτ᾽ ἂν εἰ νῦν ἀπεγίγνωσκεν Θηβαίους. 
The partic. acquires the meaning ‘des- 
perate,”” abandoned. as applied to 
character, e.g, Herodian 1. 16. 4 ἑαυτὸν 
ἐπιδόντα μονομάχοις Kal ἀπεγνωσμένοις 
ἀνθρώποις κινδυνεῦσαι. 

623. τί βούλει: whut is your mo- 
ΠΟ ΝΕ 

624. διὰ ὅσου, Aes 3 he "4 te ΜΠ] 
this matter. She probably refers to her 
intention of breaking off relations with 
Polemon, 

625. ἐχρῆν εἶξαί σε: yononghtto hare 
yielded, icc. to my desires in the miat- 
ter, expressed inv. 590 and probably 
elsewhere, 

626. éyaba, “τὸ, ef. Plant. Trin. 
O36 satis in rem quae sint menam 


efo CONSpicio milli. οὕτως ἔχεις: 


TIEPIKEIPOMENH 


ον “ “ἢ lol > Ay 7 > , 
τίς τῶν θεραπαινῶν οἷδε ταῦθ᾽ ὅπου ᾽στί σοι; 


‘7 Δωρὶς οἶδε; 


201 


[150] 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


καλεσάτω τὴν Δωρίδα 


ΓΟ ᾿ ” 
ἔξω τις. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως. Γλυκέρα. πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, 


80 ᾿διαλλάγηθ᾽ ἐφ᾽ οἷς λόγοις νυνὶ λέγω. 


Enter Doris from the house. 


Sc. 4. ΜΌΒΟΗΙΟΝ (in hiding), PArArcus, GuycERA, Doris 


ΔΩΡῚΣ 


᾿βούλει τί χρῆμ᾽; ἐμοὶ λέγ᾽," ὦ κεκτημένη. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (aside) 


Cay ὃ. ¥ 5 a a) τε ΄ 
ταχα εισομ, OLOV ΤΟ Κακον. 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡᾺ 


> , , 
ἐξένεγκέ μοι 


τὴν κιστίδ᾽ ἔξω. Δωρί, τὴν τὰ ποικίλα 


ἔχουσαν. οἶσθας. νὴ AV,— ἣν δέδωκά σοι 


635 τηρεῖν. τί ἀλύεις, ἀθλία; 


is this the way you feel about it? There 
is disapproval, but also acquiescence, 
in the question, 

629 f. Pataecus makes a last appeal 
on behalf of Polemon. We do not know 
What promises he has made on behalf 
of Polemon — probably a pledge of 
good conduct. 

632. εἴσομαι: cf. Aristoph. Lys. 1114 
τάχα δ᾽ εἴσομαι ᾽γώ.-- οἷον: xc. ἐστίν. 
This is the first intimation in the pre- 
served portion of text that Moschion is 
present during these scenes of disclo- 
sure. He is eavesdropping, as through- 
out the following scene and in the last 


Exit Doris into the house. 


scene of the play; see on vv. 646 ff, 
907, 
633. Cf. Ter. 


eistellam, Pythias, domo ee fer 


ΩΣ πο ΠΡ tae 


cum monumentis. — τὰ ποικίλα 


embroidered garments, as often, ef, 
Theoer, 15, 78 τὰ ποικίλα πρᾶτον ἄθρησον. 
Philem. 761K. ἱμάτια ποικίλ᾽ εἰ Χέγοι τις 
δ κελικάς As we shall see, the chest 
contained other objects as well. 

635. ἀλύεις : are you idling 2? Seeon 
KB. 842 and Phot. freon p. 100, and ef, 
Ter. Fun, 754 (continuing the passage 
CitOol ἀπ crew Misses) cabaNat hi Sette Melba ssitgtery site 


Oblast Oe ase sie, 


AUTOS ith ORO 


202 MENANAPOY 
ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (aside) » 


, lg 
πέπονθά τι, 


ΓΝ Ν ΄ 7 τ μηνὶ N Ν ᾿Ξ 
νὴ τὸν Ata τὸν σωτΉρ ; έἔγω καινὸν πανυ 


Ei Ἂν re oF A > > ἮΝ ε ae Ar 
Kal ποικίλον πρᾶγμ᾽: οὐδὲν ἡ κόρη δοκεῖ 


[100] 


[Lacuna of ca. 7 verses to the second Leipzig fragment] 


Doris has brought out the chest and returned again into the house. 


Pataecus 


first examines the ποικίλα. He has just made out the first object. 


Sc. 5. 


Moscuion (in hiding), PATAECUS, GLYCERA 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


real \ ΚΘ. Be > > $208 ε \ 
O46 OV Kat TOT E€LOOV. OU παρ QvuTOV OUTOOL 


Lp. éa 


, Dy an x ‘\ fe) 4} 
τράγος τις. ἢ βοῦς. ἢ TOLoUTL θηρίον 


γσπ- 
ἐστ κεν 5 

-- πέπονθά τι. κτέ.: {τὸ had a strange 
and varied erperience, cf. Dem, 35, 25 
πεπόνθαμεν καινότατον, Plat. Apol. 40a 
θαυμάσιόν τι γέγονεν. 

646 ff. The following recognition 
In the 
first Pataecus recognizes as having be- 


scene falls into two portions. 


longed to his first wife some objects 
contained tn the chest, and finds that 
the story which Glycera has been told 
of the discovery of herself and brother 
in Infaney coincides with his recollee- 
tion of the exposure of twin children of 
hisown. Teds convinced that she ds his 
dauchter and iiquires anxiously about 
his lost son. But Glycera will tell him 
nothing on this point. In the second 
portion Glycera insists that Pataecus 
shall prove his identity by naming and 
describing the objects contained in the 
chest. Moschion, overhearing all this, 
discovers for himself that Pataecus is 
his father and Glycera lis sister, 

This scene may profitably be com- 
pared with the recocnition scenes in 
τ τς ΕΠ ΣΝ ας ἡ γον ΠΥ Στ Pleratee deel: 


19 τ ΤῊ 
Creusa to name and deseribe the ob- 


the former, Ion causes 


jeets contained in the vessel in which 
he kept his γνωρίσματα. In particular 
she describes the design on a piece of 
embroidery. In the Rudens, Palaestra 
proposes to establish her ownership of 
the wallet which Gripus has fished out 
of the sea by telling the contents of the 
casket contained init. Daemones takes 
the objects from the casket as she 
mentions them, and thus discovers that 
Palaestra is his long-lost daughter. 
The tragic coloring of this scene Is 
noticeable in both the dietion and the 
meter, At the climax the lines are 
Wholly tragie. But the side remarks of 
Moschion stand out in sharp contrast 
His role is that of the 
Clown (βωμολόχος). but Pataceus and 


In both respects, 


Glycera are moved by genuine fecling, 
646. τότε: olim, the last time he 
saw the chest. 
647. They seem to be inspecting the 
figures ona piece of embroidery (ποι- 


κίλα ν. 099) from the clothing (σπάργανα 


TLEPIKEIPOMENH 


203 


TATKEPA 


ἔλαφος. φίλτατ᾽, ἐστίν, οὐ τράγος. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


r , re ae Cyn) Ls 
κέρα᾽ γ᾽ ἔχει, TOUT οἶδα. 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


καὶ τουτὶ τρίτον; [65] 


IATAIKOS 


650 πετεινὸς ἵππος. τῆς γυναικὸς τῆς ἐμῆς 


ΤΩΝ ΨΩ ceo) ΝΥ “ Ν ἌΝ» Ψ, 
τὰ χρήματ᾽ ἐστὶ ταῦτα. καὶ μάλ᾽ ἀθλίας. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (aside) 


Ε- ἣν la 5» ie 5 x ‘oo te) les tal ἂν ω 
OU Τῶν ἀδυνάτων COVELL TOUT; εμοι δοκεῖ 


ry (uh a) ἣν > Ν A vy 
QTOTOV TL τὴν ἐμὴν τεκουσαν μητέρα 


᾿αἰσχρῶς προέσθαι θυγατέρ᾽ αὐτῇ γενομένην. 70] 


ν. 15) in which the infants were ex- 
posed (v. 660). The design was indis- 
tinct through age. Pataecus describes 
the figures as if he had seen them 
before. 

648. ἔλαφος, οὐ τράγος: cf. 1ἡ. 171. 

649. κέρα γε. . . οἶδα : Pataecus 
remembers only that it was ἀπ ani- 
mal with horns. Attic writers use the 
pl. forms κέρατα etc., see Kithner-Blass 
§ 121. 

650. πετεινὸὲὶ ἵππος: ἃ 
The form πετεινός, a doublet of the 


Pegasus. 


more poetical πτηνός, is apparently 
good Attic, in spite of the objections 
of Thomas Magister (p. 272.6 R.); ef. 
Lyc. Leocr. 182 ra πετεινὰ (f@a), cited 
by Korte. 

651. The silence of Glycera at this 
declaration, which must have startled 


her, issignificant. Is it due to the new 


that confronts her? 


She knows that Moschion is not the 


embarrassment 


son of Myrrhina, as Pataecus supposes 
him to be. If she is the daughter of 
Pataecus’ wife and Moschion the son, 
that 


Pataeeus In 


the facet will have to come out 
Myrrhina has deceived 
passing off Moschion as her son, ef. v. 
669, The statement of Pataeeus is 
not an ‘aside,’ for Moschion hears it. 

652. οὐ τῶν ἀδυνάτων : sc. ἐστί (Or, 
if an assertion, read ἕν τῶν ἀδυνάτων). 
The phrase is an emphatic equivalent 
of ἀδύνατόν ἐστι attected by the writers 
of the fourth century, 

653. ἄτοπόν τι. κτέ.: ie. quite in- 
consistent with the character οὐ Myr- 
rhina. 

654, προέσθαι: should hive ahan- 
doned, ‘The vb. often κα τσ νίαν as here, 
a reprehensible act, 


204 


MENANAPOY 


5 εἰ δ᾽ apa τι πιστὸν τοῦτ᾽, ἀδελφὴ δ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἐμή, 


ιν Ὁ > n 7. \ > , 
οιας απεστερημ. ο δυστυχὴς eyo. 


ITATATKO® (to himself) 


“ἢ δυστυνὴ δὴ τἀπίλοιπα TOV ἐμῶ 
ἢ δυστυχῆ δὴ πα τῶν ἐμῶν. 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


is , mae Lee 3 , le) Ψ, tS) A 
onpaw ὃ βούλει, τοῦτο πυνθάνου τ᾽ ἐμοῦ. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


πόθεν λαβοῦσα ταῦτα κέκτησαι; φράσον. 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡᾺ 


ry aie 5: “Ὁ 3 5. ΜΠ δ. ΄ 
000 EV τοισὸ ἀνῃρέθην TOT ουσα, παιδίον. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


τ Ὁ. Ν AY i (ely a ct , q 
ETAVAYE σαυτὸν μικρὸν WS ῥέθος βλέπω. 


Scans her face closely. 


MOZNIOQN (aside) 


- Ἢ 7 
ἤκω τύχης εἰς καιρὸν οἰκείας ἐγώ... 


655. εἰ δ᾽ apa: in this locution dpa, 
When not illative, expresses the speak- 
ers doubt whether the assumption is 
true, ef. Thue. 3. 56.5 τῆς viv ἁμαρτίας, 
—el dpa ἡμάρτηται , and see Kiihner- 
Gerth καὶ 543. 10. 

656. οἵας... ἐγώ: ef. fr. com, adesp. 
P2LK. οἵαν ἀδικῶ γυναῖχ ὁ δυσδαίμων ἐγώ. 
Similarly τ. Plaut. pid. 648 ff. Stra- 
tippocles finds that his sweetheart: is 
his sister, and is overwhelmed by the 
discovery, 

657. ἦ δυστυχῆ. κτέ.: at the thought 
of his son, whom he naturally supposes 
tobe lost or dead, Pataecus cries out in 
erief. Glycera hears but does not unde r- 
stand. τἀπίλοιπα : cf. Soph. Phil. 24 
ὡς τἀπίλοιπα τῶν λόγων σὺ μὲν κλύῃς. The 
Whole phrase is a vague reference to 
his other child, τῶν ἐμῶν (τέκνων). 


660. avynpeOny: cf. Pind, P. 9. 66 


παῖδα τέξεται (Cyrene), ov κλυτὸς ‘Epuas 
ες ἀνελὼν φίλας ὑπὸ ματέρος οἴσει. Glyc- 
era purposely avoids the plural, 

661. ἐπάναγε. κτέ.: drew back a lit- 
tle.-~ ὡς: almost unknown to comedy 
as final particle, but common in trag- 
edy. See GMT., p. 898. — ῥέθος : fare, 
a word borrowed from the epic, where 
it is used in the pl. in’ the meaning 
Sis ORC bekolb eee Gear 
862). Tt occurs in the sing, in two lyri- 
cal passages of tragedy, viz. Soph. Ant. 
D209 νεφέλη . . . αἱματόεν ῥέθος αἰσχύνει 
and Eur. HW. F.1205 ὦ τέκνον, . . . ῥέθος 
ἀελίῳ δεῖξον. ‘The word was revived by 
the Alexandrian poets: in Pheoer, 25, 
39 the plo means ‘Slimbs.* while in 
Apoll, Rhod. 2.68 it means -*counte- 
nance? as also ἐπιρρέθη in Mosch. 4.5. 

662. τύχης els καιρόν: cf. Pind. N. 


7.58 Θεαρίων, τὶν δ᾽ ἐοικότα καιρὸν ὄλβου 


TIEPIKEIPOMENH 205 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


μόνη δ᾽ ἔκεισο; τοῦτο γὰρ σήμαινέ μοι. 


TATKEPA 


οὐ δητ᾽, ἀδελφὸν δ᾽ ἐξέθηκε κἀμέ τις. 


[80] 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (aside) 


at Ν Ἂν ν Ae baie , 
(65 TOUTL μὲν ἐν μοι τῶν ἐμοὶ ζητουμένων. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


πῶς οὖν ἐχωρίσθητ᾽ ἀπ᾿ ἀλλήλων δίχα ;" 


ΤΑΥΚΈΡΑ 


» > ἃ [3 κ᾽ ΄ 270) As 
EX OLY αν €LTELW TAVT QAKY)KOVLA σοι, 


NATED Sills ey aK ε Χ χ ES. Ὁ ΄ 
Τὰ ὃ εμα μ ερωτα. βητα γάρ TQAUT ἐστι μοι. 


5 A δ᾽ > lan NM , 5 {2 
ἐκεῖνα O αὐτῃ μὴ φράσειν ὀμώμοκα. 


δίδωσι, Kur. Orest. 884 ἀφῖξαι δ᾽ αὐτὸν 
εἰς καιρὸν κακῶν. 

665. The vb. ζητεῖν is the technical 
term for the ‘investigation’? of a prob- 
lem, ἀπορία, and τὰ ζητούμενα (Or Ta ἐπι- 
ζητούμενα, See Crit. Ap.) ‘the objects 
of search,” the points to be determined 
by investigation. Now Moschion has 
been puzzled by what he has overheard 
of the conversation between Glycera 
and Myrrhina (see the note in the text 
following v. 427). Their talk has raised 
in his mind a number of ἀπορίαι. In 
vy. 652 he draws from the remark of 
Pataecus the inference that, if Glycera 
is the daughter of Pataecus, she must, 
could 


be his sister; but Myrrhina 


his mother have heartlessly exposed a 
ΟἹ 


daughter : 
swered by Glycera’s declaration that 


This question is now an- 


a brother was exposed alone with her. 
This clears up one ἀπορία for Moschion ; 
Myrrhina cannot be his mother. 


[85] 


666. A reminiscenceof Eur, Melan. 
fr, 484.3. N. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐχωρίσθησαν ἀλλήλων 
δίχα. 

667. ἀκηκουῖα : by hearsay, οἵ Soph. 
O.T. 105 ἔξοιδ᾽ ἀκούων. 

668. τὰ δ᾽ ἐμά : that which concerns 
me dlone (ef. ν. 626), as opposed τὸ 
ἐκεῖνα (= τὰ ἐκείνου). ** that which con- 
cerns iy brother.” -- -ῥητά: οἵ. Soph. 
OT. 993 ἢ ῥητόν: 7 οὐχὶ θεμιτὸν ἄλλον εἰ- 
δέναι: — The first. foot is unmetrical in 
the MS., viz. τἀμὰ δ᾽. Ta verse other- 
wise tragic in tone an initial dactyl 
with word-division - G.o (τ Taya 
δέ μ᾽ Rob, or τἀμὰ δέ γ᾽ Arn.) would be 
objectionable, τὰ δ᾽ ἐμά is free from 
this objection, and has the advantage 
over τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλ᾽ (KOrte) in that it sup- 
plies ταῦτα with a detinite antecedent, 

669. αὐτῇ : Myrrhina. The allusion 
is SO Vacue that Pataecus may possi- 
bly be in doubt as te who is meant: 


hence the further question τίς ἦν. But 


206 


MENANAPOY 


MOZXION (aside) 


XN EAN: Ὁ 3 » , 
670 καὶ τοῦτό μοι σύσσημον εἴρηκεν σαφές: 


1073 K. 


io τ a> » > ἊΝ aA 
ὀμώμοκεν TH μητρί. TOV TOT εἰμὶ γῆς; 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ὁ δὴ λαβών cE καὶ τρέφων τίς ἢν ποτε; 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


΄ ἀν ὭΣ τὰν, The αν ὙΦΟ os ἢ ΄ 
γυνή μ᾽ Opa’, ἥπερ᾽ τότ᾽ εἶδ᾽ ἐκκειμένην. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


Lal % | ge 4 ST, BE a , , 4 
TOU δὴ τόπου τι μνὴημονευμα σοι λέγει; [90] 


ΓΛΥΚΕΒΡΑ 


oF τ a Πρ ν ἂν, CEN , easrh ἐς} , 
675 KpyVyV TW €l7 ELWAL TOTOV T VITOOKLOV. 


HWATAIKOS 


x > ἊΣ ν ’ ἐς ¥ , 
TOV QAUTOV OVTrEpP Xe τιθεὶς εἰρη KE, μοι. 


Lp. ἐβ 


ΓΑ ΝΑ 


΄ > Ἣν , > > , aN Ν , 
TLS ὃ OUTOS EO TLV, El θέμις καμοι φράσον. 


Moschion, who had probably heard 
Glycera swear to his mother to keep 
something secret, is in a position to 
understand it, 

670. καὶ τοῦτο: the second point, 
cf. τουτὶ μέν v.665, Glycera’s statement 
has carried a step further the proof 
that Myrrhina is not his own mother, 
- σύσσημον: The 
word was tabooed by Phrynichus (see 


indication, sign. 


on Men, 1007 KK.) as un-Attic, and was 
probably slang In the meaning here re- 
splint, wely2 


σθαι, from which this meaning seems 


quired, clincher. συσσημαίνε- 
τ πάν been derived, was in use as the 
equivalent of κατασφραγίζεσθαι."" toseal 
and certify,’ according to Suidas, who 


adds that σύσσημον = σημεῖον. Theother 
meanings of the noun are later, 

673. ἐκκειμένην : cf. v. 694 below 
and Io, 28 κἀκκείμενον παιδάριον. But κει- 
μένην may be right, ef. τιθείς ν. O78. 

674. τόπου μνημόνευμα : fo reincni- 
ber the place by, lit. memorial, reminder. 
The word occurs in Attic only in Arist. 
De mem, 450 B27 (and 45142): τὸν ἐν 
ἡμῖν φάντασμα is οἷον εἰκὼν Kal μνημόνευμα 
ἄλλου (Korte), So Lue. De salt. 44 
speaks of certain stories of mythology 
as ἀναγκαιότατα ὀρχηστῇ μνημονεύματα. 
The Attic equivalents were μνημεῖον 
(prose) and μνῆμα (poetry). 

675. εἶπ᾽ εἶναι : for the exceptional 
inf. after εἰπεῖν cf. Plat. Gorg. 4734 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 207 


MNATAIKOZ 


ὁ μὲν τιθεὶς παῖς, ὁ δὲ τρέφειν ὀκνῶν ἐγώ. 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


Ν + eS δ᾽ λ re rig Ἐ Ἢ 
σὺ δ᾽ ἐξέθηκας ὧν πατήρ: τίνος χάριν; 


[85] 


IATAIKOZ 


: , ἘΝῚ \ » > »¥ ΄ 2-. Ἢ 
680 πόλλ᾽ ἐστὶν Epy ἀπιστα, παιδίον. κλύειν - 


2 Ν la 5 el 3 A Ν > ve wr 3 
ἢ μὲν TEKOVT ὑμᾶς yap ἐκλείπει βίον 


» ,’ “ ta 4 € , r A ‘a 
εὐθύς. μιᾳ ὃ ἔμπροσθεν NHLEPA, — VOELS ; 


TATKEPA 


4 tA A > c , lé 3 es (x al 
τι γιγνέται ποθ 3; ὡς τρέμω. ταλαιν έεγω. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


΄ eI] ἐφ te ¥ itt ΤᾺ at 
πένης ἐγενόμην, βίον exe εἰθισμένος. 


εἶπον ἐγὼ... τὸ ἀδικεῖν τοῦ ἀδικεῖσθαι 
κάκιον εἶναι. GMT. ἃ 753.3. 

678. παῖς: sc. τις ἦν. 

679. Such an act on the part of a 
man who knew the children to be his 
own certainly called for an explana- 
tion. Exposure ordinarily implied, in 
real life as well as in the romantic 
drama, some irregularity of parentage. 

680. ἄπιστα : and yet true, cf. Eur. 
fr. 396 N. νομίζειν χρή ce... 
ἀληθῆ πολλὰ συμβαίνειν βροτοῖς... κλύειν: 


ἄπιστα 


used by the comic poets, in jest or in 
earnest, always as a tragic word, e.g. 
Aristoph. Av. 416 ἄπιστα καὶ πέρα κλυ- 
εἶν. This whole passage reveals Menan- 
der as a true disciple of Euripides in 
his use of tragie pathos. The dissyl- 
labie feet and short syllables in arsi 
mark real feeling. 

681. γάρ: the fact that ἡ τεκοῦσ᾽ ὑμᾶς 
is a compact phrase explains the posi- 


[100] 


tion of γάρ. So also in E. 859 and else- 
where. But Menander exercises a good 
deal of freedom in placing this par- 
ticle. — ἐκλείπει Biov: another phrase 
from the high style, ef. Soph. El. 1131 
ὡς wpedov πάροιθεν ἐκλιπεῖν βίον and 
Antiphon 1. 21 ἀθέως καὶ ἀκλεῶς πρὸ τῆς 
εἱμαρμένης ὑφ᾽ ὧν ἥκιστα ἐχρῆν τὸν βίον 
ἐκλιπών. 

682. εὐθύς: sc. 


numeral enhances the pathos by em- 


τεκοῦσα. --- μιᾷ: the 


phasizing the suddenness of the re- 
versal, ef. Eur. HF. 509 καί μ᾽ ἀφείλεθ᾽ ἡ 
τύχη ὥσπερ πτερὸν πρὸς αἰθέρ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ. 
id. fr. 420 N. μέ ἡμέρα τὰ μὲν καθεῖλεν 
ὑψόθεν. τὰ δ᾽ Hp ἄνω... νοεῖς: the speaker 
puts off the decisive word, ef. FE. 908 aé- 
Plaut. Pseud. 215 


ad languorem — tenes 


σθάνει γε: usque 

UEC SC 

haee tendant quae loquor? 
684. εἰθισμένος : cf. Baton 5. ἘΚ. 


πρότερον οὐκ εἰθισμένος. 


208 


MENANAPOY 


TATKEPA 


> ε , A Ὃν , nw a, =} 
685 ἐν ἡμέρᾳ: πὼς: ὦ θεοί. δεινοῦ πάθους . 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἤκουσα τὴν ναῦν ἣ παρεῖχ᾽ ἡμῖν τροφὴν᾽ 
“ἄγριον καλύψαι πέλαγος Αἰγαίας ἁλός. 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


τάλαιν᾽ ἔγωγε τῆς τύχης. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἐφόλκια 


ἡγησα δὴ πτωγὸν ὄντα παιδί 
ἡγησάμην δὴ TTWX α 


[105] 


0 τρέφειν ἀβούλου παντελῶς ἀνδρὸς τρόπους." 


685. ἡμέρᾳ = ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ. ἃ5 in ΠΟΙῸΝ. 
1. 126 (Korte). δεινοῦ πάθους : ἃ com- 
mon tragic phrase, cf. Soph. O.T. 1297 
ὦ δεινὸν ἰδεῖν πάθος, Mur. Suppl. 11 ma- 
θος παθοῦσαι δεινόν. Glycera’s emotion 
seemsoutof proportion with her father’s 
misfortune; but she is thinking of its 
results for herself and her brother. 

687. ἄγριον πέλαγος: cf. Aesch. 
Suppl. 384 ἀγρίας adds, Hur, H.R. 851 
θάλασσαν ἀγρίαν. -- πέλαγος Alyalas 
ἁλός: cf. Poseidon’s words Eur, Proad. 
R88 ταράξω πέλαγος Αἰγαίας ἀλός (Korte). 

688. ἐφόλκια : us useless burdens. 
The ἐφολκίς Was ἢ μικρὰ ναῦς ἡ ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρας 
νεὼς ἑλκομένη (SChol, Aristoph. Vesp. 
YOR): ina figurative sense ἐφόλκια were 
Ta ἐκ περιττοῦ ἐπιφερόμενα σκεύη τοῖς 
ἀποδημοῦσιν (Bekk. Anec. 257), ‘ bau 
ΟΠ 


to Charon) ὄλπη μοι καὶ πήρη ἐφόλκια 


(Diogenes 


wage, 
καὶ τὸ παλαιὸν ἔσθος. The figure is 1πι- 
ripidean, of. HLF. 657. where Heracles 
leading his children savs ἄξω λαβών γε 
τούσδ᾽ ἐφολκίδας χεροῖν, ναῦς δ᾽ ὡς ἐφέλξω, 


and later (1424), of himself, Θησεῖ πανώ- 


Nes ἐψόμεσθ᾽ ἐφολκίδες. The tow as a 
troublesome burden suggests the figure 
in Eur, Andr. 200, where Andromache 
speaks of her base-born children as 
ἐμαυτῇ τ᾽ ἀθλίαν ἐφολκίδα (“drag”). 
690. τρέφειν : this unworthy motive 
for the exposure of children is occa- 
sionally mentioned, e.g. Plat. Theaet. 
160 οὐκ ἄξιον ὃν τροφῆς τὸ γιγνόμενον, 
. ἢ σὺ οἴει πάντως δεῖν τό γε σὸν τρέφειν 
καὶ μὴ ἀποτιθέναι: Ter. Ad. 809 tu illos 
duo olim tollebas 


POR Ie tua, 


quad satis putabas tia beara 


ambobus fore.  Poseidippus says 
(11 WN.), but presumably only in jest, 
υἱὸν τρέφει πᾶς Kav πένης τις ὧν τύχη. Ov- 
γατέρα δ᾽ ἐκτίθησι κἂν ἣ πλούσιος. τρό- 
πους: the art. is generally used with 
τρόπους in this const., e.g. Aristophy, 
15. 192 οὐ πρὸς μουσικοῦ ἔτ᾽ ἐστὶν ἀνδρὸς 
οὐδὲ χρηστοῦ τοὺς τρόπους. Men, 255.4 KX. 
οὐδ᾽ οὕτως ἀκριβὴς τοὺς τρόπους. 

691 tf. From here τὸ νυ τ 0 ἢ the parch- 
mentis badly broken and the writing on 
the preserved portions difficult to deci- 


pher. We are generally able, however, 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 209 


TATKEPA 


᾿δηλοῖς ἀληθής, φίλτατ᾽, av πάντ᾽. ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὸν. 


» [ omni wae OL 95 » , ~ 
ἔφη τι παῖς; ap οὐκ ἐμηνύθη γε πᾶν; 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ἦν καὶ δέραια καὶ βαθὺ ζυγάστριον, 


΄ \ Get \ \ AS 9 Spt 
KOO [LOS T POO WV σμικρος δὲ τοις εκκείμενοις. 


[110] 


ΓΛΥΚΈΡΑ 


Γ᾽ 


Ὄπ ot ΕἸ We , t Sal > LA ~ 
6 ἐπειπὲ τάνδον ἐν S€ τούτῳ γ᾽ εὐστοχεῖς. 


εἴο catch the drift of the dialogue. 
Glycera is all but convinced that Pa- 
taecus is her father, and begins here 
to cross-question him in order to see if 
he can name and describe the articles 
which he caused to be placed with his 
exposed children, The whole situation 
is similar to that in Eur. Ion 1412 ff., 
where Ion, having in his hands the 
vessel in which were his γνωρίσματα, 
challenges Creusa καὶ τοὔνομ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐξε- 
ρεῖς πρὶν εἰσιδεῖν; 

691. δηλοῖς: opt. of Wish. Perhaps 
δείξαις Should be supplied, ef. v. 598. 
On the const. see Kithner-Gerth § 482. 
2. — ἔπόν = ἐπιτιθέν. cf. E. 250 τὸν δα- 
κτύλιον ἐπόντα.-- παῖς: cf. ν. 018. 

693 f. Pataecus first mentions three 
things, all of a general nature, such as 
one might easily hit upon by Guessing : 
δέραια. ζυγάστριον, κόσμος... δέραια: 5. 
on 10. 20. -- βαθύ: as an epithet of a 

vessel] Theocr, 1. 27 βαθὺ κισσύβιον. - 

fuyaorpiov: Pollux (7. 79 and 10, 158) 
mentions the word, as in use among 
post-classieal writers, in a list of re- 
ceptacles forstoring clothes, Deianeira 
keeps the poison of Nessus κοίλῳ (v7 a- 
otpw (Soph. Trach. 692), and Cyrus 


stores the treasure of Croesus in such a 
box (Xen. Cyrop. 6. 3. 1).— κόσμος : cf. 
1. 50. — δέ: the particles δέ and re, as 
well as yap (see on ν. 680), are some- 
times placed late in the sentence by 
the later comic poets. δέ is the fourth 
word also in BK. 309 and in Men. 555, 
3K. 

695. Although only the last word 
(some form of εὐστοχεῖν) is free from 
doubt, the thought seems to be that of 
Eur. Ton 1426. When Creusa has de- 
scribed the first object: correctly. Ton 
says ἔστιν τι πρὸς τῷδ᾽, ἢ μόνῳ τῷδ᾽ εὐ- 
τυχεῖς; — ἐπειπέ: tell me, further. This 
meaning is found e.g. in Thue, 1.67.5 οἱ 
Κορίνθιοι... ἐπεῖπον (i.e. after the rest 
had spoken), Aeschin, 2. 167 ταῦθ᾽ ὑπο- 
θεὶς ἐπεῖπεν. Perhaps ἔτ᾽ εἰπέ. τἄνδον: 
the proposal 
Plaut 


τὰ ἐν τῷ ζυγαστρίῳ, ct. 
of Palaestra τὸ Daemones ΠῚ 
Rud. 1132 ff. eistellam isti imesse 
oportet caudeam in iste vidi- 
lo: thi ego dicam quiequid: in- 
erit nomidnatim., evotoxeis: Hit 
the mark. as by a happy accident, ef, 
Phut. Mor. ΟἽ Τ a ἄν ros εὐστοχεῖν διινήταις 
Mphip. ΠῚ. DIN. εὔστοχος νεανίας ἢ στο] 


Χ ΝΟΤ 


210 


MENANAPOY 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ti ov ποτε; ζώνη ye κεῖται δηλαδή. 


TATKEPA 


ν ENG πον δ τ ν A ἤδη eal ΄ 
Ἐα ΟΣ ΤΟΥΣ αριστα. δεῖ σε μοι, πάτερ, 


ry “ Ε Pints) ΟΣ Taree) , , > 
ἐνοῦσαν εἰπεῖν εἰκόν᾽ ἐν ζώνῃ τίς ἦν. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


+ S , , q 9 fal ΄ 
ἦν γὰρ χορός τε παρθένων ἐνταῦθά τις, 


[115] 


TATKEPA (aside) 


ῷγ π γα τ rN ΟΣ Vie Ae” ise ΠΝ 
700 βάδην συνῆκα" (to Pataecus) καὶ τόδ᾽ εἶπες τῶν ἐμῶν. 


Ἴ 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


r ἐπεὶ wn vd 4 oF ΟῚ wt yee | “ 
von τε μίτρα--- πάντα δ᾽ ἐκφαίνειν μ᾽ ἐρᾶς: 
X ἢ μιτρᾳ μβ ἐρῤς 


696 ff. Pataecus seems to say, after 
amoment’s reflection (τί οὖν more ;), that 
among the articles in the casket was a 
woman's girdle, cf. v. 698. In the next 
line Glycera seems to show surprise in 
admitting that the answer is correct, 
calling him for the first time ‘ father’? ; 
then, however, to demand that he shall 
give a description of the girdle. — κεῖ- 
ται: lies there, = ἔνδον ἐστί. — ἄριστα: 
ef. FE, 803. — δεῖ σέ pou, κτέ.: for the 
demand ef. Eur, Ton 1420: 
has named as one of the objects in the 


Creusa 


vessel a piece of cloth which she had 
woven as a girl. Ton asks concerning 
it μορφὴν ἔχον τίνα : Whereupon Creusa 
describes the embroidered pattern. — 
ἐνοῦσαν εἰκόν᾽ ἐν ζώνῃ : the embroidered 
design was a part of the fabric, hence 
(τς ἀπε ΠΥ] ΠΝ εὐκώ, 


τ᾽ ἐν ἱστοῖς. Ton 1421 


ἐν and not ἐπί. 
Τοργὼν μὲν ἐν 
μέσοισιν ἠτρίοις πέπλων. Arvistid. Or, 
1. 553 εἰκόνες ἐν πίναξι. 

700. βάδην συνῆκα : if εἰκετιγΝ upon 
me. βάδην means gradually, cf. Avis- 


toph. Ach. 535 οἱ Μεγαρῆς. ὅτε δὴ ᾽πείνων 


βάδην (κατὰ βραχύ 50110].}. Aesch. Suppl. 
887 ἄραχνος ὡς βάδην. -- καὶ τόδε, κτὲ.: 
for the third time Pataecus has stood 
the test. 

701. μίτρᾳ: headband, a circlet, often 
of metal (cf. schol. Aristoph. Eq. 580 
στλεγγὶς χρυσοῦν ἔλασμα τὸ περὶ TH κεφα- 
λῇ τῶν γυναικῶν), for holding the hair 
in place, ef. Eur. Hec. 924 πλόκαμον ava- 
δέτοις μίτραισιν ἐρρυθμιζόμαν. Such bands 
were worn by Bacchic revelers, ef, Bur. 
Bacch. 833 ἐπὶ κάρᾳ δ᾽ ἔσται μίτρα. and 
by Dionysus himself, who is called χριυ- 
σομίτρηξ in Soph. OWT. 200, Phe design 
on the girdle was Dionysus at the head 
of a band of Maenads, and the wnfin- 
ished thought Was ἀνεστεμμένος ὁ Bar yos 
αὐτός. Note that the penult of μίτρᾳ 
must be measured long, a quantity not 
found elsewhere in Attic poetry. Prob- 
ably Menander wrote μίτρᾳ τε χρυσῇ. 
—mavra δ᾽ ἐκφαίνειν μ᾽ ἐρᾷς : τη ΟἿ 
expresses a not πὰ 1} impatience 
With the protracted cross-examination 
to which he is being subjected. ἐρᾶν 


θέλειν is quite in the manner of 


ITIEPIKETPOMENH 


211 


ΓΛΥΚΕΡΑ 


= i 
οὐκέτι καθέξω," φίλτατ᾽. ἄδικος εἰ δ᾽ ἐγὼ -- 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ΤΣ ΕΕΣ "OO υἱὸς θετὸς CLG 30 ess GRC Ἢ 
ἀδικεῖ σ᾽ OO υἱὸς θετὸς ἐμός γ᾽, ὡς φαίνεται. 


VA nw τοῖς ε ἄν ἘΝῚ , 
πάρειμι, τουτον μιαρον ὡς νυν και ψέγω. 


[130] 


Exit into the house. Moschion comes from his hiding-place. 


Sc. 6. Guycrra, MoscH1on 


MOZXIQN (aside) 


εὖ ΠΥ ’ Zz > ie. Fag ='9. Nat 4 te πλ' 
τοῦ ὦ θεοί, τίς ἐστ᾽ ὄνησις. εἰ μὲν ὅσπερ ἂν ..... 


[Lacuna of perhaps ca. 100 verses to Oxyrhynchus fragment, col. 1.7 


Euripides. For ἐκφαίνειν cf. Eur. Hipp. 
368 ἐξέφηνας eis φάος κακά, Soph. fr. 690, 
4N. τὸ κρυφθὲν ἐκφανεῖς. 

702. οὐκέτι καθέξω: sc. ἐμαυτήν. 
This intransitive use is rare in classi- 
cal Greek, found, according to Jebb, 
only in Soph. O.T. 782 κἀγὼ βαρυνθεὶς 
... μόλις κατέσχον. But it recurs in 
later writers. The thought is similar 
to that in Plaut. Rud. 1171, where 
Daemones, convinced that Palaestra is 
his daughter, says contineri quin 
complectar non 
Glycera seems to begin an apology for 
her persistent opposition to Pataecus : 


queo,— a&tkos: 


“If IT have been unfair to you, —.” 

703. Pataecus does not permit her 
to finish, but takes up the topie sug- 
gested by ἄδικος. ‘Unfair? The un- 
fairness has been toward you and on 
the part of this adopted son of mine.” 
— eros: Pataecus does not yet know 
that Moschion is his own son; how he 
finds out we do not know. Probably 
Myrrhina tells him, 

704. πάρειμι : like παρέρχομαι vy. 204, 
is sometimes used by the dramatic 
poets for εἴσειμι (-épyoua), either with 


or Without εἰς or εἴσω, of one who 
goes from the scene into the house. Cf. 
Kur, Ion 229 μὴ πάριτ᾽ εἰς μυχόν, Hel. 
451 ἀλλ᾽ ἔσω πάρειμι, Soph. El. 1337 
εἴσω παρέλθετε, Mur. Med. 1275 παρέλθω 
δόμους. --- ws: see on ν. 671. — ψέγω: 
he does not, as a matter of fact, see 
Moschion until the last scene of the 
play. 

705. On the transition from the 
iambic rhythm to the trochaic see on 
Vv. 147.— tls ἐστ᾽ ὄνησις: cf. Eur. Bacch. 
412 ἔχει δ᾽ ὄνησιν τοῖσι θύουσιν τίνα; 
Moschion apparently does not. finish 
the sentence, for a change of speaker 
is indicated by the paragraphus; but 
his thought seems to be ** What ad- 
vantage is it toa man to lose a sweet- 

ans 


heart and gain a sister He cannot 


look upon the outcome of his’ silly 
Wooing With any satisfaction, 
Moschion probably takes part in sev- 
eral other scenes: first with Glyecera; 
then, after Glycera enters the house, 
with Davus, Who well deserves a seold- 


alive 


last misunderstanding whieh is to be 


ing; and finally with Pataecus. 


cleared up, except that under which 


212 MENANAPOY 


CT ON 
At the beginning of the final act Polemon learns from Doris that Glycera is 
Moschion’s sister and that her father is the wealthy Pataecus., She is a 
free-born girl and a formal marriage with her would now be legally possi- 
ble. But now his act of jealous rage seems more unpardonable than ever. 
When he meets Doris he is in the depths of despair. 


PoLEMon, Dorts 


τ Sar PRS er τέτοιον yg ih ee ice Ss Ρ- Oxyr. col. i 


810- - - - τ τ- - - - ee ee ee eee 
Fiche a BE Seales ee vieg hn See Waren eat mate 


[Lacuna of 19 vv.] 


[Lackna of vv] 


ΞΡ erg ots a as Ree pene es EOE 


SUI SS EVEN ee ee πὴ το: ἄπο τ gra Sw ae LN, 


ea alc pees heer ie ea εν ἘΝ re 


ἘΠΕ ot Avy, | 


HONE MON 


owe ak. ‘ > rod 
SOT LV ἐμαυτὸν αποπνιξαιμι. 


Polemon labors, is hetween Myrrhina 857. ἀποπνίξαιμι : the mood shows 
wel weiss avis hen τ that Polemon is telling how he lad felt 
learns that Moselion is his sem. net When he learned that Glycera had lett 
hers: and she asks and receives for- him. Inv. 882 he had threatened to 


aiveness for her deception, hany himself: Tut it is not his present 


TIEPIKEIPOMENH 213 


AQPIZ 


Oxyr. col. ii. 


μὴ δὴ τοῦτό γε." 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


> 


c 


AQPTS 


» is Ls 
550 QATELOLY WS GWE — 


ἀλλὰ τί ποήσω. Δωρί: πῶς βιώσομαι." 
ὁ τρισκακοδαίμων, χωρὶς ὧν; 


9 A 
ὡς φησι νῦν, 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


πρὸς θεῶν, οἷον λέγεις. 


ΔΩΡῚΣ 


ἐὰν προθυμηθῆς ἀκάκως ' τοὐνθένδ᾽ ἔχειν." [ 


ot 
Sy 


ΠΌΛΕΩΝ 


ΕῚ 3 , 2K > va Ων ars Ἂν 3 ’ , 
οὐκ ἐνλίποιμ᾽ av οὐθέν, εὖ τοῦτ᾽ taf’, ἐγώ. 


Ἴ 


ὑπέρευ λέγεις. βάδιζ᾽. ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἐχευθέραν᾽ 


Peat 


» ΕῚ 7 i gt 
αὔριον ἀφήσω. Awpt, σ΄. 


» 
865 ακουσον. 


Doris hastily turns to τὸς 


ἀλλ᾽ ὃ δεῖ λέγειν᾽ 


She enters the house. 


εἰσελήλυθ᾽. οἴμοι. ᾿μάργ᾽ "Epos. 


purpose (v. 869), — τοῦτό ye: cf. Soph. 
Phil. 763 μὴ δῆτα τοῦτό γε. Menander’s 
Ctesipho in the original of Terence’s 
Adelphi proposed to commit suicide, 
but in Terence he meditates fight ; sec 
Donatus on Ad. 275, 

860. ἄπεισιν: shell come back, cf. 
V. 599 ἀλλ᾽ ἄπιθι μηδὲν ἧττον. Vhe vb. 
acquires the meaning ‘return’? only 
as the quoted word of Glycera, who 
had said, in effeet, ἄπειμι (πάλιν) πρὸς 
Πολέμωνα. 

861. ἐὰν προθυμήθῃς. κτέ. : still the 
quoted words of Glycera, 


863. ὑπερεῦ : of. 1. θα, ἐλευθέραν : 
the usual reward of faithful slaves in 
comedy, 

864. For the position of ge after a 
voc, cf S. AG αὐτὴ καλεῖ tirdy, oe. anil 
11 ἀδικεῖς, Anuéa, we. By sending 
Doris from the seene before she re 
celves explicit: instrietions the poet 
avoids tedious repetition, A similis 
deviee inv. 17s, 

865. μάργ᾽ Ἕρως: Polen s Τὶ 
setting sin, Whieh cet him: Τὸ 11 this 
trouble, is jealousy, dae toe his ardent 
therefore 


love οἵ Glveera, Ile ean 


214 MENANAPOY 


Ws κατὰ κράτος μ᾽ εἴληφας. ἐφίλησεν τότε᾽ [10] 
ἀδελφόν, οὐχὶ μοιχόν, ὁ 8 ἀλάστωρ ἐγὼ" 862 K. 
‘\ , ¥ fF A , =y 
καὶ ζηλότυπος ἄνθρωπος. ἀνακρῖναι δέον, 
ar 
εὐθὺς ἐπαρῴνουν. τοιγαροῦν ἀπηγχόμην, 


870 καλῶς ποῶν. 


ἐξέρχεται Δωρίς, 


τί ἐστι, Awpt φιλτάτη; 


ὃ ΔΩΡΙΣ 


ἀγαθά. 


, > «ε ’ 
πορεύσεθ WS O€. 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


ἌΝ ΤΣ > bape oo el 
κατεγέλα δ᾽ ἐμοῦ. [16] 


ΔΩΡῚΣ 


μὰ τὴν Adpodirnv, ἀλλ᾽ ἐνεδύετο στολήν, 


« Ν >’ ea > > “a aN γ V2 “a 
ὁ πατὴρ ἐπεξήταζ᾽. ἐχρὴν σε vov θύειν 


properly accuse ‘furious Eros” of 
having overwhelmed him, For the epi- 
thet ef. Alem. 56 Cr. μάργος δ᾽ “ἔρως 
ola παῖς παίσδει, Non. Dionys. 48. 277 
μάργος "Epws ἐρέθιζεν, Apoll. Rhod. 3. 
120. 

866. κατὰ κρατός: cf. vv. 268, 356. 
Polemon is fond of military language, 
ChaWerncisstoUlls 

867. Polemon has not seen Patae- 
cus, his ambassador, since v. 402. Doris 
must therefore have told him the truth 
in the earlicr part of this scene, — 
ἀλάστωρ: accursed wretch. The lexi- 
ἘΠ le 


Anec, 374.22) define απ ἁμαρτωλός, ἀλιτή- 


cographers (Phot. 
pos. Like Charisius in the Epitrepon- 
tes (v. 679), Polemon in his contrition 
now sees how unpardonable his con- 
duct was. 

868. ἀνακρῖναι δέον : men 1 ought 
to have inquired into the matter. This 
was his intention at first, see v. 39. Cf. 


E. 299, Men. Georg., fr. Gen., v. 67 rod 
μειρακίου Ta πράγματ᾽ ἀνέκρινεν. 

869. εὐθὺς ἐπαρῴνουν: I forthwith 
proceeded to play the drunken fool. The 
impf. is often used in narrative with 
an ady. of rapidity, see Gildersleeve 
Syn. ὃ 206. παροινία (ef. ν. 903) 15. not 
drunkenness but the act of a drunken, 
or rather tipsy, man; cf. Arist. Prob. 
87149 οὐχ of σφόδρα μεθύοντες παροινοῦ- 
σιν, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ ἀκροθώρακες μάλιστα. Cf. EK. 
255. ἀπηγχόμην: 7 wanted to hang 
myself, the impf. of past Intention, a 
variety of the conative. 

870. καλῶς ποῶν: cf. 


Plut. 863 καλῶς τοίνυν ποιῶν ἀπόλλυται. 


Λ ristoph, 


—The seenic directions in Greek are 
written in the papyrus above the line 
or in the margin. 

871. κατεγέλα δ᾽ ἐμοῦ: the impf. 
takes us back to the time, a moment 
before, when Glycera announced her 


intention, πορεύσομαι ws αὐτόν. 


ITEPIKEIPOMENH 


215 


> V4 ~ , » ιν Ν ’ = 
εὐαγγέλια τῶν γεγονότων - ἀσέβὲς πάνυ 
Γ τ 
815 στένειν ἐκείνης εὐτυχηκυίας ᾿ τόδε." 


MOAEMQN 


νὴ τὸν Δί᾽, ὀρθῶς yap λέγεις ὃ δεῖ ποεῖν." 


c 4 »» ᾽ ’ ον Φ δ ὁ at 
oO μάγειρος ἔνδον ἐστι. τηνυν θυέτω. 


ΔΩΡῚΣ 


κανοῦν δὲ ποῦ, καὶ TAAN ἃ δεῖ; 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


fp an Ν νον 
κανουν μέν ουν 


ν ΕἸ , > > ἊΝ , G 2, q 
ὕστερον ἐνάρξετ᾽, ἀλλὰ ταύτην σφαττέτω. 


873. ἐπεξήταζε : was passing her in 
review again, i.e. was feasting his eyes 
on her, dressed up in her best clothes. 
The vb. apparently does not recur, but 
the noun is used by Thue. 6. 42 ἐπεξέτα- 
σιν (a fresh review) rob στρατεύματος ἐποιή- 
Note the asyndeton. — θύειν 
εὐαγγέλια : a formal phrase, see Pauly- 
Wissowa Encycl. 5. εὐαγγέλια, and 
for the custom ef. Aristoph. Ey. 1320 
τίν᾽ ἔχων φήμην ἀγαθὴν ἥκεις, ἐφ᾽ ὅτῳ 
κνιζῶμεν ἀγυιάς; The vb. θύειν with ὕ αὐ 
the end of the verse also in Eur, E1.1141 
(MSS.), Aristoph. Ach. 792. 

874. ἀσεβές : as depriving the gods 
of their dues. 


σαντο. 


Pentheus, for example, 
ἀσέβειαν ἤσκει in not recognizing the 
rites of Bacchus, Eur. Bacch. 410. But 
Doris uses the word loosely. 

877. A cook happened to be in the 
house presumably because Polemon 
had invited his guests, whom he had 
earlier entertained in’ the country 
(v.55), to a banquet at home in the 
evening, The cook assisted at domestic 
sacrifices, cf. Athen. 659 θυτικῆς ἦσαν 


ἔμπειροιοἱ παλαίτεροι μάγειροι" προίσταντο 


γοῦν καὶ γαμῶν καὶ θυσιῶν, Poseid, 26. 
19 K. διακονοῦμεν νῦν γάμους" τὸ θῦμα 
βοῦς. 

878 ff. κανοῦν, κτέ.: cf. Aristoph. 
Pac. 948 τὸ κανοῦν πάρεστ᾽ ὁλὰς ἔχον καὶ 
στέμμα καὶ μάχαιραν, καὶ πῦρ γε τουτί, 
κοὐδὲν ἴσχει πλὴν τὸ πρόβατον ὑμᾶς. -- ἃ 
situation just the opposite of that here, 
Where nothing but the victim is ready. 
Before the vietim was slain the basket 
Was carried around the altar (Pac. 956 
τὸ κανοῦν λαβὼν σὺ καὶ THY χέρνιβα περίιϑι 
τὸν βωμὸν ταχέως ἐπιδέξια, Kur. HH. F. 
926 ἐν κύκλῳ δ᾽ ἤδη κανοῦν εἵλικτο βωμοῦ), 
barley grains scattered upon the head 
of the victim, and the fillets attached 
to it. This rite was described as κανοῦν 


ἐνάρχεσθαι. εἴ. also S. ἃ μὲν οὖν: 
immo, oftenso used 1 answers, modi- 
fying or correcting ἃ stigvestion, οὐ 
Soph. O.'T, Aris 


σὺ μὲν οὖν. See 


τι) 2 μάντιν μὲν οὖν, 
toph. Ky. 13 Néye σύ. 
Niihner-Gerth αὶ 507, 2¢. Poleton im 
patiently brushes aside all formalities, 
though sanetioned by immemorial eus- 
Never mind the basket, that rite 


will come later! 


tom: 


216 


MENANAPOY 


“ i lal 
sso μᾶλλον δὲ κἀγὼ στέφανον ἀπὸ βωμοῦ tober’ 


ἀφελὼν ἐπιθέσθαι βούλομαι. 
Takes ἃ garland from the altar of Apollo, near the door, and puts it on his head. 


ΔΩΡῚΣ (mockingly) 


πολλῴ φανεῖ γοῦν. 


Γ᾿ , ΕἹ 
πιθανώτερος 


[25] 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


» roa 1 , Ce) 
ayere νῦν | λυκέραν ταχύ. 


ΔΩΡῚΣ 


καὶ μὴν ἔμελλεν ἐξιέναι δὴ χὠ πατήρ." 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


αὐτός: Hears the door rattle. 
τί yap παθὴ τι: 


εἰσέρχεται Πολέμων. 


ΔΩΡῚΣ 


880. A 


taken frony ‘the basket by the: sacri- 


garland was ordinarily 
ficer, schol, Aristoph, Pac. 848 ἐκέκρυ- 
πτὸ ἐν τῷ κανῷ ἡ μάχαιρα Tals ὀλαῖς Kal 
τοῖς στέμμασιν. Polemon proposes to 
appropriate one from an altar near by. 
Glancing about him, he sees a wreath 
on the altar of Apollo Aeuieus (v. 242, 
BH. 735) and puts it on his head, 

881. πιθανώτερος : more plausible in 
speech as he must needs be to make 
ab acceptable excuse to Glycera. The 
orators in the assembly put on πα] ΠΝ 
hefore addressing the people. Or pos- 
sibly Doris meant aeore natural, more 
frie to your role as saveriticer, ef. the 


question Which Socrates put te the 
sculptor in Nem. Mem. 3. 10.7 ὁμοιότερά 
TE τοῖς ἀλημινοῖς καὶ πιθανώτερα ποιεῖς Pai- 


νεσθαι. id Aristoph. Phesm, 266 ὅπως 


>. Ar ’ AT 
ω ταν. ἀποδραμεῖ 3 


τῷ φθέγματι γυναικιεῖς εὖ καὶ πιθανῶς. 
Polemon, at any rate, sees the former 
Meaningonly, for how that leis crowned 
he is ready for Glycera, and forgets for 
the moment about the sacrifice, 

884. τί yap πάθῃ τις: whit is to he. 
come of one? τί γὰρ πάθω: is the more 
ustial formula. ris is often so used for 


the first pers,, e.g. Aristopl. Phesim, 


G03 ποῖ τις τρέψεται: Polemon is atraid 
to see Pataeeus because, sinee their 
last meeting (v. 402). Glyveera has been 
found to be the latter's daughter, As 
her father, Pataeeus would justly, he 
feels, be anery with the man who had 
treated Glycera with such indignity 
and had suspected herof infidelity, Mt 
the critical moment the brave soldier 
hecomes panicky. —rav: cf. 8.370, — 


ἀποδραμεῖ: or οὐ μενεῖς. 


IIEPIKEIPOMENH 


885 οὐ ToL δράκοντός ἐστι τὴν θύραν 'ψοφεῖν." 


¥ > Ν fe SiG ore, ἌΝ ΣῪ 
εισειμι καυτὴ συμποήησουσ. El TL δεῖ. 


[30] 


Exit Doris into the house of Polemon, Enter Pataecus and Glycera 
from the house of Pataecus. 


PaTArEcus, GLYCERA 


IATAIKOS 


πάνυ σου φιλῶ τὸ “συνδιαλλαχθήσομαι."" 


seed > , ΄ ar Ph \ As a 
OT EUTUXNKGAS, TOTE δέχεσθαι Τὴν δίκην, 


, Cont > as) ΓΝ "EAN rs ΓΕ 
τεκμήριον TOUT ἐστιν νος τρόπου. 
(To a slave) 


sw ἀλλ᾽ ἐκκαλείτω τις δραμὼν αὐτὸν ταχύ." 


885. A dragon can't rattle the door. 
Doris hurls this taunt at Polemon as 
he runs toward his house. The terror 
which he shows when he hears the 
door creak naturally suggests to Doris 
the thought of a man jumping back at 
Hom. Il. 3. 33 


(Paris at sight of Menelaus) ws δ᾽ ὅτε 


sight of a snake. Cf. 


τίς τε δράκοντα ἰδὼν παλίνορσος ἀπέστη 

. ὑπό τε τρόμος ἔλλαβε γυῖα, AY δ᾽ ἀνε- 
χώρησεν, ὠχρός τέ μιν εἷλε mapelas, ὡς 
αὖτις καθ᾽ ὅμιλον ἔδυ. . . δείσας ᾿ Δτρέος 
υἱόν. δ ον. Aen, 2.3879 inprovisum 
aspris veluti gui sentibus ai- 
guem pressit humi nitens tre- 
pidusque repente refugit. But 
the text is very uncertain. On ψοφεῖν 
used trans, see on EE. 660. 

887. φιλῶ : like, approve, = ἐπαινῶ. 
-- συνδιαλλαχθήσομαι : Jl) do my part 
(cuv-) in making up with him, quoted 
as having been spoken by Glycera just 
before they left the house. 

888. τὴν δίκην : the satisfaction that 
is offered, ie. a contrite apology and a 
promise of better behavior im the fue 
ture, Polemon δίκην δίδωσι, Glyeera 


δέχεται. ‘The expression διδόναι καὶ dé ye 


Enter Polemon from his house. 


σθαὶ Ta Sikaa (Thue. 1.37.5, ef. 5. 59. 5) 
isa formula of complete reciprocity in 
contractual or treaty relations. 

889. “Ἕλληνος τρόπου: true Hellenic 
character, In Bur, Orest. 494 Menelaus 
is denounced as not having grasped the 
high Hellenie conception of justice, 
ὅστις τὸ μὲν δίκαιον οὐκ ἐσκήψατο οὐδ᾽ ἦλ- 
θεν ἐπὶ τὸν κοινὸν ᾿Βλλήνων νόμον. 

890. δραμών: cf. Aristoph. Plut 
222 ἀλλ᾽ ἴθι σὺ μὲν ταχέως δραμών. - An 
analysis of the entrances and exits in 
this passage shows that at least four 
actors were employed to present. this 
play, —a fact established by two four- 
Pol- 


S84, RSG) 


actor seenes; see on vy, do4, OOS. 
emon and Doris retire (vv. 
just before Pataecus and Glycera ap- 
pear (v. 887), and Polemon reappears 
immediately (v. 81). Phe aetor who 
carried the part of Doris would not 
have had time to change costume and 
appear as Glycera, Furthermore, the 
ΠΑΝ of two characters so diverse as 
Polemon and Doris contd not be 
domtbled ; 


of Doris cannot 


theretore the Tipersotitol 


have come ΠΕ: 


Polemon, if the interval were sutherent 


218 


PATAECUS, GLYCERA, POLEMON 


MENANAPOY 


ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 


ἔξέρχομ᾽- ἀλλ᾽ ἔθυον ὑπὲρ εὐπραξίας." 


[35] 


A ay 
“Γλυκέραν ὕπαρ εὐρηκυῖαν ods ἐβούλετο᾽ 


c ala ΕἼ 
πυθόμενος. 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


ὀρθῶς γὰρ λέγεις. ἃ δ᾽ οὖν ἐγὼ" 


γ q 
μέλλω λέγειν ἄκουε: ταύτην γνησίων 


720 K. 


΄ Pet yak eer , 
895 παίδων ἘΠῚ αροόοτῳ σοι δίδωμι. 


IOAEMQN 


χαμβάνω." 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 


καὶ προῖκα τρία τάλαντα. 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


for ἃ change of costume. But he may 


possibly appear Inv. 904 as Moschion, 


891. ἔθυον: J was about to sacrifice 


(see ony. 869), —a lame explanation of 
his panicky flight. 

892. ὕπαρ: in very truth, lit. a wak- 
ing vision, the realization of something 
desired but searcely hoped) for The 
contrast With dvap, a mere dream, is 
always felt in thought and usually ex- 
pressed, οἷς Plat. Lege. 96018 ὄντως δὲ 
ἔσται σχεδὸν ὕπαρ ἀποτετελεσμένον, ov 
σμικρῷ πρόσθεν ὀνείρατος ὡς τῷ λόγῳ ἐφη- 
ψάμεθα. - - For the two initial anapaests 
SCOMON W205, 278: 

893. Pataceus at once puts Pole- 
mon at his case by approving: of φορεῖ 
idea, The sacrifice ὑπὲρ εὐπραξίας will 
be turned into a γαμηλία θυσία. 

894 ff. Gxove: the pure fun-makine 


Is how over, and the poet proceeds rap- 


καὶ καλῶς τόδε." 


[10] 


idly to colleet the loose strands of his 
plot in order to bring the play to a 
close, --- γνησίων παίδων ἐπ᾽ ἀρότῳ: a 
version of the marriage formula to 
Which this passage gave a wide cur- 
rencey inantiquity ; a variant ἐπὶ σπορᾷ 
in schol. Kur, Andy, 4.0 The essential 
part of the formula, as distinguishing 
the legal marriage from the wnsane- 
tioned connection, Involved the idea of 
παιδοποιΐα. I.¢. Andromache contrasts 
her relation to Neoptolemus as his con 
cubine with her former honorable posi- 
tion δοθεῖσα παιδοποιὸς “Exropt, Eur. 
Andry, 4. Cf. 1. 380 and note, The fig- 
ure derived from plowing and sowing 
is common In all antiquity in comnec- 


tion with marriage, -- λαμβάνω : the 
vox propria for the bridegroom, prob- 
ably from the regular formula, ef, Men, 


NSO IK. αὑτὸν δίδωσιν. οὐκ ἐκείνην λαμβάνει. 


ILEPIKEIPOMENH 219 


ΠΑΤΑΙΚΟΣ 
Ν Ν > “ ’ ΓΝ ν 2! 
τὸ λοιπὸν ἐπιλαθοῦ στρατιώτης ὦν, ὅπως 
Ν id Ni τ oF Ν ‘ τῇ 
προπετὲς ποήσῃς μηδὲ Ev τοὺς σοὺς φίλους. 
ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 
[Απολλον : ὃς καὶ νῦν ἀπόλωλα παρ᾽ ὀλίγον," 
/ (d , > \ ry » a 
90 πάλιν τι πράξω προπετές ; οὐδὲ μὴν ὄναρ, 
Γλυκέρα- διαλλάγηθι, φιλτάτη, μόνον." [45] 
TATKEPA 
νῦν μὲν yap ἡμῖν γέγονεν ἀρχὴ πραγμάτων᾽ 
ἀγαθῶν τὸ σὸν πάροινον. 
ΠΟΛΕΜΩΝ 
ὀρθῶς, ὦ φίλη." 
ΓΛΥΚΕΡᾺ 
διὰ τοῦτο συγγνώμης τετύχηκας ἐξ ἐμοῦ." 


ΠΟΛΈΜΩΝ 


ws σύνθυε δή, Πάταιχ᾽. 


From this passage we learn that the 
action of this play is laid in Corinth, 
for there the Corinthian soldier could 
contract a legal marriage with the 
daughter of Pataecus, a Corinthian. 
But a Corinthian could not marry an 
Athenian girl, See on v, 381. 

898. προπετές : Polemon was in- 
clined to be impulsive, cf. σφοδρός v. 8. 

899. “Aroddov . . 


EK. 692 cdrep... σῷζέ we. This manner 


. ἀπόλωλα; cf. 


of playing upon the name of the god 
invoked is common, ef. Archil. 20 Cr. 
Ἄπολλον... 
Δα. 1081 Ἄπολλον ayuar’, ἀπόλλων ἐμός, 
Eur. fr Τ81.11Ν. ὦ καλλιφεγγὲς “HAC, 


“ . Γ ’ ’ eo 9» 
ws mw ἀπώλεσας καὶ τόνδ᾽" Ἀπόλλων ὃ ἐν 


ἘΠ Tee, 
.. ὄλλυ᾽ ὥσπερ ὀλλύεις, Asch, 


βροτοῖς ὀρθῶς καλῇ. 
900. οὐδὲ μὴν ὄναρ: see on v. 250 


and ef. Eur. fr. 107 N. οὐδ᾽ ὄναρ κατ᾽ ev- 
φρόνην φίλοις ἔδειξεν αὑτόν, Plat. Theaet. 
113.) οὐδὲ ὄναρ πράττειν (ταῦτα) προσί- 
σταται αὐτοῖς, Herond. 1. 11 πέντε που 
δοκέω μῆνες, ἐξ οὗ σε. Τρυλλίς, οὐδ᾽ ὄναρ 

. €ld€ Tes. 

902. ἀρχὴ πραγμάτων ἀγαθῶν : 1 
ferring to {Π| εὐπραξία (v. 889) of Glye 
era, cf. v.45 ἀρχὴν ἵνα λάβοι μηνύσεως 

. τούς θ᾽ αὑτῶν ποτε εὕροιεν. Pure hip 
piness radiates from these simple words 
of Glycera, spoken with exquisite deli 
cacy and grace. 

903. τὸ σὸν πάροινον : See ON Vv. SOU, 
Thisisprecisely as Agnoia had planned, 
VV. tiff: 

905. The scenic direetion, Πολέμων 
written above σύν 


εἴσεισι Ἰἰάταικος, 


θυε, does not accurately represent the 


MENANAPOY 


IATAIKOX 


ε ’ ff , Ἢ 
ἑτέρους ζητητέον 


» Ν ’ ΓΞ Ἂν (silos ww τ 
ἐστὶν γάμους μοι: τῷ γὰρ υἱῷ λαμβάνω 


[50] 


fe » Ὁ . . . 
τὴν τοῦ Φιλίνου θυγατέρ . Moschion comes from his hiding-place. 


° 


PATAECUS, GLYCERA, POLEMON, MoscHION 


MOZXIQN 


i Ar 5 
ὦ Γη Kat θεοί. 


[A few verses are lacking. ] 


actions of the speakers here. Polemon 
doubtless starts toward his house with 
Glycera, but he turns to hear the an- 
swer of Pataecus to his invitation. 

907. Pidivov: see above, p. 142.- ὦ 
Γῆ καὶ θεοί: this exclamation, which 
follows the announcement by Pataecus 
of his intentions regarding Moschion, 
could not well proceed from any one 
bat Moschion himself. We have only to 
suppose that Moschion has been eaves- 
dropping again, as in vv, 427 fh. 585 ff. 
and in the recocnition scene vv. G46 ff, 
The statement of Pataeeus so startles 
him that he betrays lis presence, 

The appearance of Moschion at this 
point permits the poet to conclude the 
play ina few inere verses. Pataecus 
had left the seene atv. TO4 intending 
to administer a severe rebuke to Mos- 
Chion. Mosehion had heard dim an- 


nounce his purpose and has since taken 


good eare not to come into his sight. 
He is now obliged to show himself. In 
the presence of Polemon and Glycera 
Pataecus probably gives him ἃ repri- 
mand and a warning and requires his 
consent to the marriage which he las 
hurriedly arranged for him, Four per- 
sons are present in the final scene, as 
Lieve ΟΝ 
about Philinus or his daughter. 


We know nothing 
They 
seem to have no part in the action of 
In Ver, 


announces Ta similar way at the end 


the play. Heauton, Chremes 
of the Jast scene his wishes for Clita: 
LAW ΠΟ πε αι Clty sss wenden 71ι|Ξ 
1060 Ch. gnate 
ti, eco pol tnt abe: tan he- 


ter! peris. 


Kt ee tae {ἘΝ ἢ τς 


PAN Ine ἀν most τς Cue 
thie ys einen 


rofamne ene 


slam, PIPES OTe) τ ἘΠ ὦ nase: 


non possum, pater, 


DN Ων 


Jn 
Alet 





THE SAMIA 


The title of the fourth comedy contained in the codex of Aphro- 
ditopolis is uncertain; but, as M. Lefebvre justly observes, the im- 
portance of the role of Chrysis the Samian girl (so called in vv. 53 
and 142) naturally leads to the tentative identification of this play 
with the Samian Girl’ of Menander, a play from which we have 
but a single line, quoted with the title by Phrynichus the Atticist. 
This line happens not to recur in the new manuscript, but is of a 
content not inappropriate to it. Of this play we have in round 
numbers 344 lines, of which the text is in fairly good condition. 
The preserved text falls into two continuous sections of 204 and 
140 lines respectively, separated by a lacuna of 140 lines. There 
are therefore lost from the beginning and end of the play approxi- 
mately 500 lines. These scenes from the central part of the comedy 
unfortunately do not supply us with sufficient information to enable 
us to reconstruct the plot with any considerable degree of certainty. 
We know, however, who the principal characters are, and to a 
certain extent the situation in which they tind themselves at the 
time the action begins. 

Demeas, a well-to-do Athenian citizen of middle age, is living with 
Chrysis, a free-born (v. 375) Samian girl, whom he had once res- 
cued from a position of great poverty (vv. 165 ff.) —in fact had 
literally taken from the streets if we may believe lis angry de- 
nunciation (v. 136) —and had placed in charge of 115. household 
(vv. 46, 201). Ife is evidently deeply attached to Chrysis and she 
to him. Doubtless only the fact that she is foreign-born has pre- 
vented him from making her his lawful wife. Another member of 
the household is Moschion, an adopted son (v. 134) of Demeas, a 
young man of rather romantic turn of mind (vv. 414 ff.) who has 

1'The possibility of adouble title Yauia ἢ Τίτθη is sugzested by Harmon, who 


points out the striking similarity of the ‘Samia’? and Caecilins’ Pitthe. 


992 
ey 


224 MENANDER 


been, as Demeas at any rate supposes (vv. 61, 152), exemplary in 
his conduct, and certainly loyal and obedient in his relations with 
his adoptive father (vv. 62, 133). But Demeas and Moschion, a 
short time previous to the action of the play, have had a serious 
quarrel (vv. 120 f.); Mosehion had offended his father and had for 
a time resented the latter’s treatment of him. We do not know the 
oceasion of the misunderstanding, but may reasonably surmise that 
it was due to a report, which had reached the ears of Demeas, of his 
son’s entanglement in a love affair with a girl whom Demeas does 
not know, but who is so poor that Mosehion cannot hope that she 
would be thought an acceptable wife for lim. However this may 
be, Moschion had made. satisfactory explanations to lis father 
(v. 122), and now, when the latter has proposed to settle lim in 
life and remove him from temptation by marrying lim to Plangon 
(v. 428), the daughter of Niceratus, a poor neighbor, Mosehion, 
much to lus father’s surprise, has readily accepted the arrange- 
ment. In faet, the alacrity with which Moschion fell in with the 
plan caused Demeas to suspect that the girl with whom his son was 
really in love was Plangon (vv. 122 ff). And this was indeed the 
ease, for Plangon is the girl of whom Mosehion was enamored 
and whom he had sworn to marry (v. 422), apparently without 
having made any definite plans to carry out his intention. It so 
happens that the proposal by Demeas of an immediate marriage 
with Plangon comes at a most fortunate time for Moscehion, for 
matters have gone so far with the young people that Plangon has 
just given birth to a child. To save her from reproach Mosehion 
has taken the cluld over to his father’s house (wv. 447 ff), placing 
it in the care of an old woman who had been lis own nurse in 
Infaney. We do not know what other persons may be im the 
secret, but Plangon’s mother certainly is (v. 306), and also Par- 
menon, Moschion’s confidential slave (vv. 447 ff). Bat neither of 
the two fathers has the slightest inkling of what 1s going on, and 
puns have been taken that their suspicions shall not be aroused. 
The situation in the household of Demeas is apparently still 
further compleated by the faet that Chrysis has secretly borne a 
elild to Demeas himself. Of this we cannot, perhaps, be absolutely 


certain, but ἃ omumber of allusions point to this conclusion, In the 


SAMIA 225 


first place Chrysis is a mother, for she is seen in the act of giving 
her breast to a baby (v. 54).! She has importuned Demeas for per- 
mission to rear a child, whom she professes to have found (vy. 66, 
162, 175, 198). In the second place, Parmenon declares under oath 
to Demeas (vv. 102 f.) that Demeas himself is the father of the 
child and that Chrysis is its mother; and when Demeas tries to 
make him acknowledge that Moschion is the father, Parmenon ap- 
parently adheres to his original assertion and refuses to clear up the 
mystery (v. 108). The slave’s frankness in telling Demeas about 
the child which he calls Chrysis’ and his reticence when it is a ques- 
tion of involving Moschion are both accounted for by the assump- 
tion that there is a second child of which Parmenon has knowledge, 
while Demeas knows of but one (vv. 106 ff.). And, finally, the con- 
cluding scenes of the second act can hardly be understood except 
upon the assumption that the child which Niceratus threatens to 
kill is a different child from that which Plangon has borne to 
Moschion. It is difficult to avoid the conelusion that both Chrysis ? 
and Plangon have recently given birth to children; that Chrysis, 
concealing the fact from Demeas, perhaps because she knows that 
he does not care to rear a family, has told him that the child 
which she has in her possession is a foundling, and has with difti- 
culty won his consent to her keeping it; that Moschion, not know- 
ing what else to do with Plangon’s child, has put it in charge of 
his old nurse until a better arrangement should present itself. On 
this hypothesis we should have to assume that Chrysis, who was the 
manager of Demeas’ house, was a party to Moschion’s secret; but 
she was too loyal a woman to betray it to Demeas, even when such 
a course would have been in her own interest. 


MIt has been suggested that Clrysis, though a childless woman, gave her 
breast to the child, playing the mother to it; or that she simply held it te her 
bosom, but Demeas, excited and suspicious, imacined he saw in her acta con- 
firmation of his fears. The second alternative is a possible one, but there is ne 
hint in the extant text to support it, and, besides, the suspicion of Demeas had 
not in the least been directed toward Chrysis until he saw her nursing the child, 
The first suggestion is extremely improbable. There is nothing morbid) about 
Chrysis. And in the strugele with Nieeratus (v2 557) she fights for the possession 
of the child as if it Were her own, 

2 Presumably during an absence of Demeas from home, 


226 MENANDER 


That the Samia is a comedy whose plot leads up to a recognition, 
by which the chief characters are restored to their proper station 
in life, is obvious. The heroine, a Samian orphan girl, as she and 
her protector suppose, is destined to be revealed as the daughter 
of an Athenian citizen and joined in lawful wedlock to Demeas. 
As in the other comedies of Menander that belong to this general 
type, the favorite procedure of the poet is to show us the charac- 
ters in the midst of a serious crisis which leads to all possible 
misunderstandings. The clearing up of these misunderstandings 
inevitably leads to disclosures regarding the persons who are 
living under false conditions. In the Samia, as we interpret its 
plot, Menander is true to his method. Chrysis is launched upon a 
course which is bound to keep her in the position of mistress of 
Demeas and recipient of his bounty, compelled to rear in secret as 
a foundling a child which, if the truth were known, would oecupy 
an honorable position in life. Some incident must arise which shall 
turn events from their normal course. The subordinate plot, in 
which Moschion and Plangon are the chief factors, provides such an 
incident. The presence of two babies in the house on the day of 
the marriage sets the machinery of the plot in motion. Demeas by 
chance overhears the old nurse crooning over Moschion’s child, 
which he supposes to be the foundling, and referring to it as 
Moschion’s (vy. 50 ff.). A moment later he sees Chrysis in another 
part of the house with a baby at her breast, —the same baby, he 
naturally assumes. [16 jumps to the conclusion that the child 
which he has been led to believe was a foundling is the Samian 


girl’s own offspring, —as it really is, —and that Moschion is its 





father. Beside himself with grief, he takes the speetators into his 
confidence in the speech with which the second act opens, and again 
after his suspicions have been confirmed, as he thinks, by the reti- 
eence of the slave Parmenon. The previous conduct of Mosehion 
has been such that Demeas cannot believe that he has wantonly 
committed so outrageous a breach of loyalty toward him. Chrysis, 
the woman of unknown origin, must have enticed the boy to this act. 
She must be dismissed from the house. As for Mosehion, his reputa- 
tion must be protected at all hazards. Demeas will not breathe a 


word of suspicion against him, even to Chrysis. This resolution 


SAMIA 227 


of Demeas (v. 141) has an important bearing on the plot. Explana- 
tions are impossible, since no charge is made. The dénouement, 
which might have come speedily, is postponed by what seems to 
be an inextricable tangle of misunderstandings in which the char- 
acters are involved. They talk at cross purposes continually. 

We have no means of knowing how the scenes of the first act 
were managed, nor who spoke the prologue of exposition, if there 
was one. It is clear, however, that the spectators have already had 
the present situation fully explained to them before the speech of 
Demeas, and that the action proper does not begin until after this 
speech. We are therefore justified in assigning the speech to the 
first scene of the second act. After a short scene between Parmenon 
and the Cook, which serves to bring us back into the current of 
activities, Demeas tries to learn the truth from Parmenon. And 
Parmenon does tell him the truth so far as the supposed foundling 
is concerned, though Demeas cannot believe it, especially since the 
slave, loyal to his young master, is evasive on the subject of the 
child which Demeas has heard called Moschion’s. Accordingly 
Chrysis is driven from the house. She is seen by Niceratus, who 
offers her protection. 

At this point comes the long break in the manuscript. When 
the text is resumed we find Demeas and Niceratus! in the midst of 
a conversation. Demeas has in the meantime learned from some- 
body (vv. 349, 413), presumably from Moschion himself (for to no 
third person would Demeas have divulged his suspicion that Mos- 
chion had sustained improper relations with Chrysis), that the mother 
of Moschion’s child is Plangon and not Chrysis. But he has learned 
nothing about the child whom he saw Chrysis nursing; in fact he 
seems to forget the significance of that incident, so pleased is he to 
have proved Moschion’s innocence, Niceratus also seems to have 
had an interview with Moschion after the latter’s confession to his 
father. Chrysis has told Niceratus that Demeas has driven her 
from his house because of the child whieh she has taken to rear 
(v. 198), although she cannot understand his sudden outburst of 
rage against her in view of his having previously given his consent 

1 οὑτοσί, used by Demeas in y. 347 with reference to Niceratus, requires us to 
assume that the latter is the other interlocutor in the preceding conversation, 


228 MENANDER 


to her taking it. Niceratus is no doubt curious to know something 
more about this child, now under his protection, which Demeas has 
been so foolish (v. 199) as to take into his household, and whose 
presence there has led Demeas to commit so outrageous an act 
against Chrysis. Moschion is in a position to satisfy his curiosity. 
When questioned on the subject, Moschion would have no scruples 
about telling frankly what he and everybody else believed to be 
the truth, viz. that the child had been found by Chrysis and that 
its parents are unknown.' Possessed of this information Niceratus 
meets Demeas. Demeas is now very happy that his suspicions 
against Chrysis and Moschion have proved false, and is eager to 
make his peace with Chrysis and to take her back to his home. 
As for the lesser deception which Mosechion has practiced upon 
him, in concealing his intrigue with Plangon and in secreting the 
child in his house, this does not disturb him at all; the marriage 
will set matters right so far as Plangon is concerned. Demeas is 
anxious, however, to guard Moschion’s secret at all hazards, and 
a simple expedient for keeping the knowledge of it froan Nicera- 
tus occurs to him. By telling Niceratus that lis daughter has 
given birth to an illegitimate child, but that Moschion is ready to 
marry her in spite of this misfortune, Demeas hopes that Niceratus, 
in his chagrin, will be glad enough to accept the situation without 
pressing too seriously into the question of the ehild’s father. 

This hypothesis regarding the lost scenes that intervened be- 
tween vv. 204 and 345 will, it is believed, be found consistent with 
the indications furnished by the extant text and helpful in rendering 


1 ΤῸ is only by assuming such a conversation between Niceratus and Mosehion 
on the subject of the child that we can account for the words and actions of 
the former in the scenes which follow the lacuna. He says that Moschion has 
hoodwinked and deluded him (vv. 3884, 397), and this has generally been inter- 
preted as indicating that Niceratus suspects Moschion of being the child's 
father, But there is no indication of any such suspicion, nor of any desire on 
Moschion’s part to eseape marrying Plangon., Rather, Moschion has told 
Niceratus something which the latter, now that he has heen enlightened by 
Demeas, regards as a falsehood. The most important communication which 
Demeas makes to Niceratus is that Plangon has borne a child and that this 
child is now in Niceratus’ house with Chrysis. Moschion must therefore have 
told Niceratus that Chrysis’ child is a foundling, 


SAMIA 229 


intelligible the highly interesting conversation of the two fathers, 
interrupted by the assault of Niceratus upon Chrysis, which fol- 
lows the lacuna. When Niceratus is told by Demeas that Plangon 
has a child and that this child is the foundling which Chrysis has 
taken in charge, he rushes into his house without waiting for the 
further explanations of Demeas. In the house he finds his wife 
and daughter with Chrysis and her baby. He accuses the women 
of concealing from him the fact that this baby is Plangon’s child. 
They protest, and truthfully, that it is not (v. 356). Threatening 
to kill the child if they do not confess the truth, he tries to seize 
it from the arms of Chrysis. Her resistance infuriates him, and 
he decides to resort to extreme measures, if necessary, to get pos- 
session of the child (v. 359). With the assistance of Demeas Chry- 
sis makes her escape, but not until the two men have come to 
blows. With delightful irony the poet makes Demeas assert that 
the child is his own. Finally Niceratus is calmed, — not, we may 
be sure, by the silly argument by which Demeas pretends to prove 
that Plangon has been visited by Zeus, but rather by the repeated 
assurances of Demeas that the marriage will take place in spite of 
Plangon’s misfortune. 

Of the extant text there remains to consider only the beginning 
of the third act, in which another complication is introduced. Mos- 
chion proposes to show a manly resentment of his father’s unjust 
suspicion. He cannot actually go to the wars, for he is in honor 
and love bound to Plangon; but he will pretend that he is going, 
and after Demeas has implored him to remain he will yield an ap- 
parently reluctant consent. We cannot see what bearing the de- 
velopment of this motive could have upon the main plot. Very 
likely these scenes were introduced merely as amusing by-play to 
delay the dénouement. 

The manner in which the complieation was solved so far as 
Chrysis and her child are concerned we can only conjecture. No 
elues survive in the extant text which give any intimation of the 
way in which the truth was revealed. A natural means of dis- 
closing the identity of the child would have been to bring the two 
infants together before the eyes of Demeas. just as the misunder- 
standings of the Menaeehimi are finally cleared up by a personal 


230 MENANDER 


meeting of the two brothers. Explanations would be demanded and 
given. The discovery that Chrysis is an Athenian girl of good 
family may have been managed, as in the Andria, by the timely ar- 
rival of a stranger in the fifth act; this would be after Chrysis has 
been obliged to acknowledge the child as her own. In any event, 
we can have little doubt that the play closed with an announcement 
οἵ a double wedding. 

The originality of the Samia depends rather upon the plot than 
upon the characters. Demeas and Niceratus are typical fathers of 
the New Comedy, possessed of substantial, if rather elementary, 
virtues, but more remarkable for their readiness to believe the most 
improbable things without due inquiry and their tendency to fly into 
a rage at the slightest provocation. Moschion and his slave Par- 
menon do not vary much from the familiar characters of young 
man and confidential slave of the better sort. The Cook seems to 
have a minor role of the usual mageiric type. It is likely that 
Plangon did not appear upon the scene. Of Trypha, whose name 
is furnished by the quotation, we know nothing; she may have 
been the maid-servant of the wife of Niceratus and may not have 
had a speaking part. The character of Chrysis was probably clothed 
with rather more individuality than that of the average young 
woman of the New Comedy, if we may judge by the one extant 
scene in which she plays an important. part. 

As a play, however, the Samia reveals Menander in a new light 
as the author of a farcical comedy, to which the nearest analogy 
among the existing specimens of the New Comedy is the Menaechmi 
of Plautus. The original of the Menaechmi was composed a gener- 
ation after Menander’s death, so that Menander may have been an 
innovator in this direction also. In a farcical comedy lke the Samia 
or the Menaechmi one does not inquire too closely into the intrin- 
sic probability of the situations that are presented, nor does one 
demand at every turn that the motives which actuate the eharac- 
ters shall be both adequate and reasonable. For example, the 
presence in a household at the same time of two unacknowledged 
babies, about one of whom the master of the house is suecessfully 
kept in ignorance, does not seem to be an incident. that would be 
likely to oceur in real life. Equally improbable, from this point of 


SAMIA 231 


view, is the presence in a house of two hetaerae as guests of a re- 
spectable man and his wife, — the situation that underlies the plot 
of Menander’s Heauton. But such situations must be accepted as 
the creation of the poet’s fancy, definitely calculated to produce 
certain humorous entanglements and ludicrous misunderstandings. 
So far as we can judge, the poet has taken advantage with admi- 
rable skill and ingenuity of the opportunities offered by his plot for 
boisterous humor and effective stage business, and that too without 
resorting to the coarseness which characterizes the Menaechmi. 
And into the series of amusing situations which are developed 
from the varied interplay of cross purposes the poet has woven a 
memorable scene of unusual pathetic power, — the scene in which 
Chrysis is driven out by Demeas. 

The presence of a chorus is indicated at the beginning of the 
third act (after v. 413), but no reference is found in the extant text 
to the persons who form the chorus. The comus-chorus of the Epi- 
trepontes and Periceiromene, however, and of the other plays of 
the Middle and New Comedy from which we chance to have pas- 
sages alluding to the chorus, probably had its counterpart in the 
Sainia also. As van Leeuwen suggests, the entertainments between 
the acts are probably furnished by a band of revelers who are in 
attendance upon the wedding of Moschion. 

The scene of the play is laid in Athens (v. 420). Only two 
houses are required in the scene, the residences of Demeas and 
Niceratus. These houses are apparently separated by a passage- 
way or angiportus (v. 156), and before the house of Demeas at 
least is the usual πρόθυρον (v. 193). 

The only clue to the date of composition of the Samia is the 
allusion to the parasite Chaerephon! in v. 401. The point of the 
jest is that Chaerephon, though an old man, bids fair to live for- 
ever. Now Chaerephon was ridiculed in no fewer than eleven plays 
by six poets of the early New Comedy. The data furmished by 
these plays and by Athenaeus make it seem probable that none of 
these references, even this in the Samia, which is probably the 
latest of all, falls after ca, 310 nc. In the first place we learn from 
Athenaeus (244.4) that Chaerephon was the author of the first book 


1Sce Wilamowitz in N. Jhb. XT (1908), p. 47, Anm. 1. 


232 MENANDER 


on dining 





a fact that doubtless contributed to his notoriety — and 
that it was addressed in the form of a letter to “Cyrebion.” “Cyre- 
bion” was the nickname applied to Epicrates, son of Philodemus, 
of Paeania (see Kirchner, No. 4908), who was brother of Philon and 
brother-in-law of Aeschines the orator. Demosthenes alludes to 
this *Cyrebion” in the Oration on the Embassy (ὃ 287), delivered in 
345. We cannot follow the career of Epicrates, but he was prob- 
ably not much younger than Aeschines. He is mentioned by Alexis 
in the Paneratiast (859 K.) along with another parasite, Callimedon, 
the orator who opposed Demosthenes and was condemned to death 
while in exile in the year 518. Callimedon is mentioned also by 
Menander in the Methe (820 K.) together with our Chaerephon. 
It is therefore reasonable to suppose that both the Pancratiast and 
the Methe were produced before 318, and altogether likely that 
Chaerephon, as a somewhat younger contemporary of Epicrates, 
dedicated his book to the latter early in the twenties, shortly be- 
fore the stream of ridicule was directed against its author. An ap- 
proximate estimate based on these data would make Chaerephon 
between 50 and 60 years of age in 520 μ΄ The other allusions to 
Chaerephon are consistent with this conelusion. Antiphanes, who 
mentions him (189), died ca. 314-311 (7. P. X XT, p. 58). Alexis 
refers to him twice (210, 252); in the former passage, where we 
are told that Chaerephon has made a visit to Corinth “as an un- 
bidden guest,” we may suspect that the visit was due to the po- 
litical troubles that sent many Athenians into exile between the 
years 825 and 3517. Timocles, whose career extended from about 
“10 to S20, ridicules him in the Epistolae (9) along with Demotion 
amd LTithynidlus. “Lhe latter, as. Semekesremarked (Hist. Crit... ἦν 
418), is mentioned only by poets of the Middle Comedy. Demotion 
is to be identified with the rich man referred to in the oration of 
Hypereides for Muxenippus, delivered in 350 n.c.; for the poet 
says Of him παρέτρεφεν τὸν βουλόμενον, While the orator refers to the 
eharge against lis client, Δημοτίωνος δίαιταν ἔλαβεν. The play and 
the oration obviously belong to the same period. The allusion by 
Nieostratus (25) 1s one of the latest, for the career of this poet 
εξ ἢ ΝΑ ΙΖ: }. 15.393.) Menander himself has 


three other references to Chaerephon : In the Androzynus (50) 


SAMIA Dao 


and Cecryphalus (277), neither of which can be dated, and in the 
Orge (364), with which the poet probably won his first victory in 
315 B.c. (A.J. P.XXI, p. 61; Clark, Cl. Phil. I, pp. 313 ff.). Finally, 
Apollodorus of Gela, almost exactly a contemporary of Menander, 
mentions him in the Sphattomene (26), aid in the Hieraea (24).’ In 
the latter a person is called “a new Chaerephon,” i.e. a successor 
of Chaerephon, as if Chaerephon himself had passed off the stage. 
All this tends to place the Samia early in the second decade of 
Menander’s career, after the Orge and before the Periceiromene. 
The remains of the Samia in the Cairo papyrus consist of one 
leaf of two pages (G) and two sheets of four pages each (I and F). 
The sequence of these ten pages was determined by the first editor. 
151 must precede 1132 because in the latter (v. 442) reference is 
made to an event which happened in the former (v. 114). ΕἾ follows 
immediately upon I*, the latter page ending in the middle of a sen- 
tence which is completed in Εἰ. The connection between G? and 
15 and between F* and 11} is not so obvious, since each ends and be- 
gins respectively with a completed sentence; but the action moves 
on continuously and the make-up of the book requires that these 
pages shall join without an interval. A considerable interval, how- 
ever, separates ΕΖ from Εὖ. The length of this interval is fortu- 
nately determined, as Korte has shown (Ler. d. sdels. Gesell, 1908, 
p. 114), by the position of the other sheets in the quaternion. The 
quaternion must begin and end with the recto side. The arrange- 
ment of the extant ten pages must therefore be as follows, one 


+ 


sheet, or four pages, being lost between I? and I?: 
(Ge G2 [3 1 ΕἸ 1: [x! x? x3 xe 119 1: [! 1: [Ge (1) 


1The Sphattomene is once quoted by Athenaeus as by Apollodorus of Carys- 
tus; but this poet is now known to have entered upon his career after Menan- 
der’s death (IG: 11 977 hy in Wilhelm, Dramat. Unk, pole; ΣΙ ΟΕ 55 XM, p. 
45). The Hieraea is assigned to the Geloan by Suidas and Budocia, but by 
Athenaeus, again erroneously, to the Carystian. 

Mention should also be made of Machon, a contemporary of Apollodorus of 
Carystus (Ath. 664.4), who relates two anecdotes of Chaerephon in his Chretive 
(Ath. 248 £), in one of which he properly makes the parasite a contemporary of 
Diphilus. Machon is clearly not speaking of a person contemporary with him- 
self. The time of Matron the παρῳδός, Who meutions Chacrephon in his poem 
Δεῖπνον (Ath. 134), is unknown, 


234 MENANDER 


One half of the play was therefore contained in the middle qua- 
ternion (y) of the three which contained the Samia. The preceding 
quaternion (x) contained the first act and a few lines of the second. 
For this lost portion perhaps 200 lines, say six pages of quaternion 
x, would suffice. If the play had the usual compass of from 1000 
to 1100 lines, about nine pages of quaternion z, in addition to 
the last two pages of quaternion y, would be required for the com- 
pletion of the third act and for the fourth and fifth acts. 

The question as to the amount of text lost from the beginning of 
the Samia is related to the question of the order of the plays in the 
Cairo codex. We know that the Hero was second in order and that 
the play which preceded it ocecupied-only 28 pages, for the folio 
numbers x6’ and λ' are preserved at the tops of pages Al and A? 
respectively. Furthermore, according to the estimates given above 
(pp. 45, 148), the Epitrepontes probably began on the fourteenth 
(but see below) page of a quaternion and extended through the four- 
teenth page of the second following quaternion, occupying about 
32 pages, while the Periceiromene began on the fifteenth (but see 
below) page of a quaternion and extended through the twelfth page 
of the second following quaternion, occupying about 30 pages. If 
these estimates are even approximately correct, 10 is obvious that 
the first play in the codex, which filled the first quaternion and 
twelve pages of the second, was neither the Epitrepontes nor the 
Periceiromene; nor yet the Samia, which, as we have just seen, 
began in the second half of a quaternion. The first play must have 
been either the play of unknown title represented by the single 
page LPS, or a play of which nothing is preserved. Now from our 
estimates it appears that the order Epitrepontes-Periceiromene is 
somewhat more probable than the order Periceiromene-Epitrepontes, 
since the Epitrepontes probably ended nearer the end of a quater- 
nion than did the Periceiromene, and the Periceiromene probably 
began nearer the end of a quaternion than did the Epitrepontes. As 
for the Samia, the lost beginning of which extended back about six 
pages into the quaternion preceding E', it cannot have immediately 
followed either the Epitrepontes or the Periceiromene, but, so far as 
we can judge by its estimated position in the quaternions, may have 
followed either the Hero or the play represented by LPS. 


SAMIA 235 


Korte has recently advanced a plausible theory, based upon con- 
siderations of another kind, of the order of the plays in the codex. 
He observed that the practice of the scribe in noting in the margins 
the names of the speakers varied greatly in the several plays,’ and 
suggests that he became more negligent in this regard as he went on. 
By this criterion the Hero was followed by the Epitrepontes and 
Periceiromene, in this order; the unknown play LPS could not have 
been first in the codex but rather preceded the Samia; and the 
Samia was last of the preserved plays —the sixth in the codex, if 
the manuscript contained no more than six plays. 

It will be observed that this new evidence lends support to the 
conclusions based upon the estimated length of the plays and their 
positions in the quaternions, and that the estimate of the length of 
the lost beginning of the Samia permits the assumption that the 
Periceiromene was followed by the unknown play LPS and this in 
turn by the Samia. The following table shows the order of the plays 
in the codex as thus tentatively determined : 





QUATERNIONS I Ti τ fave, ἐν Vi Vit Vill) ox x ΧΙ KT 
Plays: 

Ti, pp. 10. 12 

II. Hero pp. 4 16 fiz] 

III. Epitr. pp. [4]? 16 [13] 

IV. Peric. pp. oye 10. 619] 

λύραν ἢ μὴ. δύο ΡΡ- heal [16] [10] 

VI. Samia pp. [6] 16° -9? 


1 Menandrea, Praef., pp. xi, xii. The proportion of speakers named in the 
margins to the number of lines is as follows: Hero 1 to 4; Epitrepontes 1 to 23; 
Periceiromene 1 to 32; LPS 1 to 59; Samia 1 to 341. 

2 Assuming that 4 pages (instead of 3, see p. 45) of quaternion iv were required 
for the Epitrepontes, the Hero occupied 32 pages, the Epitrepontes 33. The 
other alternative is equally possible, and the [lero may have been the longer 
play. 

3 The calculation on p. 147 showed that about 4 pages and 26 lines were lost 
from the beginning of the Periceiromene (i.e. before E). We there unnecessarily 
discarded the odd 26 lines and concluded that the play extended back two pages, 
instead of three, into the quaternion preceding that which contained E. 


"XAMIA MENANAPOT 


TA TOY APAMATOS IIPOSOIA 


Anpeas Νικήρατος 
Παρμένων Μοσχίων 
Μάγειρος [Τρύφη] 
Χρυσίώ 


Χορὸς συμποτῶν 


Kwa: ὑπηρέται τοῦ Μαγείρου, γραῦς, δοῦλοι. | 


256 


SAMIA MENANAPOT 


Scene: a street in Athens, before the houses of Demeas and Niceratus. 


The whole of the first act is lost. In it was explained the strange situation in 
the household of Demeas, a wealthy Athenian, Chrysis, a Samian girl 
and housekeeper for Demeas, has secretly borne a child to him. She keeps 
the child with his consent, by leading him to believe that it is a foundling. 
Moschion, adopted son of Demeas, and Plangon, daughter of a poor neighbor 
Niceratus, have also had a child, as the result of a secret union. Demeas 
and Niceratus, the two grandfathers, have been kept in ignorance of this 
event. To protect the girl Moschion has recently brought the child over to 
his father’s house (v. 448), by the connivance of the girl’s mother, and placed 
it in the care of Moschion’s aged nurse. Thus two infants are at present in 
the house of Demeas, one openly but under false pretenses, the other with- 
out his knowledge. Now forsome reason the future of Moschion has caused 
concern to Demeas. To settle him in life he plans to marry him forth- 
with to Plangon, Mosechion is informed of this plan and agrees to it with 
alacrity. The consent of Niceratus to the match is readily obtained. De- 
meas thereupon begins active arrangements for the wedding, which is to 
take place this very day. A slave is dispatched to the market to fetch a 
cook and to buy provisions. Invitations to the wedding are sent out. De- 
meas then enters his house to see to the preparations within, 

Between the acts the audience is probably provided with entertainment by the 
chorus of wedding guests, Who have begun to arrive. The second act is 
opened by the entranee of Demeas from his house. Apparently only the 
first few lines of his speech are lost. 


ACI Tt 
Sc. 1. DirmMeas alone 
AHMEAS 
ὅστις - πἰὐξεῖξι ee ἘΞ eee ee οὶ δὸς ἀξ G!, quat.v, p.1 


* τ 7 
ἢ μαίνομαι ---- - - - - > - ee - 9 


1 ff. Demeas comes from his house outrage, and that too at the hands of 
ina state of creat perturbation, prob- | one upon whom he has conferred a ben- 
ably exclaiming that, unless he is out efit, e.g, ὅστις... σχέτλια πέπονθ᾽ ἐγώ," 
of his senses, he is the victim of gross ἢ μαίνομαι, καὶ τοῦθ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνης, ἣν more’ 


237 


rast 


λαβὼν ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ - - - - 


MENANAPOY 


€ Ν be > > ~ « ‘\ 
WS γαρ ταχιστ εἰσῆλθον, ὑπερεσπουδακὼς 


Ν ΄“ , » ’ Ν -“ > {3 wn 
5 τὰ τοῦ γάμου πράττειν. φράσας TO πρᾶγμ᾽ ἁπλῶς 


τοῖς ἔνδον ἐκέλευσ᾽ εὐτρεπίζειν πάνθ᾽ ἃ δεῖ, 


καθαρὰ ποεῖν, πέττειν, ἐνάρχεσθαι κανοῦν. 


ὙΠ ΠΩΣ 5. eo , ae ΄ \ \ , 
εγιγνετ ἀμέλει πάνθ ETOLLLWS, TO δὲ τάχος 


“ ue / > A 
TOV πραττομένων ταραχήν τιν᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐνεπόει, 


-“ 5: Ὁ» sax ΄ ΝΠ γὴν tons \ 
10 οπερ ELKOS. E77L κλίνης μεν ερριπτ ἐκποδὼν 


‘\ , ly aA να / ν 
τὸ παιδίον κεκραγός, at δ᾽ ἐβόων apa: 


λαβὼν ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ διατελῶ τιμῶν ἀεί." On 
ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ cf. ν. 100. 

4. ὑπερεσπευδακώς: the reason for 
the father’s excessive haste (cf. v. 8) is 
probably his desire to puta stop to Mos- 
chion’s love-affair (see above, p. 224); 
ef. Ter. Heaut, 1050. But it is charae- 
teristic of comedy that arrangements 
which are proposed in the course of 
the action, esp. those which the poet 
intends shall have a bearing on the 
plot (e.g. dinners, weddings, intrigues), 
are immediately put into effect re- 
gardless of verisimilitude. Thus) in 
Plaut. Aul, 261 Megadorus no sooner 
obtains Eucho’s consent to his mar- 
riage with Phaedra than he asks: sed 
huptias num quae causast quin 
and then 
heus, Strobile, se- 


faciamus hodie? says 
to his slave: 
quere propere me ad macellum 
strenue, 

5. ἁπλῶς: i.e. he simply, without 
explanations, cave the information that 
Mosehion was to be married that day. 
ἄρτους and πέμματα, 

of 


(ἄλευρα Vv. 12) for the wedding feast. 


7. πέττειν: i.e. 


bread and pastry Wheaten flour 


For ordinary occasions the staple diet 
consisted chiefly of porridge (μά ζα) and 
bread, generally made of barley, ef. 


Plat. Rep. 872 b ἐκ μὲν τῶν κριθῶν ἄλφιτα 
σκευαζόμενοι, ἐκ δὲ τῶν πυρῶν ἄλευρα, τὰ 
μὲν (the latter) πέψαντες, τὰ δὲ (the 
former) μάξαντες. Cakes (πέμματα) 
played an important role in the wed- 
ding ceremony, esp. the bride's cake 
(πλακοῦς γαμικός) Sprinkled with sesame, 
a syinbol of fertility according to Me- 
nanderapud schol, Aristoph. Pac. 869, 
The feast itself was important as a 


means of providing witnesses of the 
marriage, cf. Is. & 20, — ἐνάρχεσθαι 
κανοῦν: sce on PL ὅτ, The marriage 


sacrilice (τὰ προτέλεια OV προγάμια) pre- 
ceded the banquet. 

8. Everything was of course going 
on well enough, — ἑτοίμως : lit. readily, 
modifies ἐγίγνετο = ἐπράττετο, jist as 
τῶν πραττομένων below might have been 
Chapel po Wai 


οἰομένοις Te €TOluws διαπράξασθαι. 


τῶν γιγνομένων. 


10. ἔρριπτο: the effect of the act 
continues into the present, had been 
thrown cud was still lying. 

11. τὸ παιδίον: the only infant of 
Whose presence in the house Demeas 
is aware, Viz. his own son by Chirysis, 
whom Chrysis, however, has made him 
--οαἱ δέ: the 
The context makes the 


believe to be a founding. 
maid servants. 


reference clear, and also καὐτός in v.15. 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


239 


“᾿ἀλευρ᾽, ὕδωρ, ἔλαιον ἀπόδος, ἄνθρακας." 


καὐτὸς διδοὺς τούτων τι καὶ συλλαμβάνων 


ὩΡ̓ΩΑῚ \ a A » > , -΄ 
ELS ΤΟ TAMLELOV ETUKX OV εἰσελθών. ὅθεν 


ΓΞ 
σι 


πλείω προαιρῶν καὶ σκοπούμενος συχνὰ 


οὐκ εὐθὺς ἐξῆλθον. καθ᾽ ὃν δ᾽ ἢν χρόνον ἐγὼ 


ΕῚ an , pe ἄν κ᾽ 4 ‘\ 
ἐνταῦθα. kateBaw ἀφ UTEPWOV τις γυνὴ 


»ν 9 » “ γε σον ν 
ἄνωθεν εις τούμπροσθε του ταμιείδίου 


οἴκημα: τυγχάνει γὰρ ἱστεών τις ὦν, 


9 > ἣν 3.9 ’ὔ 4 5 Ἂ , , 
20 ὥσθ᾽ ἡ τ᾽ avaBacis ἐστι διὰ τούτου TO τε 


a εὐ a \ ΄ > 
ταμιειον μιν. TOU δὲ Μοσχίωνος ἫΝ 


τίτθη τις αὕτη πρεσβυτέρα, yeyovut’ ἐμὴ 


θεράπαιν᾽, ἐλευθέρα δὲ νῦν. ἰδοῦσα δὲ 


τὸ παιδίον κεκραγὸς ἡμελημένον 


18. συλλαμβάνων: cf. Aristoph. Ey. 
229 κἀγὼ per αὐτῶν xw θεὸς ξυλλήψεται. 

14. ταμιεῖον: οἶκος ἐν ᾧ τὰ ἀναγκαῖα 
ἀπετίθεσαν, HWerodian 1.375. 26. In this 
storeroom the mistress of the house 
kept ἄλφιτον, ἔλαιον, οἶνον, Aristoph. 
Thesm. 420, and there Basileia in Av. 
1589 is doubtless supposed to keep 
(ταμιεύει) for Zeus his thunderbolt καὶ 
τἄλλ᾽ ἀπαξάπαντα. Cf. the conclave 
in Ter. Heaut. 902 est ulti- 
mis conclave in aedibus quod- 


mihi 


dam retro, 

15. πλείω: still other things (lit. 
more things than the servants had de- 
manded), — mpoatpav: selecting of his 
choicest stores, ef. Pheoph. Char. 4. 6 καὶ 
προαιρῶν δέ Te ἐκ τοῦ ταμιείου δεινός(ἐστιν 
ὁ ἄγροικος) φαγεῖν καὶ ζωρότερον πιεῖν. 

18. ταμιειδίου : καὶ ταμιείδιον ὑποκορι- 
The: 
can hardly be correct. 


στικῶς Suid. form ταμειΐου 


The 


usual form isioray, from ἱστός ** loom.” 


19. ἱστεών:  wenving-room. 


Phrynichus condemns ἱστεών, as also 


σύσσημον in P. 670 and other words 
freely used by Menander and his con- 
temporaries. 

20. ἥ τ᾽ ἀνάβασις: ic. εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον. 
- τό τε ταμιεῖον : i.e. 7 τ᾽ εἴσοδος εἰς τὸ 
ταμιεῖον, aw peculiar form of zeugma, 
due to the freedom of familiar dis- 
course. One could hardly say τὸ ταμι- 
εἴόν ἐστι διὰ (*Saccessible through") τοῦ 
οἰκήματος, but the idea of motion into is 
supplied by ἡ ἀνάβασις. The weaving- 
room, in Which was the stairway to 
the upper floor, lay between the living- 
rooms and the storeroom., To reach 
cither the upper floor or the storeroom 
one had to pass through it. 

23. Though emancipated, she yet 
remained in the service of her former 
ΠΥ ἀρ. Mehl 

24. ‘The participles are both in the 
pred. after ἰδοῦσα, but hang closely to- 
vether, forming a single idea, seream- 
ij. NeQlecdeds wt sede: CSC, Ot 
zea the old woman took in the 


situation at a glanee. 


240 


MENANAPOY 


5 ἐμέ T οὐδὲν εἰδυῖ᾽ ἔνδον ὄντ᾽, ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ 


εἶναι νομίσασα τοῦ λαλεῖν, προσέρχεται, 


\ an \ N Pte , ΄ ΕΣ] 
καὶ ταῦτα δὴ τὰ κοινά “φίλτατον τέκνον. 


> “ Ἂς Ἐς C549). 19. 4 e , \ ὌΝ ? 
εἰποῦσα καὶ pey ἀγαθόν: ἡ μάμμη δὲ ποῦ; 


3. 2.2 ΄, « 3 3 , 
ἐφίλησε. Tepinveykev’ ὡς δ᾽ ἐπαύσατο 


30 


an \ ce , cc") , $e Zz 
κλᾶον. πρὸς αὑτήν φησιν. ᾿ ὦ τάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ, 


, wn » Μ , > > Ν 
πρῳὴν TOLOUTOV OVTQa οσχιων eyw 


αὐτὸν ἐτιθηνού a ῶ vy δ᾽. ἐπεὶ" 
ηνούμην ἀγαπῶσα. νῦν δ᾽. ἐπεὶ 


4 5 lA , Γ' ¥\I Ν , ἢ. 
παιδίον ἐκείνου γέγονεν. αλλὴη καὶ τόδε 


Sie) ren Φ ἢ ἀκ ΟΝ iets en ars 


» > , 
ἔξωθεν ELOTPEXOVTL* 


Ἂς 


x: , ΕΣ] ΄ὔ 
τὸ παιδίον." φησίν. 


\ 
τ το er COD GICOLL 


G2 quat.-y, p: 2 


[35] 


΄ 
νεναι 


ὶ θεραπαινιδίῳ τινὶ 
“λούσατ᾽, ὦ τάλαν. 


εε , ΄ > 3. “ , 
TL TOUT ; EV TOLS γάμοις 


~ “ Ν >. ὩΣ ,ὔ » 
τοῖς τοῦ πατρὸς TOV μικρὸν οὐ θεραπεύετε: 


εὐθὺς δ᾽ ἐκείνη “᾿δύσμορ᾽. ἡλίκον λαλεῖς. 


25. ἔνδον: 


the personal coust., ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ 


in there. ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ, 
KTS 
εἰμι Tov λαλεῖν safe in talking, instead 
of the impersonal, ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ (or ἀσῴφα- 
λές) ἐστι λαλεῖν. ‘The ven. defines the 
scope of the safety, de respect of talking. 
27. ταῦτα δὴ τὰ κοινά: Cf. 1“. 209. 
28. μέγ᾽ ἀγαθόν: Messed thing, also 
used in formal address to superiors, ef. 
Wenig evil ianon: 


φίλοις Kupe. 


Ἄ τ , ᾿ ᾿ ἢ a 
20 w μέγα ἀγαθὸν av τοῖς 


ile πρῴην: just the other day, cf. 
Theocer, 15. 1 τῆνος τὰ πρόαν. -λέγομες 


δὲ πρόαν θην πάντα.- τοιοῦτον: it was 
In infaney, therefore, that Mosehion 
Was adopted (v2 154) by Demeas, 


33f. ἄλλη καὶ τόδε: the thoucht 


[40] 


he: 


like manner nurse you and see you in 


would * Another woman will in 
time become a father.” 

39. One of the three examples in 
the-Gairo NIN (aoe Pe the utters 
a proper name) of an anapaest da the 
fifth foot that overlaps the fourth, and 
of two consecutive anapaests elsewhere 
than in the first and second feet. 

40. λούσατε: Py usiny the pl. the 
old woman includes all the servants in 
the rebuke, thoneh she addresses lut 
one of them, 

41. τί τοῦτο: whales this mean? 

43. ἡλίκον : the quantitative ad). 
corresponding to μέγα and μικρόν, how 


loudly, ch Vv. 851 and Philem, 5 1K. οὐκ 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


> cc > ἈΝ > i > 
dyno’, “ἔνδον ἐστὶν αὐτός. 


> ec > 7 an 
OU δήπου Y€° που; 


241 


» 


ce Lal 
45 ἐν τῷ Tapleim —kal παρεξήλλαξέ τι --- 


“αὐτὴ καλεῖ, τίτθη. oe,” καὶ “βάδιζε καὶ 


vO > 5 aA > > , > nd ΕΣ 
OTEVO . ουκ αΚΉΚΟ οὐδέν, ευτυχέστατα. 


eer 97 ’ὔ 


9 “A σιν 4 > 
€LTOVUO EKELV1) ὃ 


ὦ τάλαινα τῆς ἐμῆς 


[45] 


Matas,” ἀπῆλθεν ἐκποδὼν οὐκ οἶδ᾽ "ὅποι." 


g 


κἀγὼ προῆλθον τοῦτον ὅνπερ ἐνθάδε 


’ὔ > 7 > A e ~ ’ 
τρόπον ἀρτίως ἐξῆλθον. ἡσυχῇ πάνυ. 


(: ἂν. αν Ὁ vA > \ we > 2 
ως OUT AKOVOGAS οὐδὲν OUT no Onpevos. 


νιν δ᾽ » Ἂς Ν Ss s ε A 
αὐτὴν εἐχουσαν αυτο TYV a A[LLAV Opw 


ἂν λαλῇ τις μικρόν͵ ἐστὶ κόσμιος, . . . ὁ 
δ᾽ ἡλίκον μὲν ἡ φύσις φέρει λαλῶν. 

44, αὐτός: the muster, as αὐτή be- 
low is * mistress.”? The maid, who has 
been in the front part of the house, 
saw Demeas go into the storeroom 
while the old woman was upstairs, — 
οὐ δήπου ye: you don't say so! 

45. καὶ παρεξήλλαξέ τι: SC. τῇ φωνῇ 
and she raised her voice a little (lit. made 
a deviation) —a parenthetical explana- 
tion of Demeas. The vb. seems not to 
oceur elsewhere in this sense. φησί is 
of course understood with each quota- 
tion Where it is not expressed, so that 
the application of παρεξήλλαξε is clear. 

46. αὐτή: Chirysis. The tirst words 
were spoken in a loud voice for the 
master’s benefit, but from βάδιζε on in 
a low tone again. 

49. οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅποι: from his position 
Demeas could not see where the old 
hurse went with the baby, and conse 
quently he falls (v.53) into the error of 
assuming that she answered the (pre- 
tended) summons (v.46) and gave the 
baby to her mistress. It is probable, 
however, that the nurse merely took 
the baby to another part of the lotse. 


[50] 


50 f. τοῦτον ὅνπερ... 
plained 


. τρόπον: LX- 
by ἡσυχῇ πάνυ, the whole 
equivalent to ‘as calmly as you saw 
me come out of the house (ἐξῆλθον) a 
moment ago.” Demeas was probably 


then, as now, trembling with sup- 
pressed excitement. 
53. αὐτό: τὸ παιδίον. Demeas as- 
sumes, as a matter of course, that the 
baby he sees in the arms of Chlirysis is 
Had he reflected he 


would have seen that this assumption 


the same baby. 


Was the weak link in his chain of evi- 
dence, We can hardly suppose that. 
in the brief interval which elapsed be- 
tween the departure of the two persons 
from the weaving-room, the murse lias 
transferred her baby to Chrysis ane 
disappeared, and Chrysis, in order to 
arranged the 


deceive Demeas, las 


Demens now woes on te 


scene whieh 
describe, Furthermore, Demeas him- 
self emphasizes the fact that he stole 
Into the court quietly and: presumably 
Unobserved by Chrysis, Porother rea- 
sons in SUp port of the view that there 
are two babtes dn the douse see above, 
με ον, σὴν, σα μίαν: <G lity isco hens. 


142) nl see tete on. Pe 53; 


242 


MENANAPOY 


ἔξω διδοῦσαν τιτθίον παριὼν apa. 


ot 
ωϊ 


[ A fal 
ὥσθ᾽ ὅτι μὲν αὐτῆς ἐστι τοῦτο γνώριμον 


Gy Ν IAS bine | Ψ, ΟῚ rAq 
ειναι. TAT POS ὃ OTOV ΠΟΤ EOTLV, ELT εμου 


» 5 , > » Ν ε A Leh LS , 
εἴτ᾽ —ov λέγω δ᾽, ἄνδρες. πρὸς ὑμᾶς τοῦτ᾽ ἐγώ, 


al A bee ΄“ Ἂς ΄»“Ὸ > > 4 , 
οὔθ᾽ ὑπονοῶ. TO πρᾶγμα δ᾽ εἰς μέσον φέρω 


2 bie | , 3 > / > > “ Wy , 
aT AKYKO AUTOS, OUK AYAVAKTWY OUVOETTW. 


Of 


, ἂν oe ’ὔ ἣν XN , 
σύνοιδα γαρ TW μειραάκιῳ, νὴ TOUS θεούς. 


δ; , » , Lae 
καὶ κοσμίῳ τὸν πρότερον OVTL χρόνον ἀεὶ 


x ee eter) ε » » ἊΨ 
και περι εμ ὡς ἐνέστιν εὐσεβεστάτῳ. 


πάλιν δ᾽, ἐπειδὰν τὴν λέγουσαν καταμαθῶ 


54. ἔξω : still within the house, but 
outside of the storeroom, as ἔξωθεν ν. 
40. The house was built around an 
open-air court (αὐλή). --- διδοῦσαν τιτ- 
θίον: cf. BE. 247. This was certainly an 
act that would naturally stir the old 
man’s suspicions, for hitherto he has 
had no reason to think that Chrysis has 
borneachild. If he really saw what he 
reports, —and there is no occasion to 
doubt the correctness of his observa- 
tion, —we are obliged to believe that 
Chrysis is indeed a mother, The same 
motive was used by Caecilius in his 
Titthe, which may have been based on 
Menanders play of the same name ; 
in fr. TR. a person who had seen a 
woman cive her breast to a baby ob- 
serves: praecsertim quae non pe- 
perit lacte non habet (lMarmon). 
But the baby she held to her breast was 
that the old 
nurse had just carried from the weavine- 


hot the negleeted child 


room; see above, p. 224, 
ree Se red ᾿ 
56. ἐμοῦ : Parmenon ΒΚ assures him 
inv. 103, 
57f. The negatives with λέγω and 
ὑπονοῶ indicate the speakers resist- 
anee to the sugvestion Which had come 


into his mind, J refuse to say it, T 


[00] 
refuse to harbor the suspicion. This is 
about equivalent to the negatived fut. 
but with a modal force that the fut. 
would lack, οὐδ᾽ ὑπονοῶ (Mazon) would 
be rather more effective. — τὸ πρᾶγμα: 
the fact as opposed to the λόγος and 
ὑπόνοια lying back of the λόγος. 

59. ἅ τ᾽ ἀκήκοα : ie. the talk of the 
servants that he has overheard, — οὐκ 
ἀγανακτῶν. κτέ.: like the preceding 
hegations, not giving way to indigna- 
tion — as yet. We means against Mos- 
He is 
already entirely convinced as regards 


Chion, as the next verse shows, 


Chrysis. 

61 tine partic. ὄντε is in indirect 
discourse after σύνοιδα, GMT. § 908, 
The tenderness of Demeas toward lis 
adopted son has a parallel in’ Micio’s 
Ter, Adelphi, 
κοσμίῳ : 111 his relations with 


love for ANeschintus in 
Chav tS; 

others, see vy. 132. ὡς ἔνεστιν : lheieht- 
ens the sup. somewhat more emplat- 
Cf. Nen. Mem. 


4.5.9 ἕως ἂν ταῦτα ὡς ἔνι ἥδιστα γένηται, 


leally than ws alone, 


more commonly ws δυνατόν or δύναται. 
63 1. 


ἔλεγε. 


τὴν λέγουσαν : i.0. ταύτην ἢ 
οὖσαν : in indireet discourse 
after καταμαθῶ. realize the faet that. 


As Moschiou’s former nurse the old 


SAMIA 


243 


, eee a > Ca Ser) a 
τίτθην ἐκείνου πρῶτον οὖσαν. εἶτ᾽ ἐμοῦ 


65 λάθρᾳ λέγουσαν, εἶτ᾽ ἀποβλέψω πάλιν 


> Ν > ΄“Ὁ FUN Ν 4 
εἰς τὴν ἀγαπῶσαν αὐτὸ Kal βεβιασμένην 


> A - ¥ 5 / 79 
ἐμοῦ τρέφειν ἄκοντος, ἐξέστηχ᾽ ὅλως. 


Enter Parmenon and the Cook with his assistants, and slaves loaded with 
viands. Demeas sees them as they approach the door of his house. 


ἀλλ᾽ εἰς καλὸν γὰρ τοῦτον εἰσιόνθ᾽ ὁρῶ 


[050] 18, φυδῖ. γ, p.3 


Ν᾿ ΄ 5.5 ieee) A 3.1 g 
TOV Παρμένοντ εκ τὴς ayopas* εατεον 


Ν a ar 
70 αὐτὸν παραγαγεῖν ἐστι τοῦτον εἰς δόμον." 


Sc. 2. Demras, PARMENON, Cook 


IAPMENQN 


, > CLG aN fc lal q > > ἈΝ 
μαγειρ 5 ETTELYE, T Pos θεῶν. ουκ οἶδα συ 


woman would presumably know the 
young man’s secrets. 

65. ἐμοῦ λάθρᾳ: cf. P. 209, Plaut. 
Merc. 48 clam abibat patris, in Lat. 
a borrowed const. —elra : 
with ἀποβλέψω, when I have regard to. 

66. ἀγαπῶσαν: v.55. Impf. tense. 
— βεβιασμένην : insisted wpon. 

67. ἐμοῦ ἄκοντος: if Iemeas had 
refused to rear it, the child would have 


se. ἐπειδάν 


had to be exposed. — ἐξέστηκα : ain de- 
side myself, cf. v. 418 and see on P. 418. 

68 f. εἰς καλόν = εὐκαίρως, cf. Plat. 
Symp. 174k εἰς καλὸν ἥκεις, Soph. O.T. 
78 ἀλλ᾽ els καλὸν σύ τ᾽ εἶπας. Plaut. 
Bacch, 667 sed quem quaero, op- 
tume eccum obviam mihist.— 
εἰσιόντα: in the dramatic poets εἴσειμι 
(-ἐρχομαι) is always used of persons who 
go into the house, never of those who 
are approaching the scene of action 
through one of the parodoi; for the 
latter the 


map- are regularly used, 


prefixes προσ-, ém-, and 


The 


Demeas does 


action 
is therefore as follows: 


not see Parmenon when he first ap- 


pears, and Parmenon makes no move 
to speak to his master but goes straight 
to the door, as he naturally would, 
seeing that he and the rest are loaded 
But Demeas turns 
around in time to see him before he 
enters, 
rival, 


with provisions. 


Of course it is Parmenon’s ar- 
the 
strikes Demeas as ‘‘timely.” 


implied in partic., that 
Since 
Demeas desires to speak to Parmenon 
alone, he permits him to get the Cook 
into the house before he accosts him, 
But the Cook, true to the instinets of 
his tribe, insists upon talking. — ἐκ τῆς 
ἀγορᾶς : Cooks Who wished employment 
congregated in that part of the market 
Where pottery was for sale, ef. Diph. 
43, 


257 ὅπου γάρ ἐστιν ὁ κέραμος μισθώσιμος. 


2VK. ἐνέβαλεν εἰς τὸν κέραμον, Alex. 
ὁ τοῖς μαγείροις (τόπος). Parmenon had 
been sent to the market to employ ἃ 
cook and buy provisions; see on Τὸν 166. 

71. ἔπειγε: everybody is ina hurry. 
ΟἿ, Pie τ ἢ 


τοῦ 


the Cook's words in 


PrOpPe wie = CONAN VM, Esse 


eoetam oportuit. — πρὸς θεῶν: a 


244 


MENANAPOY 


9,7? @ , Fi eee mad ‘ Ν > 
ἐφ᾽ ὃ τι μαχαίρας περιφέρεις- ἱκανὸς yap εἶ 


λαλῶν κατακόψαι πάντα. παῦσαι πρὸς θεῶν." 


[70] 


MATEIPOS 


ἰδιῶτ᾽. 


TAPMENQN 


MATEIPOS 


5 - αν tg 22 > ὯΝ 
οκεῖς y ἐμοί. τί εἰ βαρὺς 


τὸ εἰ πυνθάνομαι πόσας τραπέζας μέλλετε 


characteristic oath af Parmenon, ef. vv. 
τὸς 91, 110, and the recurrent phrases 
in the language of Davus in E. ὃς 20; 
141, 144, 155. 

72. ἱκανὸς ef, «τέ. you butcher τσοὶ 
enough with your talk, an ancient jest, 
depending upon the derived meaning 
of κόττειν “bore.” ie. κόστειν τὰ ὦτα 
(Poll, ὦ. 119] 


Hegis. 1.2K. ἢ λέγων φαίνοι τι δὴ καινὸν 


For this meaning ef. 
rapa τοὺς furporter, ἢ ul) adxre ue. 
Sosip. 1. 20K. apa σύ ue κόττειν οἷος εἶ 
ες: φίλτατε (both addressed to cooks), 
and? Mciphi Obie Sa peaate ΤΟΙ 
(Menander te Glycera) ἵνα μὴ κόττω σε. 
The joke is variously turned. e.g. Alex. 
173.11 NR. σὺ χρὸς θεῶν... ἔϑυσας τὸν ἔρι- 
ῴον. μὴ κόττ'᾽ Ea, ἀλλὰ τὰ κρέα, Anaxipp. 
1.23 σχαταῖ, 6nd satacdles. οὐχ ὃ θύειν 
μεχλομεν. Thies 


ditionally ἃ boreseme 


cook dn comedy is tra- 
talker much 
SVE herd aN OL ATs Δ IS ents ELAS 


lities are well summed up in Plaurc. 


~ 


-multiloeum, 


vloriosin sulstm, inutitem, 
See in veneral Rankin, The Raleof the 
Mayeyo. py cot Phetrbrach inthe 
first foot composed ΠΣ miteness 1 
lables δι το εἶν twiee dn Menander, 


Hemera ose big Wilsth-s os 1a 
74. Stara. ἐν γον ΠΝ She watise 


svorus the ἀκα. Tlie wend aimest 


always implies a contrast with the 
artist or specialist (rey rit ys, δηιμουργ ds). 
— βαρύς: suraye, ill-natured, ef. Eubual. 
41. τ οἱ Eros) βαρὺς δὲ κομιδῇ (ἐστι) 
Soph. Aj. 1011 ἀνὴρ δυύσοργος ἐν γήρᾳ 3a- 
pes, and the plimases ϑαρέως Φέρειν, ἔχειν, 

75. τραπέζας : before each κλίνη (for 
tTWo persons, see on FE. 217) was placed 
The number of tables 
The cook 
of comedy naturally insists upon know- 


a small table. 
save the number of guests. 


ing In advanee all about the cuests, 
e.g. Dionys. 2. 2 Καὶ τὸν μάγειρον» εἰδέναι 
πολὺ Sef yap ἀεὶ πρότερον οἷς μέλλει evens 
τὸ δεῖπνον ἢ τὸ δεῖπνο» ἐγχειρεῖν ποεῖν, 
and in Enang. 1K. the hest tells him: 


τέτταρας. . . τραπέζας τῶν γυναικῶν elma 


co, ὡς δὲ Tan arSoor, In Diph. 17 the 


cook justifies his eCUrlositTy 
sex and quality of the cuests: χύσοι τὸ 
χληδος Essie of wea NMGenve εἰς Tals γα μοὶ ς. 
ϑέλχτιστε. καὶ πότερ! Αττικοὶ ἅπαντες. 

καὶ τοὐωτορίοι τινές, τς τί δαὶ τοῦτ᾽ ἔστ: 
THS ΔΎ ΌΧΝ NE 


Ora τις ἐστιν» αὐτῆς: at 


πρὸς Te τὸν Δ γ ε.,..0: 
᾿ 5 
MUTE TOT) 


προειδέναι A 


UStipiniacds ea feta ce brursitentas Vicor ie leave 


Lah 


Pesedits sivly qiesthotis: cay ew. ΠΥΡΟῚ 
Mor ἡ ἀκ ες E1FAU TOO OAV: TATIS TpPamevas 


meNNouen τόξο; τρισχὸν HOW aw EpUrTag= YoOu- 
pomon €b Choner, OA Ta! FOMTAVTES Tpawevas 


ἢ uayv, Te ὅσοι οιἰα ξέρει, Torta 


SAMIA 


245 


~ , ES ΣῈ ~ , 3 ἘΣ ,ὕ 
ποειν. ποσαι γυναικέες ELOL, πηνικα 


ἔσται τὸ δεῖπνον, εἰ δεήσει προσλαβεῖν 


, > 4 4 > > *¥ 
τραπεζοποιόν. €l κέραμος ἐστ ἔνδοθεν 


€ “"Ἤ ε , > Si 4 
ULL LKGAVOS, εἰ TOUT AVLOV KATAOTEYOV, 


> »” >? :€ 4 ’ 
80 εἰ ταλλ ὑὕπαρχει πάντα: 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


κατακόπτεις γέ με, 


εἰ λανθάνει oe, φίλτατ᾽. εἰς περικόμματα. 


οὐχ ὡς ἔτυχεν. 


MATEIPOZ 


οἴμωζε. 


ITAPMENQN 


Ν Ν ~ 
Kal σὺ τοῦτό γε 


Ἂς 7 3 Ψ Ν , > »” 
παντὸς evek. ἀλλα παραγετ είσω. 


The Cook and attendants enter the house, 


76. The women of the families par- 
ticipating in a wedding attended the 
banquet and were placed at separate 
tables, see Euangelus, quoted above. 

78. τραπεΐζοποιόν: τὸν τραπεζῶν ἐπι- 
μελητὴν καὶ τῆς ἄλλης εὐκοσμίας. Athen. 
WO, cf. Poll. 3. 41, 6. 13; identified 
by Juba (Athen. Le.) with the Roman 
structor, He had charge of the ser- 
vants, Philem. 61 K.. and of the utensils 
andentertainments (ἀκουσμάτων). Phot., 
Et. Mag., HWesych. A cook in Amtiph. 
152K. hiressuch a manager and detines 
his duties: προσέλαβον ἐλθὼν τουτονὶ Tpa- 
πεζοποιόν. ὃς πλυνεῖ σκεύη, λύχνους ἐτοι- 
μάσει. σπονδὰς monge, τἄλλ᾽ ὅσα τούτῳ 
προσήκει.--- κέραμος: crockery was hired, 
if necessary. ef. Alex. 257 ὅποι γάρ 
ἐστιν ὁ κέραμος μισθώσιμος. 

79. κατάστεγον: “1 corered kitchen 
rather than an open-air place for cook- 


ing. such as many houses evidently had. 


Demeas comes forward. 


A cook in Alex. 173.13 Καὶ. insists on 
having such a kitchen : ὀπτάνιον ἔστιν: 
— €ort.— καὶ κάπνην ἔχει: - δηλονότι. 
- μή po" dndrov-” ἀλλ᾽ ἔχει κάπνην: — 
ἔχει. -- κακόν, εἰ τύφουσαν.--- ἀπολεῖ μ᾽ οὐ- 
τοσί. --- A trisyllabic tribrach is found 
in Menander in the second foot only 
five times; four are in this play. viz. 
Vi. 69, 82, 2205 F238 the fifth ink. 705. 

80 f. κατακόπτεις, κτέ.: a pictur- 
esque version of occidis fabulans, 
Plaut. Men. 22. —elAavOaver σε: pur- 
enthetieal, incase you fail to notice it. 
-- περικόμματα: cf. Aristoph. by. τῷ 
περικόμματ᾽ ἔκ TOU σκευάσω. 

82. οὐχ ὡς ἔτυχεν: γι" αἱ haphazard, 
in first-class style. Vhe cook is makin 
anartistie joboof it, On the phrase ef, 
one! 

83. παντὸς ἕνεκα -- πάντως. 
Aristoph. ΝῊ 


[ imo’ Oo 


EY YY Vir hi eat eke oe 


TEENS, ἃ f 


πολλῶνοῦνεκα.. παράγετε 


246 MENANAPOY 


AHMEAS 


ἸΤαρμένων. [80] 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ (looking about) 


>’ , ~ 
ἐμέ TLS καλεῖ: 


AHMEA® (coming forward) 


r N71 ΄ 
σὲ ναίχι. 
IAPMENOQN 
χαῖρε. δέσποτα. 
ΔΗΜΈΑΣ (sternly) 
‘ a , ay \ a AS 
εὐ THY σπυρίδα καταθεὶς ἧκε δεῦρ᾽. 
ΠΑΡΜΈΝΩΝ (disturbed) 


Slips into the house with the basket. 


AHMEAS 
a Ἂ 1D 7 € > a , 
τούτου μὲν οὐδέν. ὡς ἐγῷμαι. λανθάνει 
7 UY a γ, mt , » » Ἂ, 
τὠφθαλμίιδίω πραττόμενον ἔργον: ἔστι γὰρ 
Ψ »Μ) » ᾿ ἢ τυ τὶ Μὲ Ν qq , 
περίεργος εἰ τις αλλος. ἀλλὰ τὴν θύραν 


προϊὼν πέπληχε. 


[55] 


Parmenon, coming from the house, calls back to Chrysis. 


TAPMENQN 
δίαγε. Χρυσί. πάνθ᾽ ὅσ᾽ av 


c , > “ ‘ Ν “ , 
™) O μαγειρος ALT) ° TyV δὲ γβαυν φυλάττετε 


84. σὲ ναίχι: οἷ. Soph. ΕἸ. 1445 σὲ 
κρίνω. ναὶ σέ. 

85. σπυρίδα: a hamper of provis- 
ions. Demeas tells him to ssput it 
down,” with a eesture toward the 
house, -- ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ: see on EL 6, 

86. τούτου: Parmenon., Since he 
knows evervthing he uw be able to 
throw light on the mystery, 

87. τὠφθαλμιδίω: the required word 


is Uneertain, but this seems to ceive the 


thoueht. The dime, however, is) less 
natural here than in Aristoph., Bq. 909 
τὠφθαλμιδίω περιψ ἣν. 

88. περίεργος: εἴ. MN. dani fr. 849, 
ΚΣ: 

89. πέπληχε: sce OnE. GOL, δίαγε: 
{  Π oud, 

90. γραῦν : a jestof which the comic 
poets from Aristophanes on never crew 
weary, cf Mem, Pernt 307 IX, obde- 


μίαν ἢ pats ὅλως κύλικα παρῆκεν, ἀλλὰ 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


247 


3 Ν A , Ἂν, A A A 
αποτων κεραμιων, προς θεῶν. (Τὸ Demeas) τί δεῖ ποξειν. 


δέσποτα; 


ΔΗΜΈΑΣ (threateningly) 


“τί δεῖ ποεῖν"; ἴθι" δεῦρ᾽ ἀπὸ τῆς θύρας. 


Parmenon hangs back. 


ἔτι μικρόν. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


τ 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


» δ᾽). Lal ΓΑ Υ͂. 4 4 . 
ακονε δὴ νυν, Ἰαρμένων" [90] 


3 , A X\ ς , , Ἂν 
έγω σε μαστιγουν. μαάατους δώδεκα θεούς. 


95 οὐ βούλομαι διὰ πολλα. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


πεπόηκα:;: 


μαστιγοῦν : ᾿τί yap’ 


ΔΗΜΕᾺΣ 


συγκρύπτεις τι πρός μ᾽, ἡσθημ᾽ ἐγώ. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


δὰ ἣν ’ ἣν ἂν > γ ΠῚ > AN Ν wErsy 
pea Tov Διόνυσον, pa τὸν Ἀπόλλω, yw μεν OV, 


Ν ἣν , ~ > io qq 
μὰ τὸν Δία τὸν σωτῆρα. μὰ τὸν ᾿Ασκληπιόν.--- [5] 


πίνει τὴν κύκλῳ, ἃ trait Which Terence 
transferred thence to the midwife in 
the Andria, 
a chapter to the theme φίλοινον τὸ τῶν 


Athenaeus 4406 devotes 


γυναικῶν γένος, With abundant illustra- 
tions from comedy. 

91. κεραμίων: 50. οἴνου, as we say 
“bottles ᾽"; cf. Men. 229 Καὶ, καὶ τὸ κερά- 
μιον dvéwyas: ὄζεις, ἱερόσυλ᾽, οἴνου πολύ. 

92. Cf. 1 1: 55 1K. ἴθι δεῦρ᾽ (Leo), 

93. ἔτι μικρόν : cf. Plant. Men. 158 
foribus.—fiat. 


concede hue a 


—etiam concede huc. —licet. 
—etiamnune concede audacter 
ab leonino cavo, Aul. 55 abscede 
etiam nune, etiam nune. Citi 


amne?— ole. wstie θη τι tos Ler 


Kun. 706 concede istim hue pau- 


τὰ τῆς, -awdiny veitizm paudiw= 


lum. sat est.—qv: there! see on EF. 
174, Men. 481K. ἀλλ᾽ ἣν χιτών σοι (ἀντὶ 
τοῦ ἰδού Phot.) and cf. fiat in the above 
quotation. ἄκουε δὴ viv: sce on Τὴν Ὁ, 

94, μὰ τοὺς δώδεκα θεούς : the same 
oath in Men, Col 85 (Ox, Pap. V2 313), 
Aristoph, Ey. 235, Av. 95 (Hense). 

971. The heaping up of the names 
of gods in protestation is characteristic 
of terrified shaves in comedy. Dtony 
sus, Apollo, Zeus, and Aselepius are 
pa τὸν ᾿Απόλλω. ᾽γὼ 
μὲν οὔ: ἃ Aris 
tophanes (eight times), used by Menan- 
der also in v. 804. 2. 424, 


all θεοὶ σωτῆρες. 


favorite formula in 


2438 


MENANAPOY 


AHMEAS 


A ye Sa > > ἣν > / a aA 7 
παῦ. μηδέν᾽ ὄμνυ᾽: οὐ yap εἰκάζεις καλῶς. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


100 ἢ μήποτ᾽ ap’ — 


AHMEAS 


οὗτος, βλέπε δεῦρ᾽. 


ITAPMENQN 


ἀδόλως ἐρῶ." 


ΔΗΜΕΑ͂Σ 


ἢ ΄ ΄ > , 
TO παιδίον τινος ἐστιν: 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ (stammering) 


» \ 3 
i Uae TO παιδίον ee 


I, quat. y; pt 


AHMEAZ 


re St Ν BN 
τινος ἐστι μῆτρος: 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


Χρυσίδος." 


AHMEAS 


Ν A “ 
TAT POS δὲ TOUR 


MAPMENQN (smiling) 


Fe 

99. wad: this monosyllabic form of 
the imy. is attested by the gramma- 
rians (Phot. and Δ 6]. Dion. apud Bust. 
1408, 26); see Blaydes* note on Aris- 
Pople dense: 
commita perjury: for Demeas thinks 
For the 
det eee Miele 


Was about to say ἀγαθόν 


μηδέν᾽ dpvve: lest he 


he does not know the charge. 
constr. see on P. fr. 

100. He 
τι μοι γένοιτο. On apa for ἄρα see on 
P5811. — βλέπε δεῦρο: cf. Soph. Trach. 
ANZ οὗτος. βλέφ᾽ ὠδε- 


Plaut, 


πρὸς τίν ἐννέπειν 


δοκεῖς. Capt. 570 sed quiaeseo 


herele agedum, aspiee ad 
(ΠῚ πο. 
λως: frankly, honestly ( 
anoas hut. Berl ets Blhiwts nine 
9) edepol haud dicam dolo, 480 


Tee 


Seni. ihe ΠΕΣ - a86- 


απλῶς καὶ 


rem fabulare. non tiby dieam 


dolo, Men. 228 non dicam dolo, 
I. 275 οὐ yap ψεύσομαι. 

101. ἥν: look you, as if he were 
about to answer the question, 

102 f. The humor of the situation 
seems to die dn the facet that Parmenon 


is really telling the strict truth, but is 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


249 


ΔΗΜΕΑᾺΑΣ 


ἀπόλωλας φενακίζεις p’. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝῺΝ 
ἐγώ; [100] 
ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 
> SQ? 9 Ar ee) Ν aw pe Nee 
ἐγῴδ᾽ ἀκριβῶς πάντα Kal πέφραστ᾽ ἐμοὶ 
ν ΄ὔ ρυιθ 9 τιν , le 
105 OTL Μοσχίωνός ἐστιν. ὅτι σύνοισθα σύ, 
Leer hard res A Ν Be, “ 9 4 
παιδίον ἐκεῖνον διὰ TL νῦν αὕτη τρέφει. 
Ξ ΠΑΡΜΕΈΝΩΝ (bewildered) 
i , δὲ TAR 
τί δὲ ys; 
AHMEAS 
> ee ‘ λλλ᾽ 3 , A id 2 
ἐρωτᾷς ; ἀλλ᾽ ἀπόκριναι τοῦτό μοι 
τ q ΄ὔ΄ 
τίνος ἐστίν ; 
ΠΆΡΜΕΝΩΝ 
™ Aw 
εἶπα. det σὲ τάλλα λανθάνειν. [105] 


AHMEAZ 


τί “λανθάνειν: 


(Shouting to his slaves within) 


¢ Ve τὸ » ,ὔ 
ἱμάντα. παῖδές. τις δότω 


’ Ν 4 AN > A 
110 ἐπὶ τουτονί μοι TOV ἀσεβῆ. 


ΠΆΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


speaking of the other child, not of the 
one about which Demeas had heard 
the old nurse talk. 

104 ff. For the purpose of intimi- 
dating Parmenon, Demeas pretends to 
havea fargreater knowledge of the facts 
than he actually possesses, of. v. 479. 

107. It is possible that Parmenon 
asks τίς ἔφη τάδ᾽. and that Demeas an- 
swers οὐδείς, declining to tell who his 
informant was (Leo). 

108. τίνος ἐστίν : Demeas expects to 
extract an admission that the child is 
1 told Yor, 


Moschion’s. — εἶπα, κτέ.: 


, . A 
μή: πρὸς θεῶν. 

the rest yowre not to know. Parmenon 
will not betray Moschiom’s secret. For 
Parmenon’s view of the situation see 
vy. 469 ff. 

109. Menander makes extensive use 
of this trick of quotation inexcited dia 
logue, esp. in this play. Cf. also Georg, 
28 pap. Gen. χαιρέτω. τί “χαιρέτω. It 
is common in the Latin comedy, e.g. 
Plaut. Trin. 1080 


LON ΡΥ ay Ps 


lam 
πε τ τ νι 


quid 
enim 
—quid tenim’’ ?—tpavra: a 
strap, μάστιξ, cf vv. OA AGT, and Antiph. 


ἘΣ ater bor: ce ut , 
TAL ΤΊ Ια. ἔξω τις δότω ἱιιάντα ταχέως. 


250 


MENANAPOY 


AHMEA2 


σ΄ 
στίξω σε. νὴ τὸν Ἥλιον. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


4 2 , 
στίξεις ἐμέ; 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


A slave appears with a lash. 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


ἀπόλωλα. 


Parmenon takes to his heels, in the direction of the city. 


AHMEAZ 


“ Ψ A , 
ποι OV, TOL, μαστιγια.: 


haf’ αὐτόν. 


ὦ πόλισμα Κεκροπίας χθονός, 


Parmenon makes his escape. 


[110] 


ὦ ταναὸς αἰθήρ. ὦ --- (Checking himself) 
4 v2 lal 
Tt, Δημέα, Boas; 
Ἐ ie ἮΝ Ἂ , ᾿ La , vA 
15 τί Boas, ἀνόητε: κάτεχε σαυτόν. καρτέρει. 


οὐδὲν γὰρ ἀδικεῖ Μοσχίων σε: παράβολος 


ὁ λόγος ἴσως ἔστ᾽, ἄνδρες. ἀλλ᾽ ἀληθινός. 


’ \ \ x , Dias , 7 
εἰ μὲν yap ἢ βουλόμενος ἢ κρατούμενος 


111. στίξω σε: 11 tattoo you! The 
vb. is used metaphorically, as in Ar- 
istoph. Vesp. 1296 ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἀπόλωλα στιζό- 
μενος βακτηρίᾳ, and prob. in Herond, 6. 
YS ἐπὴν αὖτις ἕλῃς Te δρῶντα τῶν σὺ μὴ 
θέλῃς, στίξον. ; 

113 f. λαβέ: spoken to nobody in 
particular.— ὦ πόλισμα, κτέ. : ἃ hodye- 
podge of Euripidean phrases that recall 
those in Aristophanes; ef. Med. 771 
and 1... 1014 πτόλισμα HadXddos, Hipp. 
B4and Ton 1571 Kexporiav χθόνα, Orest. 
322 τὸν ταναὸν αἰθέρα. Vheaetherisapos- 
trophized in Soph. Οὐ, IATL ὦ μέγας 
αἰθήρ, ὦ Zed, and Aesch, Prom. Loge 
ὦ πάντων εἱλίσσων. 


alénp κοινὼν φάος 


Aristoplia hestses πόλισμα for grandiose 


[115] 


effect in Ay. 555, 1565, and αἰθήρ often 
as a favorite word of Euripides, e.g. 
Ran, 892 αἰθήρ, ἐμὸν βόσκημα. 

1151. Also mock-tragic in tone, ef. 


Aristoph. Vesp. 756 σπεῦδ᾽, ὦ ψυχή. 
ποῦ μοι ψυχή; 

116. παράβολος: Mold, huzardons, 
because the facts seem to be against 
the assertion, Menander uses the adv, 
in the same sense tr. G43 ᾿ς τοὺς mapa- 
βόλως πλέοντας ** daring navigators, ἢ 

117. ἄνδρες. see on 672, PL 51, 

118. Demeas gives three possible 
explanations of the aet, any one of 
which would be consistent with the 
liyvpothesis ἀδικεῖ we Mooxiwy. But they 


would all imply a feeling of personal 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


» a > ¥ bal Ar by Ψ' 
ἔρωτι τοῦτ᾽ ἔπραξεν ἢ μισῶν ἐμέ, 


> Tat SN ial Se rs +e Ν A 
120 ἣν ἂν ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς διανοίας ἧς πρὸ τοῦ, 


> Ἄν ΤΟΣ Το Ὁ > x ¥ \ ΄ 
ἐμοιτ ἐπέθετ αν AOPEVOS* νυνι δέ μοι 


ἀπολελόγηται τὸν φανέντ᾽ αὐτῷ γά 
πολελόγη ᾧ γάμον 


ἄσμενος ἀκούσας: οὐκ ἐρῶν γάρ, ὡς ἐγὼ 


[120] 


Ba Sad, » ὃ Ἰλλὰ \ 5 Ν 
TOT φόμην, εἐσπευὸεν, ἀλλα τὴν ἐμὴν 


125 λένην φυγεῖν βουλόμενος ἔνδοθέν ποτε" 


΄ an 
αὕτη yap ἐστιν αἰτία τοῦ γεγονότος. 


᾿κατέλαβεν αὐτόν που μεθύοντα δηλαδή, 


i, > Sa te be) 3 nw Ν ory AAS: / 
οὐκ ὄντ᾽ ἐν ἑαυτοῦ: πολλὰ δ᾽ ἔργ᾽ ἐργάζεται [125] 


γ ~~ 3 Ψ Ν Oe. 9 / 
τοιαῦτ᾽ ἄκρατος Kal νεότης, ὁταν λάβῃ 


hostility that Demeas is convinced 
he is not justified in assuming. He 
employstheargument from probability 
to clear Moschion, as Glycera does to 
clear herself in P. 585 ff. With κρατού- 
μενος ἔρωτι cf. Soph. fr. 846 N. πρὸς τοῦ 
παρόντος ἱμέρου νικωμένη. 

120 ff. ““ Had he been actuated by 
any of these motives, he would be of 
the same disposition toward me as be- 
fore and would have been glad to do 
meawrong. Butas itis, he has proved 
his innocence of this offense by will- 
ingly consenting to the marriage.’? It 
this that 
Moschion have -had a quarrel, but it 


is clear from Demeas and 
must have been almost a year before 
the present time, if Demeas can men- 
tion it in connection with Moschion’s 
assumed relations with Chrysis.— With 
the phrase in v. 120 ef. Dem. 4. 7 ap 

. Kal ὑμεῖς ἐπὶ τῆς τοιαύτης ἐθελήσητε 
γενέσθαι γνώμης viv, ἐπειδήπερ οὐ πρότε- 
ρον. 8. ΤΊ μενεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀνοίας τῆς αὐτῆς 
ὥσπερ νῦν (Lecuwen), — ἐμοί ἐπέθετ᾽ ἄν 

ἐμὲ ἠδίκησεν dv. φανέντα : diselusel, 
implying that the news was not ex- 
pected by Moschion, ef. Soph. Trach, 


433 ὁ τῆσδ᾽ ἔρως φανείς (and Jebb’s note), 
A sudden notice of marriage is served 
on Pamphilus in Ter. And. 238 ff. — 
γάμον : plan of marriage with Plangon. 

123. οὐκ ἐρῶν : causal, not because 
he was in love with her. But that was 
just the case. 

125. An allusion to 'EXévns αἰσχρὸν 
κλέος (Kur. Hel. 135). 
Aspasia ‘ Helen’? in the Prospaltioi 
(schol, Plat. 391). The phrase may be 
T22ENe 
(Agamemnon to Menelaus) οὐκ ἀπολοῦ- 
μαι τῆς σῆς Mar- 
tialely62. 6" Penelope vemit ~ abit 
Ilelene. 

128. οὐκ ὄντ᾽ ἐν ἑαυτοῦ: οἵ. y. ΟΤ 


Kupolis called 


a reminiscence of Eur. Tel. tr. 


"EXévns εἵνεκεν. Ct. 


ἐξέστηκα, Aristoph. Vesp. 642 ἐστὶν οὐκ 
ἐν αὑτοῦ, Soph. Phil. 950 νῦν ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτοῦ 
γενοῦ, Herod. 1. 119 οὔτε ἐξεπλάγη ἐντός 
Plat. Charm, loop 


The gen. is due to 


τε ἑωυτοῦ γίνεται, 
οὐκέτ᾽ ἐν ἐμαυτοῦ. 
an ellipsis of some such word as οἰκίᾳ. 

129) Cf Ter: Nd. ATO persuasit 
γι πὶ adulescentia 


nox amor 


Aristophanes calls wine 
Aphrodite (7 (06) 1Χ.)- 


ἄκρατος καὶ νεότης: hendiadys for 


(Leeuwen), 
“the milk of 


A) 


22.) «ὦ 


MENANAPOY 


r » δου ΄ , * τ 
1:0 καιρόν, ἐπιβουλεύσαντα τοι τοῖς πλησίον. 


r Fatah | > ΓΚ ΄Ν ᾿ς > ΄ “ 
TOUT οὐδέπω yep πιθανὸν ειναι μοι δοκεῖ, 


τ oo Z| 4, A Y 
‘Tov εἰς ἅπαντας κόσμιον Kal σώφρονα 


r ον > oe δ᾽ > » Ν ων , 
τοὺς ἀλλοτρίους εἰς EE τοιοῦτον γεγονέναι, 


[130] 


Ly > ». 29 ’ὔ ’ > ἣν , 
οὐδ᾽ εἰ δεκάκις TONTOS ἐστι, μὴ γόνῳ, 


Ψ XN (ay 4 9 Ν “ Ν γ᾽ 3 he “ 
185 ἐμὸς νιος. OU γάρ TOUTO, TOV Tpomrov ὃ ορω. 


ΕἸ, quat.y, p.5 


χαμαιτύπη δ᾽ ἄνθρωπος. ὄλεθρος --- ἀλλὰ τί; 


οὐ γὰρ περίεσται. Δημέα. νῦν ἄνδρα χρὴ 


> ΄ > > a la ΄ ΄ Cet Be Kos 
εἶναί σ᾽. ἐπιλαθοῦ τοῦ πόθου, πέπαυσ Epwv, 


[135] 


\ See Ai Tix dy \ \ ΄ 29 
και τατυχὴμα μέν τὸ γέγονος κρύφθ οσον 


» Ν Ἂς Cah. ? A δ᾽ > , 
140 EVEOTL, διὰ TOV VLOV, EK TS: OLKLAS 


JN ἐξ Ν > ΄ὔ io Ἂ Ἂ 
ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν εἰς κόρακας ὦσον τὴν κακὴν 


s ΄ » δὲ ’,’ ν Ν δί 
«αἀμιαν. EXELS € πρόφασιν OTL ΤΟ TQALOLOV 


ἀνείλετ᾽. ἐμφανίσῃς yap ἄλλο μηδὲ ἕν. 


[140] 


δακὼν δ᾽ ἀνάσχου: καρτέρησον εὐγενῶς. 


νεός τις μεθυσθείς. hence the singular 
verbs, 

130. ἐπιβουλεύσαντα: opportunity 
plots against those who are near at had. 
τοὶ marks the statement as one which 
all will accept without debate, and ts 
appropriate to the gnomic form (aor. ) 
in Which the thouweht is cast. καιρός 
is personified as readily as τύχη. Me- 
nander elsewhere (O41. 7 IN.), speaking 
of falling in love, says: καιρός ἐστιν 7 
νόσος ψιχῆς. ὁ πληγεὶς δ᾽ εἴσω (Oto the 
heart") δὴ τιτρώσκεται. 

131. γάρ: goes back to his asser- 
tion of Chiayvsis’ cult (Moschion’s tne 
Hocenee) iv, Tb. 

132. kdoprov: ef. v. 1. 

133. τοιοῦτον: ἄκοσμον καὶ ἀκρατῆ. 

134. Inthe protasis ΓΝ hypotheses 


are Ἰν] {7 il, 


TOTES: CO Tit 


a ostmple particnlar, ec 
sic aun ured, εἰ δεκάκις 


The Dlendine is qaturiad, 


fore most, ef, 


Enter the Cook from the house. 
since δεκάκις is in effeet only a strony 
σφόδρα.-- ποητός: cf. θετός DP. 70. 

135. τοῦτο: εἰ ποητὸς ἢ γόνῳ ἐστὶν 
υἱὸς ἐμός. --- τρόπον : sec on Te, 881. 
136. drcBpos: pest, a —. 


lis (376 1K.) calls a person ἄνεμος καὶ 


Huy )- 


ὄχεθμος. Ct. also Dem. 23. 202 ἀνθρώ- 
ποὺς οὐδ᾽ ἐλευθέρους, ἀλλ᾽ ὀλέθρους, “Ter. 
Ac. ISS Teno sum, pernicies com- 
munis, fateor, adulescentium, 

137. περίεσται: viz. ἐκ ταύτης τῆς 
ὀργῆς. you will get wo qood frome 11. Cr. 
AGHIN (cee Rie ΠΥ ἡ 


περίεστι TO κέρδος. ἐμοὶ δὲ τὸ δίκαιον. ali 


τούτῳ μὲν γὰμ 


P. 215 μῶν ὀνήσει: 

141. The thoueht of Chrysis stirs 
hima up aain, — ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν : head 
Plat. Rep. 555 1 εὐθὺς ἐπὶ 
κεφαλὴν whet ἐκ τοῦ θρόνου... φιλοτιμίαν. 

142 17. Inorderto protect Moschion 
he will not even tell Clirysis why he 


thrusts her out of his house, but will 


SAMIA 


Sc. 5. DemMEAs, Cook 


MATEIPO® (to a slave standing near) 


15 ἀλλ᾽ dpa πρόσθεν τῶν θυρῶν ἐστ᾽ ἐνθάδε, 


mat, Παρμένων ; ἄνθρωπος ἀποδέδρακέ με 


ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ μικρὸν συλλαβών. 


AHMEAZ® (to the Cook) 


» ΄ 
avaye σεαυτον. 


» Ce ie 
εκ του μέσου 


Rushes into the house. 


MATEIPOY 


c , , lal A 
ς Hpakdeus, τί τοῦτο, παῖ: 


[145] 


μαινόμενος εἰσδεδράμηκεν εἴσω τις γέρων. --- 


x» rd Ν / 3' Ρ) Ψ, 4 o al an 
150 Ἢ TL TO KAKOV TOT EOTL; TL δέ μοι TOUTO, παι: 


Hears a clamor within the house. 


Ἂν % A ’ὔ΄ > «ς 5 ἊΝ A 
νὴ Tov Ποσειδῶ, patel’, ὡς εἐμοι δοκεῖ: 


κέκραγε γοῦν παμμέγεθες. ἀστεῖον πάνυ 


> Ν (ὃ 3 ~ id fa , 
€l TAS λοπα ας ἐν T@ μέσῳ μοι κειμένας 


[150] 


» la , ply id Ἂ Ψ' 
οστρακα TONT AL πάνθ ομοια.--- ΤΉΝ θύραν 


165 πέπληχεν. ἐξώλης ἀπόλοιο. Ἰαρμένων. 


allege as the reason her taking up 
the foundling against his protests (Se- 
66). He finds it) diffi- 
cult to live up to this resolution, ef, 
y. 162. 

144. δακών: cf. Hom. Od. 1. 28] 


ὀδὰξ ἐν χείλεσι φύντες, ‘Vyrt. 8. 382 Cr. 


βιασμένην,. ν. 


χεῖλος ὀδοῦσι δακών, Soph. Trach. 976 
ἀλλ᾽ ἴσχε δακὼν στόμα σόν, Aristoph. 
Nub, 1869 τὸν θυμὸν daxwy, Ver, Ad, 
200 “ucerplitinday CG nnirssitaads 
iniuria aduleseentiumst, and 
note on PP. 224. 

145. Demeas stands for a moment, 
bracing himsclf for the interview with 
Chrysis. The Cook does not see him 
until he rushes past. The short scene 
that (vv. 148-157) 


follows provides 


Demeas with the time he needs to 
bundle Chrysis out of the house, 

147. ἀλλά: the adversative force 
is implied in a slight ellipsis ‘that 
was bad enough,” buf he has done so 
without even helping me ἃ little. In 
prose we should have καὶ τοῦτο. 

151. Cf. BL 663, 

152. γοῦν : his roar, afony rate, was 
that of a madman, — παμμέγεθες : sce 
on Hl. 2 and ef, Aeschin, 2. 106 dvasoa 
παμμέγεθες Δημοσθένης. — ἀστεῖον: i 
nice state of affairs! cf. νι, doo and Lue. 
Tcarom, 4 οὐ γὰρ ἀστεῖόν ye τὸ θέαμα. 
The serious equivalent is δεινόν, 

154. πάνθ᾽ ὅμοια: Olt aj t 
πάντας ὁμοίως AVistoph., Pac. 1: 


155. πέπληχεν: seo on EB, 660, 607. 


254 


MENANAPOY 


A (3 
κομίσας με δεῦρο. μικρὸν ὑπαποστήσομαι. 


Withdraws to one side. 


Demeas, Chrysis, and a nurse with the child come 


from the house. 


Sc. 4. Demeas, CurRysts 


AHMEAS 


» ΕῚ , Ὑ 
οὔκουν ἀκούεις: ἀπιθι. 


NPYLZIS 


ποῖ γῆς, ὦ τάλαν; 


ΔΗΜΈΕΈΑ͂Σ 


εἰς κόρακας 70. 


XPYZIX (weeping) 


δύσμορος --- 


AHMEAZS 


vat, Ovopopos:” — [155] 


’ ~ 9 rd Ἂν , Ψ a | 4 
ἐλεεινὸν ἀμέλει TO δάκρυον. παυσω σ᾽ EVO, 


10 ὡς οἴομαι --- 

156. μικρὸν ὑπαποστήσομαι : When 
a person in comedy * withdraws a lit- 
tle to one side,” it is generally, if not 
always, With the intention of listen- 
ing, Without being seen, to the conver- 
sation of those who are entering the 
seene, The place to which they with- 
draw is the alley-way between the 
houses, \atpa or angiportus, cf Per, 
Phor. SOL sed 


ang¢iportium 


hine coneedam in 
hoe proxumum, 


inde hisee ostendam me, ubi 


ΘΠ ee ness fomise, ΠΝ ΤΠ ΘΓ: 
this maneuver are numerous in Phautus 
and Terence, e.@. Trin, 625 hue ali- 
quantum apscessero; est lubi- 
do orationem audire, Pseud, 414 
nune hue unde ho- 
Mens 7.0 


insidieds 


eoncedam, 


rum sermonem Jecam, 


hue concedamus: ex 
Even when this motive dis net 


Wael patie yatta te 


aiewpar. 


expressed it in implies g 


Ccyptas2 Peer Mule SR jer Per irae τς ΔῺΣ 
635, the persons who retire from view 
overhear the speakers on the scene. Tt 
Cook 


Within earshot fora time, and ne doubt 


is probable that the remains 
the poet later makes use of lam and 
the knowledge he has thus aequired 

158. δύσμορος. κτέ. : muhapry ian! 

Yes, ‘unhappy tis possible. how- 
ever, that) Chrysis refers to herself, 
“Unhappy that Pain? tn whieh case 
€Neevoy in v. 159) world mean cto ex- 
citemy pity CU asin Aristoph. Ran, 1063 
pine ἀμπισχών, ἵν᾽ ἐλεινοὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 
φαίνοντ᾽ εἶναι. 

159. ἐλεεινὸν ἀμέλει. κτέ.: the fears 
are tears of pity for me, no doubt! 
Cf. Hom, Od. 8. S31 ἐλεειυὸν ὑπ᾽ ὀφρύσι 
δάκρυον eisev.—mavow oe: the wnex- 
pressed thought of Demeuas is διαφθεί- 
ρουσαν τὸν υἱόν μου. Since he has already 


told lier that the reason for jis anger 


ὧι 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 25 


ΧΡΥΣῚΣ 
τί ποοῦσαν; 


AHMEAZ® (checks himself) 
οὐδέν. ἀλλ᾽ ἔχεις 
Ἂ 4, si A t) ’ , 
TO παιδίον. Τὴν γβαυν: ἀποφθείρου ταχυ. 


ν ἕλον. ee , 
OTL TOUT ἀνειλόμην; 
AHMEAS 


\ a 7 : Ν 
διὰ τοῦτο (hesitating) Kal — 


XPTZIZ 


Pele, 


Ti Kat; 
AHMEAX® (checking himself again) 


\ lal ΟΣ ἐς ς Ν , 
διὰ τοῦτο: τοιοῦτ᾽ ἣν τὸ κακόν. 


XPTZIZ 
ov μανθάνω. [160] 
AHMEAZ 
“ Ν Ψ 5 » > 
τρυφᾶν yap οὐκ ἡπίστασ'. 
ΧΡΥΣῚΙΣ (perplexed) 
οὐκ ἠπιστάμην: ; 
ws τί δ᾽ ἔσθ᾽ ὃ λέγεις ; 
is the fact that she has taken the child  suffareinatam (Harmon). On this 


to rear (cf. ν. 142), Chrysis may well 
wonder at this threat, which would 
mean to her τρέφουσαν τὸ παιδίον. 

160. οὐδέν : oh, nothing! 

161. τὴν γραῦν: the old nurse of 
Moschion, probably; for she too had 
offended by concealing the truth from 
It may be that she is carry- 
ing the two babies under her palla, cf. 
Caecilius fr.4R. (see on v, 54 above) 


Demeas. 


atque hercle, utrasque te, cum 
subfarcinatam 
And, 769, where Da- 
yus says verum; vidi Cantharam 


ad nos 
vidi 


venls, 


and Ter: 


view Demeas is aware that the bundle 
under one arm is the **foundling,”* but 
does not suspect that the other bundle 
isalsoa baby. If the nurse had a lead- 
ing part in the intrigue of this play, as 
Harmon assumes, Τίτθη would be a 
natural title or subtitle. 

163. τοιοῦτο : modifies a little the 
definite τοῦτο: the trouble was some- 
thing of the kind. 

164. Pressed to explain τοιοῦτο he 
gives another vague reason, — τρυφᾶν: 
to live like a lady, lit. to live in lerury. 
Demeas has already implied (τ 186) 


256 


MENANAPOY 


AHMEA2 


καίτοι πρὸς ἔμ᾽ ἦλθες ἐνθάδε 


3 a γ ’ὔ vA ’ὔ 
ἐν σινδονίτῃ. Χιρῦσι;--- μανθάνεις :---- πάνυ 


λιτῷ. 
ΧΡΥΣῚΣ 
τί οὖν; 
ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


| Ry 5) ΄ , δ Ὁ 
TOT Vv eyw σοι πάνθ > OTE 


, ¥ 
φαύλως erpattes. 


XPT2ZIZ 


“A i "Δ 
νῦν δὲ τίς; 


AHMEAZ® (impatiently) 


μή μοι λάλει. [106] 


ΓΝ A \ a ΄ ΄ ΄ 
EXELS τα σαυτὴς TAVTA* προστίθημί σοι. 


| μὸν ἢ »Ἤ 1 4 4> 
170 ἰδού. θεραπαίνας. χρυσί" 


amb. 


a > s 
ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας 


ΧΡΥΣΙΣ (aside) 


τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ ὀργή τίς ἐστι: προσιτέον. 15, quat.y, p.6 


4 > -ν 
Bédrt07T , ὅρα 


(To Demeas, pleadinely) 


AH MEA 


τί μοι διαλέγει : 


that she came from the gutter, — un- 
justly assuming, of course, that she 
had shown herself depraved, 

165. καίτοι. κτέ.: Demeas goes right 
on With the theme of τρυφής reminding 
her of his Kindness in rescuing her. 
—For the anapaest contained in three 
In the fourth foot 
it occurs only here and in v. 196. 


words see on EF. 46, 
166. σινδονίτῃ: se. χιτῶνι, Linen 
tunic, ef. Photius σινδονίτης χιτὼν λι- 
νοῦς. She was then too poor to have ἃ 
himation to wear over the tunie. 


167. λιτῷ: 


Men, 442.1. Στρατοφάνη. λιτόν ποτ᾽ εἶχες 


cheap, lit. plain, ef. 


χλαμύδιον. --- τί οὖν: what then, pray? 
- ἐγώ: the pron. comes dangerously 
hear betraying the speaker's jealousy. 

170. θεραπαίνας: apparently an- 
other case of comie exageveration, for 
only the old nurse accompanied her 
(v. 161); ef. P. 53, 185, I. 004. — x pv- 
σία: Demeas hands her some money 
(ἰδού). The reading Χρυσί would give a 
bad hiatus, 

171. ὀργή: Chrysissees that Demeas 
is disingenuous with her, προσιτέον : 
1 inust address myself to him, make 
up to him. Vhe vb. is often so used, 


With the impleation that the person 


2AMIA 257 


XPTZIZ 


μὴ δακῇς. 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


ε ia ἊΣ » Zz Ἂς ϑ' ,9 4 ’ “ 
ετέρα γὰρ ἀγαπήσει τὰ παρ ἐμοί, Χρυσιὶ, νῦν, 


καὶ τοῖς θεοῖς θύσει. 


[170] 


XPTZIZ (bewildered) 


A. 4) 
τι ἐστιν; 


AHMEAZ 


ἀλλὰ ov 


€N 4 iA > Yee. 4 
175 VLOV TETTONKAS* TAVT εχέις. 


ΧΡΥΣΙΣ 


(Once more appealing to him) 


“ 
οῶθ — 


» , 
OUTT@°* δάκνει. 


AHMEA® (with a threatening gesture) 


κατάξω τὴν κεφαλήν. ἀνθρωπέ. σου. 


ἄν μοι διαλέγῃ. 


approaches with a petition or with a 
desire to please, as Men. 184K. σιωπῇ 
φασι τῷ θεῷ (Pan) οὐ δεῖν προσιέναι, Xen. 
Symp. 4. 88 ais ἂν προσέλθω ὑπερασπά- 
fovral με διὰ τὸ μηδένα ἄλλον αὐταῖς ἐθέ- 
λειν προσιέναι, and with τῷ δήμῳ, τῇ 
βουλῇ, etc., of a speaker who has a 
cause to plead. 

172. μὴ Saxqs: be not vered with 
me. The form is a second aor, pass. 
ἐδάκην, hitherto found only in late 
writers, The vb, may be used of any 
emotion that may be said to ‘sting,’ 
but is more frequently applied to vexa- 
tion or grief. Cf. Soph. Phil. 378 καίπερ 
οὐ δύσοργος ὦν, δηχθεὶς πρὸς ἀξήκουσεν, 
Aristoph. Ach. 1 δέδηγμαι τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ 
καρδίαν. δηχθείς = tristis, ef. Plant, 
Men. 607 (Menaechmus to his wife) 
quid tu mihi tristis es? 

173. ἀγαπήσει : will be glad enough 


to have, cf. Aristoph. Vesp. 684 σοὶ 
δ᾽ ἣν τις δῷ τοὺς τρεῖς ὀβόλους, ἀγαπᾷς. 

174. θύσει: will offer up thanks- 
giving besides. θύειν = χάριν εἰδέναι also 
in Herond, 6.10 θῦέ μοι ταύτῃ. 

175. υἱὸν πεπόηκας: you have «οί 
a son, intentionally vague, The mid. 
would be necessary for the meanings 
“begotten”? or adopted 7; the act. is 
non-committal and insinuates ** with- 
Plut. Mor. 


145) παιδίον μὲν yap οὐδεμία ποτὲ γυνὴ NE- 


out my intervention.” Cf. 


γεται ποιῆσαι δίχα κοινωνίας ἀνδρός, Where 
the act. is intentionally employed. The 
same use of ποεῖν is found (Lecuwen) 
in connection With χρήματα or produce 
of any Kind, eve. Aristoph. Paes 1322 
κριθάς τε ποιεῖν ἡμᾶς πολλάς, . . . οἷνόν 
τε πολύν. οὔπω δάκνει: not yet (se. 
πάντ᾽ ἔχων): you are hurt. 
176. κατάξω: of. KE. 850. 


MENANAPOY 


XPTZIZ 


καὶ δικαίως - ἀλλ᾽ ἰδού .--- 


ΔΗΜΕᾺΑΣ (abruptly turning away) 


εἰσέρχομ᾽ ἤδη. 


τὸ μέγα πρᾶγμ᾽. ἐν τῇ πόλει 


He turns upon her scornfully. 


[175] 


ν Ν A > A 7 > 
ὄψει σεαυτὴν νῦν ἀκριβῶς yrs εἶ. 


« γ' 4 4 Ν ’, 
180 AL Κατα OE, Χρυσὶ, TT PATTOMEVAL δραχμὰς δέκα 


, Ὁ lal {τ q , be ae A Ν 
μονας εταιραι διατρέχουσ επι δεῖπνα και 


΄ oy, ¥ EN > , a 
πινουσ ακρατον αχρις αν ἀποθάνωσιν. ---- ἢ 


n x Ν Ay? ¢ , Ἂς Ν 
πεινῶσιν ἂν μὴ τοῦθ᾽ ἑτοίμως καὶ ταχὺ 


[180] 


A ¥ > >) NX aor} 8 ν 
ποωσιν. ELOEL ὃ OVOEVOS TOUT , OLO OTL, 


177. καὶ δικαίως : she thinks to 
sooth him by the admission. 

178. τὸ μέγα πρᾶγμα: the great 
lady !, the important personage! Cf. 
Eubul. 117.9 K. εἰ δ᾽ ἐγένετο κακὴ γυνὴ 
Μήδεια, Πηνελόπη δέ γε μέγα πρᾶγμα ("ἃ 
treasure ). Dem. 35.15 οὑτοσὶ δὲ Λάκρι- 
τος Φασηλίτης, μέγα πρᾶγμα ("ἃ great 
man’), ᾿Ισοκράτους μαθητής, Herod. 3. 
132 ἣν μέγιστον πρῆγμα Δημοκήδης τῷ 
βασιλεῖ. --- ἐν τῇ πόλει: AS mistress of 
the household of a prosperous citizen 
she might play the grande dame, but 
“on the town? she willsink to her true 
level. The contrast would be indicated 
in prose by ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῇ πόλει; here the 
speaker's voice suffices, 

180. αἱ κατά ce: the women of your 
sort, explained by ἑταῖραι, which is re- 
served for rhetorical effect, as hetaerae. 
For κατά σε cf. FH. 19, P. 587. — πραττό- 
μεναι: af a wage of. δραχμὰς δέκα: 

that 


a μεγαλόμισθος ἑταίρα. 


he insultingly implies 
would not) be 


Chrysis 


— The anapaest in the fourth foot con- 
tained in a word that overlaps the 
preceding foot is common in Menan- 


der, But the shift of ἑταῖραι adopted 
by some editors (ai κατά σ᾽ ἑταῖραι) pro- 
duces such an anapaest in the fifth 
foot, where the poet avoids it. See on 
v. 86 and White, p. 152. 

181. διατρέχουσι: run about, cf. 
Aristoph. Pac. 5836 γυναικῶν διατρεχου- 
σῶν eis ἀγρόν, Plut. Vit. Mar. 30.3 νῦν 
μὲν ὡς τούτους, viv δὲ ws ἐκεῖνον. .. ava 
μέρος διατρέχων, and see note on EB, 245. 

182. axpis: the Atticists (Phryn.) 
prescribe ἄχρι (μέχρι) as Attic, con- 
demning the form in s as ὁ Hellenic.” 
The Attic inscriptions show only ἄχρι 
(μέχρι). ‘The diction of Menander was 
noticeably influenced by the κοινή. 

183. τοῦτο: Death is 


certain in any event, he means; it will 


ἀποθανεῖν. 


either Come soon, as the result of ex- 
cesses, or Will be a slow death by star- 
vation, according as the woman is 
popular or otherwise. 

184 f. ovSevos ἧττον: as ull as 
(meaning better than) any one. — 
γνώσει, κτέ.: you will find out who you 
are that wronged me. In this crushing 
way Demeas predicts for her a death 


SAMIA 


259 


e \ > 
185 ἧττον σύ, καὶ γνώσει Tis οὖσ᾽ ἡμάρτανες. 
As he approaches the door Chrysis makes a move as if to detain him. 


ἕσταθει. 


Demeas enters the house, Chrysis, leaning against the portico, weeps. 


XPTZIZ 


, > ¥ r me ke AA , 
τάλαιν᾽ ἔγωγε τῆς ἐμῆς τύχης. 
Enter Niceratus from the city. A slave accompanying him carries a sheep. 


Sc. 5. Curkysis, NICERATUS 


NIKHPATOZ 


ass bs , of a Ν Ν ’, 
τουτὶ τὸ πρόβατον τοῖς θεοῖς μὲν τὰ νόμιμα 


9 , Ν Ν A A 
ATAVTA ποιήσει θυθὲν και ταις θεαῖς. 


[185] 


Ἣν Ν » Ἂς ε ΄ > a , 
αἷμα yap ἔχει. χολὴν ἱκανήν, ὀστᾶ Kaha, 


lat 2 > Ν A 4 
1” σπλῆνα μέγαν, ὧν χρεία ᾽στὶ τοῖς ᾿Ολυμπίοις. 


πέμψω δὲ γεύσασθαι κατακόψας τοῖς φίλοις 


by starvation. She is not attractive 
enough to hope for a death brought on 
by riotous living. 

187 ff. The father of the bride as 
well as the father of the bridegroom 
offered a sacrifice preliminary to the 
wedding; see Plaut. Δ]. 329 ff., where 
both families give a banquet also (vy. 
YRY). 
his own marketing (ef. Euclio in Aul, 


Niceratus, as a poor man, does 
371 ff.), and cannot lay out much on 
the victim. His humor is that of a 
man soured by poverty. — τὰ νόμιμα 
ἅπαντα: «ll that custom requires. 

188. θυθέν: for the Attic τυθέν, a 
spelling attested by inscriptions, e.g. 
θυθέντος B.C LIT. VAT, p. 65 (Delos, 250 
Bei) Ubicle Vane pe DOF EM oases UL 
cent.), ἀπεθύθη Rev. Et. Gr. XIV, p. 
300 (Herwerden). 

189 f. Itisapertect vietim (τέλειον), 
as it should be, with blood and organs 


complete, but skinny withal. Peithe- 
taerus in Aristoph. Avy. 901 suggests 
that only one god be invited to partake 
of his sacrifice, τὰ yap παρόντα θύματ᾽ οὐ- 
δὲν ἄλλο πλὴν γένειόν τ᾽ ἐστι Kal κέρατα, 
Euclio in Plaut. Δ]. 564 character- 
izes the sacrificial lamb as ossa ae 
pellis totus. 
Menander elsewhere (129 h.), that men 


It is a seandal, says 


offer to the gods τὴν ὀσφὺν ἄκραν καὶ τὴν 
χολὴν ὀστᾶ τ᾽ ἄβρωτα, and consume all 
the rest themselves, and again (1% 11 
ΙΧ.) ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν ὧν γ᾽ ὁ θεὸς οὐκ εἴασα τὴν 
ὀσφὺν ἂν ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἐπιθεῖναί ποτε. εἰ 
μὴ καθήγιζέν τις ἅμα τὴν ἔγχελυν. AN 
unknown tragic poet (so Lecuwen), 
com, adesp, 1205 K., wonders how a 
man ean hope fordivine favor when he 
offers the gods only the tleshless bones 
and scorched liver. 


LOI be ao 


to τοῖς θεοῖς μέν, 


τοῖς φίλοις : as opposed 


260 


MENANAPOY 


Ν 4 x , 5 nw Ψ 
τὸ κώδιον: λοιπὸν γάρ ἐστι τοῦτό μοι. 
c 


The slave takes the sheep into the house of Niceratus. Niceratus sees Chrysis 


before the house of his neighbor. 


ἀλλ᾽, Ἡράκλεις. τί τοῦτο: πρόσθε τῶν θυρῶν 


[190] 


He approaches her. 


7 \ . , > > Ν > 
ἕστηκε Χρυσὶς nde κλαουσ᾽; οὐ μὲν οὖν 


195 ἄλλη. (Accosting her) 


τί ποτε TO γεγονός: 


ΧΡΥΣΙΣ Ξ 


ἐκβέβληκέ με 


ὁ φίλος ὁ χρηστός σου: τί γὰρ αλλ᾽: 


NIKHPATOZ 


tis; Anpeéas; 


Ls ral 


ὦ Ἡράκλεις, 


ΧΡΥΣΙ͂Σ 


Υ, 
ναι. 


NIKHPATOS 


διὰ τί: 


AS) oe ep) (P 


διὰ τὸ παιδίον. 


NIKHPATOS 


» \ A a ” ΄ 
ἤκουσα καὐτὸς τῶν γυναικῶν ὅτι τρέφεις 


[195] 


’ 4 , Ἂ , 
ἀνελομένη παιδάριον. ἐμβροντησία. 


on ἀλλ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἐκεῖνος ἡδύς. 


193. πρόσθε τῶν θυρῶν: hy the πρό- 
θυρον. see on EB, 226, 

1955 het MIS? 
vives the forbidden metrical sequence 
Inthe third and fourth 


reading τί mor ἔστι 


CI OD TERY, 
feet, 

196. ὁ χρηστός. κτέ.: that precious 
sod. τί yap 
“Tsthatnotenouch? , 


friend of HOGS ae Leaks 


ἄλλο: implying 


Note the anapaest inthe fourth foot 
and see on ve 165. 

198. τῶν γυναικῶν : the women of 
wife and 


Hits) cosines να, hts 


dauehter, see vy. 356, 

199. ἐμβροντησία - μανία. φρενοβλά- 
Bea (Hesyeh.): ef. P. 400, 

200. ἐσθ᾽ ἡδύς: he is a simect (inno- 


rent) fellow, he is! ἡδύς is frequently 


SAMIA 261 
ΧΡΥ͂ΣΙΣ 
> > , 

οὐκ ὠργίζετο 
εὐθύς, διαλιπὼν δ᾽, ἀρτίως. ὃς καὶ φράσας 
εἰς τοὺς γάμους μοι τἄνδον εὐτρεπῆ ποεῖν᾿ 
μεταξύ μ᾽ ὥσπερ ἐμμανὴς ἐπεισπεσὼν [300] 
» » , 
ἔξωθεν ἐκκέκλεικε. 

NIKHPATOS 
Anpéas χολᾷ : 


[Lacuna of ca, 140 verses to F3] 


At the end of the preceding scene Niceratus offered Chrysis the shelter of his 


house, into which they retired, with her child and nurse. At this point the 
unfounded suspicions which Demeas harbors against Moschion and Chrysis 
were cleared up (vv. 412 f.). Probably Moschion has heard of them from 
Parmenon, whom he has met in the city. In an interview with his father 
Moschion disclosed the parentage of the child whom Demeas had seen with 
the old nurse. We must assume, further, that after Demeas retired into his 
house to resume the interrupted arrangements for the wedding, Moschion 
and Niceratus held a conversation, in which the latter, curious concerning 
the quarrel between Demeas and Chrysis, questioned the young man about 
the baby which Chrysis had taken to rear, and that Moschion explained 
that it was a foundling of unknown parentage. The scene between Demeas 
and Niceratus, into which we are introduced in F8, then ensues. When 
Demeas found that his suspicions were unfounded as regards his son, 
in his joy he apparently forgot the incident (v.54) which originally led 
him to suspect Chrysis, and he is now eager to receive her back into his 
home (ν. 867). It does not oceur to him that her ἡ foundling 


4. 


may hot be 
the child that Moschion has acknowledged. As to his quarrel with Chirysis, 
he cannot divulge to Niceratus the real reason for it. But in answer to the 
latter’s inquiries concerning it he probably refers to the 5" foundling as the 
cause of the trouble and then informs Niceratus that it isa bastard child of 
Plangon, without, however, saying who the father is. Each father knows 
of Dut one child and naturally thinks it is the infant whieh Chirysis las 
taken with her. 


used ironically, esp. by Platoyas about hardly have been a long one, a week 


the equivalent of εὐήθης. eo. Gorge, or two perhaps. καὶ φράσας: irhen 
ΔῈ was) ous eh int. Mom O2a - he had just told ame, the καὶ being ex 
ὠργίζετο : for the impf. see on ΤῸ δθ 0, plained by μεταξύ ue (sc. εὐτρεπῆ ποιοῦ- 


201. διαλιπών: the interval can σαν) below, 


262 
DemeEaAs, NICERATUS 


345 ἀλλὰ πάλιν ἐλθὼν ---- 


MENANAPOY 


F8, quat. y, p.11 


NIKHPATOZ 


Ἀ ὃ A ce , 49. A We ge τὶ 
TO O€LVaA μικρον: ω ταν. οιἰχέται 


πᾶν, τὰ πράγματ᾽ ἀνατέτραπται. τέλος ἔχει. 


Niceratus rushes into his house. 


AHMEAS 


eles τ or / 
vy Tov Ata. 


οὑτοσὶ TO πρᾶγμ᾽ ἀκούσας χαλεπανεῖ. κεκράξεται. 


345 ff. The excitement under which 
the actors labor in the following scenes 
finds fitting expression in the trochaic 
rhythm; see on P. 147. 

After telling Niceratus that Plangon 
is the mother of an illegitimate child, 
which has been kept in his) house 
as a foundling, Demeas has appar- 
ently been trying to comfort him by 
explaining that it is after all a trivial 
matter (μικρόν). He is about to request 
Niceratus to go back into the house 
(πάλιν ἐλθών) to Complete the arrange- 
ments for the wedding. But Niceratus, 
vreatly distressed by the disquicting 
information which he has just received 
coneerning Plangon, and believing that 
the marriage cannot take place, inter- 
rupts Demeas before the sentence is 
fmisheds ἼΩΝ ἴσαι. 4:als: this == Chis Ξ 
thing that you speak of (meaning τὸ 
νόθον τεκεῖν THY θυγατέρα mov) a trivial 
MATL ASEVOME SHS cy NNN Siete 3 6} Ul 
over, the business is upset, it’s at an 
end (Qneaning the proposed marriage 
of Plangon to Moschion). τὸ δεῖνα: on 


the use of τὸ δεῖνα to avoid the utter- 


ance of an unpleasant or objectionable 
word see on P, 215. 

346. νὴ τὸν Ala: yes, by Jove, it is 
atan end! 
self as Niceratus disappears into his 


Demeas says this to him- 


house, He is thinking of his own plan 
to keep Moschion’s relation to the child 
from the other's knowledge. ‘Phe hot- 
headed Niceratus has rushed off with- 
out waiting for the assurance, which 
Demeas was on the point of giving him, 
that Mosehion would marry Plangon in 
spite of the child. 

347. τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ ἀκούσας: Niceratus 
has yet to learn that) Moschion is the 
father of Plangon’s child. Deimeas evi- 
dently expeets him to ascertain the 
truth from Plangon and her mother; 
and he would naturally have done so 
had he not at the outset assumed that 
the child in the arms of Chrysis was 
Plangom’s, Demeas is certain that Ni- 
ceratus Will be anery, because of the 
deception which everybody has prac- 
ticed upon hime: besides, he is now in 
an uely mood (cf. wekayxod\a Vv. 361), 
and is an utterly unreasonable sort of 


SAMIA 


263 


Ν 4 0 φ ’, 0 , ἰφὺ , eo 
TPAXUS αν pemTos, OKQATO ayos, QUUEKQAOTOS TW TPOTw. 


ἐμὲ yap ὑπονοεῖν τοιαῦτα TOV μιαρὸν ἐχρῆν. ἐμέ; 


[206] 


ee \ 7 , > >» 
350 νὴ τὸν Ἥφαιστον, δικαίως ἀποθάνοιμ᾽ av. 


Hears an outcry in Niceratus’ house. 


Ἡράκλεις, 


ey 2 OG 4 A >> tal a \ ΄, 
λίκον KEKPQAYE. TOUT VU oa. TO παιδίον 
η PY. | ὃ 


SEA > 3 ᾽ aoe ἮΝ > , 
φησὶ θύσειν. εἴτα, T PNOELV. UVLOOUYV OTT WILEVOV 


ὄψομ᾽. --- Ἡράκλεις, πέπληχε THY θύραν .---- aTpoBidros ‘7 


τ: , > ἊΜ δ᾿ 3 
OKYTTOS, OUK ἀνθρωπός E€OTL. 


. 


Niceratus rushes out of his house. 


NIKHPATOS 


[211] 


Ψ VA 
Δημέα, συνίσταται 


Ore 2S \ Ν Δ ὃ A iy θ᾽ ε ." , 
399 ΕἼΤ εμέ και πανόοόεινα ποιει πραγμα Yn Xpvats. 


man. He ought, of course, to be glad 
to discover that Moschion is the child’s 
father, for then his present difficulty 
would be solved. 

348. σκατοφάγος: cf. P. 274.—av- 
θέκαστος: ὦ boor, lit. downright, blunt, 
Thy σκάφην σκάφην λέγων (adesp, 227 
K.), cf. Philem. 89.6 1K. ἡ μὲν εἴρων τῇ φύ- 
ce, ἡ δ᾽ αὐθέκαστος and Arist. Eth. Nic. 
11274 25 ὁ δὲ εἴρων ἀνάπαλιν ἀρνεῖσθαι 
τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ἢ ἐλάττω ποιεῖν, ὁ δὲ μέσος 
αὐθέκαστός τις ὧν ἀληθευτικὸς καὶ τῷ βίῳ 
καὶ τῷ λόγῳ. Menander uses the word 
again in the derived meaning (843 K.) 
πικροῦ γέροντος, αὐθεκάστου τὸν τρόπον. 

349. τοιαῦτα : that Moschion would 
misbehave himself with Chrysis. 

351. ἡλίκον: cf. 


ef. Aristoph. Ach. 41 τοῦτ᾽ ἐκεῖν οὑγὼ 


‘ a 3 @ 
ν, 42. -- -τοῦτ᾽ qv: 


᾽λεγον. ἦν is the impf. of sudden real- 
ization, cf. P.170.— πῦρ βοᾷ : he shouts 
for fire. Char αν ΤΠ ΒΘ ἰδ 


6. 
36 Bbace παῖδα ὅν, Soph. Trach. 772 


For the const. 
ἐβόησε τὸν δυσδαίμονα Alyav, Xen. Cyr. 
7.2.5 Κῦρον ἐβόα. Demeas explains for 
the benetit of the spectators what he 


pretends to hear at the door. The same 


device in Eur, Hipp. 581 (Phaedra) ὁ 
THs φιλίππου παῖς ᾿Αμαζόνος βοᾷ ᾿Ιππόλυ- 
τος, αὐδῶν δεινὰ πρόσπολον κακά. 

952 f. ὑϊδοῦν : for the omission of the 
art. see on P, 142.— ὀπτώμενον ὄψομαι: 
ef. Aristoph. Ach. 1011 ἐπειδὰν τὰς κίχλας 
ὀπτωμένας ἴδητε. “" Roast grandson” 
(supplying e.g. ἀρτύσειν in v.353) would 
be bidobv ὀπτόν.--- στρόβιλος : cyclone. 

354. σκηπτός: thinerbolt. Nicera- 


tus, he means, is uncontrollable when 


? 
he is enraged, Locutions like this are 
common, e.g. Men. 865.618. Κτήσιππος, 
οὐκ ἄνθρωπος, Crob, ὃ. 41K. (of a gour- 
mand) κάμινος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος, Herond, 
6.4 λίθος τις, οὐ δούλη, Petron, Cen. 5s 
phantasia, non homo. --- συνίστα- 
ται: is raising a revolt, 

We can imagine the seene that is 
supposed to have taken place within 
the house, Niceratus has detinitels 
charged his dauehter with being the 
child 


The women with 


mother of the Which Chaysis 


holds in her arms. 
one accord have denied the charge 
(or, as Nieeratus put it. have refused 


to confess Ἵν and truthfully. Tnorder 


264 MENA NAPOY 
AHMEA> 
τί φής: 
NIKHPATOS 


\ aed: , Sere af Ae 
THY γυναικα μου πέπεικε μηδὲν ὁμολογεῖν ὄλως 


Ἀ Ἂς , ¥ Ν ς ’ Ν , 
μηδὲ τὴν κόρην. ἔχει δὲ πρὸς βίαν τὸ παιδίον 


» fA , , 9 Ἂ , t er 
οὐ προήσεσθαί TE φησιν. ὥστε μὴ θαύμαζ᾽ ἐὰν 


αὐτόχειρ αὐτῆς γένωμαι. 


[215] 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


τῆς γυναικὸς αὐτόχειρ: 


NIKHPATOZ 


30 πάντα γὰρ σύνοιδεν αὕτη. 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


μηδαμῶς. Νικήρατε. 


NIKHPATOS 


σοὶ δ᾽ ἐβουλόμην προειπεῖν. 


Rushes back into his house. 


AHMEA™ 


e ἣν ~~ 
οὑτοσι μελαγχολᾳ. 


> , 4 ~ ~ y 
εἰσπεπήδηκεν. Tl τούτοις TOLS Κακοις TLS χρήσεται. 


to force an admission from them Ni- 
eeratus has then tried to take the child 
away from Chrysis, and Chrysis has 
fiercely resisted him. The bearing of 
Chrysis has convinced Niceratus that 
she is the instigator among the women 
of a plot to deceive him, and he now 
proposes to deal summarily with her, 

857. πρὸς βίαν : by main strength, 
forcibly, i.e. resisting his efforts to take 
it away from her, cf, Aristopl. Vesp, 
445 τούτω τὸν παλαιὸν δεσπότην πρὸς βίαν 
χειροῦσιν. The meaning ‘Sin spite οὔ" 
is Closely akin to this. 


359. αὐτόχειρ: murderer, lit. per- 


petrator. The full expression is found 
e.g, in Soph. OWT. 266 τὸν αὐτόχειρα τοῦ 
φόνου NaBetv. —THs γυναικός: (hirysis, 
the woman just mentioned, In this eon- 
text * your wife” would have te he 
τῆς γυναικός σου. The reference to Chry- 
sis is made perfectly clear by aury in 
the next line and by the assault of 
Niceratus upon Chrysis that follows. 

360. μηδαμῶς: se. αὐτόχειρ γένῃς. 

361, μελαγχολᾷ: Demeas returns 
his friend’s compliment, v. 2Od, 

362. χρήσεται; deliberative fut., 


cf. Aristoph. Ach, 312 εἰτ᾽ ἐγώ σου φεί- 


σομαι: 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 265 


1) , ee , > , Ν Ν ΄ 
οὐδεπώποτ εἰς τοιαύτην ἐμπέεσων, μα TOUS θεούς. [220] 
οἶδα ταραχήν. ἔστι μέντοι TO γεγονὸς φράσαι σαφῶς 
365 πολὺ κράτιστον .--- ἀλλ᾽, λπολλον, ἡ θύρα πάλιν ψοφεῖ. 


Chrysis flees from the house of Niceratus, the baby in her arms. Niceratus is in 
close pursuit, a staff in his hands, 


DeMEAS, Curysis, NICERATUS 
ΧΡΥΣΙΣ 
εκ ΄ ΕΣ ΄ , , A , Ν ΄ 
ὦ τάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ, τί δράσω: ποι φύγω: τὸ παιδίον 
λήψεταί μου. 
AHMEAZ 


Χρυσί, δεῦρο. 


ΧΡΥΣΙΣ 
ψ,. “ > 
τίς καλεῖ μ᾽; 


AHMEAZ® (pointing to his own house) 
» , 
εισω Τρέχε. 
Niceratus sees Chrysis running toward the other house. 


NIKHPATOS 
TOL σύ. TOL φεύγεις: 


He blocks her way to the door, but Demeas steps between them, 


AHMEAY (aside) 


» , ΄ i 
Απολλον, μονομαχήσω τήμερον. [225] 
ὡς ἔοικ᾽. ἐγώ. (To Niceratus) 


τί βούλει; τίνα διώκεις: 


364. μέντοι: after all. Demeas is 367. Χρυσί. δεῦρο: this way, Chry- 
beginning to be afraid of the conse- — sis. Supposing that her former home 


quences of not having told Niceratus was still closed to her, Chrysis had 

the whole truth about the child. But) not looked that way for refuge. 

he does not carry out his intention of 369. τίνα διώκεις = τίνα δοκεῖς διώκειν, 

acknowledging that Moschion is its ef. P.267,Soph.'Trach, 402 πρὸς τίν᾽ ἐννέ- 

father. rev δοκεῖς . and Bur. Alc. 675 τίν᾽ αὐχεῖς, 
365. ψοφεῖ: see on EK. 660. πότερα Λυδὸν ἢ Φρύγα, κακοῖς ἐλαύνειν 


266 


MENANAPOY 


NIKHPATOS 


370 ἐκποδὼν αἀπελθ᾽. 


Δημέα, 


ἔα με γενόμενον τοῦ παιδίου 


ἐγκρατῆ τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι τῶν γυναικῶν. 


AHMEAZ® (aside) 


(To Niceratus, who shows tight) 


ἀλλὰ τυπτήσεις pL; 


μαΐνεται. 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤῸΣ (striking him) 


ἔγωγε. 


Demeas holds his ground. 


AHMEAZ® (aside to Chirysis) 


(To Niceratus) 


ἀλλὰ μὴν καάγωγε.. 


θᾶττον εἰσφθάρηθι σύ. 


Returning the blow, he grapples with Niceratus while he calls to Chrysis. 


n~ 4 ca tA. > oe 24) 
Eevye, Αρυσι: κρειττων ἐστι μον. [250] 


Chrysis makes her escape into the house of Demeas. The men then separate. 


NIKHPATOZX 


ἐν Ν A 55 
πρότερος ἅπτει μου σὺ νυνί. τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ μαρτύρομαι. 


370 f. 
child Niceratus expects to force the 
women to tell him the truth, threaten- 


ine to kill him if they refuse. —-r6 
πρᾶγμα: ic. the facts in the case, the 
truth of the matter, as in v. 347, 


372. addAa. KTe.: 


me? Τὰ κα ἢν questions of surprise or 


what, will you strike 


remonstrance ἀλλ᾽ ἦ is venerally used, 
ew, Neseh, Cho, 220 ἀλλ᾽ ἢ δόλον τιν᾽, ὦ 
ξέν dui μοι πλέκεις. Δ Similarsituation 
is found in Aristoph. Ran. 607, where 
Acacus says to Nanthias-Dionysus elev, 
καὶ μαχεῖ. εἰσφθάρηθι: fn with you, 
plaque take you! The impatient com- 
mand seems to be due to the fact that 
Chrysis has lingered a moment at the 
doordnstend of seizing the opportunity 


to vo Inside, 


The simple vb. is merely 


a strong ἴθι, ofFwith you, and the prep. 
has its usual foree with verbs of mo- 
tion, viz. εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. See on P. 408 
and cf. ἀποφθαρείς ν. 425. 

Sie ONNG. μήν, κτέ, : well then, so 
will {ς δῦ. τὐπτήσω (ce). —— κρείττων. KTE.: 
he's too strong for me, cf our colloquial 
“he’s a better man than [.~ 

374. This time you attack me first, 
referring to the faet that Demeas now 
The 


when blows were exchanged, Nicera- 


lays hold of iim. other time, 


tus himself was the averessor. - ἅπτει; 
ef. Aristoph. Lys, 365 ἅψαι μόνον Srpa- 
τυλλίδος TH δακτύλῳ. — μαρτύρομαι: the 
ustial formula of one who is assaulted, 
frequently addressed to nobody in par- 
tiewhar, J protest. cf. Aristoph. Ran 


O28 ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ μαρτύρομαι καὶ Tots θεοῖσιν 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


267 


AHMEA 


ὶ 
815 σὺ δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθέραν γυναῖκα λαμβάνεις βακτήριον 


r \ ΄- 
και διώκεις Ν 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤΟΣ 


συκοφαντεῖς. 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


\ \ , 
Kal OU γάρ. 


NIKHPATOZ 


“οὐ δίδως ἐμοί; 


Ἂν ’ 
TO παιδίον 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


γέλοιον: τοὐμόν ; 


ΝΙΚΉΡΑΤΟΣ 
2: > > Ἂ , 
ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἔστι σόν. 
Pushes him violently aside. 
AHMEA 
1g ’ ela ts » 
πείσομ᾽, ὥνθρωποι.--- 
ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤΟΣ 


κέκραχθι: τὴν γυναῖκ᾽ ἀποκτενῶ [235] 


> (A 
ELOLWV. 
ἐπιτρέπω, Plut.932 ὁρᾷς a ποιεῖς; ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ 
μαρτύρομαι. 

875. ἐλευθέραν: cf. P. 255. The 
charge of Demeas, like that of Nicera- 
tus in πρότερος ἅπτει. isineffect a threat 
of prosecution under a δίκη αἰκίας or 
ἃ γραφὴ ὕβρεως. On Which sce Meier- 
Schémann-Lipsius, Att. Proc. pp. 
398 ff., 646 ff., and cf. Hyper. fr. 120 
Bl. ἔθεσαν οὐ μόνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐλευθέρων, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐάν τις εἰς δούλου σῶμα ὑβρίσῃ, 
γραφὰς εἶναι κατὰ τοῦ ὑβρίσαντος, Arist. 
Rhet. 14024 1 ἢ εἴ τις φαίη τὸ τύπτειν 
τοὺς ἐλευθέρους ὕβριν εἶναι" οὐ γὰρ πάντως, 
ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν ἄρχῃ χειρῶν ἀδίκων (Leo). 

876. συκοφαντεῖς : ὑϊαοληναὶ } ct. 
E. 1, P. 258. Niceratus accuses De- 


Starts towards the house of Demeas. 


meas of trumping up a charge against 
him.—Kal σὺ yap: referring to the 
accusation In v. 874. 

377. οὐ δίδως: you refuse to give? 
The neg. gives a modal force to the 
pres. tense, as it regularly does to the 
impf. — τοὐμόν : a case of * irony,” ie. 
true ina literal though the 
speaker does not know it. 


SCHse, 
Demeas 
means that the child is his erandson. 
Niceratus might have cuessed that its 
father was Moschion, but he under- 
stands Demeas to assert only that. it 
is legally his as παῖς ἀνῃρημένος. Both 
men consider it: the child of Plangon, 

378. πείσομαι : he is about to say 
*Ttwill be an outrage if he lays hold of 


MENANAPOY 


AHMEA® (aside) 


τί yap ποήσω; τοῦτο μοχθηρὸν πάνυ. Ft, quat.y, p.12 


380 οὐκ ἐάσω. 


~ 4 4 4 
TOL OU; μένε δή. 


(To Niceratus, threateningly, again blocking his way) 


NIKHPATOZ 


μὴ πρόσαγε τὴν χεῖρά μοι. 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


’ ᾿ς ἢ Ve 
κάτεχε δὴ σεαυτόν. 


NIKHPATOS 


ἀδικεῖς. Δημέα. pe, δῆλος εἶ, 


καὶ τὸ πρᾶγμα πᾶν σύνοισθα. 


AHMEAS 


τοιγαροῦν ἐμοῦ πυθοῦ, 


τῇ γυναικὶ μὴ ᾽νοχλήσας μηδέν. 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤΟΣ (suspiciously) 


> ve 
ἐντεθρίωκεν ; 


dp ὁ σός με παῖς [240] 


AHMEAS 


φλυαρεῖς. λήψεται μὲν τὴν KOpHY: 


that which is mine," πείσομαι δεινότατα, 
e—, eh τι awe 1): δεινοῦ ΟἿ αι 
γάρ τοι πεισόμεσθ᾽ ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, εἰ τῶν μὲν 
For the 


appeal to the spectators see on i, O72. 


ἄλλων ἄρχομεν, ὑμεῖς δέ, κτέ. 


379. ποήσω: deliberative ἔπ τ ς cf. 
Vv. B62. μοχθηρὸν πάνν: a miserable 
business, decidedly, 

381. κατέχει: ΔΙ V2 ail, 


the indie, for the partic. shows that 


ἀδικεῖς: 


the speaker is excited, 

382. τοιγαροῦν: the superior air 
Which Demeas assiimes, as cocnizant 
of all the faets in the case, is the more 
wmnMsing dn that, as the spectators are 
well aware, he is the most deluded 


person in the drama, 


Hesyeh. 


384. ἐντεθρίωκεν : hus he hoodwinked 
me? ‘The vb. is not elsewhere found 
in this meaning, but its use here in 
conjunction with ἐσκεύακεν In Vv. 8N7 
has cleared up a hitherto obscure loss 
in Hesyehius: ἐντεθρίωκεν. ἐνείληκεν ἢ 
ἐσκεύακεν. ἐνείληκεν ives the lit, mean- 
ine, “wrap up in fig leaves”? (@pta), 
envelope, usedonce by Aristophanes 
in Lys. 6655 the Opposite is ἀποθριά Few 
in Ran. 134 (Leeuwen). The word in 


its derived meaning was doubtless 

eurrent slang, * bamboozle.” 
Niceratus has no suspleion that 

the child. 


of which he imag- 


Moschion is the father of 
Abhi oe 
ines himself the victim at the hands of 


deeept KON) ae 


SAMIA 269 


» > > lal > Ν , Us aL) Ν 
385 ἐστι ὃ ου Τοιουτον. ἀλλὰ περιπατησον ἐνθαδὶ 


ran 9/39 
μικρα μετ ἐμου. 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤῸΣ (surprised) 


περιπατήσω; 


ΔΗΜΕΑᾺΑΣ 


4 


Ν ἔς Ν ’΄ 
καὶ σεαυτὸν κατάλαβε. 


The two men stroll up and down as they talk. 


5 5 ’ὔ ΨΩ τ > 4 2 , a} 
οὐκ ἀκήκοας λεγόντων. εἰπέ μοι. Νικήρατε, 


τῶν τραγῳδῶν ὡς γενόμενος χρυσὸς ὁ Ζεὺς ἐρρύη 


[245] 


Ἂς » , Ἂν EQS 5. 4 , τ' ἂν 
διὰ τέγους. κατειργμεένην δὲ Tato EMOLVY EVO EV OTe. 


Moschion is, we must suppose (see note 
in text before v. 345), the latter’s state- 
ment that the child (meaning Chrysis’ 
child) is a foundling of unknown ante- 
cedents. Niceratus raises the question 
now because he half suspects that it is 
Demeas who is deceiving him by trying 
to make him believe that the child is 
Plangon’s. 

385. περιπάτησον: the lit. mean- 
ing ‘‘stroll’’ carries with it the sub- 
ordinate idea ‘discourse.’ Engage with 
me ina brief discourseas we take a stroll. 
Cf. Alex. 203 KX. τρεῖς ἐν Κεραμεικῷ περι- 
πατήσας ἡμέρας διδασκάλους ἐξεῦρον. .. 
ἴσως τριάκοντα, and περίπατος in Aris- 
toph. Ran. 942, 958. 

386. μικρά: for μικρόν (see Crit. 
App.), ἃ use apparently unexampled 
in classical Greek, since Sosip. 1.22 K. 
(cited by Leo) is not quite a parallel. 
But by the time of Plutarch the pl. 
Mor. 1509p 
ἐπιφθεγξαμένη μικρά. Vit. Mar. 35. 6 μικρὰ 


has become established, cf. 


δ᾽ avriotas, Vit. Sul. 11. 2 μικρὰ προσκρού- 
σας, Vit. Luc. 31.10 μικρὰ διαπληκτισά- 
μενοι, etc. — κατάλαβε: cf. Herod. 5. 36 
ἀλλ᾽ ἴσχε καὶ καταλάμβανε σεωυτόν. 

The Cairo MS. furnishes five certain 


instances in tetrameters of a tribrach 
in the seventh foot (P. 206, 221, 225, 
S. 400, 405) and ina number of other 
lines the extent of the lacuna favors, 
as here, the restoration of a tribrach. 
Aristophanes has only five such tri- 
brachs in 741 tetrameter lines. 

388. τραγῳδῶν: the regular word 
in the period of Menander for tragic 
actors of the first rank, those who 
were entitled in Athens to compete for 
the actor's prize, and outside of Ath- 
ens to be leaders of tragic companies. 
In 1}. 108 we have the older meaning 
of the pl, ‘* tragic exhibitions.’? Simi- 
lar allusions to classical tragedies are 
found in EK. 108 ff., 915: 


cles and Euripides wrote plays on the 


3oth Sopho- 


subject of Danaé. That of Euripides, 
Which was the more extensively quoted 
in antiquity, may have been in the 
poet’s mind. Cf. the similar reference 
to the myth in Lue. Som. s. Gall. 13 
ἀκούεις δήπου ὡς χρυσίον ἐγένετο καὶ ῥυεὶς 
διὰ τοῦ τέγους συνῆν τῇ ἀγαπωμένῃ, and 
Dial. mar, 1. 

389. διὰ τέγους: cf. Ter. 
QUO 11 TT Me 


Fun. O88 
in alienas tegulas ve- 


hisse, 


270 


MENANAPOY 


NIKHPATOZ 


> \ , loth 
39 εἶτα δὴ τί τοῦτ᾽: 


AHMEA2 


» Lal , Lal 
LOWS δεῖ πάντα, προσδοκᾶν s 


σκόπει 


τοῦ τέγους εἴ σοι μέρος τι ῥεῖ. 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤΟΣ 


΄“ Con Ne ν 
τοῦτο πρὸς ἐκεῖν ἐστί: 


τὸ πλεῖστον. ἀλλὰ τί 


ΔΗΜΈΑΣ 


\ \ , ἊΝ χα Ν wo, 
TOTE [LEV γίγνεθ O Zevs χρυσιον. 


τοτὲ δ᾽ ὕδωρ. 


9 
ευρομεν. 


Opas; ἐκείνου τοὖργόν ἐστιν. ὡς ταχὺ [250] 


NIKHPATOZ 


καὶ βουκολεῖς με: 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


μὰ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω. ᾽γὼ μὲν ov. 


305 ἀλλὰ χείρων οὐδὲ μικρὸν ᾿Ακρισίου δήπουθεν εἶ: 


> Ἄν τὰν ΄ 77 , \ 
ει ὃ EKELYY)V ἠξίωσε. TYV γέ σῊ ΡΞ: 


390. Cf. Men. 51K. τὰ προσπεσόντα 
προσδοκᾶν ἅπαντα δεῖ ἄνθρωπον ὄντα. 

391. pet: leaks, cf. Arist. fr. 1562 
A δ σὰ πλοία pet, Plut. Mor. TR2E bray 
éyxéns (into a cracked vessel) φαίνεται 
τὸ ῥέον (** the leak’), Paus, 8.50.7 τρις 
ρους ἔλαθεν ἐπιβὰς ῥεούσης. 

392 ff. τότε pev. . . 


i.e. παντοῖος γίγνεται ὁ Ζεὺς ὥστε τὰς 


τοτὲ δέ. Rites 


γυναῖκας μοιχεύειν, cf. 11 fr. 200, poems 
Similar jests at the wantonness of Zeus 
are common, ef. Aristoph. Av. 558 tf, 
Lue. Deor cone, 6. — ἐκείνου totpyov : 
it’s his doing. OS. 7 εὕρομεν: ef. 
RAR ts Phaedr, 230k ὡς εὖ ἀνεῦρες. 

394. βουκολεῖς : delle. lit. treat as 
Aristoph. Vesp. 


a sheep (πρόβατον. ὍΝ: 


od). ‘This meaning is as early as Aris- 


tophancs, ef. ΘΟ], 81 βουκολεῖν τὸ δήμιον. 
Cf. also Aristaen. Ep. 1. ἢ ἀμφότεραι βου- 
κολήσουσιν τὸν πρεσβύτην. This meaning 
was easily developed from the earlier 
figurative meaning 5" beguile, used e.g, 
ἽΝ Ne 


τίσιν νέον πάθος. (Cf. 


GOO ἐβοικολοῦμεν φρον- 
the meanings of 
ποιμαίνειν. e.4. in Theocr, 11. 80 ΠΠολύφα- 
μος ἐποίμανεν τὸν ἔρωτα povoicdwr, anid 
in Kur. Hipp. Lo. 9 πόσες . . mouaiver 
τις ἐν οἴκοις. Where the scholiast renders 
the vb. by ἀπατᾷ, 

396. ἠξίωσε : deigned, sc. μοιχεύειν, 
or thought worthy, sc. τοῦ Néxous. 
397. ἐσκεύακε: fricked, see on vy. 
O&t, a new meaning, derived from the 
ἀπ oe 


a person to represent somebody else. 


Mende of dressing up 


ΣΑΜΙΑ 


211 


NIKHPATOZ 


Μοσχίων ἐσκεύακέν με. 


¥ , 
οἴμοι τάλας, 
Hesych. 


AHMEAZ 


λήψεται μέν: μὴ φοβοῦ 


an “A >» > > aA ieee a τ Ἂς cat s, 
TOUTO. θεῖον ὃ ἐστὶ; ἀκριβῶς οἶδα, ΤΟ γεγεννΉ μενον. [355] 


V6 Ἄ “A »» A > , 
μυριους ειπειν ἔχω σοι TEPLTATOVVTAS εν» μέσῳ 


» > a N > »* Ν > Ν , 
400 OVTAS EK θεῶν. συ ὃ OLEL δεινὸν ειναι TO γέγονος. 


Χαιρεφῶν πρώτιστος οὗτος, ὃν τρέφουσ᾽ ἀσύμβολον. 


> ΄ , yt 
ov θεός σοι φαίνετ᾽ εἶναι : 


NIKHPATO® (impatiently) 


vA ’ x 4 
φαίνεται. τί γὰρ παθω: 


nw Ny, A 
οὐ μαχοῦμαΐί σοι διὰ κενῆς. 


AHMEAZ 


lol » Τ fg 
vouv exes, Νικήρατε. [300] 


᾿Ανδροκλῆς ἔτη τοσαῦτα Cy, τρέχει, παῖδας πολὺ 


Niceratus cannot get over his surprise 
that Moschion should have deceived 
him by telling him that the child’s 
parentsare unknown. Demeasof course 
again misunderstands him. 

398. τὸ γεγεννημένον: the child. 
Since θεῖον is equated with ὄντας ἐκ θεῶν 
Vv. 400, this partic. is to be preferred to 
γεγενημένον (MS.). 

401. Alexis also alludes to the faet 
that parasites never die, 159 K. 6é- 
docx’ ὁ θάνατος τὸ γένος, ws φασιν. μόνον" 
ὁ γοῦν Τιθύμαλλος ἀθάνατος περιέρχεται. 

- Χαιρεφῶν: a famous parasite of the 
generation before Menander, a favor- 
ite object of ridicule to the comic poets 
of the early New Comedy. THe is repre- 
sented as a genius at inventing ways 
of getting a dinner without econtribut- 
ing (ἀσύμβολοΞ), e.g. Alex, 257 K., Apoll. 


Car. 24, and as an inevitable guest, 
Apoll. Car. 26. Menander in one of his 
earliest plays (Orge, 564 K.) tells how 
an eager parasite, ‘* Just like Chaere- 
phon,” once arrived at a dinner a half 
day ahead of time, having mistaken the 
moon's shadow on the dial for the sun’s. 
For other allusions see above, pp. 231 ff. 

404. Androcles, known only from 
this passage, was apparently also a 
parasite, a member of the long-lived 
race (cf. Alex. 150 K. quoted above). 
Sophilus’ comedy Androcles may have 
been named for him ; in itsomebody de- 
τρέχει: 


gads about, of. Men. 304 KN... περιέρχεται 


mandsthe election of ὁψ ονόμοι. 


Alex, 1459 K. (both of parasites), dia- 
τρέχουσι Vv. 180.. Alexis in Athen, 242 p 
calls parasites τρεχεδείπνους. παῖδας 


πολὺ πράττεται; the unusual Character 


PA MENANAPOY 


΄ , A , > x» > , 
405 πράττεται, μέλας περιπατεῖ λευκός: οὐκ av ἀποθάνοι, 


50» ἃ 2 μη > , < Senge b > ΄ 
οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἰ σφάττοι τις αὐτόν. οὗτός ἐστιν οὐ θεός ; 


ἀλλὰ ταῦτ᾽ εὔχου γενέσθαι συμφέροντα. θυμία. 


Γ. Ν Ν “ > STEN εν τ. a> Ν ex ony, 
Oot δὲ κηδεῦσ εικος ὯΝ μοι. χουμος VLOS αυτικα 


265 
[265] 


» > , eck: , Seles iA Ὁ Ὁ 
ἐξ αναγκὴς εστιασει TOUS γάμους μοι. 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤΟΣ 


410 εἰ δ᾽ ἐλήφθη τότε --- 


of the locution suggests an equivo- 
cation. πολὺ πράττειν might be used 
for πολλὰ πράττειν, πολυπραγμονεῖν, but 
the mid, is unparalleled in this sense. 
πράττεσθαί τι With the acc. of the per- 
son regularly means “ἢ to make (or ex- 
act) something for one’s self from.”’ 
If the text issound the phrase probably 
has a similar meaning here. We might 
freely translate ‘* he makes a good deal 
of boys*’ —a sign of youthful vigor. 
405. μέλας περιπατεῖ λευκὸς (Wy): 
he goes about swart, though really white. 
The first and obvious meaning of these 
words is that Androcles dyes his hair 
to maintain a youthful appearance, 
like Lysicrates in Aristoph. Eecl. 736, 
where a woman says to a pot νὴ Ala, 
μέλαινά γ᾽. οὐδ᾽ av εἰ τὸ φάρμακον (dye) 
ἕψουσ᾽ ἔτυχες ᾧ ΛΔυσικράτης μελαίνεται. 
But in λευκός there is also ἃ covert al- 
lusion to Androcles as γυναικίξων, mae 
xés, cf. Aristoph. Thesm. 191 ff. (to 
Agathon) σὺ δ᾽ εὐπρόσωπος. λευκός, ἐξυ- 
pnuévos, γυναικόφωνος, ἁπαλός, εὐπρεπὴς 
ἰδεῖν, and 200 f.0 κατάπυγον, εὐρύπρωκτος 
εἶ, οὐ τοῖς λόγοισιν ἀλλὰ τοῖς παθήμασιν. 
Cf. also the play on μέλας and λευκός 
in Call. 11K. τοὺς Μελανθίου τῷ γνώσο- 
μαι: —ovs ἂν μάλιστα λευκοπρώκτους εἰσ- 
ἰδης. and the epithet λευκόπυγος in Alex. 
321 and Herond.7. 12. 


the other hand, indicated manliness 


μελάμπιγος. Ol 


ran » [ε τ 
νουν EXELS. 


and strength, as in Aristoph. Lys. 801 
Μυρωνίδης yap ἦντραχὺς ἐντεῦθεν μελάμπυ- 
γος τε τοῖς ἐχθροῖς, Kubul.61 K. Ν ΊΟΟ πα 
pallor are associated in Hor, Serm. 
2.2.21 pinguem vitiis albumaue. 
An old proverb (schol, Aristoph. Pae. 
1310) says that οὐδὲν ἔργον ἐστὶν λευκῶν 
ἀνδρῶν, οἷ. οἱ μέλανες τῶν λευκῶν λυσιτε- 
λέστεροι, Hust. 455. 87. A parasite in 
Alex. 110 Κα. divides his tribe into two 
Classes, ἕν μὲν τὸ κοινὸν Kal κεκωμῳδημένον, 
οἱ μέλανες ἡμεῖς (*¢ we sturdy men 1). the 
other the high and mighty fellows who 
assume the airs of satraps and gener- 
als. The passage in the text is not to 
be interpreted in the light of Poll. 4. 
119, where we are told that parasites 
in comedy dressed in μελαίνῃ ἢ paca. 
407. Oupla: offer incense, i.e. go on 
With the preparations for the wedding, 
ὌΠ: 


Niceratus is engaged in making the 


In fr. 4837, p. 280, below, 


offering. 

408 f. It was a reasonable thing, 
after all, for me to enter into a mar- 
riage alliance with you. Avis imp. of 
Before 
the pretended discovery of the honor 


sudden realization, ef. v. 851, 


Which Zeus has conferred upon Nicera- 
tus the match seemed unequal, for 
Demeas is rich, Niceratus very poor, 

ἑστιάσει τοὺς γάμους : the technical 
expression, cf. Aristoph, ἂν, 152 μέλλω 


SAMIA 


273 


AHMEAS 
βαβαιάξ-. μὴ παροξυνθεὶς βόα." 


ΝΙΚΗΡΑΤΟΣ 


ν > A 
τἄνδον εὐτΤρετπΊη 5 


πόημα τὰ Tap ἐμοὶ δὴ Δαιδάλου." 


ΔΗΜΕΑΣ 


κομψὺὸς εἶ. 


Exit Niceratus into his house. 


χάριν δὲ πολλὴν πᾶσι τοῖς θεοῖς ἔχω." 


> \ ε Ν > \ ἫΝ » 8ι eA Ls ’ ay 
οὐδὲν εὑρηκὼς ἀληθὲς ὧν τότ᾽ ῴᾧμην πραγμάτων. 


270) 
Exit Demeas into his house. 


A band of revelers enters and gives a performance. 


ΧΟΡΟΣ: 


I!, αυδῖ. y, p. 15 


AGT VILE 


Enter Moschion from the house of Demeas. 


Sc. 1. Moscuton alone 


MOZXIQN 


’ \ , \ ἡ > tb gt? , a) 
ἐγὼ τότε μὲν ἧς εἶχον αἰτίας μόλις 


ΕΣ rd Si 5 " lig Ve 
415 ἐλεύθερος γενόμενος ἠγάπησα δή, 


ny \ 3... ἐκ 5.15 ra NGO 
τοῦθ LKQAVOV EUTUK NP εμαυτῳ VEVOLLKWS 


UTopapyos:' ws δὲ μᾶλλον ἔννους γίγνομαι 


yap ἑστιᾶν γάμους, Kur. H.F. 483. ἑστιᾷ 
γάμους ὅδε. 

410. The mention of Moschion re- 
vives. the Niceratus 
against him for what he is now con- 


indignation of 


vinced was a piece of mischievous de- 
ception; cf. vy. 884, 3894. The meaning 
is “If at the time 1 had caught Mos- 
chion playing this trick on me, ete.” 

411. wénpa . . . Δαιδάλου: a pro- 
verbial expression fora perfect work 
of art, ἐπὶ τῶν ἀκριβούντων τὰς τέχνας, 
Paroem, Gr. 1. 59,11. 23, Hesyeh. Suid., 
Athen. 301 4 τὰ γὰρ καλὰ πάντα Δαιδάλου 
καλοῦσιν ἔργα (Leo). Cf. αἸκὸ Plat. Meno 


97 v,E. Niceratus, at length restored 


to good humor, suggests that no great 
artist is required to make such a feast 
as he can provide. 

412. κομψὸς εἶ: an 
ment, ina patronizing tone, of the joke 
See on "Ὁ, 178, 

415. ἠγάπησα: vf. ν. 113. 
κα She 1 Os Sad ΠΣ ΠΑ ἜΘ Ύ ΠΝ 


τε πολεμίοις ηὐτύχηται. 


acknowlede- 


of Niceratus. 


417. ὑπόμαργος: SC. wr, half-erazed 
as I was, cf. Herod. 6.75 αὐτὸν αὐτίκα 
ὑπέλαβε μανίη νοῦσος. ἔοντα καὶ πρότερον 
ὑπομαργότερον. “The adj., Which seems 
to occur elsewhere only in COMp., looks 
forward to μᾶλλον ἔννους. ἔννους: cf. 


Kur. Bacch, 1270 γίγνομαι δέ πως ἔννοι"ς. 


274 


καὶ λαμβάνω λογισμόν. ἐξέστηκα νῦν 


MENANAPOY 


, ΕῚ la Ν ,ὔ ic Vv 
τελέως ἐμαυτοῦ καὶ παρώξυμμαι σφόδρα 


Sere e ri Ν ε oe ε a 
420 ἐφ οἷς μ᾽ ὁ πατὴρ ὑπέλαβεν ἡμαρτηκέναι. 


εἰ μὲν καλῶς οὖν εἶχε τὰ περὶ τὴν κόρην. 


Ν \ A > 9 ΄ “ ΄ 
καὶ μὴ τοσαῦτ᾽ ἢν ἐμποδών --- ὅρκος, πόθος, 


χρόνος, συνήθει᾽, οἷς ἐδουλούμην ἐγώ --- 


[280] 


» Δ , > 5.2 > , 
OUK QV παροντα “y αὖθις YTLAaATAaATO 


425 αὐτόν με τοιοῦτ᾽ οὐδέν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποφθαρεὶς 


> ind 4 Δ 5 x; » ’ 
ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἂν ἐκποδὼν εἰς Βάκτρα ποι 


ἢ Καρίαν διέτριβον αἰχμάζων ἐκεῖ. 


νῦν δ᾽ οὐ ποήσω διά oe, ἸΠχλαγγὼν φιλτάτη. 


[285] 


ἀνδρεῖον οὐδέν. οὐ γὰρ ἔξεστ᾽, οὐδ᾽ ἐᾷ 


430 ὁ τῆς ἐμῆς νῦν κύριος γνώμης ἔρως. 


by QA ees | ie he > > 5 lal κ΄ 
οὐ μὴν ταπεινως ovo AYEVVWS παντελῶς 


περιόψομαι᾽ τοῦτ᾽. ἀλλὰ τῷ λόγῳ μόνον. 


εἰ μηδὲν ἀλλ᾽, αὐτὸν φοβῆσαι βούλομαι. 


[200] 


4 3 4 “ 3 Ν “Ὁ ἊΝ 
φάσκων ἀπαίρειν: μᾶλλον εἰς τὰ λοιπὰ γὰρ 


435 φυλάξετ᾽ αὖθις" μηδὲν εἴς μ᾽ ἀγνωμονεῖν. 


ὅταν φέροντα μὴ παρέργως τοῦτ᾽ ἴδῃ. 


418. ἐξέστηκα : cf. ν. 67. 

423. συνήθεια: cf. Men. 726 ἔργον 
ἐστί, Pavia, μακρὰν συνήθειαν βραχεῖ λῦ- 
σαι χρόνῳ, Ter. Hec. 404 amor me 
vraviter consuetudoque  elus 
Teme t: 

424. παρόντα ye: reénforeed by 
αὐτόν, to my very face, at least. —yTd- 
σατο: i.e. he would not have had the 
chance to accuse, 

425. ἀποφθαρείς: 


tiently for ἀπελθών. 


spoken 
See on v. 372. 
427. αἰχμάζων : another lofty word, 
He thinks of winning 
(Gere ΤΠ lye 
The plot of the Heauton, one of the 
earliest, if not Me- 


as a warrior. 


gloriam armis 


the earliest, of 


Impa-_ 


nander’s plays, is based upon the de- 
parture of Clinia to the wars in Asia 
on account of his father’s harsh treat- 
ment. 

430. A mock-tracic line. 
ἀν, ὦ 
"Epws, Plaut. Pseud, 15 sub Veneris 


ΟΣ 
θεῶν τύραννε κἀνθρώπων 
regno vapalo. 

433. εἰ μηδὲν ἄλλο: SC. ποεῖν δύναμαι 
ἢ λόγῳ φοβῆσαι αὐτόν. 

434. ἀπαίρειν : properly a nantical 
term (se. ναῦς). set sail: then abs. de- 
part, cf. Avistoph. Eeel, S18. 

435. ἀγνωμονεῖν: cf. EL 705 
Ni Je eseeentne peg 2 SHOPS ye 


and 


436. παρέργως: ws πάρεργον ὄν, in- 
differently. 


SAMIA 


275 


5 > e * Ἂν > Ψ, , Ls We | 
ἀλλ᾽ οὑτοσὶ γὰρ εἰς δέοντα μοι πάνυ 


γ δ » a ’, 2 5-9) t 
καιρὸν πάρεστιν ov μάλιστ᾽ ἐβουλόμην. 


ΜΌΒΟΗΙΟΝ, PARMENON 


[295] 
Enter Parmenon from the city. 


ITLAPMENON (to himself) 


ἣν >" Mt ἣν Ψ 5 , / AY 
vy Tov Ata Tov μέγιστον, ἀνοητὸν TE καὶ 


440 εὐκαταφρόνητον ἔργον εἴμ᾽ εἰργασμένος - 


οὐδὲν ἀδικῶν ἔδεισα καὶ τὸν δεσπότην 


¥ lA 393. 9 ΄ \ ” 
ἔφυγον. Tu ὃ Ἢν TOUTOV πεποΊκως ἀξιον; 


καθ᾽ ἕν γὰρ οὑτωσὶ σαφῶς σκεψώμεθα" 


[300] 


ὁ τρόφιμος ἐξήμαρτεν εἰς ἐλευθέραν 


45 κόρην: ἀδικεῖ δήπουθεν οὐδὲν Παρμένων." 


> , "4 , ΕῚ γν Ἴ 
ἐκύησεν αὐτὴ: ἸΙαρμένων οὐκ αἰτιος. 


ΝΝ Ψ. > eu > \ + J Li ΤΊ 
ΤΟ παιδάριον εἰσῆλθεν ELS ΤΊΏΨν Οικιαν 


~ [2 , »ν SF 3: A ΕῚ ΩΝ Ῥω 
τὴν ἡμετεραν" NVEYK ἐκεινος. οὐκ ἐγω. 


[305] 


nw » ε , Lal , , Ἵ 
τῶν ἔνδον ὡμολόγηκε τοῦτό τις. πάλιν 


2 Oks δι ὁ bY A , , 
450 TL Παρμένων ἐνταῦθα TETTON KEV KQAKOV ; 


I?, quat.y, p. 14 


οὐδέν. τί οὖν ἔφυγες av; πῶς. ἀβέλτερε: 


| Ne | | rs > 3. ae , 5 A ,ὕ 
ἐδεδίττετ ἐμέ. γέλοιον. ἡπείλησέ μοι 


440. An exception to the rule that 
a dactyl which overlaps the following 
foot is contained in a quadrisyllabie 
word of which the accent corresponds 
with the ictus. See on H. 71, and 
White, p. 148. 

442. ἔφυγον: v. 113.— ἦν πεποηκώς: 
was I quilty of. The partic. is practi- 
cally an adj. On the periphrastic perf. 
see Gildersleeve Syn. § 286. 

449. ὡμολόγηκε: as Parmenon as- 
sumes, not knowing how else Demeas 
learned the secret. Demeas told him 
in v. 104 πέφραστ᾽ ἐμοὶ ὅτι Mooyiwvds 
ἐστίν. ---- πάλιν: again, 1 say, cf. Ἰὼ, 
PG tee δ ἀρ eds: 

451. τί οὖν ἔφυγες : now that he has 


proved his innocence Parmenon reverts 
to the original question; ** Why, then, 
did you act like a guilty man and run 
away ?”—The MS. reading ἔφυγες οὕτως 
is unmetrical, for Menander exeludes 
the trisyHabie tribrach from the sec- 
ond and fourth feet. The transposi- 
tion οὕτως ἔφυγες. Which is generally 
adopted, introduces this tribrach into 
the fourth foot, where it is avoided, 
oceurring there but twice in the new 
text. White, p. 143. 

452. ἐδεδίττετο: he tried to frighten 
Plat. Phaedr. 24538 


ἡμᾶς λόγος θορυβείτω δεδιττόμενος, Luc. 


me, cf. μηδέ τις 


: Sexe Tt, Ary 
Bis tetas, οὐ πον We .: δεδίττονται. 


ἐδεδίσκετο. ἃ rare form of this causal 


‘otilew. ‘ri μεμαθηκώς: διαφέρει δ᾽ οὐδὲ γρὺ 


MENANAPOY 


[310] 


ἀδίκως παθεῖν τοῦτ᾽ ἢ δικαίως - ἔστι δὲ 


4" Vv Γ , x > 5 lal 
455 πάντα TPOTOV OUVK QAOTELOV. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ (suddenly showing himself) 


κα 
OUTOS. 


ITAPMENOQN (startled) 


χαῖρε σύ. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


ἄφες ἃ φλυαρεῖς ταῦτα. θᾶττον εἴσιθι 


ΕΣ 
εισω. 


ITAPMENQN 


, ’ 
τι TONT WD ; 


MOZXIQN 


χλαμύδα καὶ σπάθην τινὰ 


ἔνεγκέ μοι. 


IWAPMENON 


’ > , 
σπάθην ἐγώ σοι: 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


\ 
KAL TAXV. 


[315] 


HAPMENQN 


Sy ee 7 
ETL TL; 


MOZNION 


βάδιζε καὶ σιωπῇ τοῦθ᾽ ὃ σοι 


yy 4 
460 ειρηκα TTOLEL. 
of δείδω, used by Aristophanes in Lys. 
5O4, might also be restored here. 
453 f. orifew: v. 111.- 


κώς : forivhat possible reason ?— διαφέ- 


τί pepaby- 


ρει δέ, κτέ.: Parmenon concludes this 
debate with himself by justifying his 
conduet in running away: © But it 


makes not a particle of difference 


Whether he tattooed me justly or une 
live 


Men, SOK. 


διαφέρει Ναιρεφῶντος οὐδὲ γρύ. 521 μηδὲ 


JUStivas Mie ativastse sit isa tit est 


thins." -- οὐδὲ γρύ: cf. 


pt. Tit0n, λέγε: 


455. οὐκ ἀστεῖον : i.e. στιχθῆναι, cf. 
Aristoph. Nub, 100. ἀστεῖόν γε κέρδος 
ἔλαβεν ὁ κακοδαίμων aint see ony, 152, 

456. ἄφες ἅ : for the word-division 
PAA τ Ob MIR ΞΟ ΠΤ tore 

457. Cloak and sword, the soldier's 
πο τ LiKe 


tion of ** sword? Parmenon seems to 


Uniform, as in men 
fear another attempt to punish him, 

459. σιωπῇ : by cautioning the slave 
to SECTUCY Moschion hopes to jnsure 
his telling, 


460. ποίει: see on Tl. 2. 


SAMIA 27 


NAPMENQN 


/ A Ν “ > 
τί δὲ TO πραγμ: 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


« 4, 
ἱμᾶντα — 


> 
εἰ λήψομαι 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩῺΩΝ 
μηδαμῶς: βαδίζω γάρ. 


ΜΟΣΧΙΩΝ 


μέλλεις: 


- 75% 
πὸ Our, 


Exit Parmenon into the house. 


, an ε , NG Ἴ 
προσεισι νυν O ΠΑΤΉΡ: δεήσεται 


Ὄ ἊΨ 4Γ Ἀπ , 
OUTOS καταμένειν μοὐνθαδί. δεήσεται 


[320] 


ἄλλως --- μέχρι τινός: det yap. εἶθ᾽, ὅταν δοκῇ. 


ΓΝ 4: eS AA NG ae ἘΠῚ 
40 πεισθήσομ αὐτῳ. πιθανὸν εἶναι δεῖ ον ον: — 


ν“ Ν Ν / > ὃ ΄ a Stay , 
0, μα Tov Διόνυσον, ov δύναμαι TOELY ἐἔγω. 


A > »¥ Sipe: FarcenN \ wv 
TOUT. €0,T.UV- ἐψόφηκε προιὼν ΤῊ, θύραν. 


Parmenon, not Demeas, comes out of the house, and without the cloak 


and sword. 


Sc. ὃ. Moscuton, PARMENON 


ITAPMENQN 


: 
ὑστερίζειν μοι δοκεῖς σὺ παντελῶς τῶν ἐνθάδε [325] 


461. ἱμάντα: see ony. 109. 

462. πρόσεισι: Moschion is conti- 
dent that Demeas, on hearing of his 
demand for cloak and sword, will guess 
his intention to eo to the wars and will 
hasten from the house in order to bee 
him to stay. 

463. μούνθαδί : the comic poets are 
The diph- 


thong ov suffers crasis before e€ most 


bold in the use of erasis, 
frequently in οὗ and ὅτου. 
Tell yield to his 
—mQ@avev: cf. P. &79. He 
plausibly, like 
Ach. 416. 


4651. πεισθήσομαι: 
entreaties. 
must 


play his part 


Dicacopolis Ta Ni istoph. 


“Tove only got to be convincing — the 
tists Teweint 
(ὁ 1 Mosehiomw’s lack of contidence 


very thing, by George, 


In his ability to carry out his prowram 
foreshadows the outeome.— The initial 
anapaest (6, μὰ τὸν) Contained in three 
words is Unusual, in that the two short 
svilables are separated by a eramanati 
eal pause, Three anapaests i ai iam- 
bic line occur only here tn Menander, 

467. τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν: sce on τοῦτ᾽ ἦν ν. 
381.— ἐψόφηκε: see οἷν BL G60, 

468 [. While in the house Parme- 
honsees that the preparations tor the 


wedding are ΠΟ ἀν it pothine lied 


MENANAPOY 


πραγμάτων, εἰδὼς δ᾽ ἀκριβῶς οὐδὲν οὐδ᾽ ἀκηκοὼς 


ΟἿ “-Ἅ Ν (2 9: TW ΚΝ foot lie τῶν ΜΟῚ 
470 διὰ κενὴς σαυτον ταραττεις, ει πιέζων TOUT ἐχέις. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


οὐ φέρεις ---; 


al Tare , 


ΠΑΡΜΕΧΩΝ 


ποοῦσι γάρ σοι τοὺς γάμους κεράννυται, 


r a are 5 , LA Π δὴ , a¢ γ' ΄ὔ 
θυμιᾶτ᾽, ἀνάπτεταί᾽ Te θύμαθ᾽ Ἡφαίστου Bia. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


Ὥς > , 
οὗτος. οὐ φέρεις ---: 


ITAPMENQN 


x ΓΝ q , > @® ΄ 
σε γαρ τοι περιμένουσ OUTOL Tana. 


[330 ] 


MOSXIQN 


3 , ιν 9 , 
Ee; TL EME; 


IAPMENON 


ἣν ue a 
THY παῖδα --- 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


μέλλεις; 


ΠΆΑΡΜΈΕΈΝΩΝ 


> ~ ἠδὲ , 
EUTUNXELS * OVOEV KQAKOV 


415 ἐστί cou: θάρρει. τί βούλει; 


Thinking that the storm 
has blown over and that) Moschion, 


happened. 


unaware of this fact, is intending to go 
to the wars on account of his father’s 
induce his 


displeasure, he tries to 





young master to change his purpose. 
ὑστερίζειν: cf. Isoc. 5. 19 ὑστερίζουσι τῶν 
πραγμάτων. --- The change to trochaic 
rhythms vives intimation of an emo- 
tional scene; see on PL 147. 
470. Sa κενῆς, cf. v. 403. 
ἴων τοῦτ᾽ ἔχεις : if you keep insisting on 
this. For this use of the vb. ef. Plat. 


Lege, 


el πιέ- 


οἷόνπερ σφόδρα 


᾿ 


πριν 


σου ΤΟ τς 


πιέσαντες μὴ ἀνῶμεν, av ἱκανῶς 


εἴπωμεν, Plut. ΔΙΟν, 21 βέλτιον δὲ ταῦτα 


τοῖς γραμματικοῖς παρέντες ἐκεῖνα μᾶλλον 
πιέζειν. 

471 [. κεράννυται : sc. οἶνος (See Crit. 
App.).— θυμιᾶται : κι΄. ἡ λιβανωτός. Bit 
The 
mock-trazic tone of this verse, im imi- 


Te eS USC Cla seeeihien Mateo Nie 
tation of messenger-speeches in tragedy 
(see ἐξάγγελλε below), is obvious, ef. 
Aristoph. Plat. 661 καθωσιώθη πέλανος 
᾿Ηφαίστου φλογί With Kur. TA. 1602 
κατηνθρακώθη Ain ἐν ‘Wpalarov φλογί, 
Plaut. Men, 330 
apponys ad Voleani violentiam 
(Leo), 

474. τὴν παῖδα: he was about to 


dum ergo haee 


Say κομίζουσιν ἤδη ἐκ τῆς πατρῴας οἰκίας, 


SAMIA 279 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


ε 4 “ 
ἱερόσυλε παῖ; 


4 > > , 
νουθετήσεις μ᾽: €L7TE μοι. 


Strikes him. 


ITAPMENQN 


4 A 4 
τι ποιεις. Μοσχίιων; 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


“θᾶττον ἐξοίσεις a φημι; 


> > \ 
οὐκ εἰσδραμὼν 


Strikes him. 


MAPMENOQN 


διακέκομμαι τὸ στόμα. 


ΜΟΣΧΊΩΝ 


ry A A ea 
ἔτι λαλεῖς. οὗτος: 


ΠΑΡΜΕΝΩΝ 


βαδίζω. νὴ Δί᾽, ἐξεύρηκά τε 


ΓΙ wd τι ΄ 
μέγα κακον. 


[335] 


MOZXIQN 


μέλλεις ; 


TAPMENQN (opening the door and pointing within) 


»ν ‘\ 4 »ν Ὺ 2 
αγουσι TOUS γάμους οντως. ἰδού. 


MOZNIQN 


r “π 5» γ ‘4 , 
480 σπεῦσον, ἐξαάγγελλέ μοί τι. 
Exit Parmenon into the house of Demeas. 


na 2 “Δ ΄ 
νυν πρβροσέεισιν. αν δέ μου 


r Ἂ Ὡς ΣΤΟΝ ν , > beet) \ ΤῊΝ 
μὴ δέητ᾽. ἄνδρες. καταμένειν. ἀλλ᾽ ἀποργισθεὶς ἐᾷ 


ef. Plaut. Cas. 798 illam educunt 
hue novam nuptam, 

476. ἱερόσυλε παῖ: cf. for the adj. 
BE. 852, P. 246. 

477. διακέκομμαι : my lip is cut in 
two. 

478. ἐξεύρηκα : yiined, icc. for my 
pains. Cf. Soph. Trach. 25 yun poe rd 
κάλλος ἄλγος ἐξεύροι word, Phil. 288. 

479. Soin Plaut. Bacch. 723 Mnesil- 
ochus takes Chrysalus to the door and 


saysintro inspice; see also ibid. 833. 
480. σπεῦσον. Kré.: hurry, give me 
news about it. The reading ὕστερον, fav- 
ored by the MS. and otherwise accept- 
able, gives a dactyl, for which see on 
Pe ΤΟ: 
sight of 


πρόσεισιν: sc. ὁ πατήρ. The 
Parmenon with his swollen 
lips and the story he will tell will net 
fail, he thinks, to bring Demeas out. 
481. ἀποργισθείς : flying off ito a 


rage, a rare compound, hitherto Known 


280 


MENANAPOY 


| ao) fe 7 \ Ν ” A , A lal 
απιέναι.--- TOUTL Yep αρτι παρέλιπον. Sat dl δεῖ ποειν: 


ee , qV > λ ,, ete aN , , Ν 
εικοτως OUK ἂν ποΉΊσαι TOUT , ἐαν δέ--- παντα yep [340] 


r , q “λ » Ν 7? > ’ iv 
γιγνεέεται — γέ οιος ἐσόμαιυ, νὴ Δι > ανακάαμπτων παλιν. 


* * * * * * 


* * * * * * 


From one of the last scenes in the play we have the quoted trimeter : 


NIKHPATOZ 


φέρε THY λιβανωτόν. σὺ δ᾽ ἔπιθες τὸ πῦρ, Τρύφη. 


437 K. 


* * * * * * 


In the end Moschion is of course completely reconciled with his adoptive father. 
It is probable that Chrysis the Samian girl is discovered to be an Athenian 
woman of good family; and that the play closes with a double wedding — 
Demeas and Chrysis, Moschion and Plangon, 


only from the Septuagint 2 Mace. 5. 17, 
but cf. ἀποσκυδμαίνειν Hom. 1]. 24. 65, 
ἀποσκύζειν, ἀποστυγεῖν, and the like. 
482, παρέλιπον: left vut of my calcu- 
lations. Moschion begins to realize that 
his scheme is ill advised: he himself is 
not a good actor (ν. 465) and Demeas’ 
good nature is not to be counted upon. 
It probably turns out in the sequel 
that 


Demeas laughs at Moschion’s 


weak attempt to play the hero and 
leads him into the house to be mar- 
ried, 

Fr. 437. See on ν. 407. The offer- 
ing of incense was burnt at the hearth 
before the wedding, ef. Plaut. Δα]. 885 
nune tusculum emi hoe et coro- 
nas floreas. haee imponentur 
in foco nostro Lari, ut fortu- 
nhatas faciat gnatae nuptias. 


CRITICAL APPENDIX AND BIBLIOGRAPHY 


EXPLANATORY NOTE 


The editor has attempted in this Appendix to report every deviation from 
the MS. which he has adopted in the text; in passages that are corrupt or im- 
perfectly preserved, to indicate what basis we have for the reconstruction of the 
text (ie. the letters reported by the first editor or by Korte, and the extent of 
the lacunae); to assign credit to editors and critics for their decipherment of the 
text, or for such supplements of lost portions as have been adopted in this edition 
or as seem worthy of record; to report such indications of the speakers as are 
written in the MS. and to record all deviations from the MS. in assuming a 
change of speaker (i.e. the disregarding of the presence or absence of double- 
point and paragraphus); and to record errors and peculiarities of the MS. in 
matters of orthography, elision, and the like. 

A general reference is here made to the Bibliography for the articles and edi- 
tions in which have appeared the contributions of the scholars here mentioned, 
In crediting conjectures to their authors no attempt has been made to pass upon 
the claims to priority of members of the group of scholars whose contributions 
appeared in the months immediately following the publication of the Princeps. 
To the first editor, M. Lefebvre, all subsequent editors are indebted for the cor- 
rection of many small errors and the filling of innumerable small gaps in the text 
Which it is not practicable to mention separately, as well as for the many correc- 
tions and supplements of greater importance which are specifically accredited 
to him. 

The lemma, when not printed, is the portion of the text that is Inelosed in 
half-brackets "7; when printed it is followed by the square bracket 1. and when 
given with accents and breathings is the reading adopted in the text; when given 
Without these it is the reported reading of the MS. which furnishes the basis for 
restoration or correction, Letters in the lemma inclosed in parentheses () are 
alternative readings of the preceding dotted (i.e. obscure) letters. Parentheses 
are used outside the lemma for suge¢estions of the scholar named which have 
been incorporated ina supplement proposed by a subsequent editor, for alterna- 
tive sugeestions of an editor, and for such indications of a change of speaker as 
are ignored by the editor or editors previously mentioned, The dash — before 
areading or supplement indicates that the latter is incomplete at the beginning ; 
in the middle, that a change of speaker is assumed; at the end it is a mark of 
punctuation, The several notes ona verse are separated by //. 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


HERO 


TitLeE: Between the remains of the 
first letter of the title (which Korte 
thinks may have been H, Ricci P) and 
E, the first preserved letter of the au- 
thor’s name, there is space for nine 
ordinary letters. HPQZ may be sup- 
plied on the supposition that the ini- 
tial letters of each word occupied the 
space of two ordinary letters and that 
the words were separated by a double 
space. 

Hypotuersits: 1 appevtexovcarapbevo 
σθηλυθ᾽ αμα] corr. Wil, 

2 exitpopw] corr. Kér., Leo, Weil, 
Wil. 

Text: b Inlmargs ret] 

6 oo] corr. Lef. Δ) σύ. Kor., σύ; 
Lef., σύ; Rob. //In r. marg. TET] 

8 12 lett. τοῦτ᾽ Lef., Ὁ lett. erer.uz’] 
suppl. Kor., νῦν σ᾽ ἐκφοβεῖ τι Sud. 

9 15 lett.] suppl. E.C., o@tev ye 
und ἔχειν (--- μηδ᾽ ἔχειν Leo) Rob., og fev 
ὑπέρ cov, μὴ Rich., ἕως ἂν εὖ Ons τὰ κατὰ 
σαυτὸν Leeu., ἵν᾿ ἀπολάβῃς, τὰ κατὰ Wil., 
μοχθηρέ, πρίν γε σχεῖν Sud. 

10 15 lett.] suppl. E.C., καλῶς γὰρ 
οἶσθας ws Leeu., ὅταν καλῶς Ons; ws Wil. 

11 15 letts ype] suppl.  ΟΥανῸν 
μοι σεαυτὸν δός Leeu., ὁρῶν σέ γ᾽ ὧδ᾽ οἰκ- 
τρὸν Rob. // In τ΄. marg. AA] 

12 16 lett. ἐπλεγμαι] ληρεῖς Crois., 
Leeu., Leo, κακῷ yap E.C., ἐμπέπλεγμαι 
Crois., ἀέλπτῳ δ᾽ ἐμπέπλεγμαι Crois., 
ἀμάχῳ γε συμπέπλεγμαι Leo, βαρυτάτῳ 
δ᾽ ἐμπέπλεγμαι Leeu., ἑτέρῳ ye συμπ- (Ww. 
ληρεῖς) Wil. 


13 16 lett.] suppl. E.C., ap’ οὐ φίλῳ 
λέγοις dv; Aa. ἔφθαρμαι Leo, so (w. εἶτ᾽ 
for ap’) Rob., νόσῳ γὰρ οἵᾳ πάνυ διέφθαρ- 
μαι Crois. 

14 14 lett.] suppl. E.C., νοσοῦντι μέν- 
τοι Crois., μὴ δῆτα: σαυτῷ Leo, giving 
the whole v. to Geta, σὺ δ᾽ οὖν τὸ κατ᾽ ἐμὲ 
Leeu., Te. πῶς γάρ, κατάρατε; Kor. // 
τῶν add. Hense, Leo, καταρῶ μοι Rich. 

15 16 lett.] Aa. (continuing) βέλ- 
tit , ἐρῶντι. Γε. τί Leeu., Aa. (continu- 
ing) ἔρως μ᾽ ἔβλαψε. Te. τί Crois. (no 
indication preserved in MS. of change 
of speaker within the v.), Aa. ἐρῶ. Te. 
κακόδαιμον, τί Leo (no indication in MS. 
of change of speaker after θεῶν) // In 
r. marg. AA] 

16 Suppl. Lef. from fr. adesp. 444 

17 παρέχει. Lef., παρέχει; Leeu. 

18 In]. marg. AA] 

20 In]. marg. TET] 

22 Punct. Leo 

25 Inr. marg. AA] 

27 ἡμῖν] ὑμῖν Leo // Inr. marg. ΔΑ] 

30: Puncts Wil.///iIm yr mare TET 

81 ovxam] οὐκ ἀπ- Lef., οὐκέτ᾽ Wil. 

86 In r. marg. TET] 

37 In]. marg. AA] 

88 Opa Lef., epa Kor] ἔρια Ell, 
Head., Wil., confirmed by Kor. // Wil. 
gives the whole yv. to Davus (re: macdl- 
oxy: MS.) //In r. marg. A.] 

39 In r. marg. A.] 

43 (Crois. 

44 τὸν ἀδελφὸν Lef. // Te. 
E.C., Te. Δα πρὸς ef Wil., atrixa Lef., 


πῶς dp εἶ 


284 


viv, Πέτα Sud., Topyiav Rob., ἀλλὰ νῦν 
Leeu., all continuing to Dav. A change 
of speaker in or at end of v. indicated 
in MS. by paragraphus 

45 τελεμέροσ Let., τελουροσ (for τη- 
λουρός) ΙΧ... τιλαμπροσ Ric.] πενθηρός 
ΠΕ Aa. ri Napmpds: Ric., Aa. rl, Aéu- 
gos: Sud., Ve. ri. xaXderés; Rob. // Aa. 
ἀποδημεῖ 1.C., Ve. (continuing) ἀποδη- 
mec Left. (no indication of change of 
speaker preserved in MS.) // τρίμηνος 
ἐπί τινα Sud., τρίμηνον ἐπί τινα Sud., 
Wil., τριταῖος ἐπί τινα Cron., Leo 

46 ἰδίαν εἰς Λῆμνον Cron., Leeu., Leo 
//nxoe y¥ ἀσφαλῶς .C., οὐμὸς δεσπότης 
Rob., ἀποπλεύσας λάχης WKor., Wil. 

Cy (A Oa Gee τσ ὟΣ 


midos* μόνον Wil, 


, a Pky 
vu ἐλπίδος Leo, ἔτ᾽ ἐλ- 


48 χρηστον] εἴ, χρηστοσ Kor.Jsuppl. 
ἘΞ ΤΟΣ 


this απ] πάνυ or χρηστὸς δεσπότης οὑμὸς 


In.C.. χρηστὸν δεσπότην ἔχω J 


πάνυ Rob., χρηστὸς εἰ σύ. Δα. τῆς τ᾽ ἀπο- 
δημίας Wil. 
BOM Ce 
50 φρονεισ ᾿ εγωγαρκλ] suppl. ELC, 
Vertis 
Kor. | ἅλες νὴ τὸν Cron., Leo, Wil. con- 


καλῶς Lee. 
51 αλιονητον.σ. 


αλισνητονπὸο 


firmed by Nor, // Πυσειδῶ Cron, Leo, 


Wilk // nots-Heors: 132% 


MENANDER 


[HERO 


Fr. 345 Assigned to Hero by Legr., 
Leo 

52, 53 Suppl. 
probable connection with this context 
of fr. 345 

Zen. 5.60 Assignedto Hero by E.C., 
adding κακῶν 

Fr. 209 τῶν add. Grotius 

Fr. 210 δεδει] dee del. Bentley 


Ir. 211 τατοιαυτα] τα del. Hirschig 


E.C. to show the 


Ir. 213 πεφαρμάκευσαι and érepap- 
μάκευσον MSS. of Phot. and Suid. 

Fr. O Assigned to Hero by Lef. 

τα την Τιδῖς την th, INGOL| ser 
᾿στὶν Kir. // μὲν οὖν σαφῶς V.C., μέ- 
μνημ᾽ ἐγὼ Wil. 

2,3 H.C. τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτ᾽ Kor. 

4 ὧν οὔ πως Kir., σῶν σ᾽ ὅπως Rob. 

5.1 ἐνερ ταύτης N.C, reo’ Rob., 
ἔπεισεν" Crois. // daw] corr. Let. // 
pero VC peste let: 

2 1.C., οὕτως σύ ¥ οὖν Crois., σιγῶσα 
γοῦν Rob. 

3 ἘΠ τ vat: τοῦτο δὴ mpakae Crois. , 
σοὶ ταῦθ' ὁμολογῆσαι Rob. 

4 15 lett., the last heing o] suppl. 
.(ὐὐς χρὴ ταῦτ᾽ ἐνεγκεῖν Rob. 

5 ἐλέησον (Crois.) ἄγε τὸν Rob. 


Fr. 215 δὲ add. Mein. 


1 1 Ιλ ΠΤ 


Fr. 600 
Leen... Leo Wil, formerly in- 


Assigned to Epitr. by 
(noise 


LUM UCC CML ees Lives, 
306) // tay add. Leo, Wil., 


(sce Crit. 
Ay. ony. 
ap Sud. 
1.2 Distribution of speakers Crois., 
NGS HEE nce s « LUPes GUROPaymetSiacc 
AGE OUNCE Re τ ΣΟ Gh Tne Onsite Cites 
Nalin ΠΝ τς NOS. 


sade listribaution ty ow. ol, dort 


Leo make the 
SAMIR eee 
ΞΜ Εις: eomtiniiie ob det. Ὁ co ver Dat 


Meee eerily Nora ν ἸΡ το 


Vis (Orato y ns: 


COMMNUNC ἐπιτρεπτέον... τούτων to Sy- 
riscus (un ao’: MS.) 

3 κρινώμεθα tivento Davusby Crois., 
βούλομαι: MS. 

5 macyw: KC. 

6A lntn. nae SAY 

POREerSe ae wna Gi he elales 
Δ olal 

19 Ὲ ἐστ acuiiivar lene Ieee eC eN tes 

1 δ ΠΕ ΩΣ 

18 πρόνοιαν" Δ 11}. 

19. 1 2|Ξ saute Neat] 


Head. , 


EPITREPONTES | 


21 ΣΥΡ over πάντως] 

22 κωλυονμε) με del. Let., we κωλύον 
Eitr. 

23 Inl. marg. . A] 

24 πραχθεντ᾽] 

29, 30, 31, 33, 34, 35 Initial letters 
(one or two) suppl. Lef. 

30 In r. marg. AAO] 

82 Arn., Cron., Head., Herw., Wil. 

35 βουλὴν δ᾽) βουλὰς in MSS. fr. 733 
// ινεται) 

39 jv.] ὧν Leeu. 

41 ἐκπρισσων] corr. Arn., Head., 
Leeu., Maz., Nie. So Lef., p. 97 

44 Puncet. Lef., “τί γὰρ ἔγὼ περίεργός 
εἰμί Leeu., “τί yap,” ἐγώ, “ἱπερίεργός 
εἰμί Rob. 

47 εδειτ᾽] corr. Lef. 

52 Lef. 

Does YMIK] // συρισκ᾽ το 


λην] σὺ ταῦτ᾽; --- εὖ ἴσθ᾽. K.C., Σύρισκ᾽; — 


marge. 
ἔγωγ᾽ Hense., Leeu., Σύρισκ᾽; ---- ἐπόουν 
Goldschinidt, Σύρισχ᾽; — οὕτως Crois., 
avy’ ; — ἐδεόμην Bod.-Maz., Aa. (contin- 
uing) édéov, Σύρισκ᾽: Stef. (παιδίον: MS.) 

57 ft. ἀπηλλάγη. μετὰ Arn., Bod. 

67 Crois., ἔλαβεν av Head., Leo, 
Mirza el iche. NVitle 

68 σύγε Maz., γεσὺ Lef., τότε Leeu., 
Leo, ὅμως 111... Wil. 

70 Let., ἐγώ Ell. 

72 Lef. 

76 1: marg. SYP] // Lup. etpnxev; 
Nu. od... εἴρηκεν Leer., Wil., Sp. ef- 
pnxev. οὐκ... εἴρηκεν Let. (λόγον: and 
εἴρηκεν: οὐκ MS.) 

82 ποιμήν] ποιμὴν δὲ Crois., Rob. 

85... Πλὴν ΤΟ oma. ἡ ὌΡΕΙ ΟΕ 
Arn., Bod., Eitr., Kor., Sud., vuvi d6- 
γον Lef. 

85-86 Punet. 

92 ατι] COUT: Crols., 


sod., Wil. 

Rich, 

Leeu., ἀ τὶ Lef., Bod.-Maz., Rob. 
94 exrpupn| corr. Lef, 


ἅττα 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 285 


98 rovr’] corr. Hense, Leo, Wil. 
77 λεγων] corr. Kor., Leo, 
Maz., Wil., τοῦτ᾽ ἦν: and λέγων ἥκω 
Arn., Rich. 

99 οὐχ] //o add. Sud., γ᾽ Lef. 

101,103, 105, 107,108,110 Initial 
letters (one to three) suppl. Lef. 

100 f. Punct. Lef., κοινός Ἑρμῆς; 
μηδὲ ἕν. εὕρισχ᾽; ὅπου... 


Hense, 


. ἀδικούμενον 
οὐχ Leo 

102 οὐχ suppl. Lef. after Hephaes- 
tion (fr. 180 K.) 

103 οὑτοσὶ Lef. 

104 .... 0 Lef., ...wo Kor.] suppl. 
ITead., ὄντως Sud. 

L0G 2c eels, ve ac ἸΝΟ ἢ ssuppl: 
Heidel, ἐμβάς Kor., ἀξας Leo // ποεῖν] 
πονεῖν MSS. schol. Hom, Od. 2. 10 (fr. 
722 K.) 

107 λέοντας] λέγοντας MSS. fr. 722, 
corr, Buttmann // τρέχειν ἐν Legr., Leo, 
τρέχειν, ἐν Crois. 

108 Punct. Leeu., Legr., Leo, Maz. 

109 ..y Lef., αὐ Kor] suppl. Arn., 
Kor., νῦν Lef. 

115 xaravrous] corr. Let. 

116 οἱ τότ᾽] of πρὶν MSS. Cass. Dio 
GO, 20 (fr. 488 KX.) 

117 εἰδεκε)] corr, Bod.-Maz., εἰ δέ ye 
Let. // ἐκεῖν, ἃ Ados, Herw. 

118 avrw] corr. Cron, Hense, Herw., 
ANUS αὑτῷ Ύ Leo 

120 n] of Lef. after MSS. fr. 181M. 

121 Lef; 

122 τὴν αὐτοῦ δὲ E.C., Sud., τὴν δὲ 
τοῦδε Arn., νῦν, αὐτοῦ δὲ Let. (so ΔΜ 
changing τῆς to τὴν), τοῦ βίου δὲ Rich. 

128 Punet. Lef., τηρεῖν πρὸ πολλοῦ, 
Sod. 

129 φησιν] corr, Cron., Head., Leo 

131 ἔστι δίκαιον) ἐς τὸ δίκαιον Leo, 
ἔστι δ᾽ ἱκανόν Sui. 

1381-134 Punet. Schmidt, δίκαιον, εἴ 
τύχη. 


Tt... Aapecy, Cpe ΠΟ HEV EC cane 


286 MENANDER 


INTC ae Willes 
Crois. 

132 πρὸς ζητεῖς Bod., 
τεῖς Lef., προσζητεῖν Nic., 
(Ἰδαῖος 

187 Δα. καλῶς. 


Ἶ ; 
τὸ παιδίον 6; 


so (but w. δίκαιον ") Lef., 
Wil., προσζη- 
πρὸς ζητεῖν 


τὸ παιδίον δ᾽; Crois., 
Συ. καλῶς. Kitr., 
‘(continuing to Smicrines) Aa. τὸ παιδίον 
δ᾽, Wil. (γινώσκω: MS.) 
138 Ai’, ἐγὼ Maz., Ala, σοῦ Lef. 
139 déxai Arn., Crén., Ell., Head., 
Herw., Leo, Maz., Wil., δέ οἱ 


καλῶς. 


Hense, 
Crois. 
140 ταδικειν] = τῷ ἀδικεῖν Arn., 
Head., Hense, Wil., τάδ᾽ ἀδικεῖν Bod. - 
Maz. 
141 yevor ] corr. Lef., ‘¢ fort. exci- 
dit interiectio”? Sud. // κρίσις Lef. 


142 σωτῆρ᾽. ἅπανθ᾽ Arn., σωτῆρα" 
πάνθ᾽ Lef. // μόνος Arn., ἐγὼ Lef. 


143 a Lef., e Kor.] ἔχει Head.,Wil., 
ἄγει Head., 
144 Lef. 
145 ταχύ Bod.-Maz., 
τοδί Lef. // Xv. 
φέρε τοδί Let. 
146 Χ Lef., 
Arn., λαβὲ Lef. 
146-154 Distribution of spe ake asks 
vy τὴν πήρανε. -αὐδόψενς. Δάν Τὶ ᾿ς 
followed by Rob., 
Kor., Sud. (wepipépes yap: MS.), Zu. 


Le ) 


Leo, 
φέρε ταχύ RNob., Σμ. 


Leeu., 


x Ric.] χάλα Kor., ἄνες 


τούτῳ Leet. Crois., 


την πῆραν ἡ. Na. “Boaxd.( 5.5 τούπῷ 
Lef. followed by Bod.-Maz. (ἀποδῷ: 
MS.), Σὺ. τὴν πήραν. Δα. βραχὺ. 

TOUT εν τὴν TIED CLE eee SS Ue 
Bpaxv ... ἀποδῷ, Aa. Th... TovTW: 


Tue /7 VAG £2. Ss 66s. aor’; 
Δα. αἰσχρά Ἢ 
yarrnpiov: MS.) Nu. dos... 
Reta 


a πέπονθα hor... 


ἐργαστήριον. 
ἃ πέπονθα Leo, Maz. (ἐρ- 
Kéxpay "a 
δός ποτ. Aa. 
ANSE (AS 
Rob, 


l50tt, Su.mavr’ xyes, Kor., 


πέπονθα 
“ἰοῦ χρά Ἢ BAS ti μ 


followed hy Leen., CEOs 


Wil, 


1 δ αὴς 
δ]. 


[EPITREPONTES 


followed by Leeu., Rob., Crois., Sud., 
Aa. πάντ᾽ ἔχεις. Lef., Σν. πάντ᾽ ἔχεις; 
Leo, Maz. // dv. οἶμαί γε δή. Σμ. ἄγε" 
μή te... ἡλίσκετ᾽ Rob. (no indication 
in MS. of change of speaker after 67), 
Du. οἶμαί... ἡλίσκετ᾽ Lef. followed by 
Leo, Bod.-Maz., Zu. οἶμαί... 
Wil. followed by Crois., Kor., 


. ἡλίσκετ᾽ 
Sud., Dv. 
οἶμαί... πάντας Kir., Leeu. (ἡλίσκετ᾽ :, 
ΠΡΘΎ ΡΩΝ below, Συρ. in marg., MS.) 
Lf lola 
abe by Leo, Rob. (w. πάντα), Bod.- 
Maz., 

. πάντας Wil. (no indication in MS. 


Dv. οὐκ av... πάντας Lef. 


AaegOUKUOV on. oe 


<, » 9 Fahy 
Lu. adr εὐτύχει 


of change of speaker after @éunv), Du. 


οὐκ ἂν... Du. ἀλλ᾽ εὐτύχει. .. πάντας 
Crois. 

147 Lef. 

148 ἀποδῷ Leo, ἀποδῶ Lef. 

149 ποτε] 

150 . .xpaya Lef., .. σχραγ ἃ Kor. ] 


Crone ἘΠῚ Ilead., 
κέ(κ)ρα γ᾽ " 


suppl Arn, Bod., 


Kor., Leo, αἰσχρά ye Wil., 


“ἃ πέπονθα Let. 


151 Lef., aye, oy Rob. 

152 Punet. Lef., ὡς pdioner’! Leeu., 
ἡλίσκετ: Rob. // In τὶ marg. STP] 

153 Arn., Herw., Kir., τοιοῦτόν y 
Lef. 

154 πάντας] πάντα Rob. // ἀδικοῦ 
πράγματος, Let. οὐκ ἀδικώτατος: Crois., 
ἀδικώτερον πάθος, Wil. 

155 Ἡράκλεις. τ έγονε: Wil. 7. 


δεινή Ὑ᾽ ἡ κρίσις Left. 

156° Tn πὴ SVP) //joeas. ΔΉ: 
Sou.-Maz:, Wead., Hense, Leo, Leeu., 
ἦσθα σ᾽ Crois. // Δα. ὦ πονήρ᾽ 
Leeu., No indieation in MS, of 
change of speaker after ἦσθας. but pa- 


NCI eae oor " 


Hlense, 


Leo, 


ragraphus below the 


νυν Lef., om...uvuy Wor,| ὅπως σὺ νῦν 
Crois, 

157 1.C..atrés ἀσφαλῶς a δεῖ Hense, 
αὐ ταν ll., Leo, Nie. ΝῊ} ταὐτοῦ καὶ yap 


EPITREPONTES ] CRITICAL 
οὖν ἐγώ Crois., αὔθ᾽, ἕως ἂν ἐκπραφῇ Arn., 
αὐτὰ πάντ᾽ (Wil.) ἀκήρατα. Kor. 

158 Lef. 

159 γυνη] γύναι Lef., γυνή Arn. 

160,161 Punct. Lef., εἴσφερε Χαιρέ- 
στρατον. νῦν Arn., Hous., Legr. 

164 ἀπαριθμῆσαι (but w. δεῖ for μοι in 
163) Leeu., ἀπαρίθμησαι Lef.//Kxader’ } 

165 Τυν. Badd. . . προκόλπιον By- 
ington (no indication in MS. of change 
of speaker after τινά) 

170 In]. marg. ON}-// ταυτ᾽] 

173 ἐστιν Lef. // ποιησασἹ 

174 dye Kor., φέρε Wil. // αὐτὸς Lef., 
οὗτος Head., Wil. 

175 Lef.//6 ποῖος; Head., Leeu., 
ὁποῖος Lef. 

176-179 Lef. 

178 Ὃν, rov. . . ἔχεις Lef. (no in- 
dication in MS. of change of speaker 
after ἄθλιε) 

180 
Koér.] suppl. Kor., οἷον ἀποσῶσαι Lef. 

181 ..doo Lef., ...d00 KGr.] παιδὸς 
Wil. 

182 Suppl. Lef. // προσπαίζεις ἐμοί: 
Rich., continuing to Syriscus (φημί: 


Stes mr .cwoa Lef.,.... rotwoat 


MS.), Ov. προσπαίζεις ἐμοί; Arn., Ov. 
προσπαίζεις ἐμοί. Let. 

185 
KG6r.] re καθυφείμην Arn., Ell., con- 
firmed by Kor., ποθ᾽ ὑφείμην Lef. 

186 x. θεναπ.. διου] suppl. Lef. 

187 Punct. Leeu. 

188 Lef. 

190 Lef. 

OZ cn tec vu..mapexw Lef., 5.0... 


νας θυφειμὴν Lef., «ἐκ. θυμειμὴν 


ωι. «παρέχω Kor.] suppl. punct. Leeu, 
(αὐτῷ: ἢ, σῶν:, and paragraphus MS.), 
δὸς αὐτὸν iva παρέχω σῶν Crois., δὸς αὐτῷ 
ἵν εὖ παρέχω σῶν Head., δὸς αὐτῷ ἵνα 
παρέχω σῶν Kor., δὸς αὐτόν, ὡς (or καὶ) 
παρέχω σῶν Wil., δὸς πάλιν. ἵνα παρέχω 


σῶν Leo, δὸς ἵνα σῶν αὐτὸν παρέχω White 


APPENDIX 287 


193 Crois. 

197f. καταμενῶ, αὔριον E.C., κατα- 
μενῶ. αὔριον Leo, καταμενῶ αἴριον. Lef. 

201 τουτὶ] τούτου Crois. 

202 In 1. marg. ΟΝ] 

204, 207 Lef. 

208 μελ(δ)η]με δὴ Arn., Hense, Leeu., 
Leo, μ᾿ ἕλῃ Lef.//dcaddayels Arn., Head., 
Hense, Leeu., Leo, Wil., διαλλαγὴν Lef. 

209 Lef., τ᾽ αὐτὰ καὶ Wil. 

210 δ᾽ ἔχει E.C. (ἔχει Eitr.), δὲ πρὶν 
Crois., δ᾽ ἔχοι. Leo, δέ τοι Leeu., ποῶν 
Wil., νοῶ Arn. 

211 κυκᾶν. καίτοι γ᾽ ἐμοὶ E.C., κυκᾶν 
πειράσομαι Crois., οὐ βούλομαι Leo, φυλά- 
ἕομαι Wil. (Kor. declares ¢ impossible), 
ἀφέξομαι Hense, δέδοικ᾽, ἐπεὶ Sud. 

212 w... Kor.) μέγα Wil., Ὑ ἐμοί 
Crois., πολύ Arn., Ell., Leo 

213 In]. marg. ABP] //eayeu’ Lef., 
εατεμ᾽ Kor.] ἐᾶτέ μ᾽ Wil., confirmed by 
Kor. // μοι is written above μηκακα] 

214 add..] ἀθλία Leeu., ἀθλίαν Lef. 

215 . pac. Lef., epacda Kor.] ἐρᾶσθαι 
Arn., confirmed by K6r.// προσεδόκων 
I.C., yap ἐδόκουν Arn., μὲν ἐδόκουν Sud. 

B8 joins Be without a break, as was 
seen by Arn., Legr., Leeu. 

216 were] μέ τι Lef. 

218 αὑτὸν Herw., αὐτὸν Lef. 

219 ἀρτίως; ἄτοπον Ell., Leeu., Lef. 
(in trans.)//Lef. gives τάλας... 
vy. 224 to Habrotonon (τάλας: MS.). // 
In r. marg. ABP] 

223 Crois. 

225 Arn., Leo, Wil. 

226 Suppl. punct. Arn., Wil., ἔνδον 
ἐστίν. ὠγαθέ: Lef. 

227 4 Arn., Leo, Wil, # Lef.// 
ποτέ.] mor’ 7 Sud. 

228 rovrom, οἱ written above | 


κάθημαι 


284 ταυροπωλιοις)] 


cor Cross 


239 avdecnvy..avre| 


Nal 


288 


242, 243, 244, 247, 248, 250 Two 
initial letters in each v. suppl. Lef. 

244 ταυταδῃ Kor.) ταῦτα Lef., δή 
Kor. // Lef. assumes : at end of v.// 
In r. marg. ABP Ric., Q Kor. ] 

245, 246 ..w and ...¢ Koér.] suppl. 
Wil. 

249 ...] ὡς Rob., vai, Let. //'Ov. καὶ 
... δεσπότου. Lef. (no indication in MS, 
of change of speaker after τάλαν) 

251 af E.C., al Lef., a Wil. //er’] 
elt, el. cla (2) eee 

252 μέρει; E.C., μέρει. Lef. 

253 Arn., Leo, Wil. give 8rep... 
οἶδεν. to Onesimus, Lef. to Syriscus 

254 Leeu. gives tiv... οἶδεν; to Ha- 
brotonon (no indication in’ MS. of 
change of speaker after λέγω) 

256 δηλαδὴ εἰς Leen, 
Lef. // In r. marg. ABP] 

298 seve. νος a..u Kor.| ἐνέπεσε Ell, 
Ell., 
Head., Leo, Wil., évéSpau’: οὔποτ᾽ ἐμοῦ 


δηλαδή. els 


Leeu;,, Leo, Nic: καμοῦν Ari., 
[οἷς ἐνέπεσεν" οὔποτ᾽ ἐμοῦ (del. yap) Kor, 

259 τουουτον)] 

260 ravpomo...... awww Kor.) Tav- 
πολίοις παισὶν ἴδ .(ὑςς Kor., Schmidt 

261 aurné’...... νεπαιζον Nor, | αὐτή 
θ᾽ ὁμοῦ συνέπαιζον Head. , Leeu., αὕτη and 
συνέπαιζεν hh. , 

262 Punet. Head., Leo, (οὔπω yap) 
Lef. // Wil. gives καὶ pada to Onesi- 
mus ( καὶ μάλα MS.) 

263 maid ητισην)] corr, Arn., Kor., 
Leo, παῖδά γ᾽ ἥτις Head., Hense, Wil, 
παῖδα δὴ Tis Crois., Rich, 

ΘΒ αὐτὴν bi Oz αὐτὴν Leta (πες 
Rob., avrm Arn. // In r. marg. ON] 

273 απολωλεκ. εἰ ΙΧ]. ἀπολωλεκυῖ᾽ 
ell. Το Πα by Kor. 

276 νυνεχησ] corr. ΤΟΥ, 

SSM OMe παῖε Gente NI rere Ne DE 
Hepa. παιδός Let. 


279 Troovm... W. ye Written above 


MENANDER 


[EPITR EPONTES 


(i.e. τὸ συμβάν corrected to τὸ yeyords)] 
suppl. Head., Hense, Leeu., Leo 

280 ἐστ᾽] corr. Arn., Ell., Head., 
Leo, Nic., Wil. 

281 εμοιουνυν. εὰ Lef., ἐμου()συνυν. 
p.a Kor.] suppl. Leo, ἐμοῦ and κράτει 
Ko6r., ἐμοὶ and ὅρα Rob., ἐμοὶ σύμπραττε 
νῦν Wil., μοι ---Αβ. σὺ νῦν ὅρα" Sud. 

282 Let. 

283 Kor. 

284, 285 Lef. 

287 Puncet. Crois., ἀπέβαλεν ἕτερος: 
Leeu., ἀπέβαλεν; ἕτερος Lef., ἀπέβαλεν; 
ἑτέρῳ Rob. // ἴσως εἰς} ἴσως ἢ εἰς Leeu. 

292 ἐκείνην " (OV ἐκείνην:) and ἐγώ :} 

293 Lef. //In r. marg. ON] 

294 Inv. marg. ABP] 

295, 296, 297 Lef. 

298 Priscian(fr. 182 K.) gives εἴσειμι 
πρὸς ἐκείνην λέγεις, ἄρτι yap vow 

800 ταυροπωλιοις] 

801 ουσατοτ᾽ Lef.] οὖσα, τά τ᾽ Arn., 
Wil., confirmed by ΙΧῦτ,, οὖσα, τἀκείνῃ 
Head., οὖσ᾽, ἃ τότ᾽ ἐκείνῃ γέγονεν Crois. 

304 πραγμ'᾿ ευθυσηξει] corr. E.C., et 
Avs μάλ᾽ Leen, εὐθὺς μὲν Crois., εὐθὺς 
τόθ᾽ 1}}1.. πρᾶγμά γ᾽ Lef., οἶδ᾽ εὐθὺς Rich. 

310 wot’) ὡς Arn, ΝΟ. ΜΠ]. ws δι 
Head, 

311 καιΐταμοσ] και del. Let. // σφο- 
dpav] corr. Let, 

312-320 Initt. suppl. Let. 

315 Inr. mare. ON] 

317 ..| néy Lef., ἐστὶ Head. 

322 γινη) 

326, 324. EUAUT YO - τουτωνσ᾽] Head., 
Jensen, Leeu., Nie. del. second σὲ 

330 ἕνεκεν; Arh. 

332 λάβοιμι μισθὸν Lef. // Above λά- 
{ous ON] 

θ 99, σύμ. δε: τοὐμα νον IAM mets cn εἰ 
GOC ΙΝ ΛΝ ΠΟ ΠΣ 

Bio) "ἐπ ἐπ εἰ NOTES | wee War., 
ΠΣ 1 Oye ἢ 


EPITREPONTES ] CRITICAL 

340 Punct. Crois., τόδ᾽ ἀστικὸν Arn., 
τοχαστικὸν Herw., Nic., Rich., Wil. 
“ 7) ησθεθ᾽ Kor.) corr, Leeu, 

350 ἔστι] ἔσται Leeu. 

8351 κεκτημένην ταχέως" Leeu., xe- 
κτημένην᾽ ταχέως Left. ,7) κόρη] ἡ κόρη 
Wright, perhaps correctly 

352 Kor. 

353 raurny Lef., ταυτὴησ Kor.] ταύ- 
τῆς πατήρ (or Bia) E.C., ταύτην δέ τοι 
Leeu., ἀφείς. Arn., ἐῶν, Crois. 

354 owevyy..... a.v Lef., erevxo. 
alc). τ()ε(σ)να. ν (vague) Kér.] suppl. 
E.C., of’ ἐστὶν αὐτῇ viv Crois., ἐπεύχομαί 
τε ναῦν (οἷός τ᾿ ἐγὼ τὴν ναῦν Arn.) Kor., 
εὐθὺς κελεύσει νῦν Rob., εἶτ᾽ εὐκόλως δεῖ 
ναῦν Wil. //Atend τι Lef., τη() Kor. ] 
suppl. E.C., ravéade Crois., τὴν σαθράν 
Arn. 

355 uw Lef., 60 Kor. | δοκῶ Leeu. 

356 Lef. 

357 ταδαλλα Lef., τομαλλα Kor.] 
τὸ μ᾽ ἄλλα Kor., τὸ πολλὰ Arn., Wil. 
// pw ἔτι Lef., μέ τι Crois. 

358 N joined to T by Arn., Wil., 
and placed here. // ἐκτεμεισ | corr. Wil. 

359 αλλ᾽ουτοσι] ἀλλ᾽ ὁδὶ Byington, 
Wil., ἀλλ᾽ del. Arn., Wil., ἐμαντοῦ del. 
Rob. inserting οὖν after ἀλλ᾽ 

360 Lef. 

361 Herw., confirmed by Kor. 

362 πέπυσται Wil. //ad 9 lett. w] 
ἀληθεῖς αἰτίας Leeu., ἀληθινὰς --- Kor., 
δαπάνας Χαρισίου (5) F.C. 

968 Arn., Wil. 

364 ἐμαυτόν Wil. //rvydv ἴσως 15.("., 
ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν Kir., οὐδ᾽ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν δοκεῖν 
Wil. 

365 προ(ε)ὴ-- ιμεδει] suppl. F.C ., πρό- 
τερον ᾿Αβρότονον τί δρᾷ γνῶναί pe δεῖ 
Walk 

366 ff. M assigned to Epitr. by Wil., 
to act I by Leo, placed atter NT! by 
Rob., contirmed by Ricci, who finds 


APPENDIX 289 
that M joins NT, pin v. lof ΜῈ belong- 
ing to the same y. as uv in the last v. of 
NT} 
367 
368 
374 
375 
376 
377 
378 
381 


ἐξηπατήθην E.C. 

τ alhvob. 

αὐτὸν Rob., αὐτοὺς Lef. 

E.C, 

διαλῦσαι Τὰ. Ὁ, διαλλαγῆναι Rob. 
οιμαιταλ] οἴμοι Rob., τάλας Lef. 
1,61. 

Rob. 

392 E.C. 

393 οὐδεισσ. ν..«.. Kiér.] suppl. E.C., 
Schin., οὐδείς, σάφ᾽ ἴσθι γ᾽, Rob., γέ- 
voir’ ἂν Wil. 

394 αρι.τ...ν Kir.] suppl. Leeu., 
Leo, ἀριστῶσιν Kor. 

395 καταπα Lef.,xarawoAdnr... Kir.] 
κατὰ πολλά (κατὰ πολλά γε KOr.) Rob., 
καταπόλλυς Leo 

896 ὃ. σκελον---.κιοσ Lef., ὃ.. 
OGVA tract i200 ΟΝ, χοὸς SOKEORY τς: υκ 
vor Ric.] διασκεδᾶν σ᾽ ἄπρακτος (διεσκέ- 
δασμ᾽ ἄπρακτος Crois.) K.C., διασκεδάννυσ᾽ 
ὁ ὄκνος Kir., διασκεδάννυσ᾽ ἄοκνος Leo 

397 7m 12 lett. μαγείρου... στυχὴ Kor.) 
suppl. E.C., wayelpou.. τύχη Let., μαγεί- 
ρου τις τύχῃ (τύχῃ Wil.) Kor, περιδεξίου 
χρεία μαγείρου τις τύχη CYrois. 

398 14 lett. εκαλειτ᾽] σώσει σ᾽. May. 
ἀπειλεῖς ἐμέ: 1.C., βαλεῖτ᾽ εἰς μακαρίαν 
Wil., ὑμῖν, ἕτερον μέν, μή με καλεῖτ᾽ Crois, 


401 ff. α΄. αἱ} ἅπαξ Kor. 


405 νο..σ Lef., evodia Kor. | -εν ὁ δὶς 
Kor. 

406 Rob. 

408 apaye Let., apare Wor.| μίαρά 
ve E.C., apa ye Rob. 

409 Wor. 

410 Rob., ἀποπέμπειν NC, 

413 Rob. 

414 Let. 

415 .umao Let., σιμμιασ Kor., Ric. | 

416 Let. 


290 


418 Kor. 

Pet. fr., recto (=Jernstedt’s 2a) 
attributed to Menander by Cobet; as- 
signed to this play and to this position 
by E.C., recognizing as the speakers 
Smicrines, Onesimus, and Chaerestra- 
tus. The MS. has punctuation and in- 
dications of change of speakers in vy. 
ἢ (ἑαυτόν : and paragraphus), 7 (ἔρωτα " 
and paragraphus), 11 (δίδωσι), 12 (πρά- 
yuara:), 14 (-ισται. and ἡμέρας:), 17 (γλυ- 
κύτατε" and -aryp:). In disregarding 
these signs in vv. 1-15, I have assumed 
that they were used to mark the speak- 
er’s questions and answers to himself, 
as, in the Cairo MS., in the monologues 
FE. 850ff., 875 ff., P. 278 ff. Robert, who 
admits this fragment to the Epitrepon- 
tes, regardsall punctuation as indicating 
a change of speaker, the interlocutors 
of Smicrines being ἕταιροι a’ and β΄ : Vu. 


ἄνθρωπος. .. ἑαυτόν. Α΄. τοῦτ᾽... ἔρωτα. 
Du. rl... δίδωσίν A’. δώδεκα . . . πρᾶ;- 


Du. ὅσον els... λελόγισται. A’. 
A’. ἐγὼ 
Β΄.-- γλυκύταθ᾽; Α΄. 


Ὑματα. 
60°... ἡμέρας. Su. κατάρατ' (9). 
πεινῶντι... ὁ τῆς 

, Σμονν.19 ff. Earlier editors, Leeu- 
wen distribute the parts variously, A. 


ἅνθρωπος... ΒΜ. τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ... A.mpotka 
... didwor. B. dddexa... A. aXD’ εἰς 
διατροφὴν... B. Χαρίσιος ce προσμένει. 1. 
xaip... Β. ὁ τῆς νύμφης... 1". τί οὖν 


παθὼν ws... "Κ᾽: 


B. ψάλτριαν.. 
1 πίνει δὲ τιμιώτατον ἄνθρωπος (ἄν- 
θρωπος Col.) H.C. // ἐκπλήττομαι Cob. 

2 εγωγευπερτου)] ἔγωγ᾽" ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ 
Wil, ἐγώ- περὶ δὲ τοῦ μὴ Cob., ἔγωγ᾽ - 
ὑπὲρ τοῦ un Gomp. // μεθυσκεθ᾽) Corr. 
Tisch. 

3 απιστια] ἀπιστίᾳ Cob., ἀπληστίᾳ 
Wil. 

4 τοῦ ὀβολ] suppl. Wil. 

5 f. τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ Cob., τοῦτ᾽ ἔτι Leen. // 


ai?) , . ! a ἢ » 
TOUT ἐγω προσέμενον" (τοῦτο Vrelerring 


MENANDER 


[EPITREPONTES 


forward) Hiller // δίασι] διασκεδᾷ Cob., 
διασπαθᾷ 1ὰ.Ὁ. 

7 τὸν ἔρωτα] τὰ πατρῴα (2) E.C.// 
rl... Τοῦτο White, rl. . 


Wil., Rob. // οἰμῴξεται Wil., οἰμῴξομαι 


. war; 


Cob., οἰμωξέτω Kor. 


8,9 Cob. 

11 δίδωσι, δώδεκα (continuing to 
Smic.) E.C., B. δώδεκα; Wil. 

Loo axe τακ.. βωσ] ἐπίστατ᾽ Cob., πέ- 
πυστ᾽ Leeu., λελόγιστ᾽ Wil., ἀκριβῶς Cob. 

i Puteri σδιᾳ. ροφην] τί δ᾽ Jern., εἰς 


διατροφὴν Cob., ὅσον εἰς διατροφὴν Rob., 
εἰ πρὸς (καὶ πρὸς Hiller) Gomp., ἀλλ᾽ εἰς 
διατροφὴν Kor. // nuepwv Tisch., nuepw. 
E.C. photog.) ἡμέρων I.C., ἡμερῶν Jern., 
ἡμέρας Gomp., ἡμέραν Leeu, 

τας NEN... corac}] ἀρκεῖν λελόγι- 
σται (λελόγισται Cob.) K.C., ἑκατὸν λε- 
λόγισται Rob., πόνον λελόγισται Gomp., 
μίαν λελόγισται Leeu., χρείας νενόμισται 
Kock, πᾶς τις λελόγισται Wil. 


OP gee Prrscycd HUSA ee aes vir. €w 
aC ΙΓ ar sree & ντιτω Wor.) τελεῖν 


πλέω (τελεῖν: τί ἐγὼ Gomp.) H.C... κατά- 
par’. (2) — ἐγὼ Rob., ixavdy τὶ 7@ Wil., 
ἀρκεῖ Kock // reretia.... . ποτε Jern., 
TUTTO: «1s <OMHOMEn NT Mae TILTED ἢ τι AO TOT 
Kor. ] πεινῶντι Gomp., τὰς (del. re) ELC ., 
λόγος Gildersleeve, νόμος EC. Ξ 

τον Ae οσσ.] Ov. ὁρῶ τιν᾽ ὅς σε N.C... 
τί, ἱερόσυλε: Leeu., Χαρίσιός ce Kr. // 
χαιρω Tisch., χαιρε (oro, certainly not 
Gis) Weeatetee? (.) F.C. photog.) Χαιρέστρατε 
I... πρόσμεν᾽ ef χαίρεις ὁρῶν Leeu., 
χαῖρ᾽. ἀλλά τίς Wil. 

Τὴν ΞΕΟΣΣ τιδ.}] suppl. Jern., ὅδ᾽ ἐστὶ 
δὴ Wil. // γλυκυτατε) // νύμφης πατήρ 
Kock // Assignment of speakers Το ςς 
BY... yAvKirad’; A’. 6... marajp Rob. 

18 Gas 1 τ πω κε ees. a= 
τὴν πόνων Leen., τί δὴ (τί οὖν Kor.) πα- 
ων Wil. // rhs tiyns πος epydrns 


Leen... φιλόσοφος Wil. 


EPITREPONTES ] CRITICAL 

19 Ca. 13 lett.] suppl. E.C., ἐπιτρί- 
Ber’, εἶθ᾽ Leeu., βλέπει σκυθρώφ᾽ Wil. // 
ὁ τρισκακοδαίμων, ψάλτριαν Jern. // vv. 
19 ff. given to Smicrines by E.C. 

20 Ca. 13 lett. σαν Jern., 11 lett. 
σαδα Kor.] suppl. E.C. 

Pet. fr., verso (= Jern. 2b) attrib- 
uted to Menander by Jern., cf. fr. 581K. ; 
assigned to this play, but to end of first 
act, by Leeu., to this position by E.C., 
Crois, (Onesimus, Smicrines, Cook). 
Punctuation preserved in MS. (to indi- 
cate change of speakers): vv. 23 (γέ- 
νοιτο"), 29 (-wev’), 30 (-rov'), 51 (σ᾽ μίαν 
and ἐφεξῆς ). Leeu. recognized the 
speaker of μὴ λέγε. . . προσβαλῶ as 
Smicrines; parts are given to Chae- 
restratus and Onesimus by F.C. Rob. 
gives μὴ λέγε... βουλεύσομαι to Smicri- 
nes, the other parts (to v. 35) to ἕταιροι 
Χαρισίου A’ and Β΄, 

23 οὕτως Kock // ἀγαθὸν Jern. 

24 μηδὲν σύ γ᾽ Leeu., ταῦτ᾽, ὦ φίλ᾽, 
Jern., μηδενὶ τάδ᾽ Wil., continuing to Β΄ 

25 Jern. 

26 ὅπως ἔχει Kir., τὰ πράγματ᾽ εὖ 
Jern., ἤδη τὸ πᾶν μετὰ Leeu. 

27 
photog.] ὅντινα τρόπον (ποῖον τρόπον 
Kock) Leeu., continuing to Smicrines, 


eee torov Jern., wmoyv N.C. 


I’. φέρε, ποῦ τόπον Jern., τίνα δὴ τρόπον 
πον Crois: 

Pe ean ev] suppl. E.C., iv’ ἐκεῖθεν 
Jern., continuing to T., φράσωμεν KGr., 
εἴπωμεν Leeu. 


VAS eee μεν} suppl. Jern, 

30) Ace. τον] suppl. Kock, Διὸς ἄβα- 
τον Jern., ἀπρόσβατον (?) Leeu. 

ΠΑΝ Be τὶ g] suppl. E.C., roddds; 


Jern., ἔχειν Rob. 
32,33 Jern. 
ot See ν] suppl. Jern. // epxer ] // 

umoBe..eyu]| suppl. Jern. 

35 suppl. 


1... evox NEY | Kock // 


APPENDIX 291 


ev..uo] suppl. Jern. // χοροῦ suppl. 
Blass, Kér., Leo 

86 ἐπισφαλῆ μέν Jern. ,,),τἀνθρώπων. 
ἐμοί Jern., τἀνθρώπει- C. W. E. Miller, 
ἐπίσταμαι μὲν πάντα τἄνδον πάνυ καλῶς 
Leeu. // vv. 36 ff. given to Onesimus by 
B.C; 

37-39 Suppl. Jern. from Stobaeus 
(Men. 581 K.), who gives ἐμοὶ (from 
ν. 36, om. οἶμαι) πόλις... éué// οιομα . 
corr. Jern. 

40 E.C. 

41 Suppl. E.C. from Men. 886K., 
quoted with ἡμῶν and ὑμῶν and with 
ἔχων, ἔχω. and ἔχει. 

Fr. 175 διπλάσια γοῦν ἐσθίει μάτην 
MSS. Stob.] corr. E.C., cf. Auson. 
Epigr. 117 potat duplum dapes- 
que duplices devorat, μάτην γοῦν 
ἐσθίει διπλάσια Wil. 

Fr, 178 ἐπέπασα MSS. Athen. ] ἐπι- 
πάσω Herm. // av] ἐὰν Elmsley 

Fr. 176 μὲν add. Heringa // αἴσχιόν 
ἐστι MSS. Stob.] corr. Heringa 

R assigned to this play by the iden- 
tification of fr. 177 by Arn., placed in 
this position in fourth act (pp. 1, 2 of 
the quaternion) by E.C. Arn, places 
Ri after NT and R2 after NT2; Kor., 
following Arn., places it (R! following 

Δ} on pp. 15, 16 of the quaternion 
which contains NT; Crois., Leo, Rob., 
place it in first act. 

524 οὐδ᾽ apa Kir. 

527 κεκη Lef., 


κεκήδευκας (κεκήδευκε Leo) E.C., 


cexnd) = NKor.] ri 
KEK7)- 
δευκὼς τοσοῦτον ἐνυμβριεῖ Wil., φαίνεται 
Rob. 


528 οὗτος Arn... νὴ AC Leo 


529 καταφθαρείς τ᾽] τ᾽ om. MSS. 
Harp:, Suid. 
630 B.C... μεθύων ἑαυτοῦ YaXtmas 


’ ’ ᾿ , , 
Arn., πίνων τ᾽ ἀεὶ λαικάστριας Rol, με- 


θύων ἀεὶ λαικάστριας Crois. 


292 


531 nua Lef., nuaod Kor. | ἡμᾶς Arn., 
δ᾽ οὐκέτι κτὲ. ELC. 

558,559 EC. 

560, 561 Kor. 

562 Lef. 

564 ἐγώ τε E.C.// τωνεμωνπραττω] 
πράττω τῶν ἐμῶν Leo, τῶν ἐμῶν κρατῶ 
K.C., τῶν ἐμῶν πράττω Rob. 

δθὅ E.C. 

566 ow Lef., εἰσω Kor.) εἴσω Kor. 

Fr. 566 assigned to this play by 
Leeu., Rob., to this position in the 
fourth act by Rob., Crois.; given to 
Sophrona and interpreted as a quota- 
tion from Smicrines by E.C.// Néyee 

. ταῦτα K.C.// πλείονα οἶδεν πλείονα 
κακουργεῖ MSS, Pallad.] transp. Do- 
bree 

638 τὸ παιδίον Crois.//radav.Crois., 
Leeu., τάλαν, Lef.. Rob. 

639 πάλαι yap οὐκ Crois., Leeu., 
Pres., πάλαι yap: οὐκ Lef., Rob., Kor., 
Sud. 

640 ταλαιναεπ.. εησειε Iet., ταλαινα 
νελεήσειε Kr. | Suppl. Leeu., confirmed 
by Kor, 

641 In l.mare. .BP] // ὠφιλτατοι ἡ 
lett. eque....pa Lef., —equo..pa Nir. ] 


ὦ φίλτατ᾽. οἰκτιροῦσά σ᾽ ἔξειμι CL, σφό- 
dpa Arh., Leo, ὦ φίχτατοι. θεοί Δ Υ}}., 
Leo, πρόσειμι νῦν ἄρα Crois., ὠ φίλτατον. 
σίγα, τάχ᾽ ὄψει μητέρα Sul, 

θάρυκαι 51} ὑπ oer ces ΓΑ χα 
σα δ pale Ltzange τ ΚΣ ΠΣ 
καιροῦ τυχοῦσα: πλησίον Rol. καὶ πεύσο- 
μαι τί με δεῖ ποεῖν (ἽΝ, 

643 δ΄. lett. πο δ μεινεν. μὲ Let.. er 
ἐν ν πος εονπροσμεινονήμε War.| suppl. (πτρόσ- 
pewov Ἰνὼ)» πος (or ἔπεχε, tira), 
ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ὁρῶ. προσέμεινεν ἐμέ Crois.. ἐπ᾿ αὔτ᾽. 
ὀλίγον πρόσμεινον ἐμέ Wil. ,) καλωσσεπαι 
Lef., καλωσσεγω Ric.) καλῶς σ᾽ ἐγὼ Wil... 
καχῶς oe, mat Iet., καλωΐ ἐπεὶ (reis, 


644 δύ Ξ- Leh, ov τος, Py bear Tovs.. 


MENANDER 


[EPITREPONTES 


KGr.] suppl. E.C., οὐκ ἦλθον ἄλλως. — 
προσμένειν τι Crois, //.. κεισ οὐμοι: Let., 
ἐοκεισ. ναι Kor, ..Ke..yuvar Ric.) do- 
Kets, γύναι (δοκεῖς Leo, Sud.) K.C., ἐκεῖ 
σύ μοι Lef., δοκεῖς σύ, ναί (01 -ε κείσομαι) 
KGOr., οὐκοῦν προσειπεῖν γνωρίμην δοκεῖς, 
γύναι: Sud.// 644 b is given to Sophrona 
by E.C., Ko6r. (no indication of change 
of speaker preserved in MS.), Lef. and 
others continue to Habrotonon, 
Lef., 


omw....wda Kor.}] αὐτή ore (αὕτη ᾽στιν 


645 w..noTW..w..dw αὐτὴ 
Kir.), νῦν ἐγῴδα (ἣν ἐγῴδα Kor.) KC. 
//VV.0A5, GAG Given to Habrotonon by 
Leo, to Sophrona by Lef., γύναι: and 
paragraphus MS. 


646" 4.) τ ED eae tae ΤΟ. 
δ ΤΩΣα KGr.] γύναι Lef., prep ὧδε 
H.C, γύναι, φέρεις σὺ Rob., γύναι, πρόσ- 


betes 
δ. ρομοιτηνε WKOr., 5. . ρομοιτηνσηνδιδου 


οψιν Wil. // 8.. pomortnven.d... 


Ric. ] δεῦρό μοι Arn., τὸν νοῦν ἔχε ELC... 
τὴν σὴν AIN., χεῖρά μοι τὴν σὴν δίδου 
Sud. 

ete. 


Kar. ] ἐμοί, τί Nevers: White, ἐμοί γ᾽ 0 Χέ- 


647 εμοιαλεγεισ ἐμοιΎ . Neyer 
γεῖς CrOn., ποῖ βλέπεις Wil. // περυσιν... 
ἐσθ. «ἐμ. ι Wor.) πέρυσι (1,0 7.) διεγνώσθης 
ἐμοὶ (ἐμοὶ Kor.) K.C., πέρυσιν γενέσυ᾽. 
"AB. ἄκουε δή. Sucl., πέρυσι συνηνλίσθης 
ἐμοὶ Wil., πέρυσι παρεγένεσθ᾽, εἰπέ μοι, 
GHOISE VP Sag Ney oa Ney ets Δ. πέρ σι 
ων} τον AS. ee, 


O47 to Habrotonon Leen. Robo, Crois, 


Whole of vy. 


A change of speaker in or iat end of 
verse Indicated by paracraphus 

648 ταυροπωλιὸισ | //eme Let, eum... 
e\....9 Nor.) efrep ἐν wéurnu ey Wil, 
CUMEn LE NELS) SAGs GI] USS Gi Gy ea) Δ δ Ream 
χορείαν. Nw. ναί" σὺ dé, Crois., εἶπ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ἐλ- 
ΠΕ - Sa. ΠΧ ει αν, Wek serie 
Rob., Wil. continue to Tabrotonon. OA 
change of speaker ΠῚ ΟἿ᾽ 1 end of verse 


indicated in MS, by paragraphus 


EPITREPONTES ] 


649 .a.. Kir.) παῖδα Arn., Herw., 
Leo, od Arn., Herw., Leo, νῦν E.C., 
δὴ Crois. 

650 Lef. 

651 ...] πῶς Sud., ὅ ye Kor., ὧν 
ete. =, 

652 Lef. 

654 νυνδ: ευρηκασουν Lef., vuvd'evpn 
κασε Kir.) νῦν δ᾽ εὕρηκά σε continuing to 
Habrotonon Kér.!, εὕρηκα: σὲ Kor.?, 
νῦν δ᾽ --- Σω. εὕρηκας οὖν; Lef. 

657 1 lett.’ou Lef., ...d(a) 9 lett. 
6(~) ov Kér.] suppl. E.C., τόνδ᾽ αὐτὸν 
οἶδ᾽ ὄνθ᾽ οὗ Crois., οἶδ᾽, εἴ ye σή aT ἀφ᾽ ov 
Leo, οὐ γαμβρὸς ἐστ᾽ ὅδ᾽ οὗ Rob., ἐγῴῷδα, 
τούτου ᾽σθ᾽ οὗ Kir., οἶδ᾽ ἀσφαλῶς, ἀφ᾽ οὗ 
Sud., Χαρισίου τοῦδ᾽; (continuing to 
Sophrona) ‘Af. οὗ Leen. (φιλτάτη: MS.) 

658 Distribution of speakers that 
of Lef., Crois. (with vaiye:), Rob., Zw. 
τὴν ἔνδον οὖσαν: ‘AB. ναίχι. Sw. μακα- 
pia κτὲ. Leeu., so, but continuing ναίχι 

. σαφῶς to Habrotonon, Sud. (No 
change of speaker indicated in MS. 
after ὁρῶ.) Hous., Kor. continue τὴν 
ἔνδον... ἐλέησε to Habrotonon (:vaixe: 
MS.) 

659 ff. ‘AB. (continuing) τὴν θύραν 

. σαφῶς Lef., Crois., Sw. τὴν θύραν 
. σαφῶς Leo, 


. fay, “AB. low. . 


Rob., Kér., Zw. 'πὴν Ovpav. .. capds 
Cron. (No change of speaker indicated 
in MS.) 

663 In J. mare. ON] 

664 επεμανὴ Lef., ἐμανὴ preceded by 
a critical sign (er? = ἑτέρως) Kor.) ἐμά- 
Diels del. v. 664 


666 roovroy.| τοιοῦτό τι Rich., Rob., 


νη Let. 


τοιουτονὶ Luef., τοιοῦτον, ἢ Leo 

ΟΟἿ τισᾶγαντισ!..... ev Lef., n(y,7) 
τ ραντισὶ ....0...¥ Wir) rt yap av τις 
(τί yap ἄν τις Rich.) εἰκάσειεν (but as 
parenthesis and εἰκάσειεν.) Crois., voul 


ceev Rich., τίς, dy, ἄν τι βοηθήσειεν; 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


293 


Rob., ὠχράν τις ἀνασέσεικεν Leo, πικρόν 
τι συμβέβηκεν διά. ,,) ἄλλο Lef., ἀλλ᾽ ὃ 
Leo // yeyovévar; E.C., Sud., τὸ γεγονός: 
Rich., γέγον᾽ ἐρῶ Leo 

668 Leeu., Leo, ἄρτι πολὺν ἐγὼ Wil., 
ἄρτι μακρὸν ἣν Crois. 

669 εν Lef., eve ΙΧῦν.7 ἔνθεν ἤκουεν 
σαφῶς 1.(ὐς, ἐνδιέτριψεν ἅθλιος Rob. 

670 περιγίκ, vy, ει, r, hardly 7) Kor.] 
περὶ Lef., ᾽πολείψεως Arn., E.C., κακώ- 
σεως AIN., τοῦ πράγματος Crois., τοῦ de- 
σπότου Rob, 

671 Wil., ὁπόσα δὴ Arn. 

674 τ᾽ ανεπαταξε] τ᾽ ἀνεπάταξε Leo, 
Wil., τ᾽ ἂν ἐπάταξε Lef., θ᾽ ἅμ᾽ ἐπάταξε 
Head., Leeu. 

679 ἀλιτήριος Arn., Cron, Leo, Wil, 
ἔγωγ᾽ add. Lef. before ἀλιτήριος 

682 cuyyv..n] συγγνώμης Lef., μέρος 
Leeu., ποτέ Lef., ἐγὼ Kitr., συγγνώμην 
κόρῃ Leo 

683 Tair Arn., Εἰ Maz., Rich., 
Wil. 

684 1’: ελοιδορειτ᾽] τε. λοιδορεῖτ᾽ Arn., 
Bod.-Maz., Herw., Leo, Rich., re: Noe- 
δορεῖ τ΄ Nic., Wils, τ΄: 

685 ..cw Lef., 
ATS A eile 

690 yer] y: és Lef., γῆς Merw. 

693° In} panares NAP] 


697 ff. “ὦ τρισκακόδαιμον.... 


ἐλοιδόρει τ᾽ Let. 


ὅν; ἘΝ 
..Tw Wir.) αυτῷ 


σφόδρα 
Crois., “ἄνθρωπος... σφόδρα Arn. Kor, 
698 καιμεγαλα] καὶ μέγα Leeu., Leo, 
μεγάλα (καὶ del.) Let, 
104) ἈΠ: (μη πος 
705 Lef. 
706 9 lett. ov] suppl. E.C., κοινωνὸν 


οὐ Lef., viv κοινὸν οὐ Crois., οὐκ apa σοι 


Bl. Leo: ΤΟΙ 


Sod.-Maz., παρ᾽ ἄνδρα κοὐ Hous., τοῦ 

δ᾽ ἀνδρὸς οὐ Leci., καὶ νῦν μὲν οὐ Mitr, 
707 Arn... confirmed by hor, 
Qoassigned to this play and to this 

position by Lef.. Q? placed betore Q! 


by Leer, confirmed by hor, 


294 


734 ‘Ov. (continuing) ἅπαντα δ᾽ éxua- 
θεῖν E.C., ‘AB. (continuing) σοῦ δ᾽ εἰ τὸ 
πρῶτον ap Crois., ἐπειράθης Kir. // ἐγὼ 
Crois. 

735 Ca. 9 lett. ce] ὡς εὖ ποῶν σε E.C., 
μή μοι χαλέπαινε Crois.//xal θεούς Crois., 
τουτονί E.C. 

736 τί δέ με Lef., ἔτι με or τί σύ με 
Sud.//tepoovde: μοι] corr. Lef., μὴ Kor., 
Leeu. 

Li (aes Ree ΤΡ 8) 0) Conan gre’ Kor., 
... tare’ Ric.] suppl. Legr., giving the 
foll. also to Habrotonon, Xa. κατάρατε. 
‘AB. τῆς, κτὲ. Leeu., addyiore Wil., ἀχά- 
piste Sud. // ἐστί cov: E.C. 

LOO nese y.p Kor.] αὐτῆς γάρ (γάρ 
Kor.) E.C., τέκνον γάρ Kor., τουτὶ γάρ 
Wil. 

ΟΣ φυτὴν Lef., 
Kor.] suppl. Head., Hense, confirmed 
by Kor. 

740 Hense, ὄντως Leeu., ὄντως 7 
Kor., πάντως Rob., ὃν οἶδ᾽ Crois., τά- 
aw’. ‘AB. ἀληθῆ Sud. 

ΠΑ τα ιν: και] ὄντως (OY σαφῶς) 
ap ἦν; AB. καὶ Leen., τόδ᾽ ἔστι; (τοῦτ᾽ ἔ- 
ott; Arn.) ‘AB. val, καὶ KGr., τοδί σ᾽ ἔχειν: 
Sud.//odv γ᾽ ὁμοίως Kir., σὸν " 
1 εἴ. 

742 Lef. 

769-777 Given to Onesimus (down 
to Χαιρέστραθ᾽.) and Chaerestratus by 
πον Kor:, Rob., Sud., to Pamphila 
by Crois. 


ὁμοίως 


Kor. gives v. 775 to Onesi- 
The MS. indicates no alterna- 
tion of speakers, but πιστός" v. 772 and 


mus. 


wat v.15 

769 οὐ μὰ τὸν᾿ ᾿Απόλλω (ὦ, νὴ τὸν Απόλ- 
λῶν by) se fat. 
BG 

(HY) Brera ae inde UA ne Moen A oie ar’ 
Kor. ] suppl. E.C., Sud. // de] ἥδε (and 
-αθ᾽) Lef., ἡ δὲ Arn., ἤδη Sud. // ταῦτα 
Leo, tatr’ Arn. // de σ᾿ pn, EAC. 


. . πρόσεχέ μοι 


3 


MENANDER 


[EPIT REPONTES 


φρόντισον Sud.!, φροντιεῖ (w. ἥ δε) Sud.2, 
αὐτῷ λέγει Arn. 

771 οπω...μενεισ Lef., orwo... μεν 
εἰς KGr.] ὅπως Leo., διαμενεῖς Ell., Sud. 
// τὸ πᾶν Leo, τρόπον Crois., φίλος ArN., 
Ell., Sud., πάνυ Kor., σύ ye Sud. 

772 οἱο.π΄..οισθα Lef., ow. ροισθα 
KGr.] οἷόσπερ Arn., οἶσθα Lef., οἷόνπερ 
οἶσθα Lef., ἦσθα Arn., Sud. // ἐστί τοι 
E.C., ἐστι δὴ Crois., ἐστ gre Sud., 
ἐστ᾽ ἄφρον Kor. 

773 τυχὸν Arn., Head., Herw., 
Leeu., Leo, Sud., confirmed by Kir. // 
ὅτι ποεῖ" (Or ὅ γ᾽ ἐπόει :) E.C.,rabr’ ἄρ᾽ ἣν 
Crois., κορίδιον Rob., παιδίον Herw., 
ἐπλάσατο Kor., ἦν πάλαι Sud. 

774 υἱουδηδε Lef., σπουδηδε Kir. ] 
σπουδῇ δὲ Kir, // παιδάριον] τὸ παιδάριον 
πο. “,σ(ε)κμ(ω) Kor, ] ἐξεῦρεν. Xa. γενοῦ 
(no indication of change of speaker 
preserved in MS.) or ἐξεύρηκέ σοι E.C., 
ἐκθρέψει μάλα Crois., ἐκθρέψεται Rob., 
ἐκσέσωκε νῦν Sud, 

775 ἐλεύθερος) ἐλευθέρως Rob., Sud., 
ἐλευθεροῦ h.C. (formerly) // πάξ Arn., 
Head, Werw., Leo, Geeu., Leer, con- 
firmed by Kor. // βλέπ᾽ εἰς τὴν γῆν ἔχων 
E.C., βλέπε θαῦμ᾽, ᾿Ονήσιμε Rob., βλέ- 
rou. , εἰ προσεδόκων Kir., βλέποις τοίνυν 
κάτω Sud. // Ἰὰς. continues vv. 775 ff. 
to Chaerestratus, Kor. gives v. 775 to 
Onesimus, ‘Ov. ἐλεύθερος, wad. Xa. μὴ... 
Sud, 

776 avr.y Lef., avtn(?)y Wor] αὖ: 
τὸν Lef., αὐτὴν Crois. // 


Cron., Head., Herw. // Xapicwov 1.C., 


μόνας «᾽ς 
σκοπεῖν (Ξλέπειν Cron., ὁρᾶν Kor.) θέλω 
Rob., λαβοῦσ᾽ ἐγώ Crois., πρόσειπε καὶ 
(Ww. αὐτὴν) Sud. 

777 παῖδά pov or δεσπότην (formerly 
παῖδά cov) Kh.C., παῖδ᾽ ἐμὸν Crois.. Xapi- 
cr (del. τὸν before γλυκύτατον) Rob., 
ὑιδοῦν Wil., παῖδα νῦν Sud., οὐχ ὁρᾷς 
Herw. 


EPITREPONTES | CRITICAL 

Fr. 849, 850 assigned to this play by 
Leeu. (849 only), Legr., Rob., Wil., to 
this position by E.C., to the first act 
by Crois., Rob. // Xa. gare... ed. 
Ov. οὐδὲν... εἰδέναι E.C., May. φιλῶ 
σ᾽. ᾿Ονήσιμε. "Ov. ἀλλὰ σὺ περίεργος εἶ. 
May. οὐδὲν... εἰδέναι Rob., May. φιλῶ 
ἘΞ κεῖ. [νι ==]; 
δέναι Crois. 

Fr. 849 ᾿Ονήσιμε, καὶ σὺ MS. Cram. 
Anec.] corr. E.C., ᾿Ονήσιμ᾽. ἀλλὰ σὺ 
Rob., ᾽Ονήσιμ᾽, εἶτα καὶ σὺ Leeu., ᾽Ονή- 


May. οὐδὲν... εἰ- 


om, ὡς σὺ καὶ Crois., ᾿Ονήσιμε, καὶ σὺ 
γὰρ Mein., φιλῶ σ᾽, Ovjome, | καὶ σὺ πε- 
ρίεργος εἶ Wil. 

Fr. 850 οὐδὲν γλυκύτερον Cic. ad Att. 
4.11, οὐδὲν yap γλυκύτερον Cram. Anec. | 
ἐστιν add. Cob. 

848 f. Rob., Kr. give to Chaerestra- 
tus, Crois., Sud. to Charisius 

850 In ]. marg. [MI] // The inter- 
pretation of vv. 850-863 as an imagi- 
nary conversation of Smicrines with 
Sophrona, the latter not being present, 
is due to S. 'T. Byington 

852 Punct. Leo 

853 ἀλλὰ] ἀλλ᾽ ἢ Kor., Wil. // περι- 
μενω] corr. Cron., Head., Herw., περι- 
μένω Kor., Wil., περιμενῶ Let. 

854 Punct. Rob. 

855 Punct. 
Wil. 

856 κρεῖττον; Arn., Bod., Ell., Legr., 
Leo, Rob., οὐκ... . xpetrrov: Rob. 

857 av...i\adno Lef., av..cdadno 
Kor. 7 ἂν ἔτι λαλῇς Arn., Leo, ἂν περιλα- 
Ans ΠΟΥ, ,Χ7 τί: Rob., τὰ constr. w. preced- 


Head4, Nor een:. 


ing Lef., Crois., row. following Leeu., 
Maz. // κρίνομαι πρὸς Σωφρόνην: Head. 

858 Punct. Bod.-Maz., Rob. 

859, 860 Punct. Bod.-Maz. // deo] 
corr. Lef. 

862 κ. γωσοι] κἀγὼ Lef., yourw Wil., 
σε Arn., Ell., Keil, Kir., Legr., Leo, 


APPENDIX 295 


Maz., Nic., Pres., Wil.//ratr’ Arn., 
Ell., Head., Kor., Legr., Leo, Maz., 
Nic., Pres., Rob., Wil. 

866 In r. marg. ON] 

868 ἥκων; E.C. 

870 f. Distribution of speakers Leeu. 
(in MS. σπουδή:, no indication of change 
of speaker after οἷον or δαιμόνων, πὸ pa- 
ragraphus below either v.), Zu. τὸ δ᾽ (for 
τοθ᾽ MS.) ... οἷον". . . δαιμόνων --- Bod., 
Leo, Wil. followed by Rob., Kér., Sud. 

874 Σμικρίνη] contirming Meineke’s 
correction Of σμικρὸν ἣν in David (Men. 
174K.). 

878 f. πῶς. .. βίον Rich. continues 
to Onesimus (og fover: and paragraphus 
below v. 879 MS.), Zu. πῶς... βίον 
Lef. followed by Rob., Bod.-Maz., 
Crois., KGr., Sud. // βίον Lef. 

880 ἡμῶν οἱ θεοί: Arn., Rich., ἡμῶν; 
and τίς γὰρ οὖν Lef., τόδε μὲν οὐ Wil., ἀλλὰ 
τίς: Maz. // Leo refers to this passage 
the quotation of Theophilus (Men, 752 
ΙΧ. οὐκ ἄρα φροντίζει τις ἡμῶν ἢ μόνος θεός. 

881 Crois., συνῴκισαν Sud. 

882 ἕτερον μὲν Lef., 
Head., Wil. 

883 αὐτῷ Lef., αὑτῷ Crois.// χρήσηθ᾽ 
Wil., ἅπαξ Bod., ἄγαν Wil., ἑκών Leen, 
ὅλως Crois., χρήσθαι θέλῃ Head. Wor. 


κακῶς <AYrn., 


889 Yu. τῆς παρρησίας Arn., Wor., 
Leeu., Leo, Maz., Niec., confirmed by 
Normoe- MS, 

890 ἀανδροσσαυτου] corr, Ell., Leo, 
αὐτοῦ Nic. 

892 ‘Ov. θεᾷ: Leo, Maz., contirmed 
by Kir., ἀναγκαῖον: MS., "Ov. dea! Arn., 
θεοί ' Rich., θεῶ Rob. 

897 Lef. 

900 αφεεσο corr. toageoo Kor. jeorr, 
Lef., dgetoo Leeu., Rob. 

908 ’Orv. (continuing) αἰσθάνει ye: 
pays 


Ven pwn), /4/) 


val Lear. (ἀποσπασθεῖσαν : αἰσθάνει 


yy] corr, Lef. 


296 

909 vr] corr. Crén., Ell., Head., 
Leo, Maz., Wil. 

910 απανταταγαθα] Arn., 
Head., Kor., Wil., τὰ πάντ᾽ ἀγαθά Ell., 


corr. 


Leo 
911 Sw. 7 dios. . 
vives to Onesimus 


. ἔφυ Lef., Leeu. 


912) Du. rh μῶρος ef; E:C., Zu. rl; 
μῶρος. εἶ: Lef., Zu. ri; Nw. μῶρος. εἶ; 
Leo (: τί μῶρος εἶ: MS.) 


MENANDER 


[EPITREPONTES 


916 τέρας E.C., otros (with 8 τὸ 
Arn., Ell., Head., Leo, Leen., Maz., 
Nic. //oe.. Kbr.] suppl. Leeu., Leo, 
ofdd γ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ Head. 

917 ....cap.arepa Lef., ....a(o,c) 
τέστερα Kor.] suppl. .C., οὗτος τὸ τέ- 
pas Rob., κἂν μωροτέρα Leen. 

918: Wil. 

919 Head., Wil., ἢ τοῦτ᾽ Arn., Leeu. 


PERICEIROMENE 


Fr. 569 assigned to this play by 
Leeu., Rob., to this position in first act 
hy E.C., distribution of speakers E.C., 
Rob. gives the whole to Moschion (?) 

1 τούτων. τέκνον αὐτὴ K.C., 


αὐτὴ τρέφειν τὸ μὲν CVois., παιδίον τρέ- 


φειν | αὐτὴ Sud., τρέφειν βρέφος; | μόνον 
Wil. Four letters lacking 

2,3 Crois. 

By ae (.)dexaloyin-o sneer. μενων ποιεῖ 
δὲ Wil., ἐπόει δὲ Leo, συνέβη δὲ Crois., 
τοῦτ᾽" ἐγγενομένων Leo, τοῦτο' Wil., 


ταῦτ᾽ - Kor, γενομένων Crois., ἔσπευδε 
τότε" παροιχομένων Suid. 
& Leo, Ri¢h.. Wil... 


6... ανομενων]} suppl. Crois., ofdavo- 


δεινοῦ Leeu,. 


μένων Schmidt 

15 δίδωσ᾽ | διδοῦσ᾽ Cron., Herw. 

Ae Fee) Mee 

24 θ᾽ ουθεν] corr, Head., Leeu., τ᾽ οὐὖ- 
Bev Let. 

25 αὕτη Leen., αὐτὴ Lef. 
AWE 


πο dl Chee our abe lelinscssitules 


28 μεμενῆκεν) corr, Diels, 


31 toro] 
ὑπὸ tovrov ΝΣ Head... Leo, Rieh., Wil, 

33 Leff. 

34 7. μποισα] Corr, suppl. Let, 

35 αὐτὴν Leen, 

36 Jaf. 


vr atvrov (Cron., TLeeu., 


Ot ev] ΟΡ LGiaNe 


37 δ᾽ ἅτερος Wil., δ᾽ ὁ Πολέμων Crois., 
δ᾽ ὁ ξένος Sud. 

88 οὐτοσ Lef., αὐτοσ Kir.] αὐτὸς 
Riche scontimmed= by Κορ ae. ee ore 
Lef., ¢.pnx’avte Kir.] evpor’ B.C, ef- 
pn’ Leo, ἄν τις εὖ KLC., ἄντικρυς Kor., 
ἀρτίως Leo, ὑπολάβοι τις ἂν Rich, 

959΄. (e7) ef. cba, 10) iced 
κρινεῖ V.C., ἐρεῖ Lef., toe Rein., ἰδεῖν 
Sud., weve? Schmidt 

40 αὐτὴν] αὐτῇ Herw.//7 δ᾽ Let. 

44 axer | ἀφίκοιτ᾽ (generally ow. 
λάβοι below) Arne, Cron., M1), Tead., 
Legr., Leo, Pres., Wil, ddixnr’ (and 
λάβη) Head., Kor., Leer, Pres. 

45 λαβὴ] λάβοι Arn., Leen, Leo, 
Nes 

46 θ᾽ εαυτων COM Ὁ ehleaidls 
Leen., Leo 

47 εὕροιεν] 
pave] ἐδυσ χέρανε Wil. 

49 θεοῦ] θεοὺς Mitr. 


50 γινομενον) // τε γενόμενοι Wil., 


wt ῃ te ῃ 
εὕρωσιν Sud. // ἐδυσ χέ- 


confirmed by Kor, 

52 ff. The speaker reeognized as So- 
sias by Leer... Rob. Std. gives to a see- 
ond servant of Polemon 

58 ἀκοήσῃ Let. // ~yivouer’ | 

59 ΘΥΊΚΟΙΣ 


60 ἀλλ 7 ELC... @AN ἢ. Lef. 


PERICEIROMENE ] 


62 ff. Punct. (reading οἵα, τιν᾽, αὗται) 
Head., Leo, Nic., Rich., Wil. 

66 f. παράνομοι ἅπαντες KO6r., con- 
firmed by MS. 

68 Aw. (continuing) εὐφρανθήσεται 
... μοι Leeu., Leo, Rob., Sud. (παῖδες : 
and αὐτός: MS.), Δοῦλος. εὐφρανθήσεται 

. αὐτός Lef., Σω. εὐφρανθήσεται... 
αὐτός Leo (later), Schmidt 

J was recognized as belonging to 
this play and not to the Samia by Legr., 
Leeu., Wil., Leeu. and Wil. identifying 
the quotation in v. 243. Leeu., Leo 
assigned it to this position 

141-146 Leo, Leeu. recognized the 
speakers as Doris and Davus. The dis- 
tribution of parts here adopted is that 
first proposed by Leo, except that the 
speech of Doris is made to include 
ἐνθάδε in v. 145, Leo now gives v. 145a 
οὖς Taxlornv) to a third per- 
. δοκεῖ to Davus, Aw. παῖ- 
. ζητητέος. 
Aw. πρόσαγε αὐτὸς... δοκεῖ Leeu. The 
only indication of change of speakers 
in MS. is taylorny: in v. 145, Kor. 
gives παῖδες... δοκεῖ to *¢ Donax”? (see 
on ν. 252), porter of Myrrhina, Sud. 
to Davus 


(ἕλε οὗτος. 
son, ἐνθάδε... 


δες... μείρακα. Δα. τοῦτ΄... 


142 παμπολλὰ Leeu., confirmed by 
Kor. 

143 προσυμασ Lef., προσυμασ Kor. | 
προθύμως Legr., πρὸς ὑμᾶς Lef., πρὸς ἡμᾶς 
Leo // τρόφιμος Lef. 

145°... ¢. 2. roo luef., .s(.)eouroc,.the 
letter before € being a, «, A, 6, or x, Kor. ] 
é\x’ (written ede) Leeu., αὐτὸς E.C., 
ἕλε οὗτος Leo, τρέχε σὺ πρὸς Legr., Ad 
(written Aae) Wil. τὴν ταχίστην Left. 

146 ov..apay Lef., εὐκαιρον Kor.) 
suppl. Leo, confirmed by Kor. 

147 πολλάκις Let. // ..avr J.ef., 
...ade KGr.] rddas E.C., τάλαν Sud., 
τοιάδε (for τάδε) Kir., πάλαι Wil. 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


297 


149 . nde Lef., ede Kir.) εἰ δὲ Kor. 
77 καὶ νυνὶ Lef. // πλανῶ Kor., Leo, πά- 
λιν δια], δοκεῖ Crois., Crbn., θέλεις Herw. 

150 δίκην Herw., 
Croén., Kor. 

151 ..daxnoe.n Lef., ..5(A)ax(A)ne 
(Ae. KGr., νδαληθε. ἡ Ricci] ἂν (Leeu., 
Sud.) λάθῃ σε, μὴ (σε, μὴ Sud.) E.C., 
ἂν δάκῃ σε, μὴ KGr., ἂν δακῇς ἢ μὴ Sud., 
ἂν δ᾽ ἀληθὲς ἢ Rein., Schm. (reading 
δίκην. the apodosis being τίς ἔσομαι; 


τρόπον Crois., 


ν. 155) // καταλάβῃς 7’ ἔνδον αὐτὴν ἐνθάδε 
Leo, confirmed by K6r., καταλάβῃς 
Ὑ ἔνδον αὐτὴν γενομένην Sud., καταλά- 
βῃς 7 Leeu. 

152 αδ' εδιωκε.7 ἅ δ᾽ ἐδίωκες Leo, con- 
firmed by Kor., ἃ δεδίωκας Wil. // νῦν 
ἔχεις σὺ] Kor., νῦν ἔχῃς σὺ Schmn., ἣν 
AaBns σὺ Arn. // πάντα Leen, 
Sud., confirmed by Kor. 


Leo, 
153 wemwexe.... Lef., mwewex'’..7.. 
Kor.] πέπεικ᾽ αὐτὴν Kor., πεπείκω τὴν 
μὲν ΟΠ). 7 λόγους Leo, Sud., confirmed 
by Kor. 

154 ryven... carted Lef., τηνση. 5. 
grep Kir.] τὴν σὴν (σὴν Sud.) δὲ μητέρ᾽ 
Kor. // ὑποδέχεσθαι (or ἀπο-) Kor, δέ- 
χεσθαι Leo, Sud. 

155 απανθ᾽] corr, Cron., Kor, Leeu., 
Leo // Tweoom..... Bio] τίς ἔσομαι; τίς 
Bios: (βίος Lef.) Leo, τίς ἔσομαι; σύμβιος 
Rob. // §pa K.C., Wil., 6pas Rob., 6 re 
Leo // Mo. ris Bios μάλισθ᾽, ὅρα K.C., 
Rob. (ν. σύμβιος and ὁρᾷς), Mo. τίς ἔσομαι, 
τίς βίος: μάλισθ᾽ ὁρᾷς, KOr, No indication 
of change of speaker in the line is pre- 
served in MS., but paragraphus below, 

156 ἀρέσκει. N.C. ἀρέσκει Arn, Leo, 
ἀρέσκει. Rob., ἀρέσκει. Schim.//K«....€ 
RE PNEDOm Lt, oh 1 ἐπι P NEG. el Ne 
oxey’, ἐπίβλεφ᾽ οὗ δέει (OF οὗ σὲ bet) Εἰς 
σοι: φέρ᾽ ἐπιβλεφώμεθα Arn. σοί γ΄. ἐπί 
Bred, ὑπέφυγεν Leo, νῦν γ᾽ ἐπίβλεφ᾽, οὐ- 


τοσί Rob., σοί γ᾽ ἐπιβλεφθήσεται Schim., 


298 


gol γ᾽. Aa. ἐπιβλεφθήσεται Sud., σ᾽, εὖ 
δ᾽ ἐπίβλεφ᾽ οὗ δέῃ Wil. // Kir. gives the 
whole of ν. 156 to Davus (no indica- 
tion of change of speaker in the line is 
preserved in the MS., but paragraphus 


below). Rob. gives νῦν γ᾽... κράτιστον 
to Davus. 
157 μυλωθρεῖν Hous., Koér., con- 


firmed by MS.//ce....» Lef., euw..r 
Kor.] suppl. E.C., εἰς τὸ ληρεῖν φαίνεται 
Leo, εἰσελεύσομαί γε viv Rob. // Δα. εἰς 

..end of ν. 158 Kor.!, κράτιστον: MS. 

158 οὑτοσὶ Crén., Leeu., confirmed 
by Kor. //nox.. undev....Euv Lef., nu.. 
μηδεν...«ἕυν Kor.] ἡμῶν μὴ δέῃ τιν᾽ ἐν 
ξύλῳ Eos ἡμῖν" μηδὲν οὖν ὀξυντέος Leo, 
Moo. μηδὲν οὖν ὀκνητέον Kor. 

159 πραγμάτων ἐμῶν Eitr., Leer., 
Sud., confirmed by Kor. // (7) Kor. ] 
λαβεῖν EKitr., ποεῖν Legr., Sud. // Mo. 
βούλομαι... endof ν. 160 Kor.) Change 
of speaker indicated in MS, by pa- 
ragraphus below ν. 158 

160 καὶ διοικητήν, στρατηγόν (oT parn- 
γός Sud.) Kor. // Ade (A@ Sud.) Kor, // 
...-eTe Lef., ....ev NOr.] uy we viv mpo- 
δῷῴς K.C., ἐπίσκοπόν τ᾽ ἐμόν Rob., Aa. 
νῦν σ᾽ ἐναντίοι Schim., Moo. (continuing) 
τῶνδ᾽ ἐναντίον Sud.2// No indication of 
change of speaker in the line preserved 
in MS., but paragraphus below 

LGM ον πον Pais TOG aC Γν  ο τοπντς 
πο(ε)φρα. τ(γ)ουσιν Kor.] οὐ μάλ᾽ 1. .(ἷς οὐ- 
κέτ᾽ Schin., ἀποφράττουσιν F.C... ΟΠ. 
//a...xn. 6p Lef., ar. (μ)γεχεισδραμειν 
Kor.) ἀλλ᾽ ἔχεις δραμεῖν KoOr., εἴσω add. 
Schin,, at end ἔτι (or χρόνον) add. F.C, 

162 αλλαμαι. ...... εκαοιησεκλ. σ Τι οἷς 
addo.....:(:? )exdoenoexX. συ: avo. A(t) 
wo Kor.] suppl. £.C., ἄλλο μᾶλλον ἐκδι- 
δοίης. Moo. ἐκδίδωμι πάνθ᾽ ὅλως Sud, 
at end παν ὅμως (2) Kor, // Moo. a\X\a 
Sep Δα ἐᾶν, ἡ τάλαν}... τ 9} ἀπ τΞ 


plus below Vie 16] 


MENANDER 


[PERICEIROMENE 


1095, a toon τς υταλαντα Lef., ε.π 
(τ)α...σ΄. «υταλαντα: Kor. ] ἑπτὰ χρυσίου 
τάλαντα (τάλαντα 1,61.) E.C., Wil. //.. 
ᾳ.τ. λωλειησ Lef., παντοι(ω)λωλειησ(ρ). ε 
Ko6r., παντοπωλεινσ᾽ Ric.] παντοπωλεῖν 
σ᾽ Ric. (παντοπωλεῖ Arn., cf. v. 170), 
oto’ ἂν (οἴομαι Kir.) E.C.// E.C. gives 
163 b to Moschion, Kér. 163 b to end 
of 167 to Davus, so Sud. (to γραὺσ 
ν. 168). No indication of change of 
speaker preserved in MS. 

DUS Serra eager tie CLD raya ALCL, oP en OG, 
Adee... Κι. wpa φρονεῖν ἐστ᾽ 1..("., 
ἢ μνᾶς ἐκείνην δι, //.opaxacm Lef., 
ηγορακασημε Kir.] ἠγόρακα 1ἡ.(ἡςς ἠγόρα- 
kas KoOr., σῖτον πολύν (or συχνόν) 1 (ὑς 
ἡμῖν Ἰχῦτι, 7 μείονος Sud.// Δα. Μοσχίων 

φρονεῖ B.C. (no indication pre- 
served in MS. of change “of speaker 
after v. 168) 

165 νὴ τὴν ᾿Αθηνᾶν (or τὸν ΠΙΟοσειδῶ) 
Koér., vy rov AC ταν τὴν απ //...... we 
Kade AlCl annie μωικαθεσ Kir.) ἐν πο- 
λέμῳ καθέσταμεν K.C., ἐν σταθμῷ καθε- 
στάναι Sud. 

166 lett. 


Lef., ε(σ, ογι(υ)τ᾽ ἐμεταυτ᾽ε 13 lett. μαλλοναν 


πε βετ ον Ὁ αλλον ται 
Kor.] ir’ (ot 7’, οὐτ) ἐμὲ ταῦτ᾿ Kor, ga 
διοικεῖν. δεῖ δὲ H.C. ef. v. 160, ἔλεγχ᾽ , ἀρέ- 
σκον δ᾽ ἄλλο Sud., μᾶλλον ἄντικρυς (μᾶλ- 
λον ἂν KOr.) 1. (ὐςς μᾶλλον ἃν λέγοις Sud. 

ΤΟ Ἐκ τνς cf] V Vcr LEN ΠΣ λισευ 
ects  paO eka ἀρ ΕΟ ΜΕΝ Eo ae o(p)A(a)e 
gev Kor.] suppl. E.C., at end péddes εὖ 
Kor, 

168 γραυσ: Lef.,..ave: Kor.) ypav- 
at 1.C., Schin. // τοιαστρ. ἐσθαρεσκε.. ε 
ef. Kor. | 


τοῖα στρύζε. μιαρέ. Aa. σκεπτέον Ὕ εἰ 


τοιαστρυ(ι)ζεσθαρεσκε... ἐσ 


σπείσομαί F.C. (no indication of change 
of speaker after -ape preserved in MS.), 
τὸ γαστρίζεσθ᾽ Arn... Kir., Schim., ἀρέ- 
σκειν ἐς τρὶς ἐμὲ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν Arn., ἀρέσκει 


᾿ τ ay ΝΥ ae 
Schin., ἀρέσκει. δέσποτ᾽" εἶναι δ᾽ ἄξιος Sud, 


PERICEIROMENE | 


169 .. .εφαισειρηνητουτοισ: μα Lef., .. 
μ᾿εφοισειρηνητουτοισ: μα Kir.] pny’, ἐφ᾽ ols 
(τῇδ᾽ ἐφ᾽ ols Leo) Kér., οἶμ᾽ ἐφ᾽ ols Sud., 
εἴρηκα Arn., K6r., εἴρηκε Leo, τούτοις 
Lef. // Mo. μὰ Ala σὺ στρατηγὸς οὐκ E.C. 
ef. v. 160, μὰ Δία --- οὐκ Kor., μὰ Ala, 
Aa’, οὐκ ἐμπόρῳ Sud. // τούτοις: and pa- 
ragraphus below, MS. 

170 ἦσθας Kor.]//ruporddec Rob., 
τυροπώλει (= 7) Sud., τυροπωλεῖ Lef. // 
kart. λει Lef., καιτολοι KGr.] καὶ Lef., 
τὸ λοιπὸν (Or τὰ λοιπὰ) KOr., τελώνει 
Sud. // ἐν πέδαις E.C., προσφερής Sud. 

171 .avrapev.. Lef., 
Kor. ] suppl. Kor. // ¢. owevx . ὡσδ Lef., 
φ.σινευχθω. ὃ Kor.] φῃς ἵν᾿ E.C., φησιν 
Lef., φασίν, Arn., εὖ δρῶ σ᾽; E.C., εὔχθω 
Arn., ἀλλὰ, xté. E.C., φησίν " εὔχθω τάδε 


ταυταμεντοι 


γενέσθαι σύμφορα Leo οἷ. 5. 407, φασίν, 
εὔχθω διά σ᾽ ἐκείνη δηλάδη Sud. 

172 ..eavova..a: Lef., ἰκίαναπε:. 
K6r.] suppl. Kor., οἰκίαν ἀπέλιπε Sud. 
//Tpopme:.. ea Lef., τροφιμε: δειμ Kor.) 
τρόφιμε Lef., δεῖ μάλιστα μ᾽ ἐπιτρέπειν 
E.C., μὰ τὸν ᾿ἀπόλλω τῇδε γ᾽ οὐκ Leo, 
δειματουμένην πρέπει Sud. 

173 .€....m.payvd 9 lett. » Lef., 
Ἔστιν τς παραμυθει KGr.] σοί γε E.C., ἐμέ 
γε Sud., παραμυθεῖσθ᾽ Ἐ.Ο., Sud., ἐκεί- 
vous h.C., ἐκείνην διιά,, εἰ δὲ μή, τότ᾽ ἐπι- 
έναι E.C., ὅσα πέπονθεν οὖσ᾽ ἔτι Sud. 

174 wrepopopa] corr. Herw., Leo, 
Sud., χιλιάρχῳ; E.C. 

176 Lef. 

178 φράσαι Lef.//Kouyds ef. Aa. 
πορεύσομαι Wil. (so Leeu. with πορεύο- 
μαι), confirmed by Ko6r., ef: MS. 

179 προσμενῶ Let. // πρόσθε τῶν θυ- 
ρῶν Arn., Leeu., Legr., confirmed by 
Kor. // ἐγώ Arn., confirmed by Kar. 

180 rpoond...¢..€pac Lef., mpoond 
0. ve..epac Kobr.] προσῆλθον Lef., ἑσπέ- 
pas Head., Hense, Herw., Kor., Leo 

1.81. ἐπ τὴν e Lef., €...p(r)ace Kor. } 


CRITICAL APPENDIX . 


299 


ἐπέσπασε Leo, ἐπείρασε Kor., ἐβάστασε 
Wil. 

182 ἀηδής Arn., Cron., Head., Leeu., 
Legr., Leo, confirmed by Kdér. // ἔοικεν 
Lef. // evr Lef., evr...» Kor.] ἐντυχεῖν 
Arn., Head., Leeu. 

183 σαι Lef., eraip.ic...... r.o° 
K6r.] ἑταίραις Hense, Leeu., confirmed by 
Kor., ἑταίρᾳ Sud., προσφιλής Leeu., Sud. 


Kor., ἀρέσκει Sud., ἀνήκει or dpape Wil., 
dpa με δεῖ Leeu., προσκυνεῖν Head., 
Leeu., Sud., Wil., ἄρ᾽ ἐξιλαστέον Sud.2 

187 εστ᾽] corr. Crén., Head., Kér., 
Legr. 

188 μ..κκ.πολου Lef., por.e:Kacro 
(a)do(a)e(v)me(e)y Kor.] μοι Lef., σε 
Leeu., Legr., Leo, καὶ πάλαι Kor., μέ- 
vou’ ἐμέ. E.C., μένουσιν " οὐκ Kir., μένων 
ἐγώ Wil., καὶ ποθούμεθ᾽- ἢ yap οὐκ (οὐκ 
from next v.) Leo, κἀπολοίμην αὐτίκ᾽, εἰ 
Sud. Rob. also transfers οὐκ to end of 
this v. // Mo. καὶ... ἐλθών Leo, Rob., 
K.C., oe: MS.; no paragraphus is re- 
corded below ν. 188 

189 ουκειμ᾽ αηδησΊ] οὐκ del., εἴμ᾽ ἀηδής; 
E.C., οὐκ] εἰμ᾽ ἀηδής" Leo, Rob., οὐκ ἀη- 
djs εἰμ᾽ Cron., Herw., Sud., οὐκ ἄρ᾽ elu’ av- 
ταῖς andns. Leeu.//..mawav..i...v. 
Lef., 


Kor.] εἶπας αὐταῖς Leo, καὶ Leo, ἄρα 


vray .UTawav.aig....ap.vTap’ 
Sud., οὖν Kér., mat Leeu., παρόντα μ᾽ 
Leeu., δια. ,,), ἐνθάδε] ἐνθάδ᾽; Aa. οὐκ. (οὐκ 
from beg. of v.) Sud., Wil. 

190 .. ἐδενυντοι. ὑυτολεΎ eX. ων: Kor. ] 
dye δὲ KGr., νῦν Lef., τουτὶ Kor. (cor- 
recting τοιοῦτο of MS.), τοῦτο νῦν Wil., 
λέγ᾽ Sud., λέγ᾽ ἐλθών Leeu., confirmed 
by Kor. // Kir., Rob. continue to Mos- 
chion. Lef. records paragraphus below 
ν. 189 //..opacavactpep Lef., ὡσορασ 
αναστρεῴφω Kir.] Aa. ὡς ὁρᾷς (ὁρᾷς Lef.), 
ἀναστρέφω Wor. 


300 


191) ημενάνσι, εὐ wees ed Lef., εἰμεναι 
δυττει, setts mew ΚΟΥ} suppl. E.C.//... 
..wuev Let., x... γίωμεν Nir.] βασανιῶ 
μὲν πα (duev KOr.// Moo. ef wev... 
Kor, (no indication preserved in MS. 
of change of speaker after v. 190) 

92 τδιονον 5, μαάρτ νῦν Lef., rapa 
καὰλ (second Astricken out) w...0.. “ap 
τυν Kor.] παρακαλῶ Kor., Δᾶόν τε E.C., 
"ἔρωτα Kor., μάρτυν Kor. // ὼ. lack- 
ing at end, σφόδρα 12.(Ὁ. 

195 οικειωσ] corr. Sud. 

197 προσέρχει Lef., confirmed by 
Kor. 

199 μηκετι, θεν written above ers, 
Kor] μηθὲν ἔτ Kr. // ong...... κηκοεν 
heise ϑησον ΝΣ κηκοεν Kor.] φησί(ν) Crois., 
Leeu., Leo, Sud., πῶς E.C., πῶς δ᾽ Sud., 
ws Kor., 76° Leo, οὐκ Herw., Rob., ἀκής- 
κοεν: 1h.C., Sud., ἀκήκοεν Lef. 

200 ἡκαισὺ)ν cai del. Crén., FIL, 
Head... Kor., Leo, Rob., Sud., σὺ del. 
Let., 7 del. Leeu., 7 08 ot Sud., Wil., ἢ 
Lef., 7 Cron., Kor., Leo, Rob. // αὐτὸν 
Lef.// Wor, continues to Davus (ἀκή- 
koev: MS., but no paragraphus) 

201 καταπέφευγ᾽ (-ya Lef.) Sud. // 
PANT Pease ] αὐτὴ Hous., Sud., αὐτὴ 
Kor, mpds nuds Hous., Sud. //.... ye] 
φεῦγε I1.C., πάνυ (or μάλα) γε Hous., 
φημί γε Kor., εὖγε Sud. ,,) μηωρασ] μὴ 
wpas Head., Sud., Wil., μὴ εἰς ὥρας 
Leeu. 

202 ..0°| φησ᾽ Head., Sud. ,, ἱκοιο] 
ἡ ἀλη 10 lett. Ba.. ve Lef., adN 10 lett. 
wja.. ζε Wor] ἀλλ᾽ (Kir) és φθόρον σὺ νῦν 
ΕΟ aN ὡς τάχιστα νῦν Kor. ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ- 
φθάρηθι καὶ Sud., Mo. ἀληθές Head., 
No in- 
dication of change of speaker is pre- 
served in MS, 

203 ἐκποδών Rob., 


ΕΣ gears at ee a oe χ. Kor] 


Sud, βάδιζε Let.. ἐκβάδιζε Sud. 


confirmed by 


dxove On voy 11... ὧν ἔθιγες ἄρτι Stul., 


MENANDER 


[PERICEIROMENE 


ἀληθές; ἤδη 1,00 ,).. π΄... ρπαστ᾽εκμ.αὺ 
Lef., ναντ᾽α. ἡρπαστ᾽ ἐκμεσου Kir. | πάντ᾽ 
Leo, ἀνήρπαστ᾽ ἐκ μέσου Kir. //E.C., 
Sud. continue after ἐκποδών to Davus, 
Ko6r., Leo give to Moschion, No indi- 
sation of Change of speaker preserved 
in MS. 

VALUE Tam apa dp.....¥ Let., ...g. dpo(a) 
.o.v KOr.] ὡς ἐφεδρεύειν E.C., os ἔφε- 
δρον οὖν Sud., οὐκ ἔμ᾽ ap’ οὐθὲν Leo, ἢ 
σφόδρ᾽ (σφόδρα or σφοδροὺς Kir.) ἐκ τοῦ 
νῦν Rob. // παροντοσηδε... Let., mapov 
tag nde... Kir.] παρόντα σ᾽ Kir., παρόν- 
τος Rob., ἤἥδεσαν K.C., ἠδίκει Leo, ἡδέως 
Rob, // Aa. (continuing) ὡς... 
Mo. μαστιγία, H.C., Δα. (continuing) 


. ἤἥδεσαν. 
ws... ἠδίκει. Mo. μαστίγία Sud. Leo, 
Rob., Schm. continue to Moschion. 
No indication of change of speaker is 
preserved in MS. 

PASO tree σαι] ἄρα γελάσαι 1Ι.("., σέ 
Ὑ ἐπιπαῖσαί Rob., τοῦτο φῆσαί Leo, οὐ 
πέπεισαι KOr., ἀπολόγησαι Sud. // μοι.-- 
K.C., wor: Leo// γέλοιον αὶ K.C., γέλοιον: 
Kor. // Mo. (continuing) -cal μοι (μαστι- 
WEA se Novas MACs VE NOLOM a nee TT py INU 
μοι: MS., Mo. (continuing) τοῦτο φῆσαι 
...yédowv. Aa. 7... untnp Leo 

206 vse oon KovaavauT....gi(oe Very 
uncertain Nor. )rpayu | εἰσάγειν ἄκουσαν 
αὐτὴν (ἄκουσαν αὐτήν Leo) καὶ τὸ πρᾶγμ’ 
(πρᾶγμ᾽ Lef.) E.C., τόδε rojo’ ἄκουσαν 
αὐτήν φησι πρᾶγμ᾽ Leo, οὐ ποεῖν (or εἴ τι 
δρᾶν) ἄκουσαν αὐτήν. φησι. πρᾶγμ᾽ Sud... 
ἄλλο τι διοικοῦσαν αὐτήν φησι πραγμ᾽ 
Wil., ἑκοῦσαν Kor. 

ZO a re ΟΡ ως 


εἶπας ὡς Kor., σὺ δὲ 760, ws Leo, τί σὺ 


Lean σ᾽ Kor.] 


λέγεις - (OF πῶς, ὃ φής.) Sud. σύς μιάρ᾽, ὡς 
Wil. // ἐλθεῖν Leo, confirmed by hor, 
“7 ἐγὼ δ᾽] ἔγωγ Kor. // κῦτος Lea, Rob, 
continue to Moschion, Aa. τί σὺ λέγεις: 
Mo. πέπεικας. κτέ. Sul. (no indication of 


change of speaker preserved in MS.) 


PERICEIROMENE | 


> LU ae kK] ws πέπεικ Kor., ὅτι 
πέπεικ᾽ Sud., σοῦ τόθ᾽ (σοῦ μὲν Leo) ἕνεκ᾽ 
Leeu. //ex...v Lef., exec. ἣν Kor. ] ἐκεί- 
ynv Sud. confirmed by Kér. //"y@ μὲν 
οὐ Head., Leo, confirmed by Kor. 

ZOO τως vd0..0@..... Lef., 
...U00....0@. ἐμὸν Kor. } μηδαμοῦ δόκει 
λάθρᾳ μου BOs πολλαχοῦ δοκεῖς σοφῶς 
μου Leo, so w. δοκῶν σαφῶς Sud., πολὺ 
κατὰ ψεῦδος σοφὸς σύ Rob., πρὶν ἐδόκεις 
μὲν πολλάκις ἐμοῦ Sud. Λκαταψευδοσ Lef., 
κατα(ε)ψευδο(ε)σ Kir.] καταψεύδεσθ᾽ Leo, 
Sud., κατὰ ψεῦδος Let. // ἐμοί E.C., ἄγαν 
Leo, λέγειν (With κατὰ ψεῦδος) Rob., Δα. 
ἐγώ: Sud. No indication of change of 
speaker preserved in MS. 

210 Ca. 17 lett. ¢ Lef.] ὅς ye (οὐ σὺ 
Kir.) καὶ τὴν μητέρ᾽ αὐτὸς (οὐ μὲν οὖν τὴν 
μητέρ᾽ αὐτὸς Sud.) Leo, viv ye μὴν τὴν 
μητέρ᾽ αὐτὸς Sud., πῶς με νῦν δή σοι νομί- 
ges Rob. γχσυπει, τὰς wat Let., συμπε 
mw.... vac Kor.) συμπεπεικέναι Leeu., Sud., 
συμπεποιθέναι Rob. 

211 In r. marg. AA] 

213 Inr. marg. MO Kor.] 

214 Over elev ΜΟΣΧΊ // ποῖ] παῖ 
(continuing to Mosehion) Sud. (βάδιζε: 
Ms.) //Inr. marg. AA] 

215 μ.. (.)μιαρονεισει: Lef., 
a... uaxpav Ric.] udy(Leeu.), μιάρ᾽, ὀνή- 


Kor., 


ge K.C., μέγα, μιάρ᾽. ὀνήσει Sud., ἄγε 
Rob., μάλα Leo, both with μιαρὸν εἴσει 
Let., μὴ μακράν, εἴσει Kor., μένε, μιαρὸν 
εἴσει Sud. 

216 w..p.ce.peyvoyv Lef., w.ap. cee 
μεγνον Kor, uw. κρανετιμεγνον Ric.] μιαρός 
elu’, €yvwy Ell., Hous., Leeu., Leo, 
Sud., μιαρός, ef μὴ γνων Wil. // Aa. μὰ 
tov Ἀσκληπιόν. xTé., 12}1.. Head., Leen., 
πρός με: MNS. Kor, 

217 ov...p...av Lef., ov...wy.av 
KGr.] οὐκ ἔγωγ, ἐὰν (ἐὰν Arn, Leo) 
KGr., οὐδαμῶς, ἐὰν Arnh., ot, τὰ πάντα 


γ᾽ ἂν Head., οὐκ ἔγωγ᾽, ἐάν γ᾽ Sud. 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


301 


31.810 Rey: 2: Ὅν ΒΑΙῸΝ Pre sy, O00 
Kor.] διατελεῖν σ᾽ E.C., μοι φράσαι σ᾽ 
Leo, μηχανᾶσθ᾽ Rob., μέγα φρονεῖν σ᾽ 
or μεταλαβεῖν Sud., βαστάσαι σ᾽ Kir. // 
εξ. πιαρομὴσ Lef.] ἐξ ἐπιδρομῆς Head., 
Leo, confirmed by Kor. 

219 bre pe 7 πρότερον Sud., πρότε- 
ρον ἢ Head., πρὶν τάδ᾽ Wil. // covy.] σοῦ 
γε Lef., σοῦ re Leo 

220 13 lett. εἰσ Lef., 10 lett. ἡτρισ 
KoGr.] οὐ γάρ ws αὐλητρὶς Sud. 

221 11 lett. dare Lef., ισ Kir.) ἦλθε. 
Mo. νῦν δοκεῖς Leo, Mo. ἀπίθανον δοκεῖς 
(δοκεῖς Leo, Sud.) Schim., δέξεται. (Sud.) 
Mo. θέλεις Kir., σοῦ γ᾽ ἐρᾷ. Mo. δοκεῖς 
Rob. No indication of change of speak- 
er at end of v. 220 or at beg. of v. 221 
is preserved in MS.//re πάλιν. Leo, 
τί πάλιν; Lef., Kor., re πάλιν; Leeu., 
Rob., Sud. // 60 Lef., doxe(v) Kir.] δο- 
κίμασον Leo, ἀσμένως Rob. // πάλιν: MS. 

ΘΟ ἘΣ kOl screen ν Lef., —w Kor.] 
noe σοι πάρεστιν (or γάρ ἐστινὴ E.C., 
ὧδ᾽ ὁποῖόν ἐστιν Leo, πᾶν ἕτοιμόν ἐστιν 
Sud, οἶσθ᾽ ὁποῖόν ἐστιν Wil. 

228 ....vap.... Lef., ovpdvap..... 
Kir.] οὐ φλυάρῳ Leo, οὐ φλυαρῶ Kir., 
Rob., τόν τ᾽ Kor., πρός γ᾽ Rob. ,,),“ἔεἰ σὺ 
Lef., εἶ σὺ Sud, 

224 ....pacbe... ree Lef., 
B(A)o(a). Nec KGr.] ἡμέρας (Leo) σ᾽ ἔδει 


.. pag 


In.C., ἡμέρας βούλει or βάλλει Wr, βού- 
λει, 1.e. καταλείπειν τὴν οἰκίαν Leo, στε- 
λεῖ Sud. (formerly), ἡμέρας ᾿ βραχεῖα, 
(now), σκελεῖ Schim., μενεῖς Leeu, 

δ τὴ ταῦτ᾿ 1. torr leks πάντ᾽ 
Byington // wape...ec Let., yape...e 
Kor.) yap Kor., ὅχα bef H.C. oe bee Lew, 
ἐμὲ δεῖ Nir., ἔτ᾽ ἔδει or ἐθέλει Sud, 
ποῦ] ποῖ Ιχῦν.,, πεδησασ] σε δήσας Sehin. 
πεδήσας Lef.//xara Let., κατα. (π᾿ Wor.) 
καταλίπω Leo, καταλιπών Wor, 

226). με Hic. ae. Ἰ ϑ ἢ Nae Sud., 


confirmed by her. / 


/ WEPLTATELY. . ELT ME 


902 


Kor.] περιπατεῖν Lef., ποεῖς we Leeu., 
Leo, Sud. 

227 ov... deo Lef., ovx(v). . ηθεσ 
K6r.] οὐκ ἀληθὲς Leeu., Sud., confirmed 
Dy. KOT (ns iO Nerac teens ao: bet: sears: 
δε(ογλελα.. kag KGr.] πρός με λελάληκας 
KGr., ἀληθὲς --- Δα. πῶς δέ; Mo. λελάλη- 
κας Sud. A change of speaker in or 
at end of ν. is indicated in MS. by pa- 
ragraphus below 

2285. ΤΥ OPUltisisssairs Nov Lef., .. 60 
iWedeatonede Aw(ov) Kor.] μ᾽ ἀθορύβως 
Sud., ue θορυβῶν Leeu., Legr., μεταβαλοῦ 
Wil., παρακαλῶ Kor., ἀναβαλοῦ Sud.// 
Lef. assumed the change of speaker 
at the beginning of the v., mdduw- 
MS. 

229 wap. dOe:] πάρελθε Leeu., Legr., 
Wet) ευῦτε; pace. Lef., 
Kor.] σῖτ᾽ ἀγοράσει: E.C., τοῦτο δράσω" 
(without change of speaker) Rob., Πυ- 
θαγόρας ef. Sud., σὺ δ᾽ ἐνεχυράσει: Schm. 

230 εχοντα 1,6Γ., ἐχειντο Kir.] ἔχοντα 
Lets, ἔχειν τὸς ΚΟΥ fps a..kal.o 
(παισκαι ") Kor.] πλῆρες ὄν τε τοῦτ᾽; ἐμοὶ 
δ᾽ E.C., πάραγ᾽" ἐγὼ (or πάραγε δή") τὴν 
μητέρα Sud. ,,7, δ᾽ transferred from next 
v.. by Leen. 

231 δ᾽ εἰσιὼν] //x...7e Lef., xd(a) 
ἀπ Tt KOr.] «MOnre ΒΞ Οἷς καλῶ (or κάξ 
Nec) τ Sud., κα μοῦ re Wil., ΚαΛΟΡ re 
Schm., καλῶς te Leeu., Leo (space in- 
sufficient, Κῶν.) // ovvd. ορθωσ Lef., οὖν 
διορθωσ.. σ KOr.] συνδιορθώσεις Sud., οὖν 
διορθώσεις KOr., διορθωσ- Leo, διόρθωσον 
Leeu. 27, ταχύ Leeu., Leo, μέγα Sud., 
παρών Wil. 

232 καιν Lef., καινυ Kor.) καὶ νῦν 
τρέμων Leeu., καὶ νῦν δέει (δέει Sud.) 
Schin., καινῷ δέει Sud. (formerly), καὶ 
νῦν ἔτι Sud. (later), καὶ νῦν λαλῶν Leo 
//'The changes of speaker are 
cated in MS. by paragraphus below 


indi- 


Vie2o 1 ΠΥ σε: 


MENANDER 


[PERICEIROMENE 


233 evxpe Lef., evxpe(o)un Kor. ] εὐ- 
κρεμῆ Rob., Schmm., Sud., εὐτρεπῇ Leeu., 
εὐχερῇ Sud. (formerly), εὐκρινῆ Wil. 

234 ff. ‘The speaker of vv. 234-240 
was recognized as Sosias by Arn., Leew., 
Legr., Rob. Sud. gives the passage to 
asecond servant of Polemon. A change 
of speaker at end of ν. 233 is indicated 
in MS. by the paragraphus 

235 iva] 

236 ακαρησ] ἀκαροῦς Leeu. 

239 κακοδαιμον᾽ ovrwd...ouvyer Lef., 
κακοδαιμον᾿ our woe(t,n)..oTny Kir.) κακο- 
δαίμον᾽ οὕτω. (so Head. w. οὕτω, Leeu. 
W. οὕτω :) δῆλος ἦν H.C. δεσπότην Head., 
διέφυγ᾽, Leeu. // ἐνύπνιον Crois. 

240 od wrnor....¢ Lef.] οἶδ᾽ Lef., 
ἐκ τῆς προτέρας Leeu., ὦ τῆς προτέρας 
Crois., ὦ τῆς πίκρας Cron., Head., Sud., 
all continuing to Sosias, Rob. gives ὦ 

. παραφανείς ν. 245 to Habrotonon, 
K6r. to **Donax”’ (see on v. 252), Wil. 
to Doris (no indication of change of 
speaker within the line preserved in 
MS.) 

241 Aa. ὁ ξένος... 
(no indication of change of speaker at 
end of ν. 240 preserved in MS.) // παν- 
τελῶς Left. 

242 ravro Lef., ra(o)uto. . KOr.] rov- 


παραφανείς Leeu. 


τονί Head., Leo 

243 καὶ τὸ] τὸ δὲ as quoted (to δεσπό- 
τὴν} in schol. Aristoph. Plat. 85 

244 . ν] ἂν Herw., Προ πάλιν Head, 
Herw., Leeu., Leo, wore Sud. 

245 ray Lef., (αν Kor. | οἵαν Head, 
Leo, confirmed by Kor. //yapag Lef., 
παραφ Kor.| παραφανείς Leeu., Leo, 
confirmed by Kor. 

246 ff. Given to Polemon (to μεγάλα 
v 2on) bay ecw iver) fossosiase hy, 
Leeu.2, Rob... Sehim., Sud. 
of speaker at end of v. 245 is indi- 


GH As 


A) change 


cated in MS, by paragraphus. 


PERICEIROMENE | 


marg. a flourish (coronis) marking end 
of scene K6r., .€ Lef. = SQ Sud. 

247 .... κατ᾽ Lef.,... κατ᾽ Kor.] ἀφή- 
κατ᾽ Herw., Leeu. 77 εἰ φτησθν..σ Lef., 
εξωτησθυρ. σ Kor.) ἔξω τῆς θύρας Herw., 
Leeu., Sud., confirmed by Koér.//...ae 
Lef., ..c(vy,m)ao...¢ KGr.] τὴν ἀθλίαν 
Leeu., τὸν ἄθλιον Sud. 

ΒΥ τι scsi ess TLOMAPV.: opliecol σθοις τς ya 
Lef., ... ρικι τ τι) δσεέῤγ fou..07..... γα 
KOr.] 4 περικερεῖς ὀργιζόμενος ἄλλην κόραν i 
E.C., ἐργαζόμενος KGr., ἐπιρίκνος ὀργιζό- 
μενος αὐτὸς γίνεται Schin., ὁ μὲν ἀρτίως 
ἀφικόμενος θαλφθήσεται Sud., 
ῥαβδιζόμενος ταχὺ κλαύσεται Rob. // Vv. 
248. μεγάλα Vv. 251 given to Sosias by 
E.C., others continue to the preceding 
speaker. No indication of change of 
speaker is preserved in MS. 

249 ayed’] ᾧχεθ᾽ E.C., οἴχεθ᾽ Left. 

250 φράσασ᾽ ἡμῖν μακρὰ Leo, con- 
firmed by Kor. 


ἀναίτιος 


251 μάντιν ὁ στρατιώτης Leo, con- 
firmed by K6r.// At end Χ (not κ) 
KGr.] λαμβάνει E.C., dpa τρέφει Sud., 
λήψεται Schm., Wil., ἔλαθ᾽ ἔχων Sud. 
// Leeu., Sud. give pavrw. . 
Davus, K6r. to ‘* Donax,”? Rob. to Ha- 


ALT UO) 


brotonon. 
Ms. 

252 τούτον Rob., τοῦτον: Leeu. // 
In r. marg. ΠῸ ΚΟΥ. not reported by 
Lef., AE Zucker, only traces of letters 
.. Rie.) // Leeu.!, Kér.! give κόψω τὴν 
θύραν to Polemon, Leeu.?, Rob., Sud. to 
τι: and 


μεγάλα: and paragraphus 


Sosias, Kér. now to * Donax.”’ 


paragraphus MS. 

253 ff. Leeu.2, Sud. give the parts 
to Davus and Sosias, Leeu.? (also Wn. 
NAVI, pe 120)\.and Wore tobawus 
and Polemon, Kér. now to **Donax”’ 
and Sosias. 

253 ..pe Lef., γαρὲ. τσ Wir.] yap 
ἔχεις; Sud., contirmed by Kor. // 


ΩΣ 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 5303 


τί γὰρ ἔχεις Sud. (no indication in MS. 
of change of speaker after βούλει) 

254 m.....¥ Lef., τὸν ΟΝ {Ὁ ?)ov(pr, 
pn). wp Kor. ] τίς με λοιδορεῖ; E.C., τί στό- 
λον αἴρετε Leo // A change of speaker 
at end of v. 253 indicated by paragra- 
phus ; double-point after ἔχεις not pre- 
served. Leeu. gives both vv. to Davus 

255 mpoye........ ν Lef., προσθε.. 
...€ueB(p)..¢ Kor.| πρὸς θεῶν Leeu., 
Sud., ἐλευθέραν Wil., φέρετε (or φέρεις) 
βίαν: E.C., πρότερον ὄντες ἔμφρονες Rob., 
πρὸς θεῶν. ἢ ἐλλεβοριᾷς: Leo, πρὸς θεῶν 
καὶ δαιμόνων Leeu. // ἀπονενόησθε; E.C., 
πρὸς θεῶν" Wil., Σω. (continuing) ἀπονε- 
νόησθε. .. κατακλείσαντες KC. (ἃ change 
of speaker in or at end of vy, 254 indi- 
cated in MS, by paragraphus), Zw. ἀπο- 
vevonade ... κατακλείσαντες KOr., Sud. 
gives 254a to Sosias, 254b to Davus 

296 γὲ ne By. 
k(8)up... Kor.] πρὸς βίαν (Kor.) τοῦ κυ- 


at Letk.;. προσβ. ΨῊΣς 
ρίου Leo // Σω. ἔχειν. .. κατακλείσαντες 
Sud. (no indication of change of speaker 
preserved in MS.), others continue to 
preceding speaker 

257 τολμᾶτε κατακλείσαντες Leo, con- 
ΠΟ DY ΟΝ Ὁ τσ πὶ ΓΕΡῚ 
Koér.] ὡς τηρούμεθα E.C., ὡς τί (Kor) 


ωστι 


τεχνώμενοι Leo, ὡς τι παιδίον Leeu., ὡς 
τί δὴ τάδε: Wil., ὡς τί, δύστυχες Sud. // 
Δα. ws τί to end of v. 258 Kor., κατα- 
κλείσαντες: and paragraphus MS, 

258 oor... Lef., 


KGr.] ὅστις ef σύ Leo, contirmed by hor, 


οστ΄. σ΄.ισυποί(ε) 


περιφανῶς Leo, σὺ πώποτε: Sud. 

259 εκεινὴ Lef., Nor., ἐχεινὴ Ric.] 
ἔχειν ἡμᾶς χολήν Wil., ἡμᾶς ὁρᾶν Tao, 
ἡμᾶς ἰδεῖν Sud., κόνις ἡμῖν μέλειν Leen, 
//Change of speaker indicated in MS, 
by paragraphus below v. 258 

260 roluf., To.. 
BONOUS Plan pace Glars 


Kor. Χ, εἶναι: and paragraphus Ms, 


. Bole) Wor. 1 τετρω- 


τόσον (Or τοίνυν) βόα 


90. 


261 οτανδε] ὅταν δ᾽ ὁ E.C., ὅταν δὲ 
Lef. // τοιοῦ ΠΝ Ὁ Lef., rowov....da 
KOr.] τοιούτους λαμβάνῃ Schin., τοιούτους 
παραλάβῃ Sud. 

262 ἢ 10.(΄ὃς. 7 Lef. // μαχούμεθ᾽ ὑμῖν 
Kor., μοιχὸς “μεθ᾽. ὑμῶν Lef. //.7...€ 
Lef., ηδ...ε..π χοῦν. Σωσ. ἀνοσίου E.C., 
(vo indication preserved in MS. οἵ 
change of speaker after ὑμῖν but pa- 
ragraphus below) //In r. marg. a cross 
by a later hand, Kor. 

263 πραγματασ. σ᾽ ελεου 9 lett. τεδυ. 
me Let., mpayuara(t,o)o. σελεου.. νοστο. 
Ted nreg Kor.| suppl. E.C., πράγματά 
ye σ᾽ ἐλέου τ᾽ ἄξια κακά τε διέπειν Rob. 
77 Δα. ἐς ὄλεθρον... 
Schm. gives vv. 263 ff. to Sosias 

264 8 lett. ελθ᾽ Lef., o.. ντος.. ἐλθ᾽ 
Kor. ] és ὄλεθρον ἔλθ᾽ E.C., ἄπελθ᾽ Rob. 
POV nes lest αριων: Lef., av....m(c)a(e) 


αὐτήν ν. 205 E.LC., 


ον αριων" Kor.| ἀνδρῶν γελοίων E.C., 
ἄνθρωπε παριών Rob., Sud., παιδαρίων 
Kor., wedAtaptwy Leeu. // olkéra ΟΣ 
οἰκέται Sud, 


265 


Meehan eran τ VOD aa Nae ολογειτ᾽ EXEL: 


᾿ 
os eee €....+-AP....... TOUT EXELY 


Kor. | οὐ λήψετ᾽ αὐτήν. apa γ᾽ E.C., ὁμο- 
λογεῖτ᾽ ἔχειν Kor, // Δα. (continuing) οὐ 
. αὐτήν. Sw. apd... ἔχειν: EC. (no 
indication preserved in MS. of change 
of speaker within the line) 
266 οὐκ I) lett. ev. 


οὐχίκ)ε lett. τ(γ)εν. οςς ἡγμαιτινασ Kor] 


πος απο να σ᾽ Lef., 
οὐκ ἴσθ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἐπύησ᾽. εὖ γεμέμνημαί τινας 
ον = niyMacemivas: ΝΟ ΔῸΣ (Otis 
ὑμῶν Nor., @yew:. twas (22 Kor), and 
paragraphus below v. 265, Ms, 
ZO τς wees. aowmletes 


ἐν μασ Wor.) ὑμῶν; πόθεν “ἡμᾶς: (ὑμῶν 


ὕμων... 


Lef., ἡμᾶς Kor.) EC. // Kor, introduces 
change of speaker after μων (ὑμῶν: ἢ 
and no paragraphus reported below the 
line tn MS.) 

268 


ries cf OX ONE ae ὙΠ Gn in tay U(7))poo 


MENANDER 


[PERICEIROM ENE 


KGr.] παραληρεῖς .C., τίς ὁ λῆρος ; Leo, 
map ἀκαρὲς Sud. 

269 Let. 

270 πονη..ν Lef., movnpov Kor. | 
πονηρόν Leeu., Leo, confirmed by Kor. 
// μοιχόν: and paragraphus MS, 

271 ¢€....veo Lef., ex.iweo Kor. ] 
εἰ Opnvets 11.C., εἰ κρίνεις Leo, ἔτι δάκνεις 
Rob., ἐπιμένεις Hous., εἰ χαίνεις Sud. 

272 ταπελτραυ... Lef., ταπελτί(ε) 
X-ug.. 
τὰ πέλτ᾽ (IIcad.) ἔχουσιν (written ἔχου- 


Kor.] τὰ πέλτ᾽ ἔχοντες Head, 


ow) Kor., πελτάρι᾽ ἔχοντες Leo, τὰ πελ- 
τάρια δὴ 1,66ῖ.,.,,7γ ΟΠ σα. of speaker 
indicated in MS. by paragraphus below 
WZ 1 

273 xa. Lef., cay Kor.] κὰν Arn., 
Croén., Legr., confirmed by Kor, // te- 
τρωβόλους Arn., Cron., Head. 

274 καλ.ισ: Lef., καλεισ: Kor.] κα- 
λῇς Arn., Crén., Legr. // σκατοφαγοσσει: 
πολιν Kor. (πάλιν Let.)] ef σκατοφάγος. 
οἱ πόλιν (πόλιν KGr.) E.C., ὡς σκατοφά- 
γος εἶ Head., Leo, σκατοφάγος τις εἶ 
Leeu. // Change of speaker indicated 
in MS. by ef: and paragraphus 

275 ..xoun..oue....0¢ Lef., wy’ou 
Kadtwone...goe lor.) οὐ καλῶς περιττοί 
(or μεγαρτοί) 1 Ὡς (οὐ ἃ seribal correc- 
tion of wy = οὐχ). Ὥχου καιομένην σου 
Sud., οἰκοῦντος ὠχροῦ, καθά με δεῖ, σοῦ 
Schin, 

276 σαρκαλλ᾽] odpx’, ΑΛ Let., oa- 
puocav Wil. //..(.)o Kor.| réws Leeuw, 
ase Woe. ΔΚ / Na, aNNe ty “enell of 
Vv. 277 Leen, Change of speaker after 
odpx not indicated in MS., but) pa- 
ragraphus below 

277 corxacx..... mrt. .e.wowag Lef., 
εοικωσαι(ν)... ᾿φ(μ)αυτ. σιωσιασ Wor, | 
ἔοικεν ἀνδροφαγεῖν ὁ h.C'., Σωσίας Sud., 
ἔοικ᾽ ὦσαι πτάκας αὐτοὺς Σωσίας Schin., 
ἔοικ᾽ ὁπλίσαι ποτ᾽ (Or waat ποσὶν) αὐτοὺς 


Nwolas Sud. // Arh. gives to Doris (no 


PERICEIROMENE | 


indication in MS. of change of speaker 
at end of v. 276) 

278 ff. Kor. recognized the speaker 
as Polemon and interpreted the pas- 
sage as an imaginary conversation. 
Arn. and Leeu. assign parts to Sosias 
and Doris (so also KGr. in ed.), Rob. 
to Habrotonon and Sosias, Sud. to Pa- 
taecus and Doris 

278 
Lef., .£.weverrpo.. «(.)σοιδωρισ. ιεκτισοι 
Kor.] σὲ (i.e. σοὶ corrected to σὲ) μένει 
Rob., προερῶ σοι E.C., προλέγω σοι ATN., 


«Εἰ MEVELT PO... . σοιδωρωνκτισοι 


Awpl Leo, μέγ᾽ ἐκτεῖσαι F.C., σὺ μὲν εἰ 
πρόσει μοι, Δωρί, μέγα τί σοι (formerly 
Δωρί, κεκτήσει) Sud., μένει, προλέγω σοι, 
Δωρί, μέγα τί σοι Schm. // κακόν. E.C., 
Schm., κακὸν δώσω Kor., Sud. 

279 ...cw Lef., ..o(or.w)ow Kor. ] 
φήσω E.C., πρόσω Schin., δώσω Kor. // 
τούτων and αἰτιωτάτη Lef. 

280... τησομαιο §=Lef., 
Ιζῦν.} οὕτως ὄναιο Hous., confirmed by 
Kir. // λεγοτι] λέγε, τί ELC., λέγ᾽ ὅτι 
Lef. // Kor. continues to Polemon (ai- 
τιωτάτη: MS.), Leeu. gives vv. 280 and 
281a to Doris 

281 δείσασα Hous., Leeu., Sud. // 
καταπέφευγε: Leger. // KGr. continues to 


οὐ Τωσοναιο 


Polemon (καταπέφευγε: and -σασα: MS.), 
Xw. pds... δείσασα Leeu., Rob., Sud., 
πρὸς γυναῖκά ποι: δείσασα : Schin. 

282 δείσασα Leeu., Sud. // μυρρηνην] 

283 τὴν Leo // οὕτως μοι γένοιθ᾽ 1.00, 
confirmed by Kor, 

984. τ εἶδ ΠΟΙ aes) tT Kor. | 
ἔμ᾽ ἔλιπεν (written ἔλιπ᾽) Leo, ἀπέλιπεν 
Schin., ὅπερ εἶπον Kor, after ws εἶπον 
Rob. // ἐνθάδε Wor. 

285 νι; 


uv..v Kor.| τί μὴν ἔμ᾽ αἰσχύνειν EC ., 


ΤΟ ΕΚ ΝΣ ὙΠ nO vee: 


πάνδεινον οὖν" καὶ νῦν Rol. // παντελῶς 
Rob. 
290 Gm οὐ ἐπ εν ναι τς eek: evdn Lef., 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


305 


απ. .ep(O@)e... vac(y)..rX....€vdyrA Kor. | 
ἀποφθερεῖ, γύναι; δολοῦσ᾽ E.C., εὔδηλος εἰ 
Kor., εἰπεῖν πεφευγέναι γ᾽ ἐκεῖσ᾽ εὔδηλον 
οὖν Rob. 

344-362 <Alternation of speakers 
indicated in MS. as follows: paragra- 
phus under 845 (end of v. broken); 
μεθύεις yap: 8348; μέλλον: 850; πείσθητί 
μοι: 851; paragraphus under 352 ; ém- 
σήμηνον: and paragraphus 3538; κράτος 
[:] 856; ἐξόλλυσιν: (C.) and ἡγεμών: (C. 
and L.) 3857; ἄπελθ᾽ : and ἀπέρχομαι: 
(C.; in Τὰν the ν. is broken) 358 ; σοι: and 
paragraphus (C.; v. broken in L.) 362 

Distribution of speakers: 344: Σωσ. 
ἐκεῖθεν. 
brotonon Schm.; 846; Πατ. κάθευδ᾽... 


. στρατόπεδον Kir., to Ha- 


γάρ Kor., Arn., Leeu., Schm., Sud., to 
Polemon Rob.; 348: Lwo. yrrov. .. 
μέλλον Rob., Sud., to Polemon Kér., 
Arn., Leeu., Sehm.; 350: IfoA. ee... 
por Οἷς to Pataecus Koér., Arn., Rob., 
Sud., to Habrotonon Leeu., Schm.; 
851: Σωσ. ri... ἐμοί E.C., to Polemon 
Kor., Arn., Leeu., Rob., Schm., Sud.; 
352: 
Pataecus Koér.) (no change of speaker 
MS. at 
change of speaker in orat end οὖν. 352 


Πολ. ὀρθῶς... ἐπισήμηνον F.C., to 


Oo ate 


indicated in end of v. 85 

indicated in MS. by paragraphus be- 
low), Har. ὀρθῶς... ἐρῶ. Σωσ. ᾿Αβρότο- 
νον, ἐπισήμηνον Arn., Rob., Sud., "Asp. 
. ἐρῶ. Ion. (Har. ΟΠ} Appé- 
Tovov, ἐπισήμηνον Leeu.; 355: Har, εἴσω 
Re RAV elie Nisa CO amo ΠΝ 
Habrotonon Kort, Leeu., Schm.: 850: 


tomblii= 


ὀρθῶς one 
Kor., to 


Nwo. Karas . 
brotonon Arn. (no indication in MS, of 
OU ihe 

orale 


ἐξόλλυσιν Kore), Leeu., 


᾿ Ae 
. Kpatos Wor.?, 


change of speaker at end of v. 
WOM κακῶς, 20. = 
Schim. (xparos[:] MS.) Nwo. xaxa@s... 
ἡγεμών Rob., Sud. (xparos[:] and ἐξόλ- 
NoPE EATS) eed acs 


λυσιν (as question) E.C., to Habrotonon 


Ilo\. οὑτοσὶ... ἐξόλ- 


306 

Kor.?, to Sosias Arn.; 857: Σωσ. οὐκ 
ἔσθ᾽ ἡγεμών Kir.2, to Habrotonon Kér.}, 
Leeu., Schin.; 358: ‘Asp. πρὸς... ἄπελθ᾽ 
E.C., to Polemon Kér., alii; Zwe. 
ἀπέρχομαι Rob., Sud., to Habrotonon 
Koér., Arn., Schm.; 859: Πολ. @uny. .. 
σοι K6r.!, to Sosias (continuing) Rob., 
Sud., Kor.? (ἀπέρχομαι: MS.) 

344, 345, 347 Kor. 

848 .ῃητον] νὴ τόν Kir., ἧττον Sud, 
//jrrov Kor., ἧττον; Sud. // wo cor- 
rected to 60] // rerwxaiowe | 

349 κοτυλην] κοτύλης Kir., πέπωκ᾽, 
ἴσως κοτύλην Arn. 

350 μέλλον; Rob., μέλλον. Kor. 

351 πείσθητί Kir. // ἐμοί] ἐμέ Kor} 

352 νῦν ἐγὼ Kor), vv: ἐγὼ Arn, 

354 ἄγει) ἄγεις Kor.! 

355 cer (de? Wilcken) πολεμεισ writ- 
ten by corrector over διοίκεισ  διοικεῖς 
Kor., πολεμεῖς σὺ Rob. // διαλνεται, cor- 
rected first to διαλυσεται. then to δια- 
λυετε OF διαλυσετε) διαλύεται Rob., Schin., 
διαλύσεται KOr,, Arn. 

356 δέον (or ἔξον) Kir. // κρατοσ. ov- 
τοσι] κράτος :Ἰοὑτοσὶ Kor. 

SOT το σα ie CC. ον: Koon CC, 
Kor., o.arauoo L. Wile.] 6 Wilcken, 
Πάταικος Kor.// ἐξόλλυσιν: C., 20m. L. | 


SDB sar wy C., .pootwy 12. πρὸς 
τῶν Lef.//avépw.a..d 1.) 

859. πὸ Ἐν εἰς ὠμηνσεῖ τι εν 
τι 1,.} ,7] καιγα 8 lett. ον L. | 

860 .....€.,. xe L.] dyes Legr., 
Wil. //x.... nov L.] 

936. oor δὺσ Ὁ Τῆς eu πὰς acre On 
Kor., δυνασαιτ᾽ 1,.] δύνασαί τ᾽ Kor. // 
ποισ I,. | 

362 .. «καστρι (".] //noxvvryna: (".] 


77 τισο 1.2] 
363 .. dev 
INOulizy/ay potouTe Or emp ae. Τ᾿ W.|//nve 
ὦ del, White. cone 
firmed by L.// Paracraphus below in@, 


. Lef.,.. wey. Nor.) ef wey 


(τὼ) 1 





MENANDER 


[PER ICEIROMENE 


364 vy... voc L.] 
365 f. dey... Τὴ] // παταικεῖ Lef., 
WOT. .@ ane... .)2 loa elon 
(continuing) διαφέρει... ταύτην Kor., 
to Pataecus Lef., Har. διαφέρει... . βόα 
Rob. (ταύτην: C., L.), War. διαφέρει δέ 
τι. ἸΙολ. ἐγὼ... ταύτην Sud. (no indi- 
cation in MSS. of change of speaker 
after re) 

367 Sodan aa C. els ὁδόν πες ΟΣ 
KGr.] ὁ δούς Wil., ἐμοὶ KGr., confirmed 


matae’ C, 


by L. // τίς; αὐτή. Let., τίς αὕτη; Rob., 
continuing to Polemon (δούς: L.) 

368 xpe..... urn, τ / taxa... «- 6: 
τάχα coor unl max Lef., τέως 
Head., Rich., Wil, 

869 απεληλυθ᾽ου C., απεληλυθε.... 
L..] ἀπελήλυθεν δ᾽ οὐ Leeu., ἀπελήλυθ᾽ οὖν 
οὐ Head., Kér., Leo, Rich., Wil., aze- 
λήλυθ᾽ οὐχὶ Cron., Head. 

370 αὐτὴ Lef., αὐτὴ Wil. //7id.... 
L.] 

371 X...mnxaoc L.] //epao C. Lef., 
L., epaco C. Kir. ] ἐρεῖς Lef., épas Leeu. 


OMe τον Olle mid ate 215 g 1] //wod C., 
Teles ΜΟΙ ἀν ας teow lan | 

87 8 ν τ ΑΚ δι: aoe Ι,.1 // : πουφερει 
yap: (. Lef., -ποὐφερειγαρ. C. Kor., 
ποιφερειγαρ Iu. | 

376 epwv..7 L.] 

377 ἃπὸ τοῦ 1..) //eyxa 1. 

378 ποτ. 11 

9.80. τα αὶ i. μαδε: (., ταδικημε 


} 


yadnuade: L.| τἀδίκημ᾽ ἔγκλημα δέ Crois. 


(who, however, vives ἔγκλημα δέ as 
question to Polemon), punet. Wor, 
10Χ. ἔγκλημα δέ Wil. 

381 Puneet. KGr.// Tn TL. paragra- 
plus, om. C, 

383 καταλε... πεμε I.. | 

384 marae’ 1..|//ov7... 


SOO mON Ne ela 


386 αὐτῇ. πρότερον Leeu., αὐτῇ πρό- 


done. 1. 


repov, Kir. // dead... . Li. ] 


PERICEIROMENE | 


987 πρε.βευσ.. L.] // μοιδοκεισ C., 
HOics L.] μοι δοκεῖ Crois., Herw., μοι 
δοκεῖς Lef., μοι δοκῶ Wil. // In r. marg. 
IAT C.] : 

8388 opa.. L.] // dey... L.] //Inr. 
marg. ΠΟΛ C.] 

389 rar 10 lett.o: L.]// marae... 
L.] // War. μετρίως Lef., Rich. contin- 
ues to Polemon (:uerpiws: C.,— ws: L.) 
// In UL. paragraphus, om. C. 

990. ete ὠτηρια 1,.} 

398 θεωρησαισ..... C., -εωρησαισ:κα 
Awa 1,.] θεωρήσαις. ἸΙατ. καλῶς Wil., 
confirmed by L. 


395 :wrap.C. Lef., :wrood C. Kor., 
:wrootdo...eup i L.] ὦ Πόσειδον. Ton. 
δεῦρ᾽ ἴθι Kor. 

396 ενδυματαοια corr. to ενδυμαθ᾽οια 
L.] //oad'e C., ode L.} οἵα δὲ Ell., 
Leeu., Nic., Wil., confirmed by L.// 
nuka. C.) ἡνίκ᾽ ἂν Crin., Ell., Head., 
Hous., Kor., Leeu., Leo, Nic., confirmed 
by L. 

397 ewpaxever C. Lef., εωρακεισιγα 
C. KGr., εορακεισίσωσ:, ὦ Written above 
o, 1,.] ébpaxers Leeu., tows Kor. 

398 In 1. marg. HAT C.] //eywo: 
corr. to eywy' : C. Kor., ε. wye: L.] ἔγωγε 
eeu., confirmed by L.//e. ©. Let®, 
aC ΠΟΥ ἀπ Ὁ)» Croiss lich ei Viale: 
confirmed by LL. 

399 το ge..vve....0 L.] 

400 dada: C. Kir., L.] λαλῶν Head. 

401 ουδ᾽ ἐν C.]//addadecrarackece (., 
αλ.. δείγεσε 1,.] ἀλλὰ δεῖ σε viv Crois. 
(del. Πάταικε, confirmed by I.) 

402 παρασ᾽ εισ (. Lef., παραγ εἰσ (". 
K6r., mapa.... L.] mdpay, εἰσ Kor., 
Sud. 

403 εἰσφθερεῖσθε] ἐκφθερεῖσθε Hitr., 
Head., Herw.// Oatr... veo L.] 

404 exe... nxaoc.o. L.]} 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


307 


405 ἀνδύναιντοδ᾽ αν] ἂν δύναιντο δ᾽ 
(del. second ἂν) Crén., Head., Κῦτ., 
Leo, Wil., ἂν δύνα ἂν Rob., νεοττιὰν 
δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντ᾽ ἂν ἐξελεῖν Head. 

406 οἷοι πάρεισ᾽] οἵοίπέρ εἰσ᾽ Kir. 

409 «ενων Lef., Kér., a@dwy Ric.] 
ἀθλίων Hous., confirmed by Ric. 

417 οικοντιν] οἶκον (del. τιν) Lef. 

421 αὐτοσ Lef., ovrog Kor.] οὗτος 
Leeu., Leo 

425 μητηραγγελουσα] μήτηρ ἀπαγ- 
γελοῦσά Cron., Sud., ἐπαγγελοῦσά Lef. 

427 εμελεγων] ἐμελέτων Head. 

Fr. K assigned to this play by Lef., 
ΚΖ placed before K! by KGr., who rc- 
ports that K is from the bottom of the 
page, though the lower margin is no 
longer preserved 

585 Ca. 15 lett. rep] λαθεῖν τὸν πα- 
τέρα καὶ (or τί οὖν λαθεῖν) τὴν μητέρ᾽ 
E.C., τί νοεῖν γὰρ ὡς τὴν μητέρ᾽ Sud., 
κερδαίνειν δὲ νῦν οὕτως τί πρὸς τὴν μητέρ᾽ 
Leeu., so Schm, but w. δὲ τί οὕτως ἂν 
//o...€. Lef., p....0u(c,v) Kor.) ppa- 
fe μοι Gs φερομένη or φρόντισον Sud. 

586 ἐνταῦθα E.C., Koir., καὶ δεῦρο 
(or Πάταικε) Sud. // καταφυγοῦσ᾽ Leo // 
ἐδυνάμην: Sud. // οὐ, σκοπεῖς Arn., Rob., 
οὐ σκοπεῖς; Sud. 

587 Suppl. Sud. // γυναῖκα, E.C., 
γυναῖκα --- Rob., γυναῖκα; Sud. 

588 ..ovov....aov Lef., .yovov.... 
(.)aov KGr.] μονουμένην οὐ E.C., γέ) ov ov- 
tos, — ἀλλ᾽ (ἀλλ᾽ Leeu.) Sud., Wil. φρο- 
νοῦσιν. ἀλλ᾽ Leeu. //tovr’] //exn: Leo, 
Sud., ἔχῃ. Rob. 

589 ἔσπευδον] ἔσπευδεν Sud., read- 
ing αὐτός yin v. 590 

590 τ᾽ suppl. Leo, Sud. (w. ἔσπευ- 
Sov), & Lef., y Rob. // éxetvos; Leo, 
ἐκεῖνος" Lef. 


591 κατέστησ᾽.) κατέστησ᾽: Sud. 
592 εχθραν)] ἐχθρόν L.C.// πρατ(γ) 


Kor.] πράττειν Schin,, Wil., πρᾶγμά μοι 


308 


E.C., ηὐξάμην (or ἠξίουν) Sud. (both w. 
ἔχθραν τε πράττειν), πρᾶξιν ἐκτελεῖν Cron. 

593 αἰσχρὰν ἐμοῦ Leo, 
Οτόῃ., ἀκοσμίας Kor., ἐδεξάμην (or οἵαν 
πάλιν) Sud.}, ἐνοῦσαν ἂν Sud.? 

594 ηνεξα. ειψαισ] ἣν ἐξαλείψασ᾽ Wil., 
ἣν ἐξαλείψαις Crién., Leo, δαα.1, ἣν ἐξα- 
λείψῃς Rob., ny ἐξαλείψαιτ᾽ Sud.2// ai- 


σχρὰ φανεῖ H.C., αἰσχύνομαι Leo, αἰσχύ- 


πανουργίας 


νεται Sud., aloxds wor’ ἄν Crin., αἰσχρᾷ 
δίκῃ Rob. //E.C. gives v. to Pataecus 
(no indication preserved in MS. of 
change of speaker at end of ν. 593), 
others continue to Glycera 

595 Suppl. Leeu., Sud.// F.C. gives 
v. to Glycera (no indication preserved 
in MS. of change of speaker at end of 
vy. 594), others continue to Glycera 


596 pe γεγονέναι KOr., με γενομένην 
(or δεῖν καταγαγεῖν) Sud.!, κοὐ καταῴφρο- 
vets Sud.2, πονηρίαν Crin., μ᾽ εἶναι κόρην 
Leeu. 

597 πολυτίμητ᾽ Lef., ἄδικα δὲ Wil., 
εἴθ᾽ a φὴς Herw., ἄνδρα δὲ Leeu., ἄνδρα 
με (or ἀνόσιον) Sud., Πολέμωνα δ᾽ αἴτιον 
Gerh. 

598 μὲν πείθομαι Wil., yap οὐ κρινῶ 
E.C., ἐγῴῷδ᾽ ὅτι σ᾽ ἠδίκει Kir., δ᾽ ἀπέρχο- 
μαι Herw., ἔγωγε πείθομαι (πείθομαι Wil.) 
Gerh, 

599 εἰς ἄλλας κόρας KC. 
ἑτέραν τινὰ Sud, and εἰς ἄλλας κόμας 


after εἰς 


Koér., who give 509b to Glyecera (no 
indication of change of speaker pre- 
served in MS.) μή σέ γ᾽ οὖν Gerh, con- 
tinuing to Pataeeus 

600 οὐχ ὑβριστικῶς K.C., οὐ προαίρε- 
Πα Τα δ. οὐ 


τὸν, Kor. who νυ αν to 


μεῖζον λόγου 1“. (ὐ΄ςς οὐχ ὑπὲρ Ἀόγον Gerh., 
both giving to Glycera, Χοιπόν: Without, 
paragraphus MS. 

601 ἀνόσιον δ᾽ ἔπραξέ με (01 ἀνόσιόν 
+... oe if by Pataecus) ἘΣ ἀνοσίως 


éxaxwoé με Wor, Who cives to Glyeera, 


MENANDER 


[ PERICEIROMENE 


ἀνοσιώτατον μὲν οὖν Sud., ἀνόσιόν γ᾽ ἐφαί- 
vero Gerh. giving to Pataecus, δεινόν: 
and paragraphus MS. 

602 οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὁρᾶν Sud., ὁ σοβαρός. ἂν 
K6r., οἷον τάχ᾽ ἂν Sud., ὅμως δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν 
Gerh. // ἀθλιωτέραν | Sud.!, οἰηθῇ w ἔχειν 
Kor., ἐργάσαιτό τις Sud.?, εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν] 
πέμψαις Gerh. // After v. 602 Kor. con- 
jectures that the thought was ἴστω ye- 
γονυῖαν μ᾽ ἐξ ἐλευθέρου | πατρός 

603 ἐμοῦ 1h.C. 

Fr. 392 Kock recognized the fact 
that the quotation from this play may 
have been lost from the gloss on ἀπο- 
δεῖξαι in Bekk. Anec, 427, 383 

619-630 
indicated in MS.: paragraphus under 


Alternation of speakers 
621; βούλει: and possibly space for : 
after ταῦτ᾽ 
623; -σ᾽: and ἄρισθ᾽ : G26; σοι; 
οἶδε: 628; -s: 629 


Distribution of speakers: Har. τί 


622; paragraphus under 


O27; 


οὖν ἡ φιλτάτῃ 1.C., Har. τὸ οὖν βούΞ 
λει: KGr, (below 621 paragraphus, but 
no room in MS, for :after τηρεῖν after 
βούλει double-point), PA. (continuing) 
tl ovv BovrAe Lef., Rob., Sud., PA. (eon- 
tinting) wo... τί βούλει Leen. (βούλει: 
and ταῦτ᾽ [2°] MS.), PA. woploac@ar... 


ἄνθρωπον Wor, (ταῦτ᾽ ΝΣ leas 


AG 
κομίσασθαι ταῦτα: VN. -yrwkas ... dr- 
Opwrov Tuet., lar. κομίσασθαι ταῦτ᾽. 
TA. -yewras . . . Bovdec Sul, Har. xopt- 


σασθαι ταῦτ΄. Moo. -yrwxas . . . ἄνθρω- 


ν᾽ ΄ ~ ’ 
mov Rob., VA. κομίσασθαι ταῦτ΄. Ilar. 
-yywKas... dirraryn Wil., TA. re foXe 


Eth Bee 
Indication in MS. of change of speakei 


Taree Tite ge, heNralte yee. ahha 
after ἄνθρωπον, but paracraphus be- 
low), Haz. fiNrarn..... not Ioet.. Mee. 
Sule {flee cee. 
Ip yotar.s 
MS. of change of speaker after pid- 


ςπραχῆησεται 1... 


μοι Wor, (no indieation in 


rary, but paragraphus below), PA, 


PERICEIROMENE | 
πραχθήσεται.. . . γέλοιον Lef., Γλ. πρα- 
χθήσεται Sud., PA. πραχθήσεται.. .. σ᾽ 
Leeu., Πατ. πραχθήσεται.. .. σ᾽ Kor. 
(no indication in MS. of change of 
speaker after yor) // Πατ. τοῦτο... σ᾽ 
Sud. (no indication in MS. of change 
of speaker after πραχθήσεται), ΓᾺΔ. τοῦτο 
... γέλοιον Rob.!, to Moschion Rob.?, 
Ilar. ἀλλ᾽... σ᾽ Lef., Rob. (no indica- 
tion in MS. of change of speaker after 
yédouv) //T. ἐγῴδα τἄμ᾽ ἄρισθ᾽ Lef., 
Kor., Rob., Sud., to Pataecus Leeu. // 
Πατ. οὕτως. ... οἷδε Lef., Har. οὕτως 

. oo; TA. ἡ Δωρὶς οἷδε K6r., Rob., 
Sud. (co MS.), PX. οὕτως ἔχεις. Tar. 
ΤΡ Tis. .. got; TA: val, Awpis.... 71s 
Leeu. (no indication in MS. of change 
of speaker after ἔχεις, but οἶδε:) // ΓΔ. 
καλεσάτω. .. τις Lef., Har. καλεσάτω 
... λέγω Νῦν, Rob., Sud. (ris: MS.) 
// Mar. ἀλλ᾽ duws... λέγω Lef., Leeu. 

619 At end ἔδωκέ μοι Sud. 

620 ἐκέλευσεν δ᾽ Leeu., εἴωθ᾽ οὖν 
Leo, εἰωθυῖ᾽ Sud., ἐβουλόμην Crois. // 
ἔχειν Crois. 

621 Crois. 

622 raur..... νωκασσίθ, ε) Kor.) ἀπέ- 
γνωκας σὺ γὰρ I.C., ἐπέγνωκας σαφῶς 
Cron., ἐπέγνωκας ((1ὖ1.} and σύ γ᾽ οὖν 
Rob., θρασὺν or σφοδρὸν Wil., ἴθ᾽, ἔγνω- 
kas σύ γε Sud., ἔγωγ᾽. ἔγνωκας εὖ Head. 

623 ἄνθρωπον; 1.C., ἄνθρωπον. al. 

624 w....paxo..cerat Lef., uw... pa 
χθ. σεται Kor.| μοι Crois., μῶν Sud.}, 
πραχθήσεται Mitr., Rich., Sud. //mpa- 
BC. e suds, 
Leeu., KGr., Rich. const. w.foll. 


χθήσεται:; 
Sud.2 

625 τουτογελοιον]ὴ γε add. Ilead., 
Rich. sud). szourt Crone 


πραχθήσεται. 


Leo, τὸ 
Leeu. 
ΘΟ ΥΩ 


E.C., ἥκειν σ᾽ Kor., ποεῖν σ᾽ Ell., Leo, 


.vo’ Kor.] εἶξαί σ᾽ 


opav o Vell., Head., pw éav o πη 
ἡμῶν σ᾽ Sud.2, τιμᾶν σ᾽ Leeu., σιγᾶν σ᾽ 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


309 


Rich. // yaw Lef., raw’ Kor.] τἄμ᾽ Ell., 
Leeu.,, Leo, confirmed by Kor.//apior’ } 
//éxes; Herw., ἔχεις. Lef., ἔχει Leeu. 
//Inr. marg. WAT] 

627 ris τῶν Leo, Sud., τῶν τις Leeu., 
ἢ τις Crois, 


028. ΠῚ σ᾽ 4 E.C., ἢ Leo, Sud., 
val, Awpis Crois. 
G29 er: a] ἔξω Leo, ἰών Rob., νυνί 


Crois., ἐμοί Sud. // τις Crois. 

630 9 lett.” Lef., 8-9 lett. ρ(β)εστ᾽ 
K6r.] διαλλάγηθ᾽ Kor., ἄπιθι: πάρεστ᾽ 
Sud., ὑπάκου᾽ Leo // νυνιλογοσγ(δ)εγωλε 
yw] λόγοις νυνὶ λέγω E.C., λόγοις ἐγὼ 
λέγω (or λέγω δ᾽ ἐγώ) Leeu., λέγω νυνὶ 
λόγοις Sud., λόγος νυνί: λέγω Schm. 

631 Suppl. E.C., τί δή με δεῦρ᾽ ἐκά- 
λεσας Rob., πάρειμ᾽, ἰδού. τί ἐστιν Leeu., 
- τί δ᾽ ἐστιν Sud.//In τ. marg. AQP] 

632 8-9 lett. oor] τάχα δ᾽ εἴσομ᾽ οἷον 
E.C., οὐκ οἶσθας οἷον Leeu., τί ἐστι; 
ποῖον Rob., τί δ᾽ ἔστιν; οἷον Sud., τί 
δ᾽ ἔστι: ποῖον Kobr., σαφῶς λέγ᾽, οἷον 
Schm.// E.C. gives to Moschion, to 
Pataecus Crois., Leeu., Sud., to Doris 
(continuing) Rob., (κεκτημένη: 
Ms.), to Glycera Schm. 

633 9 lett.’] τὴν κιστίδ᾽ Crois., τὴν 


Kor. 


κοιτίδ᾽ Leeu. 

634 11 lett. nd: Lef., ed Kor.] 
ἔχουσαν Ell., Leo, συνέχουσαν Crois., 
οἶσθας Rob., οἶσθα Crois., αὐτὴ Ell., νὴ 
AU Crois., Ell., ἱματίδι᾿ Leeu., ἀργυ- 
pide Sud. 

635 11 lett. διεισ Lef., 9 lett. Avec 
Kor.| τηρεῖν Leeu., τί παθοῦσ᾽ Sud., τί 
γὰρ οὖν Kor., Schm., τί αλύεις KOr. // 
Lef. continues 635a to Glycera, Haz. 
635a Schm.,Sud. (no indieation in MS, 
of change of speaker at end of v. 654), 

ἀθλία. Τῷ. Moo. me- 
πονθα κτὲ. Sud., to Pataecus Lef., Kor., 
Rob., to Glycera Leeu. // ἀθλία: // 
In rv. marg. IAT | 


Ilar. τί advecs, 


310 


636 νὴ τὸν Ala τὸν Crois. // σωτῆρ᾽, 
ἐγὼ E.C., σωτῆρα, viv Rob., Schmn., 
καινὸν Rob., δεινὸν Schin., θαυμάσιον 
Sud., καὶ τρέμω Kor. 

637 καὶ ποικίλον E.C., ἀτοπώτερον 
Sud. // nx Lef., κε KGr.] ἡ κόρη δοκεῖ 
E.C., ἡ κωμῳδία | εὕρηκεν Sud. 

646 ff. Kor. recognized the speak- 
ers as Pataecus, Glycera, and Moschion 

646 ὃν Kor., ὅτι (or ws) Rob. // 
Πατ. Ov... ἕστηκεν Arn., to Moschion 
Kor., Rob., Schm. 

647 Kor. 

648 ἕστηκεν; Kor. // nrpayoo, οὐ 
written above η] // τράγος:] 

640 iy Kors, . 7, Wille, Keepacy: 
Kor: κέρατ᾽ Leeu., ra δύο y Arn, 
πῶς δῆτ᾽ Sud., ἡδί τ᾿ Rob., οὕτως ἔχει 
τοῦτ᾽ οἶδα  ΙΠᾶτ χε τ. 
οἶδα Leeu. (τοῦτ᾽ : MS.), TA. καὶ... τρί- 
τον; Πατ. πετεινὸς. .. ἀθλίας H.C. (no 
indication in MS. of change of speaker 
at end of v. 649), TA. cal... 
THs... ἀθλίας Leeu. (no indication in 
MS. of change of speaker after oféa or 


ἵππος. Ilar. 


ἵππος), Πατ. ---ἔχει τοῦτ᾽. TX. οἶδα. ar. 
kal... a@0dlas Arn., Ilar. —éya... 
ἀθλίας Kor.2, Μοσ. --- ἔχει τοῦτ᾽. Har. 
οἶδα. .. ἀθλίας Kor.1, Rob., Sud. 

650, 651 Kor. 

652 οὐ Kor., ev Wil., ra@s; Leeu., 
τῶν ἀδυνάτων Kor. // τουτιμοι] τοῦτ᾽, ἐμοὶ 
K6r., τοῦτ᾽; ἐμοὶ 1ῦ.(ς, τουτί wor Rob, // 
δοκεῖ) δοκεῖν Kor. 

653 7 lett. re] ἄτοπόν te E.C., &do- 
yov τι KGr.2, ἐθελοντὶ Kor.!, σχεδόν τι 
Wil., ζητοῦντι Rob., σκοποῦντι Sud. 

654 9-10 lett. εσθαι] αἰσχρῶς E.C., 
per’ ἐμοῦ (Or μετὰ τῶνδε) Kor., λάθρα 
Rob., δίδυμα (or διδύμους) Sud., τῳδὶ 
Arn., προέσθαι (or θέσθαι) Kor, ἀφέσθαι 
Sud., παραθέσθαι Arn. 

655 let. ν] εἰ δ᾽ ἄρα τι πιστὸν E., 


ἀλλ᾽ εἰ τετύχηκεν KOr., εἰ δ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἀδύνατον 


MENANDER 


[PERICEIROMENE 


Arn., ol: εἰ δὲ γέγονεν Wil., εἰ δ᾽ οὖν 
δέδρακεν Leeu. 

656 12 lett. pu’ Wilc., ρημ Kor.] 
οἵας E.C., οἵων Wil., ἀπεστέρημ Wil., 
ἤδη κάκιστ᾽ EpOapy Kir., οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸς αὐ- 
τῆς εἰμ Arn., οἵῳ κακῷ πέφυρμ᾽ Schmn. 

657 ... «υτινηδηὴ Κῦν., ....tuxndn 
E.C. photog. ἢ δυστυχῆ δὴ E.C., δήλου, 
τίν᾽ ἤδη Kor., ὦ Ζεῦ, τίν᾽ ἤδη Sud., καὶ 
mod στιν ἤδη Rob., τάδ᾽ ἔστιν ἤδη ΟΠ. 
// Kor. gives to Pataecus, Schm. to 
Glycera 

658 σήμαιν᾽ ὃ Rob., σήμαινε Kor. // 
τ᾽ ἐμοῦ] γ᾽ ἐμοῦ Schin. 

659,660 Kir. 

661 ἐπάναγε Wil. // pod] ῥέθος βλέπω 
E.C., podiov συχνοῦ (or ῥοθίῳ στρεφεὶς) 
Kor., ῥοθίῳ τινὶ Wil., podiws ἄγαν (or 
ῥόθιον σθένει, ῥόθιον βίᾳ, ῥόθιον δραμὼν) 
Sud., ῥόθῳ τανῦν Arn., ῥόθιός τις εἶ (or 
οὖν) Rob. // Kér.! gives to Pataecus, 
Arm., Leeu., Sud. give vv. 661 f. to 
Moschion 

662 ».w] ἥκω Kor., ἥλω Sud. // 
ἐγώ Kor., ἐμῆς Rob., στενόν Sud. // 
Kor.) gives to Moschion (no indication 
preserved in MS. of change of speaker 
at end of v. 661), Arn., Leeu., Sud. 
continue to Moschion 

664 Kor. 

665 rw...0] τῶν ἐμοὶ Kor. (who 
proposed to correct to τῶν ἔτι), τῶν ἐπι- 
ζητουμένων Arn. 

666, 667 Kor. 

668 ταμαδ᾽] τὰ δ᾽ ἐμά μ᾽ ELC., rapa 
δέ μὴ Rob., τἀμὰ δέ γ᾽ Arn., τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλ᾽ 
(or τἀμὰ σύ γ᾽) Kor., τἀμὰ δ᾽ ἐπ- Sud, 

670, 672 Kor. 

671 μητρί Kor. // ποῦ Wil. 

673 cOpe..... ToT’, καὶ Written over 
ToT ] ἔθρεψ᾽. ἧπερ τότ᾽ Kor., ἔθρεψ᾽, ἢ καὶ 
τότ᾽ Sud. // εἰδεκειμενην) εἶδ᾽ ἐκκειμένην 
E.C., εἶδε κειμένην Kor, 


674 Kor. 


PERICEIROMENE | CRITICAL 

675 xpn...Tw'e....at] κρήνην τιν᾽ 
Kor., εἶπ᾽ εἶναι E.C., εἶπε καὶ Kor. //7’ 
add. E.C., γ᾽ Kor. 

676 κοτιθεισ, a written over Ko] χὼ 
τιθεὶς Kr. 

679, 681 Kor. 

680 κλνυ... Kor., τυχ.. Sud. pho- 
tog.] κλύειν Kor., τύχης Sud. 

682 επροσθεν, μ written above r] // 
v... Ké6r., veov Sud. photog.] νοεῖς; 
E.C., véov — Herw. 

683 Wilc. 

684 εἰθισμένος Wil., δοκῶν τέως Sud. 

685 πο... .] πάθους E.C., πότμου (or 
πόνου) Kor. 

686 Kor. 

687 ...vov] ἄγριον Sud., Wil., δεινὸν 
Wile. 

688 εφολκιο. Kor., εφολκια: Wilc. ] 
ἐφόλκια Wilc., ἐφόλκιον Kor., lar. ἐφόλ- 
xia | ἡγησάμην Sud. (no indication in 
MS. of change of speaker after τύχης, 
but ἐφόλκια: (: doubtful) and paragra- 
phus), τῆς τύχης ἐφόλκιον. Kor. 

689 Kor. 

690 τρέφειν ἀβούλου Kor. // τρόπους 
E.C., τρόπον Kor. 

691 Ca. 13 lett. αβεστατωνπαντωντε 
... Kor, (‘¢sed litteris στὰ vix duarum 
litterarum spatium relinquitur’’ Sud.), 
$(p) .«λτ(π)ατ᾽ wy. (7, €, kK, ν, 7, σ)αντ(γ, 7) 
a(A)AA(a, χ)επί(τ)ο E.C. photog., the ¢ 
being now below the line, torn from 
its place] δηλοῖς (or delEats) ἀληθής, φίλ- 
tar’, ὧν mdvr’: ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὸν E.C., τῶν πάν- 
των τέλος (τέλος Rob.) Kor., τὸ δ᾽ ἄρρεν 
οὐκ ἔλαβέ τι τῶν πάντων; Tr. πάνυ 
δυᾶα, //E.C. gives to Glycera, Kor. 
continues to Pataecus, Sud. continues 
691 a to Pataecus, giving 601 Ὁ to 
Glycera // Wile. reports paragraphus 
below; doubtful 

692 rorov.... raped . βεμηνυθησεται 
Kor, (Wile, doubts maper), ε(σ, Ὑ)φ (ρ) 


APPENDIX 311 
η(π).....- σ(γ,π)αρ... κ(βγεμηνυθηγ(σ)ε(γ, 
σὴπαν E.C. photog.] ἔφη τι παῖς (or τι 
νῷν); ap’ οὐκ ἐμηνύθη γε wav; E.C., τόπον 
and μηνυθήσεται K6r., τὰ ποῖα δὴ παρέ- 
λαβε; Πατ. μηνυθήσεται" Sud. Δ Ε.Ὁ., 
Sud. continue to Glycera. // Paragra- 
phus below 

693 β.. χυστισχ Kor. (Wilc. doubts 
xX), B...gvyag(k)u..y E.C. photog.] 
βαθὺ ζυγάστριον E.C., βραχύς τις χρυσίου 
KG6r., βραχύς τις ἀργυροῦς Sud. ,, Arn., 
Rob. give to Pataecus 

694 wr. (ya Wilc.)...pc... Tow... me 
voo Kor., σ.. κροσδετοι.... εἰμενοισ EC. 
photog. ] σμικρὸς δὲ τοῖς ἐκκειμένοις E.C., 
(τοῖς) παιδαρίοις τοῖς κειμένοις (assum- 
ing that yap was written after προσὼν)] 
K6r., παρευρέθη τοῖς κειμένοις Sud. // 
Paragraphus below 

695 exer...avadew..... KL. .TL.EVET.. 
Kor., €.e¢...avdov(eje..€.k..7(¥). evar 
ox ..o: E.C. photog. ] ἐπειπὲ (or ἔτ᾽ εἰπὲ) 
τἄνδον. ἐν δὲ τούτῳ γ᾽ εὐστοχεῖς E.C., 
ἐκεῖνον Kir., ἀναθεώμεθ᾽, εἰ Wil., ἀναθεω- 
μένη Sud. //E.C., Kor. give to Glycera, 
Rob., Sud. to Moschion // At end of 
Vv. :, paragraphus below 

B96! γχίσ', ψῶπ, ον aki με 


ΤΣ toe 


E.C., δηλαδή Kor., τίς ἣν ὁ ποήσας; οἷ- 
σθα γράμμα δηλαδή δια. ,, Ε.Ο., Kor., 
Rob., Sud. give to Pataecus // Paragra- 
phus below 

BOT ΚΕ ΧΕ sOU Terrie. anne lao . πατερ 
Kor., ea ss ΧΟ sete pues μο. TATED 
F.C. photog. ] ἔα σὺ τοῦτ᾽ ἄριστα. δεῖ σέ 
μοι, πάτερ Τὰ. (ΟΟ., εἶχε and μοι, πάτερ Kor., 
εἶχεν τοιοῦτο .. . ιάμου,᾿᾿ πάτερ Sud. // 
F.C., K6r., Rob., Schm., Sud. give to 
Glycera // Kér. reports paragraphus 
below ; doubtful 

698 ¢€.0.cavermety....... αζωνητισῆ 


KOr., . νουσανειπεινε....... νζωνητισὴ B.C. 


312 


photog. ] ἐνοῦσαν εἰπεῖν εἰκόν᾽ ἐν ζώνῃ τίς 
ἣν E.C., ἔχοις ἂν εἰπεῖν μοι πότερα (πό- 
τερα Crois.) ζώνη τις (ζώνη τις Crois., 
Rob., Schéne, Sud., Wil.) ἣν Kor., εἰ 
παρά ζώνη Rob. // E.C. continues to 
Glycera, Kér., Rob., Sud. give to Pa- 
taecus, Schm. to Moschion // Paragra- 
phus below 

699 Suppl. Kor., ἣν yap Kor.}, ἣν 
γάρ. Sud.//E.C., Rob., Schm. give to 
Pataecus, Kor., Sud. to Glycera // 
Paragraphus below 

700 οὐκουνσυνηκασα....... eotw KOor., 
Bad.vovrnkaka...... ἐστω I.C. photog. | 
βάδην συνῆκα. καὶ τόδ᾽ εἶπες τῶν ἐμῶν 
E.C., οὐκοῦν συνῆκας KGr., δύστυχες, τῶν 
σῶν κακῶν Sud.// F.C. gives to Glycera, 
Kor. to Pataecus, Rob., Schm., Sud. to 
Moschion // Paragraphus below 

701 χ..σητεμιτρα Kor.] χρυσῇ τε 
μίτρᾳ Schone, after χρυσῆ τε μίτρα Kor., 
plrpa re χρυσὴ Herw.// mavta...... νει 

PO INOl παν απ τ τος νεινμίερασ F.C. 

photog. ] πάντα Kir., δ᾽ ἐκφαίνειν μ᾽ ἐρᾷς; 
E.C., γοῦν εἐἴρηκά σοὶ Sud. // E.C., Rob., 
Schm. give to Pataecus, Kor., Sud. to 
Glycera 

702 οὐκέτι καθέξω KOr.//raga...... 
ἰδεῖ τι οὐ 9 INOT, 
E.C. photog. ] φίλτατ᾽, ἄδικος εἰ δ᾽ ἐγὼ --- 
ΕΟ πὰς -νς site ΟΊ ΒΡ ΤΟ 
Glycera, Koér., Rob., Schm., Sud. to 


.\TaTad.... εἰδεγω 


Moschion 


COS sac Tirpoo..ecOen..... α.ν 
o.(awrittenabove ν) Kor, ....eur(y)odu 
ὀσθετοσι cere, p..ve H.C. photog.} ἀδι- 


κεῖ σ᾽ ὅδ᾽ ὑὸς θετὸς ἐμός γ᾽, ὡς φαίνεται 
ΘΟΕ Χ ΟΣ 
Schm. to 


EC... -- τί προσέχεσθε 


wives’ to Pataecus, Kor., 


Glycera 
704 mdpeme τοῦτον Kor. //.ma..... 


Rey. το αὶ πα τ LUG et tea (.)Ka. ψεγω 


. photog.| μιαρὸν ws viv καὶ ψέγω 


a. 
I. 
E.C., ἵνα πύθωμαι πάντ᾽ ἐγώ Sud.//E.C. 


MENANDER 


[PERICEIROMENE 


continues to Pataecus, Kér., Sud. give 
to Moschion // Paragraphus below 

705 ὦ θεοί, ris Kir. // ἐστιναυτοσ. 
poot..1o Kor., extovnoww...(.)voom..av 
E.C. photog.] ἔστ᾽ ὄνησις, ef μὲν ὅσπερ 
ἂν E.C., ἔστιν οὗτος ὁ προσιὼν Kor., ἔστιν 
οὗτος; ἔρρ᾽ ὅστις wor εἶ Wil., ἐστιν αὖθις 
ὁ προσιών ποτε Sud., ἔστιν αὖ θόρυβος, τίς 
Rob. // E.C. gives to Moschion, Κῦγ., 
Sud. to Glycera, Rob. to Pataecus. // 
Paragraphus below 

806 ff. Ox. Pap. II, no. 211, assigned 
to the Periceiromene by Grenfell and 
Hunt. Grenfell and Hunt give general 
credit for the greater part of their 
restorations to Blass; ‘*G.-H.”’ in the 
following is to be interpreted accord- 
ingly 

857 τοῦτό ye Weil, φληνάφα G.-H., 
πρὸς θεῶν Sud. 

858 G.-I. 

859 ὠν. Δωρ. ws φησι viv E.C., ὦν. 
Δωρ. θάρρει πάλιν Leeu., ὧν τῆς φιλτάτης 
G.-H., ὧν Γλυκέρας; Δωρ. πάλιν Kor. 

860 G.-Il. 

861 προθυμηθεισ)] προθυμηθῇς (ἃ.-Π|]. 
27) ἀκάκως τοὐνθένδ᾽ ἔχειν Wil., ἀκάκως, 
γενήσεται Weil, ἀκεῖσθ᾽ ὅσ᾽ ἠδίκεις Marx, 
ἀκαρῶς πορεύσεται Sud, 

862 ενλιπομ᾽] ἐνλίποιμ᾽ G.-Il. // εὖ 
τοῦτ᾽ ἴσθ᾽ G.-H., ἐγώ E.C., Δωρ. ἰδού 
G.-H., ὅτι Wil., ἐπεὶ Leen., οὐ τοῦτ᾽, ὦ 
φίλη Weil, Δωρ. εὖ τοῦτ᾽ ἀποτελῶ Dz. 

863 εγωσ᾽ ελ, y Written above ε] ἐγὼ 
δ᾽ (δ᾽ for σ᾽ Blass) ἐλευθέραν G.-H. 

864 σ᾽ add. Blass // δεῖ λέγειν G.-H. 

865 μάργ E.C., σχέτλ᾽ (or δεῖν᾽) 
KGr., φθονέρ᾽ Wil., “Epws Wil., θυμέ, 
dip Weil, μοι, τύχη Sud., παρακοπή 
Rob., Τ λυκέριον G.-H. 

866 ἐφίλησεν τότε Rob., ἐφίλει δ᾽ ἡ 
κόρη Kret., ἐφίλει δ᾽ ἡ γυνὴ Crois., εἰσε- 
δέξατο Wil., ἐδέχεθ᾽ ἡ κόρη Weil 

867 G.-H. from fr. 802 Κα, 


PERICEIROMENE ] 


868 ἀνακρῖναι δέον Polak, ἀδικεῖσθαι 
δοκῶν Wil., αὐτὴν ὑπονοῶν Herw., ἀλο- 
γίστως πάνυ Weil 

869 ἀπηγχόμην Wil., ἀπωλόμην α.-- 
Η: 

870 G.-H. 

871 κατεγέλα G.-H., δ᾽ ἐμοῦ. E.C., 
Ὑ ἐμοῦ; Crois., yé cov; G.-H., καταγελᾷς 
ἐμοῦ. Sud. 

872 Kret. 

873 éretjray’ G.-H. // π(τ)α(δ, d) 
G.-H. (very doubtful, only the upper 
tips of the letters remaining over a 
break)] θύειν E.C., πάλαι (9) G.-H., 
πάνυ Rob., ταχὺ Herw., τάλαν Kor., 
τελεῖν Weil 

874 evayedia] //708 G.-H., ace E.C. 
photog.] ἀσεβὲς πάνυ E.C., ποθουμένων 
G.-H., ποθουμένους Weil, ποθ᾽ ὡς τάχος 
Rob., ποθ᾽ ὡς ὁρᾷς Crois., Πόθῳ τε καὶ 
Sud., ῃσθημένον Polak 

B78 es ex GisH ona ceven D.C? 
photog.] στένειν (or θρηνεῖν) E.C., θύειν 
G.-H., θεοῖς Sud., φίλους Weil // τόδε 
G.-H]., ποτέ Weil, τελεῖν Sud. 

876 ὃ δεῖ ποεῖν Leeu., ὁ δ᾽ ἀπ᾽ ἀγορᾶς 
Wil., ὁ δ᾽ ἀπὸ τύχης Herw., ὁ δὴ πάρα 
Weil, ὁ δ᾽ εἰς καλὸν Sud. 

877 μαγειροσ, ο written above μ] // 
θυέτω G.-H. 

878 In 1. marg. AQ] // κανοῦν μὲν 
οὖν G.-H. 

879 G.-H. 

880 βωμοῦ G.-H., ποθεν G.-H., τινα 
Rob., θεοῦ Weil. 

881 (ἡ Ὁ’ 

882 πολλωφανειγοὺυν corrected to mor 
Awvpaverns | //...&| νῦν Τλυκέραν ταχύ 
Leeu., viv ἔξεισί τις Sud., δή" τί δ᾽ ἡ 
youn; Crois. 

883 δὴ yw πατήρ G.-H., δεῦρ᾽ ὅ τε 
πατήρ Wil., δευρὶ πατήρ Sud. 

884 τᾶν, ἀποδραμεῖ (Or ἀποτρέχεις) 
E.C., τᾶν, οὐ μενεῖς White, τάλαν, τί δρᾷς 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


313 


Herw., τάλαιν᾽ ἐγώ G.-H., τάλας ἐγώ 
Dz., τάλαιν᾽, ἔβη Sud. 

885 ε(σ). η(ν»)ε(θ, 0, σγν(μ)γίτ, ι)ακοντ 
οσε.ιϑηνθοραν..... 1 οὐ τοι δράκοντός 
ἐστι E.C., σοῦ γ᾽ οὐχ ἑκόντος ἐστί; Rob., 
σοῦ γε ἄκοντος εἶσι (for ἄκοντος εἶσι σοῦ 
γε) KOr., εἴσω: κακὸν τοσοῦτον Sud., 
ἔξεισ᾽͵ ἄκουσον, Δωρί Kret.//rihv θύραν 
Kret., ἣν θύραν Sud.// ψοφεῖν; (ψοφεῖ 
Kret.) Sud. 

886 ef τι δεῖ G.-H., οἷς με δεῖ Sud. 

887 G.-H. 

888 δέχεσθαι Dz., δὲ λῦσαι Weil, 
δεδέχθαι G.-H.// rhv δίκην G.-H. 

889 G.-Il. 

890 ἀλλ᾽ ἐκκαλείτω G.-H. // δραμὼν 
Weil, Πολέμων᾽ Wil. // αὐτὸν 
Herw., αὐτίκα μάλα Leeu., Πολ. αὐτὸς 
μὲν οὖν Wil. 

891 In l. marg. ..AEM] // ἐξὲρ- 
χομ Leeu., ἐκάλεσας Sud. // εὐπραξίας 
G.-H. 

892 Γλυκέραν G.-H., ὕπαρ G.-Il., 
γὰρ Kér., ἄθ᾽ Wil. // ἐβούλετο Leeu., 
ἐπόθει φίλους Wil., ἐπόθει πάλαι Crois., 
οὐδ᾽ εἶδ᾽ ὄναρ G.-H. 

.898 πυθόμενος G.-H.//a δ᾽ οὖν ἐγὼ 
G.-H., νῦν δ᾽ ὧν λέγω Sud., ὀρθῶς ἐγὼ 
Weil, ὀρθῶς δ᾽ ἐγὼ Kret. 

894 G.-H. from fr. 720K. 

895 G.-H. 

896 τόδε Weil, γ᾽ ἔχει G.-H., σύ ye 
Sud., λέγεις ὁ E.C. 

897 ὦν, ὅπως G.-H., γενόμενος Sud. 

898 προπετωσ, € Written above ὦ] 
τοὺς σοὺς φίλους Weil, τὰ φίλτατα Wil., 


ταχύ 


τὴν παῖδά μου Vitelli, Τλυκέραν πάλιν 
Kret., ποθ᾽ ὕστερον Herw., θυμούμενος 
Sud, 

899 In 1. marge. HOAE] // παρ᾽ ὀλί- 


γον G.-H. 
900 οὐδὲ μὴν ὄναρ Weil, οὐδὲ péuyo- 
μαι Wil., οὐδαμῶς ἐγὼ Nor., οὐδὲ μήποτε 


G.-H., οὐδεπώποτε Leen. 


314 


901 γλυκεραι"] Γλυκέρα G.-H., Γλυ- 
κέρᾳ Wil. // φιλτατηι] φιλτάτη α.-Η. // 
μόνον G.-H. 

902 In 1]. marg. ... KE] // πραγμά- 
των G.-H. 

903 ὦ φίλη Weil, νὴ Ala G.-H., 
γὰρ λέγεις Sud. 

904 ἐξ ἐμοῦ G.-H., ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι Sud. 


MENANDER 


[SAMIA 


905 παταικε:] // ζητητέον G.-H. 

906 G.-H. 

907 φιλεινου] // καὶ θεοί G.-H., φιλ- 
τάτη Dz.// Mosc. ὦ... θεοί E.C., after 
Kauer (Wien. Stud. XX VI, 1904, p. 
206), who gives to a fourth speaker. 
G.-H. give to Glycera, Wil. to Pole- 
mon 


SAMIA 


Rob. assigns papyrus fr. LP to this 
play, placing it in the first act. 

1 Lef. 

2 μαίνομαι (or μαίνεται) Kor. 

3 Leeu., Wil. // A context for vv. 
1-8 suggested by E.C. in note 

8 εγιγνετ᾽] 

10 ερριπτ᾽ ευθυσ] εὐθὺς del. Lef. 

11 al Kor., ol Lef. 

14 Lef. 

15 σκοπούμενος Crois., confirmed by 
Kor. // ecw Lef., €(0,¢,0).x(u) Kor. ] 
συχνὰ Hense, ἔσω Lef., θ᾽ ἅμα Οτῦπ., 
σφόδρα Maz. 

18 ταμειΐου] ταμιειδίου Crén., ταμει- 
δίου Herw. 

25:1. Punct. Bod., Head., Kor., 
Leo, Wil. // εἰναι written in marg. 

28 μέ τὸ ποῦ es YON, ith 
Kor., Leo, Nic., Wil. 

31 Μοσχίων᾽ Eitr., Herw., Maz., 
Nic., Pres., Wil., Μοσχίων Lef. 

32 ἐπεὶ Lef., ἰδού E.C, 

38 γέγονεν (γέγονε Lef.) Hense, Wil., 
ἄλλη Lef. (p. 207), τόδε Herw., Rich. 

38 ve(v)vac Kor.) γεγονέναι or δεικνύ- 
vac Kor. 

45 Punct. Legr., Maz., Wil., mapeé- 
ἠλλαξε: “τί; Lef., παρεξήλλαξέ τι αὐτή" 
(αὕτη - Leo) Leeu., Leo 

46 “αὐτὴ... «σε. “καὶ “Badite. 
χέσπαται Ὁ. after Legr., Maz., Wil., 
who include καὶ in the quotation, and 


, 
5. sneer Ξ: 


Lef., who construes τίτθη as nom. 
Leeu. gives ovk . . 
εὐτυχέστατα, to the nurse. 

48 7 Lef., yorw Kir.] ὦ Kir., ἢ Lef. 

49 Lef. 

50 κωγω] κἀγὼ Lef. 

51 ἐξῆλθον] ἐσῆλθον Let. 

55 εστιτουτοαυτησ) αὐτῆς ἐστι τοῦτο 
Cron;, Headey Leo, Maze Nice Walk, 
ἐστι τοῦτο ταύτης Ell., Kor. 

56 εμοι Lef., Ric., ἐμον Kir.) ἐμοῦ 
Lef. 

58 ουθ᾽] οὐθ᾽ Lef., ὅ γ᾽ or ovd (= 8 
érv) Wil., 085° Maz. 

64 πρῶτον] πρότερον Nitr. 

65 Lef. 

68 εξιονθ᾽ Lef., e.covd’ Kor.) εἰσι- 
ὀνθ᾽ Leeu., Sud., ἐξιόνθ᾽ Lef. 

69 ἀγορᾶς Legr., Leo, Maz. // ἐατέον 
Leeu., ΤῊ 
Lepr. δ ΔΙΑ, Nic... ΟΝ: 

70 τοῦτον Leeu., Sud., εἰς δόμον Rol., 


. oddév, Cron. ovFcK... 


Sud., πειρατέον Crois., 


τοῦτον οἴκαδε Leeu., τοῦτον ἐνθάδε Suil., 
τούτους. θ᾽ οὺς ἄγει Sud., cf. PL B54, τοὺς 
ἄλλους ἔσω Wil., τοῦθ᾽ ὅπως ἐρεῖ Leo, τοῦ 
μαθεῖν a δεῖ Rich. 

Welter 8. lettecemn ὁν lating ἐδ c Te) 
w(o).a(o)e(@)... ov KoOr.] ἔπειγε Bice πρὸς 
θεῶν Hense, Rob., ἐλέησον, πρὸς θεῶν 


Rob., 


Hense, ἐγὼ σκοπῶν σε δῆτ᾽ Kir., ἐπισκο- 


(μάγειρ)ε, τί λαλεῖς, πρὸς θεῶν 


x ea , < . ‘ ΄ 
πῶν σε δῆτ Crois., ἐγώ, μὰ τοὺς θεούς 


Wil., ἐπισφάζεις μ᾽, ἔγωγ᾽ Witr. 


~ 


Oe matte ae €.. 
6... Kér.] παῦσαι or παύου (παῦε Leeu.) 
Hense, πρὸς θεῶν Leeu., πάντα πάντως 
(πάντως Crois.), πρὸς θεῶν Kor., παντά- 
πασιν. May. σέ γε θέλων Maz. 

74 yeu 10 lett. vo] γ᾽ ἐμοί (or γέ μοι) 
Crén., Head., τί εἶ βαρὺς E.C., νὴ τοὺς 
θεούς Crois., Crén., Head., γε" μάτην 
λέγω λόγους Herw., Maz., so but w. 
δὲ ποῶ Crois., μῶν λέγω λόγους Kitr., 
γέ w ἐκτείνειν λόγους Hous., γέ μοι: ποιῶ 
λόγους Kir. // May. ἰδιῶτ᾽. Παρ. ἐγώ; 
May. δοκεῖς, κτὲ. Lef., May. ἰδιῶτ᾽! ἐγώ; 
Παρ. δοκεῖς, κτὲ. Leeu. (ἐδιῶτ᾽ : and ἐγώ: 
MS.) 

75 Lef. 

76 πόσαι γυναῖκές Lef. // εἰσι, πηνίκα 
Keil, εἰσ᾽, ὁπηνίκα Lef. 

81 εἴ ἢ Rob.// φίλτατ᾽ 1,6. 

83 παράγετ᾽] πάραγε μ ΕἸ ιν. 

84 :ναιχι:] σὲ ναίχι Wil., ναί, ναίχι 
Head., Leeu., νῦν; ναίχι Ell. 

85 σπυρίδα Leo, Maz. 

86 του 8(9) lett. dev KGr.] τούτου μὲν 
οὐδὲν F.C. after τοῦτον μὲν οὐδὲν Head., 
Kor., Leo, Wil., τούτων σε μὲν οὐδὲν 
Crois. // Παρ. (continuing) τοῦτον... 
δέσποτα Vv. 92 Leeu. (τύχῃ: and pa- 
ragraphus, and 
paragraphus below ν. 89 MS.) 


NavOdver:, πέπληχε: 

87 ro 8 lett. parrouevoy Lef., role, w) 
ΔΌΞΗΣ T(y)a(w)..parrouevov Kir.| τὠ- 
φθαλμιδίω E.C., πραττόμενον Lef., τό 
Ὑ ἐνθαδὶ Rich., τῶν ἐνθαδὶ Leeu., τούτου 
τὸ νῦν Crois., τὸν ἄνδρ ἔσω or τούτου δὲ 
πᾶν Wil., τοιουτονὶ Leo, τολμηρότατα 
Hense, τὸ πᾶν γ᾽ ὁρᾷ Head., τὸ τῇ Σαμίᾳ 
Kor., τῶν κρυπταδίων Schm., τηρεῖ τὸ 
πᾶν Maz., τηρεῖ δὲ πᾶν Rob. ,7 Leo, 
Maz., Rob., Wil. continue to Demeas 
(λανθάνει: MS.) 

88 Lef. 


89 Kor., Legr., Leo, give dlaye.. . 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


315 


δέσποτα to Parmenon, Lef. to Demeas. 
πέπληχε: and paragraphus MS. 

91 πρὸς θεῶν. Leo, κεραμίων. πρὸς θε- 
ὧν, Lef.// Maz. and Leo continue πρὸς 
θεῶν... δέσποτα to Parmenon, Παρ. 
πρὸς... δέσποτα Lef., Wil. (no indica- 
tion in MS. of change of speaker after 
κεραμίων) 

92 ποεινδευρ] ποεῖν; ἴθι δεῦρ᾽ Leo, 
Maz., ἄγε add. Lef., σε Ell., Wil., ἔτι 
δα, τῆς θύρας Lef.// θύρας " ἔτι Wil., 
θύρας | ἔτι Lef. 

93 δεινυνπ. ρ] δὴ νῦν, Παρμένων Lef., 
δεῖ νῦν, Παρμένων ---- Kor. 

94 Lef. 

95 ri γὰρ Lef., τί οὖν (or pe: τί) 
Eitr., τί δὲ Hense 

96 μ᾽, ἤσθημ᾽ ἔγώ (ἐγώ from vy. 97) 
Wil., μ᾽ ἤδη πάλαι Hense, με, Παρμένων 
Leo, τὸν δεσπότην Bod., Eitr., Leeu., με, 
νὴ Ala Rich., τῆς Ἑστίας Ell., Kor., ἐμὲ 
νῦν. Παρ. ἐγώ; (ἐγώ from y. 97) Sud. 

97 ἐγώ, written at beg. of v., trans- 
ferred to end of v. 96 by Head., Sud., 
Wil., deleted by Leeu. ,, Ἀπόλλω Let. 
//'yo pev ov Crois., Ell., Head. (or 
τουτονί), Leo, ἐγώ; μὰ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω, μὰ 
τὸν Διόνυσον, ov Nic. 

98 Lef. 

99 μηδέν᾽ Nic., μηδὲν Lef. ,,), καλῶς 
Leeu., Leo., Nic. //Tlap. ov. . 
Leeu, (no indication in MS. of change 


. καλῶς 


of speaker after ὄμνυ) 

100 » Head., Nic., Wil:, 4 Lef.// 
ade Lef., adodX Kir.] ἀδόλως Kor., ἐρῶ 
I.C., ἀδόλως βλέπω (Or γ᾽ ὁρῶ) Hense, 
ἀδόλως λέγω Schin., ἀδεῶς λέγε Wil. // 
Lef. gives the end of the ν. to Parme- 
non; so Hense, Sechm., Wil. continues 
to Demeas (δεῦρ᾽ : MS.) 

101 τίνος ἐστίν. Wil., contirmed by 
Kor., πρόσεστιν Lef.//Anu. τὸ... ἐστίν; 
Παρ. nv, τὸ παιδίον --- Wil., Hap. τὸ... 


πρόσεστιν; Anu. ἣν. TO... μητρός. Let. 


316 


102 rivoce 8 lett. c:yp...6.0:] τίνος 
ἐστὶ μητρός; Wap. Χρυσίδος Lef., :Xpu- 
σίδος: MS., Hap. τίνος ἔστ᾽ ἐρωτᾷς; Χρυ- 
σίδος Hous., Παρ. (continuing) τίνος ἔστι; 
μητρὸς Xpuaidos (or lap. τὸ παιδίον; Anu. 
τίνος ἐστὶ μητρός; Παρ. Χρυσίδος) Wil. 

103 oo 10 lett. wrac] σοῦ, νὴ Al. 
Any. ἀπόλωλας Let., σοῦ, δέσποτ᾽ Hense 

104 .. .cdtaxpiB....7ar.u Lef., €.we 
δακριβω..... τακαιπ(ηγε(σ) Kor. | ἐγῴδ᾽ 
Kor., Leeu., Leo, κάτοιδ᾽ Maz., ἀλλ᾽ οἶδ᾽ 
Herw., σύ, νὴ AC (or εὖ οἶδ᾽) Head., 
ἀκριβῶς Lef., πάντα Leeu., Leo, καὶ 
πέφραστ᾽ ἐμοὶ Leo, καὶ ἤσθημαι πάλαι 
Leeu., κῆσθημαι καλῶς Kor., καὶ πιστώ- 
σομαι Hense, καὶ πέπεισμ'᾽. ὁρᾷς Rob. 

105 Lef. 

NOG πὶ... ΠΥ τς παν ΟΠ τ ἐπ. τὰ 
(S)ia(e)k(v)....... 7 .tKhOr.] παιδίον Kor., 
ἐκεῖνον .C., διὰ τί Leo, πῶς διεκομίσθη, διὰ 
τί Leo, παῖδ᾽ ὄντ᾽ ἐκείνης ἣ τανῦν αὐτὴ Ell., 
τὸ παιδίον τίνος ἔσθ᾽ ὅ τι νῦν Sud. 

107 ..e¢7 10 lett. AN Lef., ...e¢n 
8(9) lett. AN Kor. | τί δὲ φής; Maz., épw- 
ras; Hense, ἀλλ᾽ Lef., τίς ἔφη: Anu. σύ 
Ὑ ἄφες τοῦτ᾽ Witr., ris ἔφη 6€-— Anu. μὴ 
κρύπτ᾽ Leeu., τίς ἔφη τάδ᾽; Anu. οὐδείς 
Leo, τίς ἔφη δ᾽; Anu. ἐρωτᾷς: Hense, οὔ 
ῴησι τούτου Ὑ Rob. 

108 τισδεστιν Let., τινοσεστιν Kor. | 
τίνος ἐστίν: Kor, τίς δ᾽ ἐστίν. Let., τού- 
τοῦ στιν, Leen. //te...... Ce A sone 
7 0(a,€) INOM |celma, Wor, dec σε 15.0%, 
εἶπά σοί pe (or εἶπα πάντα) NKor., εἶπε 
πάντα Rob., εἰκός σ᾽ οὐδὲ Wil., ἐν τόδ᾽ οἶδα 
Leo, éué 5 ef ἴσθι Maz., ἔφην δὲ mavra 
Lef., a σὺ mavra Wous., éué yé pnuc 
ΠῚ 1 ο}νςς 

112. ἡληγ :}) ἤδη Ὑ Leo. Rich. ἢ Ry 
Lef.. a éy Kor., Πρ απόχωνχα. Let., 
ἀπόλωλα: Wil. 

113 ypovor] χθονός Let. 

114 Anu. (continuing) ὦ Lef, (αἰ ὴρ: 
MS.) τὼ 


ἔστι χρὴ, δὲ. Leen. 


ἘΠ Lee, τὸν rt Let, 


MENANDER 


[SAMIA 


118 » 8 lett. vor Koér.] 7 Crois., 
Cron., Hitr., Ell., Hense, Herw., Kor., 
Leo, κρατούμενος KoOr., Leeu., πεπληγμέ- 
vos Hense, Herw., κατεχόμενος Leo, 'vay- 
κασμένος (OV BeBiacuévos) Lead., παρηγμέ- 
vos Crois., Cron. 

119 Lef. 

120 ἂν Herw., Ké6r., Legr., Ico, 
Maz., Nic., Rich., Wil.//dcavolas Crois. 
//as Ell., Werw., πρὸ τοῦ Leeu., ἧς τὸ 
πρὶν Herw., ἧς πάλαι Ell., ὡς τὸ πρὶν 
Crois., ὡς πρὸ τοῦ Leeu., κἄτι νῦν Maz., 
καὶ τὰ νῦν KGr., viv ἔτι Rich., Sud., 
Wil. 

121 rer.0..€. Lef., τεπεθετ᾽ α. Kir] 
τ᾽ ἐπέθετ᾽ Leeu., Leo (-ero), Sud., con- 
firmed by Kor., ἂν Leeu. 

122 φανενταδ᾽ aitw| φανέντ᾽ (ad del. 
Lef.) αὐτῷ Bod., Crén., Kir., Leeu., 
Leo, Niec., Wil., φανένθ᾽ αὑτῷ Left. 

123 epay Lef. 
Wil., confirmed by Kor. 

126 Lef. 

120 1 ΠΡ Mave ACh \alli 

128 οὐκ δέτε HWead., Leo, Wal., 


οὐκ ὄντα γ᾽ (é€vom.) Crois., κοὐκ ὄντ᾽ Head. 


ἐρων Kor. | ἐρῶν Leo, 


5 


// δ᾽ εργαζεται) δ᾽ ἔργ ἐργάζεται Leen., 
Leo, δείν᾽ ἐργάζεται Wil., δῆτ᾽ ἐργάζεται 
Maz., 5° ἐξεργάζεται Head., Rich. 

129 τοιαῦτ᾽ Head. ἀνόητ᾽ Leo.cdd οἶδ᾽ 
Horw., et ofS’ Wil., καὶ δείν᾽" Leeu., Maz., 
πολύς τ 121]. Keil. 

ον τς τὰ κ WGr.| καιρόν Herw., ὙΠ 
τρίτον Leo, τὸν οὐκ Crols., τιν οὐκ Wor., 
τὸν μηδ᾽ Rich., παῖδ᾽ οὐκ Wil. // τοι] mw 
Pole ον ΠΣ τ" ποῦ ποῖ ς 
Ἀπ alte Ie 

131 τοῦτ᾽ Crois., ἀλλ᾽ Leo, οἶδ᾽ Leeu. 
77) οὐδέπω Crois, 

132, 133 Crois, 


134 ot6 ef Leeu.. Leo, ef Καὶ Arn., 


TOTa Gi 


Kor.. Lear, ef wn Crois. 
μη 
136 ἄνθρωπος Lecu., ἅνθρωπος 1,07. 


ὄλεθρος Leeu, 


SAMIA ] CRITICAL 

139 τατυμημεν] τἀτύχημα μὲν Rich., 
Sud. 

147 Anu. ἐκ... σεαυτόν Kor., Leeu., 
Legr., Leo, Maz., Nic., to Parmenon 
Lef. 

149 τις Leo, Wil., ris Lef. 

150 ποι Lef., παι Kor.] παῖ Leo, 
Nic., confirmed by Kor. 

151 ποσιδω] 

153 μου] μοι Kor. 

154 παντ᾽ 

158 Anu. eis... ἤδη. Xpv. δύσμορος. 
Anu. ναί... οἴομαι Ell., Leo, Nic., Wil. 
(no indication of change of speaker at 
end of v. 156, δάκρυον: without paragra- 
phus MS.), Xpv. (continuing) es... 
ἤδη; Anu. δύσμορος. Xpv. val... δάκρυον; 
. οἴομαι Lef. 

160 rowvear] 

162 καντι Lef., και: τι Kor.) καὶ ---. 
᾿ Eitr., confirmed by Κῦτ. // 
Anu. διὰ τοῦτο Kal—Xpv. τί “καί, ΕΟ, 
after Leo (Anu. διὰ τοῦτο. Χρυ. καὶ --- 
Anu. τί “καί;᾽), Sud. (Anu. διὰ τοῦτο to 
end of y.), and Eitr. (Χρυ. ὅτι... 
Anu. τί “kal;”’) (no indication of change 
of speaker after ἀνειλόμην or after 
rovro in MS. ; καῖ: ré wai: MS.). Lef. 
gives the whole vy. to Chrysis 


Anu. παύσω... 


᾿ 
τί “kal; 


Ka 


163 κακονμανθανω"]) οὐ add. Ell., Sud., 
Wil., νῦν Keil, Leo, Nic. // Anu. (con- 
tinuing) da... κακόν. Xpv. οὐ μανθάνω 
Ell., Wil. (no indication in MS. of 
change of speaker after κακόν). Leeu., 
Sud. give the whole v. to Chrysis, Lef. 
to Demeas, Leo, Koér., Rob. continue 
the whole ν. to Demeas (τί καί: MS.) 

164 Anu. τρυφᾶν... ἠπίστασ᾽ Lef. 
(μανθάνω " Without paragraphus MS.) 

166 Punct. Leo, Wil., Χρυσί μανθά- 
vers πάνυ; Lef, 

167 airw: Lef., 
Kor., Leo, Wil. 

168 δετισ.. Lef., δετισ. (i.e. space 


λιτω: Kor.) λιτῷ 


APPENDIX 317 
for :) Kor.] δὲ rls; Leeu., Leo, δὲ τί 
σε; Wil., δ᾽ ἔτι oe — Lef. // Anu. μή μοι 
λάλει Lef., δὲ ris[: ] MS. 

169 ἔχεις and πάντα: Sud., ὁρᾷς" 
and πάντα προστίθημί Lef. 

170 6 lett. missing before θ]εραπαί- 
vas Lef., 8 (or 4) Kor.] ἰδού Rob., υἱόν 
(or ἔτι) Kor., ταδί Leo, κόσμον Lef. // 
θεραπαίνας Lef., θεράπαιναν Sud.//xpvar] 
χρυσί᾽ Lef., Χρυσί Rob. 

171 ris ἐστι Kor., Legr., Leo, Wil., 
tis: és τί Lef. 

172 Xpv. (continuing) βέλτιστ᾽, ὅρα 
Lef. (προσιτέον: MS.) // μὴ δακῇς Leo, 
μὴ δάκῃς Lef., μάδικῇς Hous, 

175 οὔπω Leeu., οὕτω Crois., τούτῳ 
Wil. “δάκνει. E.C., δάκνει | ὅμως. Leeu., 
δάκνει; Wil. 

177 Χρυ. καὶ... ἰδού E.C., Xpv. καὶ 
... ἤδη Lef., Anu. (continuing) καὶ δι- 
καίως. Xpv. ἀλλ᾽ ἰδού. Rob., Anu. (con- 
tinuing) καὶ δικαίως. Χρυ. ἀλλ᾽... ἤδη. 
Leo, Nic. (διαλέγῃ: and paragraphus 
MS.) 

178 εἰσέρχομ᾽] ἀπέρχομ Kor., Leo, 
ἐξέρχομ᾽ Crois., Nic.// Anu. εἰσέρχομ᾽ ἤδη 
Rob., Sud. (no indication in MS. of 
change of speaker after ἰδού), Anu. 
(continuing) τὸ μέγα... ἡμάρτανες ν. 
185 E.C. (ἤδη: MS. without paragra- 
phus), Xpv. (continuing) εἰσέρχομ᾽ ἤδη. 
Anu. τὸ μέγα... ἡμάρτανες Lef., Χρυ. τὸ 
μέγα πρᾶγμ᾽. Anu. ἐν TH... ἡμάρτανες 
Rob., Sud. (no indication in MS. of 
change of speaker after πρᾶγμ᾽) 

180 σε. Χρυσί] σ᾽ ἑταῖραι. Xpvoi Leeu., 
Leo, transferring ἑταῖραι from ν. 181,7 
δραχμὰς δέκα) δέκα Leeu., Leo, trans- 
ferring δραχμὰς to v. 181 

181 μόνας ἑταῖραι] δραχμὰς 
Leeu., Leo // ἑταῖραι ἕτεραι 
Rich., det (or πολὺν) Maz., κόραι Nic. 


μόνας 
Head., 
Kor. proposes to leave v. unchanged 


(ἑταῖραι τ. _, cf. Men. 727K. There, 


318 


however, read 7 7 ἑταίρα. διαφανὲς) // 
διατρέχουσ᾽ K.C., δὴ τρέχουσ᾽ Crois. // 
ταδειπνα] δεῖπνα (del. τὰ) Crois. 

182 και, ἡ written above] 7 Crois., 
BNE Meal. beeurs, eo. «Maz. Niles, 
καὶ Lef. 

186 εγωτησ] ἔγωγε τῆς Leo, Maz., 
Wil., τάλαινα τῆς ἐμῆς τύχης ἐγώ Head. 

198 προσ, θε Written above] πρόσθε 
ΓΟ: 

194 κλαιουσ᾽] κλάουσ᾽; Head., Leeu., 
κλαίουσ᾽. Lef. 

195 ποτ᾽ ἐστιτο] ποτε τὸ (lel. ἔστι) 
Head., Leeu., Leo, ποτ᾽ ἔστι (del. τὸ) 
19}: 

199 ἐμβροντησία) ἐμβροντησίας Rich., 
ἐμβροντησίᾳ (construed w. preceding) 
Leeu, 

200 ff. Xpu. otc. . 
Wil. (ἡδύς or novs:, Without paragra- 


. ἐκκέκλεικε NIC., 


phus, ἀρτίως: and paragraphus MS.), 
Nex. (Continuing) οὐκ... ἀρτίως. Χρυ. 
OS. w τἐκκεέκλείκευ oC li 

202, 203 Leff. 

204 yoda Arn. Cron., Fitr., Herw., 
Wor Maz-// Anuéas ΧΟΝαΣ 15. 0 An- 
uéas; yoda: Cron., Anudas χολᾷ. Arh., 
ts ShIGiWe INGIt, ov lez: 

345 ἀλλὰ Lef., ἄλλα Wor. // ἐλθὼν --- 
Leeu., éov; Kor, Rob. μικρόν 
. 27) οἴχεται 
lef... ofyoua Wil. // Anu. adda... . ἘὰΞ 


B.C. pexpor. w trav! eae 


fov Lef.. Anu. adda . . Tar — Nex. 
οἴχεται - - - Taen., (ἐλθών: Without pa- 


racgraphus MS... noindication of change 
of speakerafter ταν). Leeu. recognized 
Niceratis as the second speaker 

346 πανταταπραγματὶ πᾶν, Ta πρά- 
“ματ᾽ Cron, Leo, πάντα Tr pay uar Werw.,, 
Wil.. maura: τέλος ἔχει τὰ πράγματ᾽" dva- 
τέτραπται Crois., Head. // νηδια]) νὴ τὸν 
Nay (iii MeniaAvoe Lok tan: νῷν. vy 
Ata), ἌΤΗΝ 

348 ἀνήμωπος Let... ἄνθρωπος Wil, 


MENANDER 


[SAMIA 


351 Lef. 

852 θύσειν Leo//...eumpnoey| εἶτα 
πρήσειν (Written εἶτ᾽ ἐμπρήσειν) Leo, φη- 
oi πρήσειν Wil. // υιωδουν] ὑϊδοῦν Rich., 
Sud., εἶτα δοῦν Leo 

353 opor(u).(.)p....-- (.)επληχεὶ 
ὄψομ Wil., Ἡράκλεις Kir., ὄψον Let., 
ὄψον ἀρτύσειν Rich., Sud., ὄψον ᾿Ατρειδῶν 
Keil, ὄψον ἑσπέρας Rob. //7 add. Let. 

8984: “σ Κῆγ, cache νθρωποσ)] σκηπτός, οὐκ 
ἄνθρωπος (οὐκ omitted in MS.) Crois. 

359 ᾿Δηϊξ, τῆς-.:: 
(continuing) τῆς γυναικός. 


αὐτόχειρ Lef., Nex. 
Anu. αὐτό- 
χερὶ Leeu. {γένωμαι MS.), so Leo, 
reading however γυναικός τ΄. 

360 αὕτη Leeu., αὐτή Lef., αὐτῇ 
Leeu., Leo, Nie. 

861 Nex. cold’... προειπεῖν Wil., Left. 
continues to Demeas (Νικήρατε: MS.) 

368 μονομαχήσω Ell., Cron., Kor., 
Leen., Leo, μονομάχης ὦ Lef. 

872 eywoe Lef., eywye Nor.] ἔγωγε 
Eitr., Leeu. // Nex. ἐγώ oe. Anu. θᾶττον 
Deen μον Nikeresy Wiel! δα τ τον σ᾽ 
Leeu. (: ἔγωγε : MS.) 

SS Kise Te MCh. aK crys ΚΟΡΗ eRe 
ywye [δούς κέκραγε Kor. // Lef, con- 
tinues to Demeas, Nua. adda pny... 
Anu. φεῦγε, Χρυσί. Nex. κρείττων ἐστί 
μου Rob. (noindication in MS. Οὐ change 
of speaker after κἄγωγε and Xpual) 

374 ar.@. 
Kor., ἄπιθι Let. // Nex. πρότερος 
MS.). Anu. (con- 


, Ae Aa PRs ΑἹ 
νυνί. Nix. τοῦτ ἐγὼ 


Lef., amrea KoOr.| are 


μαρτύρομαι Leo (νυνί: 
tinting) πρότερος... 
μαρτύρομαι Let.. so Rob., who however 
hecins Demeas’ speech w. πρότερος. Nex. 
mporepos... νυνί. Anu. τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ μαρτύ- 
ρομαι Leen, 

375 ovd'e 11 lett. Lef., ovd'e.e... Oe 
Dives or, | suppl. Leo 

376 (7) lett. Keo) καὶ dedwecs: Rob., 
i ees pee eee ar = 
οἷον ἀδικεῖς Lecu., οὐ τόδ᾽ ἀδικεῖς. Wil., 


ἦ γὰρ ἀδικεῖς Leo 


SAMIA] 


277 οὐ δίδως Kiér., ἀποδίδως Wil. // 
τοὐμόν; Leo, τοὐμόν. Lef. 

Pit Nec τς u(u, dr) Kér.] πείσομ᾽ E.C., 
τύπτομ᾽ Wil., feré μ᾽ Kir., καὶ μάλ᾽ Leo 
// Anu. ... ὥνθρωποι. Nix. κέκραχθι... 
εἰσιών Lef., Anu. 
Anu. κέκραχθι. Nix. τὴν... 
wvOpwro: and Kéxpax&: MS. 

379 Anu. rh... δή Leeu., Leo (no 
indication in MS. of change of speaker 
after εἰσιών but paragraphus below), 
Lef. gives τί yap ποήσω; to Niceratus, 
τοῦτο. .. to Demeas (after ποήσω a 
slight lacuna) 

881 σαυτον] σεαυτὸν Crén., Head., 
Leo, Nic., Wil. // Anu. κάτεχε δὴ σεαυ- 
τόν Leeu., Leo, Wil. (no indication in 
MS. of change of speaker after por), 
Lef. continues to Niceratus 

385 δεου) “περιπάτησον Crois., Crén., 
Ell., Legr., Leo, Wil. // ενθαδιμικρο] 
ἐνθαδὶ, transferring μικρὰ to beg. of v. 
416, Crén., Head., Legr., Leo, Wil., 
μικρὸν del. Crois., Leeu. 

386 μικρὰ (from v.385) Cron., Head., 
Legr., Leo, Wil., Bara Crois., Bpayd re 
Leeu., μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ μικρόν Nic. // περιπατή- 
ow; Leeu., Leo Χ7 cea 10 lett. λαβε Lef., 
gea 7 (8) lett. λαβε Kir. | σεαυτὸν Crén., 
ΕἸ]. Head., Legr., Leo, Wil., κατάξ 
λαβε Leo, σύλλαβε Ell., Wil., ἀνάλαβε 
Croén., Head., Legr. 

387 εἰπεμοιλεγον 9 lett. τε] λεγόντων 


Nex. ὥνθρωποι. 
εἰσιών Leo, 


Lef., λεγόντων, εἰπέ μοι Ell., Head., 
Legr., Leo, Nic., Rich., Wil., Νικήρατε 
Wil., σὺ πώποτε Head., συχνόν ποτε 
Leo, & φίλτατε Leg. 

388 of 8 lett. ceppyn] χρυσὸς ὁ Ζεὺς 
(written ὁ Ζεὺς χρυσὸς) Cron., Ell, 
Head., Ko6r., Legr., Leo, Nic., Wil. 

389 διατου] διὰ (τοῦ del.) Crois.// At 
endl..2. =. efi. way. δι] πότε Leer, 
Wil., mavu Kor., λάθρᾳ Crén., Crois., 
λαβών Ell., Leo (or ἔνδον wr), θεός Kitr, 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


319 


391f. ro... ζευσ Lef., ro. . eyous Kor. ] 
τοῦ τέγους Wil., confirmed by Kér. // 
Nix. τὸ πλεῖστον... ἐστί Wil. (no indi- 
cation in MS. of change of speaker 
after pez), Anu. (continuing) — el... τὸ 
πλεῖστον; Nex. ἀλλὰ... ἐστί Lef., πλεῖ- 
στον: MS. Lef., πλεῖστον. MS. Kir. // 
τοτὲ White, τότε. 

898 ὕδωρ. ὁρᾶς: Rob., ὕδωρ, ὁρᾷς" Let. 
//éorw. Leeu., Leo, Nic., ἐστιν ὡς 1,61. 

394 Anu. μὰ... ohv—Cron., Head., 
Leo, Wil. (no indication in MS. of 
change of speaker after we), Nex. (con- 
tinuing) μὰ τὸν Ἀπόλλω. Anu. ᾽γὼ μὲν 
ov... σὴν Lef. (no indication in MS. 
of change of speaker after ᾿Απόλλω) 

397 ἐσκεύακέν] ἐχλεύακέν Nic. 

398 εστινακριβωστογεγενημενον] ἔστ᾽, 


TOTO Στὸν .. τότε alii 


ἀκριβῶς οἶδα, Ell., Leo, Wil., οἶδ᾽ ἀκρι- 
Bas, ἔστι Leeu., ἔστ᾽, ἀκριβῶς ἴσθι (or 
ἴσθ᾽ ἀκριβῶς, ἔστι Head., τὸ γεγεννημένον 
Leeu., τὸ γεγενημένον Left. 

400 γεγονός. KGr., γεγονός; Let. 

403 σοι διὰ κενῆς] διὰ κενῆς σοι Rich. 

404 παιδα.] παῖδας (const. w. foll.) 
Leo, παῖδας (w. τρέφει for τρέχει Lef.) 
Crois; Bil, Mead Wome bear, να; 
Rich., πηδᾷ Crén., Leo, Wil, παίζει 
Kitr., Sud., χλιδᾷ Leeu. 

405 περιπατεῖ λευκός " CrOn., Schin., 
περιπατεῖ, λευκὸς Lef., MéXas περιπατεῖ 
ANevkds* Leo 

406 συδ᾽ αξεισφα. ται Lef., ovd avec 
σῴαττοι Kir. ] οὐδ᾽ ἂν ef σφάττοι Crois., 
Crom. ΠΟ το. shes. ΤῸΝ uch, seme 
firmed by Kor, who had proposed 
οὐδ᾽ av εἰ σφάξαι 

408 13 lett. κοσηνμε..... οὐμοσ Let. 
15 lett. κεσηνμο. ..«οὐμοὸσ Wor.] σοὶ δὲ 
κηδεῦσ᾽ E.C., εἰκὸς ἦν Rich... woe, καὶ οὐ- 
pos Wil... καὶ θυγατέρα πέμπε σὴν μοι, 
καὶ οὑμὸς Wil, 

409 ἐσ. .ου.. 
Lef., 


MONN πο flo eM PUVENE 


ἐσιεο. ἀπολλί(μ)....μιύμίυνεχε.. 


320 


Kor., who states that everything be- 
tween ἐσ and πο is very uncertain] 
ἑστιάσει τοὺς γάμους μοι 1".("., νοῦν Lef., 
ἔχεις Kor., Nex. νοῦν ἔχεις E.C., Nex. 
(continuing) ἐστὶν εὐκτὰ (written ἐστ᾽ ευ- 
κτα) πολλὰ νῦν μοι. Anu. νοῦν ἔχεις Kir, 
(μοι- MS. without paragraphus), ἐστὶ 
τοῦτο: πόλλ᾽ ὀφείλει Rob., ἐστὶ πᾶσι 
πολλά’ νῦν δὲ νοῦν ἔχε Leeu., at end 
ἔμαθε νοῦν ἔχειν Sud, 
4100. 0.0 προ ΠΕΣ 8% nee δ(α) 
.. mapo(e,w)Ev(i).... Kor.) βαβαιάξ: μὴ 
(uh Leeu.) παροξυνθεὶς (παροξυνθεὶς Sud.) 
βόα E.C., παροινῶν, viv παροξυνθεὶς βοᾷς; 
Sud., τεκοῦσα μὴ παροξύνου μάτην Leeu., 
βραδύνας, νῦν παρέξω πάντ᾽ ἐγώ Wil. // 
Nix. (continuing) εἰ δ᾽ ἐλήφθη τότε. 
Anu. βαβαιάξ.. 
(“hinter τότε Woh] Doppelpunkt” Kor.) 
and paragraphus MS. Lef., Rob., Sud. 
continue the whole y. to Demeas 


; ein ae ae 
. evrperh E.C., tore: 


411 roinuaramapenod..... ] Nex. 26- 
nua τὰ παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ δὴ Δαιδάλου Leo, Anu. 
(continuing) ποῆσον, τὰ παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ δ᾽ ἑτοι- 
μάσω (or ἕτοιμ᾽ ἔχω if 441 b belongs to 
Demeas) Leeu. {εὐτῥέπηνς MS.), Nex. 
ποίημα τὰ map ἐμοὶ Διὸς χάριν (OY δοκεῖ 
σχεδόν) ΟΥ ποιήματ᾽ ἐστὶ τὰ map ἐμοὶ Διός 
Wil., Νικ. τἄνδον εὐτρεπῆ; ποήματα κτέ. 
Rob., Sud. (no indication in MS. of 
change of speaker at end of v. 440) 

412 θεοῖς ἔχω Lef., θεοῖς ἄγω Wil. 
// Ane. κομψὸν ef... end of v. 445 
Leeu. (ef: MS. without paragraphus), 
» Left, Anu. 
SANE 
Ἰὰς “δῇ 


Nix. κομψὸς εἶ. Anu. χάριν... 
κομψὸς εἶ. Nix. χάριν... 
418 πραγμάτων κακῶν 
Crois., τῶν κακῶν Leo, εἰδέναι Wil., ὑπο- 
νοεῖν Sud., γεγονέναι Hense, συμπεσεῖν 
Rich., δυσχερῶν or δυσκόλων Mitr. , ὠόμην 
(for ᾧμην) ἐγώ Kor., ὠόμην κακῶν Leen, 

4.1.4. 1}: τ MO aerate leet 
TLOv ΠΣ Kor, } 


μόλις (Or μόνον) KOr., πάλιν 
Sud. 


MENANDER 


[SAMIA 


415 Lef. 

416 éuaur@ Lef.//...... vo(w) Kor. } 
νενομικὼς Hous., γενόμενον Sud., λαμβά- 
νων Kor. 

417 v 9 lett. ode Lef., νπ.λ(δ).ρ 
(not B)....(.)wode KOr.!, ur. A. p... wade 
Kor.’ ] bréuapyos* E.C., ὑπέλαβον" Sud., 
@sderswtln /j/eiasers evv....ouat Lef., ua 
AA. VEVPO..... vouat Kor.] μᾶλλον Kor., 
ἔννους γίγνομαι Nic., Rich. 

418 Crois. 

419 παρώξυμμαι Lef.//..capa Lef., 
Kor.] σφόδρα Arn., Cron., 
Herw. Work Lesrs eo, Rich. 

424 avric] 

431 Crois. 

432 rop& lett. τουτ᾽ | περιόψομαι Maz., 
Meade vikiehes 
Crois., παροπτέον (or παρόψομαι) Hense, 
φέρειν θέλω Leeu., φορεῖν θέλω (OY φορη- 


εν οδρα 


περιοπτέον πορευτέον 


τέον) Kor., φέρειν με δεῖ Wil., πορίζομαι 
Crén, // μόνον] μὲν οὖν Rob. 

435 αὐτ.σ΄... δεν] αὗτις (αὖθις) Hous., 
αὐτὸς Lef., μηδὲν Let. 

AST Aor eich, 

438 Lef. 

445 Lef. 

446 αὕτη Leo, Wil., αὐτή Crois. // 
αἴτιος Crois, 

447,448 Left. 

449 τι στο Tef., rioma... Kor.) res 
Lef., τις. πάλιν Wil., παρών Leo, πατρί 
Rob., rére Lef., 76 wav Rich. 

4 0 το es ενων] τί ἸΓαρμένων Kor., 
τί δὲ ἸΤαρμένων Let. // πεποιήηκεν] 

451 οὐδέν. τί οὖν Luf.//epuyecoutwe | 
ἔφυγες σύ: πῶς ELC. ἔφυγες σύ γ᾽ wd 
White, οὕτως ἔφυγες Head... Leo, Rich. 

Δ, δι. ΛΕ ΔΙῸ Σ ΠΣ ΞΕ ες (.)e 
Kir. ] édedurrer’ ἐμὲ, H.C .. wai decNbrare: 
Arn., ὠνείδισέ pe Rob... ἐπέδησαν ἐμέ 
Sud... dre Anudas Leen. 

453 ete 


...(.)uadn... Nor.] origey Wor., στ ἐξ εὐ 


τὰ, led Sella ΕΣ ELV 


SAMIA | 


Leeu., τί μεμαθηκώς; E.C. after μεμαθη- 
κὼς τί; Leeu., με: μεμαθηκώς Leo, ἔμ᾽ ws 
μάθῃ τι KGr., ἵνα μάθῃ πᾶν ΝΥ 1]. 7) διαφέρει 
ἘΠῚ ὙΠ δι}. // os 03: Tpt UCL. κυρ τε: ρν(ὴ 
Kér.] δ᾽ οὐδὲ yp) Wiebe 

454 παθεῖν Arn., Leeu., ποεῖς Rob., 
ποεῖν Litr. 

455 πάντα τρόπον Sud., παντάτοπον 
Kor. 
Wil. 

457 ποιησων) 

460 roe] ,,, εἰ] 7... ἱμάντα. Leeu., 


, πᾶν ταϊσχρὸν Leeu., πᾶν αἰσχρὸν 


ἢ . ἱμάντα; Kor., εἶ; λήψομαι Wil. 
461 Crois. 
462 Lef. 
CASS ey ear actrae ξαι Lef., μουλ(δ)ε()ο(θ) 


ολ(δ)ι(η) Ικῦν. 1, μουλιθαδι Ιζῦν.2] μοὐνθαδὶ 
Head., Leeu. 

464 αλλ᾽ ωσ] ἄλλως Arn., Kitr.,Head., 
Kor., Leeu., Nic., Sud. //rivds* Leeu., 
τίνος; Lef., δεῖ yap: Kor., δεῖ yap εἶθ᾽ 
Lef., τίνος δ᾽; εἰ yap εἶθ᾽ Rob. 

4ρδ οσθησομ Lef., πε. σθησομ᾽ 
KG6r.] πεισθήσομ᾽ Eitr., Ἠδαᾶ., Kor., 
Leeu., Nic., Sud., προσθήσομ᾽ Head. // 
μόνον Arn., Head., δεῖ μ᾽ ὅλον Rob. 

466 Crois. 

467 mp8 lett. υραν Kor.] προιὼν Leo, 
Sud., προσιὼν Lef., τὴν θύραν Lef. 

468 ff. Kor. recognized the speakers 
as Parmenon and Moschion, not De- 
meas and Moschion (Lef.)//...... be 
Lef., rwve...d¢ KGr.] τῶν ἐνθάδε Arn., 
Head., Kor., Sud., Wil. 

470 κενῆς Crén., Head., Kér., Wil., 
confirmed by Kir.//eue...¢7'. «οἱσ: Lef., 
ereey... ur(7) ἡτεισ: Kir] εἰ πιέξων τοῦτ᾽ é- 
xyes ῦ.(᾽., ἐξιών" τι δῆτ᾽ Exes; Werw. 

471, re ays 
Kor., ἄγουσι Rich. //a..ook..av(vurc 
written above) Lef., οινοσκεραν(νυται 
written above) Kor.] κεράννυται (del. 


Lef., -m.ou.e Kor.] ποοῦσι 


οἶνος) Kor. 


472 ovma.y...... θυμιαματι 


CRITICAL APPENDIX 


321 


.. a7’ Kor.) Oumar’ (1.6. θυμιαματι cor- 
rected to θυμιατ᾽) E.C.//re add. E.C. 
// θυματ᾽] θύμαθ᾽ Herw., Rob., θυμία 
μ' ἀνάπτεταί τι θῦμα θ᾽ (written θυμίαμά 
τι θῦμα τ᾽ ἀνάπτεται θῦμα τ᾽) Leo, θυμία- 
γαμῶν ἄναπτε θῦμαθ᾽ Rob., θυμιᾶται 
τ᾽ ἠδ᾽ ἀνάπτει θύμαθ᾽ Herw.//..7- Lef., 
Brac KGr.] βίᾳ Kor., Leo 

473 ro add. Leo, παῖ Hous., Sud., 
δὴ Kor., Wil., νῦν Ell., καὶ γάρ oe Legr. 

474 cue. rnv..ida] ἐμὲ τὴν Lef., παῖ- 
δα Arn., Leeu., Leo, Sud., χλαμύδα 
Kor., Nic., Wil., Παρ. τὴν παῖδα --- 
Moo. μέλλεις; Leeu. (space for : after 
ἐμέ, but no indication in MS. of change 
of speaker after μέλλει). Those who 
read χλαμύδα, for which Kor. says the 
space does not suffice, give ἐμέ, τί... 
μέλλεις to Moschion 

475 f. ecr.cw Lef., ἐστ᾽ σον. Kor.] 
ἐστί σοι Kor., Sud.// Moo. νουθετήσεις 

. mat KGr., Sud., Wil. (BovAe-, ἱερό- 
aude: mat MS.), Moo. τί βούλει... lepd- 
συλε; — παῖ Lef. (no indication in MS. 
of change of speaker after θάρρει) 

477 Crois.//Tlap. διακέκομμαι τὸ στό- 
μα Kor., Nic., so Wil. but to Demeas 
(no indication in MS. of change of 
speaker after φημι). Lef. continues to 
Moschion 

478 ἔτι Crois., λαλεῖς Kor., Wil. // 
ἐξεύρηκά τε Lef., ἐξεύρηκα δὲ Wil., ἐξευ- 
ρήκατε Leeu., Leo 

479 μέγαν Kor., Wil., rl τὸ Crois., 
κακόν Crois., φάρμακον Rob. // οντωσι) 
ὄντως Lef., ἰδού Kor., Leo, Nic., Sud., 
ὄντως; ἴθι Head. //Those who supply 
ἰδού continue to Parmenon, Moo. ἴθι 
Koér.? (no indication in MS, of change 
of speaker after ὄντως). Head. (read- 
ing ἴθι) continues to Moschion 

4S Qetirs kn ovaluetic, save p(c)ov Wor. | 
σπεῦσον Arn., Ell., Rich., ὕστερον Kor., 
αἰσχρόν. Rob., δολερὸν Schim., βλέψον Lef. 


ὍΣ 


481 Head., Kir., Leeu., Legr., Leo, 
Nic., Rich., Sud. 

482 ἀπιέναι Leeu., Nic., Rich., Sud., 
μ᾽ ἀπιέναι Kir. // Punct. Leo : 

483 εἰκότως Witr., Sud., ῥᾳδίως Leeu., 
Rob., ἀλλ᾽ tows Legr., Nic., ἀλλ᾽ ὅπως 


MENANDER 


[SAMIA 


Sud. // ἐὰν δὲ --- E.C., ἐὰν δέ; Kor., ἐᾶν 
δέ; Lef. 

484 γίγνεται Nic., οἴχεται KOr., οἵ- 
xer, εἰ Head. 

Fr. 437 Τρύφη Scaliger, τρυφῇ MS. 
Phrynichus 


BIBLIOGRAPHY ! 


EpITIO PRINCEPS 


Fragments d’un manuscrit de Ménandre découverts et publiés par GusTAVE 
LEFEBVRE. Le Caire 1907. 


ARTICLES, PAMPHLETS, Books, AND CRITICAL REVIEWS 


H. von Arnim, ‘‘ Neue Reste von Komédien Menanders,’’ Zeitschr. f. 
osterr. Gymn. LVIII (1907), pp. 1057 ff. Critical text of the Epitre- 
pontes. 

«Zu den neuen Bruchstiicken Menanders,’’ Hermes NLIII (1903), 
p- 168. 

‘*Zu Menanders Perikeiromene,’’ Zeitschr. f. 6sterr. Gymn. LX (1910), 
ὉΡ-1π| 

«Kunst und Weisheit in den Komédien Menanders,’’ N. Jahrb. { d. 
klass. Alt. XXV (1910), pp. 241 ff. 

E. Berne, «* Der Chor bei Menander,”’ Ber. d. sichs. Gesell. d. Wiss. 1908, 
pp. 209 ff. 

L. Boprn, “ Notes sur l’Arbitrage de Ménandre,”’ Rey. de philol. NNNII 
(1908), pp. 75 ff. 

L. Bonin et P. Mazon, Extraits d’Aristophane et de Ménandre. Texte gree 
publié avec une introduction et des notes. Paris 1908. The extracts 
from Menander are E. 1-201, 663-707, 850-919, S. 2-204, of this 
edition. 

Epwarp Capps, ““ Notes on Menander’s Epitrepontes,’’ Berl. phil. Woch. 
1908, cols. 1198 ff. 

‘+ Notes on the New Menander,”’ ibid. 1908, cols. 1230 ff. 

‘¢ The Plot of Menander’s Epitrepontes,’”? Am. Jour. Phil. NNTX (1908), 
pp. 410 ff. 

“On the Text of Menander’s Epitrepontes, with Notes on the Heros,” 
ibid. XXX (1909), pp. 22 ff. 

C. G. Coser, « Menandri fragmenta inedita,’’ Mnem. TV (1876), pp. 285 ff. 
First publication of the St. Petersburg fr. 2a. pp. 94 ff. of this edition. 


1 Items marked with the asterisk have not been accéssible to the present editor, 
323 


324 MENANDER 


M. Crotset, +‘ Nouveaux fragments de Ménandre,’’ Jour. des sav. 1907, 
pp. 513 ff., 633 ff. 
Ménandre: L’Arbitrage. Paris 1908. Critical edition, with transla- 
tion and notes, first published in Rey. des ét. gree. NXT (1908), 
pp. 235 ff. 


”” 


“1.6 Dernier des Attiques Ménandre,’? Rev. de deux mondes 1909, 
pp. 5 ff. 

W. Cronerrt, Rev. of Lefebvre’s edition, Lit. Centralbl. 1907, cols. 15-41 ff. 

Rey. of Bodin-Mazon, Extraits, ibid. 1908, col. 689. 

K. DztarzKo, + Das neue Fragment der Περικειρομένη des Menanders,”’ 
Fleck. Jahrb., Suppl. NX VIT (1902), pp. 123 ff. On P. 855 ff. of this 
edition. 

S. Eirrem, «* Zur Samia des Menander,”’ Berl. phil. Woch. 1908, cols. 581 f. 

‘Zu Menanders Epitrepontes,’’ ibid. 1908, cols, 415 f. 
“Zu Menanders Perikeiromene,”’? Woch. f. Klass. phil. 1908, col. 865. 
“Varia,” Nord. Vidskr: fF ilolonW ITT (1909), peo: 

R. Evcis, «* Notes and Suggestions on Lefebvre’s Comedies of Menander,”’ 
Am: Jour: Phil X XTX (1908); pps 19a. 

F. Fiscnei, ‘*Zu Menanders ’Emutperovtes,’’ Hermes XLII (1908), pp. 
311f. 

G. A. GERHARD, “Zu Menanders Perikeiromene,”’ Philol. LATX (1910), 
pp. 10 ff. 

Tu. Gomperz, ‘Zu Menander,’’ Hermes XI (1876), pp. 507 ff. On the 
St. Petersburg fr. 2a, pp. 4 ff. of this edition. 

B.G. Grenrevy and A. 8. Wunr, The Oxyrhynchus Papyri, Vol. 11. Lon- 
don 1899. No. 211 is P..$55 ff. of this edition. 

Lorp Harperron (+ Unus Multorum"), The Lately-Diseovered Frag- 
ments of Menander, edited with English Version, Revised Text, and 
Critical and Explanatory Notes. Oxford 1909, 

ACALAMWARMON, “Sanita Pitthen 2? Berks pine Migebrs Pola. Nur, 215 

Warten, ΠῚ ΤΕΥ, «Menander,? -The Academy LUXXIV (1908), 5, 
416 ff. 

Restorations of Menander. Cambridge 190s, 

W. A. Heimer. « Note on Menander, Epitrepontes. 103 ff.,’" Berl. phil. 
Woch. 1909, col. 509, 

O. Hense, Zum Menanderfund,’” Berl. phil. Woeh. 1908, col. 156. 

«Zu den Epitrepontes des Menander,” ibid. 1908, cols. 255 f., 5198. 
“Zum neuen Menander,”” ibid. 1908, cols. ἘΠῚ 
tev. of van Leeuwen’s first edition, Headlam’s Restorations, and Bodin- 


Mazon’s Extraits, ibid. 1908, cols. 737 ff. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 825 


Rev. of van Leeuwen’s second edition and Robert’s Szenen and Der neue 
Menander, ibid. 1909, cols. 353 ff. 

Rey. of Croiset’s L’Arbitrage, Capps’ Plot of Epitrepontes and Text of 
Epitrepontes, Koérte’s Zwei neue Blatter, and Robert’s Sex fabularum 
reliquiae, ibid. 1909, cols. 1489 ff. 

H. νὰν HERWERDEN, ‘ Ad papyros Graecos,’’ Mnem. XXVIII (1900), pp. 
118 ff. On P. 855 ff. of this edition. 

‘‘Kritische Bemerkungen zu den Lefebvreschen Menanderfragmenten,”’ 
Berl. phil. Woch. 1908, cols. 93 ff. 

‘«Nachtrag zu Menander,’’ ibid. 1908, col. 188. 

‘+ Novae coniecturae in fragmenta Menandrea reperta a Lefeburio,’’ 
Mnem. XXXVI (1908), pp. 342 ff. 

«« Notulae ad alteram Leeuwenii editionem fragmentorum Menandreorum 
recens detectorum,”’ ibid. XXXVI (1908), pp. 418 ff. 

E. Hitver, **Zu Menandros,’’ Fleck. Jahrb. CX V (1877), pp. 339 ff. On 
the St. Petersburg fr. 2a, pp. 94 ff. of this edition. 

A. E. Housman, ‘*On the New Fragments of Menander,”’ Class. Quart. II 
(1908), p. 114. 

A. Humpers, Rev. of Croiset’s L’ Arbitrage, Mus. Belge XIV (1910), Bull. 

bibliogr., pp. 21 ff. 

V. JERNSTEDT, ‘*The Porphyrius Fragments of Attic Comedy ”’ (in Rus- 
sian), Acta Univ. Petrop., hist.-phil., 1891.* The first publication of 
the St. Petersburg fr. 2b, pp. 97 ff. of this edition. 

O. JrrAnt, «© V nové objevenych komoedifch Menandrovych,”’ Listy filol. 
1909, pp. 1 ff.* 

R. Kaver, ‘Zu den neuen Menanderfragmenten,’’ Berl. phil. Woch. 1907, 
col. 1663. 

Tu. Kock, «*‘Menander und der Pseudo-Pessimist,’? Rh. Mus. XXXII 
(1877), pp. 101 ff. On the St. Petersburg fr. 2a, pp. 94 ff. of this 
edition. 

««Zu den Fragmenten der attischen Komiker,”’ ibid. XLVIIT (1893), pp. 
234f. On the St. Petersburg fr. 2b, pp. 97 ff. of this edition. 

A. Korte, ‘ Menander,’’ Arch. f. Papyrusforschung IV (1908), pp. 502 ff. 

««XOPOY,”’ Hermes XLIII (1908), pp. 299 ff. . 

««Ein neuer Klassiker,’’ Deutsche Rundschau 1908, pp. 25 ff. 

«Zu dem neuen Menander-Papyrus in Kairo,”’ Ber. d. saéchs. Gesell. d. 
Wiss. 1908, pp. 87 ff. 

“Zwei neue Blatter der Perikeiromene,” ibid. 1908. pp. 145 ff. First 
publication of P. 344-357 and 646-705 of this edition. 

Rev, of Robert’s Szenen, Deutsche Litteraturztg. 1908, cols. 1706 ff, 


326 MENANDER 


Rev. of van Leeuwen’s second edition, ibid. 1908, cols. 2398 ff. 

Rev. of Robert’s Der neue Menander, ibid. 1908, cols. 2714 ff. 

Rev. of White’s Iambic Trimeter in Menander, ibid. 1909, col. 2071. 

Menandrea ex papyris et membranis vetustissimis. Editio maior, Lipsiae 
MCMX (editio minor, Lipsiae MCMX), containing the Hero, Epitre- 
pontes, Samia, Periceiromene, the fifth Cairo comedy, Georgus, (Citha-: 
ristes), Colax, Coneiazomenae, Phasma, and the St. Petersburg fr. 2, 
pp. 94 ff. of this edition. 

A. KretscuMar, De Menandri reliquiis nuper repertis. Lipsiae 1906. On 
pp. 80 ff., P.855 ff. of this edition, with critical apparatus; on pp. 118 ff. 
the St. Petersburg fr. 2b, pp. 97 ff. of this edition. 

A. G. Lairp, «Notes on the Epitrepontes of Menander,’’ Class. Phil. HI 
(1908), pp. 335 ff. 

J. VAN LEEUWEN J.f., Menandri quatuor fabularum Herois Disceptantium 
Circumtonsae Samiae fragmenta nuper reperta post Gustavum Lefe- 
burium edidit. Lugduni Batavorum MCMVIII. 

Iterum edidit cum prolegomenis et commentariis. ibid. MCMVIII. 
«Ad Menandrum,’’ Mnem. XX XVII (1909), pp. 115 ff. 

Λα Menandri fragmenta nova,” ibid, XX XVIT (1909), pp. 231 ff. 
‘«Conversus in pretium deus,’ Sertum Nabericum, pp. 225 ff. On 5, 392. 

Pu.-E. LeGranp, «Les nouveaux fragments de Ménandre,’’ Rev. des ét. 
ANC. LX ΠΡ: ον (δ) Tp. ok i 

Daos: Tableau de la comédie greeque pendant la periode dite nouvelle. 
Lyon 1910. 
Fr. Leo, « Bemerkungen zu den neuen Bruchsttiecken Menanders,’’ Nachr. 
d. gétt. Gesell. d. Wiss. 1907, pp. 315 ff. 
‘Der neue Menander,’’ Hermes XLII (1908), pp. 120 ff, 
« XOPOY,” ibid. XLITI (1908), pp. 308 ff. 
“Ὁ Die Entdeckung Menanders,’’ Preuss. Jahrb. CXR XAT (1908), pp. 414 ff. 
‘Weitere Bemerkungen zu Menander,’”’? Nachr. d. gott. Gesell, d. Wiss. 
1908, pp: 430 ff. 
«Der Monolog im Drama,’”’ Abh. d. gott. Gesell. d. Wiss. 1908, pp. 79 ff. 
L. Maccart, [HPQ MJENANAPOY?” Berl. phil. Woch, 1909, col. 1131. 
La Periketromene di Menandro, Trani 1909.* 

P. Mazon, Extraits ete. See under Bodin. 

Notes sur Ménandre,”’ Rey, de philol. ἈΝ ΝΤΙ (1908), pp. 68 ff. 

bee NOZZ Ie Sull’”"Hpws di Menandro. Firenze 1908.* 

A. Navek, ἡ Bemerkungen zu Kock Comicorum Atticorum fragmenta,” 
Mélanges gréco-romains VI (1892), pp. 154 ff. On the St, Petersburg 
fr, 2. pp. M4 4F. of this edition, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 327 


J. Nicoie, ‘‘ Notes critiques sur les nouveaux fragments de Ménandre,’ 
Rey. de philol. XXXI (1907), pp. 298 ff. 
H. W. Prescott, «The new Fragments of Menander,’’ Class. Phil. II 
(1908), pp. 199 ff. 
KeL.tey Rees, ‘«‘The Three Actor Rule in Menander,’’ Class. Phil. V 
(1910), pp. 291 ff. 
A. J. Reryacn, ‘‘ Nouvelles découvertes papyrologiques,’’ Rev. des idées 
1908, pp. 16 ff.* 
Tu. Rernacu, “Zur Perikeiromene von Menander,’”’ Hermes XLIV (1909), 
pp. 63 ff. 
Herpert Ricnarps, ‘‘Emendation of the new Menander Fragments,’’ 
Class. Rev. XXII (1908), p. 48. 
Rey. of van Leeuwen’s first edition and of Headlam’s Restorations, ibid. 
XXII (1908), pp. 127 ff. 
Rey. of Lefebvre’s edition, Class. Quart. IT (1908), pp. 132 ff. 
C. Rosert, Szenen aus Menanders Komédien. Berlin 1908. 
Der neue Menander. Bemerkungen zur Rekonstruktion der Stiicke nebst 
dem Text in der Seitenverteilungen der Handschrift. Berlin 1908. 
Menandri sex fabularum Herois Samiae Disceptantium Circumtonsae 
Agricolae Adulatoris reliquiae in usum scholarum suarum recensuit. 
Halis Saxonum MDCCCCVIII. 
‘‘Bemerkungen zur Perikeiromene des Menanders,’’ Hermes XLIV 
(1909), pp. 260 ff. 
Kk. Fr. W. Scumipt, Rev. of van Leeuwen’s second edition, Woch. f. klass. 
Phil. 1909, cols. 449 ff. 
Rey. of Robert’s Szenen and Der neue Menander, ibid. 1909, cols. 799 ff. 
Rev. of Bodin-Mazon’s Extraits and Menozzi’s Sull’"Hpas, ibid. 1909, 
cols. 827 ff. 
Rey. of Korte’s Zu dem neuen Menander-Papyrus and Zwei neue Blatter, 
ibid. 1909, cols. 1049 ff. 
‘‘Menanders Perikeiromene,” Hermes LX (1909), pp. 403 ff. 
“Zu Menander,” ibid. LATV (1909), pp. 477 ff. 
P. E. SonneBURG, εὐ Menandros im Licht der neuen Funde,”’ Humanisti- 
sches Gymnasium 1908. 
Ε. L. pe Srerant, ‘‘Zu Menanders Epitrepontes,” Berl. phil. Woch. 1910, 
col. 476. 
S.Supuavs, Rey. of Lefebvre’s edition, Berl. phil. Woch. 1908, cols. 321 ff. 
‘¢ Die Perikeiromene,” Rh. Mus. LXTIT (1908), pp. 283 ff. 
“Die Kampf um die Perikeiromene,” ibid. LATV (1909), pp. 412 ff, 
‘*Menandreum,” Berl. phil, Woch. 1909, col, 863, 


328 MENANDER 


Menandri reliquiae nuper repertae. Bonn 1909. Contains the four 
Cairo plays, the Georgus, and the Colax. 

N. Terzacut, “1 nuovi frammenti di Menandro,” Atene e Roma XI 
(1908), cols. 100 ff. 

B. WARNECKE, ‘* Menandrea,” Zeitschr. d. russ. Ministerium ἃ. Volksauf- 
klarung 1909, pp. 61 ff.* 

‘«Heros Menandri,”” Hermes (Russian) 1909, pp. 124 ff.* 
‘New Comedies of Menander” (in Russian). Kazan 1909.* 

H. Wein, Rev. of Grenfell-Hunt, Oxyrhynchus Papyri I], Jour. des say. 
1900, p. 48 ff. On P. 855 ff. of this edition. 

“Deux comédies de Ménandre,” in Etudes sur lantiquité grecque, 
pp. 276 ff. On P. 855 ff. of this edition. ᾿ - 

«*Remarques sur les nouveaux fragments de Ménandre,” Jour. des sav. 
1908, pp. 80 ff. 

Joun Wittrams Wuite, ‘*The Iambic Trimeter in Menander,” Class. 
Phil. IV (1909), pp. 139 ff. 

U. von WitaAmMowirz-MOLLENDORFF, ‘‘ Der Pessimist des Menandros,”’ 
Hermes XI (1876), pp. 498 ff. On the St. Petersburg fr. 2a, pp. 94 ff. 
of this edition. 

Rev. of Grenfell-Hunt, Oxyrhynchus Papyri IT, Gott. gel. Anz. 1900, 
pp. 30 ff. On P. 855 ff. of this edition. 

«¢Nene Menanderfunde,” Deutsche Litteraturztg. 1907, cols. 314 ff. Re- 
view of Lefebvre’s edition. 

Rey. of van Leeuwen’s first edition, ibid. 1908, cols. 863 f. 

«Zum Menander von Kairo,” Ber. d. preuss. Akad. ἃ. Wiss. 1907, 
pp. 360 ff. 

‘Der Menander von Kairo,” N. Jahrb. f. d. klass. Alt. X-XT (1908), 
pp. “1 ff. 

ΕΟ. Wrient, Studies in Menander. Princeton 1910. 

G. Zererect, Menander’s Samia (in Russian). St. Petersburg 1909.* 


ADDENDA 


P.32, note: On the curiosity of the cook about domestic matters see 
now Legrand, Daos, p. 127, and cf. his reference to Themistius Or. 21. 272 c. 


P. 54, ll. 4 ff.: A more exact account of the history of the St. Petersburg 
fragments, based on a letter of Jernstedt to Kaibel, is given by Kérte on 
p. xlviii of his edition. The parchment strips, the verso still glued to the 
binding, were first discovered by Tischendorf in 1844 in the monastery of 
St. Catharine on Mt. Sinai. The copies of la and 2a which Cobet pub- 
lished were made by Tischendorf at this time. In 1855 Uspenski redis- 
covered the fragments, removed them from the binding, and took them 
to Russia. 


P.36, 11.8 ff.: Rieci has since discovered that M joins NT; see the 
statement in the Preface and οἵ. Critical Appendix, p.289. The hypothe- 
sis here presented regarding the relation of fr. 600 to M is therefore 
untenable. 


P.38, ll. 4 ff.: Although M in its present position (see pp. 90 ff.) cannot 
be used as evidence for the lost initial scenes, the view here expressed 
seems none the less probable. 

P.40, 11.13 ff.: The course of the action in the fifth and sixth scenes of 
the fourth act is somewhat more definitely conceived in the notes, pp. 103 ff., 
owing, it is hoped, to a truer understanding of the technique of the recog- 
nition scene, vv. 638 ff. 


829 











University of California 
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
Return this material to the library 
fr hich it was borrowed. 





Ul JAN 20 1994 


JAN 107994 





UNIV [reponse 


« 
J 


LIBRARY. 





Wh 11}}}}} 


OO1-354° 312: Ὁ 





University of California 
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
Return this material to the library 





Ol JAN 2¢ 1004 


ἴῃ = JAN 20 1994 
RECA PP Raga 


JAN 101994 





UNIV leprae: os 


LIBRARY 





UNM 


001 354 312 9 





